Honda Jazz Fit 2007 To 2014 Workshop Manual PDF

General Information
Specifications
Standards and Service Limits
Engine
Trans/Driveline
Steering
Suspension
Brakes
HVAC
Design Specification
Body Dimentions
Maintenance Schedule
Lubricants and Fluids
Maintenance
Engine
Charging System
Cooling System
Fan Controls
Cruise Control System
Cylinder Head Assembly
Camshaft
Rocker Arm Assembly
Timing/Cam Chain
Valves
VTEC System
Engine Assembly and Mounts
Engine Assembly
Engine Mounts
Engine Block Assembly
Connecting Rods
Crankshaft
Pistons
Exhaust System
Ignition System
Lubrication System
Low Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Components
Starting System
Fuel and Emissions
Catalytic Converter System
EVAP Control System
EGR System
Electronic Throttle Control System
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Injection System (PGM-FI)
Idle Control System
Intake Air System
PCV System
Trans/Driveline
Automatic Transaxle
A/T Assembly
A/T Electronic Control System
A/T Gear Position Indicator System
A/T Hydraulic Controls
A/T Countershaft Assembly
A/T Mainshaft Assembly
A/T Secondary Shaft Assembly
A/T Gearshift Mechanism
A/T Differential
A/T Idler Gear Shaft Assembly
Interlock System
Torque Converter
Valve Bodies
Driveshafts
Front Driveshaft Assembly
Intermediate Shaft Assembly
Manual Transaxle
Clutch
M/T Assembly
M/T Countershaft Assembly
M/T Gearshift Mechanism
M/T Mainshaft Assembly
M/T Differential
Synchro Assemblies
Steering
EPS Components
Suspension
Front Suspension
Rear Suspension
Wheels and Tires
Brakes
ABS-TCS Components
Conventional Brake Components
Brake System indicator Components
VSA System (includes ABS, TCS)
Parking Brake
HVAC
A/C
A/C Compressor
A/C Condenser
Evaporator-Heater Unit
Automatic Climate Control
Heating/Ventilation
Blower Unit
Evaporator-Heater Unit
Rear Window Defogger
Body
Audio/Entertainment
Communication
Cigarette Lighter
Doors
Front Doors
Rear Doors
Exterior
Bumpers
Fenders
Fuel Fill Door
Fuel Fill Door Opener
Hood
Hood Opener
Openers
Trim
Tailgate
Tailgate Opnener
Frame
Subframes
Gauges
Horns
Interior
Console
Dashboard
Trim
Indicators
Lights-on Reminder
Multi-information Display
Safety Indicator System
Lights, Exterior
Automatic Lighting Control
Back-up Lights
Brake Lights
Front Fog Lights
Headlights
Headlight Leveling System
Lights-on Reminder
Taillights
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights
Lights, Interior
Cargo Area Light
Entry Light Control System
Mirrors
Outside Power Mirros
Multiplex Integrated Control System (MICS)
Seats
Front Seats
Rear Seat
Seat Heaters
Security/Keyless Entry/Locks
Immobilizer System
Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System
Sunshade
Wiring System
Accessory Power Sockets
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Ground Distribution
Power Distribution
Wire Harnesses
Wiper/Washer
Windows
Power Windows
Driving Support & Restraints
Seat Belts
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting
ABS Control Unit
Automatic Lighting/ Rain Sensor
Climate Control Unit
ECM
EPS Control Unit
Gauge Control Module
Hands Free Telephone Control Unit
Headlight Leveling Control Unit
Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit
MICU (Multiplex Integrated Control Unit)
PCM
SRS Unit
VSA Control Unit
Wiring Diagrams
Lift and Support Points
NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components such as suspension from the rear of the vehicle, first support the
front of the vehicle with tall safety stands. When substantial weight is removed from the rear of the vehicle, the center of
gravity can change, causing the vehicle to tip forward on the lift.
Vehicle Lift
1. Position the lift blocks (A), under the vehicle's front support points (B) and rear support points (C).
2. Raise the lift a few inches, and rock the vehicle gently to be sure it is firmly supported.
3. Raise the lift to its full height, and inspect the vehicle support points for solid contact with the lift blocks.
Safety Stands
To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same support points (B and C) as for a vehicle lift. Always use safety
stands when working on or under any vehicle that is supported only by a jack.
Floor Jack
1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the shift lever in
reverse for manual transmission, or P for automatic transmission.
2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.
3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking bracket (A) or the rear jacking bracket (B). Center the jacking bracket
on the jack lift platform (C), and jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands under it.
4. Position the safety stands under the support points, and adjust them so the vehicle is level.
5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.
Towing
If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another vehicle with just a Front:
rope or chain. It is very dangerous.
Emergency Towing
There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle.
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator loads the vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way of transporting the
vehicle.
To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is equipped with front towing hook (A), front tie down hook slots (B), rear
towing hook (C), and the rear tie down hook slots (D).
The towing hook can be used with a winch to pull the vehicle onto the truck, and the tie down hook slots can be used to
secure the vehicle to the truck.
NOTE: The tie down hook slots use rubber plugs (E) to cover the openings.
Towing Hook Installation
The detachable towing hook is for towing very short distance, such as freeing the car. The hook mounts to the anchor in
the front and rear bumper. Rear:
To avoid damage to the vehicle, use the towing hook for straight flat ground towing only. Do not tow on an angle.
The tow hook should not be used to tow the vehicle onto a flat-bed. Do not use it as a tie down.
1. Remove the cover (A) from the bumper. Front bumper:

2. Remove the towing hook placed behind a cover under the cargo area.
3. Screw in the towing hook (B), and tighten it securely by hand.
Wheel Lift Equipment − The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the tyres (front or rear) and lifts them off the
ground. The other two wheels remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way of towing the vehicle.
Sling-type Equipment − The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around parts of the Rear bumper:
frame or suspension, and the cables lift that end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's suspension and body can be
seriously damaged if this method of towing is attempted. This method of towing the vehicle is unacceptable.
If the vehicle cannot be transported by a flat-bed, it should be towed with the front wheels off the ground. If the vehicle is
damaged, and must be towed with the front wheels on the ground, or with all four wheels on the ground, do this:
Manual Transmission
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission in Neutral.
Leave the ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I) so the steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure all accessories are turned off to minimize battery current draw.
Automatic Transmission
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
Shift to D, then N.
Turn off the engine.
Leave the ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I) so the steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure all accessories are turned off to minimize battery current draw.
It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 80 km (50 miles), and keep the vehicle speed below 55 km/h (35 mph).
Improper towing preparation will damage the transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If you cannot shift
the transmission or start the engine (automatic transmission), the vehicle must be transported on a flat-bed.
Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle's weight.
Charging System Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX UNDER−DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A) T−9 No. 60 (50 A) T1 2 BAT
WHT WHT
IG1
ELD
5
W1
YEL
Y (ELD) 3 No. 22 No. 12

(7.5 A) (10 A)
Y (ELD) 2 Y (ELD) 1 Q8 B17
LT BLU
PNK BLK LT BLU YEL
LT BLU
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32
30
G501 29 CPU
WHT RED DRIVER
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
ECM/PCM A3 A4
CANH CANL
5V
A24 ELD
ALTF ALTL ALTC
B47 B46 B45

BLK WHT/RED WHT/BLU WHT/GRN BLK/YEL
B 4 3 2 1
FR L C IG
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
RECTIFIER
ALTERNATOR
Charging system indicator does not come on with the ignition switch in ON (II)
Diagnostic procedure
1. Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit.
Charging system indicator stays on
1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs.
2. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner.
3. Check for a broken drive belt.
Battery discharged
1. Check for a poor connection at the battery terminal.
2. Test the battery.
5. Check for excessive parasitic electrical current draw.
6. Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit.
Battery overcharged
Charging System Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for
Charging system indicator does not Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit.
come on with the ignition switch in
ON (II)
Charging system indicator stays on 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs.
Battery discharged 1. Check for a poor connection at the battery terminal.
5. Check for excessive parasitic electrical current draw.
Battery overcharged 1. Test the battery.
Alternator Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure.
2. Remove the drive belt.
3. Remove the intake manifold.
4. Disconnect the alternator connector (A) and BLK wire (B), then remove the harness clamp (C) from the alternator.
5. Remove the alternator.
Installation
1. Install the alternator.
2. Connect the alternator connector (A) and BLK wire (B), then install the harness clamp (C) to the alternator.
3. Install the intake manifold.
4. Install the drive belt.
5. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure.
Alternator Overhaul
Exploded View
Special Tools Required
Driver handle, 15 x 135L
07749-0010000
Bearing driver attachment, 42 x 47 mm

07746-0010300
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure.
Alternator Disassembly
1. Test the alternator and regulator before you remove them.
2. Remove the alternator.
3. Remove the four through bolts.
4. Heat the rear bearing seat with a heat gun for about 5 minutes (50−60 °C, 129−140 °F).
5. Separate the rear housing from the drive end housing by inserting a flat-tip screwdriver into the openings and prying
them apart.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the stator with the tip of the screwdriver.
6. Separate the rear housing (A) and drive end housing (B) with the stator (C) attached to the rear housing.
7. If you are not replacing the front bearing and/or rear bearing, go to Step 15 . Clamp the rotor in a soft-jawed vise,
then remove the pulley locknut.
8. Remove the rotor.

9. Inspect the rotor shaft for scoring, and inspect the bearing journal surface in the drive end housing for seizure
marks.
If either the rotor or drive end housing is damaged, replace the alternator.
If both the rotor and the drive end housing are OK, go to Step 10 .
10. Remove the rear bearing using the puller as shown.
11. Use a hand press to install the new rear bearing. Apply pressure only on the inner race to avoid damaging the
bearing.
12. Remove the front bearing retainer plate.
13. Support the drive end housing in a vise, and drive out the front bearing with a brass drift and hammer.
14. With a hammer and the special tools, install a new front bearing in the drive end housing.
15. Remove the stator.
16. Remove the terminal insulator (A) and harness bracket (B).
17. Remove the voltage regulator/brush holder assembly (A) and the rectifier (B).
18. Check for continuity in each direction, between the B terminal (A) and P terminals (B), and between the E terminal Stator side
(C) and P terminals (B) of each diode pair. All diodes should have continuity in only one direction. Because the
rectifier diodes are designed to allow current to pass in one direction, and the rectifier is made up of six diodes (six
pairs), you must test each diode in both directions for continuity with an ohmmeter that has diode checking
capability: a total of 24 checks.
If any diode failed, replace the rectifier assembly. (Diodes are not available separately.)
If all the diodes are OK, go to Step 19 .
Rear housing side
Alternator Brush Inspection
19. Measure the length of both brushes with a vernier caliper.
If either brush is shorter than the service limit, replace the rear housing assembly.
If brush length is OK, go to Step 20 .
Alternator Brush Length
Standard (New): 23 mm (0.91 in.)

Service Limit: 18 mm (0.71 in.)
20. Unsolder the brush leads from the voltage regulator/brush holder assembly with a 100 W soldering iron (A), then
replace the brushes.
Rotor Slip Ring Test

21. Check for continuity between the slip rings (A).
If there is continuity, go to Step 22 .
If there is no continuity, replace the rotor assembly.
22. Check for continuity between each slip ring (A) and the rotor (B) and the rotor shaft (C).
If there is no continuity, replace the rear housing assembly, go to Step 23 .
If there is continuity, replace the rotor assembly.
Stator Test
23. Check that there is continuity between each leads (A).
If there is no continuity, replace the stator.
24. Check for continuity between each lead and the coil core (B).
If there is no continuity, go to Step 25 .
If there is continuity, replace the stator.
Alternator Reassembly
25. If you removed the pulley, put the rotor in the drive end housing, then tighten its locknut to 110 N·m (11.2 kgf·m,
81.0 lbf·ft).
26. Remove any grease or any oil from the slip rings.
27. Install the voltage regulator/brush holder assembly and rectifier on the rear housing.
28. Install the stator on the rear housing.
29. Push the brushes (A) in, then insert a pin or drill bit (B) (about 1.8 mm (0.07 in.) diameter) to hold them there.
30. Heat the rear bearing seat with a heat gun for about 5 minutes (50−60 °C, 129−140 °F).
31. Put the rear housing assembly (A) and drive end housing/rotor assembly (B) together, tighten the four through bolts
(C).
32. Pull put the pin.

33. After assembling the alternator, turn the pulley by hand to make sure the rotor turns smoothly and without noise.
34. Install the alternator and drive belt.
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Be sure the battery connections are good, and that the battery is sufficiently charged and in good condition.
2. Hook up the following equipment:
Ammeter, 0−400 A
Voltmeter, 0−20 V (accurate within 0.1 V)
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm (min −1 ) with no load (in P or N (A/T model) or neutral (M/T model)),
until the radiator fan comes on then let it idle.
4. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm (min −1 ) and hold it there.
5. Turn the headlights (high beam) on, and measure the voltage at the alternator terminal.
Is the voltage within 13.9−15.1 V?
YES - Go to Step 6 .
NO - Replace the alternator, or repair the alternator. ■
6. Read the amperage at 13.5 V.
NOTE: Adjust the voltage by turning the blower motor, rear window defogger, brake lights and etc. on.
Is the amperage 60 A or more?
YES - The charging system is OK. Go to alternator control circuit troubleshooting. ■
NO - Replace the alternator, or repair the alternator. ■
Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control
module (PCM). If it doesn't communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
4. Check for DTCs. If a DTC is present, diagnose and repair the cause before continuing with this test.
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the alternator.
6. Start the engine, and turn on the headlights to high beam.
7. Measure the voltage between alternator 4P connector terminal No. 2 and the positive terminal of the battery.
Is there 1 V or less?
NO - Go to Step 8 .
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the ECM/PCM from damage.
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P).
10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal B45 and body ground.
Is there continuity?
YES - Repair short in the wire between the alternator and the ECM/PCM.■
NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original
ECM/PCM. ■
13. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal B45 and alternator 4P connector terminal No. 2.
YES - Replace the alternator, or repair the alternator. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the alternator and the ECM/PCM.■
Charging System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
Does the charging system indicator come on?
NO - Go to Step 14 .
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (min −1 ) for 1 minute.
Does the charging system indicator go off?
YES - Charging system indicator circuit is OK. Go to the alternator and regulator circuit troubleshooting. ■
NO - Go to Step 3 .
3. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function procedure.
Does the charging system indicator flash?
NO - Replace the gauge control module .■
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.
NOTE: The charging system indicator may come on and then go off.
Does the charging system indicator go off?
NO - Go to Step 7 .
YES - Repair short in the wire between the alternator and the ECM/PCM (B46).■
ECM/PCM. ■
14. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function procedure.
Does the charging system indicator flash?
NO - Replace the gauge control module. ■
17. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
Does the charging system indicator come on?
NO - Disconnect the jumper wire, then go to Step 19 .
19. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
21. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't communicate, troubleshoot the
DLC circuit.
24. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal B46 and alternator 4P connector terminal No. 3.
YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then
ECM/PCM. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the alternator and the ECM/PCM.■
Drive Belt Inspection
1. Inspect the belt for cracks or damage. If the belt is cracked or damaged, replace it.
2. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator's pointer (A) is within the standard range (B) as shown. If it is out
of the standard range, replace the drive belt.
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Removal/Installation
2. Remove the auto-tensioner
3. Install the auto-tensioner in the reverse order of removal.
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Inspection
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure to turn the A/C switch off. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator's pointer (A). Start the engine then check the position again with
the engine idling. If the position of the indicator moves or fluctuates very much, replace the auto-tensioner.
3. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pulley. If you hear abnormal noise, replace the tensioner pulley.
5. Move the auto-tensioner within its limit with a wrench in the direction shown. Check that the tensioner moves
smoothly and without any abnormal noise. If the tensioner does not move smoothly or if you hear abnormal noise,
replace the auto-tensioner.
6. Remove the auto-tensioner.
7. Clamp the auto-tensioner (A) by using two 8 mm bolts (B) and a vise (C) as shown. Do not clamp the auto-
tensioner itself.
8. Set the torque wrench (D) on the pulley bolt, and align it as shown.
9. Align the indicator (E) on the tensioner base with Max. belt position mark (F) on the tensioner arm by using the
torque wrench, and measure the torque. If the torque value is out of specification, replace the auto-tensioner.
NOTE: If the indicator exceeds the Max. belt position mark, recheck the torque.
Auto-tensioner Spring Torque:
20.6−25.2 N·m (2.10−2.25 kgf·m, 15.2−18.6 lbf·ft)
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Pulley Replacement
1. Remove the auto-tensioner.
2. Remove the tensioner pulley.
3. Install the auto-tensioner in the reverse order of removal.
Coolant Check
1. Look at the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. Make sure it is between the MAX mark (A) and MIN mark (B).
2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it up to the MAX mark,
then inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Radiator Test
1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with engine coolant to the
top of the filler neck.
2. Attach the pressure tester (A) (commercially available) to the radiator. Use a small adapter H-901122-09 (B)
(commercially available) to attach the pressure tester.
3. Apply a pressure of 93−123 kPa (0.95−1.25 kgf/cm 2 , 14−18 psi).

4. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in pressure.
5. Remove the tester, and reinstall the radiator cap.
6. Check for engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oil.
Radiator Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Remove the right side splash shield.
3. Remove the front bumper.
4. Disconnect the fan motor connectors (A), the hood latch switch connector (B), and the horn connector (C), then RHD model
remove the ground cable (D) and the harness clamps (E).
LHD model
5. Remove the bulkhead mounting bolts, and remove the hood opener cable clamp (A), then remove the bulkhead (B).
6. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height.
7. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 2 connector (A), and remove the A/C compressor clutch
connector (B) from the clamp.
8. Remove the harness clamps (C).
9. Disconnect the lower radiator hose (A).

10. With A/T model: Remove the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) cooler hoses (B), then plug the hose and line.
11. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
12. Remove the upper radiator hose.
13. Pull up the radiator (A), then remove the coolant reservoir (B), the radiator fan shroud assembly (C), the A/C
condenser fan shroud assembly (D), the radiator cap (E), the ETC sensor 2 (F), and the drain plug (G).
14. Reassemble the radiator with new O-rings (H).
15. Install the radiator. Make sure the lower cushions (I) are set securely.
16. Install the upper radiator hose.
18. Install the lower radiator hose (A).

19. With A/T model: Install the ATF cooler hoses (B).
20. Connect the ECT sensor 2 connector (A), and install the A/C compressor clutch connector (B) to the clamp.
21. Install the harness clamps (C).
23. Install the hood opener cable clamp (A), then install the bulkhead (B).
24. Apply body paint to the bulkhead mounting bolts.
25. Connect the fan motor connectors (A), the hood latch switch connector (B), and the horn connector (C), then install RHD model
the ground cable (D) and the harness clamps (E).
26. Install the front bumper.
LHD model
27. Install the right side splash shield.

28. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed the air from the cooling system with the heater valve open.
29. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
Radiator Cap Test
1. Remove the radiator cap (A), wet the seal with engine coolant, then install it on the pressure tester (B)
(commercially available). Use a small adapter H-901122-09 (C) (commercially available) to install the radiator cap.
2. Apply a pressure of 93−123 kPa (0.95−1.25 kgf/cm 2 , 14−18 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure.
4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.
Connecting Pipe Replacement
2. Remove the thermostat housing.
3. Remove the connecting pipe (A).
4. Install the connecting pipe with a new O-ring (B).
5. Install the thermostat housing.
Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan Motor Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan motor and condenser fan motor.
2. Test the motor by connecting battery power to No. 2 terminal and ground to No. 1 terminal.
3. If the motor fails to run, or does not run smoothly, replace it.
Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan, Motor, and Shroud Removal and Installation
Removal
4. Remove the A/C compressor clutch connector (A) from the clamp, then remove the harness clamps (B).
6. Disconnect the fan motor connectors (A), the hood latch switch connector (B), and the horn connector (C), then RHD model
remove the ground cable (D) and the harness clamps (E).
LHD model
7. Remove the bulkhead mounting bolts, and remove the hood opener cable clamp (A), then remove the bulkhead (B).
8. Remove the coolant reservoir (A).

9. Remove the condenser fan shroud assembly (B), then remove the radiator fan shroud assembly (C) from condenser
fan shroud side.
10. Disassemble the fan shrouds.
Installation
1. Assemble the fan shrouds.
2. Install the radiator fan shroud assembly (A), then install the condenser fan shroud assembly (B).
3. Install the coolant reservoir (C).
4. Install the hood opener cable clamp (A), then install the bulkhead (B).
5. Apply body paint to the bulkhead mounting bolts.
6. Connect the fan motor connectors (A), the hood latch switch connector (B), and the horn connector (C), then install RHD model
the ground cable (D) and the harness clamps (E).
LHD model
8. Install the A/C compressor clutch connector (A) to the clamp, then install the harness clamps (B).
10. Install the front bumper.

Thermostat Test
Replace the thermostat if it is open at room temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water. Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of the hot
container.
2. Heat the water, and check the temperature with a thermometer. Check the temperature where the thermostat first
opens, and where it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is fully open.
Standard Thermostat
Lift Height: Above 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Starts Opening: 76−80 °C (169−176 °F)
Fully Open: 90 °C (194 °F)
Thermostat Replacement
2. Remove the thermostat cover (A), then remove the thermostat (B).
3. Install the new rubber seal (C) onto the thermostat, then install the thermostat with the pin (D) up, and install the
thermostat cover.
4. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed the air from the cooling system.
Thermostat Housing Removal and Installation
Removal
2. Remove the coolant reservoir.
3. Remove the harness holder mounting bolt, then remove the harness holder (A) from the bracket.
4. Disconnect the lower radiator hose (A), the heater hose (B), and the water bypass hoses (C).
5. Remove the thermostat housing assembly (D), then remove the thermostat (E).
Installation
1. Install the new rubber seal (A) onto the thermostat, then install the thermostat (B) with pin (C) up, and install the
thermostat cover (D).
2. Install the thermostat housing Assembly (E) with new O-ring (F).
3. Install the lower radiator hose (G), the heater hose (H), and the water bypass hoses (I).
4. Install the harness holder (A).
5. Install the coolant reservoir.

6. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed the air from the cooling system.
Water Outlet Removal and Installation
Removal
2. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly.
3. Remove the heater hose clamp bracket mounting bolt (A) and the harness holder mounting bolt (B).
4. Disconnect the water bypass hose (C), then remove the harness holder (D) from the bracket.
5. Disconnect the upper radiator hose (A) and the water bypass hose (B).
6. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1 connector, then remove the water outlet.
7. Remove the ECT sensor 1 (A) and the water bypass hose (B).
Installation
1. Install the ECT sensor 1 (A) with new O-ring (B).
2. Install the water bypass hose (C).
3. Remove the all of the old liquid gasket from the water outlet mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes.
4. Clean and dry the water outlet mating surfaces.
5. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08C70-K0234M, 08C70-K0334M, or 08C70-X0331S) to the cylinder head mating surface of
the water outlet and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
NOTE:
Apply liquid gasket about 2.5 mm (0.098 in.) diameter bead along the broken line (A).
Do not install components if 5 minutes or more have passed after applying the liquid gasket. Instead, remove
the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket.
6. Install the water outlet.

NOTE:
Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil.
Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the chain case.
7. Install the upper radiator hose (A) and the heater hose (B).
8. Install the harness holder (A), then tighten the harness holder mounting bolt (B) and the heater hose clamp bracket
mounting bolt (C).
9. Install the water bypass hose (D).
11. Install the air cleaner housing assembly.
Water Pump Replacement
2. Remove the right front wheel.
4. Loosen the water pump pulley mounting bolts.
6. Remove the water pump pulley.
7. Remove the water pump (A) by removing the five bolts.

8. Inspect, and clean the O-ring groove and the mating surface of the engine block.
9. Install the water pump with a new O-ring (B) in the reverse order of removal.
11. Install the water pump pulley.
13. Tighten the water pump pulley mounting bolts.
15. Install the right front wheel.
Water Pump Inspection
6. Turn the water pump counterclockwise, and make sure that it turns freely. If it doesn't, replace the water pump.
NOTE: When you check the water pump, you may see a small amount of ‘‘weeping'' from the bleed holes (A). This
is normal.
Cooling Fan Controls Component Location Index
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD

RELAY BOX (RHD model) RELAY BOX (LHD model)
CONDENSER FAN
RELAY
Test,
CONDENSER FAN RELAY
Test, RADIATOR FAN RELAY
Test,
RADIATOR FAN RELAY
Test,
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR 1
Replacement,
A/C CONDENSER FAN ASSEMBLY ENGINE COOLANT RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY

Motor Test, TEMPERATURE (ECT) Motor Test,
SENSOR 2
Replacement,
Cooling Fan Controls Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TERMINAL
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A) T−9 No. 60 (50 A) T1 2 BAT
WHT WHT
IG2
No. 30 (30 A) No. 47 (30 A)
3
No. 10 (7.5 A) S1
ORN
RHD model: A22 RHD model: A33 RHD model: A36

LHD model: B1 LHD model: B12 LHD model: B15
LT BLU RHD model: BRN RED

AUXILIARY
LHD model: PUR UNDER−HOOD
RELAY BOX
RHD model: 2
LHD model: 1 4 4 2
RADIATOR CONDENSER
FAN RELAY FAN RELAY
RHD model: 1 3 3 1
LHD model: 2
RED GRN BLU
2 2
RADIATOR CONDENSER
FAN MOTOR FAN MOTOR
1 1
BLK BLK
G202 G202
A6 ECM/PCM
FANC
5V
ECT1 SG2 SG6 ECT2
B2 B3 A1 A34
RED/WHT GRN/YEL YEL LT GRN
1 2 1 2
ENGINE COOLANT ENGINE COOLANT

TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR 1 (ECT) SENSOR 2
Engine overheats
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Check the coolant level.
2. Check for the coolant leakage (from gaskets, hoses, O-rings, etc.).
3. Check for dirt, leaves, or insects on radiator and condenser.
6. Check for deteriorated coolant.
7. Check for damaged or deformed fan shroud.
8. Inspect the fan motors or fan relays.
9. Check the radiator cap.
10. Check the thermostat.
11. Inspect the water pump.
12. Check for plugged or deteriorated radiator hoses.
13. Check for plugged heater core of hoses.
14. Check for a damaged cylinder head gasket.
The radiator fan does not run when the engine coolant temperature is above 93 °C (199 °F)
1. Radiator fan circuit troubleshooting.
Also check for
Cleanliness and tightness of all connectors
The A/C condenser fan does not run when the engine coolant temperature is above 93 °C (199 °F)
1. A/C condenser fan circuit troubleshooting.
Also check for
Both the radiator fan and the A/C condenser fan does not run when the engine coolant temperature is above 93 °C
(199 °F)
1. Radiator fan and A/C condenser fan circuit troubleshooting.
Also check for
The radiator fan run with the ignition switch to ON (II), and the engine coolant temperature below 90 °C (194 °F)
1. Remove the radiator fan relay.
Also check for
The A/C condenser fan run with the ignition switch to ON (II), and the engine coolant temperature below 90 °C (194
°F)
1. Remove the condenser fan relay.
Also check for
Both the radiator fan and the A/C condenser fan run with the ignition switch to ON (II), and the engine coolant
temperature below 90 °C (194 °F)
1. Check for a short in the wire between the radiator fan 4P socket terminal No. 3 and ECM/PCM connector terminal A6.
Also check for
Cooling Fan Controls Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom Diagnostic Procedure Also check for
Engine overheats 1. Check the coolant level.
2. Check for the coolant leakage (from gaskets, hoses, O-rings, etc.).
3. Check for dirt, leaves, or insects on radiator and condenser.
6. Check for deteriorated coolant.
7. Check for damaged or deformed fan shroud.
8. Inspect the fan motors or fan relays.
9. Check the radiator cap.
10. Check the thermostat.
11. Inspect the water pump.
12. Check for plugged or deteriorated radiator hoses.
13. Check for plugged heater core of hoses.
14. Check for a damaged cylinder head gasket.
The radiator fan does not run when the engine Radiator fan circuit troubleshooting. Cleanliness and tightness of
coolant temperature is above 93 °C (199 °F) all connectors
The A/C condenser fan does not run when the A/C condenser fan circuit troubleshooting. Cleanliness and tightness of
engine coolant temperature is above 93 °C (199 all connectors
°F)
Both the radiator fan and the A/C condenser fan Radiator fan and A/C condenser fan circuit troubleshooting. Cleanliness and tightness of
does not run when the engine coolant all connectors
temperature is above 93 °C (199 °F)
The radiator fan run with the ignition switch to Remove the radiator fan relay. Cleanliness and tightness of
ON (II), and the engine coolant temperature all connectors
below 90 °C (194 °F)
The A/C condenser fan run with the ignition Remove the condenser fan relay. Cleanliness and tightness of
switch to ON (II), and the engine coolant all connectors
temperature below 90 °C (194 °F)
Both the radiator fan and the A/C condenser fan Check for a short in the wire between the radiator fan 4P socket terminal Cleanliness and tightness of
run with the ignition switch to ON (II), and the No. 3 and ECM/PCM connector terminal A6. all connectors
engine coolant temperature below 90 °C (194 °F)
Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
NO - Replace the fuse and recheck.■
2. Remove the radiator fan relay.
4. Measure the voltage between the radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 4 and body ground.
Is there battery voltage?
NO - Repair open in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the radiator fan relay 4P socket
terminal No. 4.■
10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
11. Check for continuity between the radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and ECM/PCM connector terminal A6.
recheck. If the symptom goes away with a known good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and ECM/PCM connector
terminal A6.■
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 30 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
2. Remove the radiator fan relay, and test the radiator fan relay.
Is the relay OK?
YES - RHD model: Go to Step 3 .
LHD model: Go to Step 6 .
NO - Replace the radiator fan relay and recheck.■
terminal No. 2.■
4. Disconnect the radiator fan motor 2P connector.
5. Check for continuity between the radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and the radiator fan motor 2P
connector terminal No. 2.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and the radiator fan motor
2P connector terminal No. 2.■
terminal No. 1.■
7. Disconnect the radiator fan motor 2P connector.
8. Check for continuity between the radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and the radiator fan motor 2P
NO - Repair open in the wire between the radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and the radiator fan motor
2P connector terminal No. 2.■
9. Check for continuity between the radiator fan motor 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
YES - Replace the radiator fan motor. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the radiator fan motor 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. If
the wire is OK, check for a poor ground at G202.■
Cruise Control Combination Switch Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures, in
the SRS before doing repairs or service.
1. Remove the driver's airbag.
2. Disconnect the 20P connector from the cable reel.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.
If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure occurred on the cruise control input test,
check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit.
If there is no continuity in one or more positions, replace the switch.
4. Check for continuity between the terminals in according to the table.

If there is continuity, and it matches the table, check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit.
If there is no continuity in one or more positions, replace the switch.
Engine Compression Inspection
NOTE: After this inspection, you must reset the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM), otherwise
the ECM/PCM will continue to stop the injectors from functioning. Select ECM/PCM reset using the Honda Diagnostic
System (HDS).
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on).
3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
6. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS STOP function on the HDS.
7. Remove the four ignition coils.
8. Remove the four spark plugs.
9. Attach the compression gauge to the spark plug hole.
10. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with the starter motor and measure the compression.
Compression Pressure:
Above 980 kPa (10.0 kgf/cm 2 , 142 psi)
11. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders.

Maximum Variation:
Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm 2 , 28 psi)
12. If the compression is not within specifications, check the following items, then remeasure the compression.
Damaged or worn valves and seats
Damaged cylinder head gasket
Damaged or worn piston rings
Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore
13. Select ECM/PCM reset to cancel the ALL INJECTORS STOP function on the HDS.
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage
1. Remove the cylinder head.
2. Inspect the camshaft.
3. Check the cylinder head for warpage. Measure along the edges, and three ways across the center.
Warpage
Standard (New): 0.07 mm (0.0028 in.)
Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.0031 in.)
If warpage is less than 0.08 mm (0.003 in.) cylinder head resurfacing is not required.
If warpage is between 0.08 mm (0.003 in.) and 0.2 mm (0.008 in.), resurface the cylinder head.
Maximum resurface limit is 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) based on a height of 120 mm (4.72 in.).
Cylinder Head Height
Standard (New): 119.9−120.1 mm (4.720−4.728 in.)
Cylinder Head Cover Removal
1. Remove the intake manifold chamber.
2. Disconnect the four ignition coil connectors.
3. Remove the harness holder (A) and the breather hose (B).
4. Remove the cylinder head cover.

Cylinder Head Cover Installation
1. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the groove.
2. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of the cylinder head cover (B).
3. Check that the mating surfaces are clean and dry.
4. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08C70-K0234M, 08C70-K0334M, or 08C70-X0331S) to the chain case contact areas (A).
NOTE:
Apply liquid gasket about 2.5 mm (0.098 in.) diameter bead to the chain case contact areas.
5. Place the cylinder head cover (A) on the cylinder head, then slide the cover slightly back and forth to seat the head
cover gasket.
6. Tighten the bolts in three steps. In the final step tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft).
NOTE:
Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the head cover.
7. Install the harness holder (A) and the breather hose (B).
8. Connect the four ignition coil connectors.
9. Install the intake manifold chamber.
Camshaft Sprocket Removal
NOTE: Keep the cam chain away from magnetic fields.
2. Make a reference mark (A) across the camshaft sprocket and cam chain.
3. Apply new engine oil to the slider surface of the cam chain tensioner slider through the oil return hole in the cylinder
head.
4. Remove the cylinder head plug.
5. Hold the crankshaft pulley and set the socket wrench (A) on the camshaft sprocket bolt.
6. Remove the maintenance bolt (B), and turn the camshaft clockwise to compress the cam chain tensioner, then
install the 6 x 1.0 mm bolt (C) in the bolt hole (D) on the engine block through the maintenance hole and cam chain
tensioner (E).
NOTE:
Turning torque should not exceed 56 N·m (5.7 kgf·m, 41 lbf·ft), when turning the camshaft.
Do not turn the camshaft counterclockwise.
7. Hold the camshaft with a 27 mm open-end wrench, then remove the camshaft sprocket.
NOTE: Hang the cam chain with a wire.
Camshaft Sprocket Installation
1. Install the cam chain to the camshaft sprocket by alignment the reference mark (A), then install the camshaft
sprocket on the camshaft.
2. Hold the camshaft with a 27 mm open-end wrench, then tighten the bolt.
Specified torque:
56 N·m (5.7 kgf·m, 41 lbf·ft)
3. Apply new engine oil to the slider surface of the cam chain tensioner slider through the oil return hole in the cylinder
head.
4. Hold the crankshaft pulley and set the socket wrench (A) on the camshaft sprocket bolt.
5. Turn the camshaft clockwise to compress the cam chain tensioner, then remove the 6 x 1.0 mm bolt (B).
NOTE:
Turning torque should not exceed 56 N·m (5.7 kgf·m, 41 lbf·ft), when turning the camshaft.
Do not turn the camshaft counterclockwise.
6. Install the maintenance bolt (C) with a new washer (D).
7. Install the new cylinder head plug.

8. Install the cylinder head cover.
CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation
Removal
3. Remove the following engine wire harness connectors and wire harness clamps from the cylinder head:
Four injector connector
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1 connector
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor connector
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector
Secondary heated oxygen sensor (secondary HO2S) connector
4. Remove the harness holder mounting bolt and the ground cable, then remove the harness holder from the bracket.
6. Remove the camshaft thrust cover.
7. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then loosen the bolt.
8. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) pulse plate.
Installation
1. Install the CMP pulse plate.
2. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then tighten the bolt.
Specified Torque
14 x 1.5 mm 34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
3. Install the camshaft thrust cover (A) with new O-ring (B).
5. Install the harness holder, then install the ground cable.
6. Install the following engine wire harness connectors and wire harness clamps from the cylinder head:
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation
Handle, 6-25-660L
07JAB-001020B
Crankshaft pulley holder, 50 offset 65

070AB-RJA0100
Socket wrench, 19 x 90L
07JAA-001020A
Removal
2. Hold the pulley with the handle (A) and the crankshaft pulley holder (B).
3. Remove the bolt with a 19 x 90L socket (C) and a breaker bar, then remove the crankshaft pulley.
Installation
1. Clean the crankshaft pulley (A), the crankshaft (B), the bolt (C), and the washer (D). Lubricate with new engine oil
as shown.
2. Install the crankshaft pulley.
3. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt. Do not use an impact wrench.

-1. Hold the pulley with the handle (A) and crankshaft pulley holder (B), then tighten the bolt to 37 N·m (3.8
kgf·m, 27 lbf·ft) with a torque wrench and a 19 x 90L socket (C). If the pulley bolt or crankshaft are new,
tighten the bolt to 177 N·m (18.0 kgf·m, 130 lbf·ft), then remove the bolt and tighten it to 37 N·m (3.8 kgf·m,
27 lbf·ft).
-2. Mark the embossed mark (D) on the bolt flange and the crankshaft pulley (E) as shown, then tighten the bolt
an additional 90 ° (The mark on the bolt head should line up with the next embossed mark (F) on the bolt
flange).
Cam Chain Case Oil Seal Installation
07749-0010000

07746-0010400
1. Use the driver handle and the bearing driver attachment to drive a new oil seal squarely into the chain case to the
specified installed height.
2. Measure the distance between the chain case surface and the oil seal.
Oil Seal Installed Height:
30.3−31.0 mm (1.19−1.22 in.)
Cylinder Head Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal
Valve spring compressor
07757-0010000
Identify the valves and the valve springs as they are removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position.
2. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A), and a plastic mallet (B), lightly tap the spring retainer to loosen the valve
cotters.
3. Install valve the spring compressor. Compress the spring, and remove the valve cotters.
4. Remove the valve spring compressor, then remove the spring retainer, the valve spring, the valve seal, and the valve
spring seat.
Cylinder Head Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation
Stem seal driver
07PAD-0010000
Valve spring compressor

07757-0010000
1. Coat the valve stems with new engine oil. Install the valves in the valve guides.
2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly.
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the valve guide seal installer (B).
NOTE: The exhaust valve seal (C) has a black spring (D), and the intake valve seal (E) has a white spring (F). They
are not interchangeable.
5. Install the valve spring. Place the end of the valve spring with closely wound coils toward the cylinder head.
6. Install the valve retainer.
7. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring, and install the valve cotters.
8. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem three times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper seating of the valve and
valve cotters. Tap the valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend the stem.
Cylinder Head Valve Inspection
1. Remove the valves.
2. Measure the valve in these areas.
Intake Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 27.85−28.15 mm (1.096−1.108 in.)
B Standard (New): 118.55−119.15 mm (4.667−4.691 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.48−5.49 mm (0.2157−0.2161 in.)
C Service Limit: 5.45 mm (0.215 in.)
Exhaust Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 22.85−23.15 mm (0.900−0.911 in.)
B Standard (New): 117.25−117.85 mm (4.616−4.640 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.45−5.46 mm (0.2146−0.2150 in.)
C Service Limit: 5.42 mm (0.213 in.)
Cylinder Head Valve Guide Replacement
Valve guide driver, 5.35 x 9.7
07742-0010100
Valve guide reamer, 5.525 mm

07HAH-PJ70100
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance.
2. As illustrated below, use a commercially available air-impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the diameter of the
valve guides. In most cases, the same procedure can be done using the valve guide driver and a conventional
hammer.
3. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for about an hour.
4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder head to 150 °C (300 °F). Monitor the temperature with a cooking
thermometer. Do not get the head hotter than 150 °C (300 °F); excessive heat may loosen the valve seats.
5. Working from the camshaft side, use the valve guide driver and an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm (0.1
in.) towards the combustion chamber. This will knock off some of the carbon and make removal easier. Hold the air
hammer directly in line with the valve guide to prevent damaging the driver.
6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out toward the camshaft side of the head.
7. If a valve guide won't move, drill it out with a 8 mm (5/16 in.) bit, then try again. Drill guides only in extreme cases;
you could damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks.
8. Remove the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a time, as you need them.
9. Apply a thin coat of new engine oil to the outside of the new valve guide. Install the guide from the camshaft side of
the head; use the valve guide driver to drive the guide in to the specified installed height (A) of the guide (B). If you
have all 16 guides to do, you may have to reheat the head.
Valve Guide Installed Height:

15.85−16.35 mm (0.624−0.644 in.)
10. Coat both reamer and valve guide with cutting oil.
11. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the valve guide bore.
12. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while removing it from the bore.
13. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water to remove any cutting residue.
14. Check the clearances with a valve. Verify that a valve slides in the intake and exhaust valve guides without sticking.
15. Inspect the valve seat. If necessary renew the valve seat using a valve seat cutter.
Cylinder Head Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the valves.
2. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured with a micrometer, from the I.D. of the valve guide, measured with an
inside micrometer or ball gauge.
Take the measurements in three places along the valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
The difference between the largest guide measurement and the smallest stem measurement should not exceed the
service limit.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

Cylinder Head Valve Seat Reconditioning
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance. If the valve guides are worn, replace them before cutting the valve seats.
2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a valve seat cutter.
3. Carefully cut a 45 ° seat, removing only enough material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat.
4. Bevel the upper and lower edges at the angles shown in the illustration.Check the width of the seat and adjust
accordingly.
5. Make one more very light pass with the 45 ° cutter to remove any possible burrs caused by the other cutters.
Valve Seat Width

Intake:
6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect for even valve seating: Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the valve face.
Insert the valve in its original location in the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the seat several times.
7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by the blue compound, should be centered on the seat.
If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you must make a second cut with the 67.5 ° cutter (intake) or 60 °
cutter (exhaust) to move it down, then one more cut with the 45 ° cutter to restore seat width.
If it is too low (close to the valve edge), you must make a second cut with the 30 ° cutter to move it up, then
make one more cut with the 45 ° cutter to restore seat width.
NOTE: The final cut should always be made with the 45 ° cutter.
8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head, and measure valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve Stem Installed Height

Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height

9. If valve stem installed height is over the service limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over the service limit,
replace the cylinder head; the valve seat in the head is too deep.
VTEC Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve Removal/Installation
1. Remove the harness holder (A).
2. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid connector (A).

3. Remove the rocker arm oil control valve (B) and the rocker arm oil control valve filter (C).
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new rocker arm oil control valve filter.
Engine Mount Torque Rod Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height. M/T model
2. Support the transmission with a jack and wood block under the transmission.
3. Remove the torque rod (A).
4. Install the torque rod. Install the new bolt with the tab (B) on the bolt head aligned with the guide (C) on the front
subframe, then tighten the new torque rod mounting bolt and nut in the numbered sequence shown.
A/T model
Engine Mount Torque Rod Bracket Replacement
2. A/T model: Remove the shift cable cover.
4. Remove the torque rod. M/T model
A/T model
5. Remove the torque rod bracket. M/T model

6. Install the torque rod bracket.
A/T model
7. Install the torque rod (A). Install the new bolt with the tab (B) on the bolt head aligned with the guide (C) on the front M/T model
subframe, then tighten the new torque rod mounting bolt and nut in the numbered sequence shown.
A/T model
8. A/T model: Install the shift cable cover.

Side Engine Mount Replacement
1. Remove the A/C line bracket mounting bolt.
2. Support the engine with a jack and wood block under the oil pan.
3. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side engine mount/bracket assembly (B).
4. Install the side engine mount/bracket assembly, then tighten the new side engine mount/bracket assembly
mounting bolts (C).
5. Loosely tighten the new side engine mount/bracket assembly mounting nuts (D) and install the ground cable.
7. Loosen the transmission mount bracket mounting bolts and nuts (A). M/T model
A/T model
9. Loosen the torque rod mounting bolt and nut (A). M/T model
A/T model
11. Tighten the side engine mount/bracket assembly mounting nuts in the numbered sequence shown.
12. Tighten the transmission mount mounting bolts and nuts in the numbered sequence shown. M/T model
A/T model
14. Tighten the torque rod mounting bolt and nut in the numbered sequence shown. M/T model
A/T model
16. Install the A/C line bracket mounting bolt.

Transmission Mount Bracket Replacement
1. Remove the battery.
3. With M/T model: Remove the battery cables (A) from the battery terminal fuse box.
4. With M/T model: Remove the harness clamps (B).
5. With M/T model: Remove the harness clamp (A). Remove the two bolts (B) and loosen the two bolts (C), then
remove the battery base (D).
7. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the transmission mount bracket (B). M/T model
8. Install the transmission mount bracket, and loosely tighten the new transmission mount bracket mounting bolts
and nuts (C).
9. Install the ground cable.
A/T model
A/T model
A/T model
A/T model
15. With M/T model: Install the battery base (A), then install the harness clamp (B).
16. With M/T model: Install the battery cables (A) to the battery terminal fuse box.
17. With M/T model: Install the harness clamps (B).
18. Do the battery installation procedure.
Transmission Mount Replacement
1. Remove the battery.
3. With M/T model: Remove the battery cables (A) from the battery terminal fuse box.
4. With M/T model: Remove the harness clamps (B).
A/T model
8. Remove the transmission mount. M/T model

9. Install the transmission mount and loosely tighten the new transmission mount mounting bolts, then tighten the
transmission mount mounting bolts in the numbered sequence shown.
A/T model
10. Install the transmission mount bracket (A), and loosely tighten the new transmission mount bracket mounting bolts M/T model
and nuts (B).
11. Install the ground cable (C).
A/T model
A/T model
A/T model
A/T model
18. With M/T model: Install the battery cables (A) to the battery terminal fuse box.
19. With M/T model: Install the harness clamps (B).
20. Install the battery.
Engine Block Cylinder Bore Honing
Only a scored or scratched cylinder bore must be honed.
1. Measure the cylinder bores.
If the engine block is to be reused, hone the cylinders and remeasure the bores.
2. Hone the cylinder bores with honing oil and a fine (400 grit) stone in a 60 degree cross-hatch pattern (A). Use only
a rigid hone with 400 grit or finer stone such as Sunnen, Ammco, or equivalent. Do not use stones that are worn or
broken.
3. When honing is complete, thoroughly clean the engine block of all metal particles. Wash the cylinder bores with
hot soapy water, then dry and oil them immediately to prevent rusting. Never use solvent, it will only redistribute the
grit on the cylinder walls.
4. If scoring or scratches are still present in the cylinder bores after honing the engine block to the service limit, rebore
the engine block. Some light vertical scoring and scratching is acceptable if it is not deep enough to catch your
fingernail and does not run the full length of the bore.
Engine Block Drain Bolt/Sealing Bolt Installation
NOTE: When installing the drain bolt and/or sealing bolt, always use new washer.
Engine Oil Pan Removal
1. If the engine is already out of the vehicle, go to Step 7 .
2. Drain the engine oil.
4. Remove the driveshaft heat shield.
5. Remove the A/C compressor without disconnecting the A/C hoses.
6. A/T model: Remove the shift cable cover.
7. M/T model: Remove the torque rod bracket.
8. Remove the dipstick, then remove the dipstick tube.
9. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor cover (A), then disconnect the CKP sensor connector (B).
10. Remove the clutch cover/torque converter cover (A), and transmission mounting bolts (B). M/T model
11. Remove the bolts securing the oil pan.
A/T model
12. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the oil pan from the block in the places shown.
13. Remove the oil pan.
Engine Oil Pan Installation
1. Remove any old liquid gasket from the oil pan mating surfaces, bolts and bolt holes.
2. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
3. Install the new oil pan gasket (A), new O-ring (B), and dowel pins (C) on the oil pan.
4. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08C70-K0234M, 08C70-K0334M, or 08C70-X0331S) to the engine block mating surface of
the oil pan and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
NOTE:
Apply liquid gasket about 5.0 mm (0.20 in.) diameter bead to the shaded area (B).
5. Install the oil pan.

NOTE:
Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the oil pan.
6. Tighten the bolts in three steps. Wipe off the excess liquid gasket on the each side of crankshaft pulley and the
flywheel/drive plate.
Specified torque
(1): 24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)
(2)−(13): 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
7. Install the clutch cover/torque converter cover (A), and install the transmission mounting bolts (B). M/T model
A/T model
8. Connect the CKP sensor connector (A), then install the CKP sensor cover (B).
9. Install the dipstick tube (A) with new O-ring (B), then install the dipstick.
10. M/T model: Install the torque rod bracket.
11. If the engine is still in the vehicle, do Step 12 through 16.
12. A/T model: Install the shift cable cover.
13. Install the A/C compressor.
14. Install the driveshaft heat shield.
16. Refill the engine with engine oil.
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection
1. Remove the oil pump.
2. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler gauge between the connecting rod and the crankshaft.
Connecting Rod End Play

3. If the connecting rod end play is beyond the service limit, install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it is still
beyond the service limit, replace the crankshaft.
4. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the crankshaft. Then
pull the crankshaft firmly back toward the indicator; the dial reading should not exceed the service limit.
Crankshaft End Play

5. If the end play is beyond the service limit, replace the thrust washers and recheck, if it is still beyond the service
limit, replace the crankshaft.
Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection
1. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt at point A and point B with a micrometer.
2. Calculate the difference in diameter between point A and point B.
Point A−Point B = Difference in Diameter
Difference in Diameter:
Specification: 0−0.05 mm (0−0.002 in.)
3. If the difference in diameter is out of specification, replace the connecting rod bolt.
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
1. Remove the engine/transmission.
2. Remove the transmission:
Manual transmission
Automatic transmission
3. M/T model: Remove the pressure plate, clutch disc, and flywheel.
4. A/T model: Remove the drive plate.
5. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor cover (A), then disconnect the CKP sensor connector (B).
6. Remove the harness cover (C).
8. Remove the oil pump.
10. Remove the bearing cap bolts. To prevent warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the
sequence until all bolts are loosened.
11. Remove the bearing cap bridge.
12. Remove the rod caps/bearings. Keep all caps/ bearings in order.
13. Lift crankshaft (A) out of the engine. Be careful not to damage the journals and the CKP pulse plate (B).
14. Remove the CKP pulse plate.
15. Remove the upper bearing halves from the connecting rods, and set them aside with their respective caps.
16. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon around the top of each cylinder, remove it with a ridge reamer (A).
Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may damage the pistons as they are
pushed out.
17. Use the wooden handle of a hammer (A) to drive out the piston/connecting rod assembly (B). Take care not to
damage the cylinder with the connecting rod.
18. Reinstall the bearing cap bridge and bearings on the engine in the proper order.
19. Reinstall the connecting rod bearings and caps after removing each piston/connecting rod assembly.
20. Mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number to make sure they are reused in original order.
NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod does not indicate its position in the engine, it indicates the rod
bore size.
Crankshaft/Oil Seal (Transmission End) Installation
07749-0010000

07946-1870100
Oil seal driver attachment, 96 mm
07ZAD-PNA0100
1. M/T model: Install the pilot bearing when replacing the crankshaft.
2. A/T model: Install the crankshaft end bushing when replacing the crankshaft. Using the driver handle and the
bearing driver attachment, drive in the crankshaft end bushing to the specified installed height.
3. Measure the distance between the crankshaft surface and crankshaft end bushing.
0.9−1.1 mm (0.035−0.043 in.)
4. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with plastigage.

5. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage.
6. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and the connecting rods.
7. Apply a coat of new engine oil to the main bearings and the rod bearings.
8. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) pulse plate (A) on the crankshaft (B); face the marked side (C) opposite the
crankshaft, and align the tab (D) on the CKP pulse plate with the groove (E) on the crankshaft.
9. Hold the crankshaft so that rod journal No. 2 and rod journal No. 3 are straight up, and lower the crankshaft into the
engine block.
10. Apply new engine oil to the thrust washer surfaces. Install the thrust washers (A) in the No. 4 journal of the engine
block.
11. Inspect the connecting rod bolts.
12. Apply new engine oil to the threads and flange of the connecting rod bolts.
13. Seat the rod journals into connecting rod No. 1 and connecting rod No. 4. Line up the mark (A) on the connecting
rod and the cap, then install the caps and the bolts finger-tight.
14. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise, and seat the journals into connecting rod No. 2 and connecting rod No. 3. Line up
the mark on the connecting rod and the cap, then install the caps and the bolts finger-tight.
15. Tighten the connecting rod bolts to 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft).
16. Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 90 °.

NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go back to step 11 of the
procedure. Do not loosen it back to the specified angle.
17. With L15A7 engine: Install the bearing caps with facing the arrows (A) to the cam chain side on the bearing cap
bridge.
18. Remove old liquid gasket from the bearing cap bridge/No. 5 bearing cap mating surfaces.
19. Clean and dry the bearing cap bridge/No. 5 bearing cap mating surfaces.
the bearing cap bridge/No. 5 bearing cap.
NOTE:
21. Put the bearing cap bridge on the engine block.
22. Apply engine oil to the threads and flange of the bearing cap bolts.
23. Tighten the bearing cap bolts is sequence to 25 N·m (2.5 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft).
24. Tighten the bearing cap bolts an additional 40 °.

25. Clean the excess liquid gasket off the engine block.
26. Use the special tools to drive a new oil seal squarely into the block to the specified installed height.
27. Measure the distance between the crankshaft (A) and oil seal (B).
7−8 mm (0.28−0.31 in.)
28. Install the cylinder head.

29. Install the oil pump.
31. Connect the CKP sensor connector (A), then install the CKP sensor cover (B).
32. Install the harness cover (C).
33. M/T model: Install the flywheel, clutch disc, and pressure plate.
34. A/T model: Install the drive plate.
35. Install the transmission:
Manual transmission
36. Install the engine/transmission.
NOTE: Whenever any crankshaft or connecting rod bearing is replaced, run the engine at idle speed until it reaches
normal operating temperature, then continue to running it for about 15 minutes.
Crankshaft Inspection
Out-of-Round and Taper
1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block.
2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe cleaners or a suitable brush.
3. Clean the keyway and threads.
4. Measure the out-of-round at the middle of each rod and the main journal in two places. The difference between
measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit.
Journal Out-of-Round
Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max.
5. Measure the taper at the edges of each rod and the main journal. The difference between measurements on each
journal must not be more than the service limit.
Journal Taper
Straightness
6. Place the engine block on a flat surface, crankshaft side up.
7. Clean and install the bearings on the No. 1 and No. 5 journals of the engine block.
8. Lower the crankshaft into the engine block.
9. Measure the runout on all main journals. Rotate the crankshaft two complete revolutions. The difference between
measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit.
Crankshaft Total Runout
CKP Pulse Plate Replacement
1. Remove the crankshaft.
2. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) pulse plate (A).
3. Install the CKP pulse plate on the crankshaft (B); face the marked side (C) opposite the crankshaft, and align the
tab (D) on the CKP pulse plate with the groove (E) on the crankshaft.
4. Install the crankshaft.
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement
Piston base head
07PAF-0010400
Piston base head attachment

07PAF-0010500
Insert pin
07PAF-0010700
Piston pin pilot

070AF-PWC0110
Insert adjuster
070AF-PWC0120
Pilot collar, 18 mm
070AF-PWC0130
Piston base
07973-6570500
Spring
07973-6570600
Disassembly
1. Assemble the special tool as shown.
2. Temporarily install the pilot collar over the piston pin base insert (A), and adjust the piston base head inserts as
shown, then tighten the screws (B). Remove the pilot collar.
3. Assemble and adjust the length of the piston pin driver head and shaft to 57 mm (2.2 in.).
4. With the arrow on top of the piston pointing up, place the piston assembly (A) on the special tool (B).
Be sure you position the recessed flat area of the piston against the piston base head inserts (C) as shown.
5. Press the pin (D) out with the pin driver (E), the pilot collar (F), and a hydraulic press.
Inspection
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin.
Piston Pin Diameter

2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter.
3. Measure the piston pin-to-piston clearance.
Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance

4. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter and connecting rod small end diameter.
Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Interference

Reassembly
1. Assemble the piston and connecting rod with the arrow (A) and the embossed mark (B) on the same side.
2. Insert the pilot collar (A) into the piston and the connecting rod.
3. With the arrow on top of the piston and the embossed mark on the connecting rod facing up, place the piston
assembly (B) on the special tool (C). Be sure you position the recessed flat area of the piston against the piston
base head inserts (D) as shown.
4. Press the pin (E) in with the pin driver (F) and a hydraulic press.
Piston Installation
If the Crankshaft is Already Installed
1. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for each cylinder as its piston is installed.
2. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the ring compressor. Check that the bearing is securely in place.
3. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the ring compressor, and the cylinder bore, then attach the ring
compressor to the piston/connecting rod assembly.
4. Position the arrow (A) to face the cam chain side of the engine.
5. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer (A).
Push down on the ring compressor (B) to prevent the rings from expanding before entering the cylinder bore.
6. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and check the connecting rod-to-crank journal alignment before pushing
the piston into place.
7. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with plastigage.
8. Inspect the connecting rod bolts.
9. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads, then install the rod caps with bearings. Torque the bolts to 9.8 N·m (1.0
kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft).
10. Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 90 °.

NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go back to Step 8 of the
procedure. Do not loosen it back to the specified angle.
If the Crankshaft is Not Installed

1. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the ring compressor, and check that the bearing is securely in place.
2. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the ring compressor, and the cylinder bore, then attach the ring
compressor to the piston/connecting rod assembly.
3. Position the arrow (A) to face the cam chain side of the engine.
4. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer (A).
Push down on the ring compressor (B) to prevent the rings from expanding before entering the cylinder bore.
5. Position all pistons at top dead center (TDC).
Piston Ring Replacement
1. Remove the piston from the engine block.
2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston rings (B).
3. Clean all the ring grooves thoroughly with a squared-off broken ring, or a ring groove cleaner with a blade to fit the
piston grooves. File down the blade, if necessary. The top and second ring grooves are 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) wide, and
the oil ring groove is 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) wide. Do not use a wire brush to clean the ring grooves, or cut the ring
grooves deeper with the cleaning tool.
NOTE: If the piston is to be separated from the connecting rod, do not install new rings yet.
4. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the cylinder bore 15−20 mm (0.6−0.8 in.) from the bottom.
5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler gauge:
If the gap is too small, check to see if you have the proper rings for your engine.
If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore diameter against the wear limits.
If the bore is over the service limit, the engine block must be rebored.
Piston Ring End-Gap
Top Ring:
Second Ring:
Oil Ring:
6. Install the top ring and the second ring as shown. The top ring (A) has a R mark, and the second ring (B) has a 2R
mark. The manufacturing marks (C) must be face upward.
7. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they do not bind.
8. Position the ring end gaps as shown:
9. After installing a new set of rings, measure the ring-to-groove clearances:
Top Ring Clearance

Second Ring Clearance

Fuel and Emissions System Description - Electronic Control System
Electronic Control System
Fuel and Emissions System Description - Catalytic Converter System
Catalytic Converter System
Tailpipe Emissions Test
1. Connect a tachometer.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm (min −1 ) without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
3. Check the idle speed.
4. Warm up and calibrate the CO meter according to the meter manufacturer's instructions.
5. Check idle CO with the headlights, heater blower, rear window defogger, cooling fan, and air conditioner off.
Specified CO: 0.1 % maximum
If unable to obtain this reading; see DTC troubleshooting.

If unable to obtain a CO reading of specified % by this procedure, check the tune-up condition.
TWC (Under-floor) Removal/Installation
1. Lift the vehicle, and support it with jackstands.
2. Remove the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2).
3. Remove the nuts (A) and the bolts (B).
4. Remove the under-floor TWC (C).
5. Remove the cover (D).
6. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with new gaskets (E).
Catalytic Converter Inspection
If excessive exhaust system back-pressure is suspected, remove the TWC from the vehicle. WU-TWC
Using a flashlight (A) and plugs (B) make a visual check for plugging, melting or cracking of the catalyst.
Replace the TWC if any of the visible area is damaged or plugged.
UNDER-FLOOR TWC
Fuel and Emissions System Description - EVAP Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
EVAP Canister Filter Replacement
LHD model
2. Disconnect the hose from the EVAP canister (A).
3. Remove the EVAP canister filter (B).
4. Disconnect the hose (C).
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
EVAP Canister Purge Valve Replacement
1. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector (A).
2. Disconnect the hose (B), the harness clamp (C), and the then remove the EVAP canister purge guard (D), and the
canister purge valve (E).
3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (F).
Fuel and Emissions System Description - Electronic Throttle Control System
Electronic Throttle Control System
Fuel and Emissions System Description - Electronic Throttle Control System Diagram
Electronic Throttle Control System Diagram
Accelerator Pedal Module Removal/Installation
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover.
2. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector (A).
3. Remove the accelerator pedal module (B).
NOTE: APP sensor is not available separately. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal module.
Fuel Pressure Relieving
Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disabling the fuel pump and then
disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment.
With the HDS
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting.
5. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in the fuel tank.
7. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it
stalls.
NOTE:
Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm (min −1 ) or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel
pump.
A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed.
10. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A).

11. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed.
12. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A).
13. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C)
with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts.
Do not use tools.
If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the
connector until it comes off easily.
Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one.
14. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage.
Without the HDS RHD model

1. Open the fuse lid (A).
2. Remove the PGM-FI main relay 2 (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls.
NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them.
LHD model
5. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in the fuel tank.
7. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A).
8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed.
9. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A).
10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C)
with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts.
Do not use tools.
11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage.
Fuel Breather Line and Suction Line Inspection
1. Remove the center console.
2. Remove the parking brake lever, then remove the access panel from the floor.
3. Disconnect the suction line (A) from the fuel tank unit, and connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0−30 in.Hg (B) to the
hose as shown.
4. Start the engine, and check the vacuum.
If there is vacuum, go to Step 5 .
If there is no vacuum, replace the fuel filter.
6. Connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0−30 in.Hg (A) to the suction line (B), and apply vacuum to the line.
If the line holds vacuum, check for blockage in the suction line. If there is blockage, replace the suction line.
If the line does not hold vacuum, go to Step 6 .
8. Remove the fill neck tube cover (A).
9. Disconnect the breather line (A), then plug the suction joint (B) with a rubber cap (C).
If the line holds vacuum, check for blockage in the breather line between the fuel tank and the suction joint. If
there is blockage, replace the fuel tank.
12. Connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0−30 in.Hg (A) to the filler side of the breather line (B), and apply air pressure to
the line.
If the air pressure holds, check for blockage between the suction line and the filler neck on the breather pipe,
and replace the part that is causing the blockage.
If the air pressure does not hold, go to Step 13 .
13. Remove the rubber cap from the suction line, and reconnect the breather pipe to the suction line.
14. Connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0−30 in.Hg (A) to the suction line (B), and apply pressure to the line.
If the air pressure holds, the breather line and the suction line are OK.
If the air pressure does not hold, check for a vacuum leak in the suction line, and replace the suction line if
necessary.
Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement
1. Remove the fuel tank unit.
2. Remove the reservoir (A).
3. Remove the clip (B), ground wire (C), then remove the bracket (D).
4. Remove the clip (E), then remove the fuel pressure regulator (F).
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with new O-rings (G) and a new bracket. When installing the fuel
tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank.
NOTE:
Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil; do not use any other oils or fluids.
Do not pinch the O-rings during installation.
Use all the new parts supplied in the pressure regulator replacement kit.
Low Fuel Indicator Test
1. Do the gauge self-diagnostic test.
If the low fuel indicator flashes, go to Step 2 .
If the low fuel indicator does not flash, replace the gauge control module.
2. Check for body electrical system DTCs.
If any DTCs are indicated, do the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
If no DTCs are indicated, go to Step 3 .
3. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test.
Fuel and Emissions System Description - PGM-FI System
PGM-FI System
A/F Sensor Replacement
O2 sensor wrench 22 x 90
07LAA-PT50101
1. Remove the cowl cover and under cowl-cover panel.
2. Disconnect the A/F sensor connector (A).
3. Remove the A/F sensor (A).

CMP Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the cowl cover and under cowl-cover panel.
2. Remove the air cleaner.
3. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (A).
4. Remove the CMP sensor (B).
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C).
ELD Replacement
1. Remove the under-dash fuse/relay box.
2. Remove the fuse (A).
3. Remove the joint bar (B).
4. Turn the under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the ELD (A).
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement
3. Remove the hose clamp stay bolt (A).
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 connector (A).

5. Remove ECT sensor 1 (B).
6. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant.
Secondary HO2S Replacement
2. Disconnect the secondary HO2S connector (A).
4. Remove the supporters (A), then secondary HO2S (B).

MAP Sensor Replacement
1. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector (A).
2. Remove the MAP sensor (B).
3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C).
MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement
1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector (A).
2. Remove the screws (B).
3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C).
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new gasket (D).
Fuel and Emissions System Description - Idle Control System/Fuel Supply System
Idle Control System
Fuel Supply System
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does it indicate OFF?
NO - Inspect the brake pedal position switch. ■
3. Press the brake pedal, and check the BRAKE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does it change to ON?
YES - The brake pedal position switch signal circuit (BKSW line) is OK.■
NO - Go to Step 4 .
5. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
6. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P connector.
8. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A42 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A42) and the brake pedal position switch. Replace the
No. 24 STOP, HORN (15 A) fuse.■
NO - Go to Step 9 .
9. Connect brake pedal position switch 4P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
YES - Repair open in the wire between the brake pedal position switch and the No. 24 STOP, HORN (15 A)
fuse. Inspect the brake pedal position switch. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A42) and the brake pedal position switch.■
Throttle Body Cleaning
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or while the ignition
switch is ON (II). If you do, you will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve is activated.
1. Make sure the ignition switch is turned OFF.

2. Check for damage to the air cleaner. If the air cleaner is damaged, replace it.
3. Remove the throttle body.
4. Clean off the carbon from the throttle valve and inside the throttle body with a paper towel soaked carburetor
cleaner.
NOTE:
Always remove the throttle body to clean it.
Be careful not to pinch your fingers.
To avoid removing the molybdenum coating, do not clean the bearing area of the throttle shaft (A).
Do not spray carburetor cleaner directly on the throttle body.
Use Honda genuine carburetor cleaner.
5. Install the throttle body.
8. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
9. Select the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
10. Select TP POSITION CHECK and clear the throttle position (TP) learned value.
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 2 seconds without pressing the accelerator pedal.
13. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure.
Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly
Fuel and Emissions System Description - PCV System
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System
PCV System Component Location Index
PCV VALVE
Inspection,
Replacement,
*: This illustration shows RHD model.

PCV Valve Replacement
2. Remove the PCV valve (A).

3. Disconnenct the hose (B).
NOTE: Make sure the clamp (C) is positioned as shown.
PCV Valve Inspection
2. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (B), pipe (C), and connections for leaks or restrictions.
3. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound from the PCV valve when the hose between the PCV valve and intake
manifold is lightly pinched (A) with your fingers or pliers.
If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve washer for cracks or damage. If the washer is OK, replace the
PCV valve and recheck.
Ignition System Component Location Index
SPARK PLUG IGNITION COIL

Inspection, Ignition Timing Inspection,
Removal/Installation,
Ignition Coil Replacement
1. Remove the under-cowl panel.
2. Disconnect the ignition coil connectors, then remove the ignition coils.
3. Install the ignition coils in the reverse order of removal.
Ignition Timing Inspection
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm (min −1 ) with no load (in the P or N) (A/T model) or neutral
(M/T model) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
7. Connect the timing light to the service loop (white tape).
8. Aim the light toward the pointer (A) on the cam chain case. Check the ignition timing under a no load condition
(headlights, blower fan, rear window defogger, and air conditioner are turned off).
Ignition Timing
M/T model: 0 °±2 ° BTDC (WHITE mark (B)) at idle in neutral
A/T model: 0 °±2 ° BTDC (WHITE mark (B)) at idle in N or P
9. If the ignition timing differs from the specification, check the cam timing. If the cam timing is OK, update the
ECM/PCM, if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the
system works properly, and the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM.
10. Disconnect the HDS and the timing light.
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Remove the spark plugs and inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator.
Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by these conditions:
-Advanced ignition timing
-Loose spark plug
-Plug heat range too hot
-Insufficient cooling
Fouled plugs may be caused by these conditions:
-Retarded ignition timing
-Oil in combustion chamber
-Incorrect spark plug gap
-Plug heat range too cold
-Excessive idling/low speed running
-Clogged air cleaner element
-Deteriorated ignition coils
2. If the spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated, clean the electrode with a plug cleaner.
NOTE:
Do not use a wire brush or scrape the iridium electrode since this will damage the electrode.
When using a sand blaster spark plug cleaner, do not clean for more than 20 seconds to avoid damaging the
electrode.
3. Do not adjust the gap (A) of iridium tip plugs; replace the spark plug if the gap is out of specification.
Electrode Gap
4. Replace the plug at the specified interval or when the center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the listed spark
plugs.
Spark Plugs
NGK: IZFR6K13
DENSO: SKJ20DR-M13
5. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head,
finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft).
Engine Oil Pressure Test
Oil pressure gauge attachment PT 1/8
07406-0030000
Oil pressure gauge set

07506-3000001
NOTE: If the low oil pressure indicator stays on with the engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
correct:
1. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, then install the special tools.
2. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem before
continuing.
3. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should be:
Engine Oil Temperature: 80 °C (176 °F)
Engine Oil Pressure:
At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm 2 , 10 psi) min.
At 3,000 rpm (min ):−1 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm 2 , 50 psi) min.
4. If oil pressure is out of specifications, inspect these items:

Replace the oil filter.
Inspect the oil pressure relief valve.
Check the oil screen for clogging.
Inspect the oil pump.
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Oil filter wrench
07HAA-PJ70101
2. Remove the oil filter with the oil filter wrench.
3. Inspect the filter to make sure the rubber seal is not stuck to the oil filter seating surface of the engine.
4. Inspect the threads (A) and the rubber seal (B) on the new filter. Clean the seat on the oil pan, then apply a light
coat of new engine oil to the filter rubber seal. Use only filters with a built-in bypass system.
5. Install the oil filter by hand.
6. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the oil filter wrench.
Tighten: 3/4 Turn Clockwise
Tightening Torque: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
7. If four numbers or marks (1 to 4 or ▼ to ▼▼▼▼) are printed around the outside of the filter, you can use the
following procedure to tighten the filter.
Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against the oil pan, and note which number or mark is at the
bottom.
Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise three numbers or marks from the one you noted. For example, if
mark ▼ is at the bottom when the seal is lightly seated, tighten the filter until the mark ▼▼▼▼ comes
around to the bottom.
Number or Mark when rubber seal is 1 or ▼ 2 or ▼▼ 3 or ▼▼▼ 4 or ▼▼▼▼
seated
Number or Mark after tightening 4 or ▼▼▼▼ 1 or ▼ 2 or ▼▼ 3 or ▼▼▼
8. Refill the new engine oil, run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage.
Engine Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement
1. Remove the filter.
2. Remove the oil filter feed pipe.
3. Install two 20 x 1.5 mm nuts (A) onto the new oil filter feed pipe. Hold one nut with a wrench, then use a second
wrench to tighten the other nut.
4. Tighten the oil filter feed pipe to 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft), then remove the nuts from the oil filter feed pipe.
5. Install the oil filter.
Engine Oil Replacement
1. Warm up the engine.
2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil.
3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B).
4. Refill the engine with the recommended oil.

Capacity
At Oil Change:
3.4 L (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt)
At Oil Change Including Filter:
3.6 L (3.8 US qt, 3.2 Imp qt)
After Engine Overhaul:
4.2 L (4.4 US qt, 3.7 Imp qt)
5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check oil level and oil leakage.
Engine Oil/Air Separator Installation
1. Remove the all of the old liquid gasket from the oil/air separator mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes.
2. Clean and dry the oil/air separator mating surfaces.
the oil/air separator and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
NOTE:
4. Install the oil/air separator.

NOTE:
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TERMINAL UNDER−DASH

FUSE BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A) T−9 No. 60 (50 A) T1 2 BAT
WHT WHT
IG1
5
W1
YEL
No. 22
(7.5 A)
Q8
LT BLU
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32

30
29 CPU
DRIVER
LOW OIL
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
WHT RED
A3 A4 ECM/PCM
CANH CANL
5V
12 V
OPSW
B7
YEL/RED
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

(Closed: Lost pressure)
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open)
module (PCM). If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
4. Check for DTCs. If a DTC is present, diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing with this test.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), select PGM-FI, and check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Is ON indicated?
YES - Replace the gauge control module. ■
NO - Go to Step 6 .
7. Check the oil pressure switch.
Is the oil pressure switch OK?
NO - Replace the oil pressure switch. ■
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P) and the oil pressure switch connector.
10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal B7 and the oil pressure switch connector.
ECM/PCM. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the oil pressure switch and the ECM/PCM.■
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Short)
module (PCM). If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
4. Check for DTCs. If a DTC is present, diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing with this test.
5. Start the engine, select PGM-FI, and check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is OFF indicated?
NO - Go to Step 6 .
7. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector.
8. Start the engine, and check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is OFF indicated?
9. Check the oil pressure switch.
Is the oil pressure switch OK?
YES - Do the oil pressure test.
NO - Replace the oil pressure switch. ■
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P) and the oil pressure switch connector.
12. Check for continuity between the oil pressure switch connector and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the oil pressure switch and the ECM/PCM.■
ECM/PCM . ■
Engine Oil Pressure Switch Test
1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector (A) from the engine oil pressure switch (B).
2. Check for continuity between the oil pressure switch terminal and the engine (ground). There should be continuity
with the engine stopped. There should be no continuity with the engine running.
Engine Oil Pressure Switch Replacement
1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector (A), then remove the oil pressure switch (B).
2. Remove any old liquid gasket from the switch and switch mounting hole.
3. Apply a very small amount of liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil pressure switch.
NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause liquid gasket to enter the oil passage or the end of the new oil
pressure switch.
Starter Performance Test
1. Remove the starter.
2. Disconnect the wires from the M terminal.
3. Make a connection for this test using the thickest (gauge) wire possible (preferably the same gauge as used on the
vehicle).
NOTE: To avoid damaging the starter, never leave the battery connected for more than 10 seconds.
4. Connect the battery as shown. Make sure you disconnect the starter motor wire from the solenoid. If the starter
pinion moves out, it is working properly.
5. Disconnect the battery from the M terminal. If the pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil of the solenoid is working
properly.
6. Disconnect the battery from the starter body. If the pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly.
7. Firmly clamp the starter in a vise.
8. Reconnect the wire to the M terminal.
9. Connect the starter to the battery as shown, and confirm that the motor runs.
10. If the electric current meets the specification when the battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is working properly.
Specification
Electric Current: 50 A or less
Starter Removal and Installation
Removal
2. Remove the coolant reservoir.
4. Remove the dipstick, then remove the dipstick tube (A).

5. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector (B).
6. Disconnect the starter cable (A) from the B terminal and disconnect the connector (B) from the S terminal, then
remove the starter.
7. Remove the two bolts securing the starter, then remove the starter.
Installation
1. Install the starter to the engine. Connect the starter cable (A) and connector (B). Make sure the starter cable
crimped side of the ring terminal faces away from the starter when you connect it.
2. Install the dipstick tube (A) with new O-ring (B).

3. Connect the oil pressure switch connector (C).
4. Install the coolant reservoir.

5. Installation the intake manifold.
7. Start the engine to make sure the starter works properly.
Starter Overhaul
Disassembly/Reassembly
Armature Inspection and Test

1. Remove the starter.
2. Disassemble the starter as shown in the Exploded View.
3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from contact with the magnet. If there is wear or damage, replace the
armature.
4. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is dirty or burnt, resurface it with an emery cloth or a lathe to the
specifications in Step 5 , or recondition with #500 or #600 sandpaper (B).
5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is below the service limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Diameter
6. Measure the commutator (A) runout.

If the commutator runout is within the service limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or brass chips
between the segments.
If the commutator runout is not within the service limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Runout
7. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B), undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the proper depth.
Cut away all the mica (C) between the commutator segments. The undercut should not be too shallow, too narrow,
or V-shaped (D).
Commutator Mica Depth

8. Check for continuity between the segments of the commutator. If there is an open circuit between any of the
segments, replace the armature.
9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B). Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If the blade is
attracted to the core or vibrates while the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace the armature.
10. Use an ohmmeter to check for continuity between the commutator (A) and the armature coil core (B), and between
the commutator and the armature shaft (C). If there is continuity, replace the armature.
Starter Brush Inspection

11. Measure the brush length. If it is not within the service limit, replace the armature housing assembly.
Brush Length
Starter Field Winding Test

12. Check for continuity between the (+) brushes (A) and motor wire (B), and between the (−) brushes (C) and armature
housing (D). If there is no continuity, replace the armature housing.
13. Check for continuity between the (+) brushes and (−) brushes, and between the (+) brushes and armature housing.
If there is continuity, replace the armature housing.
Overrunning Clutch Inspection

14. Slide the overrunning clutch (A) along the shaft.
Replace it, if it does not slide smoothly.
15. Hold the drive gear (B), and turn the overrunning clutch in the direction shown to make sure it turns freely. Also
make sure the overrunning clutch locks in the opposite direction. If it does not lock in either direction or it locks in
both directions, replace it.
16. If the starter drive gear is worn or damaged, replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear is not available
separately. Check the condition of the flywheel or torque converter ring gear. Replace it if the starter drive gear teeth
are damaged
17. Install the armature in the housing, and install the brush holder, then install the each brush in the holder.
NOTE: To seat new brushes, slip a strip of #500 or #600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between the commutator
and each brush, and smoothly rotate the armature. The contact surface of the brushes will be sanded to the same
contour as the commutator.
18. Compress the spring, and install it in the brush holder.
19. Install the brush holder insulator (A) and end cover (B).
20. Do the starter performance test.
Starter Solenoid Test
2. Remove the starter cable (A) and motor cable (B), then disconnect the connector (C).
3. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S terminal and the armature housing (ground). There should be
continuity.
If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
4. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the S terminal and M terminal. There should be continuity.
If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK.
If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
6. Do the battery terminal reconnecting procedure.
Ball Joint Removal
Ball joint remover, 28 mm
07MAC-SL00201
Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball joint. Do not strike the housing or any other part of the ball joint
connection to disconnect it.
1. Install a hex nut (A) onto the threads of the ball joint (B). Make sure the nut is flush with the ball joint pin end to
prevent damage to the threaded end of the ball joint pin.
2. Apply grease to the ball joint remover on the areas shown (A). This will ease installation of the tool and prevent
damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads.
3. Loosen the pressure bolt (A), and install the ball joint remover as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making sure not
to damage the ball joint boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the adjusting bolt (B).
NOTE: Fasten the safety tie (C) securely to a suspension arm or the subframe (D). Do not fasten it to a brake line
or wire harness.
4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the head of the adjusting bolt is in the position shown to allow the jaw
(E) to pivot.
5. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint pin pops loose from the ball joint connecting hole. If
necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint pin.
NOTE: Do not use pneumatic or electric tools on the pressure bolt.
6. Remove the ball joint remover, then remove the nut from the end of the ball joint pin, and pull the ball joint out of the
ball joint connecting hole. Inspect the ball joint boot, and replace it if damaged.
Front Lower Arm Ball Joint Inspection
When inspecting the ball joint, the vehicle will be shake strongly. Make sure support the front jacking bracket correctly
with the suitable jack.
1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations.
2. Remove the front wheel.
3. Check all bolts, nuts, and bushings on the suspension components, and make sure that there are not looseness,
deterioration, and damage.
4. Hold the outside of lower arm (A) with your hands, and move it up and down to check for abnormal noise or
wobbling.
NOTE:
If the ball joint is abnormal, replace the lower arm.
A problem on the ball joint may be caused by an abnormal clearance (B).
5. Check the ball joint boot (A) for weakness, damage, cracks, and inner boot grease leaks.
NOTE:
If the ball joint boot is damaged with grease leaks, replace the lower arm.
If the ball joint boot is weakness and cracks without grease leaks, replace the ball joint boot.
6. Install the front wheel.
NOTE: Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel.
Ball Joint Boot Inspection/Replacement
Inner bearing driver attachment, 40 mm
07GAF-SE00200
1. Check the ball joint boot for weakness, damage, cracks, and inner boot grease leaks.
NOTE:
If the ball joint boot is damaged with grease leaks, replace the lower arm.
If the ball joint boot is weakness and cracks without grease leaks, go to Step 2 . Replace the ball joint boot.
2. Remove the lower arm.
3. Remove the boot.
4. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with grease. Keep the grease off of the boot-to-lower arm mating surfaces
(B).
5. Wipe the grease off the tapered portion of the ball joint pin (C), and pack fresh grease into the base (D). Do not let
dirt or other foreign materials get into the boot.
6. Install the boot on the ball joint, then squeeze it gently to force out any air.
7. Press the boot with the inner bearing driver attachment until the bottom seats (A) on the lower arm all the way
around.
8. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the exposed portion of the ball joint pin.
9. Install the lower arm.
Damper Disposal
Front damper
The dampers contain nitrogen gas and oil under pressure.
The pressure must be relieved before disposal to prevent explosion and possible injury when scrapping.
Rear damper
Always wear eye protection to avoid getting metal shavings in your eyes when the damper pressure is relieved.
Place the damper on a level surface with its shaft extended and drill a hole of 2−3 mm (0.078−0.118 in.) diameter in the
body to release the gas.
Front Damper/Spring Removal/Installation
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations.
3. Remove the wheel speed sensor (A) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector.
4. Disconnect the stabilizer link from the damper.
5. Remove the wheel speed sensor clip (A), the wheel speed sensor stay (B), and the brake hose bracket (C) form the
damper. Do not disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector.
6. Remove the damper pinch bolts (D) and the self-locking nuts (E) from the damper.
NOTE:
Do not allow the knuckle to rotate too far outward. This may allow the driveshaft inboard joint come apart.
During installation, install new damper pinch bolts and new self-locking nuts, then tighten the damper pinch
bolts to the specified torque value.
7. Remove the lid (A).
8. Remove the damper cap (A) from the top of the damper.
9. Hold the damper shaft (B) using a hex wrench (C), and loosen the damper mounting nut (D).
10. Remove the damper mounting nut (A) and the wave washer (B), then remove the damper mounting base (C) from
the top of the damper.
11. Remove the damper/spring (A) and the damper mounting rubber (B).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body.
12. Install all of the removed parts in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
First install all the components, and lightly tighten the bolts and the nuts, then raise the suspension to load
it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. Do not place the jack against
the ball joint of the lower arm.
Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel.
13. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary.
Front Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
Exploded View
NOTE: When compressing the damper spring, use a commercially available strut spring compressor (Branick MST-580A
or Model 7200, or equivalent) according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Disassembly
1. Compress the damper spring, then remove the nut (A) while holding the damper shaft with a hex wrench (B). Do not
compress the damper spring more than necessary to remove the nut.
2. Release the pressure from the strut spring compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown in the Exploded
View.
Inspection
1. Install the nut on the damper shaft end, and set the socket wrench and T-handle on the nut.
2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression
and extension. The damper should extend smoothly and constantly when compression is released. If it does not,
the gas is leaking and the damper should be replaced.
3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding during these tests.
Reassembly
1. Install the upper spring seat (A) to the upper spring seat clip (B).
NOTE: Make sure to securely set the upper spring seat to the hook (C) on the spring seat clip.
2. Install the bump stop rubber (D) and the dust cover (E) to the upper spring seat.
NOTE: Push the bump stop rubber and the dust cover into the dent (F) of the upper spring seat securely.
3. Install the damper spring (A) on the upper spring seat clip (B) by aligning the upper end (C) of the damper spring
with the ledge portion (D) of the upper spring seat clip.
4. Install the spring seat rubber on the damper spring.
5. Compress the damper spring.
6. Install all the parts except the nut and the damper bearing onto the damper unit (A) by referring to the Exploded
View.
7. Align the raised portion (A) of the spring seat rubber and the hole (B) of the lower spring seat on the damper unit
(C).
NOTE: After reassemble the damper/spring, install the dust cover (D) into the damper unit as shown.
8. Install the damper bearing onto the damper shaft.
9. Compress the damper spring until the position (A) of the damper shaft (B) comes in contact with the damper
bearing. Do not excessively compress the damper spring.
NOTE: Make sure the distance of the rod is 44 mm (1.73 in.) from the upper surface of the bearing.
10. Install the nut (C).
11. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wench (D), and tighten the nut to the specified torque value.
12. Remove the damper/spring from the strut spring compressor.
Front Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement
Exploded View
Ball joint remover, 28 mm
07MAC-SL00201
Hub dis/assembly tool, 34 mm

07965-SA70100

07749-0010000

07746-0010400
Support base, 73 x 78/82.6 mm

07965-SD90100
Knuckle/Hub Replacement
2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the front wheel.
3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A) from the damper bracket.
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To
prevent damage to the caliper assembly or the brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly
from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose excessively.
5. Raise the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut (B).
6. Remove the front brake disc.
7. Check the front hub for damage and cracks.
8. Remove the wheel speed sensor (A) from the knuckle (B). Do not disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector.
9. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, then remove the nut (B).
NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown.
10. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover.
11. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, then remove the castle nut (B).
NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin as shown after tightening the new castle nut.
12. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the remover.
Do not force or hammer on the lower arm, or pry between the lower arm and the knuckle. You could damage
the ball joint.
13. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and the self-locking nuts (B) from the damper.
NOTE: Use new damper pinch bolts and new self-locking nuts during reassembly.
14. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) from the knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) with a soft face
hammer while drawing the hub outward, then remove the knuckle/hub.
NOTE:
Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The driveshaft inboard joint may come apart.
During installation, apply grease to the mating surfaces of the wheel bearing and the driveshaft outboard
joint.
15. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
First install all the components, and lightly tighten the bolts and the nuts, then raise the suspension to load
it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. Do not place the jack against
the ball joint of the lower arm.
Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when connecting the knuckle.
Before connecting the ball joint, degrease the threaded section and the tapered portion of the ball joint pin,
the ball joint connecting hole, and the threaded section and the mating surfaces of the castle nut.
Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with
the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it.
Use a new spindle nut on reassembly.
Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After
tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front hub and the inside of the brake disc.
Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel.
Wheel Bearing Replacement

1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the hub dis/assembly tool and a hydraulic press. Hold the knuckle
with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to damage or deform the splash
guard (D). Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear.
2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the hub (B) using the hub dis/assembly tool, a commercially available
bearing separator (C), and a press.
3. Remove the splash guard (A) and the snap ring (B) from the knuckle (C).
4. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the bearing driver attachment, the driver handle, and a
press.
5. Wash the knuckle and the hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly.
6. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the support base,
and a press.
NOTE:
Install the wheel bearing with the wheel speed sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color), toward the inside
of the knuckle.
Remove any oil, grease, dust, metal debris, and other foreign material from the encoder surface.
Keep any magnetic tools away from the encoder surface.
Be careful not to damage the encoder surface when you insert the wheel bearing.
7. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B).

8. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque value.
9. Install the hub (A) onto the knuckle (B) using the bearing driver attachment, the driver handle, the support base, and
a hydraulic press. Be careful not to damage the splash guard (C).
Front Stabilizer Bar Replacement
NOTE: The illustrations show only the LHD model of the vehicle except where the procedure is different for the RHD
model.
Removal
2. Remove the front wheels.
3. Remove the steering wheel.
4. Disconnect the steering joint from the pinion shaft.
5. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint from the knuckle.
6. Disconnect both sides of the stabilizer link from the stabilizer bar.
7. LHD model: Remove the secondary HO2S wire clamp on the steering gearbox.
8. Remove the steering gearbox mounting bolt (A) and the stiffener mounting bolt (B), and remove the gearbox stay
(C) of the driver's side.
9. Remove the steering gearbox mounting bolt (A) and the stiffener mounting bolt (B), and remove the gearbox stay
(C) of the passenger's side.
10. Remove the steering gearbox mounting bolt (A) and the washer (B) from the rear side of the steering gearbox.
11. Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing holders (B), then remove the bushings (C).
12. Move the steering gearbox toward the upper side, and remove the stabilizer bar (D) from the driver's side.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the steering gearbox.
Installation
1. Move the steering gearbox toward the upper side, and install the stabilizer bar (A) from the driver's side.
NOTE:
Be careful not no damage the steering gearbox.
Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer bar.
Note the direction of installation for the bushings (B) and the bushing holders (C).
Align the stabilizer band or the paint marks (D) on the stabilizer bar with the side of the bushings.
2. Loosely tighten the new steering gearbox mounting bolt (A) and the washer (B) from the rear side of the steering
gearbox.
3. Loosely tighten the new steering gearbox mounting bolt (A) and the new stiffener mounting bolt (B) to the gearbox
stay (C) of the passenger's side.
4. Loosely tighten the new steering gearbox mounting bolt (A) and the new stiffener mounting bolt (B) to the gearbox
stay (C) of the driver's side.
5. Tighten the steering gearbox mounting bolts (A) and the stiffener mounting bolts (B) to the specified torque values RHD model
as shown order.
6. LHD model: Install the secondary HO2S wire clamp to the steering gearbox.
7. Connect both sides of the stabilizer link to the stabilizer bar.
8. Connect the tie-rod end ball joint to the knuckle.
9. Connect the steering joint.
LHD model
10. Install the steering wheel.
11. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
Front Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation
3. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and the flange nut (B) while holding the respective joint pin (C) with a hex wrench
(D), then remove the stabilizer link (E).
4. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar (F) and the damper (G) with the joint pins set at the center of their
range of movement.
5. Install the new self-locking nut and the new flange nut, and tighten them to the specified torque values while holding
the respective joint pin with a hex wrench.
6. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
7. Test-drive the vehicle.
8. After 5 minutes of driving, tighten the self-locking nut again to the specified torque value.
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Front
2. Remove the wheels.
3. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts. Tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the brake disc
securely against the hub.
4. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against the hub flange.
5. Measure the bearing end play while moving the brake disc inward and outward.
Wheel bearing end play:
Rear
Front/Rear: 0−0.05 mm (0−0.002 in.)
6. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing or the hub bearing unit.
Rear Suspension Dynamic Damper Replacement
2. Remove the dynamic damper (A) from the axle beam.
NOTE: Use new self-looking nuts (B) during reassembly.
3. Install the new dynamic damper in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Stabilizer Rubber Replacement
2. Remove the dynamic damper from the axle beam.
3. Remove the stabilizer rubber (A) from the axle beam.
4. Apply osmosis preservation lubricant to the new stabilizer rubber. This will ease installation of the rubber into the
stabilizer and the axle beam.
5. Make a mark (A) near the hole (B) of the axle beam as shown. Install the stabilizer rubber (C) into the axle beam
by aligning the end face of the stabilizer rubber to the plant mark.
NOTE: Make sure the stabilizer rubber is installed into the stabilizer (D).
6. Install the dynamic damper to the axle beam.
Wheel Runout Inspection
NOTE: When measuring the front wheel runout, turn the back side of the wheel slowly by hand.
2. Check for bent or deformed wheel.
3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure the axial runout by turning the wheel.
Front and rear wheel axial runout:
Standard:
Steel wheel: 0−1.0 mm (0−0.04 in.)
Aluminum wheel: 0−0.7 mm (0−0.03 in.)
Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
4. Reset the dial gauge to the position shown, and measure the radial runout.
Front and rear wheel radial runout:
Standard:
Steel wheel: 0−1.0 mm (0−0.04 in.)
Aluminum wheel: 0−0.7 mm (0−0.03 in.)
5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification, check the wheel bearing end play, and make sure the mating
surfaces on the brake disc and the inside of the wheel are clean.
6. If the bearing end play is within the specification but the wheel runout is more than the service limit, replace the
wheel.
Wheel Bolt Replacement
Do not use a hammer or air or electric impact tools to remove and install the wheel bolts.
Be careful not to damage the threads of the wheel bolts.
1. Remove the front hub or the rear hub bearing unit: front , rear.
2. Separate the wheel bolt (A) from the hub (B) using a hydraulic press. Support the hub with hydraulic press
attachments (C) or equivalent tools.
NOTE:
Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean the mating surfaces on the bolt and the hub.
The illustration shows a front hub.
3. Insert the new wheel bolt into the hub while aligning the splined surfaces on the hub hole with the wheel bolt.
NOTE:
Degrease all around the wheel bolt.
Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in relation to the hub disc surface.
4. Install the wheel bolt using a hydraulic press until the wheel bolt shoulder is fully seated.
5. Install the front hub or the rear hub bearing unit: front , rear.
NOTE: If you cannot tighten the wheel nut to the specified torque value when installing the wheel, replace the front
hub or the rear hub bearing unit as an assembly.
ABS System Description
ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector
System Outline
ABS Features
EBD Features
Modulator Unit
ABS Component Location Index
ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT

Removal and Installation, HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Replacement,
RIGHT-REAR WHEEL
SPEED SENSOR
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) Replacement,
HUB BEARING UNIT

(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Replacement,
LEFT-REAR WHEEL
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
SPEED SENSOR Replacement,
Replacement,
LEFT-FRONT WHEEL
WHEEL BEARING SPEED SENSOR
(MAGNETIC ENCODER) Replacement,
Replacement,
WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Replacement,
ABS Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
UNDER-DASH
BATTERY TERMINAL FUSE/RELAY BOX ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
FUSE BOX
CONTROL UNIT MODULATOR
No. 1 (100 A) T-9 No. 60 (50 A) T1 UNIT
WHT IGNITION SWITCH
6 3 VCC
W1 IG1
YEL WHT
No. 11 (7.5 A)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR A (36P)
A32
PUR PUR
16
IG1
5V
REGULATOR
No. 37 (30 A) A2 8
WHT WHT
FSR +B
No. 58 (30 A) A23 9 FAIL-SAFE RELAY
RED RED
No. 3 (30 A*1) ECM/PCM MR +B
No. 24 (15 A) 1 2
(20 A*2) B23 B28 A42
WHT WHT LT GRN LT GRN
PUMP MOTOR RELAY
BRAKE PEDAL A3
POSITION SWITCH WHT
Closed: Brake pedal pressed
A4
RED
SOLENOIDS
LEFT-FRONT
IN
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
OUT
RIGHT-FRONT
30 1
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
29
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
WHT WHT WHT
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION
WHT
CAN-H
17
CAN
CONTROLLER
IN
RED RED RED

SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
RED
CAN-L
IG1
OUT
LEFT-REAR
23 10
ABS ORN BLU
INDICATOR K-LINE IN
24
GRY
OUT
RIGHT-REAR
2 12
WHEEL SPEED ORN
SENSOR FL +B IN
IG1
1 3
GRY
FL-GND OUT
IC ELECTRIC
DATA LINK 2 2
GRN CURRENT
CONNECTOR (DLC) LIMITATION
FR +B
6 1 18
WHT PNK +B
2 1 FR-GND
BRAKE FLUID PARKING
LEVEL SWITCH BRAKE SWITCH 14 1 14
Closed: Low fluid Closed: Parking RED YEL
brake applied WHEEL SPEED RL +B
1 SENSOR GND
ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 25P CONNECTOR 7
BLU PARKING BRAKE 2
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
RED
RL-GND
5
16
PNK +B
SWITCH IC
1 SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
LT BLU
6
RR +B PUMP MOTOR
BLK
4
BLK
1P CONNECTOR 2
GRY
15
RR-GND
25
BLK
MR-GND
24
BLK
GND
: 12 V :5V
G301*3 G502 G203*3 *1: With trailer lighting connector *3: RHD model
G302*4 G402*4 *2: Without trailer lighting connector *4: LHD model
Wire side of female terminals
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
Terminal side of female terminals
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
FRONT REAR
Wire side of female terminals Terminal side of male terminals

ABS Symptom Troubleshooting - ABS indicator and brake system indicator do not go off at same time
ABS indicator and brake system indicator do not go off at the same time
Is the fuse blown?
NO - Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to Step 8 .
3. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector.
4. Check for continuity between ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal No. 16 and body ground.
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box
and the ABS modulator-control unit.■
NO - Install the new No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to Step 5 .
5. Reconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector.
7. Check the ABS indicator and brake system indicator for several seconds when the ignition switch is turned to ON
(II).
Do the indicators come on then go off?
YES - Replace the ABS modulator-control unit. ■
NO - The system is OK at this time.■
10. Measure the voltage between ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal No. 16 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the ABS
modulator-control unit.■
NO - RHD model: Repair open in the wire between the ABS modulator-control unit and body ground
(G203).■
LHD model: Repair open in the wire between the ABS modulator-control unit and body ground
(G402).■
13. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P connector.
14. Check for continuity between the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal and gauge control module
32P connector terminal (see table).
Sign ABS Modulator-control Unit 25P Gauge Control Module 32P
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
CAN-L No. 17 No. 29
CAN-H No. 1 No. 30
YES - Check for loose terminals in the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector. Clean terminal: G203 (RHD
model), G402 (LHD model) and recheck. If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS modulator-control
unit, and reset.■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the gauge control module and the ABS modulator-control unit.■
HDS does not communicate with the ABS modulator-control unit or the vehicle
1. Troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
ABS indicator and brake system indicator do not come on at the same time
1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting.
2. Substitute a known-good ABS modulator-control unit, then retest. If it is OK, replace the original ABS modulator-control unit.
ABS indicator and brake system indicator do not go off at the same time
1. Check for F-CAN DTCs, and troubleshoot and repair those first.
2. Symptom Troubleshooting.
ABS Symptom Troubleshooting Index
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the HDS. If there is no DTC, do the diagnostic procedure
for the symptom, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.
Symptom Diagnostic procedure
HDS does not communicate with the ABS modulator-control Troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
unit or the vehicle
ABS indicator and brake system indicator do not come on 1.Do the gauge control module troubleshooting.
at the same time 2.Substitute a known-good ABS modulator-control unit, then retest. If it is OK, replace the
original ABS modulator-control unit.
ABS indicator and brake system indicator do not go off at 1.Check for F-CAN DTCs, and troubleshoot and repair those first.
the same time 2.Symptom Troubleshooting.
3.Do the gauge control module troubleshooting.
ABS Modulator-control Unit Removal and Installation
NOTE:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint,
wash it off immediately with water.
Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
To prevent the brake fluid from dripping, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop
towel.
Removal
2. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector (A) by pulling up the lock (B); the
connector disconnects itself.
3. Disconnect the six brake lines from the ABS modulator-control unit.
NOTE: Brake lines are connected to the master cylinder (C) and to the right-front (D), the left-
rear (E), the right-rear (F), and the left-front (G) brake systems.
4. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit (H) with the bracket (I) from the body.
5. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit from the bracket.
Installation
1. Install the ABS modulator-control unit on the bracket.
2. Install the bracket with the ABS modulator-control unit to the body.
3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque.
4. Align the connecting surface of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector to the ABS modulator-control unit.
5. Lower the lock of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated.
6. Bleed the brake system.
7. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off.
8. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the ABS indicator does not come on.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator which could then be induced into the
normal brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system again.
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Front
2. Remove the grommet (A), then disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector (B).
3. Remove the bracket (C), the clip (D), and the stay (E).
4. Remove the bolt and the wheel speed sensor (F).
5. Install the wheel speed sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires.
If the wheel speed sensor comes in contact with the wheel bearing, it is faulty.
Make sure the grommet is installed properly.
6. Start the engine, and make sure the ABS indicator go off.
7. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the ABS indicator do not come on.
Rear
2. Pull back the carpet under the rear seat, then disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector
(A).
3. Remove the grommet (B), the bracket (C), the clips (D), and the stay (E).
If the wheel speed sensor comes in contact with the hub bearing unit, it is faulty.
6. Start the engine, and make sure the ABS indicator go off.
7. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the ABS indicator do not come on.
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul
Exploded View
Locknut wrench, 5.5 x 30 mm
07916-6390001
Rear caliper spring compressor

07HAE-SG00100
Snap ring pliers

07914-SA50001
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
Avoid breathing dust particles.
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an appropriate vacuum cleaner.
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different. If
these caliper pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid pad wear, and possibly uneven
tyre wear.
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately with water.
To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air.
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or the brake pads.
When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean genuine Honda DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid from an unopened
container. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
Coat the piston, the piston seal groove, and the caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
Use recommended greases in the rear caliper set.
After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
When you apply the silicone grease, make sure not to adhere to the terminal part of connectors and surrounding
switches. Also do not touch the switches and the terminal part of connector by hands or glove that adheres the
silicone grease.
Disassembly
1. Remove the caliper body.
2. Remove the pad spring (A) from the caliper body (B).
3. Rotate the piston (A) counterclockwise by using the locknut wrench (B), and remove the piston and piston boot (C).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the piston.
4. Remove the piston seal (A) from the caliper body (B).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the inner surface of the cylinder wall with the tool.
5. Install the rear caliper spring compressor (A) on the spring guide (B) inside of the caliper body.
6. Locate a locknut (C) on the top of the shaft (D) and turn the shaft clockwise until a plate (E) touches the caliper
body.
7. Turn the locknut (A) and put it on the plate. Turn the shaft for 1/4 to 1/2 clockwise and compress the adjusting
spring B.
8. Remove the circlip (C) with the snap ring pliers (D).
9. Depress the lower side of the locknut, tighten the upper side of the locknut and fix the position.
NOTE: Do not displace the position of the locknut until reassembling the circlip.
10. Remove the rear caliper spring compressor, then remove the spring guide (C), adjusting spring B, spacer (D),
bearing A, adjusting bolt (E) and the cup (F).
11. Remove the sleeve piston (A), then remove the rod (B) and the O-ring (C) from the shaft.
12. Remove the return spring (A), then remove the lever/shaft (B) from the caliper.
NOTE: Do not loosen a parking nut (C), with the shaft attached to the caliper. When disassembling the lever and
the shaft, fix the lever to the vice and loosen the nut.
13. Remove the shaft cover (D).
Reassembly
NOTE: When disassembling the lever and the shaft, assemble them according to the following procedure, referring to the
exploded view beforehand, then install them to the caliper.
Install the lever and a spring washer to the shaft.
Apply new sealant (Loctite 569) to the threads of the parking nut and install it.
Fix the lever to the vice and tighten the nut.
1. Apply silicone grease to a needle roller bearing (A) of the caliper body.
NOTE: Check if notch of the needle roller bearing faces to the cylinder.
2. Apply silicone grease to the seal of a new shaft cover (B), then install it to the caliper body.
3. Apply silicone grease to the hole (C) of the shaft. Turn the hole toward the caliper, then install the lever/shaft (D) to
the caliper body.
NOTE:
Rotate the shaft slowly when inserting so as not to damage the seal of the shaft cover.
Fix the lip of the shaft cover to the groove portion of the shaft completely.
4. Install the return spring (E).
5. Install the rod (A) to the shaft (B) so that it turns toward the center.
6. Install the new O-ring (C) to the sleeve piston (D).
7. Install two pins (E) of the sleeve piston to the two holes (F) of the caliper body, so that the rod is inserted in the
hole of the bottom side of the sleeve piston.
8. Apply rubber grease to the new cup (C) and assemble to the adjusting bolt (D). Assemble the bearing A, spacer
(E), adjusting spring B, and the spring guide (F), then install them into the caliper body.
NOTE: Install the cup with the groove facing toward the bearing A.
9. Install the rear caliper spring compressor (A) on the spring guide (B) in the caliper body and turn the shaft (C)
clockwise until the plate (D) touches the locknut (E).
10. Check that the bottom (F) of the spring guide is lower than the circlip installation groove (G) of the caliper body.
11. Install the circlip (A) with the snap ring pliers (B).
NOTE: Make sure the circlip securely fits in the groove of the caliper body.
12. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the new piston seal (A), then install it into the groove in the caliper body.
13. Apply a thin coat of rubber grease to the new piston boot (B), then install it into the groove in the caliper body.
14. Apply brake fluid to the outer surface of the piston, then set the piston in place on the caliper body.
15. Rotate the piston clockwise by using the locknut wrench (A) to install it. Make sure that the piston boot is properly
positioned into the groove of the piston.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the piston boot when rotate the piston.
16. Install the pad spring (A) to the caliper body (B).
17. Install the caliper body.
Front Brake Disc Replacement
NOTE: Keep any grease off the brake disc and brake pads.
3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts (A).
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), then remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To
prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from
the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose excessively.
5. Remove the brake disc flat screws (A).

6. Remove the brake disc (B) from the front hub.
NOTE: If the brake disc is stuck to the front hub, thread two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to push it
away from the front hub. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent the brake disc from binding.
7. Install the brake disc in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front hub and the inside of the brake disc.
Rear Brake Disc Replacement
NOTE: Keep any grease off the brake disc and brake pads.
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations.
2. Remove the rear wheel.
3. Release the parking brake lever fully.
4. Remove the caliper body and the brake pads from the caliper bracket.
5. Remove the caliper bracket (A) from the knuckle.
6. Remove the brake disc flat screws (A).

7. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub bearing unit.
NOTE: If the brake disc is stuck to the hub bearing unit, thread two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to
push it away from the hub bearing unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent the brake disc from binding.
8. Install the brake disc in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Adjust the parking brake.
Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the hub bearing unit and the inside of the brake
disc.
9. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel.
Front Brake Disc Inspection
Runout
3. Remove the brake pads.
4. Inspect the brake disc surface for damage and cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and remove all rust.
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts (B), and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque to hold
the brake disc securely against the hub.
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (0.39 in.) from the outer
edge of the brake disc.
Brake disc runout:
7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the brake disc with a commercially available on-car brake lathe.
Max. refinishing limit: 19.0 mm (0.75 in.)
NOTE:
If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it.
A new brake disc should be refinished if its runout is greater than 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.).
8. Install the brake pads.
Thickness and Parallelism

4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc thickness at eight points, about 45 ° apart and 10 mm (0.39 in.) in
from the outer edge of the brake disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less than the max.
refinishing limit.
Brake disc thickness:
Standard: 20.9−21.1 mm (0.82−0.83 in.)
Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.) max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference between the thickness measurements.
5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism, refinish the brake disc with a commercially available on-
car brake lathe.
NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it.
Rear Brake Disc Inspection
Runout
2. Remove the rear wheels.
4. Inspect the brake disc surface for damage and cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and remove all rust.
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts (B), and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque to hold
the brake disc securely against the hub.
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (0.39 in.) from the outer
edge of the brake disc.
Brake disc runout:
7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the brake disc with a commercially available on-car brake lathe.
NOTE:
If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it.
A new brake disc should be refinished if its runout is greater than 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.).
9. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheels.
Thickness and Parallelism

4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc thickness at eight points, about 45 ° apart and 10 mm (0.39 in.) in
from the outer edge of the brake disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less than the max.
refinishing limit.
Brake disc thickness:
Standard: 8.9−9.1 mm (0.35−0.36 in.)
Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.) max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference between the thickness measurements.
5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism, refinish the brake disc with a commercially available on-
car brake lathe.
NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it.
Brake Hose Replacement
NOTE:
Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so.
Plug the end of a hose and joints to prevent spilling brake fluid.
Front
2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the brake hose (B), then remove the brake hose bracket (C).
3. Remove the banjo bolt (A), and disconnect the brake hose (B) from the caliper.
4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (C), then remove the brake hose.
5. Install the brake hose (A) with the mounting bolt (B).
6. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with the banjo bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D).
7. Install the brake hose bracket (A) to the body, then connect the brake line (B). Do not twist the brake hose.
8. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake system.
9. Do the following checks:
Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and tighten if necessary.
Check the brake hoses for interference and twisting.
Rear
1. Remove the rear wheel.
2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the brake hose (B), then remove the brake hose clip (C).
3. Remove the banjo bolt (A), and disconnect the brake hose (B) from the caliper.
4. Connect the brake hose (A) to the caliper with the banjo bolt (B) and new sealing washers (C).
5. Install a new brake hose clip (A) to the brake hose (B) on the bracket, then connect the brake line (C). Do not twist
the brake hose.
6. After installing the brake hoses, bleed the brake system.
Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and tighten if necessary.
Check the brake hose for interference and twisting.
8. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel.
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Locknut wrench, 5.5 x 30 mm
07916-6390001
Inspection
3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate.
Brake pad thickness:
Standard: 6.8−7.5 mm (0.27−0.30 in.)
4. If the brake pad thickness of any of the pads is less than the service limit, replace the rear brake pads as a set.
Replacement
1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.
4. Remove the parking brake cable mounting nut (A).
5. Remove the flange bolts (B) while holding respective caliper pins (C) with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the
pin boot, and remove the caliper (D). Check the hose, the pin boots, and the parking brake cable boots for damage
and deterioration.
NOTE: Do not twist the brake hose and the parking brake cable to prevent damage.
6. Remove the pad shims (A) and the brake pads (B).
7. Remove the pad retainers (A).

8. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks.
Verify that the caliper pins (C) move in and out smoothly. Clean and lube if needed.
9. Inspect the brake disc, and check for damage and cracks.
10. Apply Molykote M77 grease to the retainers on their mating surfaces (indicated by the arrows) against the caliper
bracket.
11. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess grease off the retainers. Keep the grease off the brake disc and the brake
pads.
12. Rotate the caliper piston (A) clockwise into the cylinder by using the locknut wrench.
NOTE: Be careful when moving the piston back in the caliper; brake fluid might overflow from the master cylinder's
reservoir.
13. Apply Molykote M77 grease to the pad side of the shims (A), the back of the brake pads (B), and the other areas
indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess grease off the pad shims and the brake pads. Keep grease off the brake
discs and the brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce stopping ability.
14. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the bottom
inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a
momentary loss of braking efficiency.
15. Align the cutout (A) in the piston (B) with the tab (C) on the inner pad. Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to
avoid twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, back it out so it is positioned properly.
16. Install the caliper. Install the flange bolts (D), and tighten it to the specified torque while holding the respective
caliper pins (E) with a wrench, being careful not to damage the pin boots and parking brake cable boots.
17. Install the parking brake cable mounting nut (F).
19. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work.
NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a
set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
20. Add brake fluid as needed.
21. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Test-drive the
vehicle, then recheck for leaks.
22. Adjust the parking brake.
Brake Pedal Replacement
NOTE: The illustration shows RHD model.
1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover.
2. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch connector (A).
3. Remove the lock pin (B) and joint pin (C).
4. RHD model: Remove the brake pedal support member (D).
5. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts (E).
6. Remove the brake pedal with bracket (F).
7. Install the brake pedal in the reverse order of removal.
8. Adjust the brake pedal and the brake pedal position switch.
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
Pedal Height
2. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no longer touching the brake
pedal.
3. Pull back the carpet and find the cutout (B) in the insulation. Measure the pedal height (C) at the center of the
pedal pad (D) to the floor without the insulation.
Standard pedal height (with carpet removed):
M/T: 139 mm (5.5 in.)
A/T: 138 mm (5.4 in.)
4. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the pushrod (B) in or out with pliers until the standard pedal height from
the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod
pressed.
Brake Pedal Position Switch Clearance

5. Lift up on the brake pedal by hand. Push in the brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed
(threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Turn the switch 45 ° clockwise to lock it. The gap
between the brake pedal position switch and the pad is automatically adjusted to 0.7 mm (0.028 in.) by locking the
switch. Make sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is released.
6. Install the all removed parts in the reverse order of removal.
7. Check the brake pedal free play.
Pedal Free Play

1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), inspect the play (A) at the brake pedal pad (B) by pushing the brake pedal by
hand. If the brake pedal free play is out of specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch (C). If the brake
pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in brake drag.
Free play: 1−5 mm (0.04−0.20 in.)
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test
1. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector.
2. Check for continuity between the terminals (1) and (2) with the float in the down position and in the up position.
NOTE:
Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir. With the float down, there should be continuity.
Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX (upper) level (A). With the float up, there should be no continuity.
If both the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on at the same time, check the ABS system
first.
If the parking brake switch and brake fluid level switch are OK, but the brake system indicator does not
function, do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
3. Reconnect the brake fluid level switch connector.
Parking Brake Switch Test
NOTE: If both the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on at the same time, check the ABS system first.
2. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A) from the parking brake switch (B).
3. Check for continuity between the switch terminal (C) and body ground.
With the parking brake lever pulled, there should be continuity.
With the parking brake lever released, there should be no continuity.
NOTE: If the parking brake switch and the brake fluid level switch are OK, but the brake system indicator does not
function, do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
4. Reconnect the parking brake switch connector.
5. Install the center console.
VSA System Description
VSA Modulator-control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 36P Connector
System Outline
ABS Features
EBD Features
TCS Features
VSA System Features
Brake Assist Features
Modulator Unit
HSA (Hill Start Assist) Features
VSA System Component Location Index
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR RIGHT-REAR WHEEL

Replacement, SPEED SENSOR
Replacement,
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT HUB BEARING UNIT

Update, (MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Removal and Installation, Replacement,
in the Shop Manual,

P/N 62TF000B
VSA OFF SWITCH

Test,
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
YAW RATE-LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR LEFT-REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
Replacement, Replacement,
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
*: The illustration shows LHD model, RHD model is similar. Replacement,
in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000B
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
Replacement,
WHEEL BEARING LEFT-FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
(MAGNETIC ENCODER) Replacement,
Replacement, WHEEL BEARING
in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000B (MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Replacement,
VSA System Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
UNDER-DASH
BATTERY TERMINAL FUSE/RELAY BOX VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
FUSE BOX
CONTROL UNIT MODULATOR UNIT
No. 1 (100 A) T-9 No. 60 (50 A) T1
WHT IGNITION SWITCH
6 3 VCC
W1 IG1
YEL WHT
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION No. 11 (7.5 A) A32

PUR
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
PUR
30 5V
SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR No. 37 (30 A) A2 SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR 1P CONNECTOR IG1

12
REGULATOR
WHT WHT
FSR +B
No. 58 (30 A) A23 13
RED FAIL-SAFE RELAY
RED
No. 3 (30 A*3) ECM/PCM MR +B
(20 A*4) No. 24 (10 A) 1 2
B23 B28 A42
WHT WHT LT GRN LT GRN
PUMP MOTOR RELAY
Q16 BRAKE PEDAL A3
POSITION SWITCH WHT
Closed: Brake pedal pressed
A4 VCC
RED
YAW RATE-
LATERAL/
LONGITUDINAL A44 STEERING
VSA OFF SWITCH ACCELERATION
SENSOR
RED ANGLE
SENSOR UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX PRESSURE
SENSOR
2 11
+B GRY
4
PUR
1
CONNECTOR Q BRN
STR-A
VCC
5 3 4 27
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR A BLK
2
WHT
4 3
GRN
STR-B
26
VSA1
YEL RED LT BLU NC

STR-D VCC
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE 1 5 5 9 NO
BLK BLK PUR
BRAKE SYSTEM SVCC VSA2
INDICATOR 21 1 34
YEL BLU NC
SGND
G501 G502
ABS 30 14
INDICATOR WHT WHT WHT WHT NO
CAN-H CAN
29 1 CONTROLLER SOLENOIDS
VSA RED RED RED RED LEFT-FRONT
INDICATOR CAN-L
23 25
ORN 3 RED RED IN
WHT IG1
WEN
VSA ACTIVATION 24 3
INDICATOR OUT
GRY BLU
9 K-LINE RIGHT-FRONT
RED
WHEEL SPEED
2 VSA OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
ORN
19
IN
FL +B IG1
GEAR SHIFT SENSOR
CONTROL MODULE 1 6
GRY OUT
FL-GND LEFT-REAR
IC ELECTRIC
2 23
DATA LINK GRN CURRENT
CONNECTOR (DLC) LIMITATION IN
FR +B
6 1 10
WHT PNK +B OUT
2 PARKING 1 FR-GND RIGHT-REAR
BRAKE FLUID BRAKE SWITCH
LEVEL SWITCH 14 1 21
Closed: Parking RED YEL
Closed: Low fluid
1
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
brake applied
12
WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR 2
RL +B
8
GND
IN
RED RED OUT

RL-GND
IC
7
BLU
1
YAW RATE-LATERAL/
LT BLU
18
RR +B PUMP MOTOR
BLK
16
PNK +B
2
LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION
GRY
RR-GND
4
4
BLK
SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
BLK
36
MR-GND
35
BLK
GND
: 12 V :5V
G302*1 G502 G402*1
*1: LHD model *3: With trailer
lighting connector
G301*2 G203*2 *2: RHD model *4: Without trailer
lighting connector
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR

STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
5P CONNECTOR
GEAR SHIFT CONTROL MODULE
Wire side of female terminals
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

2P CONNECTOR
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) FRONT REAR
Wire side of female Terminal side of

terminals male terminals

VSA System Symptom Troubleshooting - VSA activation indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are stored
VSA activation indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are stored
2. Check the VSA activation indicator for several seconds when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II).
Does the indicator come on then go off?
YES - The system is OK at this time.■
NO - Go to Step 3 .
4. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 5P connector.
5. Check the VSA OFF switch.
Is the VSA OFF switch OK?
NO - Replace the VSA OFF switch. ■
7. Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 5P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
YES - Repair short to body ground between the gauge control module and the VSA OFF switch.■
NO - Substitute a known-good gauge control module, then go to Step 1 and recheck. If it is OK, replace the
original gauge control module. ■
VSA System Symptom Troubleshooting - ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA indicator do not go off at
the same time
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA indicator do not go off at the same time
2. Check the No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
3. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector.
4. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 5P connector.
5. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal No. 30 and body ground.
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box and the VSA modulator-control unit or the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration
sensor.■
NO - Install the new No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to Step 7 .
8. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal No. 30 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and the
VSA modulator-control unit.■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the VSA modulator-control unit and body ground (G402 *1 , G203 *2 ).■
*1: LHD model
*2: RHD model
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 37 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and the VSA
13. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal and gauge control module
Sign VSA Modulator-control Unit 36P Gauge Control Module 32P
CAN-L No. 1 No. 29
CAN-H No. 14 No. 30
NO - Repair open in the wire between the gauge control module and the VSA modulator-control unit.■
14. Reconnect all connectors.
15. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the latest software. If the unit already has the latest
software, substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit.
16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again.
17. Check the ABS indicator, brake system indicator and the VSA indicator for several seconds when the ignition
switch is turned to ON (II).
Do the indicators come on then go off?
YES - If the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the VSA modulator-control
unit was substituted, replace the original VSA modulator-control unit. ■
NO - Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector. If the VSA modulator-control
unit was updated, substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit, then retest. If the VSA modulator-
control unit was substituted, go to Step 1 .
HDS does not communicate with the VSA modulator-control unit or the vehicle
VSA activation indicator does not come on at start-up (bulb check)
2. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit, then retest.
If it is OK, the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the VSA modulator-control unit was substituted, replace
the original VSA modulator-control unit.
VSA activation indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are stored
1. Symptom troubleshooting.
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA indicator do not come on at the same time
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA indicator do not go off at the same time
1. Check for F-CAN DTCs, and troubleshoot and repair those first.
VSA System Symptom Troubleshooting Index
HDS does not communicate with the VSA modulator-control unit or the Troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
vehicle
VSA activation indicator does not come on at start-up (bulb check) 1.Do the gauge control module troubleshooting.
2.Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit, then
retest. If it is OK, the VSA modulator-control unit was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the VSA modulator-control unit was
substituted, replace the original VSA modulator-control unit.
VSA activation indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are stored 1.Symptom troubleshooting.
2.Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the latest
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA indicator do not come on 1.Do the gauge control module troubleshooting.
at the same time 2.Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the latest
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA indicator do not go off at 1.Check for F-CAN DTCs, and troubleshoot and repair those first.
the same time 2.Symptom troubleshooting.
3.Do the gauge control module troubleshooting.
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
NOTE:
Do not damage or drop the combination switch as the steering angle sensor is sensitive to
shock and vibration.
The illustration shows LHD model, RHD model is symmetrical.
2. Remove the steering column covers and the cable reel.
3. Remove the combination switch assembly.
4. Remove the combination light switch (A) and the wiper/washer switch (B) from the combination
switch body assembly (C).
5. Install the combination switch body assembly in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Do not remove the steering angle sensor from the combination switch body.
When installing the cable reel, set the turn signal canceling sleeve position.
Note that the tightening order is specified for combination switch mounting screws.
VSA Modulator-control Unit Removal and Installation
NOTE:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint,
wash it off immediately with water.
Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
Plug the end of a hose and joints to prevent spilling brake fluid.
Removal
2. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector (A) by pushing the lock (B) and
pulling down the lever (C); the connector disconnects itself.
3. Disconnect the six brake lines from the VSA modulator-control unit.
NOTE: Brake lines are connected to the master cylinder (D) and to the left-front (E), the right-
front (F), the left-rear (G), and the right-rear (H) brake systems.
4. Remove the VSA modulator-control unit (I) with the bracket (J) from the body.
5. Remove the VSA modulator-control unit from the bracket.
Installation
1. Install the VSA modulator-control unit onto the bracket.
2. Install the bracket with the VSA modulator-control unit to the body.
3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque.
4. Align the connecting surface of the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector to the VSA modulator-control unit.
5. Pull up the lever of the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated.
7. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization procedure.
8. Start the engine, and check that the ABS and the VSA indicators go off.
9. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure that the ABS and the VSA indicators do not come on.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator which could then be induced into the
normal brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system again.
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Update
Honda diagnostic system (HDS)
Honda interface module (HIM)
HDS pocket tester
NOTE:
Use this procedure when you need to update the VSA modulator-control unit during troubleshooting procedures.
Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software version.
Before you update the VSA modulator-control unit, make sure the battery in the vehicle is fully charged, and
connect a jumper battery (not a battery charger) to maintain system voltage.
Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) during the update. If there is a problem with the update, leave the ignition
switch to ON (II).
To prevent VSA modulator-control unit damage, do not operate anything electrical (headlights, audio system,
brakes, A/C, power windows, door locks, etc.) during the update.
To ensure the latest program is installed, do a VSA modulator-control unit update whenever the VSA modulator-
control unit is substituted or replaced.
You cannot update a VSA modulator-control unit with a program it already has. It will only accept a new program.
If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashed
during the update, leave the ignition switch in ON (II) when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector
(DLC). This will prevent VSA modulator-control unit damage.
DTCs stored in memory are cleared when the VSA modulator-control unit is updated.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start the engine.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't,
troubleshooting the DLC circuit.
4. Select the update mode, and follow the screen prompts to update the VSA modulator-control unit.
5. If the software in the VSA modulator-control unit is the latest, disconnect the HDS/HIM from the DLC. If the
software in the VSA modulator-control unit is not the latest, follow the instructions on the screen.
6. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization procedure.
VSA Sensor Neutral Position Memorization
NOTE: Make sure to connect and disconnect the HDS to the 16P data link connector (DLC) with the ignition switch in
LOCK (0).
1. Start the engine, let it idle.
2. Slowly drive the vehicle straight without operating the steering wheel for 3 m (10 ft) or more, then park the vehicle on
a flat surface while holding the steering wheel in the straight ahead position.
3. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS to the 16P data link connector (DLC) (A) under the driver's
side of the dashboard.
5. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization with the HDS.
NOTE:
Do not press the brake pedal during this procedure.
Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't
troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
VSA OFF Switch Test
2. Pull the fuse lid panel (A).
3. Push out the VSA OFF switch (A) from the back of the fuse lid panel.
4. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 5P connector (B).
5. Check for continuity between the VSA OFF switch 5P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be
continuity when the switch is pressed, and no continuity when the switch is released.
6. Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 5P connector terminals No. 4 and No. 5. There should be continuity
at all times.
7. Install the VSA OFF switch in the reverse order of removal.
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Front
2. Remove the grommet (A), then disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector (B).
3. Remove the bracket (C), the clip (D), and the stay (E).
If the wheel speed sensor comes in contact with the wheel bearing, it is faulty.
6. Start the engine, and make sure the ABS and the VSA indicator go off.
7. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the ABS and the VSA indicator do not come on.
Rear
2. Pull back the carpet under the rear seat, then disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector
(A).
3. Remove the grommet (B), the bracket (C), the clips (D), and the stay (E).
If the wheel speed sensor comes in contact with the hub bearing unit, it is faulty.
6. Start the engine, and make sure the ABS and the VSA indicator go off.
7. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the ABS and the VSA indicator do not come on.
Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Replacement
NOTE:
Do not damage or drop the sensor as it is sensitive.
Do not use power tools.
3. Remove the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor (A) mounting nuts.
4. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector (B).
5. Check for deformation in the bracket (C). If necessary replace it.
6. Install the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor in the reverse order of removal.
7. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization.
Driveshaft Disassembly
Special Tools Required Welded type
Threaded adapter, 22 x 1.5 mm
07XAC-0010100
Sliding hammer set

07936-5790002
Double loop type
Boot band pincers
, commercially available
Puller
, commercially available
Inboard Joint Side
Low profile type
1. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage the boot.
If the boot band is welded type (A), cut the boot band.
If the boot band is a double loop type (B), lift up the band end (C), and push it into the clip (D).
If the boot band is a low profile type (E), pinch the boot band using the commercially available boot band
pincers (F).
2. Make marks (A) on each roller (B) and the inboard joint (C) to identify the locations of rollers to the grooves in the
inboard joint. Then remove the inboard joint on a clean shop towel (D). Be careful not to drop the rollers when
separating them from the inboard joint.
NOTE: Do not engrave or scribe any marks on the rolling surface.
3. Make marks (A) on the rollers (B) and spider (C) to identify the locations of the rollers on the spider, then remove
the rollers.
NOTE: Do not engrave or scribe any marks on the rolling surface.
4. Remove the circlip (D).
5. Make marks (E) on the spider and driveshaft (F) to identify the position of the spider on the shaft.
6. Remove the spider.
NOTE: If necessary, use a commercially available puller.
7. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damaging the boot.
8. Remove the inboard boot. Be careful not to damage the boot.
9. Remove the vinyl tape.
Outboard Joint Side

1. Remove the boot bands (A). Lift up the three tabs (B) with a screwdriver. Be careful not to damage the boot.
2. Slide the outboard boot (A) partially to the inboard joint side. Be careful not to damage the boot.
3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and the outboard joint inner race.
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same level as the outboard joint rim (C).
5. Securely clamp the driveshaft in a bench vise with a shop towel.
6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the 22 x 1.5 mm threaded adapter (B) and the sliding hammer set (C).
7. Remove the driveshaft from the bench vise.
8. Remove the stop ring from the driveshaft.
9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damaging the boot.
10. Remove the outboard boot. Be careful not to damage the boot.
11. Remove the vinyl tape.
Driveshaft Inspection
1. Check the inboard boot (A) and the outboard boot (B) on the driveshaft (C) for cracks, damage, leaking grease, and
loose boot bands (D). If any damage is found, replace the boot and boot bands.
2. Check the driveshaft for cracks and damage. If any damage is found, replace the driveshaft.
3. Check the inboard joint (E) and the outboard joint (F) for cracks and damage. If any damage is found, replace the
inboard joint or the outboard joint as an assembly.
4. Hold the inboard joint and turn the front wheel by hand, then make sure the joint is not excessively loose. If
necessary, replace the inboard joint or the outboard joint as an assembly.
Intermediate Shaft Removal
1. Drain the transmission fluid. Reinstall the drain using a new sealing washer.
2. Remove the right driveshaft.
3. Remove the control cable cover (A).
4. Remove the heat cover (A).

5. Remove the two dowel bolts (B) and the flange bolt (C).
6. Remove the intermediate shaft (D) from the differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontal until it is clear of the
differential to prevent damaging the oil seal.
Intermediate Shaft Installation
1. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft contacts the differential thoroughly with solvent or brake cleaner, and
dry with compressed air.
NOTE: Do not wash the rubber parts with solvent.
2. Install a new set ring (A) onto the set ring groove (B) of the intermediate shaft (C).
3. Insert the intermediate shaft (A) into the differential correctly.

NOTE: Insert the intermediate shaft carefully to prevent damaging the oil seal.
4. Install the flange bolt (B) and the two dowel bolts (C).
5. Install the heat cover (D).
6. Install the control cable cover (A).

7. Install the right driveshaft.
8. Refill the transmission with the recommended transmission fluid.
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly
Half shaft base
07NAF-SR30101
Oil seal driver, 44.5 mm

07947-SB00100
1. Remove the outer seal (A), and the external snap ring (B) from the intermediate shaft (C).
2. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the intermediate shaft bearing (B) using a press. Be careful not to damage
the bearing support ring (C) on the intermediate shaft during disassembly.
3. Remove the internal snap ring (A) from the bearing support (B).
4. Press intermediate shaft bearing (A) out of the bearing support (B) using the 44.5 mm oil seal driver (C), the half
shaft base (D) and a press.
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly
Exploded View
Oil seal driver, 65 mm
07JAD-PL90100

07746-0010400

07746-0030400

07749-0010000
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed, during this procedure.
1. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry them with compressed air.
NOTE: Do not wash the rubber parts with solvent.
2. Press a new intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the bearing support (B) using the 52 x 55 mm bearing driver
attachment (C), the 15 x 135L driver handle (D), and a press.
3. Install the internal snap ring (A) into the groove (B) of the bearing support.
4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) into the new shaft bearing (B) using the 35 mm inner bearing driver attachment (C)
and a press.
5. Install the external snap ring (A) in the groove of the intermediate shaft (B).
6. Install a new outer seal (A) into the bearing support (B) using the 65 mm oil seal driver (C), and a press. Press the
seal until it is 0±0.2 mm (0±0.08 in.) below the surface of the bearing support end.
Steering Component Location Index
DRIVER'S AIRBAG
Replacement,
STEERING WHEEL
Removal,
Disassembly/Reassembly,
Installation,
STEERING COLUMN
Removal and Installation,
Inspection,
Steering Lock Replacement,
POWER STEERING GEARBOX

Rack Guide Adjustment,
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement,
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement,
EPS Component location Index,
The illustration shows RHD model, LHD model is similar.

Steering Wheel Rotational Play Check
1. Turn the front wheels to the straight ahead position.
2. Measure how far you can turn the steering wheel left and right without moving the front wheels.
If the play is within the limit, the steering gearbox and the linkage are OK.
If the play exceeds the limit, adjust the rack guide. If the play is still excessive after rack guide adjustment,
inspect the steering linkage and steering gearbox.
Rotational play: 0−10 mm (0−0.39 in.)
Power Steering Assist Check
NOTE: This test should be done with original equipment tyres and wheels at the correct tyre pressure.
1. Start the engine, and let it idle.
2. Attach a commercially available spring scale to the steering wheel. With the engine idling and the vehicle on a
clean, dry floor, pull the scale as shown, and read it as soon as the tyres begin to turn.
3. If the scale reads no more than 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 lbf), the power assist is OK. If it reads more, check these items:
Steering linkage
Rack guide adjustment
EPS system
Steering Column Removal and Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures
before doing repairs or service.
Removal
Be careful not to pull the bracket (A) on the front side of steering column out of its normal position.
If the bracket accidentally comes out, replace the steering column as an assembly.

2. Release the lock lever, and adjust the steering column to the full tilt up position, and to the full telescopic in
position.
3. Tighten the lock lever.
4. Remove the driver's airbag and the steering wheel.
6. Remove the steering joint cover (A).
7. Hold the lower slide shaft (A) on the column with a piece of wire (B) between the joint yoke (C) of the lower slide
shaft and joint yoke (D) of the upper shaft to prevent the lower slide shaft from pulling out.
8. Release the lock lever, and adjust the steering column to the full telescopic out position, then tighten the lock lever.
NOTE: Do not release lock lever when removing the steering column from the frame.
9. Remove the steering joint bolt (A).
10. Disconnect the steering joint (A) by moving the steering joint toward the column.
NOTE:
If the center guide (B) is in place and has not moved, leave it in place.
If the center guide has moved or been removed, discard it.
11. Remove the column covers.
12. Disconnect the connectors from the ignition switch, and release the wire harness clips (A) from
the steering column.
13. Disconnect the wire harness connectors from the combination switch assembly/cable reel (B).
14. Remove the combination switch assembly from the steering column shaft by removing the three
screws (C).
15. Remove the steering column (D) by removing the attaching nuts and bolts. If the lower slide
shaft (E) is removed, slip it into the upper shaft (F) by aligning the paint or stamped marks (G).
Installation
1. Install the steering column in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Tighten the steering column mounting nuts and bolts to the specified torque in the following order; bolts,
then nuts.
Make sure the wires are not caught or pinched by any parts.
Take care not to let the sliding capsules fall out of position during column installation.
Tighten the three screws (A) to the sequence shown.
2. Center the steering rack within its stroke.
3. With the rack in the straight ahead driving position, then cut the wire.
4. Slip the lower end of the steering joint (A) onto the pinion shaft (B).
NOTE:
Pinion shaft with center guide; install the steering joint by aligning the center guide (C).
Pinion shaft without center guide; position the steering column by aligning the gap (D) with the angle.
5. Release the lock lever, and adjust the steering column to the full tilt down position, and to the full telescopic out
position, then tighten the lock lever.
6. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the groove (B) around the pinion shaft, then loosely install the lower
steering joint bolt (C). Be sure that the joint bolt is securely in the groove in the pinion shaft.
7. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the steering joint is fully seated, then tighten the lower joint bolt to the
specified torque.
8. Install the steering joint cover (A).

9. Install the steering wheel and the driver's airbag.
10. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure, and do these tasks:
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and check that the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and
then go off.
Make sure the horn and turn signal switches work properly.
Make sure the steering wheel switches work properly.
11. After installation, do these checks:
Check the steering wheel spoke angle. If the steering spoke angles to the right and left are not equal
(steering wheel and rack are not centered), correct the engagement of the joint/pinion shaft splines.
Set the steering column to the center tilt position, and to the center telescopic position, then do the front toe
inspection.
Steering Column Inspection
Inspection
1. Remove the steering column.
2. Do these checks:
Check the steering column ball bearing (A) and the steering joint bearings (B) for play
and proper movement. If any bearing is noisy or has excessive play, replace the steering
column as an assembly.
Check the absorbing plates (C) and sliding capsules (D) for distortion or breakage. If
there is distortion or breakage, replace the steering column as an assembly.
Check the tilt mechanism and telescopic mechanism for movement and damage.
Check the lower slide shaft (E) for smooth movement in and out. If the lower slide shaft is
removed, slip it into the upper shaft by aligning the paint or stamped marks (F). If it
sticks or binds, replace the steering column as an assembly.
3. Install the steering column.
Check of Tilting Force

1. Set the steering wheel in the straight driving position, and loosen the lock lever fully.
2. Attach the spring scale to the highest point of the steering wheel, and tilt the steering column to the lowest
position.
3. Pull the spring scale straight up, and read the force required to move the steering column.
4. Attach the spring scale to the lowest point of the steering wheel.
5. Pull the spring scale straight down, and read the force required to move the steering column.
Tilting force (upward/downward):
Standard: 69 N (7.0 kgf, 15 lbf) max.
6. If the measurement is higher than the specified, replace the steering column as an assembly.
Check of Telescoping Force

1. Set the steering wheel in the straight ahead driving position, and loosen the lock lever fully.
2. Attach the spring scale to the center point of the steering wheel.
3. Pull the spring scale, and read the force required to move the steering column during telescopic.
Telescoping force:
Standard: 140 N (14.3 kgf, 31.5 lbf) max.
Check of Lock Lever Force

1. Move the lock lever (A) from the loosened position to the locked position three to five times, then release the lock
lever. Adjust the steering column to the center tilt position and also to the full telescopic out position, and hold the
steering wheel.
2. Using a push gauge, push the lock lever at 10 mm (0.39 in.) from its end, and measure the force required to move
lock lever.
Lock lever force:
82 N (8.4 kgf, 18.2 lbf) min.
Steering Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement
1. Remove the steering gearbox.
2. Position a 34 mm socket wrench (A) on the flange part of the gearbox housing with a washer (B), a 10 x 105 mm
flange bolt (C) and a 10 mm nut (D) as shown.
3. Hold the flange bolt with a wrench, and tighten the nut with a wrench. Remove the gearbox mount cushion (E).
4. Apply a mild soap and water solution to the new gearbox mount cushion surface (A), then place it on the gearbox
mounting cushion hole.
5. Position the 34 mm socket wrench on the flange part of the gearbox housing with a washer, a flange bolt, and a nut
as shown.
6. Install the gearbox mount cushion by tightening the nut until the mount cushion edges (B) contact the gearbox
flange surface.
7. Install the steering gearbox.
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection
Steering Lock Replacement
1. Remove the steering column.
2. Center-punch each of the two shear bolts, and drill their heads off with a 5.0 mm (0.20 in.) drill bit. Be careful not to
damage the switch body when removing the shear bolts.
3. Remove the shear bolts from the switch body.
4. Install the switch body without the key inserted.
5. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts.
6. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper operation of the steering wheel lock and that the ignition key turns
freely.
7. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B) twist off.
8. Rewrite the new immobilizer control unit-receiver , and make sure the immobilizer system works properly.
Steering Rack End Removal and Installation
RHD model
LHD model
Removal
NOTE:
Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the steering gearbox.
The illustrations show RHD model, LHD model is similar for items not shown in this section.
1. Remove the boot bands (A) and discard them. Remove the tie-rod clips (B), and pull the boots away from the ends
of the steering gearbox.
2. Hold the gearbox housing using a C-clamp (A) and wooden blocks (B) as shown. Do not clamp the cylinder part of
the gearbox housing in the vise.
3. Unbend the lock washer (A).
4. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the steering rack (B) with one wrench, and unscrew both rack ends (C) with
another wrench. Be careful not to damage the rack shaft surface with the wrench.
5. Remove the lock washer (D) and rubber stop (E).
Installation
1. Hold the gearbox housing using a C-clamp (A) and wooden blocks (B) as shown. Do not clamp the cylinder part of
the gearbox housing in the vise.
2. Install the new rubber stop (A) and a new lock washer (B). Align the lock washer tabs (C) with the slots (D) on the
rack end (E) while holding the lock washer in place. Repeat this step for the other side of the rack.
3. Hold the flat surface sections of the steering rack with one wrench, and tighten both rack ends with another wrench.
Be careful not to damage the rack surface with the wrench.
4. Bend the lock washer (A) back against the flat spots on the rack end joint housing.
5. Apply multipurpose grease to the circumference of the rack end joint housing (A).
6. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot grooves (B) on the rack end.
7. Clean off any grease or contamination from the boot installation grooves (A) around on the gearbox housing. Install
the boots (B) on the rack ends with the tie-rod clips (C), and fit the boot end in the installation grooves in the
housing properly.
8. After installing the boots, wipe the grease off the thread section (D) of the rack end.
9. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A) with the holes (B) of the band.
10. Close the ear portion (A) of the boot band (B) with commercially available pincers, Oetiker 1098 or equivalent (C).
11. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the boots are not deformed or twisted.
12. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end.
Steering Rack Guide Removal/Installation
NOTE:
During removal/installation, do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the steering gearbox.
2. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide screw (B), the spring (C), disc washer (D), and rack guide (E).
3. Replace the O-ring (F) from the rack guide. Wipe the grease off the sliding surface of the rack guide.
4. Apply multipurpose grease to the new O-ring, then install it to the rack guide.
5. Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding surface and the circumference of the rack guide, and install it onto the
gearbox housing. Wipe the grease off the threaded section of the gearbox housing.
6. Install the disc washer onto the gearbox housing.
7. Install the spring onto the gearbox housing.
8. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw and apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or Loctite 5699) to the
middle of the threads. Loosely install the rack guide screw on the steering gearbox.
NOTE: If more than 5 minutes has passed after applying the sealant, remove the old sealant and residue, and
reapply new sealant.
9. Loosely install the locknut.
10. Adjust the rack guide screw. After adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by sliding the rack right and left.
Steering Rack Guide Adjustment
Locknut eye wrench, 40 mm
07MAA-SL00100
1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position.
2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the locknut wrench, then remove the rack guide screw (B).
3. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw (A), and apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or Loctite 5699) to
the middle of the threads (B). Loosely install the rack guide screw on the steering gearbox.
NOTE: If more than 5 minutes has passed after applying the sealant, remove the old sealant and residue, and
reapply new sealant.
4. Tighten the rack guide screw (A) to 25 N·m (2.5 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft), then loosen it.
5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 4 lbf·ft), then back it off to the specified angle.
Specified return angle: 10±3 °
6. Hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench, and tighten the locknut by hand until it's fully seated.
7. Install the locknut wrench on the locknut (B), and hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench.
Tighten the locknut to the specified torque.
8. Check for unusual steering effort through the complete turning range.
9. Check the steering wheel rotation play and the power assist.
Steering Wheel Removal
2. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove the driver's airbag from the steering wheel.
3. Disconnect the cable reel subharness connector (A).
4. Loosen the steering wheel bolt (B).
5. Install a commercially available steering wheel puller (A) on the steering wheel (B). Free the steering wheel from the
steering column shaft by turning the pressure bolt (C) of the puller.
Note these items when removing the steering wheel:
Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering column shaft when removing the steering wheel.
If you thread the puller bolts (D) into the wheel hub more than five threads, the bolts will hit the cable reel
and damage it. To prevent this, install a pair of jam nuts five threads up on each puller bolt.
6. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the steering wheel bolt and steering wheel from the steering column.
Steering Wheel Installation
1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the front wheels are pointing straight ahead, then center the cable
reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise about three
full turns. The arrow mark (B) on the cable reel label should point straight up.
2. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal canceling sleeve (B) as shown. Install the steering wheel on to the
steering column shaft, making sure the steering wheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of the cable reel and tabs of
the turn signal canceling sleeve. Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft when installing the
steering wheel.
3. Install the steering wheel bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque. Connect the cable reel subharness
connector (B). Make sure the wire harness is routed and fastened properly.
4. Install the driver's airbag.
5. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure, and do these tasks:
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and check that the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and
then go off.
6. After installation, do these checks:
Check the steering wheel spoke angle. If the steering spoke angles to the right and left are not equal
(steering wheel is not centered), correct the engagement of the wheel/column shaft splines.
Set the steering column to the center tilt position, and to the center telescopic position, then do the front toe
inspection.
Steering Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Driver, 32.5 mm
070AD-SAA0100
1. Disconnect the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle.
2. Remove the tie-rod end from the rack end.
3. Remove the tie-rod ball joint boot from the tie-rod end, and wipe the old grease off the ball pin.
4. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) with fresh multipurpose grease.
5. Pack the interior of the new tie-rod ball joint boot (B) and lip (C) with fresh multipurpose grease.
Note these items when installing new grease:
Keep grease off the boot mounting area (D) and the tapered section (E) of the ball pin.
Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the boot.
6. Install the new tie-rod ball joint boot (A) using the inner bearing driver attachment. The boot must not have a gap at
the boot installation sections (B). After installing the boot, check the ball pin tapered section for grease
contamination, and wipe it if necessary.
7. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end.
8. Connect the tie-rod ball joint to the knuckle.
EPS System Description
EPS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (2P)
EPS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (2P)
EPS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector C (16P)
EPS Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
EPS CONTROL UNIT
BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX
VCC
No. 2 (60 A) POWER RELAY
A2
WHT
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY WHT
+B
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BOX CONNECTOR B (36P)
No. 1 (100 A) No. 60 (IGN) (50 A)
T-9
WHT WHT STEERING GEARBOX
TORQUE SENSOR
6 IG1 3 T1 C3 *1 1
YEL WHT YEL
VS1 VS1
*2
YEL PNK
IGNITION C2 *1 2
SWIHTCH W1 No. 11 (7. 5 A) B11 C8 PNK
YEL PUR T/S GND T/S GND
PUR IG1 *2
GAUGE CONTROL PNK BLU/RED
MODULE C1 *1 3
BLU
TEST TACHOMETER VS2 *2 VS2
CONNECTOR BLU WHT/GRN
EPS
INDICATOR 2
30 LT BLU
WHT
CAN-H
29 FAIL-SAFE
RED ECM/PCM RELAY EPS MOTOR
CAN-L B1 2
A29 C7 GRN BLK
LT BLU LT BLU LT BLU M− M−
NEP NEP
A3
WHT B2 1
CAN-H RED RED
M+ M+
A4
RED
CAN-L
A32
YEL
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR BLK
A1 *2
GRY
SCS PG GND
BLK
1
G402* 1
G302
G301* 2 GND
BLK
DATA LINK *1
CONNECTOR (DLC)
6 C10 G301
WHT WHT WHT WHT
CAN-H
CAN
CONTROLLER
14 C9
RED RED RED RED
CAN-L
9 C5
YEL YEL
SCS
7
BLU EPS CONTROL UNIT EPS CONTROL UNIT BLU
C16
K-LINE
EPS CONTROL UNIT
16
CONNECTOR A (2P) CONNECTOR B (2P) CONNECTOR C (16P)
PNK +B
4
BLK
: 12 V
:5V
*1: RHD model
G502 *2: LHD model
TORQUE SENSOR MOTOR 2P TEST TACHOMETER STEERING GEARBOX

3P CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR 1P CONNECTOR (RHD model)
Wire side of female tarminals
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
Terminal side of female tarminals

EPS Symptom Troubleshooting - EPS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are stored
EPS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are stored
2. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Are any DTCs indicated?
YES - Troubleshoot the indicated DTC.■
NO - Go to Step 3 .
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Reinstall the No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse, then go to Step 13 .
NO - Go to Step 5 .
5. Disconnect the EPS control unit connector C (16P).
6. Check for continuity between EPS control unit connector C (16P) terminal No. 8 and body ground.
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the EPS control unit and No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.■
NO - Install a new No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to Step 7 .
7. Reconnect the EPS control unit connector C (16P).
8. Start the engine, and watch the EPS indicator.
Does the EPS indicator go off?
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■
NO - Replace the EPS control unit. ■
11. Measure the voltage between EPS control unit connector C (16P) terminal No. 8 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the EPS control unit and No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay
box.■
13. Disconnect the EPS control unit connector A (2P).
14. Check for continuity between EPS control unit connector A (2P) terminal No. 1 and body ground.
NO - LHD model: Repair open in the wire between the EPS control unit and body ground (G301).■
RHD model: Repair open in the wire between the EPS control unit and body ground (G402).■

17. Check for continuity between EPS control unit connector C (16P) terminal and gauge control module 32P
connector terminal individually.
Sign EPS Control Unit Connector C Gauge Control Module 32P
(16P) Terminal Connector Terminal
CAN-L 9 29
CAN-H 10 30
YES - Check for loose terminals in the EPS control unit connectors and repair if necessary. If no poor
connections are found, replace the EPS control unit. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the EPS control unit and gauge control module.■
HDS does not communicate with the EPS control unit or the vehicle
Procedure(s)
1. Troubleshoot the DLC circuit
EPS indicator does not come on
Procedure(s)
1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
EPS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are stored
Procedure(s)
1. Symptom Troubleshooting
2. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
EPS Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for
HDS does not communicate with Troubleshoot the DLC circuit
the EPS control unit or the
vehicle
EPS indicator does not come on Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
EPS indicator does not go off, 1. Symptom Troubleshooting
and no DTCs are stored 2. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
EPS Control Unit Removal/Installation
NOTE: The illustrations shows RHD model, LHD model is similar.
2. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (2P), connector B (2P), and connector C (16P).
3. Remove the connector clips from EPS control unit bracket (D).
4. Remove the nuts (E) from the EPS control unit bracket.
5. Remove the EPS control unit.
6. Install the EPS control unit in the reverse order of removal.
8. Do the memorizing the torque sensor neutral position.
9. After installation, start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times.
Check that the EPS indicator does not come on.
EPS Torque Sensor Neutral Position Memorization
The torque sensor neutral position must be memorized whenever the steering gearbox, the EPS motor, or the EPS control
unit is replaced. Note that the torque sensor neutral position is not affected when erasing the DTC.
NOTE: The torque sensor is temperature sensitive. When memorizing the torque sensor neutral position, the ambient
temperature must be above 20 °C (68 °F).
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS to the DLC (data link connector) (A) located under the
driver's side of the dashboard.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the EPS control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC
circuit.
4. From the EPS MENU, select MISCELLANEOUS TEST then TORQUE SENSOR LEARN and follow the screen
prompts on the HDS.
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific instructions.
EPS Motor Removal and Installation
NOTE:
Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the steering gearbox.
Removal
2. LHD model: Remove the torque sensor 4P connector (A) from the connector bracket (B).
3. Remove the connector bracket mount bolt (A), then remove the EPS motor (B) and the O-ring (C).
Installation
1. Clean the mating surfaces of the EPS motor (A) and the steering gearbox.
2. Apply steering grease to the new O-ring (B), and carefully fit it on the EPS motor.
NOTE: When you apply the silicone grease, make sure not to adhere to the terminal part of connectors and
surrounding switches. Also do not touch the switches and the terminal part of connector by hands or glove that
adheres the silicone grease.
3. Apply steering grease to the EPS motor shaft (C).
4. Install the EPS motor on the steering gearbox by engaging the EPS motor shaft and the worm shaft (D).
5. Turn the EPS motor two or three times to the right and left about 45 degrees. Make sure the EPS motor is evenly
seated on the steering gearbox, and that the O-ring is not pinched between the mating surfaces.
6. Loosely install the EPS motor mounting bolts (E), then turn the steering wheel two or three times to the right and
left about 45 degrees.
7. Tighten the EPS motor mounting bolts to the specified torque.
8. LHD model: Install the torque sensor 4P connector to the connector bracket.
A/C Service Tips and Precautions
Compressed air mixed with the R-134a forms a combustible vapor.

The vapor can burn or explode causing serious injury.
Never use compressed air to pressure test R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning systems.
Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat.
Be careful when connecting service equipment.
Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
The air conditioning system uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant and polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil, which are not
compatible with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and mineral oil. Do not use R-12 refrigerant or mineral oil in this system, and do
not attempt to use R-12 servicing equipment; damage to the air conditioning system or your servicing equipment will
result.
Separate the manifold gauge sets (pressure gauges, hoses, joints) for refrigerants R-12 and R-134a. Do not confuse them.
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested with
compressed air.
Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.
Always disconnect the negative cable from the battery whenever replacing air conditioning parts.
Keep moisture and dirt out of the system. When disconnecting any lines, plug or cap the fittings immediately; don't
remove the caps or plugs until just before you reconnect each line.
Before connecting any hose or line, apply a few drops of refrigerant oil to the O-ring.
When tightening or loosening a fitting, use a second wrench to support the matching fitting.
When discharging the system, don't let refrigerant escape too fast; it will draw the A/C compressor oil out of the
system.
A/C System Test
Performance Test

The performance test will help determine if the air conditioner system is operating within specifications.
Use only service equipment for refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a).
compressed air.
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station to the high-pressure service port and the low-
pressure service port, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
2. Determine the relative humidity and air temperature.
3. Open the globe box. Release the glove box stop on each side, then let the glove box hang down.
4. Insert a thermometer (A) in the center vent.
5. Place another thermometer (B) near the blower unit's recirculation inlet duct.
6. Test conditions:
Avoid direct sunlight.
Open hood.
Open front doors.
Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool, the mode control switch to Vent, and the recirculation control
knob to Recirculate.
Turn the A/C switch ON and the fan switch to Max.
Run the engine at 1,500 rpm (min −1 ).
No driver or passengers in vehicle.
7. After running the air conditioning for 10 minutes under the above test conditions, read the delivery temperature from
the thermometer in the center vent, the intake temperature near the blower unit, and the high and low system
pressure from the A/C gauges.
8. To complete the vent (delivery)/ambient air (intake) temperature chart:

Mark the vent (delivery) temperature on the vertical line.
Mark the ambient air (intake) temperature on the bottom line.
Draw a vertical line from the ambient air (intake) temperature mark.
Draw a horizontal line from the vent (delivery) temperature mark until it intersects the
vertical line.
NOTE: The low side and intake temperatures should intersect in the shaded area within about
10 % of the measured humidity level. Any measurements outside the line may indicate the need
for further inspection.
9. To complete the high side (discharge pressure)/ambient air (intake) temperature chart:
Mark the high side (discharge pressure) temperature on the vertical line.
Mark the ambient air (intake) temperature on the bottom line.
Draw a vertical line from the high side (discharge pressure) temperature mark.
vertical line.
10. To complete the low side (suction pressure)/ambient air (intake) temperature chart:
Mark the low side (suction pressure) temperature along the vertical line.
Mark the ambient air (intake) temperature along the bottom line.
Draw a vertical line from the ambient air (intake) temperature mark.
vertical line.
Pressure Test
Test results Related symptoms Probable cause Remedy
Driver's and Poor A/C performance. Discharge (high) Low refrigerant charge Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
passenger's and suction (low) pressures are low. specified amount.
side vent Air mix door inoperable Repair or replace.
temperatures
vary by more
than 11 °C
Discharge After stopping A/C compressor, Air in system Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
(high) pressure drops about 196 kPa (2.0 specified amount.
pressure kgf/cm 2 , 28 psi) quickly, and then falls
abnormally gradually.
high Reduced or no airflow through A/C Clogged condenser Clean.
condenser. or radiator fins Check voltage and fan rpm.
A/C condenser or Check fan direction.
radiator fan not
working properly
Line to A/C condenser is excessively Restricted flow of Restricted lines.
hot. refrigerant in system
Discharge High and low-pressures are balanced Faulty A/C Replace the A/C compressor.
pressure soon after stopping A/C compressor. compressor
abnormally Low side is higher than normal. discharge valve
low Faulty A/C
compressor seal
Test results Related symptoms Probable cause Remedy
Outlet of expansion valve is not frosted, Faulty expansion Replace.
low-pressure gauge indicates vacuum. valve Recover, evacuate, and recharge
Moisture in system with specified amount.
Suction (low) Expansion valve is not frosted, and low- Frozen expansion Recover, evacuate, and recharge
pressure pressure line is not cold. Low-pressure valve (Moisture in with specified amount.
abnormally gauge indicates vacuum. system) Replace the expansion valve.
low Faulty expansion
valve
Discharge temperature is low, and the Frozen evaporator Run the fan with A/C compressor off,
airflow from vents is restricted. then check evaporator temperature
sensor.
Expansion valve is frosted. Clogged expansion valve Clean or replace.
Receiver/dryer outlet is cool, and inlet Clogged receiver/dryer Replace.
is warm (should be warm during
operation).
Suction Low-pressure hose and service port are Expansion valve open too Repair or replace.
pressure cooler than the temperature around long
abnormally evaporator.
high Suction pressure is lowered when A/C Excessive refrigerant in Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
condenser is cooled by water. system specified amount.
High and low-pressures are equalized Faulty gasket Replace the A/C compressor.
as soon as the A/C compressor is Faulty high-
stopped, and both gauges fluctuate pressure valve
while running. Foreign particle
stuck in high-
pressure valve
Suction and Reduced airflow through A/C Clogged A/C Clean.
discharge condenser. condenser or Check voltage and fan rpm.
pressures radiator fins Check fan direction.
abnormally A/C condenser or
high radiator fan not
working properly
Suction and Low-pressure hose and metal fittings Clogged or kinked low- Repair or replace.
discharge are cooler than evaporator. pressure hose parts
pressures Temperature around expansion valve is Clogged high-pressure line Repair or replace.
abnormally too low compared with that around
low receiver/dryer.
Refrigerant A/C compressor clutch is dirty. A/C compressor shaft seal Replace the A/C compressor.
leaks leaking
A/C compressor bolt(s) are dirty. Leaking around bolt(s) Tighten bolt(s) or replace A/C
compressor.
A/C compressor gasket is wet with oil. Gasket leaking Replace the A/C compressor.
A/C fitting is dirty. Leaking O-ring Clean the A/C fitting and replace the O-
ring.
A/C System Inspection
Before troubleshooting any problem with the air conditioning system, do the following:
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), inspect the A/C components, pressure lines and hoses for stains that may
indicate a refrigerant or a compressor oil leak.
2. Check the A/C condenser (A) for material clogging the fins or for damage to the fins:
Carefully clean any material from the A/C condenser fins with water and detergent.
Be sure to dry the A/C condenser completely.
3. Inspect the drive belt.
4. Make sure no material is blocking the airflow to the A/C condenser.
5. Check the dust and pollen filter, and replace it if it is clogged.
6. Start the engine, turn the air conditioning system on, and allow it to normalize for a few minutes.
7. Check that the A/C operates at each position of the blower fan switch (except OFF).
8. Check that the A/C compressor clutch (A) is engaged. The pressure plate should be rotating at the same speed as
the pulley.
9. Check that the A/C condenser fan (B) and radiator fan (C) operate when the A/C compressor clutch is engaged.
10. Check that the engine idle speed is correct when the A/C is switched on and off, and when the A/C compressor
clutch is engaged and disengaged.
A/C Line Replacement
A/C Receiver/Dryer Desiccant Replacement
NOTE: Install the receiver/dryer as quickly as possible to prevent the system from absorbing moisture from the air.
1. Remove the A/C condenser.
2. Remove the bolts from the A/C condenser, then remove the receiver/dryer (A), the bracket (B), and the O-rings (C).
3. Install the receiver/dryer in the reverse order of removal. Replace the O-rings with new ones, and apply a thin coat of
refrigerant oil (SP-10) before installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid
leakage.
A/C Refrigerant Leak Test


compressed air.
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the
low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
2. Open the high pressure valve to charge the system to the specified capacity, then close the supply valve, and
disconnect the charging station fittings.
Select the appropriate units of measurement for your refrigerant charging station.
Refrigerant Capacity:
370 to 420 g
0.37 to 0.42 kg
0.82 to 0.93 lbs
13.1 to 14.8 oz
3. Check the system for leaks using an R-134a refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g (0.5 oz) per year or
better.
4. If you find leaks that require the system to be opened (to repair or replace hoses, fittings, etc.), do a recovery of the
system.
5. After checking and repairing leaks, the system must be evacuated.
A/C Refrigerant Recovery

low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacture's instructions.
2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed from the A/C system after the recovery process is completed. Be
sure to put the same amount of new refrigerant oil back into the A/C system before charging.
A/C System Evacuation

1. When an A/C system has been opened to the atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it must be
evacuated using an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station. If the system has been open for several
days, the receiver/dryer should be replaced, and the system should be evacuated for several hours.
low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Evacuate the system.
3. If the low-pressure does not reach more than 93.3 kPa (700 mmHg, 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes, there is probably a
leak in the system. Partially charge the system, and check for leaks.
A/C System Charging

low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
2. Evacuate the system.
3. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the system that was removed during recovery. Use only SP-10
refrigerant oil.
4. Charge the system with the specified amount of R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system; the compressor
will be damaged.
Select the appropriate units of measure for your refrigerant charging station.
Refrigerant Capacity:
370 to 420 g
0.37 to 0.42 kg
0.82 to 0.93 lbs
13.1 to 14.8 oz
5. Check for refrigerant leaks.

6. Check for system performance.
A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement
Recommended PAG oil: SP-10
P/N 38897-P13-003: 120 mL (4 fl·oz, 4.2 Imp·oz)
P/N 38898-P13-003: 250 mL (8 1/3 fl·oz, 8.8 Imp·oz)
P/N 38899-P13-A01: 40 mL (1 1/3 fl·oz, 1.4 Imp·oz)
Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount listed if you replace any of the following parts.
To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it with other refrigerant
oils.
Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.
Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately.
A/C condenser (including Dryer Desiccant) . 25 mL (5/6 fl·oz, 0.9 Imp·oz)
Evaporator . 35 mL (1 1/5 fl·oz, 1.2 Imp·oz)
Line or hose . 10 mL (1/3 fl·oz, 0.4 Imp·oz)
Receiver/Dryer Desiccant . 10 mL (1/3 fl·oz, 0.4 Imp·oz)
Leakage repair . 25 mL (5/6 fl·oz, 0.9 Imp·oz)
A/C compressor . Since the oil separator is equipped inside the compressor for this vehicle,
oil drainage is unnecessary at the time of compressor replacement.
A/C Compressor Replacement
NOTE: Do not install an A/C compressor into a system unless you are completely sure that the system is free of
contamination. Installing the A/C compressor into a contaminated system can result in premature A/C compressor failure.
1. If the A/C compressor is marginally operable, run the engine at idle speed, and let the air conditioning work for a
few minutes, then shut the engine off.
2. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/charging station.
3. Remove the splash shield.
5. Remove the compressor clutch connector (A) from the condenser fan shroud, then disconnect the connector.
Remove the nuts, then disconnect the suction line (B) and the discharge line (C) from the compressor, and remove
the O-rings (D). Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust
contamination.
6. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/C compressor (A). Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when removing
the A/C compressor.
7. Install the compressor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Inspect the A/C lines for any signs of contamination.
Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing
them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
Use refrigerant oil (SP-10) for HFC-134a SANDEN spiral type A/C compressor only.
To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it with other
refrigerant oils.
Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil contacts the paint,
wash it off immediately.
Charge the system.
A/C Compressor Clutch Check
1. Check the armature plate for discoloration, peeling, or other damage. If there is damage, replace the clutch set.
2. Check the rotor pulley bearing play and drag by rotating the rotor pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a new
one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag.
3. Measure the clearance between the rotor pulley (A) and the armature plate (B) all the way around. If the clearance
is not within specified limits, remove the armature plate and add or remove shims as needed to increase or
decrease clearance.
Clearance: 0.35−0.65 mm (0.014−0.026 in.)
NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.2 mm, 0.4 mm, and 0.5 mm.
4. Release the field coil connector from the holder, then disconnect it. Check the thermal protector for continuity. If
there is no continuity, replace the thermal protector.
NOTE: The thermal protector will have no continuity above 122 to 128 °C. When the temperature drops below 116
to 104 °C, the thermal protector will have continuity.
5. Disconnect the field coil connector (A). Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not within specifications,
replace the field coil.
Field Coil Resistance: 3.15−3.45 Ω 20 °C
A/C Compressor Clutch Overhaul
1. Remove the center nut while holding the armature plate (A) with a commercially available A/C clutch holder (B).
2. Remove the armature plate (A) and shim(s) (B), taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch needs adjustment,
increase or decrease the number and thickness of shims as necessary, then reinstall the armature plate, and
recheck its clearance.
NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.2 mm, 0.4 mm, and 0.5 mm.
3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the rotor pulley (B). Be
careful not to damage the rotor pulley and A/C compressor.
4. Remove the bolt and holder (A), then disconnect the field coil connector (B). Remove the snap ring (C) with snap
ring pliers, then remove the field coil (D). Be careful not to damage the field coil and A/C compressor.
5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
Install the field coil with the wire side facing down, and align the boss on the field coil with the hole in the
A/C compressor.
Clean the rotor pulley and A/C compressor sliding surfaces with contact cleaner or other non-petroleum
solvent.
Install new snap rings, note the installation direction, and make sure they are fully seated in the groove.
Make sure that the rotor pulley turns smoothly after it's reassembled.
Route and clamp the wires properly or they can be damaged by the rotor pulley.
A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE:
It is normal for the A/C compressor to turn off under certain conditions, such as low idle, high engine coolant
temperature, or hard acceleration.
Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the fans are also inoperative with the A/C on. Refer to the symptom
troubleshooting index.
1. Check the No. 43 (7.5 A) and the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
NO - Replace the fuses, and recheck. If the fuses blow again, check for a short in the No. 43 (7.5 A) and No.
10 (7.5 A) fuses circuit.■
3. Start the engine.
4. Turn on the A/C.
5. Check the A/C switch in the PGM-FI Data List with the HDS.
Is the A/C switch on?
NO - Go to A/C pressure switch circuit troubleshooting. ■
6. Using the HDS, confirm the following values in the PGM-FI Data List at idle.
TP sensor About 0.5 V
RPM A/T 740−840
M/T 700−800
ECT SENSOR 2 80−100 °C
A/C SWITCH ON
A/C CLUTCH ON
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR 196−3,138 kPa (2−32 kgf/cm 2 ) 28−455 psi
A/C TEMPERATURE 3.0 °C or more
Are all the values within specifications?

NO - Troubleshoot the value that is not within the specifications.■
8. Remove the A/C compressor clutch relay from the auxiliary under-hood relay box, and test it.
Is the relay OK?
NO - Replace the A/C compressor clutch relay .■
9. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 43 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the A/C
compressor clutch relay.■
10. Connect the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket with a jumper wire.
Does the A/C compressor clutch click?
11. Disconnect the jumper wire.
13. Measure the voltage between the No. 4 terminal of the A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket and body ground.
compressor clutch relay.■
15. Reinstall the A/C compressor clutch relay.
16. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) from
damage.
19. Connect the ECM/PCM connector A (49P) No. 15 terminal to body ground with a jumper wire.
Does the A/C compressor click?
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at ECM/PCM connector A (49P). If the connections are good,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original ECM/PCM. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/C compressor clutch relay and the ECM/PCM.■
22. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch 1P connector.
23. Check for continuity between the A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket No. 2 terminal and the A/C compressor
clutch 1P connector No. 1 terminal.
YES - Check the A/C compressor clutch clearance, the thermal protector circuit, and the A/C compressor
clutch field coil. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/C compressor clutch relay and the A/C compressor clutch.■
A/C Compressor Relief Valve Replacement
2. Remove the relief valve cover (A), the relief valve (B), and the O-ring (C). Plug the opening to keep foreign matter
from entering the system and the A/C compressor oil from running out.
3. Clean the mating surfaces.
4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing it.
5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief valve.
6. Charge the system.
A/C Condenser Replacement
3. Remove the nut, then disconnect the discharge hose (A) from the A/C condenser. From the discharge hose,
remove the O-ring (B).
4. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the receiver line (A) from the A/C condenser. From the receiver line, remove the
O-ring (B).
5. Remove the bolts (A), disconnect the connector (B), and remove the horn (C). If equipped with the high horn (D),
remove it.
6. Remove the bolts (E) and the brackets (F).
7. Remove the A/C condenser (A) by lifting it up.

Do not grab the upper seal (B).
Be careful not to damage the radiator and A/C condenser fins when removing the A/C condenser.
8. Install the A/C condenser in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
If you're installing a new A/C condenser, add refrigerant oil (SP-10).
Charge the system.
A/C Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the fans are also inoperative with the A/C on. Refer to the symptom
1. Check the No. 47 (30 A) and the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
NO - Replace the fuses, and recheck. If the fuses blow again, check for a short in the No. 47 (30 A) and No. 10
(7.5 A) fuses circuit.■
2. Remove the A/C condenser fan relay from the auxiliary under-hood relay box, and test it.
Is the relay OK?
NO - Replace the A/C condenser fan relay .■
3. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of the A/C condenser fan relay 4P socket and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 47 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the A/C
condenser fan relay.■
4. Connect the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the A/C condenser fan relay 4P socket with a jumper wire.
Does the A/C condenser fan run?
NO - Go to Step 8 .
7. Measure the voltage between the No. 4 terminal of the A/C condenser fan relay 4P socket and body ground.
YES - Repair open in the GRN wire between the A/C condenser fan relay and the ECM/PCM.■
condenser fan relay.■
9. Disconnect the A/C condenser fan 2P connector.
10. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of the A/C condenser fan relay 4P socket and the No. 2 terminal of
the A/C condenser fan 2P connector.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/C condenser fan relay and the A/C condenser fan.■
11. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of the A/C condenser fan 2P connector and body ground.
YES - Replace the A/C condenser fan motor.■
NO - Check for an open in the wire between the A/C condenser fan and body ground. If the wire is OK, check
for poor ground at G202. ■
Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan Common Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the A/C compressor is inoperative. Refer to the symptom
1. Remove the radiator fan relay and A/C condenser fan relay from the auxiliary under-hood relay box, and test them.
Are the relays OK?
NO - Replace the relays.■
2. Reinstall the relays.
damage.
5. Connect the ECM/PCM connector A (49P) No. 6 terminal to body ground with a jumper wire.
Do the fans run?
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at ECM/PCM connector A (49P). If the connections are good,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original ECM/PCM .■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the radiator fan relay, the A/C condenser fan relay and the ECM/PCM.■
A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor Test
1. Remove the evaporator core and the evaporator temperature sensor.
2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance between its terminals.
3. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance.
4. Compare the resistance readings with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the
specifications.
5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the evaporator temperature sensor.
Heating and A/C System Description
The air conditioning system removes heat from the passenger compartment by transferring heat from the ambient air to the evaporator. The evaporator cools the air
with the refrigerant that is circulating through the evaporator. The refrigerant expands in the evaporator, and the evaporator becomes very cold and absorbs the heat
from the ambient air. The blower fan pushes air across the evaporator where the heat is absorbed, and then it blows the cool air into the passenger compartment.
This vehicle uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant, which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the following service items:
Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12)
EXPANSION VALVEand HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
Use only the recommended
(Meters polyalkyleneglycol
the required amount(PAG)
of refrigerant oil (SP-10) designed for the R-134a A/C compressor. Intermixing the recommended (PAG)
refrigerant oil with any other refrigerant
refrigerant into theoil will result in A/C compressor failure.
evaporator)
BLOWER FAN
All A/C system parts (A/C compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, A/C condenser, receiver/dryer, expansion valve, O-rings for joints) are
designed for refrigerant R-134a. Do not exchange with R-12 parts.
Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a recovery/recycling/charging station for refrigerant R-134a.
Always recover refrigerant R-134a with an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before EVAPORATOR
disconnecting any A/C fitting.
(Absorption of heat)
Oil Separator
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
RELIEF VALVE
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH (Relieves pressure at the A/C compressor
When the refrigerant is below when the pressure is too high)
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi)
or above 3,138 kPa (32 kgf/cm2,
455 psi), the ECM/PCM turns the
A/C compressor clutch relay off
to protect the A/C compressor.
A/C COMPRESSOR
(Suction and compression)
HIGH PRESSURE VAPOR
A/C CONDENSER HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID

(Radiation of heat)
RECEIVER/DRYER LOW PRESSURE LIQUID
DESICCANT
(Traps debris, and
removes moisture) LOW PRESSURE VAPOR
Rear Window Defogger Function Test
NOTE:
Before testing, check the No. 10 (7.5 A), No. 59 (20 A), and No. 60 (IGN) (50 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay
box.
Be careful not to scratch or damage the defogger wires with the tester probe.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn the rear window defogger switch ON.
2. Measure the voltage between the positive terminal (A) and body ground. There should be battery voltage.
If there is no voltage, check for:
-Faulty rear window defogger relay.
-Faulty rear window defogger switch.
-An open in the BLU wire to the positive terminal.
If there is battery voltage, go to Step 3 .
4. Disconnect the negative terminal (B) from the rear window defogger.
5. Check for continuity between the negative terminal and body ground. There should be continuity.
If there is no continuity, check for an open in the BLK wire or poor ground (G602). If there is continuity, go to Step 6
.
6. Reconnect the negative terminal to the rear window defogger.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn the rear window defogger switch ON.
8. Touch the voltmeter positive probe to each point on each defogger wire, and the negative probe to the negative
terminal.
If the voltage is as specified, the defogger wire up to that point is OK.
If the voltage is not as specified, repair the defogger wire.
-If it is more than specified at one of the points, there is a break in the negative half of the wire.
-If it is less than specified at one of the points, there is a break in the positive half of the wire.
Rear Window Defogger Wire Repair
NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section must be no longer than 25 mm (1 inch).
1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A) with fine steel wool, then clean it with isopropyl alcohol.
2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion of the defogger wire (B) with cellophane tape (C).
3. Using a small brush, apply a heavy coat of silver conductive paint (commercially available) (A) extending about 3
mm (1/8'') on both sides of the break. Allow 25 minutes to dry.
4. Do the function test to confirm that the wire is repaired.
5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
Seat Belts Component Location Index
SHOULDER ANCHOR ADJUSTER REAR CENTER SHOULDER SEAT BELT

Replacement,
Inspection,
REAR SEAT BELT

Replacement,
Inspection,
FRONT SEAT BELT

Replacement,
Inspection,
FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES

Replacement,
REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLES and REAR CENTER

SHOULDER SEAT BELT DETACHABLE ANCHOR
Replacement,
REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLES and

REAR CENTER LAP SEAT BELT
Replacement,
Seat Belt Inspection
Out of Vehicle
For front seat belt retractors with seat belt tensioners, review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and
procedures before doing repairs or service.
Retractor Front
1. Before installing the retractor, check that the seat belt can be pulled out freely.
2. Make sure that the seat belt does not lock when the retractor (A) is leaned slowly up to 15 ° from the mounted
position. The seat belt should lock when the retractor is leaned over 40 °. Do not attempt to disassemble the
retractor.
3. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there is any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of the seat belt
for any reason. Rear
Rear center shoulder
In-vehicle
1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught on anything.
2. After installing the anchors, check for free movement on the anchor bolts. If necessary, remove the anchor bolts
and check that the washers and other parts are not damaged or improperly installed.
3. Check the seat belts for damage or discoloration.
Clean with a shop towel if necessary. Use only soap and water to clean.
NOTE: Dirt build-up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. Wipe the inside of
the loops with a clean cloth dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
4. Check that the seat belt does not lock when pulled out slowly. The seat belt is designed to lock only during a
sudden stop or impact.
5. Make sure that the seat belt will retract automatically when released.
6. For each rear passenger's seat belt, check the seat belt retractor locking mechanism ALR (automatic locking
retractor). This function is for securing child seats.
-1. Pull the seat belt all the way out to engage the ALR. The seat belt should retract, but not extend. This is
normal.
-2. To disengage the ALR, release the seat belt and allow it to fully retract, then pull the seat belt out part-way.
The seat belt should retract and extend normally.
7. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there is any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of the seat belt
for any reason.
Front Seat Belt Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures
NOTE:
Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels.
When removing components, use the trim tool or equivalent.
Check the front seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during
removal and installation.
Front Seat Belt

1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure, then wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
2. Slide the front seat forward fully.
3. Remove the center pillar lower trim:
Without side curtain airbags
With side curtain airbags
4. Remove the upper anchor cover (A), and remove the upper anchor bolt (B).
5. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A).

6. Remove the self-tapping ET screw (B) and the lower retractor bolt (C), then remove the front seat belt (D) and
retractor (E).
8. Remove the shoulder anchor adjuster (A).
9. Install the seat belt and retractor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Upper anchor bolt
Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before reinstallation. installation
Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten to specified torque.
Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions as described.
Assemble the washers, the collars, and the bushings on the upper anchor bolt and lower anchor bolt as
shown.
Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is plugged in properly.
Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure. Lower anchor bolt
Check for any DTCs, and clear them using the HDS. If the DTCs will not clear, do the necessary installation
troubleshooting.
Front Seat Belt Buckle

2. Remove the front seat.
3. Lift up the front driver's seat, then detach the seat belt switch connector (A), and detach the harness clip (B). RHD
model is shown, LHD model is similar.
4. Detach the harness clip (A), and pull the seat belt switch harness (B) through the hole in the seat track. Remove
the center anchor bolt (C), then remove the seat belt buckle (D).
5. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Center anchor bolt
Assemble the washers and collar on the center anchor bolt as shown. installation
Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before reinstallation.
Tighten the bolt by hand first, then tighten to specified torque.
Make sure the seat belt switch connector is plugged in properly.
Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure.
Check for any DTCs, and clear them using the HDS. If the DTCs will not clear, do the necessary
troubleshooting.
Rear Seat Belt Replacement
NOTE: Check the rear seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during
removal and installation.
Rear Seat Belt
1. Remove the cargo side trim panel.
2. Pull the carpet back as necessary, and remove the lower anchor bolt (A).
3. Remove the upper anchor cap (A), and remove the upper anchor bolt (B).
4. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A) if equipped, and remove the self-tapping ET screw (B) and the
lower retractor mounting bolt (C). Remove the rear seat belt (D) and retractor (E). The right seat belt is shown, the
left seat belt is similar.
5. Install the seat belt in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Upper anchor bolt
Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before reinstallation. installation
Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten to specification torque.
Assemble the washers and the collar on the upper anchor bolt as shown.
Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is properly plugged in.
Rear Center Shoulder Seat Belt

1. Remove the headliner.
2. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A) if equipped, and remove the retractor mounting bolts (B, C), then
remove the center seat belt and retractor (D).
3. Install the center seat belt and retractor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten to specification torque.
Before installing the anchor mounting bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the center seat belt.
Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is properly plugged in if equipped.
Rear Seat Belt Buckles and Center Shoulder Seat Belt Detachable Anchor/Center Lap Seat Belt
1. Pull the rear seat belt buckles (A) and rear center seat belt detachable anchor or rear center lap seat belt (B) out
through each elastic straps (C) on both seat cushions.
2. Lift both rear seat cushions up, and slip the seat belt buckles and seat belt detachable anchor or seat belt.
3. Fold both rear seat-backs.
4. Opening the cargo floor lids (A) and remove the anchor bolts (B).
5. Lift both rear seat cushions up.
6. Remove the seat belt buckles (A) and center seat belt detachable anchor (B) or rear center lap seat belt (C). With center seat belt
and seat belt buckles
With center lap seat

belt and seat belt
buckles
7. Install the anchor and buckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Right side anchor bolt
Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten to specification torque. installation
Assemble the washers, and the collar on the anchor bolt as shown.
Left side anchor bolt

installation
Airbag and Tensioner Disposal
Deploying Airbags in the Vehicle
Deployment tool
07HAZ-SG00500
Before scrapping any airbags, side airbags, side curtain airbags, or seat belt tensioners (including those in a whole vehicle
to be scrapped), the part(s) must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, the Honda District Parts and
Service Manager must give approval and/or special instruction before deploying the part(s). Only after the part(s) have been
deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the parts appear intact (not deployed),
treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure.
If an SRS equipped vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its airbags, side airbags, side curtain airbags, and seat belt
tensioners, should be deployed while still in the vehicle. These parts should not be considered as salvageable parts and
should never be installed in another vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure, then wait for 3 minutes
before starting work.
2. Confirm that each airbag, side airbag, side curtain airbag, or seat belt tensioner is securely mounted.
3. Confirm that the deployment tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure on the tool label.
Driver's Airbag
1. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the
cable reel.
Front Passenger's Airbag
1. Lower the glove box, then remove the connector clip. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A)
from the dashboard wire harness.
Side Airbag
1. Disconnect the side airbag 2P connector (A) from the floor wire harness.
Side Curtain Airbag
1. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) from the side curtain airbag.
Seat Belt Tensioner
1. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector (A) from the seat belt tensioner. Pull the seat belt out all the way
and cut it.
2. Cut off each connector, and strip the ends of the wires. Twist each pair of unlike colored wires together, and clip an
alligator clip (A) from the deployment tool to each pair. Place the deployment tool at least 10 m (30 ft) away from
the vehicle.
NOTE: The driver's and front passenger's airbags have dual inflators. Twist each pair of unlike colored wires
together, and clip an alligator clip to each pair.
3. Connect a 12 volt battery to the tool.
If the green light on the tool comes on, the igniter circuit is defective and cannot deploy the component. Go
to Disposal of Damaged Components.
If the red light on the tool comes on, the component is ready to be deployed.
4. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbags and tensioners should deploy (deployment is both highly audible
and visible: A loud noise and rapid inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation).
If the components deploy and the green light on the tool comes on, continue with this procedure.
If a component does not deploy, and the green light comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to Disposal of
Damaged Components.
During deployment, the airbags can become hot enough to burn you. Wait for 30 minutes after deployment
before touching the airbags.
5. Dispose of the complete airbag. No part of it can be reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag (A), and seal it
securely. Dispose of the deployed airbag according to your local regulations.
Deploying Components Out of the Vehicle

If an intact airbag or tensioner has been removed from a scrapped vehicle, or has been found defective or damaged during
transit, storage, or service, it should be deployed as follows:
1. Confirm that the deployment tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure Deploying Airbags in the
Vehicle on the tool label.
2. Position the airbag face up, outdoors, on flat ground, at least 10 m (30 ft) from any obstacles or people.
3. Follow Step 2 through 12 of the in-vehicle deployment procedure.
NOTE: The driver's and front passenger's airbags have dual inflators. Twist each pair of unlike colored wires
together, and clip an alligator clip to each pair.
Disposal of Damaged Components

1. If installed in a vehicle, follow the removal procedure for the driver's airbag, front passenger's airbag, side airbag,
side curtain airbag, seat belt tensioner.
2. In all cases, make a short circuit by cutting, stripping, and twisting together the two inflator wires.
NOTE: The driver's and front passenger's airbags have dual inflators. The like color wires go to the individual
inflators. Twist the like colored wires together.
3. Package the component in exactly the same packaging that the new replacement part came in.
4. Mark the outside of the box ‘‘DAMAGED AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED,'' ‘‘DAMAGED SIDE AIRBAG NOT
DEPLOYED,'' ‘‘DAMAGED SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED,'' ‘‘DAMAGED SEAT BELT TENSIONER
NOT DEPLOYED'' so it does not get confused with your parts stock.
5. Contact your Honda District Parts and Service Manager for instructions on how and where to return it for disposal.
Deployment Tool Check

1. Connect the yellow clips to both switch protector handles on the tool.
2. Then connect the red lead to the positive battery post and the black lead to the negative battery post.
3. Push the operation switch: The green light should come on, indicating that the tool is operating properly and is
ready for use. If the red light stays on, the tool is faulty, and another one must be used for the procedure.
4. Disconnect the tool clips and connectors from the protector handles and the battery.
SRS Symptom Troubleshooting - SRS indicator does not come on
SRS indicator does not come on
NOTE: Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. If the software version is not the
latest, update the SRS unit software and retest.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then wait for 10 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes
off.
Does the SRS indicator come on?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
NO - Go to Step 3 .
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the
DLC circuit.
5. Do the gauge control module self diagnostic function.
YES - Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit. ■
NO - Faulty gauge control module; replace the gauge control module. ■
SRS Symptom Troubleshooting - SRS indicator stays on, but no DTCs are stored
SRS indicator stays on, but no DTCs are stored
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, check the battery is sufficiently charged. If the battery voltage is low,
SRS indicator stays on.
1. Start the engine, and see if the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) stays on.
Does the MIL come on?
YES - Go to the MIL Circuit Troubleshooting.
NO - Go to Step 2 .
DLC circuit.
4. Read the DTC.
Are any SRS DTCs indicated?
YES - Do the SRS DTC troubleshooting.
NO - Go to Step 5 .
5. Select Body Electrical status with the HDS.
6. Check for DTCs in the Gauge Menu with the HDS.
Is DTC B1187 indicated?
YES - Go to the DTC B1187 troubleshooting.
NO - Go to Step 7 .
YES - Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit.
NO - Faulty gauge control module; replace the gauge control module.
SRS Symptom Troubleshooting - Side airbag cutoff indicator stays on
Side airbag cutoff indicator stays on
1. Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat.
2. Make sure the seat-back is dry.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and see if the SRS indicator comes on.
Does the SRS indicator come on and stay on?
YES - Go to the Symptom Troubleshooting ‘‘SRS indicator stay on, but no DTCs are stored''.
NO - Go to Step 4 .
DLC circuit.
6. Select Body Electrical status with the HDS.
7. Check for DTCs in the Gauge Menu with the HDS.
YES - Go to the DTC B1187 troubleshooting.
NO - Go to Step 8 .
8. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
Does the side airbag cutoff indicator flash?
YES - Initialize the OPDS unit. If problem is still present, replace the OPDS sensor/seat-back cover/pad. ■
SRS Symptom Troubleshooting - Side airbag cutoff indicator does not come on
Side airbag cutoff indicator does not come on
NOTE:
If the SRS indicator also stays on, go to SRS indicator stays on, but no DTCs are stored.
Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. If the software version is not the
off.
Does the side airbag cutoff indicator come on?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
NO - Go to Step 3 .
DLC circuit.
Does the side airbag cutoff indicator come on?
SRS Symptom Troubleshooting - Faulty front seat belt reminder indicator
Faulty Front Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
NOTE: Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. If the software version is not
latest, update the SRS unit software.
1. Observe these precautions:
Unbuckle the right seat belt.
Unbuckle the left seat belt.
Make sure nothing is on or under the seat.
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it dose not communicate, troubleshoot the
DLC circuit.
5. From the Main Menu on the HDS, select SRS, then PARAMETER INFORMATION. In the PARAMETER
INFORMATION Menu, select ‘‘SRS PSS'', and read the HDS indicated.
Is OFF indicated on the HDS?
NO - Go to Step 6 .
6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 3P connector (A) from the front passenger's seat sitting switch.
Is ON indicated on the HDS?
YES - Short to ground in the floor wire harness; replace the faulty harness.■
NO - Faulty front passenger's seat sitting switch.■
8. Observe these precautions:
Unbuckle the right seat belt.
Unbuckle the left seat belt.
I make it the state that people more than 45 kg in weight sit down on in front passenger's seat.
10. Check the front seat belt reminder indicator.
Does the front seat belt reminder indicator stay on?
YES - Faulty gauge control module.■
NO - Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit connector B (39P) and SRS unit or poor connection at
front passenger's seat belt sitting switch 3P connector and front passenger's seat sitting switch. Check
the connection; if connection is OK and DTC is not indicated, replace the SRS unit. ■
11. Disconnect the floor wire harness 3P connector (A) from the front passenger's seat sitting switch.
12. Install a jumper wire between the No. 1 terminal and the No. 2 terminal of the floor wire harness 3P connector.
YES - Faulty front passenger's seat sitting switch; replace the front seat cushion cover/pad.
NO - Open in the floor wire harness; replace the faulty wire harness.■
SRS Component Replacement/Inspection After Deployment
NOTE: Front pillar trim
Before doing any SRS repairs, check the DTCs, for the less obvious deployed components (seat belt tensioners,
front impact sensors, side airbag sensors, etc.).
Do not replace the OPDS unit unless it is physically damaged or a specific fault was found during DTC
troubleshooting.
After a collision where the seat belt tensioners deployed, replace these items:
SRS unit Center pillar trim
Seat belt tensioners
Front impact sensors
After a collision where the front airbag(s) deployed, replace these items:
SRS unit
Deployed airbag(s)
After a collision where the side airbag(s) deployed, replace these items:
Quarter pillar trim
SRS unit
Deployed side airbag(s)
Side impact sensor(s) (first)
Side impact sensor(s) (second)
Center pillar lower trim
Complete seat frame
After a collision where a side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the items for the side(s) that deployed:
SRS unit
Deployed side curtain airbag(s)
Seat belt tensioner(s)
Front pillar trim
Center pillar upper trim
Quarter pillar trim
Headliner
Front grab handle
Rear grab handle
All related trim clips
Sunvisor
After a moderate to severe side or rear collision, inspect for any damage on the side curtain airbag or other related
components. Replace the components as needed.
During the repair process, inspect these areas:
Inspect all the SRS wire harnesses. Replace, do not repair, any damaged harnesses.
Inspect the cable reel for heat damage. If there is any damage, replace the cable reel.
After the vehicle is completely repaired, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). If the SRS indicator comes on for about 6
seconds and then goes off, the SRS is OK. If the indicator does not function properly, use the HDS to read the DTC. If you
cannot retrieve a code, do the SRS Symptom Troubleshooting.
Checking and Adjusting the Headliner/Pillar Trim Overlap

To prevent the side curtain airbag from deploying and damaging the pillar trim, the overlap between the headliner and pillar
trim must be less then 8 mm (0.3 in.). To check the overlap, do this:
1. Install the headliner (A) and the pillar trim (B).
2. Using masking tape on the headliner, mark the upper edge of each pillar trim.
3. Remove the pillar trim, and measure the headliner overlap.

If the overlap is less than 8 mm (0.3 in.), remove the tape, and install the pillar trim.
If the overlap is more than 8 mm (0.3 in.), go to Step 4 .
4. Carefully trim the headliner with a utility knife, reducing the overlap to less than 8 mm (0.3 in.).
5. Remove the tape, and install the pillar trim.
Driver's Airbag Replacement
Removal
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure, then wait for 3 minutes before starting work.
2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) and
horn switch 1P connector (C) from the cable reel.
3. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the two TORX bolts (A).
4. Remove the driver's airbag (B).
Installation
1. Place the driver's airbag (A) in the steering wheel, and secure it with new TORX bolts (B).
NOTE: Make sure the clearance (C) between the steering wheel and horn pad is the specified value.
2. Connect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A) and horn switch 1P connector (B) of the cable reel, then install the
access panel (C) on the steering wheel.
4. Connect the HDS, and clear the DTCs.
5. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system operation:
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off.
Front Passenger's Airbag Replacement
Removal
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure, then wait for 3minutes before starting work.
2. Remove these items:
The glove box is lowered
Passenger's tray lid
Passenger's side vent
Center vent
Audio unit
3. Remove the connector clip, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire
harness (B).
4. Remove the screw (A) from the passenger's lid.

5. Remove the three mounting bolts (B) from the bracket.
6. Release the hooks (A), of the front passenger's lid (B) from the Audio panel.
7. Pull up the front edges of the front passenger's lid to release the hooks (C).
8. Remove the front passenger's airbag assembly (A) out of the dashboard. If you are replacing only the front
passenger's lid, go to Step 8 .
NOTE: The front passenger's lid has pawls (B, C) on each side which attach it to the dashboard.
9. Cut the four parts (A) of the front passenger's lid (B) as shown, and remove the front passenger's airbag.
NOTE:
Always replace the front passenger's lid whenever you remove the airbag from the panel.
Replace the airbag if the airbag mounting hooks or its housing is damaged.
10. Insert the hooks (A) of the front passenger's airbag housing into the new front passenger's lid, then insert the other
hooks (B) into the panel.
NOTE:
Make sure there are no objects between the airbag and the front passenger's lid.
Make sure the airbag is fully seated, and make sure the front passenger's lid is not deformed or damaged
after the airbag is in place.
Do not use tools when detaching the front passenger's airbag in order to protect it.
Installation
1. Place the front passenger's airbag assembly (A) into the dashboard. Torque the front passenger's airbag mounting
bolts (B).
2. Install the screws (C) from the front passenger's lid.
3. Connect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) to the dashboard wire harness (B), then connect the
connector clip. Reinstall the glove box.
5. Connect the HDS and clear the DTCs.
6. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch to ON (II); the SRS indicator
should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off.
Cable Reel Replacement
Removal
1. Make sure the front wheels are aligned straight ahead.
2. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure, then wait for 3 minutes.
3. Remove the driver's airbag.
4. Disconnect the connector (A) from the cable reel, then remove the steering wheel bolt (B).
5. Confirm that the front wheels point straight ahead, then remove the steering wheel with a steering wheel puller. Do
not tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft when removing the steering wheel.
6. Remove the column cover.
7. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (A) from the cable reel 4P connector (B), then disconnect the
dashboard wire harness 20P connector (C) from the cable reel (D).
8. Release the lock tab (A) under the cable reel connector with a 90 ° hook shaped tool (B). Slide the tool below the
cable reel connector just above the lock tab. Release the lower lock tab (C), and slide the cable reel off the column.
Installation
1. Before installing the steering wheel, align the front wheels straight ahead.
2. If not already done, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait for 3 minutes.
3. Set the turn signal canceling sleeve (A) so that the projections (B) are aligned vertically.
4. Carefully install the cable reel (A) on the steering column shaft. Then connect 20P connector (B) to the cable reel,
and connect the cable reel 4P connector (C) to the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (D).
5. Install the column covers.
6. If necessary, center the cable reel (New replacement cable reels come centered.). Do this by first rotating the cable
reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (about three turns) until the arrow mark (A) on the
cable reel label points straight up.
7. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal canceling sleeve (B) as shown, and install the steering wheel on to the
steering column shaft, making sure the steering wheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of the cable reel and tabs of
the turn signal canceling sleeve. Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft when installing the
steering wheel.
8. Install and torque a new steering wheel bolt (A), then reconnect the connectors.
9. Install the driver's airbag.
11. Connect the HDS and clear any DTCs.
12. After installing the cable reel, confirm proper system operation:
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds, and then go off.
After the SRS indicator has turned off, turn the steering wheel fully left and right to confirm the SRS indicator
does not come on.
Front Impact Sensor Replacement
Removal
2. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector, the front passenger's airbag 4P connector, and both seat belt
tensioner 4P connectors.
4. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A). Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the TORX bolt
(B), then remove the front impact sensor (C).
Installation
1. Install the front impact sensor with a new TORX bolt (A), then connect the engine compartment wire harness 2P
connector (B) to the front impact sensor (C).
2. Reconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector, the front passenger's airbag 4P connector, and both seat belt tensioner
4P connectors.
4. Confirm proper SRS operation: Turn the ignition switch to ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6
seconds and then go off.
5. Reinstall all removed parts.
OPDS Unit Replacement
Removal
2. Disconnect the front passenger's side airbag harness 2P connector.
3. Remove the front passenger's seat assembly.
4. Remove the seat-back cover/pad.
5. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the OPDS unit 18P connector (B) and sensor connectors (C) from the
OPDS unit (D).
6. Remove the two nuts (E) and the OPDS unit.
Installation
1. Place the OPDS unit (A) on the seat-back frame. Tighten the new nuts (B), and connect the OPDS unit harness
18P connector (C) and sensor connectors (D) to the OPDS unit. Reinstall the cover (E).
2. Install the seat-back cover/pad.
3. Install the front seat assembly, then connect the front passenger's side airbag harness 2P connector.
5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat.
6. Initialize the OPDS unit.
OPDS Unit Initialization
When a seat-back cover/pad and/or OPDS unit is replaced, initialize the OPDS by doing this procedure.
NOTE: A new (uninitialized) OPDS unit installed with a faulty OPDS sensor can cause DTC 85-71 or 85-78.
1. Clear the DTC memory.
2. Make sure the front passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in a normal position, and make sure there is nothing
on the seat.
3. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).
4. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A).
DLC circuit.
7. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then SRS, then Calibration. In the Calibration Menu, select OPDS UNIT
INITIALIZATION. Follow the screen prompts to initialize the OPDS unit.
9. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
NOTE: If the OPDS unit fails to initialize after several attempts, replace the OPDS sensor/seat-back and retry. If
the OPDS unit continues to fail to initialize, replace the OPDS unit.
Side Airbag Replacement
Removal
2. Remove the front seat assembly.
3. Pull out the seat-back cover/pad as needed.
4. Release the rear hooks (A) from seat-back frame (B).
5. Remove the mounting nut (C) and the side airbag (D).
Installation
NOTE:
If the side airbag lid is secured with tape, remove the tape.
Do not open the lid on the side airbag cover.
Use new mounting nut tightened to the specified torque.
Make sure that the seat-back cover/pad is installed properly. Improper installation may prevent proper deployment.
Be sure to install the harness so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts.
1. Place the side airbag (A) on the seat-back frame. Torque the new side airbag mounting nut (B).
2. Install the rear hooks (C) in the seat-back frame (D).
3. Install the seat-back cover/pad.
4. Install the front seat assembly. then connect the floor wire harness 2P connector.
5. Move the front seat and the seat-back through their full ranges of movement, making sure the harness are not
pinched or interfering with other parts.
8. After installing the side airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch to ON (II); the SRS
indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off.
Side Curtain Airbag Replacement
Removal
NOTE:
Review the interior trim replacement procedure before doing repair or service.
Removal of the side curtain airbag must be done according to Precaution and Procedures.
The side curtain airbag system consists of many components. When the side curtain airbag
has been deployed, go to Component Replacement/Inspection After Deployment, and replace
all of the parts listed.
2. Remove the cargo area side trim panel.
3. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connectors (A) from the side curtain airbags.
4. Remove the headliner.
5. Remove the side airbag mounting bolts (A) and mounting screws (B) from the bracket. Detach
the clip (C), then remove the side curtain airbag (D).
Installation
NOTE:
Installation of the side curtain airbag must be done according to the Precautions and
Procedures.
If the airbag is frayed, or has any other visible damage, replace it. Do not attempt to repair an
airbag.
When you install the airbag, make sure it is not twisted, and that it is not caught between the
inflator bracket by the bracket bolts.
Make sure that the side curtain airbag inflator retainer is installed properly. Otherwise the airbag
could incorrectly deploy and cause damage or injuries.
Make sure you have the slack or no cutting and peeling. If tape has slack or cutting, and peeling
side curtain airbag should be replacement.
1. Place the side curtain airbag assembly on the side of the roof, and fit its clip (A) into the holes
in the body. Tighten the new side curtain airbag mounting bolts (B) and mounting screws (C).
2. Connect the floor wire harness 2P connectors (A) to the side curtain airbags.
5. After installing the side curtain airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch
to ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off.
6. Install all removed parts.
7. Confirm proper headliner/pillar trim overlap.
Side Impact Sensor (Second) Replacement
Removal
3. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) from the side impact sensor (second) (B).
4. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the TORX bolt (C) then remove the side impact sensor (second).
Installation
1. Install the side impact sensor (second) with a new TORX bolt (A), then connect the floor wire harness 2P connector
(B) to the side impact sensor (second) (C).
seconds, and then go off.
SRS Unit Replacement
Removal
3. Remove the rear heater joint duct.
4. Disconnect SRS unit connectors A (39P) and B (39P) from the SRS unit.
5. Remove the TORX bolts (C) using a TORX T30 bit, then pull out the SRS unit.
Installation
1. Install the SRS unit (A) with a new TORX bolts (B), then connect the connectors (C) to the SRS unit; push them
into position until they click.
NOTE: Be sure the SRS unit is sitting squarely against it's bracket before torquing the TORX bolts.
SRS Unit Update
Honda diagnostic system (HDS) table tester
Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation with HDS and CM update software
HDS pocket tester
GNA600 and an iN workstation with HDS and CM update soft ware (Any one of the update tools above will work)
NOTE:
Use this procedure when you need to update the SRS unit at anytime.
Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software version.
Before you update the SRS unit, make sure the battery in the vehicle is fully charged.
Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or ACC (I) during the update. If there is a problem with the update, leave
the ignition switch in the ON (II).
To prevent SRS unit damage, do not operate anything electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, A/C, power
windows, moonroof (if equipped), door locks, etc.) during the update.
To ensure the latest program is installed, do an SRS unit update whenever the SRS unit is replaced.
You cannot update an SRS unit with a program it already has. It will only accept a new program.
If you need to diagnose the HIM because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashed during the update, leave
the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will
prevent SRS unit damage.
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A).
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start the engine.
DLC circuit.
4. Select the update program, and follow the screen prompts to update the SRS unit.
5. If the software in the SRS unit is the latest, disconnect the HDS/HIM from the DLC, and go back to the procedure
that you were doing. If the software in the SRS unit is not the latest, follow the instructions on the screen.
NOTE: If you run into a problem during the update procedure (programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes
over 100 %, D or immobilizer light flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.), follow these steps to minimize the chance of
damaging the SRS unit :
Leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position.
Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery charger).
Shut down the HDS.
Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
Reboot the HDS.
Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the update procedure again.
Audio System Description
Overview
Audio Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs
USB Adapter Connector for Inputs and Outputs
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Poor AM or FM radio reception or interference
Poor AM or FM radio reception or interference
NOTE:
Check the vehicle battery condition first.
Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals.
Check the radio reception in an open area.
Compare it to a known-good vehicle of the same model, year, and trim level whenever possible.
If necessary, have the customer demonstrate the symptom.
Poor reception/interference can be caused by the following:
-The radio station is far away.
-Atmospheric conditions are unfavorable.
-Tall buildings, mountains, or high-voltage power lines are nearby.
-Non-standard antenna element.
1. Check if the radio reception/interference is the same as the known-good vehicle in several locations.
Is the reception/interference the same?
NO - Multipath interference or weak station. Operation is normal.■
2. Check the reception/interference while the engine is running, and compare it to the known-good vehicle.
Is there noise (static or whine) only with the engine running?
YES - Check the antenna and radio grounds. If OK, check the charging system, fuel injection system (fuel
pump), HVAC (blower motor), and the ignition system.■
NO - Go to Step 3 .
3. Make sure turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Check the AM/FM antenna element for cracks, or other damage. Make sure that the AM/FM antenna element isn't
loose.
NOTE: Do not use any tools to tighten the AM/FM antenna element.
Is there any damage?
YES - Replace the AM/FM antenna element. ■
NO - Go to Step 5 .
5. Disconnect AM/FM antenna 3P connector.
7. Turn on the audio unit.
8. Measure the voltage between the AM/FM antenna 3P connector No. 3 terminal and body ground.
NO - Go to Step 9 .
10. Remove the audio unit.
13. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector D (3P) No. 3 terminal and body ground with the audio unit
connectors connected.
YES - Repair open or short in the wire between audio unit and AM/FM antenna. Also check the AM/FM antenna
lead/sublead connector.■
NO - Replace the audio unit. ■
15. Remove the audio unit, and disconnect audio unit connector D (3P).
16. Check for continuity between audio unit connector D (3P) terminal No. 1 and body ground.
YES - Replace the AM/FM antenna lead and/or sublead.■
17. Check for continuity between audio unit connector D (3P) No. 1 and No. 2 terminals.
YES - Replace the AM/FM antenna lead and/or sublead.■
18. Check for continuity between audio unit connector D (3P) No. 1 terminal and the AM/FM antenna 3P connector No.
1 terminal.
NO - Replace the AM/FM antenna lead and/or sublead.■
19. Check for continuity between audio unit connector D (3P) No. 2 terminal and the AM/FM antenna 3P connector No.
2 terminal.
YES - Substitute a known-good AM/FM antenna and recheck. If the reception is still poor, replace the audio
unit. ■
NO - Replace the AM/FM antenna lead and/or sublead.■
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Volume does not change
Volume does not change
NOTE: Set the fader and balance positions to the center.
1. Turn on the audio unit, and listen for sound from the speakers.
Is the sound normal?
NO - Go to audio system sound is weak or distorted, or no sound is heard from speakers. ■
2. Operate the volume knob to see if the volume changes.
Does the volume change?
YES - Operation is normal at this time.■
NO - Replace audio unit. ■
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Audio disc does not load
Audio disc does not load
NOTE:
CD labels should not be used in the audio unit. They may damage the player mechanism.
Make sure the CD is compatible with the system (see the owner's manual for more information).
1. Insert a known-good CD to see if the symptom can be duplicated.
Does the CD load?
YES - Operation is normal. If the disc loads normally, but will not play, go to audio disc does not play. ■
NO - Go to Step 2 .
2. Insert another CD.
Does the CD load?
YES - The original CD is faulty.■
NO - Replace audio unit. ■
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Audio disc does not play
Audio disc does not play
1. Try loading a known-good CD.
Does the CD load?
NO - Go to audio disc does not load. ■
2. Insert another known-good CD to see if the symptom can be duplicated.
Does the CD play?
YES - Operation is normal.■
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Audio disc skips
Audio disc skips
1. Confirm the vehicle's tyres are properly inflated with no cupping or flat spots.
2. Check the customers CD for scratches, fingerprints, and marks.
NOTE: The following test should be done with audio unit bass and treble set to customers listening performance.
When comparing to known-good vehicles, the comparison should be done on same model and trim level.
3. Compare the customer's CD that is skipping in a known-good vehicle under the same conditions.
Does the CD skip in the known-good vehicle under the same conditions?
AM/FM Antenna Replacement
1. Remove the AM/FM antenna element (A).
2. Remove the AM/FM antenna base (B).
-1. Remove the quarter pillar trim and disconnect the connector (C).
-2. Remove the headliner and detach the clip (D).
-3. Remove the nut (E) from the AM/FM antenna base and remove it.
3. Install the antenna in the reverse order of removal.
Audio Remote Switch Test
1. Remove the driver's airbag assembly.
2. Disconnect the cable reel 20P connector (A).
3. Measure the resistance between the No. 3 and No. 7 terminals in each switch position according to the table.
Position Resistance
No button pressed About 10 kΩ
MODE About 3.7 kΩ
CH (+) About 1.7 kΩ
CH (−) About 775 Ω
▲ About 357 Ω
(VOL.UP)
▼ About 100 Ω
(VOL.DOWN)
4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the audio remote switch.

USB Adapter Holder Replacement
1. Remove the center lower trim.
2. Remove the 5P connector (A) from the USB adapter holder (B).
3. Push out the USB adapter holder from the center lower trim.
4. Install the holder in the reverse order of removal.
USB Adapter Unit Replacement
2. Disconnect the connector (A) from the USB adapter unit (B).
3. Remove the bolts and the USB adapter unit.
4. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal.
Door Position Adjustment
NOTE: Check for a flush fit with the body, then check for equal gaps between the front, rear, and bottom door edges and Front door
the body. Check that the door and body edges are parallel.
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when adjusting the doors.
2. Adjust at the hinges (A):
Pad a floor jack (B) with shop towels (C), then use the jack to support the door to prevent damage to the
door while adjusting it.
On the front door: Remove the front inner fender. Loosen the hinge mounting bolts (D) slightly, and move the
door backward or forward, up or down as necessary to equalize the gaps.
On the rear door: Loosen the hinge mounting bolts (E) slightly, and move the door backward or forward, up
or down as necessary to equalize the gaps.
Rear door
3. If necessary, replace the door mounting bolts with the adjusting bolts (P/N 90102-SFA-305) made specifically for
door adjustment, then adjust at the door: Loosen the door mounting bolts (F) slightly, and move the door up or
down as necessary to equalize the gaps, and move it in or out until it's flush with the body.
4. Check that the door and body edges are parallel. If necessary, adjust the door cushions (A) to make the rear of the
doors flush with the body.
5. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts, and around the hinges.
6. Check for water leaks.
Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement
NOTE:
Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Take care not to scratch the door and related parts.
RHD model is shown; LHD model is symmetrical.
1. Lower the glass fully.
2. Remove the door sash outer trim.
3. While lifting the rear of the door glass outer weatherstrip (A), slide the weatherstrip rearward, then remove the
weatherstrip.
4. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Push the weatherstrip into place securely.
Make sure that there is no clearance between the rear edge of the weatherstrip and door sash outer trim.
Front Door Latch Replacement - Without Super Locking
NOTE:
Latch Replacement
1. Raise the glass fully.
2. Remove the door panel.
3. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector.
4. Remove the plastic cover, as needed.
5. Detach the latch cable fastener (A) from the latch cable (B).
6. Disconnect the latch cable (A) from the lock knob (B).
7. Detach the inner handle cable fastener (A) from the inner handle cable (B).
8. Disconnect the inner handle cable (A) from the lock knob (B).
9. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed, and remove the bolt, then remove the center lower channel (B).
10. Driver's door. Pull both side flanges (A) of the retainer (B) outward, and pull the middle flange portion (C) of the outer
casing cover (D) out, then disconnect the cylinder cable (E) from the latch.
11. If necessary, remove the front door outer handle and the special screws, then separate the door cylinder (A) and
outer handle protector (B). If the retainer (C) is damaged, release the hooks (D), and replace it.
NOTE: If removed, the special screws must be replaced.
12. Disconnect the outer handle rod (A).

13. Remove the bolt (B) and the screws (C) securing the latch (D), then remove the latch through the hole in the door.
NOTE: Take care not to bend the outer handle rod, the latch cable (E), and the inner handle cable (F).
14. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the actuator connector is plugged in properly, and each rod is connected securely.
Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its
outside perimeter to seal out water.
Check for water leaks.
Cable Replacement Indonesia-produced
models
1. Remove the door latch.
2. Remove the screw(s), then remove the latch protector (A).
Thailand-produced
models
3. Disconnect the latch cable (A) and inner handle cable (B). Indonesia-produced
4. Install the cables in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: models
Make sure the latch cable and inner handle cable are connected securely.
Thailand-produced
models
Front Door Latch Replacement - With Super Locking
NOTE:
Latch Replacement (with Super Locking)

9. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed, and remove the bolt, then remove the center lower channel (B) by
pulling it downward.
10. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the latch (C), then remove the latch through the hole in the door. Take care not
to bend the outer handle rod (D), the cylinder cable (E) (driver's door), the latch cable (F), and the inner handle
cable (G).
11. Driver's door: While pressing a middle flange portion (A) of the outer casing cover (B) against the latch, pull both
outside flanges (C) of the retainer (D) upward.
12. Driver's door: Pull the middle flange portion (A) of the outer casing cover (B) up, then disconnect the cylinder cable
(C) from the latch.
NOTE: As soon as the cable comes off the latch, the shutter (D) goes down into the connector (E).
13. Driver's door: If the retainer (A) of the lock cylinder cable (B) is damaged, release the hooks (C), then replace it.
Make sure the actuator connector is plugged in properly and each rod is connected securely.
Cylinder cable installation: Before installing the cylinder cable (A) to the latch, hang the elbow of the shutter
(B) on the boss (C) as shown. Next install the cylinder cable fully into the connector (D), then push the
retainer (E) until it snaps to engage the latch and the door cylinder securely. Make sure the elbow of the
shutter is on the boss.
Cable Replacement
1. Remove the screw, then remove the latch protector (A) by releasing the hook (B).
2. Detach the latch cable (A) and the inner handle cable (B) from the latch (C).
3. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal.
Front Door Channel Tape Replacement
NOTE:
Keep dust away from the working area.
When working at lower temperatures, heat the door channel and door channel tape with a hair
dryer.
Door channel: about 15 °C (59 °F).
Door channel tape: about 30 °C (86 °F).
When heating the door channel tape, heat it evenly and gradually to prevent deformation.
When pressing the door channel tape, slowly press it from the corner to prevent air bubbles and
wrinkles.
If there are air bubbles in the door channel tape, release the air with your finger or a plastic
squeegee.
If the air bubble is more than 10 mm (0.4 in.) in diameter, peel up the door channel tape, then
reapply it.
1. The following tools are required to replace the door channel tape:
Plastic squeegee
Isopropyl alcohol
Sponge or shop towel
Hair dryer
Power mirror
Front door glass outer weatherstrip
Front door weatherstrip, as needed
Glass run channel, as needed
Front door sash outer trim
3. Slowly peel up the old door channel tape while heating it with a hair dryer.
4. Clean the door channel bonding surface with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After
cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface.
5. Attach the door channel tape.
-1. Peel the edge of the adhesive backing from the channel tape.
-2. Fit the door channel tape to the door channel.
-3. Apply the door channel tape to the door channel while peeling the adhesive backing from it
a little at a time. Check that the channel tape is parallel with the door channel.
-4. Push firmly on the door channel tape with a plastic squeegee (felt side).
NOTE: To prevent air bubbles, slowly press the door channel tape around the door frame
corner.
6. As necessary, repeat the preceding steps.
7. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
8. Check that the body color on the door channel is covered by the door channel tape.
Attachment Point (Reference)

Front Door Outer Handle Replacement
NOTE:
When removing components, use the trim tools or equivalent.
3. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector (A), and detach the harness clips (B).
4. Remove the plug caps (C), then remove the plastic cover (D) as needed.
5. Detach the rod fastener (A), then disconnect the outer handle rod (B) with a clip remover.
6. Remove the bolts.
7. Remove the outer handle (A).

-1. Release the hook (B) of the outer handle protector (C).
-2. Apply protective tape (D) to the door panel (E) as shown.
-3. Pry out the outer handle with the appropriate trim tool (F) to release the hook (G), then remove it.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door.
8. Remove the rod fastener (A) from the outer handle base (B), then replace it with a new one.
9. Install the handle (A) in the following order.

-1. Set the upper portion (B) of the handle to the edge (C) of the door panel.
-2. While pulling up the handle, push the lower hook (D) into place.
NOTE: Push the hook into place securely.
10. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure that the actuator connector is plugged in properly, and that the outer handle rod are connected
securely.
Make sure the door handle works properly.
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation
NOTE:
1. Remove the screw securing the inner handle (A).
2. Remove the grip cover (A).

-1. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape, pry out the front bottom edge of the cover while
pushing up the hooks (B).
-2. From front to rear, pry out along the edge of the cover to release the hooks (C, D) from the power window
switch panel (E).
-3. Release the rear hook (F), while pulling the cover forward.
3. Disconnect the power window switch connector (A). Remove the screw from the grip base (B).
4. Pull the inner handle (A) forward and out half-way to release the hooks (B).
5. Apply protective tape (A) to the door panel (B) as shown.
6. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it.
-1. Start at the bottom edge of the door panel, release the clips with a commercially available trim pad remover.
-2. Detach the upper clips.
-3. Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward.
NOTE: Do not pull the door panel up too far, or the door panel will be damaged by the inner handle (B).
7. Remove the door panel (A) while pulling the inner handle (B) out through the hole in the door panel.
8. Install the door panel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
Front Door Sash Outer Trim Replacement
NOTE:
1. Remove the door sash outer trim (A).
-1. Remove the screw from inside the door.
-2. Release the lower edge of the trim from the door glass outer weatherstrip (B).
-3. Pull the trim up to release the hooks (C) from the door, then remove the trim.
2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal.
Door Striker Adjustment
Make sure the door latches securely without slamming it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker nuts are fixed,
but the striker can be adjusted slightly up or down, and in or out.
1. Loosen the screws (B).
2. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer (C). Do not tap the
striker too hard.
3. Lightly tighten the screws.
4. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door against the body to be sure the striker allows a flush fit. If the door
latches properly, tighten the screws and recheck.
Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement
NOTE:
Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
1. At the front pillar, remove the door checker mounting bolt (A).
2. Detach the clips (B, C, D, E), then remove the door weatherstrip (F).
3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal and note these items:
Check if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace them with new ones.
Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (G) securely.
Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to door stop mounting bolt before installation.
Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement
NOTE:
1. Lower the glass fully.
2. Remove the rear door rear sash trim.
3. While lifting the rear of the door glass outer weatherstrip (A), slide the weatherstrip rearward, then remove the
weatherstrip.
Push the weatherstrip into place securely.
Make sure that there is no clearance between the front edge of the weatherstrip and door sash outer trim.
Rear Door Latch Replacement
NOTE:
Latch Replacement
3. Detach the harness clip (A), then disconnect the power door lock actuator connector (B).
4. Remove the plug caps (C), then remove the plastic cover (D), as needed.
9. Remove the bolt, and loosen the nut, then pull the rear lower channel (A) forward.
10. Remove the screws (A, B), then remove the latch (C) through the gap between the rear lower channel and door.
NOTE: Take care not to bend the latch cable, the inner handle cable.
Make sure the actuator connector is plugged in properly.
Cable Replacement Indonesia-produced
models
1. Remove the door latch.
2. Remove the screws, then remove the latch protector (A).
Thailand-produced
models
3. Disconnect the latch cable (A) and the inner handle cable (B). Indonesia-produced
4. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: models
Thailand-produced
models
Rear Door Channel Tape Replacement
NOTE:
Keep dust away from the working area.
When working at lower temperatures, heat the door channel and door channel tape with a hair
dryer.
Door channel: about 15 °C (59 °F).
Door channel tape: about 30 °C (86 °F).
When heating the door channel tape, heat it evenly and gradually to prevent deformation.
When pressing the door channel tape, slowly press it from the corner to prevent air bubbles and
wrinkles.
If there are air bubbles in the door channel tape, release the air with your finger or a plastic
squeegee.
If the air bubble is more than 10 mm (0.4 in.) in diameter, peel up the door channel tape, then
reapply it.
1. The following tools are required to replace the door channel tape:
Plastic squeegee
Isopropyl alcohol
Sponge or shop towel
Hair dryer
Rear door sash outer trim
Rear door rear sash trim
Rear door glass outer weatherstrip
Glass run channel, as needed
Rear door weatherstrip, as needed
3. Slowly peel up the old door channel tape while heating it with a hair dryer.
4. Clean the door channel bonding surface with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After
cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface.
5. Attach the door channel tape.
-1. Peel the edge of the adhesive backing from the channel tape.
-2. Fit the door channel tape to the door channel.
-3. Apply the door channel tape to the door channel while peeling the adhesive backing from it
a little at a time. Check that the channel tape is parallel with the door channel.
-4. Push firmly on the door channel tape with a plastic squeegee (felt side).
NOTE: To prevent air bubbles, slowly press the door channel tape around the door frame
corner.
6. As necessary, repeat the preceding steps.
8. Check that the body color on the door channel is covered by the door channel tape.
Attachment Point (Reference)

Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement
NOTE:
4. Remove the maintenance caps (A).
5. Detach the rod fastener (A), then disconnect the outer handle rod (B) with a clip remover.
6. Remove the outer handle (A).

-1. Remove the bolts.
-2. Apply protective tape (B) to the door panel (C) as shown.
-3. Pry out the outer handle with the appropriate trim tool (D) to release the hook (E), then remove it.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door.
7. Remove the rod fastener (A) from the outer handle base (B), then replace it with a new one.
8. Install the handle (A) in the following order.

-1. Set the upper portion (B) of the handle to the edge (C) of the door panel.
-2. While pulling up the handle, push the lower hook (D) into place.
NOTE: Push the hook into place securely.
9. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure that the outer handle rod are connected securely.
Make sure the door handle works properly.
Rear Door Rear Sash Trim Replacement
NOTE:
1. Remove the door quarter inner trim.
2. From inside the door, remove the screw.
3. Pull up the door rear sash trim (A) to release the hooks (B, C), then remove it from the door.
Rear Door Sash Outer Trim Replacement
NOTE:
2. Remove the screw from inside the door.
3. Pull the rear door sash outer trim (A) up to release the hooks (B) from the door, then remove the trim.
Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement
NOTE:
Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
Rear door sash outer trim
2. At the center pillar, remove the door checker mounting bolt (A).
3. Detach the clips (B, C, D, E), then remove the door weatherstrip (F).
Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (G) securely.
Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the door stop mounting bolt before installation.
Front Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the front bumper.
Take care not to scratch the front bumper and the body.
1. Remove the screws (A, B, C) and clips (D, E) securing the front bumper (F).
NOTE: To remove the clips, pry the inner clip up at the edge near the line (G) on its head.
2. Pull on the front bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas to release it from the hooks (B) on the side spacers (C).
3. With the help of an assistant, release the bumper from the hooks (A) on the upper beam (B).
4. Remove the clips (A, B) securing the front bumper (C).

NOTE: To remove the clips, pry the inner clip up at the edge near the line (D) on its head.
5. Remove the front bumper (A).

6. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks (of both upper beams and side spacers) on each side
securely.
Push the clips and the hooks into place securely.
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE: Without rear splash
Put on gloves to protect your hands. guard
Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the rear bumper.
Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and the body.
1. Remove the clips (A), screws (B), and bolts (C, D) securing the rear bumper (E).
NOTE: To remove the clips, pry the inner clip up at the edge near the line (F) on its head.
With rear splash guard
2. Pull on the rear bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas to release it from the hooks (B, C) on the side spacers (D).
3. With the help of an assistant, while pulling the wheel arch portion away from the side spacer (A), pull the rear
bumper (B) to release the bumper from the hooks (C) on the body.
4. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks (of both the side spacers) on each side securely.
Rear Bumper Lower Trim Replacement
For Some Models
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the rear bumper.
1. Remove the rear bumper (A).
2. Remove the clips and the hooks (B, C), then remove the rear bumper lower trim (D) from the rear bumper.
NOTE: To remove the clips, pry the inner clip up at the edge near the line (E) on its head.
3. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Front Air Spoiler Replacement
For Some Models
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front bumper.
1. Remove the clips securing the air spoiler (A) from under the front bumper (B).
NOTE: To remove the clips, pry the inner clip up at the edge near the line (C) on its head.
2. Pull the front air spoiler back to detach the hooks (D) and remove the spoiler.
3. Install the spoiler in the reverse order of removal:
Bulkhead Under Spoiler Replacement
For Some Models
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Detach the clips, then remove the bulkhead under spoiler (A) from the front bulkhead.
NOTE: To remove the clips, pry the inner pin up at the edge near the line (B) on its head.
2. Install the spoiler in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Push the clips into place securely.
Rear Fender Cover Replacement
NOTE: Driver's side without
Put on gloves to protect your hands. rear splash guard
Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the screws and the clips, then remove the rear fender cover (A).
2. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Driver's side with rear

splash guard
Passenger's side
without rear splash
guard
Passenger's side with

rear splash guard
Front Fender Fairing Replacement
NOTE:
1. Remove the front inner fender as needed.
2. From the wheel arch, remove the clip and the maintenance plug (A).
3. Release the hooks (B) of the front fender enclosure (C) from the holes in the front fender, and pull the fender
enclosure out, then remove it.
4. Install the fender enclosure in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Before installing the clips, make sure the hooks (A) of the front fender enclosure (B) is installed into the
holes (C) in the front fender securely.
Push the clip into place securely.
Rear Air Outlet Replacement
NOTE:
1. Remove the rear bumper.
2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet (B).
3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook portions until the hooks snap into place.
Rear Spring Seat Lower Cover Replacement
1. Remove the clip and detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear spring seat lower cover (B).
Checki if the clip is dameged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace it with a new one.
Push the hook portions into place securely.
Fuel Fill Door/Adapter Replacement
1. Remove the fuel cap (A) by turning it counterclockwise, and remove the screw.
2. Pull the fuel fill door/adapter lip (A) out from the fuel fill pipe (B).
3. While pulling the fuel fill door/adapter (A), turn the fuel fill door/adapter 90 ° clockwise with the fuel fill door partly
opened.
4. Remove the fuel fill door/adapter (A).

-1. Pull the lower portion of the fuel fill door/adapter out.
-2. Pull the portion (B) of the hinge out from inside the body.
-3. If necessary, release the hooks (C), then remove the fuel fill door push lifter (D) from the fuel fill door/adapter.
5. If necessary, pull out the fuel fill adapter grommet (A) and the fuel fill adapter packing (B) from the rod (C).
NOTE: When reinstalling the packing, be sure the arrow mark (D) on the packing is the upper side of the packing.
6. If necessary, remove the fuel fill door actuator (A).

-1. Remove the left cargo area side trim panel.
-2. Disconnect the actuator connector (B), and loosen the screws (C), then remove the actuator.
7. Install the fuel fill door/adapter in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding surfaces (A) of the fuel fill adapter grommet (B) where shown.
Make sure the adapter lip (C) is fully seated on the fuel fill pipe (D).
Hood Adjustment
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the hood, body and other related parts.
1. Remove the cowl covers.
2. Slightly loosen each bolt (A).
3. Adjust the hood (B) alignment in this sequence:
Adjust the hood right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated
holes in the hood hinges (C).
Turn the hood edge cushions (D), as necessary, to make the hood fit flush with the body
at the front and side edges.
4. Adjust the hood latch (E) to obtain the proper height at the forward edge, and move the hood
latch right or left until the striker (F) is centered in the hood latch.
5. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
6. Check that the hood opens properly and closes securely.
7. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts and around the hinges, and let the paint dry.
8. Apply multipurpose grease to the hood latch and the hood hinges as indicated by the arrows.
9. Reinstall all of the removed parts.
Hood Insulator Replacement
1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips, then remove the hood insulator (A). Take care not to scratch the hood.
2. Install the insulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Hood Latch Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body and related parts.
1. For some models: Remove the clip (A), then disconnect and detach the hood switch connector (B).
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch (A) from the body.
3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (B) from the hood latch. Take care not to kink the cable.
Apply multipurpose grease to each location of the hood latch indicated by the arrows.
Make sure the hood opener cable is connected properly and hood latch switch connector is plugged in
properly (for some models).
Adjust the hood latch alignment.
Make sure the hood opens properly and locks securely.
Hood Seal Replacement
1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips, then remove the hood seals (A). Take care not to scratch the hood.
2. Install the seal in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Hood Release Handle Replacement
NOTE:
Kick panel, driver's side
Driver's dashboard undercover
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood release handle (A).
3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (B) from the hood release handle. Take care not to kink the cable.
4. Install the hood release handle in the reverse order of removal, and note there items:
Make sure the hood opener cable is connected properly.
Make sure the hood opens properly.
Front Pillar Corner Trim Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the corner trim and the body.
1. Carefully insert the trim tool (A) next to the grommet (B), and detach the grommet by prying on the front pillar
corner trim (C), then detach the tab (D).
NOTE: Apply protective tape (E) to the body as shown.
2. While sliding the front pillar corner trim forward in the direction shown, detach the clips (A) and the tab (B) from the
body, then remove the trim.
Front Bumper Lid Replacement
For Some Models
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the front bumper.
1. Release the hooks (A) by using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with the protective tape, then remove the front bumper
lid (B) from the front bumper (C).
2. Install the front bumper lid by pushing on the hook portions until the hooks snap into place.
Cowl Cover Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to damage the body.
RHD model is shown, LHD model is symmetrical.
1. Remove the windshield wiper arms.
2. Using a clip remover, detach the clips from the cowl cover, then disconnect the windshield washer tube (A).
3. Detach the clips by carefully pulling the windshield side edge of the cowl cover (A) upward, and release the forward
hooks (B) by pulling the cowl cover forward, then remove the cover.
4. Remove the hood hinge covers (A) on both sides.

-1. Detach the clips(B) from the under-cowl panel.
-2. Release the hook (C) from the front fender, then detach the clips (D).
5. If necessary, remove the under-cowl panel (A).

-1. Remove the wiper motor.
6. Install the covers in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the washer tube is connected securely.
Upper Front Grille Replacement
NOTE:
2. Remove the screws, and release the hooks (A), then remove the upper front grille (B) from the front bumper (C).
3. For some models: If necessary, remove the screws and the push nuts (A), then remove the upper front grille
molding (B) and the front ‘‘H'' emblem (C) from the grille base (D).
4. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Rear License Trim Replacement
NOTE:
Tailgate lower trim panel
Rear window wiper motor
Rear window wiper arm
2. From inside the tailgate, remove the bolt securing the rear license trim.
3. Pull out the rear license trim (A) to detach the pins (B) of the clips from the grommets (C), then remove the trim
from the tailgate.
4. Using snap ring pliers, remove the grommets from the tailgate.
5. Check if the grommets and pins are damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace grommets and pins as
an assembly with new ones.
6. Install the grommets on the pins by pushing them into place.
Do not roll up the lip (D) of the rear window rubber dam. If necessary for proper attachment, set a plastic
plate between the lip and the trim. Install the top edge of the trim while sliding a plastic plate sideward. Be
careful not to cut the lip.
Rear Strake Replacement
For Some Models
1. Remove the clips, then remove he rear strake (A) from the body.
2. Install the strake in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Roof Molding Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to bend the roof molding.
1. Apply protective tape (A) to the body. Using a trim tool (B), pry up on the roof molding (C).
2. Pull up and slide the roof molding to release the front bracket (D) from the pin (E).
3. Pull up the front portion of the roof molding.
4. Pull up and release the rear bracket (A) from the pin (B), then remove the roof molding (C).
5. Install the molding in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Take care not to damage the windshield molding.
Make sure the roof molding is installed securely.
Side Sill Panel Replacement
For Some Models
1. Remove the side sill panel (A).
-1. On the back of the front wheel arch, remove the clips (B).
-2. Remove the expansion clips (C).
-3. Slide the side sill panel forward, and remove it. The side clips (D, E, F) will stay in the
body.
-4. Remove the side clips (D, E) from the body by turning them 45 °.
-5. If necessary, use a utility knife to cut the double-sided adhesive tape (G) that holds the
side clips (F) to the body. Take care not to scratch the body.
2. Check if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace them with new
ones.
3. If the side clips (F) will be reinstalled, remove any remaining double-sided adhesive tape from
the side clips, then clean the side clip surfaces with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol
where new double-sided will be attached. Apply primer to the side clips, then attach new
double-sided adhesive tape.
4. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol where adhesive tape will
be attached.
5. Install the side clips (A, B, C) on the side sill panel (D).
6. Hold the panel up, and fit all the side clips into the holes in the body. Push on the panel until
the clips snap into place, and press the adhesive tape into place.
7. Install the expansion clips (E).
8. Install the clips (F) on the back of the front wheel arch.
Tailgate Adjustment
NOTE:
Have an assistant help you when adjusting the tailgate.
Take care not to scratch the tailgate, the body and other related parts.
1. Remove the tailgate support strut from each side.
2. Slightly loosen each bolt.
3. Adjust the tailgate (A) alignment in the following sequence:
Adjust the tailgate hinges (B) right and left, using the elongated holes.
Turn the tailgate edge cushions (C), in or out as necessary, to make the tailgate fit flush with the body at the
side edges.
Adjust the fit between the tailgate and tailgate opening by moving the striker (D), and adjust the striker right
or left until it is centered in the tailgate latch (E).
4. Tighten each bolt securely.
5. Check that the tailgate opens properly and locks securely.
6. Reinstall the support struts securely.
7. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts and around the hinges.
8. Apply multipurpose grease to the pivot portion of the tailgate hinges as indicated by the arrows.
9. Reinstall all of the removed parts.
Tailgate Latch Replacement - Without Super Locking
NOTE: Without tailgate key
Put on gloves to protect your hands. cylinder
Take care not to scratch the tailgate and the related parts.
If the tailgate latch doesn't be unlocked by using the keyless entry transmitter or unlocking the driver's door lock,
remove the maintenance lid (A) from the tailgate lower trim panel, then unlock the tailgate latch by turning the lock
lever counterclockwise as shown. Open the tailgate by pulling the tailgate handle.
With tailgate key

cylinder
1. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel.

2. Disconnect the tailgate opener cable (A) from the tailgate latch (B). Take care not to kink the cable.
3. For some models: Disconnect the cylinder rod from the tailgate lock cylinder.
4. Disconnet the tailgate latch actuator connector (A) and the tailgate lock switch connector (B), and detach the clip
(C), then remove the tailgate latch.
5. Using a 6 mm socket wrench, remove the bolts, then pull out the tailgate latch (D) from the tailgate.
6. Install the tailgate latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly and the handle cable is connected properly.
Make sure the tailgate opens properly and locks securely.
Tailgate Latch Replacement - With Super Locking
With Super Locking
NOTE:
If the tailgate latch doesn't be unlocked by using the keyless entry transmitter or unlocking the driver's door lock,
remove the maintenance lid (A) from the tailgate lower trim panel, then unlock the tailgate latch by turning the lock
lever counterclockwise as shown. Open the tailgate by pulling the tailgate handle.

2. Disconnect the tailgate opener cable (A) from the tailgate latch (B). Take care not to kink the cable.
3. Disconnect the tailgate latch actuator connector (A) and the tailgate lock switch connector (B), and the trunk knob
switch connector (C) and detach the clip (D), then remove the tailgate latch.
4. Using a 6 mm socket wrench, remove the bolts, then pull out the tailgate latch (E) from the tailgate.
5. Install the tailgate latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly and the handle cable is connected properly.
Tailgate Lock Cylinder Replacement
For Some Models
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
2. Disconnect the tailgate cylinder rod (A).
NOTE: Check for damaged or stress-whitened rod fastener (B).
3. Remove the bolt securing the lock cylinder (A), then remove the lock cylinder by turning it.
4. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the cylinder rod is connected properly.
Tailgate Support Strut Replacement
NOTE:
Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the support strut.
Take care not to scratch the body and tailgate.
1. Remove the pivot bolt (A) from the body.
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the support strut (B) from the tailgate.
3. Install the tailgate side bolts first, next install the body side pivot bolt, and fix the support strut correctly.
Tailgate Weatherstrip Replacement
1. Remove the tailgate weatherstrip (A) by pulling out on it.
2. Locate the painted alignment mark (B) on the tailgate weatherstrip. Align the painted mark with the alignment tab in
the center of the tailgate opening, and install the weatherstrip. Make sure it's seated completely and facing in the
direction shown. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the weatherstrip.
Tailgate Handle Replacement
NOTE:
Rear license trim
2. Disconnect the tailgate opener cable (A) from the tailgate handle (B), and remove the nuts. Take care not to kink
the cable.
3. From outside of the tailgate, pull out the tailgate handle (A), then remove it.
4. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the tailgate opener cable is connected securely.
Make sure the tailgate opens properly.
Frame Repair Chart
Top View
Side View
Unit: mm (in.)
φ: Inner diameter
Unit: mm (in.)
a1 φ: Inner
For engine side mount φ15 (0.59) front
diameter g Floor center stiffener locating hole φ15 (0.59) l Front floor cross-member locating hole φ25 (0.98) p
a2 For engine side mount φ13 (0.51) outer h1 Front floor locating hole φ50 (1.97) front h2 Front floor locating hole φ25 (0.98) rear q
a1 For engine side mount φ15 (0.59) front g Floor center stiffener locating hole φ15 (0.59) l Front floor cross-member locating hole φ25 (0.98)
a3 For engine side mount φ15 (0.59) rear i1 Inside sill locating hole φ25 (0.98) front Inside sill locating hole φ25 (0.98) rear r1
a2 For engine side mount φ13 (0.51) outer h1 Front floor locating hole φ50 (1.97) front h2i2 Front floor locating hole φ25 (0.98) rear
b1 a3 For transmission mount φ15 (0.59) front j1 R Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) front m Trailing arm gusset locating hole φ20 (0.79) r2
For engine side mount φ15 (0.59) rear i1 Inside sill locating hole φ25 (0.98) front i2 Inside sill locating hole φ25 (0.98) rear
b2 For transmission mount φ15 (0.59) wheelhouse side j1 L Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) front n1 Rear seat guide bracket locating hole φ9 (0.35) right s
b1 For transmission mount φ15 (0.59) front j1 R Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) front m Trailing arm gusset locating hole φ20 (0.79)
b3 For transmission mount φ15 (0.59) rear j2 R Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) rear n2 Rear seat guide bracket locating hole φ9 (0.35) left t
b2 For transmission mount φ15 (0.59) wheelhouse side j1 L Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) front n1 Rear seat guide bracket locating hole φ9 (0.35) right
b4 b3 For transmission mount φ13φ15
(0.51) j2 L Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) rear o1 For trailing arm mount φ15 (0.59) inner u
For transmission mount (0.59) rear j2 R Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) rear n2 Rear seat guide bracket locating hole φ9 (0.35) left
[Manual transmission model] k Front floor center locating hole φ15 (0.59) For trailing arm mount φ17 (0.67) outer v
b4 For transmission mount φ13 (0.51) j2 L Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) rear o1o2 For trailing arm mount φ15 (0.59) inner
c Front[Manual
side frame locating hole
transmission φ16 (0.63)
model]
k 1291 (50.83)
Front floor center locating hole φ15 (0.59) k o2 For trailing arm mount φ17 (0.67) outer
d c FrontFront
damper 374 (14.7)
sidecenter hole φ48hole
frame locating (1.89)
φ16 (0.63) 359 (14.1)
1020 (40.16) l i2 m o2 r1 s t
e1 For front subframe mount h2 n1 o1 p q
d φ15Front damper
(0.59) front center hole φ48 (1.89) 231 (9.09) d e4 f g h1 i1 j1 R k j2 R
e2 u
e1 For front subframe mount φ15 (0.59) front
e2 For front subframe mount
e2 φ16For(0.63)
front
middle
subframe mount φ16 (0.63) middle a2
7.54 °
d
e3 Re3 R Outrigger
Outrigger locating
locating holehole φ11 (0.43)
e3 φ11 (0.43) locating hole φ11 (0.43) x 15 (0.59) slot
L Outrigger
e3 Le4 Outrigger locating hole mount φ15 (0.59) rear
For front subframe
φ11 (0.43) x 15 (0.59) slot u
f Outrigger locating hole φ25 (0.98)
e4 For front subframe
mount φ15 (0.59) rear a1
c a3 48
f Outrigger locating hole e1 (1.89) s
d
φ25 (0.98) B e3 R
[Section BB] q
b2 p
CENTER LINE B
o2
j1 R
j1 L j2 R k o1
l i2
b3 e3e2L i1 h2
h1 m
e3
b1 e4
BASE
LINE A
c b3
a2 e1
b1
[Manual transmission model] a1
b2 a3
CENTER LINE A
33 (1.30) f g r1, r2
65 (2.56) n2 64
283 (11.1) j1 L j2 L
[Manual transmission model] 76 (2.52)
BASE LINE
338 (13.3) j2 L n1, n2
(2.99) 110
409 (16.1)
138 (4.33)
425 (16.7)
b4 (5.43) 634 (25.0) 234 (9.21)
155 715 (28.2) 373 (14.7)
216 (8.50)
(6.10) 805 (31.7) 405 (15.9)
340 (13.4) 900 (35.4) 469 (18.5)
1290 (50.79) j2 R/j2 L 630 (24.8)
1450 (57.09) l 655 (25.8)
1610 (63.39) h2 862 (33.9)
155 1700 (66.93) i2
b4 (6.10) 1925 (75.79) m
BASE LINE 1935 (76.18) n1, n2
BASE LINE BASE LINE 2000 (78.74)

BASE LINE
Frame Repair Chart
Top View
Unit: mm (in.)
φ: Inner diameter
a1 For engine side mount φ15 (0.59) front g Floor center stiffener locating hole φ15 (0.59)
a2 For engine side mount φ13 (0.51) outer h1 Front floor locating hole φ50 (1.97) front
a3 For engine side mount φ15 (0.59) rear i1 Inside sill locating hole φ25 (0.98) front
b1 For transmission mount φ15 (0.59) front j1 R Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) front
b2 For transmission mount φ15 (0.59) wheelhouse side j1 L Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) front
b3 For transmission mount φ15 (0.59) rear j2 R Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) rear
b4 For transmission mount φ13 (0.51) j2 L Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) rear
[Manual transmission model] k Front floor center locating hole φ15 (0.59)
c Front side frame locating hole φ16 (0.63)
374 (14.7)
1291 (50.83) k
d Front damper center hole φ48 (1.89) 1020 (40.16)
359 (14.1)
φ15 (0.59) front
231 (9.09)
d e4 f g h1 i1 j1 R k j2 R
e2
φ16 (0.63) middle a2
e3 R Outrigger locating hole
φ11 (0.43)
e3 L Outrigger locating hole
φ11 (0.43) x 15 (0.59) slot
a3
c
f Outrigger locating hole e1
φ25 (0.98) e3 R
CENTER LINE
b3 e3 L
b1
[Manual transmission model]

b2
CENTER LINE 33 (1.30)
65 (2.56)
283 (11.1) j1 L j2 L
76
338 (13.3)
(2.99)
409 (16.1)
138 425 (16.7)
(5.43)
634 (25.0)
155 715 (28.2)
216 (8.50)
(6.10) 805 (31.7)
340 (13.4) 900 (35.4)
1290 (50.79) j2 R/j2 L
1450 (57.09) l
1610 (63.39)
1700 (66.93)
b4 1925 (75.79)
1935 (76.18)
BASE LINE BASE LINE

Side View
l Unit: mmfloor
Front (in.) cross-member locating hole φ25 (0.98) p Middle floor cross-member locating hole φ20 (0.79)
h2 φ: Inner
Frontdiameter
floor locating hole φ25 (0.98) rear q Rear frame A locating hole φ15 (0.59)
i2 a1InsideFor
sillengine side
locating mount
hole φ15 (0.59)
φ25 (0.98) rear front r1 gRear floor
Floor center hole
locating stiffener locating
φ25 (0.98) righthole φ15 (0.59)
m a2Trailing
Forarm
engine sidelocating
gusset mount φ13
hole(0.51) outer
φ20 (0.79) r2 h1 Front
Rear floor floor locating
locating hole φ25hole φ50
(0.98) left(1.97) front
n1 a3Rear For
seatengine side mount
guide bracket φ15 (0.59)
locating hole φ9rear
(0.35) right s i1 Inside
For spring basesill locating
mount hole
hole 15 φ25x (0.98)
(0.59) front
15 (0.59) square
n2 b1Rear For
seattransmission
guide bracketmount φ15hole
locating (0.59)
φ9front
(0.35) left t j1 R damper
Rear Floor frame
centerlocating
hole φ24hole φ15 (0.59) front
(0.94)
o1 b2For trailing
For transmission
arm mountmount φ15inner
φ15 (0.59) (0.59) wheelhouse side u j1 L frame
Rear FloorBframe locating
locating hole(0.79)
hole φ20 φ15 (0.59) front
o2 b3For trailing
For transmission
arm mountmount φ15outer
φ17 (0.67) (0.59) rear v j2 R floor
Rear Floor frame
side locating
panel hole
locating φ15
hole φ20(0.59) rear
(0.79)
l i2 m o2 r1 s k Front floor center locating hole φ15 (0.59)
ch2 Front side t
n1 frame locating
o1 hole φ16 (0.63)p q v
d Front damper center hole φ48 (1.89) u
e2 For front subframe mount φ16 (0.63) middle 7.54 °
e3 R Outrigger locating hole φ11 (0.43) d

e3 L Outrigger locating hole φ11 (0.43) x 15 (0.59) slot
e4 For front subframe mount φ15 (0.59) rear
48
(1.89)
d
B
[Section BB]
b2
B
j1 R
j1 L j2 R k
e2 h1 i1
e3
e4
BASE
LINE A r2
c b3
a2 e1
b1
a1 a3
A 92.7
(3.65)
n2 64 f g
(2.52) o1
[Manual transmission model] 110
BASE LINE o2 j2 L
(4.33)
234 (9.21)
b4
373 (14.7)
405 (15.9)
469 (18.5) [Section AA]
630 (24.8)
655 (25.8)
h2 862 (33.9)
i2
m 155
(6.10)
n1, n2
BASE LINE
2000 (78.74)
BASE LINE
l Front floor cross-member locating hole φ25 (0.98) p Middle floor cross-member locating hole φ20 (0.79)
h2 Front floor locating hole φ25 (0.98) rear q Rear frame A locating hole φ15 (0.59)
i2 Inside sill locating hole φ25 (0.98) rear r1 Rear floor locating hole φ25 (0.98) right
m Trailing arm gusset locating hole φ20 (0.79) r2 Rear floor locating hole φ25 (0.98) left
n1 Rear seat guide bracket locating hole φ9 (0.35) right s For spring base mount hole 15 (0.59) x 15 (0.59) square
n2 Rear seat guide bracket locating hole φ9 (0.35) left t Rear damper center hole φ24 (0.94)
o1 For trailing arm mount φ15 (0.59) inner u Rear frame B locating hole φ20 (0.79)
o2 For trailing arm mount φ17 (0.67) outer v Rear floor side panel locating hole φ20 (0.79)
s
q t
o2
o1 v
l i2
h2 m
r1, r2
n1, n2
Subframe Replacement
Front Subframe Torque
NOTE:
After loosening the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones.
When installing, align both installation reference holes in the subframe with both reference holes
in the body using a screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide.
Gauge Control Module Self-diagnostic Function
NOTE: Before doing the self-diagnostic function, make sure the No. 1 (10 A) and the No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box are OK.
The gauge control module has a self-diagnostic function which consists of the following checks:
The beeper drive circuit check.
The indicator drive circuit check.
The switch input test.
The LCD segment check.
The gauges drive circuit check (Tachometer, Fuel gauge, Speedometer).
The communication line check (of the body-controller area network (B-CAN) communication line and the fast-
controller area network (F-CAN) communication line between the gauges).
NOTE:
Indicators are also controlled via the communication line.
Entering the self-diagnostic function with the HDS
Using the HDS, select Body Electrical, Gauges, then Function Test and do the self-diagnostic function.
Entering the self-diagnostic function (manual method)

1. Push and hold the SELECT/RESET switch button.
2. Turn the combination light switch ( ) ON.
4. Within 2−5 sec., turn the combination light switch ( ) OFF, then ON and OFF again.
5. Within 5 sec., release the SELECT/RESET switch button, and then push and release the button
three times repeatedly.
NOTE:
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the dash lights brightness controller operates normally.
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the SELECT/RESET button is used to start the Beeper Drive
Circuit Test and the Gauge Drive Circuit Check.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 2 km/h (1.2 mph) or the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), the
self-diagnostic mode ends.
The Indicator Drive Circuit Check

When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the following indicators blink:
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, A/T gear position indicator, charging system indicator, cruise control indicator,
cruise main indicator, EPS indicator, high beam indicator, high temperature indicator, immobilizer indicator, lights-on
indicator, low temperature indicator, low oil pressure indicator, low fuel indicator, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), seat
belt indicator, security indicator, side airbag cutoff indicator, sequential sportshift mode shift indicator, safety indicators,
SRS indicator.
The Beeper Drive Circuit Check

When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the beeper sounds five times.
Switch Input Check

After the beeper drive circuit check, you can check the switch input. The beeper sounds continuously when the ODO/TRIP
button or the parking brake switch inputs are switched from OFF to ON: ODO/TRIP button, parking brake switch.
The LCD Segment Check

With ODO/TRIP display: When entering the self-diagnostic mode, all the segments blink five times.With multi-information
display (MID): When entering the self-diagnostic mode, ‘‘···'' shows on the MID, and blink five times.
The Gauge Drive Circuit Check

When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the speedometer, the tachometer, the fuel gauge needles
sweep from the minimum position to maximum position, then return to the minimum position.
NOTE:
After the beeper stops sounding and the gauge needles return to the minimum position, pressing the
ODO/TRIP button starts the Beeper Drive Circuit Check (one beep) and the Gauge Drive Circuit Check
again.
The check cannot be started again until the gauge needles return to the minimum position.
If the needles fail to sweep, or the beeper does not sound, replace the gauge control module.
The Communication Line Check - With ODO/TRIP display Example Indication
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the Communication Line Check starts after the LCD Segments
Check.
If all segments come on, the communication line is OK. If faulty, the word ‘‘Err'' will be indicated on the
odometer display followed by number(s).
Error Code List

Error code Type of communication line(s) error
Error 1 F-CAN communication
Error 2 B-CAN communication
Error 12 F-CAN and B-CAN communication
Err 1: there is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge control module and
F-CAN. Check for DTCs in the ECM/PCM, and troubleshoot the indicated DTCs.
B-CAN. Check for DTCs in the body electrical system and troubleshoot the indicated DTCs.
F-CAN or B-CAN. Check for DTCs in the ECM/PCM first and troubleshoot the indicated DTCs. If
there is no DTCs in the ECM/PCM, check for the body electrical system DTCs and troubleshoot
the indicated DTCs.
The Communication Line Check - With multi-information display (MID) Example Indication
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the Communication Line Check starts after the LCD Segments
Check.
If ‘‘···'' come on, the communication line is OK. If faulty, the word ‘‘Error'' will be indicated on the MID
followed by number(s).
Error Code List

Error code Type of communication line(s) error
Error 1 F-CAN communication
Error 2 B-CAN communication
Error 12 F-CAN and B-CAN communication
Error 1: there is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge control module and
F-CAN. Check for DTCs in the ECM/PCM, and troubleshoot the indicated DTCs.
Error 2: there is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge control module and
B-CAN. Check for DTCs in the body electrical system and troubleshoot the indicated DTCs.
Error 12: there is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge control module
and F-CAN or B-CAN. Check for DTCs in the ECM/PCM first and troubleshoot the indicated
DTCs. If there is no DTCs in the ECM/PCM, check for the body electrical system DTCs and
troubleshoot the indicated DTCs.
Ending the self-diagnostic function

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed exceeds 2 km/h (1.2 mph), the self-diagnostic function ends.
Gauge Control Module Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function, and make sure the B-CAN
communication line is OK.
2. Remove the gauge control module (A), and disconnect the 32P connector (B) from it.
3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the
system.
If the terminals are OK, go to Step 4 .
4. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.
If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
If all the input tests prove OK, the gauge control module must be faulty; replace it.
Cavity
Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if
desired result is not
obtained
13 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity to Poor ground (G501)
ground: There should An open in the wire
be continuity.
17 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity to Poor ground (G501)
ground: There should An open in the wire
be continuity.
16 PNK Under all conditions Measure the voltage Blown No. 1 (10 A)
to ground: There fuse in the under-
should be battery dash fuse/relay box
voltage. Faulty under-dash
fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
32 LT Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage Blown No. 22 (7.5
BLU (II) to ground: There A) fuse in the
should be battery under-dash
voltage. fuse/relay box
Faulty under-dash
fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
6 WHT Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage Faulty under-dash
(II), and turn signal to ground: There fuse/relay box
switch in RIGHT should be battery Faulty combination
position voltage when the light switch
lights are flashing. An open in the wire
9 BLU Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage Faulty under-dash
(II), and turn signal to ground: There fuse/relay box
switch in LEFT should be battery Faulty combination
position voltage when the light switch
lights are flashing. An open in the wire
23 ORN Parking brake lever Check for continuity to Faulty parking
pulled ground: There should brake switch
be continuity. An open in the wire
Parking brake lever Check for continuity to Faulty parking
released ground: There should brake switch
be continuity. A short to ground in
the wire
24 GRY Brake fluid is lower Check for continuity to Poor ground (G301)
level in the reservoir ground: There should [G302]
be continuity. Faulty brake fluid
level switch
A short to ground in
the wire
Brake fluid is full Check for continuity to Poor ground (G301)
level in the reservoir ground: There should [G302]
be continuity. Faulty brake fluid
level switch
An open in the wire
14* GRN Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage Blown No. 24 (10
(II), information to ground: There A) fuse in the
button pressed should be battery under-dash
Faulty
select/reset/information
switch
An open in the wire
Cavity
Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if
obtained
Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage Faulty
(II), information to ground: There select/reset/information
button released should be less than 1 switch
V. A short to power in
the wire
An open in the wire
15* PUR Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage Faulty
(II), select/reset to ground: There select/reset/information
button pressed should be battery switch
voltage. An open in the wire
Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage Blown No. 24 (10
(II), select/reset to ground: There A) fuse in the
button released should be less than 1 under-dash
V. fuse/relay box
Faulty
select/reset/information
switch
A short to power in
the wire
An open in the wire
[ ]: LHD model
*: With multi information display
Horns Component Location Index
HORN SWITCH
Test,
CABLE REEL
Replacement,
HORN RELAY (With security)

(LHD model)
Test,
HORNS
Test,
MICU (Without security) Replacement,
(Has built-in horn relay circuit)
HORN RELAY (With security) (RHD model)

Test,
RHD model is shown, LHD model is similar.

Horns Circuit Diagram - With Security
BATTERY
*: Ground through steering colum
*1: Without trailer lighting connector
*2: With trailer lighting connector
*3: With steering wheel switch
[ ]: LHD model
BATTERY
No. 3 TERMINAL
(20 A)*1 (30 A)*2 FUSE BOX
WHT
B23
No. 24
(10 A)
MICU
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
B28
[K3]
WHT
[PUR]
WHT WHT
[PUR] [PUR]
4 2
HORN
RELAY
3 1
ORN PUR
CABLE
REEL
11
ORN PUR PUR

GRN/YEL*3
1 1 1
HORN HORN HORN
SWITCH (Low) (High)
(With double horn)

Horns Circuit Diagram - Without Security
BATTERY
*: Ground through steering colum
*3: With steering wheel switch
No. 3 BATTERY
TERMINAL
(20 A)*1 (30 A)*2 FUSE BOX
WHT
B23 UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 24
(10 A)
MICU
Q11 A13
ORN GRN
CABLE
REEL
11
ORN GRN GRN

GRN/YEL*3
1 1 1
HORN HORN HORN
SWITCH (Low) (High)
(With double horn)

Horn Switch Test
1. Remove the steering column covers.
2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P connector (A) from the cable reel (B).
3. Using a jumper wire, connect the dashboard wire harness 20P connector No. 1 terminal to body ground. The horns
should sound.
If the horn sounds, go to Step 4 .
If the horn do not sound, check these items:
-No. 24 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
-Horn.
-Horn relay (with security).
-MICU (without security).
-An open in the wire.
4. Reconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P connector (A) to the cable reel (B).
5. Remove the driver's airbag assembly, and disconnect the horn switch 1P positive terminal (C) from the driver's
airbag.
6. Without steering wheel switch:

Check for continuity between the dashboard wire harness 20P connector No. 1 terminal and the cable reel
subharness 20P connector No. 11 terminal.
If there is no continuity, replace the cable reel.
7. Check for continuity between the cable reel subharness 20P connector No. 11 terminal and the horn switch 1P
positive terminal.
If there is continuity, check the installation of the driver's airbag assembly and the steering wheel. If OK,
replace the driver's airbag assembly.
If there is no continuity, repair an open in the wire.
8. With steering wheel switch:

Check for continuity between the dashboard wire harness 20P connector No. 1 terminal and the steering wheel
switch 20P connector No. 11 terminal.
If there is no continuity, replace the cable reel.
9. Check for continuity between the steering wheel switch 20P connector No. 11 terminal and the horn switch 1P
positive terminal.
If there is continuity, check the installation of the driver's airbag assembly and the steering wheel. If OK,
replace the driver's airbag assembly.
If there is no continuity, repair an open in the wire.
Horn Test/Replacement
2. Disconnect the 1P connector (A) from each horn (B).
3. Connect the terminal (A) to the battery power, and the bracket (B) to body ground.
4. If the horn does not sound, replace it.
Carpet Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet.
Be careful not to damage the dashboard and other interior trim pieces.
Center console
Front seats, both sides
Kick panels, both sides
Front door sill trim, both sides
Center pillar lower trim, both sides:
-Without side curtain airbags
-With side curtain airbags
Rear door sill trim, both sides
Rear seat leg guide cover, both sides
3. From the bottom of the both rear seat-backs (A), detach the clips and release the Velcro fasteners (B) in the rear of
the carpet (C). Pull the rear seat belt buckles (D) out through a slit, then pull the carpet out from both cargo area
side trim panels.
4. Pry up the gap (A) detach the clips and pins (B), then remove the footrest (C). RHD model is shown, LHD model is
similar.
5. Remove the front portion of the carpet (A).

-1. Cut the carpet in the area (B) shown, then remove the carpet.
-2. Pull the seat harnesses (C) out through the holes in the carpet.
RHD model is shown; LHD model is similar.
6. Install the carpet in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet.
Make sure the seat harnesses are routed correctly.
If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened and if necessary, replace them with new ones.
Push the Velcro fastener and the clips into place securely.
Grab Handle Removal/Installation
NOTE: When removing components, use the trim tools or equivalent.
1. Lower the grab handle (A), then pull out the covers (B).
2. While pinching the clips (A), release the hooks (B), then remove the grab handle (C).
3. Using a pair of pliers, remove the clips (A) by pinching the hooks.
4. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the grab handle with a new one.
5. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, to prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying improperly and
possibly causing injury, inspect removed pieces and replace them if they have any of these types of damage:
Any cracks or damages in the grab handle (A).
Any cracks or stress-whitenings in the caps (B).
6. Install the clips (A) to the grab handle (B), then install the caps (C) fully into the clips.
7. Position the grab handle (A) on the bracket (B), and push on the grab handle until the clips (C) snap into place
securely.
Sunvisor Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to bend or scratch the headliner.
1. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape through the hole in the front side of the bracket cover (A),
and push the hook (B). Then make sure the hook is unlocked certainly.
2. While pushing the hook (A) with a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape, release the sunvisor (B) from the
holder (C), and rotate the sunvisor backward 45 °. Then make sure the hook slides into the bracket cover (D) as the
rotating the sunvisor.
3. Pull the sunvisor (A) down, then release the pin (B) of the bracket cover (C) from the hole in the body.
4. Turn the holder (A) 45 ° counterclockwise, and remove it from the holder grommet (B) by pulling the holder down.
5. Pry out the holder grommet (A) from the body by pinching its hooks (B).
6. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the sunvisor with a new one.
7. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, to prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying improperly and
possibly causing injury, inspect removed sunvisor and replace it, if it has any cracks or breakages:
Any cracks in the sunvisor bracket (A)
Any cracks in the sunvisor bracket cover (B)
Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shaft (C)
Any cracks in the sunvisor base (D)
Any cracks in the vanity mirror base (E)
8. If the holder grommet is damaged or stress-whitened, replace it with a new one.
9. Install the holder (A) to the holder grommet (B) by turning it 45 ° clockwise, and install them to the body as an
assembly by pushing it until the hooks (C) snap into place securely.
10. Set the sunvisor (A) by inserting the bracket (B) and the pin (C) of the bracket cover (D) to the hole in the body.
11. While holding the bracket cover (A), rotate the sunvisor (B) forward until the hook (C) snaps into place. Then make
sure the sunvisor does not come off the body by pulling it down. Set the sunvisor to the holder (D).
Center Console Removal/Installation - Without Seat Heater
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front seat, dashboard, and related parts.
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage.
1. M/T model: Remove the shift knob (A).
2. Remove the center console (A).

-1. Remove the parking brake cover lid (B), separation box (C), and center console lid (D).
-2. Remove the console box mat (E), then remove the bolt (F) and the clips (G).
-3. Lift the rear of the console up to detach the clip (H).
Make sure the wire harness is not pinched.
Center Console Removal/Installation - With Seat Heater
With Seat Heater
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front seat, dashboard, and related parts.
LHD model is shown; RHD model is symmetrical.
1. M/T model: Remove the shift knob (A).
2. Remove the center console (A).

-1. Remove the parking brake cover lid (B).
-2. Remove the switch panel (C), then disconnect the seat heater connector (D).
-3. Detach the harness clip (E), then remove the switch panel base (F).
-4. Remove the console box mat (G), then remove the bolt (H) and the clips (I).
-5. Lift the rear of the console up to detach the clip (J).
Make sure the wire harness is not pinched.
Dashboard Beverage Holder Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related parts.
1. Remove the dashboard/steering hanger beam.
2. Remove the screws, then remove each side beverage holders (A) from the dashboard (B).
3. Install the beverage holder in the reverse order of removal.
Dashboard Vent Removal/Installation
Side Vent Driver's side
NOTE:
1. Pull the fin (A) of the side vent (B) toward you and release the hooks (C) and remove the side vent.
2. Install the side outlet in the reverse order of removal and push the hooks into place securely.
Passenger's side
Center Vent
NOTE:
1. Remove the center panel:
Without audio system
With audio system
2. Remove the screws, then remove the center vent panel (A) from the center panel (B).
3. Release the hooks (C), then remove the center vent (D) from the center vent panel.
4. Install the center vent in the reverse order of removal and push the hooks into place securely.
Dashboard Center Lower Trim Removal/Installation
NOTE:
1. Remove the center lower cover.
2. Remove the center lower trim (A).
-1. Use the trim tool to pry the gap between the dashboard (B) and the upper side of the center lower trim
partially out and release the clips and hooks (C).
-2. Pull out the center lower trim slightly toward you and disconnect the accessory power socket connector (D)
and USB connector (E) (if equipped).
Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly.
Dashboard Center Lower Cover Removal/Installation
NOTE:
1. While holding the glove box (A), release the glove box stops (B) on each side from the dashboard by pushing them
in, then lower the glove box.
2. Remove the center lower cover (A).

-1. Insert a hand through the opening of the glove box and push the back side of the cover, and release the clips.
-2. Release the panel from the hooks (B) and remove it.
Dashboard Center Panel Removal/Installation
Without Audio System
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts.
1. Open the passenger's tray lid.
2. Remove the center panel (A).
-1. While carefully lifting the panel with the appropriate trim tool, insert the trim tool into the gap (B) between the
dashboard and the panel.
-2. Use the trim tool to gently pry the panel up partially to release the clips (C, D), then pull the panel up to
remove the panel.
-3. Disconnect the hazard warning switch connector (E).
3. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.
Dashboard Passenger's Tray Lid Removal/Installation
NOTE:
1. Open the lid.
2. Remove the screws, then remove the passenger's upper tray lid (A).
3. Install the lid in the reverse order of removal.
Dashboard Driver's Undercover Removal/Installation - Without HFT unit
NOTE:
1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover (A).
-1. Turn the lock knob (B) 90 °.
-2. Gently pull down the rear edge to detach the clip.
-3. Pull the undercover away to release the pins (C) from the kick panel (D).
2. Install the undercover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Check if the clip is damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace it with a new one.
Push the clip and pins into place securely.
Dashboard Driver's Undercover Removal/Installation - With HFT unit
With HFT Unit
NOTE:
LHD model is shown; RHD model is symmetrical.
1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover (A).
-1. Turn the lock knob (B) 90 °.
-2. Gently pull down the rear edge to detach the clip.
-3. Pull the undercover away to release the pins (C) from the kick panel (D).
-4. Detach the clip (E) and disconnect the HFT unit connector (F), then remove the undercover.
2. Install the undercover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
If the clip is damaged or stress-whitened, replace it with a new one.
Push the clip and pins into place securely.
Dashboard Passenger's Undercover Removal/Installation
NOTE:
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover (A).
-1. Gently pull down the front edge to detach the clips (B, C).
-2. Pull the cover away to release the pins (D).
Push the clips and the pins into place securely.
Glove Box Removal/Installation
NOTE:
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover.
2. Remove the bolts.
3. While holding the glove box (A), release the glove box stops (B) on both sides from the dashboard by pushing them
inside, then remove the glove box.
4. Install the glove box in the reverse order of removal.
Dashboard Glove Box Cover Removal/Installation
NOTE: Center
2. Remove the screws, then remove the dashboard glove box center cover (A) and the dashboard glove box outer
cover (B).
3. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal.
Outer
Glove Box Striker Replacement
NOTE:
1. Pull down the glove box.
2. Remove the screws, then remove the glove box striker (A).
3. Install the glove box striker in the reverse order of removal.
Instrument Panel Removal/Installation
NOTE:
1. Tilt the steering column down.
2. Remove the instrument panel (A).
-1. Pull out the select/reset knob (B).
-2. While carefully lifting the panel with the appropriate trim tool, insert the trim tool into the gap (C) between the
dashboard and the panel.
-3. Use the trim tool to gently pry the panel up partially to release the clips (D, E) and the hooks (F), then pull
the panel up to release the panel.
-4. Disconnect the power mirror switch connector (G).
Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.
Make sure the select/reset knob operate properly.
Dashboard Driver's Knee Pad Removal/Installation
NOTE: Right
2. Remove the bolt, then remove the right driver's knee pad (A) and the left driver's knee pad (B) from the steering
hanger beam (C).
3. Install the pad in the reverse order of removal.
Left
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard, the body and the other related parts.
Take care not to bend the brackets.
2. Remove these items from the dashboard:
Instrument panel
Gauge control module
Center panel (without audio system)
Audio unit (with audio system)
Center lower cover
Center lower trim
Passenger's tray lid
Side vent
Passenger's airbag
3. From the front of the dashboard (A), remove the screws.
4. From the back of the dashboard (A), release the hooks (B), and remove the center joint duct (C).
5. From the back of the dashboard (A), remove the screws (B, C), then separate the dashboard from the steering
hanger beam (D).
6. Remove the screws, then remove the dashboard duct (A) from the dashboard (B).
7. If necessary, remove the screws, then remove the front def trim (A) from the dashboard (B).
8. Assemble the dashboard and steering hanger beam in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the dashboard wire
harness is not pinched.
Interior Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas
Front Door Sill Area Driver's side
NOTE:
2. Remove the driver's kick panel (A) or the passenger's side kick panel (B). Passenger's side
-1. Pull out the front door inner seal (C) from the kick panel hooks (D) and the front door opening flange.
-2. Pull the kick panel back by hand to detach the clips, and to release the hooks (E) from the front door sill trim
(F), then remove the panel. On the driver's side, pull the hood opener knob (G) and hold it while removing the
panel.
3. Remove the front door sill trim (A).

-1. Pull out the front door inner seal (B) from the front door sill trim hooks (C) and the front door opening flange.
-2. Detach the hook (D) and tab (E) from center pillar lower trim (F), and pull the front door sill trim up by hand to
detach the clips.
4. Pull out the front door inner seal (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the front door opening flange, then remove
the seal.
Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
Rear Door Sill Area

NOTE:
1. Tip-up the rear seat, and pull out the rear door inner seal (A), then carefully slide the luggage area side trim (B), and
detach the clip from the rear side sill trim (C) using with a clip remover.
2. Remove the hooks (A) from the center lower trim (B), then detach the lower clips pulling the bottom of the rear side
sill trim (C) back by hand and remove it.
3. Pull out the rear door opening seal (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the front door opening flange, then
remove the seal.
Interior Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas - Without Side Curtain Airbags
Front Pillar Trim
NOTE:
1. Pull the front door opening seal away from the front pillar, as needed.
2. Pull the upper portion of the front pillar trim (A) back by hand to detach the clips and pull the trim up, then remove it
from the dashboard (B).
Center Pillar Upper/Lower Trim

NOTE:
Front door sill trim
Rear door sill trim
Front door opening seal, as needed
Rear door opening seal, as needed
2. Slide the front seat forward fully, and put the rear seat in the normal upright position.
3. Remove the seat belt lower anchor bolt (A).
4. Remove the center pillar lower trim (A).

-1. Pull the upper portion of the trim back to release the upper hooks (B).
-2. Detach the clip by pulling the trim back by hand.
6. Remove the center pillar upper trim (A).

-1. Pull the bottom of the trim back by hand to detach the lower clip (B).
-2. Pull the upper of the trim back by hand to detach the upper clip (C).
-3. Release the upper pin (D) by pulling the top of the center pillar trim and remove it from the headliner (E).
Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the front seat belt upper anchor bolt before reinstallation.
Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
Quarter Pillar Trim
NOTE:
Tailgate weatherstrip, as needed
Cargo area side trim panel, as needed
2. Remove the upper anchor cover (A) by releasing the hooks (B), then remove the rear seat belt upper anchor bolt
(C).
3. Remove the quarter pillar trim (A).

-1. Pull the bottom of the trim back by hand to detach the clips (B, C).
-2. Pull the trim down to release the upper hook (D) from the body hole (E).
Check if the clips and hooks are damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace them with new
ones.
Interior Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas - With Side Curtain Airbags
Front Pillar Trim
NOTE:
Follow the front pillar trim installation procedure carefully; improper installation could cause the side curtain airbags
to deploy improperly and possibly cause injury.
Take care not to scratch the trim and panels.
The upper clip in the front pillar trim (A) consists of a grommet (B) and a pin (C). The grommet expanded with the
pin secures it to the body panel (D). The projections (E) on the pin is broken during removal, so the clip must be
replaced with a new one when the trim is reinstalled.
1. Pull the front door opening seal away from the front pillar as needed.
2. Hit the upper clip in the front pillar trim (A) with a rubber mallet. The clip is under the point (B) where the triangle
mark (C) on the edge of the trim indicates. Hitting the clip breaks the projections (D) on the pin (E) and pushes it
into the grommet (F) and against the body (G).
NOTE: The clip must be replaced with a new one when the front pillar trim is reinstalled.
3. Pull the top of the front pillar trim (A) back by hand to remove the upper clip (B) from the body (C).
4. Pull the front pillar trim (A) by hand to detach the clips. Pull the trim up from the dashboard (B), then remove it.
5. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the front pillar trim with a new one.
6. If the side curtain airbag has not been deployed, check the front pillar trim (A) and note the following:
To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect the front
pillar trim and replace it if it has any of these types of damage:
-Any cracks, deformations, or stress-whitened areas in the front pillar trim
-Any cracks or stress-whitening in the clip seating surfaces (B, C)
Replace the upper clip (D) with a new one.
Check if the clips (E) are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
7. Before installing the front pillar trim (A), carefully remove a new upper clip (B).
8. Check the overlap between the headliner and front pillar trim, and if necessary, adjust it.
9. Carefully install a new upper clip (A) to the front pillar trim (B). Be sure that the grommet (C) is nearest to the top of
the pin (D) as shown.
10. Reinstall the front pillar trim (A).
-1. Insert the bottom of the trim into the dashboard (B).
-2. Place the trim over the front pillar (C), and fit its upper clip (D) and lower clips (E) into the holes (F) in the front
pillar, then lightly push the trim into place.
NOTE:
Make sure the side curtain airbag isn't tucked down under the clips and the ribs.
Push lightly on the upper clip. If you push too hard, the clip will be damaged, and it will not hold the
trim properly.
11. Reinstall the front door opening seal.
Center Pillar Upper/Lower Trim

NOTE:
Front door sill trim
Rear door sill trim
Front door opening seal, as needed
2. Slide the front seat forward fully, and put the rear seat in the normal upright position.
3. Remove the seat belt lower anchor bolt (A).
4. Remove the center pillar lower trim (A).

-1. Pull the upper portion of the trim back to release the upper hooks (B).
-2. Detach the clip by pulling the trim back by hand.
6. Remove the center pillar upper trim (A).

-1. Pull the bottom of the trim back by hand to detach the lower clip (B).
-2. Pull the upper of the trim back by hand to detach the upper clip (C).
-3. Release the upper pin (D) by pulling the top of the center pillar trim and remove it from the headliner (E).
Check if the clip (A) is damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace it with a new one.
If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the center pillar upper and lower trim and all clips on the trim
with new ones.
To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect the trim
and replace it, if it has any of these types of damage:
-Any cracks or deformations in the center pillar upper trim (B) and the upper hook (C)
-Any cracks or deformation in the center pillar lower trim (D), and any breakage in the part (E) fitted with
the center pillar upper trim
-Any cracks or stress-whitened areas seating surfaces (F)
Replace any damaged parts with new ones.
Make sure the top of the trim overlaps with the headliner correctly.
Make sure the trim hook is installed into the body hole securely.
Push the clip and hooks into place securely.
Quarter Pillar Trim

NOTE:
Cargo area side trim panel, as needed
2. Remove the upper anchor cover (A) by releasing the hooks (B), then remove the rear seat belt upper anchor bolt
(C).
3. Remove the quarter pillar trim (A).

-1. Pull the bottom of the trim back by hand to detach the clips (B, C).
-2. Pull the trim down to release the upper hook (D) from the body hole (E).
Replace any stress-whitened or damaged clips (A) with new ones.
If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the quarter pillar glass trim and all clips on the trim with new
ones.
To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect the trim
and replace it, if it has any of these types of damage:
-Any cracks or deformation in the quarter pillar trim (B) and the upper hook (C), and any stress-whitened
areas in the upper part of the trim
-Any cracks or stress-whitened areas in the clips seating surfaces (D)
Replace any damaged parts with new ones.
Make sure the top of the trim overlaps with the headliner correctly.
Make sure the trim hook is installed into the body holes.
Before installing the seat belt anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
Interior Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Side Areas
NOTE:
Cargo floor
Rear trim panel
2. For some models: Release the buttons (A), then remove the rear shelf (B).
3. Remove the cargo area side trim panel (A).

-1. Release the rear seat belt (B) from the guide (C) of the cargo area side trim panel.
-2. Detach the clips (D, E), then pull the panel back to remove it from the rear seat back striker (F).
-3. Left side: Disconnect the cargo area light connector (G).
Make sure the cargo area light connector is plugged in properly.
When installing the panel, make sure there are no pinches in the seat belt.
Interior Trim Removal/Installation - Cargo Areas
NOTE:
Rear Trim Panel

1. Release the hooks (A), then pull up the cargo floor (B) and remove it.
2. Remove the tailgate weatherstrip, as needed.
3. Remove the rear trim panel (A).

-1. Disengage the tabs (B) and hooks (C) on both sides from both cargo area side trim panel (D).
-2. Detach the clips by pulling the panel up.
Push the clips, hooks, and tabs into place securely.
Interior Trim Removal/Installation - Tailgate Areas
NOTE:
1. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver (A) to the slit (B), the other flat-tip screwdriver (C) into the groove (D), then rotate the flat-
tip screwdriver C and remove the pull pocket (E).
2. Pull the tailgate lower trim panel (A) back by hand, and detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove it.
Steering Column Cover Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the column cover.
Do not pry the cover surface with any tools.
1. Release the tilt/telescopic lever (A), adjust the steering column to full tilt down position and to the full telescopic
pull position.
2. Release the tabs (B) of the upper column cover (C) while pushing the lower column cover (D) from the front side.
Carefully release the tabs, and note the hooks (E) may break when the upper column cover is pulled up too hard.
3. Insert a suitable sized screwdriver or equivalent tool (F) into the lever hole (G) in the lower column cover D along the
guide rib (H).
4. Release the hook (I) locating on the left side of the upper column cover C. The right side hook (J) of the upper
column cover C can't be released from the inside.
5. Remove the upper column cover C by lightly pulling it up by releasing the right side hook J of the cover.
6. Remove the screws, then remove the lower column cover (A).
7. Install the upper and lower column covers in the reverse order of removal, and push the hooks into place securely.
Reminder Systems Component Location Index
FRONT PASSENGER'S
GAUGE DOOR LOCK
CONTROL MODULE
ACTUATOR/KNOB
Input Test, SWITCH*
Acutuator Test,
Replacement,
Knob Switch Test,
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR SWITCH
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK

ACTUATOR/KNOB SWITCH
Acutuator Test,
Knob Switch Test,
DRIVER'S DOOR SWITCH
RIGHT REAR DOOR LOCK

ACTUATOR/KNOB SWITCH*1
Acutuator Test,
LEFT REAR DOOR LOCK Knob Switch Test,
ACTUATOR/KNOB SWITCH*1
Acutuator Test, RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH
Knob Switch Test,
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH
MICU
(Built into the under-dash
REAR RIGHT SIDE SEAT BELT fuse/relay
REAR CENTERbox) SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SWITCH*3 Input Test, 3
BUCKLE SWITCH*
Replacement,
SRS UNIT
IGNITION KEY SWITCH
Test,
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH REAR LEFT SIDE SEAT BELT
Test, Test/Replacement, BUCKLE SWITCH*3
LEFT SIDE SEAT BELT

BUCKLE SWITCH*2
LEFT SIDE SEAT SITTING

SWITCH*2
RIGHT SIDE SEAT BELT

BUCKLE SWITCH
*1: With security

*2: With passenger's seat belt reminder TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
*3: With rear seat belt reminder
Reminder System Circuit Diagram
*1: With SRS

BATTERY TERMINAL *2: Without SRS
FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX *3: With rear seat belt reminder
[ ]: LHD model
: CAN line
BATTERY COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH *4: With multi information display
No. 1 (100 A) T-9 No. 1 (10 A) *5: Without multi information display
DIMMER
WHT *6: With passenger's seat belt reminder
HI PASSING OFF
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE ( ) : CAN line
LO ( )
B No. 60 (IGN) (50 A)
3 1 10 8 9 7
T1
[4] [6] [9] [11] [10] [12] WHT
GRN LT BLU WHT BLU GRY RED BLK IGNITION SWITCH
[LT GRN]
W1
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX No. 5 (10 A) IG1 UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 5 (10 A) FUSE
(UNDER-DASH YEL
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
A No. 22 (7.5 A) BAT
A
Q3 M3 M4 M8 M7 M5 M33 MICU MICU
B-CAN
Q8 N1
SG PG
LT BLU PNK
M16 Q9 N2 K10 M34 M24
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32 16
C21 B26 E2 E9 C46 C45 C32 C33 C40 C26
BEEPER
DOOR DOOR DOOR DOOR
· PARKING BRAKE LOCK LOCK LOCK LOCK
GRN GRN GRY KNOB KNOB KNOB KNOB
REMINDER
· SEAT BELT REMINDER BRN RED WHT GRN WHT
· KEY-IN REMINDER 7 9 7 DIMMING

· LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
BLK BLK BLK BLK [8] [6] [8] 7 8 LT GRN BLU GRN PNK
BACK-UP CIRCUIT
· VEHICLE SPEED ALARM LIGHT
(With multi information UN-
LOCK
LOCK UN-
LOCK
LOCK UN-
LOCK
LOCK UN-
LOCK
LOCK
display) 10 5 5 10
LT GRN LT GRN LT GRN
ACC POSITION ALARM WHT

[5] [10] LEFT RIGHT
1 1 1 1 1 1
· DRIVER'S
10 V FRONT REAR REAR
DOOR PASSENGER'S DOOR
LOCK
DOOR
LOCK
SEAT BELT BRAKE
LOCK DOOR
KNOB STABILIZING
LOCK KNOB LIGHTS-ON
KNOB
LEFT
REMINDER
RIGHT FRONT
SYSTEM
DRIVER'S LEFT RIGHT
SWITCH SWITCH
7 TRANSMISSION 1 IGNITION
SWITCH
CIRCUIT KNOB
SWITCH INDICATOR REAR
DOOR
INDICATOR
REAR
DOOR
PASSENGER'S INDICATOR
DOOR
DOOR
SWITCH
REAR
DOOR
REAR
DOOR
RANGE SWITCH KEY SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH (Closed: SWITCH SWITCH
(Back-up (Closed: (Closed: (Closed: (Closed: Door open) (Closed: (Closed:
light switch) Key inserted) Door open) Door open) Door open) Door open) Door open)
10 (Closed: 2
In R position)
BLK BLK BLK BLK
INDICATOR DRIVE CIRCUIT
BLK BLK
CPU/POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/

G501 G502 G501 G502 G101 CONTROLLER
G501 AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
G501 G502 G603
[G601]
G601
[G603]
(A/T)
(With security) (Without security) (With security)
*5 *4
F-CAN TRANSCEIVER
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER MULTI
ODO/TRIP INFORMATION
DISPLAY CAN L CAN H
DISPLAY
2.6 kΩ
18 29 30 13 17 23
GRN RED WHT BLK BLK ORN

[LT GRN]
*1
A16
RED
B
SRS UNIT A17
WHT
MICU B21 B19 B23 B16 B17 B18
*2
MICU *6 *3
1 PARKING
GRN YEL LT BLU RED BLU WHT BRAKE
SWITCH
DRIVER'S FRONT FRONT REAR REAR REAR (Closed:
BLU 2 SEAT 2 PASSENGER'S 2 PASSENGER'S 2 LEFT 2 CENTER 2 RIGHT RED WHT Lever pulled)
BELT SEAT SEAT SIDE SEAT SIDE
BUCKLE BELT SITTING SEAT BELT SEAT
SWITCH BUCKLE SWITCH BELT BUCKLE BELT
(Closed: SWITCH (Closed: BUCKLE 1 SWITCH BUCKLE
1 unbuckled) 1 (Closed: 1 seated) 1 SWITCH (Closed: 1 SWITCH
unbuckled) (Closed: unbuckled) (Closed:
BLK BLK BLK BLK unbuckled) BLK BLK unbuckled)
· ECM/PCM
· EPS CONTROL
UNIT
· ABS MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
G601 G603 G603 G603 G602 G601 · DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
[G603]
G501 G501
Multi-information Display Select/Reset/Information/Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the driver's airbag assembly.
2. Disconnect the 20P connector (A) from the cable reel.
4. Without cruise control: if the check is not as specified, replace the switch. If the switch is OK, but the system does
not operate, check for the cable reel.
With cruise control: if the check is not as specified, go to Step 5 . If the check is OK, but the system does not
operate, check for the cable reel.
5. Remove the select/reset/information switch (A).
6. Check for continuity between the terminal (B) in each switch position according to the table.
7. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. If the switch is OK, but the system does not operate, check
for an open in the wire between the switch and the cable reel.
Safety Indicator System Component Location Index
SAFETY INDICATOR
FRONTPASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH
MICU
(Buit into the under-dash
fuse/relay box)
Input Test,
Replacement,
RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH
TAILGATE LATCH SWITCH

Test/Replacement,

Safety Indicator System Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX [ ]: LHD model
BATTERY : CAN line
No. 1 (100 A) No. 1 (10 A)
T-9 N1
WHT PNK
No. 60 (IGN) (50 A)
T1
WHT
IGNITION SWITCH
BAT W1 No. 22 (7.5 A) Q8

YEL LT BLU
IG1
32 16 GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
DOOR
INDICATOR
(LED)
INDICATOR
DRIVE MULTI INFORMATION
CIRCUIT DISPLAY
(With multi information)

CPU/POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/ B-CAN
CONTROLLER AREA NEYWORK CONTROLLER TRANSCEIVER
13 17 18
BLK BLK GRN
[LT GRN]
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
MICU G501 G501 Q3
IG1 +B B-CAN
BACK UP
SG PG
M16 Q9 N2 K10 C32 C33 C40 C26 C22
BLK BLK BLK BLK LT GRN BLU GRN PNK ORN
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR FRONT DRIVER'S LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR 2
DOOR SWITCH DOOR SWITCH PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH DOOR SWITCH DOOR SWITCH TAILGATE
(Closed: (Closed: DOOR SWITCH (Closed: (Closed: (Closed: LATCH
Door open) Door open) (Closed: Door open) Door open) Door open) SWITCH
Door open) (Closed:
Tailgate open)
BLK
G501 G502 G501 G502 (Without security) G602

(With security) [G604]
Safety Indicator System (MICU and Gauge Control Module) Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function to make sure the door
indicator LED and B-CAN communication line are OK.
MICU
2. RHD model: Remove the fuse lid panel, and remove the driver's dashboard lower cover.
LHD model: Remove the fuse lid panel.
3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors C, K, M, N, Q, and W.
NOTE:
All connector views are shown from wire side of female terminals.
The illustration shows the RHD model and the black portion shows the lock lever. The
lock lever for LHD model is shown as the dashed lines.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the
system.
If the terminals look OK, go to Step 5 .
5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors.
If all the input tests prove OK, go to Step 6 .
CavityWire Test condition Test: Desired Possible cause if
result desired result is not
obtained
K10 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity Poor ground
to ground: There (G502)
should be continuity. An open in the
wire
M16 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity Poor ground
wire
N2 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity Poor ground
wire
Q9 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity Poor ground
wire
W1 YEL Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage Blown No. 60 (50
(II) to ground: There A) fuse in the
Faulty ignition
switch
An open in the
wire
Q3 GRN[LT Disconnect the Check for continuity An open in the wire
GRN] gauge control between Q3 terminal
module 32P and the gauge
connector control module 32P
connector No. 18
terminal: There
should be continuity.
Check for continuity A short to ground in the
to ground: There wire
should be no
continuity.
C33 BLU Driver's door open Check for continuity Faulty driver's door
to ground: There switch
wire
Driver's door closed Check for continuity Faulty driver's door
to ground: There switch
should be no A short to ground
continuity. in the wire
C32 LT GRN Front passenger's Check for continuity Faulty front
door open to ground: There passenger's door
should be continuity. switch
An open in the
wire
obtained
Front passenger's Check for continuity Faulty front
door closed to ground: There passenger's door
should be no switch
continuity. A short to ground
in the wire
C32 LT GRN Left rear door or right Check for continuity Faulty left rear
*2 rear door open to ground: There door switch
should be continuity. Faulty right rear
door switch
An open in the
wire
Left rear door and Check for continuity Faulty left rear
right rear door to ground: There door switch
closed should be no Faulty right rear
continuity. door switch
A short to ground
in the wire
C40 GRN Left rear door open Check for continuity Faulty left rear
*1 to ground: There door switch
wire
Left rear door closed Check for continuity Faulty left rear
to ground: There door switch
C26 PNK Right rear door open Check for continuity Faulty right rear
*1 to ground: There door switch
wire
Right rear door Check for continuity Faulty right rear
closed to ground: There door switch
C22 ORN Tailgate open Check for continuity Faulty tailgate
to ground: There latch switch
wire
Tailgate closed Check for continuity Faulty tailgate
to ground: There latch switch
*1: With security

*2: Without security
Gauge
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the instrument panel.
system.
If al the input tests prove OK, go to Step 10 .
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if
obtained
13 BLK Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground
conditions ground: There should be (G501)
continuity. An open in the
wire
17 BLK Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground
wire
16 PNK Under all Measure the voltage to Blown No. 1 (10
conditions ground: There should be A) fuse in the
battery voltage. under-dash
fuse/relay box
An open in the
wire
32 LT Ignition switch Measure the voltage to Blown No. 22
BLU ON (II) ground: There should be (7.5 A) fuse in
battery voltage. the under-dash
fuse/relay box
Faulty under-
dash fuse/relay
box
An open in the
wire
10. Substitute a known-good gauge control module, and recheck the system.
If the symptom is gone, the gauge control module is faulty: replace it.
If the symptom is still present, the MICU is faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.
License Plate Light Replacement
1. Push the retaining spring, and pry out the license plate light (A).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the tailgate.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the light.

License Plate Light: 5W
3. Separate the license plate light lens (B) and the housing (C), then remove the bulb (D).
4. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.
Brake Pedal Position Switch Test
1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B).
2. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals.
There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed.
There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released.
There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed.
There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released.
4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height.
Headlight Replacement
2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the headlight (B).
Headlight: 60/55 W
Front Position Light: 5 W
Front Turn Signal Light: 21 W
3. Remove the four mounting bolts from the headlight.

4. Remove the bolt and the corner upper beam (C).
6. After replacement, adjust the headlights to local requirements.
Reminder System (MICU and Gauge Control Module) Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function to make sure the beeper
and the indicators in the gauge control module work properly, and the B-CAN and F-CAN lines are OK.
MICU
2. RHD model: Remove the fuse lid panel, and remove the driver's dashboard lower cover.
3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors B, C, E, K, M, N, Q, and W.
NOTE:
system.
obtained
K10 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity Poor ground
wire
Q9 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity Poor ground
wire
M16 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity Poor ground
wire
N2 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity Poor ground
wire
Q3 GRN[LT Disconnect the Check for continuity An open in the wire
GRN] gauge control between Q3 terminal
module 32P and the gauge
connector control module 32P
connector No. 18
terminal: There
to ground: There wire
should be no
continuity.
E9 RED Driver's door lock Check for continuity Poor ground
knob switch in to ground: There (G501)
LOCK position should be continuity. Faulty driver's door
lock knob switch
An open in the
wire
Driver's door lock Check for continuity Faulty driver's door
knob switch in to ground: There lock knob switch
UNLOCK position should be no A short to ground
E2 BRN Driver's door lock Check for continuity Poor ground
knob switch in to ground: There (G501)
UNLOCK position should be continuity. Faulty driver's door
lock knob switch
An open in the
wire
Driver's door lock Check for continuity Faulty driver's door
knob switch in to ground: There lock knob switch
LOCK position should be no A short to ground
M24 PUR Front passenger's Check for continuity Poor ground
door lock knob to ground: There (G502)
switch in UNLOCK should be continuity. Faulty front
position passenger's door
lock knob switch
An open in the
wire
obtained
Front passenger's Check for continuity Faulty front
door lock knob to ground: There passenger's door
switch in LOCK should be no lock knob switch
position continuity. A short to ground
in the wire
C45 WHT Right rear door lock Check for continuity Poor ground
knob switch in to ground: There (G601) [G603]
UNLOCK position should be continuity. Faulty right rear
door lock knob
switch
An open in the
wire
Right rear door lock Check for continuity Faulty right rear
knob switch in to ground: There door lock knob
LOCK position should be no switch
in the wire
C46 GRN Left rear door lock Check for continuity Poor ground
knob switch in to ground: There (G603) [G601]
UNLOCK position should be continuity. Faulty left rear
door lock knob
switch
An open in the
wire
Left rear door lock Check for continuity Faulty left rear
knob switch in to ground: There door lock knob
LOCK position should be no switch
in the wire
[ ]: LHD model
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired
result is not obtained
C33 BLU Driver's door open Check for continuity to Faulty driver's door
ground: There should be switch
continuity. An open in the wire
Driver's door closed Check for continuity to Faulty driver's door
no continuity. A short to ground in the
wire
C32 LT GRN Front passenger's door Check for continuity to Faulty front passenger's
open ground: There should be door switch
Front passenger's door Check for continuity to Faulty front passenger's
closed ground: There should be door switch
wire
C32* LT GRN Left rear door or right rear Check for continuity to Faulty left rear door
door open ground: There should be switch
continuity. Faulty right rear door
switch
An open in the wire
Left rear door and right Check for continuity to Faulty left rear door
rear door closed ground: There should be switch
no continuity. Faulty right rear door
switch
A short to ground in the
wire
C40 GRN Left rear door open Check for continuity to Faulty left rear door
Left rear door closed Check for continuity to Faulty left rear door
wire
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired
C26 PNK Right rear door open Check for continuity to Faulty right rear door
Right rear door closed Check for continuity to Faulty right rear door
wire
M34 GRY Ignition key inserted into Check for continuity to Poor ground (G501)
the ignition switch ground: There should be Faulty ignition key
continuity. switch
An open in the wire
Ignition switch LOCK (0), Check for continuity to Faulty ignition key
and the ignition key ground: There should be switch
removed from the ignition no continuity. A short to ground in the
switch wire
M8· BLU· BLK Combination light switch Check for continuity to Faulty combination light
M33 OFF ground: There should be switch
Combination light switch Check for continuity to Faulty combination light
in any other position than ground: There should be switch
OFF no continuity. A short to ground in the
wire
M7· GRY· Combination light switch Check for continuity to Faulty combination light
M33 BLK (PARKING position) ON ground: There should be switch
OFF ground: There should be switch
no continuity. A short in the wire
M5· RED· Combination light switch Check for continuity to Faulty combination light
M33 BLK (Headlight position) ON ground: There should be switch
OFF ground: There should be switch
no continuity. A short in the wire
B26 GRN Transmission range Check for continuity to Poor ground (G101)
switch in R position ground: There should be Faulty transmission
continuity. range switch
An open in the wire
Transmission range Check for continuity to Faulty transmission
switch in any other ground: There should be range switch
position than R position no continuity. A short in the wire
*: Without security
Gauge Control Module

6. Remove the gauge control module, and disconnect the 32P connector from it.
system.
obtained
13 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity Poor ground
wire
obtained
16 PNK Under all conditions Measure the voltage Blown No. 1 (10 A)
should be battery dash fuse/relay
voltage. box
An open in the
wire
17 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity Poor ground
wire
23 ORN Parking brake switch Measure the voltage Faulty parking
ON (Lever pulled) to ground: There brake switch
should be less than An open in the
1 V. wire
Parking brake switch Measure the voltage Faulty parking
OFF (Lever released) to ground: There brake switch
should be 5 V or A short to ground
more. in the wire
29 RED Disconnect SRS unit Check for continuity An open in the wire
connector A (39P) between the No. 29
terminal and SRS
unit connector A
(39P) No. 16
terminal: There
between the No. 29 wire
terminal and ground:
There should be no
continuity.
30 WHT Disconnect SRS unit Check for continuity An open in the wire
connector A (39P) between the No. 30
terminal and SRS
unit connector A
(39P) No. 17
terminal: There
between the No. 30 wire
terminal and ground:
There should be no
continuity.
32 LT BLU Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage Blown No. 22 (7.5
(II) to ground: There A) fuse in the
Faulty ignition
switch
An open in the
wire
9. If the lights-on reminder has a problem, substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay box, and
recheck the system. If the seat belt reminder has a problem, check for SRS DTCs and check
the seat belt buckle switch. If all the tests prove OK, go to Step 10 .
10. Substitute a known-good gauge control module, and recheck the system.
If the symptom is gone, the gauge control module is faulty; replace it.
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights Component Location Index
TURN SIGNAL SINDICATORS
SIDE TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

(Mirror type)
Replacement,
REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
Replacement,
Bulb Replacement,
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT SIDE TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
Replacement, (Fender type)
RHD Bulb
modelReplacement,
is shown, LHD model is similar. Replacement,
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH

Test/Replacement,
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

(Built into the combination light switch) MICU
Test/Replacement, (Built into the under-dash fuse/relay box)
Input Test,
Replacement,
Hazard Warning Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the audio panel.
With audio unit.
Without audio unit.
2. Remove the two screws and the hazard warning switch (A).
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch (A) or bulb (B).
5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal.
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights (MICU) Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, check the No. 1 (10 A), No. 22 (7.5 A), and No. 23 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
2. RHD model: Remove the fuse lid panel , and remove the driver's dashboard lower cover.
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors A, B, C, E, K, M, N, Q, and W.
NOTE:
4. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the appropriate connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Cavity
Wire Test Test: Desired result Possible cause if result
condition is not obtained
K10 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground
conditions There should be continuity. (G502)
An open in the
wire
N2 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground
An open in the
wire
M16 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground
An open in the
wire
Q9 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground
An open in the
wire
B23 WHT Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. 3 (20 A
conditions There should be battery *4 /30 A *3 ) fuse in
voltage. the battery
terminal fuse box
An open in the
wire
W1 YEL Ignition Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. 60 (50
switch ON (II) There should be battery A) fuse in the
voltage. under-dash
fuse/relay box
Faulty ignition
switch
An open in the
wire
A28 WHT Connect B23 Check the turn signal lights Poor ground
terminal to operation: The right front turn (G202, G301)
A28 terminal signal light and right side turn [G401, G451]
with a jumper signal light *1 should come on. Blown bulb
wire. An open in the
wire
C41 WHT Connect B23 Check the turn signal light Poor ground
terminal to operation: The right rear turn (G602)
C41 terminal signal light should come on. Blown bulb
with a jumper An open in the
wire. wire
B34 BLU Connect B23 Check the turn signal lights Poor ground
terminal to operation: The left front turn (G401) [G202,
B34 terminal signal light and left side turn G302]
with a jumper signal light *1 should come on. Blown bulb
wire. An open in the
wire
C13 BLU Connect B23 Check the turn signal light Poor ground
[WHT] terminal to operation: The left rear turn (G604)
C13 terminal signal light should come on. Blown bulb
wire. wire
Cavity
Wire Test Test: Desired result Possible cause if result
condition is not obtained
Q6 WHT Connect B23 Check the turn signal lights Poor ground
terminal to operation: The right side turn (G501) [G502]
Q6 termanal signal light *2 and/or right turn Faulty LED *2
with a jumper signal indicator should come Faulty gauge
wire. on. control module
Faulty indicator
An open in the
wire
M20 BLU Connect B23 Check the turn signal lights Poor ground
terminal to operation: The left side turn (G502) [G501]
M20 terminal signal light *2 and/or left turn Faulty LED *2
with a jumper signal indicator should come Faulty gauge
wire. on. control module
Faulty indicator
An open in the
wire
E11 WHT Connect B23 Check the turn signal light Poor ground
*5 terminal to operation: The right side turn (G501)
E11 terminal signal light *2 should come on. Faulty LED *2
wire. wire
E7 BLU Connect B23 Check the turn signal light Poor ground
*6 terminal to operation: The left side turn [G501]
E7 terminal signal light *2 should come on. Faulty LED *2
wire. wire
*1: Fender type

*2: Mirror type
*5: RHD model
*6: LHD model
[ ]: LHD model
Cavity
Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result
is not obtained
N5 · YEL Hazard warning Check for continuity Faulty hazard
Q13 · switch pressed between N5 and Q13 warning switch
PNK terminals:There should be An open in the
continuity. wire
Hazard warning Check for continuity Faulty hazard
switch released between N5 and Q13 warning switch
terminals:There should be A short in the wire
no continuity.
M2 · LT Turn signal Check for continuity Faulty
M33 GRN switch in LEFT between M2 and M33 combination light
· position terminals: There should be switch
BLK continuity An open in the
wire
Turn signal Check for continuity Faulty
switch in RIGHT between M2 and M33 combination light
or neutral terminals: There should be switch
position no continuity. A short in the wire
M6 · BRN Turn signal Check for continuity Faulty
M33 · switch in RIGHT between M6 and M33 combination light
BLK position terminals: There should be switch
wire
Turn signal Check for continuity Faulty
switch in LEFT between M6 and M33 combination light
or neutral terminals: There should be switch
position no continuity. A short in the wire
Side Turn Signal Light Replacement
Fender type
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the fender.
1. Push the retaining spring (A), and pry out the side turn signal light (B).
Side Turn Signal Light: 5W
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (C) from the side turn signal light.
3. Turn the bulb socket (D) counterclockwise to remove it from the bulb (E).
4. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
Mirror Type
1. Remove the mirror holder.
2. Remove the skullcap.
3. Remove the two screws (A) and remove the side turn signal light (B) from the housing (C).
4. Disconnect the 2P connector (D) from the side turn signal light.
Ceiling Light Test/Replacement
1. Turn the ceiling light switch OFF.
2. Carefully pry the lens (A) off with a small screwdriver.
Ceiling Light: 8W
3. Remove the screws, then remove the ceiling light (B).

4. Disconnect the 3P connector (C) from the ceiling light.
5. Check for continuity between the terminals.
There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals with the switch in the MIDDLE position.
There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 (Body ground) terminals with the switch in the ON
position.
There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals, and between the No. 2 and No. 3
(Body ground) terminals with the switch in the OFF position.
6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb. If the bulb is OK, replace the ceiling light.
Individual Map Light Test/Replacement - Without Sunshade
1. Turn the individual map light switch OFF.
Individual Map Light: 8Wx 2
3. Remove the screws, then remove the individual map light (B).
4. Disconnect the connector (C) from the individual map light.
There should be continuity between the No. 1 terminal and ground terminal with the switch in the ON
position.
There should be no continuity between the No. 1 terminal and ground terminal with the switch in the OFF
position.
6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb. If the bulb is OK, replace the individual map light.
Front Individual Map Light Test/Replacement - With Sunshade
With sunshade
1. Turn the map light switch OFF.
Front Map Light: 8Wx 2
3. Remove the screws, then remove the map lights (B).

4. Disconnect the connectors (C) from the map lights.

6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb(s). If the bulb(s) are OK, replace the map light.
Cargo Area Light Test/Replacement
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Carefully pry out the cargo area light (A).
Cargo Area Light: 5W
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the light.

4. Check for continuity between the No. 1 (+) and No. 2 (−) terminals. There should be continuity. If there is no
continuity, check the bulb. If the bulb is OK, replace the cargo area light assembly.
Tailgate Latch Switch Test
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the tailgate latch assembly (B).
There should be continuity with the trunk lid open.
There should be no continuity with the trunk lid closed.
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk lid latch assembly.
Entry Lights Control System Component Location Index
CEILING LIGHT
Test/Replacement,
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR SWITCH
INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT
Test/Replacement,
LEFT REAR
DOOR SWITCH
MICU
(Built into the under-
dash fuse/relay box)
IGNITION KEY SWITCH

Test,
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH

CARGO AREA LIGHT
Test/Replacement,
TAILGATE LATCH SWITCH

Test,
RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH

Entry Lights Control System Circuit Diagram
With security
Without security
BATTERY TERMINAL
BATTERY : CAN line
No. 1 (100 A) No. 60 (IGN) (50 A)
T-9
WHT
BATTERY TERMINAL
BATTERY : CAN line
No. 1 (100 A) No. 60 (IGN) (50 A)
T-9
T1
WHT
WHT
IGNITION SWITCH
BAT W1
YEL T1
WHT
IG1
IGNITION SWITCH
No. 1 No. 22
(10 A) (7.5 A)
BAT W1
YEL G5 C37
IG1
No. 1 No. 22 TRANSMITTER
(10 A) (7.5 A)
PNK PNK
G5 C37
2 1
KEYLESS TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER UNIT
PNK (8 W) (Built into the
immobilizer-keyless PNK
2 control unit) 1 (5 W)
B-CAN
ON OFF KEYLESS RECEIVER UNIT
(Built into the 4 2 CARGO
(8 W) immobilizer-keyless AREA
control unit) LIGHT
(5 W)
1 CEILING B-CAN
ON OFF GRN
LIGHT [LT GRN]
BLU 4 2
PUR CARGO
AREA
LIGHT
1G7 CEILING C18

GRN
LIGHT [LT GRN]
BLU MICU Q3 PUR
IG1 B-CAN
G7
DRIVE CIRCUIT C18
DRIVE CIRCUIT
MICU Q3
SG PG B-CAN
IG1
DRIVE CIRCUIT DRIVE CIRCUIT
M16 SG Q9 PG N2 K10 M34
C32 C33 C40 C26 DOOR LOCK E2 E9 C22

KNOB
BLKM16 BLKQ9 BLKN2 BLK
K10 LT GRN BLU GRN PNK GRYM34 GRY BRN RED PNK
C32 C33 DOOR LOCK E2 E9 C22

KNOB 8 9
BLK BLK BLK BLK LT GRN BLU GRY GRY BRN RED PNK
IMMOBILIZER-
KEYLESS UN- LOCK
CONTROL LOCK
1 1 1 1 1 8 9 1
UNIT
DRIVER'S 10
DOOR LOCK
LT GRN LT GRN LT GRN IMMOBILIZER- KNOB SWITCH
FRONT DRIVER'S LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR 2 KEYLESS UN- LOCK TAILGATE
IGNITION LOCK
1PASSENGER'S 1DOOR SWITCH 1DOOR SWITCH 1DOOR SWITCH 1KEYCONTROL
SWITCH 1LATCH
DOOR SWITCH (Closed: (Closed: (Closed: UNIT SWITCH
(Closed: Door open) Door open) Door open) (Closed: DRIVER'S 10 (Closed:
Door open) Key inserted) DOOR LOCK Tailgate open)
2 KNOB SWITCH
LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR FRONT DRIVER'S TAILGATE
DOOR SWITCH DOOR SWITCH PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH BLKIGNITION BLK BLKLATCH
(Closed: (Closed: DOOR SWITCH (Closed: KEY SWITCH SWITCH
Door open) Door open) (Closed: Door open) (Closed: (Closed:
Door open) Key inserted) Tailgate open)
BLK BLK BLK

G501 G502 G501 G502 G501 G501 G602
G501 G502 G501 G502 G501 G501 G602

Ignition Key Switch Test
1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers.
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A).
There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch.
There should be no continuity with the key removed.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition switch.
Entry Lights Control System (MICU) Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, check for No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors C, E, G, K, M, N, Q, and W.
NOTE:
The illustration shows the RHD models and the black portion shows the lock lever. The
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the
system.
Cavity
Wire Test Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired
condition result is not obtained
K10 BLK Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground (G502)
conditions ground: An open in the wire
There should be continuity.
M16 BLK Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground (G501)
N2 BLK Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground (G501)
Q9 BLK Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground (G502)
W1 YEL Ignition Measure the voltage to Blown No. 60 (50 A)
switch ON (II) ground: fuse in the under-
There should be battery dash fuse/relay box
voltage. Faulty ignition switch
An open in the wire
C33 BLU Driver's door Check for continuity to Faulty driver's door
open ground: switch
There should be continuity An open in the wire
Driver's door Check for continuity to Faulty driver's door
closed ground: switch
There should be no A short to ground in
continuity the wire
C32 LT Front Check for continuity to Faulty front
GRN passenger's ground: passenger's door
door open There should be continuity switch
An open in the wire
Front Check for continuity to Faulty front
passenger's ground: passenger's door
door closed There should be no switch
continuity A short to ground in
the wire
C32 LT Left rear door Check for continuity to Faulty left rear door
*2 GRN or right rear ground: switch
door open There should be continuity Faulty right rear door
switch
An open in the wire
Left rear door Check for continuity to Faulty left rear door
and right rear ground: switch
door closed There should be no Faulty right rear door
continuity switch
A short to ground in
the wire
C40 GRN Left rear door Check for continuity to Faulty left rear door
*1 open ground: switch
Left rear door Check for continuity to Faulty left rear door
continuity the wire
Cavity
Wire Test Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired
C26 PNK Right rear Check for continuity to Faulty right rear door
*1 door open ground: switch
Right rear Check for continuity to Faulty right rear door
door closed ground: switch
continuity the wire
C22 ORN Tailgate open Check for continuity to Poor ground (G602)
ground: Faulty tailgate latch
There should be continuity switch
An open in the wire
Tailgate Check for continuity to Faulty tailgate latch
continuity the wire
*1:With security
*2:Without security
CavityWire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if

obtained
M34 GRY Ignition key Check for continuity to Poor ground
inserted into the ground: (G501)
ignition switch There should be Faulty ignition
continuity key switch
An open in the
wire
Ignition switch in Check for continuity to Faulty ignition
LOCK (0) ground: key switch
position, and the There should be no A short to ground
ignition key continuity in the wire
removed from the
ignition switch
E2 BRN Driver's door lock Check for continuity to Poor ground
knob switch in ground: (G501)
UNLOCK There should be Faulty driver's
continuity door lock knob
switch
An open in the
wire
Driver's door lock Check for continuity to Faulty driver's
knob switch in ground: door lock knob
neutral or LOCK There should be no switch
continuity A short to ground
in the wire
E9 RED Driver's door lock Check for continuity to Poor ground
knob switch in ground: (G501)
LOCK There should be Faulty driver's
continuity door lock knob
switch
An open in the
wire
Driver's door lock Check for continuity to Faulty driver's
knob switch in ground: door lock knob
neutral or There should be no switch
UNLOCK continuity A short to ground
in the wire
6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the
connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the under dash fuse relay box.
obtained
G7 BLU Ceiling light Connect G7 terminal and Blown No. 1 (10
switch in middle body ground with a A) fuse in the
position jumper wire: under-dash
The ceiling light should fuse/relay box
come on. Faulty ceiling
light
Blown bulb
An open in the
wire
obtained
C18 PUR Under all Connect C18 terminal and Blown No. 1 (10
conditions body ground with a A) fuse in the
jumper wire: under-dash
The cargo area light fuse/relay box
should come on. Faulty cargo
area light
Blown bulb
An open in the
wire
Power Mirrors Function Test
1. Remove the instrument panel.
2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the power mirror switch (B).
3. Choose the appropriate test based on the symptom:
Both mirrors don't work, go to Step 4 .
Right mirror doesn't work, go to Step 6 .
Left mirror doesn't work, go to Step 7 .
Retractable mirrors don't work, go to Step 8 .
Both mirrors
4. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal and body ground with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be
battery voltage.
If there is no battery voltage, check for:
-Blown No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
-An open in the BRN wire.
5. Check for continuity between the No. 6 terminal and body ground.
If there is no continuity, check for:
-An open in the BLK wire.
-Poor ground (G501).
If there is continuity, check the power mirror switch.
Right mirror
6. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the No. 11 terminal, and the No. 5 (then No. 13) terminal to the No. 6 terminal with
jumper wires, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The right mirror should tilt down (then swing left).
If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing left), check for an open in the GRN (or BLU) wire between
the right mirror and the power mirror switch 13P connector. If the wire is OK, check the right mirror actuator.
If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left, repair an open in the LT GRN wire.
If the mirror works properly, check the power mirror switch.
Left mirror
7. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the No. 10 terminal, and the No. 5 (then No. 12) terminal to the No. 6 terminal with
jumper wires, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The left mirror should tilt down (then swing left).
If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing left), check for an open in the GRN (or PNK) wire between
the left mirror and the power mirror switch 13P connector. If the wire is OK, check the left mirror actuator.
If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left, repair an open in the ORN wire.
If the mirror works properly, check the power mirror switch.
Retractable Power Mirror

8. Connect the No. 2 and No. 7 (or No. 8) terminals and the No. 8 (or No. 7) and the No. 6 terminals with jumper
wires, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The both mirror should retract (or extend).
If both mirrors do not work, check for:
-Blown No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
-An open in the GRY or YEL wire.
-Poor ground (G501).
If only one fails to work, check its retractable mirror actuator.
If both work, check the power mirror switch.
Power Mirror Replacement
NOTE:
1. Carefully pull the bottom edge of the mirror mount cover (A) out to release the hooks (B), and remove the cover by
lifting it upward to release the hooks (C, D).
2. Remove the front door panel.
3. Remove the plastic cover as needed, then disconnect the connector (A).
4. While holding the mirror (A), remove the nuts.
5. While holding the mirror (A), detach the clip (B) and pull the harness (C) out through the hole in the door. Take care
not to scratch the door.
6. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
Check if the clip is damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace it with a new one.
Power Mirror Actuator Test
2. Disconnect the power mirror 13P (or 6P) connector (A) .
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. Power Mirror Actuator
4. If the mirror fails to work properly, replace the power mirror actuator.
Retract Actuator
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the power mirror holder, and the power mirror.
2. Remove the two screws (A) and the side turn signal light (B) from the housing (C).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (D) from the side turn signal light.
4. Record the power mirror connector terminals location and the wire harness colors.
5. Disassemble the power mirror connector (A), and remove the terminals (B) from the connector.
6. Remove the gasket (A) and cover (B).

7. Remove the three screws, and separate the mirror housing (C) from the bracket (D).
8. Remove the three screws and the power mirror actuator (A) from the housing (B).
9. Remove the four screws, and separate the power mirror actuator (A) and the retract actuator (B).
Installation 6P CONNECTOR
10. Route the wire harness of the new actuator through the hole in the bracket and gasket, then install the parts in the
reverse order of removal.
11. Insert the new actuator terminals into the connector in the original arrangement.
13P CONNECTOR
12. Apply tapes (A), (B) to seal the wire harness.

13. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Be careful not to break the mirror holder when reinstalling it to the
actuator.
14. Reinstall the mirror assembly on the door.
15. Operate the power mirror to ensure smooth operation.
Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the instrument panel.
2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A).
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Power Mirror Switch
4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and the covers and replacement the switch.
Retract Switch
Front Seat Armrest Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers.
1. Using a trim tool, remove the cap (A).
2. Remove the center pin (B), bushing (C) and washer (D), then remove the armrest (E).
3. If necessary, remove the pins (F) from the seat-back.
4. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal.
Front Seat Frame Replacement
Passenger's Seat
NOTE
Apply oil to the pivot portions of the slide locks.
Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding portions of the seat tracks.
If the side airbag has deployed, replace the seat frame and related parts with new ones.
Front seat recline covers
Front seat belt buckle
Front seat-back cover/pad
Front seat cushion cover/pad
Recline inner covers
For some models: OPDS unit
For some models: Side airbag module
3. Install the new seat frame in the reverse order of removal.
Driver's Seat
NOTE
Apply oil to the pivot portions of the slide locks.
Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding portions of the seat tracks.
If the side airbag has deployed, replace the seat frame and related parts with new ones.
Front seat recline covers
Front seat belt buckle
Front seat-back cover/pad
Front seat cushion cover/pad
Recline inner covers
For some models: Side airbag module
3. Install the new seat frame in the reverse order of removal.
Front Seat Recline Cover Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Outer recline cover

2. Manual height adjustable seat: Pull back the cap (A) to release the hooks (B), and remove the screws, then remove
the height handle (C).
3. Remove the recline outer cover (A).

-1. Fold back the seat to fully.
-2. Remove the recline knob (B), and remove the screw.
-3. Using a trim tool, and release the hooks (C) of the outer cover from the recline inner cover (D).
-4. Detach the clip by pulling the outer cover back by hand.
-5. Gently pull out the outer cover and remove it.
Inner recline cover Driver's seat

4. Remove the front seat cushion cover/pad.
5. Remove the recline inner cover (A).
-1. Release the hooks (B) of the recline inner cover from the seat cushion frame.
-2. Pull out the cover by removing the holder of the cover from the seat cushion frame pipe (C).
6. When installing the inner cover; securely fit the hooks on the seat cushion frame first, next fit the holder of the
cover on the cushion pipe.
Passenger's seat
Rear Seat Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the trim and panels.
Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the rear seat.
1. Pull the rear seat belt buckles (A) and rear center seat belt detachable anchor or rear center lap seat belt (B) out
through each elastic straps (C) on both seat cushions.
2. Lift both rear seat cushions up.
3. Detach the clips from the seat-back hinge. Slip the sea belt buckles and seat belt detachable anchor or seat belt.
4. Fold both rear seat-backs.
5. Open the cargo floor lids (A) and remove the bolts securing both rear seats.
6. Remove the right rear seat (A) and the left rear seat (B) through both rear door opening.
7. Install the seats in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the seat mounting bolts before reinstallation.
After installing, fix the seat belt buckles and the detachable anchor with elastic bands on both seat
cushions.
If the clips are damage or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
Rear Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE:
The left rear seat is shown, the right rear seat is similar.
Seat-back cover removal

1. Remove the rear seat assembly.
2. Remove the head restraints.
3. Remove the screw, then remove the recline upper cover (A).
4. Remove the center cover (A).

-1. Using a trim tool, and release the upper hooks (B) of the cover.
-2. Release the lower hook (C) of the cover, then remove the center cover.
NOTE: When installing the center cover, insert the upper portion (D) of the cover into the seat cushion cover
(E) securely.
5. Remove the bolts and nut, then separate the rear seat-back (A) and the rear seat cushion (B).
6. If necessary, remove the bushing (C) and pivot washer (D).
7. Reassemble the seat-back and seat cushion in reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the bolts before reinstallation.
Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portions of the recline adjusters.
Replace any damaged or stress-whitened bushing and pivot washer with new ones.
Make sure the bushing and pivot washer are installed correctly.
Rear Seat Control Cable Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to kink the cable.
The left rear seat cushion is shown, the right rear seat cushion is similar.
2. Remove the rear seat cushion.
3. Remove the rear seat cushion cover/pad and the silencer.
4. Fold the leg, and remove the wire tie (A).
5. Disconnect the control cable (B) from the leg end (C) and cable bracket (D) of the seat cushion frame.
6. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Replace the wire tie you removed with new ones.
Make sure the control cable is routed properly and connected securely.
Fix at the original position in the end of the cable on the cable bracket securely. And check the rear seat tip-
up operation:
Make sure the rear seat cushion unlocks by lifting the leg. If necessary, adjust the position of the cable end.
Rear Seat Cushion Cover/Pad Replacement
NOTE:
1. Remove the rear seat.
3. Remove the screw and clip, then release the lib (A) and remove the recline cover (B).
4. Lift the leg (A), and remove the rear seat under cover cap (B). Left rear seat cushion
Right rear seat cushion
5. Remove the screws and knobs (A). Release the hook strip (B) of the seat cushion cover (C) from the edge of the Left rear seat cushion
rear seat under cover (D) all the way around.
6. Remove the rear seat under cover (A) from the seat cushion frame (B). Left rear seat cushion

7. Release the hooks (A) from the seat-back frame (B). Left rear seat cushion
8. Remove the rear seat cushion cover/pad (A) and the silencer (B) from the rear seat cushion frame (C).
9. Install the rear seat cushion cover/pad in the reverse order of removal. To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-
back cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the hooks.
Rear Seat Cushion Leg Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to kink the cable.
3. Remove the rear seat cushion cover/pad and the silencer.
4. Remove the leg (A) from the seat cushion frame (B):
-1. Disconnect the control cable.
-2. Release the push nuts (C), then remove the set pins (D).
-3. Remove the leg.
-4. If necessary, remove the bushings (E), the cable hook (F), and the spring pins (G).
5. Install the leg in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Replace the push nuts and spring pins you removed with new ones.
Make sure the control cable is connected securely.
Apply multipurpose grease to the inside surfaces of the brackets (H).
Rear Seat-back Cover/Pad Replacement
NOTE:
2. Remove the seat-back.
3. Remove the these items:
Latch cover
Striker hole cover
4. If equipped, remove the shelf hooks (A) and shelf holder covers (B) from the back of the seat-back.
5. Release the hook strip (A), and unzip the seat-back cover and pull back the cover (B).
6. Release the hooks (A) from the seat-back frame (B).
7. Pull out the seat-back cover/pad (A) from the frame, then pull out the head restraint guides (B) and center head
restraint guides (C) (for some model) while pinching the end of the guides, and remove them.
8. Release the hooks (A) from the seat-back frame (B).
9. Remove the seat-back cover/pad (A) and the silencer (B) from the seat-back frame (C). If necessary, release the
hooks (D) and remove the latch lever inner cover (E).
10. Install the seat-back cover/pad in the reverse order of removal. To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the hooks.
Rear Seat-back Hinge Replacement
NOTE:
2. Release the push nut (A) from the pivot pin (B).
3. Remove the pivot pin, pivot collars (C), and hinge (D) from the seat-back frame (E). The inside hinge of each seat-
back frame is shown. The outside hinges of them are symmetrical.
4. Reassemble the hinge in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portions of the hinge.
Replace any push nuts you removed with new ones.
Rear Seat-back Latch Replacement
NOTE:
1. While pulling the latch lever (A), and remove the screw.
2. Release the hooks (B), and pull up the latch cover (C) from the rear seat-back.
3. Disconnect the control cable (A) from the latch lever (B), and remove the latch cover (C). Take care not to bend the
cable.
4. Detach the clips and hooks (A), then remove the striker hole cover (B).
5. Remove the bolts securing the seat-back latch (A).

6. Carefully pull out the seat-back latch and cable (B) out through the striker hole in the seat-back cover.
7. Reassemble the seat-back latch and cable in reverse order of disassembly, and not these items:
If the clips are damage or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
Make sure the seat-back cable is routed properly.
Make sure the seat-back cable is connected securely.
Make sure the rear seat locks and unlocks properly.
Rear Seat Leg Guide Replacement
1. Push the leg guide cover (A) to release the hook (B), then pull out the cover from the attaching plate (C) of the foot
guide (D).
2. Remove the nut and bolt, then remove the foot guide (A).
3. Install the foot guide in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Seat-back Striker Replacement
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the rear seat-back striker (A).
3. Install the striker in the reverse order of removal, and more the striker (A) up or down until it is centered in the seat-
back latch (B).
Immobilizer System Symptom Troubleshooting Index
1. Troubleshoot the immobilizer system by the order of the priority shown:
Order of Symptom Possible cause
Priority
1 Immobilizer indicator blinks after Symptom troubleshooting.
the ignition switch turned to LOCK
(0).
2 Engine does not start with the Symptom troubleshooting.
immobilizer key.
3 Immobilizer indicator does not Check the MIL indication.
come on. If the MIL comes on, go to the Fuel and
Emission MIL circuit troubleshooting.
If the MIL does not come on, go to the gauge
control module self-diagnostic function.
4 Immobilizer indicator does not go Symptom troubleshooting.
off.
How to Troubleshoot the Immobilizer System
General Check before Troubleshooting
Before troubleshooting the immobilizer system, check the following general items and solve any if applicable:
The battery is low; charge the battery fully, then troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
The ignition key is not a genuine Honda part; use the Honda-approved key blank, register the key, then
troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
A key ring, or keys, or a key case is used; remove the key from it, and troubleshoot the immobilizer system with a
key only.
An aftermarket electrical part is attached; remove it, then troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
Symptom Troubleshooting by the Immobilizer Indicator Lighting Pattern

The pattern of the immobilizer indicator can help troubleshoot the condition of the immobilizer system. Following are
descriptions of the four possible patterns:
Normal operation
If the immobilizer code is identified, the immobilizer indicator comes on for 2 seconds, then goes off after turning the
ignition switch to ON (II).
The immobilizer indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
Immobilizer code is not identified

If the immobilizer code is not identified, the immobilizer indicator comes on for 2 seconds, then blinks after turning the
ignition switch to ON (II).
The immobilizer indicator blinks ten times, then goes off when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
Immobilizer indicator does not come on

If the immobilizer indicator does not come on after turning the ignition switch to ON (II), an open or short in the F-CAN
lines between the ECM/PCM and the gauge control module. Watch the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). If the MIL stays
on, go to the PGM-FI system troubleshooting.
Immobilizer indicator does not go off

If the immobilizer indicator does not go off after turning the ignition switch to ON (II), do the gauge control module self-
diagnostic function. If the indicator drive circuit is OK, do the SYSTEM CHECK with the HDS. Before troubleshooting the
immobilizer system, check the following general points and solve any if applicable.
Symptom Troubleshooting Using Malfunctioning Circuit Functions

If a malfunction occurs in the immobilizer circuit, use the table to cross-reference the malfunctioning
function to the line(s) that should be checked:
System Check
NOTE: The HDS can be used to:
Check the state of the immobilizer key registration and the S-NET line by doing a SYSTEM CHECK.
Check the number of times the immobilizer-keyless control unit doesn't permit the engine to run by checking the
STATUS LOG.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and follow the prompts to the
MAIN MENU.
NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the vehicle, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting.
2. At the MAIN MENU, enter IMMOBILIZER, then select the IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
3. Do the SYSTEM CHECK. If there is a system check number, do the troubleshooting for the item indicated.
4. Check the status log using the HDS. Troubleshooting the line with the highest counts first. If all the lines are ‘‘0''
zero, the problem may not be caused by the immobilizer system, check for ignition or fuel problems.
NOTE: Once repaired, clear the status log by removing the No. 1 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box or
disconnecting the immobilizer-keyless control unit.
Immobilizer System Description
The vehicle is equipped with an immobilizer system that will disable the vehicle unless a programmed ignition key is used.
This system consists of a transponder located in the ignition key, an immobilizer-keyless control unit, an indicator, and the ECM/PCM.
When the key is inserted in the ignition switch and turned to the ON (II) position, the immobilizer-keyless control unit sends power to the transponder in the ignition
key. The transponder then sends a coded signal back through the immobilizer control unit-receiver to the ECM/PCM. The code is a rolling type embedded in the
receiver instead of the ECM/PCM.
A communication agreement with the HDS is required at the ECM/PCM after repair or replacement. When replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, all keys
are required to be registered into the new control unit. Any keys that were not registered in the control unit will not start the vehicle.
If a programmed key has been used, the immobilizer indicator will come on for about 2 seconds, then go off.
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
When the ignition switch is turned to CONTROL
LOCK (0), the indicator will blinkUNIT
for about 5 seconds to signal that the unit has been set correctly, then the indicator
will go off.
If the wrong key has been used whose code was not received or recognized by the unit, the indicator will come on for about 2 seconds, then it will blink until
the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR BLINKING PATTERN ECM/PCM FUEL SUPPLY

SYSTEM
ON (II)
IGNITION SWITCH
LOCK (0)
2 sec. 5 sec.
1 Hz
PROGRAMMEDIGNITION KEY ON
KEY INSERTED INDICATOR KEY CYLINDER
(Has built-in transponder)
OFF
1 sec.
WRONG KEY ON
INSERTED INDICATOR
OFF
Immobilizer System Component Location Index
ECM/PCM
Replacement,
Substituting ECM/PCM for testing,
IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR
IGNITION KEY
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT

Symptom Troubleshooting, TRANSPONDER
(Combined with the keyless transmitter)
Registration for Immobilizer System,
Immobilizer System Circuit Diagram
[ ]: LHD model
: CAN line
BATTERY TERMINAL : Other communication line
FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A) T-9 No. 1 (10 A)
WHT
No. 60 (IGN) (50 A)

T1
WHT
IGNITION SWITCH
BAT No. 20 (15 A)

W1
YEL
IG1
B14
RED
MICU
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

B-CAN
Q3 K8 N1
IMMOBILIZER GRN
INDICATOR [LT GRN]
(LED)
18 GRN
B-CAN [LT GRN] RED PNK
CAN L CAN H GRN

[LT GRN]
29 30
4 2 1
B-CAN IG1 +B KEY

BACK UP
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT
S-NET LG IG KEYSW K-LINE

7 6 5
BLK/RED RED WHT GRN

BRN GRY BLU
Q4
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
B22
GRN
C10 A4 A3 A46 GRY

DATA LINK
IG1 CAN L CAN H S-NET M34 CONNECTOR
(DLC)
ECM/PCM MICU
PG1 PG2 LG2 LG1 UNDER-DASH

FUSE/RELAY
B10 B1 C48 C44 GRY BOX
1 IGNITION
KEY SWITCH
BLK BRN BRN/YEL BRN/YEL BRN/YEL (Closed:
Key inserted)
2
BLK
G101 G501
Immobilizer System Symptom Troubleshooting - Immobilizer indicator blinks
Immobilizer indicator blinks
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the items listed in ‘‘General Check before Troubleshooting''.
2. Connect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Enter the IMMOBILIZER, then select the IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
4. Select the SYSTEM CHECK.
Is the SYSTEM CHECK indicated?
YES - Troubleshoot the immobilizer system according to the result of the SYSTEM CHECK.■
NO - Go to Step 5 .
6. Enter the vehicle, and remove the ignition key from the ignition switch, then close all the doors.
7. Operate the keyless transmitter LOCK and UNLOCK several times in the vehicle.
Do the door lock actuators work normally?
NO - Check for a poor ground (G101) and/or an open in the wire between the immobilizer-keyless control unit
7P connector No. 7 terminal and body ground (G101).■
9. Measure the voltage between the immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector No. 2 terminal and body ground.
NO - Repair an open in the RED wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the immobilizer-keyless
control unit.■
10. Measure the voltage between the immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector No. 7 terminal and body ground.
Is there 0.5 V or more?
YES - Repair an open or poor connection between the immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector No. 7
terminal and G101.■
NO - Replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit .■
Immobilizer System Symptom Troubleshooting - Engine does not start with the immobilizer key
Engine does not start with the immobilizer key
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the items listed in ‘‘General Check before Troubleshooting''.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the immobilizer indicator indication.
Does the indicator come on for 2 seconds, then go off?
YES - Go to the immobilizer indicator blinks troubleshooting. ■
NO - Go to Step 3 .
3. Turn the ignition switch to START (III).
Does the starter motor run?
NO - Go to Starting System and check the starter motor.■
4. Try to start the engine with the immobilizer key.
Does the engine start?
NO - Go to the Fuel and Emissions System Symptom Troubleshooting.■
5. Wait for a few minutes with the engine running.
Does the engine stop?
YES - Go to the Fuel and Emissions System Symptom Troubleshooting.■
Immobilizer System Symptom Troubleshooting - Immobilizer indicator does not go off
Immobilizer indicator does not go off
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector.
4. Enter the IMMOBILIZER, then select the IMMOBILIZER INFORMATION.
5. Do the SYSTEM CHECK with the HDS.
Is N-1 OK indicated?
NO - Substitute a known-good immobilizer-keyless control unit , then register it and recheck. If the symptom
goes away, replace the original immobilizer-keyless control unit .■
Immobilizer System Check
3. Monitor the System Check in the Immobilizer Info with the HDS.
4. If the HDS displays the ‘‘Immobilizer system is normal'', the immobilizer system is OK. If the HDS displays any
other messages, check as follows:
System System Check Possible Failures
Check No.
N-1 Normal ———
A-1 The key is not This key is not registered in the immobilizer-keyless control
registered unit. Try to register keys by using ‘‘KEYS''.
The communication was not good between the antenna and
the immobilizer key by influence of metal such as key chains.
the immobilizer key by battery voltage low.
A-2 Communication Intermittent interruption between transponder and immobilizer-
error between keyless control unit.
the key and The immobilizer key type is different. It is not for this vehicle
immobilizer- but for another one or for other company's one.
keyless control Key failure (transponder failure)
unit The communication was not good between the antenna and
the immobilizer key by influence of metal such as key chains.
A-3 No The ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with a non-immobilizer
communication key.
between the The immobilizer key type is different. It is not for this vehicle
key and but for another one or for other company's one.
immobilizer- Key failure (transponder failure)
keyless control The communication was not good between the antenna and
unit the immobilizer key by influence of metal such as key chains.
Immobilizer-keyless control unit failure
B-1 The ECM/PCM The ECM/PCM was not registered. Try to register the
is not ECM/PCM by using ‘‘REPLACE ECM/PCM''.
registered The communication was not good between the ECM/PCM and
the immobilizer-keyless control unit by battery voltage low.
The communication was not good between the immobilizer-
keyless control unit and the ECM/PCM by influence of some
noise.
B-2 Error of The ECM/PCM was not registered. Try to register the
communication ECM/PCM by using ‘‘REPLACE ECM/PCM''.
format in The communication was not good between the ECM/PCM and
ECM/PCM the immobilizer-keyless control unit by battery voltage low.
noise.
D-1 S-net line short Harness short from the ECM/PCM to the immobilizer-keyless
control unit. (IMOCD/S-NET line short)
The communication was not good between the ECM/PCM and
the immobilizer-keyless control unit by battery voltage low.
noise.
ECM/PCM failure
D-3 No Blown fuse

communication Harness open from the ECM/PCM to the immobilizer-keyless
between the control unit.
ECM/PCM and The communication was not good between the ECM/PCM and
immobilizer- the immobilizer-keyless control unit by battery voltage low.
keyless control The communication was not good between the immobilizer-
unit keyless control unit and the ECM/PCM by influence of some
noise.
ECM/PCM failure
E-1 Initial The key was not registered. Try to register keys by using ‘‘REPLACE
registration of IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT''.
E-2 immobilizer- The ECM/PCM was not registered. Try to register the ECM/PCM by
keyless control using ‘‘REPLACE ECM/PCM''.
E-3 unit is not The MICU was not registered. Try to register the MICU by using
completed ‘‘REPLACE MICU''.
System System Check Possible Failures
Check No.
E-4 The immobilizer-keyless control unit was not registered. Try to
register the IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT by using
‘‘REPLACE IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT''.
E-5 The MICU was not registered. Try to register the MICU by
using ‘‘REPLACE MICU''.
MICU failure
F-1 Special mode Immobilizer system is under registration mode. Turn the ignition
F-2 switch to lock (0) and ON (II) so as to change normal mode.
F-3
F-4
F-5
F-6
Immobilizer Key Registration
NOTE:
The HDS is required for registration of the immobilizer keys.
Check for aftermarket electrical equipment that can cause problems with transponder operation.
The immobilizer control unit-receiver can store up to six immobilizer Keys.
Replace any of the keys

NOTE: If any of the registered keys were lost, do the following procedure to delete the lost registered key.
1. Have at least one original key, all other keys to be registered and the immobilizer ECM/PCM code.
4. Select ‘‘IMMOBILIZER'' from the ‘‘SYSTEM SELECTION MENU''.
5. Select ‘‘KEYS'' from the ‘‘IMMOBILIZER MENU'', then select ‘‘REWRITE KEYS''.
6. Select ‘‘REWRITE KEYS'' from the ‘‘KEYS''.
7. Do the registration according to the instruction of HDS screen.
8. Check if the engine can be started by all the registered keys.
All keys are lost

1. Prepare all new keys and have the immobilizer ECM/PCM code.
4. Select ‘‘IMMOBILIZER'' from the ‘‘SYSTEM SELECTION MENU''.
5. Select ‘‘KEYS'' from the ‘‘IMMOBILIZER MENU'', then select ‘‘REWRITE KEYS''.
6. Select ‘‘ALL KEYS LOST'' from the ‘‘KEYS''.
7. Do the registration according to the instruction of HDS screen.
8. Check if the engine can be started by all the registered keys.
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit Input Test
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the immobilizer-keyless control unit (B).
system.
If all the input tests prove OK, the immobilizer-keyless control unit must be faulty;
replace it.
Cavity Wire Test Test: Desired result Possible cause if
condition desired result is not
obtained
1 PNK Under all Measure the voltage Blown No. 1 (10
conditions between the immobilizer- A) fuse in the
keyless control unit 7P under-dash
connector No. 1 terminal fuse/relay box
and body ground: There An open in the
should be battery voltage. wire
2 RED Ignition Measure the voltage to Blown No. 20 (15
switch ON ground: There should be A) fuse in the
(II) battery voltage. under-dash
fuse/relay box
An open in the
wire
7 BRN Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground
wire
6 GRY Ignition key Check for continuity to Poor ground
inserted ground: There should be (G501)
into the continuity. Faulty ignition
ignition key switch
switch An open in the
wire
Ignition key Check for continuity: There Faulty ignition
removed should be no continuity. key switch
form the A short to ground
ignition in the wire
switch
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit Replacement
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the immobilizer-keyless control unit (B).
3. Remove the two screws and the immobilizer-keyless control unit.
4. Install the immobilizer-keyless control unit in the reverse order of removal.
5. After replacement, register the immobilizer-keyless control unit, and make sure the immobilizer system works
properly.
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Power Door Locks/Keyless
1. Check for B-CAN DTCs. If any B-CAN DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot and resolve them first.
2. If the door lock system and the keyless operation do not work, troubleshoot the door locks first.
NOTE: The system does not function when the ignition switch is ON (II).
No. Symptom Check Items
1 All the doors will not lock or unlock. * Poor ground (G501, G502)
Driver's door key cylinder switch test
Door switch test (check the door switch
ON/OFF information with the HDS)
Door lock switch test (check the door switch
ON/OFF information with the HDS)
2 Driver's and right[left] rear doors, and Poor ground (G501, G502)
fuel lid will not lock or unlock. Blown No. 27 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
Blown No. 36 (15 A) and/or No. 50 (15A) fuse in
the under-dash fuse/relay box
MICU input test
3 Front passenger's and left[right] rear Poor ground (G501, G502)
doors, and tailgate will not lock or Blown No. 27 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash
unlock. fuse/relay box
Blown No. 35 (15 A) and or No. 49 (15 A) fuse
in the under-dash fuse/relay box
MICU input test
4 Keyless operation does not work Symptom troubleshooting

(LOCK, UNLOCK).
5 Doors will not unlock with the Symptom troubleshooting
transmitter, but will unlock with the door Door lock switch test (check the door switch
lock switch and the door key cylinder ON/OFF information with the HDS)
switch.
6 Doors will not lock with the transmitter, Symptom troubleshooting
but will lock with the door lock switch Door lock switch test (check the door switch
and the door key cylinder switch. ON/OFF information with the HDS)
7 Doors automatically relock 30 seconds Symptom troubleshooting
after being unlocked with the
transmitter even though a door has
been opened.
8 Only driver's door will unlock or door Driver's door lock knob switch test
locks relock immediately after
unlocking with the remote.
9 Keyless operation will work even though Ignition key switch test
the ignition key is in the ignition switch.
[ ]: LHD model
*: If only one door is not working properly, check that door's lock actuator first, then check the
other items listed in this table.
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System Description
Security Alarm System
Keyless Entry System
Ultrasonic System
Door Lock System
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System Symptom Troubleshooting - Doors will not unlock (or lock) with the
transmitter, but will unlock (lock) with the door switch
Doors will not unlock (or lock) with the transmitter, but will unlock (lock) with the door switch
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If any DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the indicated DTC first.
2. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch.
3. Close and lock the doors.
4. Try to lock/unlock the doors with the keyless transmitter.
Do the door lock actuators work normally?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■
NO - Go to Step 5 .
5. Open the driver's door.
Does the key-in reminder chime sound?
YES - Faulty ignition key switch , or short to ground on the ignition switch wire. Repair as necessary.■
NO - Go to Step 6 .
6. Do the transmitter test.
Is the transmitter OK?
YES - Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay box and recheck. If there is still a problem, substitute a
known-good immobilizer-keyless control unit and recheck.■
NO - Replace the transmitter.■
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System Symptom Troubleshooting - Doors automatically relock 30 second after
being unlocked with the transmitter even though a door has been opened
Doors automatically relock 30 seconds after being unlocked with the transmitter even though a
door has been opened
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If any DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the indicated DTC first.
1. Place the ceiling light switch in the DOOR position.
3. Watch the ceiling light and the door indicators on the gauge control module.
Do the ceiling light and door indicators come on when the door is open, and go off when the door is closed?
YES - Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay box and recheck. If the symptom goes away, replace the
original under-dash fuse/relay box.■
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the MICU and each door switch. If the wire is OK, replace the door
switch.■
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System Symptom Troubleshooting - Keyless operation does not work (LOCK,
UNLOCK)
Keyless operation does not work (LOCK, UNLOCK)
NOTE:
Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If any DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the indicated DTC first.
Before troubleshooting, do the keyless transmitter test.
2. Try to start the engine.
YES - The immobilizer system is OK, go to Step 3 .
NO - Go to the immobilizer symptom troubleshooting. ■
4. Test the transmitter.
Is the transmitter OK?
YES - Replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit .■
NO - Replace the transmitter.■
Security Alarm Function Test
Ultrasonic sensor
1. Open the driver's window.
2. Close all doors.
3. Lock the doors with the transmitter or the key cylinder.
4. Wait 25 seconds for activate the security system.
The hazard warning lights and the security indicator blink when the security system is armed.
5. Put your hand into the cabin.
If the siren sounds and hazard warning lights blink, go to Step 6 .
If the system siren doesn't sound and the hazard warning lights don't blink, replace the ultrasonic sensor.
Internal battery of alarm control siren

6. Open the hood.
7. Disconnect the terminals from the battery.
If the siren sounds continuously, internal battery is OK.
If the siren turns off, replace the alarm control siren.
NOTE:
The alarm control siren is self-powered system with internal Ni-MH battery back-up. Even if the voltage of
vehicle's battery drops, the alarm control siren works properly.
If the lock knob is pushed before the door is closed, the buzzer sounds 1 time and ultrasonic system
doesn't work.
Security Alarm Tripped Sensor Recall
The security system stores information on the last tripped sensor if the security system has been violated. The information
can be retrieved using the HDS.
To retrieve the last tripped sensor data:
1. Select HISTORY DATA from the security system test mode menu.
2. Select CURRENT DATA.
3. Confirm that MaRIS matches the Vehicle then press the enter button.
4. Scroll through the data list.
Sensors that were violated will indicate DETECT.
Sensors that were not violated will indicate NONE.
5. Inspect the DETECT circuit for:
Misadjusted or damaged switch.
Loose or corroded connections.
Intermittent shot to ground.
Security Alarm Control Siren Input Test
1. Remove the right cargo area side trim panel.
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the alarm control siren (B).
3. Inspect connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bend, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the
system.
4. Make these input tests at the connector.
CavityWire Test Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired
5 BLK Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground (G604)
conditions ground: There should be An open in the wire
continuity.
4 GRN Ultrasonic Check for continuity An open in the wire
sensor 3P between the No. 4 terminal
connector and No. 2 terminal of the
disconnected ultrasonic sensor: There
Check for continuity to A short to ground in the wire
ground: There should be no
continuity.
3 LT GRN Under-dash Check for continuity An open in the wire
fuse/relay between the No. 3 terminal
box and C25 terminal of the
connector under-dash fuse/relay box:
C (49P) There should be continuity.
disconnected Check for continuity to A short to ground in the wire
continuity.
2 PNK Under all Measure the voltage to Blown No. 1 (10 A)
conditions ground: There should be fuse in the under-
battery voltage. dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
5. Substitute a known-good alarm control siren and recheck the system.

If the symptom goes away, the alarm control siren is faulty; replace it.
Door Key Cylinder Switch Test
With security
1. Remove the driver's door panel.
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the key cylinder switch (B).
There should be continuity between the No. 8 [No. 7] and No. 10 [No. 5] terminals when the door key
cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position.
There should be no continuity between the No. 8 [No. 7] and No. 10 [No. 5] terminals when the door key
cylinder switch is in the neutral or LOCK position.
There should be continuity between the No. 9 [No. 6] and No. 10 [No. 5] terminals when the door key
cylinder switch is in LOCK position.
There should be no continuity between the No. 9 [No. 6] and No. 10 [No. 5] terminals when the door key
cylinder switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position.
[ ]: LHD model
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator assembly.
Door Lock Actuator Test - Without Super Locking
Driver's Door
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the actuator (B).
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the
actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily.
4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it.
Front Passenger's Door

1. Remove the front passenger's door panel.
Left Rear Door

1. Remove the left rear door panel.
Right Rear Door

1. Remove the right rear door panel.
Door Lock Actuator Test - With Super Locking
Driver's Door with Super Locking
Front Passenger's Door with Super Locking

1. Remove the front passenger's door panel.
Left Rear Door with Super Locking

1. Remove the left rear door panel.
Right Rear Door with Super Locking

1. Remove the right rear door panel.
Door Lock Knob Switch Test
Driver's Door
There should be continuity between the No. 9 [No. 6] and No. 10 [No. 5] terminals when the door lock knob
switch is in the LOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the UNLOCK position.
There should be continuity between the No. 8 [No. 7] and No. 10 [No. 5] terminals when the door lock knob
switch is in the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position.
[ ]: LHD model
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator.
Front Passenger's Door (With security)

1. Remove the passenger's door panel.
There should be continuity between the No. 7 [No. 8] and No. 5 [No. 10] terminals when the door lock knob switch
in the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position.
[ ]: LHD model
4. If the continuity is not specified, replace the door lock actuator.
Rear Door (With security)

1. Remove the left or right rear door panel.
NOTE: The illustration shows the left rear door.
There should be continuity between the No. 7 [No. 8] and No. 5 [No. 10] terminals when the door lock knob switch
is UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position.
[ ]: Right rear door
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator.
Fuel Lid Lock Actuator Test
1. Open the tailgate, then remove the lid cover from the left cargo area side trim panel.
Fuel Lid Lock Actuator Replacement
3. Loosen the mounting screws (C).
4. Move an actuator at the back, and remove the actuator.
5. Install in the reverse order or removal.
Fuel Lid Lock Actuator How to Cope in the Trouble
2. Move the rod (A) by hand in the direction that the arrow shows, and release the lock.
Security Alarm Hood Switch Test
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the hood switch (B).
There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the hood is opened (lever released).
There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the hood is closed (lever pushed
down).
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the hood latch assembly.
Keyless Entry Transmitter Test
Keyless entry checker
07MAJ-SP00400
NOTE:
If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but the LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED is faulty;
replace the transmitter.
If any door is open, you cannot lock the doors with the transmitter.
If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the doors relock
automatically.
The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch.
With HDS
1. Press the lock or unlock button five or six times to reset the transmitter.
If the locks work, the transmitter is OK.
If any of the transmitter buttons do not work, replace the transmitter, then register the transmitter
programming.
If the locks don't work, go to Step 2 .
3. Select the KEYLESS from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, then enter the KEYLESS CHECK.
4. Press lock, unlock, trunk, or panic button and check the response on the screen of the HDS.
NOTE: The door lock actuators may or may not cycle when receiving input from the transmitter.
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is OK.
If DIFFERENT KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is not
registered to the vehicle. If necessary, reprogram and register the transmitter.
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS NOT RECEIVED is indicated, go to Step 5 .
5. Open the transmitter and check for water damage.
If you find any water damage, replace the transmitter, then register it.
If there is no water damage, go to Step 6 .
6. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one, and press lock or unlock button and check the receive
condition on the screen of the HDS.
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is OK.
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS NOT RECEIVED is indicated, go to Step 7 .
7. Use a different known-good keyless transmitter assembly and repeat Step 3 and 4.
NOTE: The keyless transmitter does not need to be programmed to the vehicle for this test.
If (DIFFERENT) KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS RECEIVED is indicated, replace the keyless
transmitter and do the immobilizer system registration.
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS NOT RECEIVED is indicated, the immobilizer-keyless
control unit is faulty, replace it and do the immobilizer system registration.
NOTE: As the keyless transmitter is combined with the immobilizer transponder, so when the transponder is
registered by the HDS, the keyless transmitter is also registered automatically.
Without HDS
1. Put on the transmitter (A) behind the keyless entry checker (B).
2. Press the door lock button.
If the indicator light (C) comes on, the transmitter is OK.
If the indicator light does not come on, check for;
-A dead or low battery, go to Step 3 .
-Faulty transmitter.
3. Open the transmitter and check for water damage.

If you find any water damage, replace the transmitter.
If there is no water damage, go to Step 4 .
4. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one, and try to lock and unlock the doors with the transmitter by
pressing the lock or unlock button five or six times.
If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK.
If the doors don't lock and unlock, go to Step 5 .
5. Reprogram and register the transmitter, then try to lock and unlock the doors.
If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK.
If the doors don't lock and unlock, substitute a known-good transmitter and recheck. If still not operating,
replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit.
NOTE: As the keyless transmitter is combined with the immobilizer transponder, so when the transponder is
registered by the HDS, the keyless transmitter is also registered automatically.
Security Horn Test/Replacement
2. Disconnect the 1P connector (A) from horn (B).
3. Test the horn by connecting battery power to the terminal (A) and grounding the bracket (B). The horn should
sound.
4. If it fails to sound, replace it.
Tailgate Lock Actuator Test
With Keyless Entry
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the tailgate lock actuator (B).
Ultrasonic Sensor Input Test
1. Carefully pry off the ultrasonic sensor cover (A) with a small screwdriver.
2. Remove the mounting screws.
3. Disconnect the 3P connector (B) from the ultrasonic sensor.
If the terminals are bend, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the
system.
If all the input tests prove OK, the ultrasonic sensor must be faulty, replace it.
CavityWire Test Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired
1 PNK Under all Measure the voltage to Blown No. 1 (10 A)
conditions ground: There should be fuse in the under-
battery voltage. dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
2 GRN Alarm Check for continuity An open in the wire
control between the No. 2 terminal
siren 6P and No. 4 terminal of the
connector alarm control siren: There
disconnected should be continuity.
Check for continuity to A short to ground in the wire
continuity.
3 BLK Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground (G602)
conditions ground: There should be An open in the wire
continuity.
Battery Test
A battery can explode if you do not follow the proper procedure, causing serious injury to anyone nearby.
Follow all procedures carefully and keep sparks and open flames away from the battery.
The battery contains sulfuric acid (electrical) which is highly corrosive and poisonous.
Getting electrolyte in your eyes or on your skin can cause serious burns.
Wear protective clothing and eye protection when working on or near battery.
Swallowing electrolyte can cause fatal poisoning if immediate action is not taken.
NOTE: To get accurate results, the temperature of the electrolyte must be between 21 and 38 °C (70 and 100 °F) before
testing.
Test Equipment Required
Battery Tester with:
Voltmeter with 0−18 V scale, ammeter with 0−100 A and 0−500 A scales, and a carbon pile with 0−300 W
12 V Battery Charger:
Fast charge capability of 50 A and slow charge capability of 5 A
Test Procedure
Regarding the battery check and battery charge method.

If battery has description, follow it.
When you charge the battery, you must remove the battery from vehicle.
1. Check for damage: If the case is cracked or the terminals are loose, replace the battery.
2. Check the test indicator window:
If the test indicator window indicates the shortage of battery liquid, go to Step 3 .
If the test indicator window indicates a low, go to Step 4 .
3. Remove the tape and caps, and add distilled water. After refill the distilled water, apply the tape and caps.
4. Test battery load capacity by connecting a battery tester, and applying a load of three times the battery ampere
hour rating.
When the load has been applied for exactly 15 seconds, the battery voltage reading should stay above 9.6 V.
If the reading stays above 9.6 V, the battery is OK; clean its terminals and case, and reinstall it.
If the reading is between 6.5 and 9.6 V, connect a battery charger and charge the battery for 3 minutes at an
initial rate of 40 amps.
Since the main body of the battery is transformed or might be exploded by gas generated when
charging it, loosen the cap of each cell of the battery completely when you charged battery.
Amperage will drop as voltage increases; do not increase the amperage to compensate or you may
damage the battery.
Watch the battery voltage during the entire 3 minutes; the highest reading should stay below 15.5 V.
-If the reading stays below 15.5 V, the battery is OK; clean its terminals and case, and reinstall it.
-If the reading exceeds 15.5 V any time during the 3 minutes of fast charge, the battery is not good;
replace it.
If the reading drops below 6.5 V, slow-charge the battery by connecting a battery, and charge at 5 amps for
no more than 24 hours (or until the indicator shows full charge, or the specific gravity of the electrolyte is at
least 1.270).
Then test load capacity again.
-If the voltage stays above 9.6 V, the battery is OK; clean its terminals and case, and reinstall it.
-If the voltage still drops below 6.5 V, the battery is not good; replace it.
Battery Removal/Installation
NOTE: The battery terminal disconnection/reconnection procedure must be done before and after doing this procedure.
Some systems store data in memory that is lost when the battery is disconnected.
Removal
2. Remove the two nuts (A) securing the battery setting plate (B), then remove the battery setting plate and the
battery (C).
Installation
1. Install the battery (A), then install the battery setting plate (B).
2. Tighten the two nuts (C) equally until the battery is stable.
NOTE: Do not deform the battery setting plate by tightening the nuts too much.
NOTE: Make sure the positive terminal and the negative terminal are not reverse-connected.
Ignition Switch Test
SRS components are located in the area. Review the SRS component locations, and precautions and procedures before
performing repairs or servicing.
3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the ignition switch (B).
5. If the continuity does not agree with the table, replace the ignition switch.
Ignition Switch Replacement
SRS components are located in the area. Review the SRS component locations, and precautions and procedures before
3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the ignition switch (B).
4. Remove the two screws and the ignition switch.
Accessory Power Socket Component Location Index
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

Test/Replacement,

Accessory Power Socket Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A)
WHT
T-9
No. 60
(IGN)
(50 A)
T1
WHT
IGNITION SWITCH UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
BAT S3
RED
ACC
No. 13
(20 A)
N6
PUR
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET
BLK
G502
Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement
NOTE: If the accessory power socket does not work, check the No. 13 (20 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
ground (G502) first.
1. Remove the center lower trim.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the accessory power socket (B).
3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I).
5. Measure the voltage between the accessory power socket 2P connector No. 1 terminal and body ground. There
should be battery voltage.
If there is no battery voltage, check for an open in the wire.
6. Check for continuity between the accessory power socket No. 2 terminal and body ground. There should be
continuity.
If there is no continuity, check for an open in the wire.
7. Remove the socket (A).
8. Remove the housing (A) from the panel.

9. Install the power socket in the reverse order of removal.
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations , and precautions and procedures before
Removal
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes.
3. RHD model: Remove the fuse lid panel, and remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. LHD model: Remove the
fuse lid panel.
4. Disconnect the connectors from the front side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A).
5. Remove the mounting bolts, and the terminal (B).
6. Release the lock (C) and pull the fuse/relay box away from the body.
7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
8. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the base of the relay.
NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not start.
Installation
1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the under-dash
fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal.
2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.
3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then connect the negative cable to the battery.
4. Set the clock (if equipped).
5. Make sure that all systems work properly.
Washer Reservoir Replacement
1. Remove the right inner fender.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) and tubes (B) from the washer motor (C).
Washer Reservoir Capacity:
2.5 L (2.6 US qt, 2.2 Imp qt)
3. Remove the washer motor from the washer reservoir (D).
4. Remove the two bolts (A) and clip (B), then remove the washer reservoir (C).
5. Install the reservoir in the reverse order of removal. Check the washer motor operation.
Washer Motor Test
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer motor (B).
3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No. 1 (or No. 2) terminal, and ground the No. 2 (or No. 1)
terminal of the washer motor. The motor should run.
If the motor does not run, or fails to run smoothly, replace it.
If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no washer fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected or blocked
washer hose, or a clogged washer motor outlet.
Washer Tube/Nozzle Replacement
2. Remove the washer nozzles and clips, then remove the tubes.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Take care not to pinch the washer tubes. Check the
washer operation.
Wiper Arm Replacement
NOTE: Set the wiper arms to the auto-stop position before removal and installation.
Windshield
NOTE: Always pull up the driver's side wiper blade first.
1. Remove the caps, the nuts, and the wiper arms.
Rear Window
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the tailgate.
1. Remove the cover, the nut, and the wiper arm.
Wiper Motor Test
Windshield
1. Remove the wiper arms, and cowl lid (A).
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (B) from the wiper motor (C).
3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No. 4 [No. 3] terminal and ground the No. 5 [No. 4] terminal of
the wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should run at low speed. If the motor does not run, or fails to run
smoothly, replace the motor.
4. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No. 1 [No. 5] terminal and ground the No. 5 [No. 4] terminal of
the wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should run at high speed. If the motor does not run, or fails to run
smoothly, replace the motor.
5. Connect an analog ohmmeter to the No. 3 [No. 1] and No. 5 [No. 4] terminals, and run the motor at low or high
speed. The needle of the ohmmeter should pulse. If it does not, replace the motor.
[ ]: LHD model
Rear Window
NOTE: If there is malfunction of the rear windshield wiper operation, and no DTCs are detected, check the rear windshield
wiper motor and an open in the ground circuit of the rear windshield wiper.
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the tailgate lower trim panel.
2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the wiper motor (B).
3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No. 1 terminal and ground the No. 3 terminal of the wiper motor.
The motor should run. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace the motor.
4. Connect an analog ohmmeter between the rear window wiper motor 4P connector No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. The
ohmmeter should indicate continuity and no continuity alternately. If it does not, replace the motor.
Wiper Motor Replacement
Windshield
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or damage the hood and the body.
2. Remove the under-cowl panel and hood hinge cover.
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the windshield wiper motor (B).
4. Remove the bolts and the wiper linkage assembly (C).
5. Mark lines (A) to show the original adjustment, then remove the connection rod (B) from the linkage (C).
6. Remove the three bolts and the separate the windshield wiper motor (D) from the linkage assembly (E) through the
hole.
Installation
1. Before installing the motor, connect the 5P connector to the wiper motor, and turn the windshield wiper/washer
switch ON to LO or HI position, then OFF to return the motor shaft to the park position.
NOTE:
Do not use the windshield wiper/washer switch INT position in this step.
Apply multipurpose grease to the moving parts.
2. Install the wiper motor to the wiper linkage assembly in the reverse order of removal.
3. Install the linkage to the wiper motor shaft, then align the mark (A) of the linkage and the mark (B) of the wiper
linkage assembly.
4. After installation, adjust the wiper arms.
Rear Window
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or damage the tailgate.
1. Remove the rear window wiper arm.
2. Open the tailgate, and remove the tailgate lower trim panel.
3. Remove the cap (A), and disconnect the 4P connector (B) from the rear window wiper motor (C).
4. Remove the three bolts and the rear window wiper motor.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Grease the moving parts.
Before reinstalling the wiper arm, turn the rear window wiper switch ON, then OFF to return the wiper shaft to
the park position.
Check the wiper motor operation.
Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement
NOTE:
1. Remove the these items:
Door panel
Speaker
3. Remove the plastic cover.
4. Carefully raise the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass out through the
window slot.
NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door.
5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (B).

6. Remove the bolts, and release the hooks, then remove the regulator through the hole in the door.
7. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown.
8. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Raise and lower the glass to see if it moves freely without binding.
Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed.
Adjust the position of the glass as necessary.
Do the power window control unit reset procedure.
Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles.
Make sure the power door locks, windows and power mirror operate properly.
Door Glass Adjustment
NOTE: Check the weatherstrips and glass run channel for damage or deterioration, and replace them if necessary. Front door
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Door panel:
-Front door
-Rear door
Plastic cover:
-Front door Rear door
-Rear door
3. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the glass mounting bolts (B), then loosen them.
4. Push the glass against the channel (C), then tighten the glass mounting bolts.
5. Check that the glass moves smoothly.
6. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Also check that the glass (A) contacts the glass run channel (B) evenly.
7. Attach the plastic cover making sure it is sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
8. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and on the sealing area as shown, and note these items:
Use a 12 mm (0.47 in.) diameter hose (A).
Adjust the rate of water flow as shown (B).
Do not use a nozzle.
Hold the hose about 300 mm (12 in.) away from the door (C).
9. Reinstall the door panel:
Front door
Rear door
Front Corner Glass Replacement
NOTE:
Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive.
Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
The front corner trim and the front corner glass clips will need replacement because they will be damage during
glass removal.
Front pillar corner trim
Front pillar trim:
2. Remove the front corner trim (A).
-1. From inside the vehicle, use a utility knife to cut through the adhesive (B) of the front corner trim.
-2. Pull out the upper edge of the front corner trim.
-3. Pull out the lower edge of the front corner trim, then remove it.
NOTE: Replace the front corner trim with a new one.
3. From inside the vehicle, use a utility knife (A) to cut through the front corner glass adhesive (B) all the way around.
Apply protective tape along the edge of the entire front corner glass opening flange.
4. From inside the vehicle, cut through the clips (A, B) of the front corner glass with a utility knife.
5. Carefully remove the front corner glass.
6. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface
around the entire front corner glass opening flange:
Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper bonding.
Remove the clips and the rubber dams from the body
7. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease and
water from getting on the surface.
8. If the old front corner glass is to be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive and clips from
the front corner glass. Clean the inside face of the front corner glass and the edge of the glass with isopropyl
alcohol where new adhesive is to be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil and grease.
9. Attach the front corner trim (A) with adhesive tape to the inside face of the front corner glass (B) as shown. Before
installing the front corner trim, apply primer to the inside face of the front corner glass:
Be careful not to touch the glass where adhesive will be applied.
The front corner trim must be replaced with a new one.
Be sure the bottom edge of the front corner trim lines up with the alignment mark (C).
Be sure the top edge of the front corner trim lines up with the top edge of the glass.
Front corner trim adhesive tape:
Thickness 0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
Width 5 mm (0.197 in.)
10. Attach the clip A (A), the clip B (B, C) with adhesive tape to the inside face of the front corner glass (D) as shown:
Be careful not to touch the glass where adhesive will be applied.
Be sure the clip B (B) lines up with the inner shape of the front corner trim (E).
Be sure the side portion (F) of the clip A lines up with the front corner trim.
Clip A adhesive tape:
Clip B adhesive tape:
11. Attach the rubber dam (A, B) with adhesive tape to the inside face of the front corner glass (C) as shown.
Before installing the rubber dam, apply primer to the inside face of the front corner glass.
NOTE: Be careful not to touch the front corner glass where adhesive will be applied.
Rubber dam adhesive tape:
12. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer to the inside face of the front corner glass (A) as shown, then
lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth:
With the printed dots (B) on the front corner glass as a guide, apply the glass primer to the corner portions
of the front corner glass.
Do not apply body primer to the front corner glass, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up.
Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the front corner
glass properly, causing a leak after the front corner glass is installed.
Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from the primed surface.
13. With a sponge, apply a light coat of body primer to any exposed paint or metal around the flange where new
adhesive will be applied. Let the body primer dry for at least 10 minutes:
Do not apply glass primer to the body, and be careful not to mix up glass and body primer sponges.
Do not apply body primer to any remaining original adhesive on the flange.
Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
Mask off the dashboard before painting the flange.
14. Cut a ‘‘V'' in the end of the nozzle (A) on the adhesive cartridge as shown.
15. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the front corner glass (B) and
along the rubber dam (C, D) and front corner trim (E) as shown:
With the printed dots (F) on the front corner glass as a guide, apply the adhesive to the corner portions of
the front corner glass.
Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each
corner.
16. Use suction cups (A) to hold the front corner glass (B) over the opening, align it with the clips (C, D), and set it
down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the front corner glass until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the
way around.
NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for about an hour until the adhesive is dry.
17. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted surface or
the front corner glass, use a soft shop towel dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
18. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the front corner glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas
and let the front corner glass dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after front corner
glass installation. If the vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly.
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3 days:
Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up.
Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of driveways at an angle or driving over rough,
uneven roads).
Quarter Glass Replacement
NOTE:
Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive with a piano wire.
1. Remove the quarter pillar trim.
2. Remove the rubber dam (A) from the front edge of the quarter glass (B). If necessary, cut the rubber dam with a
utility knife.
3. Apply protective tape to along the inside and outside edges of the body. Using an awl, make a hole through the
adhesive from inside the vehicle. Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of
wood.
4. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano wire as close
to the quarter glass (B) as possible to prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut through the adhesive (C)
around the entire quarter glass.
5. Carefully remove the quarter glass.
around the entire quarter glass opening flange: Cutting positions
Remove the clips and rubber dams from the body.
7. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease and
water from getting on the surface.
8. If the old quarter glass is to be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, clips and the
rubber dams from the quarter glass. Clean the inside face and the edge of the quarter glass with isopropyl alcohol
where new adhesive is to be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil and grease.
9. Set the quarter glass (A) in the opening, and center it. From inside the vehicle, make alignment mark (B) to the
quarter glass where the rear clip will be installed with a grease pencil. Be careful not to touch the glass where
adhesive will be applied.
10. Remove the quarter glass.
11. Attach the rubber dam A, rubber dam B, upper clip (C), lower clip (D), and rear clip (E) with adhesive tape to the
inside face of the quarter glass (F) as shown:
Align the center of the rear clip with the alignment mark (G) you made in step 9.
Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where adhesive will be applied.
Be sure the rubber dam B contacts the rubber dam A.
Rubber dam A adhesive tape:
Rubber dam B adhesive tape:
Upper clip adhesive tape:
Width 10 mm (0.3937 in.)
Lower clip adhesive tape:
Width 11 mm (0.433 in.)
Rear clip adhesive tape:
Width 7.5 mm (0.30 in.)
12. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer along the edge of the quarter glass (A) and rubber dams (B) as
shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth:
With the printed dots (C) on the quarter glass as a guide, apply the glass primer to the corner portions of the
quarter glass.
Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up.
Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the quarter glass
properly, causing a leak after the quarter glass is installed.
Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from the primed surfaces.
Be careful not to mix up the body and glass primer sponges.
15. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the quarter glass (B) and
along the rubber dams (C) as shown. With the printed dots on the quarter glass as a guide, apply the adhesive to
the corner portions of the quarter glass. Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make
a slightly thicker bead at each corner.
16. Use suction cups (A) to hold the quarter glass (B) over the opening, align it with the clips (C) and set it down on the
adhesive. Lightly push on the quarter glass until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around.
the quarter glass, use a soft shop towel dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
18. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the quarter glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas, let the
quarter glass dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after quarter glass installation. If
the vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly.
uneven roads).
Rear Window Replacement
NOTE:
Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive with a piano wire.
Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines and terminals.
High mount brake light
Rear window wiper arm
2. Remove the rubber dam (A, B) from the edge of the rear window. If necessary, cut the rubber dam with a utility
knife.
3. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors (A).
4. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, make alignment marks (A) across the glass and body with a grease
pencil.
5. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside edges of the tailgate. Using an awl, make a hole through the
adhesive from inside the vehicle at the corner portion of the rear window. Push the piano wire through the hole, and
wrap each end around a piece of wood.
6. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano wire as close
to the rear window (B) as possible to prevent damage to the tailgate, and carefully cut through the adhesive (C)
around the entire rear window.
7. Carefully remove the rear window.
around the entire rear window opening flange: Cutting positions
Remove the fasteners from the tailgate.
9. Clean the tailgate bonding surface with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease
and water from getting on the surface.
10. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the fasteners and
the rubber dams from the rear window. Clean the inside face and the edge of the rear window with isopropyl alcohol
where new adhesive is to be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil and grease.
11. Attach the rubber dam A, the rubber dam B, the rubber dam D (C), fasteners A (D), and fasteners B (E) with
adhesive tape to the inside face of the rear window (F) as shown. Before installing the rubber dam A, the rubber
dam B, apply primer to the inside face of the rear window.
Be sure the rubber dams and fasteners line up with alignment marks (G).
Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied.
Before installing the rubber dam D, apply primer to the area where its adhesive tape will be stuck in the
rubber dam A.
Cut both ends of the rubber dam B as shown.
Fasteners adhesive tape:
Width 7.5 mm (0.30 in.)
Rubber dam A adhesive tape:
Rubber dam B adhesive tape:
Rubber dam D adhesive tape:
12. Attach the fasteners (A, B) with adhesive tape to the tailgate as shown.
Fasteners adhesive tape:
Width 7.5 mm (0.30 in.)
13. Set the rear window (A) in the opening, and center it. Make alignment marks (B) across the rear window and body
with a grease pencil at the four points shown. Make sure the fasteners B (C) contact with the holes of the tailgate
corner. Be careful no to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied.
14. Remove the rear window.
15. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer around the edge of the rear window (A) and along the rubber dams
(B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth:
With the printed dots (C) on the rear window as a guide, apply the glass primer to both side portions of the
rear window.
Do not apply body primer to the rear window, and do not get tailgate and glass primer sponges mixed up.
Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear window
properly, causing a leak after the rear window is installed.
Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from the primed surfaces.
Be careful not to mix up the body and glass primer sponges.
18. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a caulking
gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the rear window (B) and along the rubber dams (C) as
shown:
With the printed dots (D) on the rear window as a guide, apply the adhesive to both side portions of the rear
window.
Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each
corner.
19. Use suction cups to hold the rear window over the opening, align it with the alignment marks you made in Step 14 ,
and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the rear window until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all
the way around.
the rear window, use a soft shop towel dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
21. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the rear window and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas, let the
rear window dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after rear window installation. If
the vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly.
uneven roads).
Power Windows System Description
Auto Reverse Operation
Power Windows Component Location Index
POWER WINDOW RELAY

Test,
POWER WINDOW MASTER

SWITCH
Input Test,
Test,
Replacement,
DRIVER'S POWER WINDOW MOTOR

Test,
Replacement,
FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER WINDOW SWITCH

Test,
Replacement,
RIGHT REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH

Test,
Replacement,
RIGHT REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR

Test,
LEFT REAR POWER WINDOW Replacement,
SWITCH
Test, FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER WINDOW MOTOR
Replacement, Test,
Replacement,
LEFT REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR

Test,
Replacement,

Power Windows Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX [ ]: LHD model

BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A) T-9
WHT
T1 No. 60 (IGN) (50 A) No. 1 (10 A)
IGNITION SWITCH
POWER
BAT W1 No. 22 (7.5 A) WINDOW
WHT YEL RELAY
IG1 (P/W)
No. 3 No. 17 No. 19 No. 18

(20 A) MICU (20 A) (20 A) (20 A)
IG1 VBU P/W
RLY
F5 N4 F6 F4 C31 F3 C2
GRY BRN BRN RED RED PUR PUR
3 4
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH [4] [3] 20 15 POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH
DRIVER'S
FRONT
PASSENGER'S LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR
UP DOWN
LIGHT (AUTO) (AUTO) OFF OFF OFF
(LED)
UP DOWN UP DOWN UP DOWN
UP DOWN VMP DR
CONTROL UNIT
UP DOWN SVCC PLSA PLSB SGND IG1
MAIN SWITCH
1 2 16 5 6 7 12 10 9 22 21 13 14 11
[10] [9] [1] [2]
ORN BLU WHT GRN PNK LT GRN BLK BRN WHT YEL PUR GRN RED LT GRN RED PUR BLK
4 1 5 6 3 2 1 3 4 1 3 4 1 3 4
FRONT
UP DOWN UP DOWN LEFT REAR UP DOWN RIGHT REAR
PULSER PASSENGER'S POWER POWER
POWER
WINDOW WINDOW
WINDOW OFF OFF OFF OFF SWITCH OFF OFF SWITCH
SWITCH
DRIVER'S POWER WINDOW MOTOR

2 5 2 5 2 5
BLU RED GRY ORN PNK BLU
2 1 2 1 2 1
FRONT
PASSENGER'S LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR
POWER POWER POWER
WINDOW WINDOW WINDOW
MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR
G501 G501
Power Window Driver's Motor Test
2. Disconnect the 6P (A) connector from the driver's power window motor.
Motor Test
3. Test the motor in each direction by connecting battery power and ground according to the table. When the motor
stops running, disconnect one lead immediately.
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it.
Pulser Test
5. Reconnect the 6P connector to the driver's power window motor.
7. Measure the voltage between the terminals.
There should be battery voltage between the No. 5 (+) and No. 2 (−) terminals.
Connect an analog voltmeter between the No. 6 (+) and No. 2 (−) terminals, and run the window motor down
or up. The voltmeter needle should move back and forth alternately (a digital voltmeter reads about 2.5 V).
Connect an analog voltmeter between the No. 3 (+) and No. 2 (−) terminals, and run the window motor down
or up. The voltmeter needle should move back and forth alternately (a digital voltmeter reads about 2.5 V).
8. If the voltage is not as specified, do the power window master switch input test for terminals No. 5, 6, 7, and 16.
9. If the switch is OK, replace the power window motor.
10. Reset the power window control unit.
Power Window Passenger's Motor Test
1. Remove the door panel: Front passenger's
Front passenger's
Rear
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the power window motor.
Rear
3. Test the motor by connecting battery power and ground according to the table. When the motor stops running,
disconnect one lead immediately.
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it.
Power Window Master Switch Input Test
NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch.
1. Remove the grip cover.
2. Disconnect the 22P connector (A) from the power window master switch.
system.
NOTE: Before testing, make sure the No. 1 (10 A), No. 22 (7.5 A), and No. 60 (50 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay.
CavityWire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired
3 [4] GRY Under all conditions Measure the voltage Blown No. 3 (20 A)
fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
4 [3] BRN Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage Blown No. 17 (20 A)
(II) to ground: There fuse in the under-
fuse/relay box
Faulty power
window relay (P/W)
Faulty MICU
An open in the wire
15 PUR Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage Blown No. 18 (20 A)
fuse/relay box
Faulty power
window relay (P/W)
Faulty MICU
An open in the wire
20 RED Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage Blown No. 19 (20 A)
fuse/relay box
Faulty power
window relay (P/W)
Faulty MICU
An open in the wire
11 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity Poor ground (G501)
to ground: There An open in the wire
12 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity Poor ground (G501)
to ground: There An open in the wire
9 [2] YEL Ignition switch ON Connect the No. 4 Blown No. 17 (20 A)
(II) [No. 3] and the No. 9 fuse in the under-
[No. 2] terminals, dash fuse/relay box
and No. 10 [No. 1] Faulty under-dash
and No. 11 terminals fuse/relay box
momentarily with Faulty front
jumper wires: The passenger's power
front passenger's window motor
window should go Faulty front
down. passenger's power
window switch
10 WHT Ignition switch ON Connect the No. 4 Poor ground (G501)
[1] (II) [No. 3] and the No. An open in the wire
10 [No. 1] terminals,
and No. 9 [No. 2]
and No. 11 terminals
momentarily with
jumper wires: The
front passenger's
window should go
up.
13 LT Ignition switch ON Connect the No. 15 Blown No. 18 (20 A)
GRN (II) and the No. 13 fuse in the under-
terminals, and No. dash fuse/relay box
14 and No. 11 Faulty under-dash
terminals fuse/relay box
momentarily with Faulty right rear
jumper wires: The power window motor
right rear window Faulty right rear
should go up. power window
14 RED Ignition switch ON Connect the No. 15 switch
(II) and the No. 14 Poor ground (G501)
terminals, and No. An open in the wire
13 and No. 11
terminals
momentarily with
jumper wires: The
right rear window
should go down.
[ ]: LHD model

21 GRN Ignition switch ON Connect the No. 20 Blown No. 19 (20 A)
(II) and the No. 21 fuse in the under-
terminals, and No. dash fuse/relay box
22 and No. 11 Faulty under-dash
terminals fuse/relay box
momentarily with Faulty left rear
jumper wires: The power window motor
left rear window Faulty left rear
should go down. power window
22 PUR Ignition switch ON Connect the No. 20 switch
(II) and the No. 22 Poor ground (G501)
terminals, and No. An open in the wire
21 and No. 11
terminals
momentarily with
jumper wires: The
left rear window
should go up.
1 ORN Connect the No. 3 Check driver's power Blown No. 3 (20 A)
[10] [No. 4] and the No. 1 window motor fuse in the under-
[No. 10] terminals, operation: The dash fuse/relay box
and No. 2 [No. 9] driver's window Faulty under-dash
and No. 12 terminals should go up. fuse/relay box
momentarily with Faulty driver's power
jumper wires window motor
2 [9] BLU Connect the No. 3 Check driver's power Poor ground (G501)
[No. 4] and the No. 2 window motor An open in the wire
[No. 9] terminals, operation: The
and No. 1 [No. 10] driver's window
and No. 12 terminals should go down.
momentarily with
jumper wires
5. Reconnect the 22P connector to the power window master switch. Turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), and make these input tests at the connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window
master switch.
7 LT Ignition switch ON Check for continuity Poor ground (G501)
GRN (II) to ground: There Faulty power
should be continuity. window master
switch
An open in the wire
16 WHT Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage Faulty power
(II) to ground: There window master
should be battery switch
voltage. A short to ground in
the wire
5 GRN Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage Faulty power
(II), and driver's between the No. 5 window master
window switch and No. 7 terminals: switch
moving up or down There should be 0 Faulty driver's power
V−about 5 V−0 V− window motor
about 5 V repeatedly An open in the wire
(a digital voltmeter A short to ground in
should reads about the wire
2.5 V while the
window moves).
6 PNK Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage
(II), and driver's between the No. 6
power window switch and No. 7 terminals:
moving up or down There should be 0
V−about 5 V−0 V−
about 5 V repeatedly
(a digital voltmeter
should reads about
2.5 V while the
window moves).
[ ]: LHD model
Power Window Master Switch Test
1. Remove the grip cover.
2. Disconnect the 22P connector (A) from the power window master switch.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Front Passenger's
Driver's Switch Switch
The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the
master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Replace the switch.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
Right Rear Switch
Left Rear Switch

Power Window Master Switch Replacement
2. Remove the screws and the grip base (A).
3. Open the switch panel (A) from the grip base.

4. Remove the screws and replace the power window master switch (B).
Resetting the Power Window Control Unit (Master Switch)
Driver's Window Resetting and Learning
Resetting and learning the driver's window is required when any of the following have occurred:
Power window master switch replacement
Power window regulator replacement or repair
Power window motor replacement or repair
Window run channel replacement or repair
Driver's door glass replacement or repair
Power is removed from the power window control unit while the power window key-off operation timer is ON.
2. Press and hold the driver's window DOWN switch.
4. Release the driver's window DOWN switch.
5. Repeat Step 1 −4 three more times.
6. Check if the AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN functions still work.
If they still work, AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN functions have not been cleared; go back to Step 1 .
If they do not, go to Step 7 .
8. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch.
9. Pull up and hold the driver's window UP switch until the window reaches the fully closed position, then continue to
hold the switch for 1 second.
10. Make sure that the power window control unit is reset and learned by using the driver's window AUTO UP and
AUTO DOWN functions.
Power Window Passenger's Switch Test
1. Remove the grip cover: Front passenger's
Front passenger's
Rear
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the passenger's window switch.
Rear
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace switch.
Power Window Passenger's Switch Replacement
NOTE: The illustration shows front passenger's power window switch.
1. Remove the door panel:
Front passenger's
Rear
2. Remove the screws and the grip base (A).
3. Open the switch panel (A) from the grip base.

4. Remove the screws and replace the passenger's power window switch (B).
How to Troubleshoot the ABS
System Indicator
This system has two indicators:
ABS indicator (A)
Brake system indicator (B)
When the system is OK, each indicator comes on for about 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch to ON (II), then
goes off.
When the system detects a problem, a DTC will be set and, depending upon the failure, the ABS modulator-control unit
will determine which indicator(s) will be turned on. If the problem goes away (system returns to normal), the indicator(s)
will be controlled in the following way depending upon the DTC that was set:
The indicator(s) will come on and stay on when the ignition switch is ON (II).
The indicator(s) will automatically go off.
The indicator(s) will go off after the vehicle is driven.
ABS Indicator
The ABS indicator comes on when the ABS function is lost. The brakes still work like a conventional system.
Brake System Indicator

The brake system indicator comes on when the EBD function is lost, the parking brake is applied, and/or the brake fluid
level is low.
NOTE: If two or more wheel speed sensors fail, the brake system indicator will come on.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

The memory can hold all DTCs. However, when the same DTC is detected more than once, the more recent DTC is
written over the earlier one. Therefore, when the same problem is detected repeatedly, it is memorized as a single
DTC.
The DTCs are indicated in the order they occur.
The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM. Therefore, the memorized DTCs cannot be erased by disconnecting the
battery. Do the specified procedures to clear the DTCs.
Self-diagnosis
Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories:
-Initial diagnosis: Done right after the ignition switch is turned to ON (II) and until the ABS indicator goes off.
-Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
When the system detects a problem, the ABS modulator-control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
Kickback
The pump motor operates when the ABS modulator-control unit is functioning, and the fluid in the reservoir is forced out to
the master cylinder, causing kickback at the brake pedal.
Pump Motor
The pump motor operates when the ABS modulator-control unit is functioning.
The ABS modulator-control unit checks the pump motor operation one time after completing initial diagnosis during
regular diagnosis when the vehicle is driven over 15 km/h (10 mph).
Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding

Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures are identical to the procedures used on vehicles without the ABS.
How to Troubleshoot DTCs

The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause of the problem is still present and the ABS indicator is still on.
Following a troubleshooting procedure for a code that has been cleared but does not reset can result in incorrect
diagnosis.
1. Question the customer about the conditions when the problem occurred, and try to reproduce the same conditions
for troubleshooting. Find out when the ABS indicator came on, such as during activation, after activation, when the
vehicle was traveling at a certain speed, etc. If necessary, have the customer demonstrate the concern.
2. When the ABS indicator does not come on during the test-drive, but troubleshooting is done based on the DTC,
check for loose connectors, poor contact of the terminals, etc. before you start troubleshooting.
3. After troubleshooting, or the repairs are done, clear the DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same conditions
that originally set the DTCs. Make sure the ABS indicator does not come on.
4. Check for DTCs from other systems which connected via F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are related to F-CAN, the
most likely cause was that the ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with the ABS modulator-control unit connector
disconnected. Clear the DTCs. Check for fuel and emissions, and ABS codes, first. Be sure to troubleshoot those
first.
Intermittent Failures
The term ‘‘intermittent failure'' means a system may have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the indicator(s) of the
system does not come on, check for loose connectors or poor contacts in the terminals related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting.
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System)

1. If the system indicators stay on, connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ABS modulator-control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot
the DLC circuit.
4. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it. Then refer to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting, and do the
appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:
The HDS communication will be stopped when the vehicle speed is at 50 km/h (31 mph) or more.
The HDS can read the DTC, the current data, and other system data.
For specific operations, refer to the Help menu that came with the HDS.
How to Retrieve DTCs

1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) under the driver's side of
the dashboard.
the DLC circuit.
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC, refer to the DTC
troubleshooting.
How to Clear DTCs

the dashboard.
the DLC circuit.
4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts on the HDS.
ABS DTC Troubleshooting: 11-13, 13-13, 15-13, 17-13
DTC 11-13:
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction
DTC 13-13:
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction
DTC 15-13:
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction
DTC 17-13:
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Is DTC 11-13, 13-13, 15-13, and/or 17-13 indicated?
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel speed
sensor 2P connector and the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
troubleshooting. ■
7. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor 2P connector.
8. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector wheel speed sensor +B
and GND terminals (see table).
DTC ABS Modulator-control Unit 25P Connector Terminal
11-13 No. 2 No. 18
13-13 No. 12 No. 3
15-13 No. 6 No. 15
17-13 No. 14 No. 5
YES - Repair short in the wires between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the ABS modulator-control
unit.■
NO - Go to Step 9 .
9. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal and the wheel
speed sensor 2P connector terminal.
DTC ABS Modulator-control Unit 25P Appropriate Wheel Speed Sensor
Connector
11-13 No. 2 Right-front
13-13 No. 12 Left-front
15-13 No. 6 Right-rear
17-13 No. 14 Left-rear
NO - Repair open in the wire between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the ABS modulator-control
unit.■
10. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal and the wheel
DTC ABS Modulator-control Unit 25P Appropriate Wheel Speed Sensor
Connector
NO - Repair open in the wire between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the ABS modulator-control
unit.■
11. Check for continuity between body ground and the appropriate ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal
(see table).
11-13 No. 2 No. 18
13-13 No. 12 No. 3
15-13 No. 6 No. 15
17-13 No. 14 No. 5
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the ABS
13. Measure the voltage between body ground and the appropriate ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal
(see table).
11-13 No. 2 No. 18
13-13 No. 12 No. 3
15-13 No. 6 No. 15
17-13 No. 14 No. 5

YES - Repair short to power in the wire between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the ABS modulator-
control unit.■
15. Substitute the appropriate sensor with oppsite wheel speed sensor, or with a known-good wheel speed sensor.
Is DTC indicated that is indicated in Step 4 ?
YES - Check for loose terminals in the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector. If necessary, substitute a
known-good ABS modulator-control unit, and retest.■
NO - Replace the original wheel speed sensor. ■
DTC 12-11:
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise or Intermittent Interruption
DTC 14-11:
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise or Intermittent Interruption
DTC 16-11:
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise or Intermittent Interruption
DTC 18-11:
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise or Intermittent Interruption
NOTE: These DTCs may be caused by electrical interference. Check for aftermarket devices installed in the vehicle when
these DTCs are indicated.
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on a straight section of road, not on a lift.
YES - If the DTC 12-12, 14-12, 16-12, or 18-12 is indicated at the same time, do the DTC 12-12, 14-12, 16-12, or
18-12 troubleshooting. If DTC 12-12, 14-12, 16-12, or 18-12 is not indicated, go to Step 5 .
NO - If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. If DTCs are not indicated,
intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel speed
troubleshooting.
6. Check that the appropriate wheel speed sensor is properly mounted.
DTC Appropriate Wheel Speed Sensor
12-11 Right-front
14-11 Left-front
16-11 Right-rear
18-11 Left-rear
Is the wheel speed sensor installation OK?

NO - Reinstall the wheel speed sensor, and check the mounting position. ■
DTC 12-12:
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the Other Sensor Circuit
DTC 14-12:
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the Other Sensor Circuit
DTC 16-12:
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the Other Sensor Circuit
DTC 18-12:
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the Other Sensor Circuit
3. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 20 km/h (13 mph) or more, and go a distance of 100 m (328 ft) or more.
7. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector wheel speed sensor GND
terminals (see table).
DTC ABS Modulator-control Unit 25PConnector Terminal
AppropriateTerminal Other Terminals
12-12 No. 18 No. 3 No. 15 No. 5
14-12 No. 3 No. 18 No. 15 No. 5
16-12 No. 15 No. 18 No. 3 No. 5
18-12 No. 5 No. 18 No. 3 No. 15
YES - Repair short in the wires between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the ABS modulator-control
unit.■
NO - Check for loose terminals in the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector. If necessary, substitute a
DTC 12-21:
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
DTC 14-21:
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
DTC 16-21:
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
DTC 18-21:
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
1. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 10 km/h (7 mph) or more.
2. Check the RF, LF, RR, LR WHEEL SPD in the ABS DATA LIST with the HDS.
Are all four values the same?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel speed
NO - Go to Step 3 .
12-21 Right-front
14-21 Left-front
16-21 Right-rear
18-21 Left-rear

YES - Replace the appropriate wheel speed sensor. ■
DTC 12-22:
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (30 km/h (19 mph) or More)
DTC 14-22:
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (30 km/h (19 mph) or More)
DTC 16-22:
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (30 km/h (19 mph) or More)
DTC 18-22:
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (30 km/h (19 mph) or More)
1. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle between 30 km/h (19 mph) and 50 km/h (31 mph) for 70 seconds or more.
NO - Go to Step 3 .
12-22 Right-front
14-22 Left-front
16-22 Right-rear
18-22 Left-rear

DTC 12-23:
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (0 to 15 km/h (0 to 9 mph))
DTC 14-23:
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (0 to 15 km/h (0 to 9 mph))
DTC 16-23:
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (0 to 15 km/h (0 to 9 mph))
DTC 18-23:
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (0 to 15 km/h (0 to 9 mph))
1. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle between 1 km/h (1 mph) and 15 km/h (9 mph).
NO - Go to Step 3 .
12-23 Right-front
14-23 Left-front
16-23 Right-rear
18-23 Left-rear

DTC 21-11:
Right-front Magnetic Encoder Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
DTC 22-11:
Left-front Magnetic Encoder Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
DTC 23-11:
Right-rear Magnetic Encoder Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
DTC 24-11:
Left-rear Magnetic Encoder Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
6. Inspect the appropriate magnetic encoder for dirt or debris.
DTC AppropriateMagneticEncoder Note
21-11 Right-front Remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the
22-11 Left-front appropriate wheel hub.
23-11 Right-rear Remove the hub bearing unit.
24-11 Left-rear
Is the magnetic encoder surface OK?

YES - Replace the wheel bearing (front) or the hub bearing unit (rear):■
Front: Replace the front wheel bearing.
Rear: Replace the hub bearing unit.
NO - Clean off dust or dirt from the appropriate magnetic encoder surface on the wheel bearing or the hub
bearing unit, then go to Step 1 and recheck. If the DTC is still present, replace the appropriate wheel
bearing or hub bearing unit.
ABS DTC Troubleshooting: 31-xx, 32-xx, 33-xx, 34-xx, 35-xx, 36-xx, 37-xx, 38-xx
DTC 31-xx * :
ABS Right-front Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 32-xx * :
ABS Right-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 33-xx * :
ABS Left-front Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 34-xx * :
ABS Left-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 35-xx * :
ABS Right-rear Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 36-xx * :
ABS Right-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 37-xx * :
ABS Left-rear Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 38-xx * :
ABS Left-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
*: Any two-character subcode (see table).
Subcode Malfunction Note (DTC)
01 Solenoid Initial Pulse 31-01, 32-01, 33-01, 34-01, 35-01, 36-01, 37-01, 38-01
21 Solenoid Pulse 31-21, 32-21, 33-21, 34-21, 35-21, 36-21, 37-21, 38-21
22 Solenoid Speculative 31-22, 32-22, 33-22, 34-22, 35-22, 36-22, 37-22, 38-22
23 Solenoid Stuck ON 31-23, 32-23, 33-23, 34-23, 35-23, 36-23, 37-23, 38-23

Is DTC 31-xx, 32-xx, 33-xx, 34-xx, 35-xx, 36-xx, 37-xx, or 38-xx indicated?
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■
DTC 41-21:
Right-front Wheel Lock
DTC 42-21:
Left-front Wheel Lock
DTC 43-21:
Right-rear Wheel Lock
DTC 44-21:
Left-rear Wheel Lock
The DTCs may be indicated under these conditions:
The vehicle goes into a spin.
The ABS continues to operate for a long time.
Snow, dirt, or debris build-up on the wheel speed sensor or magnetic encoder.
Misadjusted brake switch.
Contaminated brake fluid.
2. Turn the appropriate wheel by hand.
DTC Appropriate Wheel
41-21 Right-front
42-21 Left-front
43-21 Right-rear
44-21 Left-rear
Is there brake drag?

YES - Repair the brake drag.■
NO - Go to Step 3 .
7. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 10 km/h (7 mph) for 20 seconds or more.
Is DTC 41-21, 42-21, 43-21, or 44-21 indicated?
YES - Check for loose terminals between the wheel speed sensor 2P connector and the ABS modulator-control
unit 25P connector. If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS modulator-control unit, and retest.■
intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■
ABS DTC Troubleshooting: 51-11, 51-13
DTC 51-11:
Motor Lock
DTC 51-13:
Motor Drive Circuit Malfunction
4. Wait 5 seconds.
5. Operate any one of the four solenoids, as listed, in the ABS FUNCTION TEST five times with the HDS.
-LFT FT SOLENOID
-RT FT SOLENOID
-LFT REAR SOLENOID
-RT REAR SOLENOID

Is DTC 51-11 or 51-13 indicated?
ABS DTC Troubleshooting: 51-12
DTC 51-12:
Is DTC 51-12 indicated?
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals at the ABS modulator-control
unit 25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting. ■
Is the fuse blown?
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the No. 58 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box
NO - Install a new No. 58 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to Step 9 .
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 58 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the ABS
DTC 52-12:
Motor Stuck OFF
4. Operate any one of the four solenoids, as listed, in the ABS FUNCTION TEST five times with the HDS.
-LFT FT SOLENOID
-RT FT SOLENOID
-LFT REAR SOLENOID
-RT REAR SOLENOID

DTC 53-01:
Motor Relay Stuck ON 1
DTC 53-12:
NO - RHD model: Repair open in the wire between the ABS modulator-control unit and body ground
(G203).■
LHD model: Repair open in the wire between the ABS modulator-control unit and body ground
(G402).■
DTC 54-03:
Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck ON
DTC 54-04:
Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck OFF (Initial)
DTC 54-21:
Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck OFF (Main)
Is the fuse blown?
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the No. 37 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box
NO - Install a new No. 37 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to Step 9 .
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 37 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the ABS
DTC 61-01:
ABS Modulator-control Unit Initial IG Low Voltage
DTC 61-21:
ABS Modulator-control Unit Power Source Low Voltage 1
DTC 61-22:
DTC 61-23:
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then start the engine.
5. Check and note BATTERY voltage in the ABS DATA LIST with the HDS.
6. Using a voltmeter, measure and note the voltage between the battery terminals.
NOTE: If the voltage is below 9.5 V, check the battery, and troubleshoot the alternator regulator circuit.
7. Compare the voltage noted in Step 5 to the voltage in Step 6 .
Is the difference between the two voltage readings less then 3 V?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals at the ABS modulator-control
unit 25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting. If the code resets after clearing, replace
the ABS modulator-control unit. ■
NO - Check for loose terminals in the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector. If necessary, substitute a
DTC 62-21:
ABS Modulator-control Unit IG High Voltage
5. Check and note BATTERY voltage in the ABS DATA LIST with the HDS.
NOTE: If the voltage is beyond 15.1 V, troubleshoot the alternator regulator circuit.
Is the difference between the two voltage readings less than 3 V?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals at the ABS modulator-control
unit 25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting. If the code resets after clearing, replace
the ABS modulator-control unit. ■
NO - Replace the ABS modulator-control unit, and retest.■
ABS DTC Troubleshooting: 71-21, 71-22, 71-23, 71-24, 71-25, 71-26
DTC 71-21:
Right-front or Left-rear Different Diameter Tyre Malfunction
DTC 71-22:
Left-front or Right-rear Different Diameter Tyre Malfunction
DTC 71-23:
Right-front and Right-rear Different Diameter Tyre Malfunction
DTC 71-24:
Left-front and Left-rear Different Diameter Tyre Malfunction
DTC 71-25:
Right-front and Left-front Different Diameter Tyre Malfunction
DTC 71-26:
Right-rear and Left-rear Different Diameter Tyre Malfunction
NOTE: The DTC will be indicated when the vehicle has a different diameter tyre(s) compared to the other tyre(s).
DTC Sectional Note
71-21 Right-front or left-rear
71-22 Left-front or right-rear
71-23 Right-front and right-rear
71-24 Left-front and left-rear
71-25 Right-front and left-front
71-26 Right-rear and left-rear
1. Check the tyres for proper inflation.

Is DTC 71-21, 71-22, 71-23, 71-24, 71-25, or 71-26 indicated?
YES - Replace tyres as needed until all their diameters much.■
ABS DTC Troubleshooting: 81-11, 81-51, 81-52
DTC 81-11:
Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit Malfunction
DTC 81-51:
DTC 81-52:
Is DTC 81-11, 81-51, or 81-52 indicated?
ABS DTC Troubleshooting: 81-xx
DTC 81-xx * :
*: Any two-character subcode (Except these combinations: DTC 81-11, 81-51, and 81-52).
Is DTC 81-xx indicated?
YES - If the DTC 81-11, 81-51, or 81-52 is indicated at the same time, do the DTC 81-11, 81-51, or 81-52
troubleshooting. If DTC 81-11, 81-51, or 81-52 is not indicated, replace the ABS modulator-control unit,
and retest.■
DTC 86-01:
F-CAN Bus-off Malfunction
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals between ECM/PCM
connector A (49P) and the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
6. Short the SCS line with the HDS.
9. Check for continuity between the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal and ECM/PCM connector A
(49P) terminal (see table).
Sign ABS Modulator-control Unit 25P ECM/PCM Connector A (49P)
Connector Terminal Terminal
CAN-L No. 17 No. 4
CAN-H No. 1 No. 3
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM and the ABS modulator-control unit.■
DTC 86-24:
F-CAN Communication with Engine Malfunction
DTC 86-25:
Is DTC 86-24 and/or 86-25 indicated?
connector A (49P) and the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
9. Check for continuity between the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal and ECM/PCM connector A
Sign ABS Modulator-control Unit 25P ECM/PCM Connector A (49P)
CAN-L 17 4
CAN-H 1 3
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM and the ABS modulator-control unit.■
11. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM.
Is DTC 86-24 and/or 86-25 indicated?
NO - If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace the
ABS DTC Troubleshooting: 86-FF
DTC 86-FF:
F-CAN Communication with ABS Malfunction
Is DTC 86-FF indicated?
How to Troubleshoot the EPS
EPS Indicator
Under normal conditions, the EPS indicator (A) comes on when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II) position, then goes
off after the engine is started. This indicates that the LED and its circuit are operating correctly.
If there is a failure in the system after the engine is started, the EPS indicator will stay on, and the power assist is turned
off or restricted.
When the EPS indicator comes on, the control unit memorizes the DTC. In this case, the control unit will not activate the
EPS system after the engine starts again, but it keeps the EPS indicator on.
When DTC 51-01, 51-02, 51-03 or 51-05 is stored in the control unit, the EPS indicator will stay on until the DTC is
erased. When a problem is detected and the EPS indicator comes on, there are cases when the indicator stays on until
the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), and cases when the indicator goes off automatically when the system returns to
normal. Even though the system is operating normally, the EPS indicator will come on under the following conditions:
The vehicle speed is above 15 km/h (10 mph) for more than 3 seconds. When the vehicle speed decreases abruptly
(by applying the brakes) from above 20 km/h (12 mph) to less than 1 km/h (1 mph), and stay for 5 seconds, and
after abrupt deceleration, when the engine speed is above 1,840 rpm (min −1 ) (after the engine starts within 5
minutes: 4,000 rpm (min −1 )) for 5 seconds (continuously).
When the steering wheel is turned, and the engine speed is above 1,840 rpm (min −1 ) (after the engine starts within
5 minutes: 4,000 rpm (min −1 )) for 20 seconds, then the engine speed is above 2,500 rpm (min −1 ) for 10 seconds
continuously.
To determine the actual cause of the problem, question the customer about the conditions during which the problem
occurred, taking the above conditions into consideration.

If the CPU cannot be activated, or it fails, the EPS indicator comes on, but the DTC is not memorized.
The memory can hold any number of DTCs. However, when the same DTC is detected more than once, the most
recent DTC is written over the prior DTC, therefore only one occurrence is memorized.
The lowest DTC is indicated first. The DTCs are indicated in ascending order, not in the order that they occurred.
The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-volatile memory) therefore the memorized DTCs cannot be erased
by disconnecting the battery. Perform the specified procedures to clear DTCs.
Self-diagnosis
Initial diagnosis: Done right after the engine starts and until the EPS indicator goes off.
Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
The EPS control unit performs the following functions when a problem is detected by self-diagnosis:
1. Turns on the EPS indicator.
2. Memorizes the DTC.
3. Stops or restricts the power assist and manual steering operation resumes.
NOTE: For DTCs 11-01, 11-02, 12-01, 21-01, 21-02, 22-01, 35-04, 36-02, 37-01, and 37-02 the EPS indicator will go
off automatically, and the system returns to normal.
Restriction on Power Assist Operation

Repeated extreme steering force, such as turning the steering wheel continuously back-and-forth with the vehicle stopped,
causes an increase of power consumption in the EPS motor. The increase of electric current causes the EPS motor to
heat up. Because this heat adversely affects the system, the control unit monitors the electric current of the EPS motor.
When the control unit detects heat build-up in the EPS motor, it reduces the electric current to the EPS motor gradually
to protect the system, and it restricts the power assist operation. The EPS indicator does not come on during this
function.
When steering torque is not applied to the steering wheel, or when the ignition is turned off and the EPS motor cools, the
control unit will restore the power assist gradually until it's fully restored (after about 20 minutes).
Torque Sensor Neutral Position

The EPS control unit stores the torque sensor neutral position in the EEPROM. The torque sensor neutral position must
be memorized whenever the steering gearbox, or the EPS control unit is replaced.
NOTE: The torque sensor neutral position is not affected when erasing the DTCs.

The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause of the problem is still present and the EPS indicator is still on.
Following the procedure when the EPS indicator does not come on can result in an incorrect diagnosis.
for troubleshooting. Find out when the EPS indicator came on, such as while turning, after turning, when the vehicle
was at a certain speed, etc.
2. When the EPS indicator does not come on during the test-drive, but troubleshooting is done based on the DTC,
check for loose connectors, poor terminal contact, etc., in the affected circuit before you start troubleshooting.
3. After troubleshooting, clear the DTC and test-drive the vehicle. Be sure the EPS indicator does not come on.
circuit.
NOTE:

the dashboard.
circuit.
troubleshooting.
How to Clear DTCs

the dashboard.
circuit.
EPS DTC Troubleshooting: 11-01, 11-02
DTC 11-01:
Low/High IG1-terminal Voltage (Initial Diagnosis)
DTC 11-02:
Low/High IG1-terminal Voltage (Regular Diagnosis)
5. Wait at least 60 seconds.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals.■
8. Check and note BATTERY voltage in the EPS DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is the battery OK?
NO - Check the battery, and troubleshoot the alternator regulator circuit. ■
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Reinstall the No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse, then go to Step 18 .
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the EPS control unit and No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.■
NO - Install a new No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to Step 12 .
YES - Replace the EPS control unit. ■
NO - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the EPS
control unit.■
EPS DTC Troubleshooting: 12-01
DTC 12-01:
Low/High VBU Voltage (Regular Diagnosis)
7. Check and note BATTERY voltage in the EPS DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is the battery OK?
NO - Check the battery, and troubleshoot the alternator regulator circuit. ■
8. Check the No. 2 (60 A) fuse in the battery terminal fuse box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Reinstall the No. 2 (60 A) fuse, then go to Step 17 .
NO - Go to Step 9 .
10. Check for continuity between EPS control unit connector A (2P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the EPS control unit and No. 2 (60 A) fuse in the battery
terminal fuse box.■
NO - Install a new No. 2 (60 A) fuse in the battery terminal fuse box, then go to Step 11 .
NO - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■
19. Measure the voltage between EPS control unit connector A (2P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 2 (60 A) fuse in the battery terminal fuse box and the EPS
control unit.■
DTC 21-01:
Excessive Change of the Vehicle Speed Signal (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 21-02:
Comparison Between the Vehicle Speed and the Engine Speed Signal (Regular Diagnosis)
NOTE:
If the MIL stays on, or the D indicator blinks at the same time as DTC 21-01 or DTC 21-02 is indicated,
troubleshoot the PGM-FI system or A/T model: automatic transmission system, then recheck for DTC 21-01 or
DTC 21-02.
Even though the system is operating normally, the EPS indicator will come on caused by the detecting condition of
DTC 21-01 or DTC 21-02.
The ABS indicator may come on during this troubleshoot. If so, clear the DTC related to the ABS.
2. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations, and allow all four wheels to rotate freely.
4. Start the engine, then run the vehicle in the 4th gear (M/T), or D position (A/T).
5. Check the VEHICLE SPEED in the EPS DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 0 km/h (0 mph) indicated?
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
ECM/PCM and the EPS control unit.■
7. Start the engine and check the tachometer.
Is the tachometer working correctly?
NO - Troubleshoot the gauge control module. ■
10. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connector A (49P) and EPS control unit connector C (16P).
11. Check for continuity between EPS control unit connector C (16P) terminal and ECM/PCM connector A (49P)
terminal individually.
Sign EPS Control Unit Connector C (16P) ECM/PCM Connector A (49P)
Terminal Terminal
CAN-L 9 4
CAN-H 10 3
YES - Check for loose terminals in the EPS control unit connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor
NO - Repair open in the wire between the EPS control unit and the ECM/PCM.■
DTC 22-01:
Engine Speed Signal (Regular Diagnosis)
4. Check the ENGINE SPEED in the EPS DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there 440 rpm (min −1 ) or less at idle?

Is there any voltage?
11. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
YES - Repair short to power in the wire between the EPS control unit and ECM/PCM.■
NO - Check for loose terminal in the EPS control unit connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the EPS control unit and the ECM/PCM.■
18. Check for continuity between EPS control unit connector C (16P) terminal No. 7 and ECM/PCM connector A (49P)
terminal No. 29.
go to Step 1 and recheck. If the ECM/PCM was updated and DTCs are not indicated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted and DTCs are not indicated, replace the original ECM/PCM.
■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the EPS control unit and the ECM/PCM.■
DTC 31-01:
No Writing the Torque Sensor Neutral Position (Regular Diagnosis)
4. Do the memorizing of the torque sensor neutral position.
EPS DTC Troubleshooting: 32-01, 32-02, 32-03, 32-04, 32-05, 32-06, 34-01, 35-01, 35-02, 35-03, 35-04, 36-01, 36-02, 37-
01, 37-02
DTC 32-01:
EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Current Sensor) (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 32-02:
EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit Offset (Current Sensor) (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 32-03:
Lower Current Sensor Stuck ON (Initial Diagnosis)
DTC 32-04:
Lower Current Sensor Stuck ON (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 32-05:
Motor Power Supply Voltage (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 32-06:
EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Sub-CPU) (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 34-01:
Power Relay Stuck ON (IG Switch is in LOCK (0))
DTC 35-01:
EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (CPU) (Initial Diagnosis/Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 35-02:
EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (EEPROM) (Initial Diagnosis)
DTC 35-03:
EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (CPU Communication) (Initial Diagnosis)
DTC 35-04:
EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (CPU Communication) (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 36-01:
EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Direction Distinction) (Initial Diagnosis)
DTC 36-02:
EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (INH Output Circuit) (Initial Diagnosis)
DTC 37-01:
EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Step-Up Circuit) (Initial Diagnosis)
DTC 37-02:
EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Step-Up Circuit) (Regular Diagnosis)
3. Turn the ignition switch LOCK (0).
5. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several times, and hold the steering wheel for 10 seconds or more.
Is DTC 32-01, 32-02, 32-03, 32-04, 32-05, 32-06, 34-01, 35-01, 35-02, 35-03, 35-04, 36-01, 36-02, 37-01, or 37-02
indicated?
DTC 33-01:
Lower FET Stuck ON (Initial Diagnosis)
8. Disconnect the EPS control unit connector B (2P).
9. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS control unit connector B (2P) No. 1 terminal, and No. 2
terminal.
10. Disconnect the EPS motor 2P connector.
11. On the EPS motor side, check for continuity between body ground and EPS motor 2P connector No. 1 terminal,
and No. 2 terminal.
YES - Replace the EPS motor. ■
NO - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the EPS control unit and EPS motor.■
DTC 33-02:
Upper FET Stuck ON (Initial Diagnosis)
DTC 33-07:
Fail-safe Relay Stuck ON (Initial Diagnosis)
10. Measure the voltage between body ground and EPS control unit connector B (2P) No. 1 terminal, and No. 2
terminal.
YES - Repair short to power in the wire between the EPS control unit and the EPS motor.■
EPS DTC Troubleshooting: 33-03, 33-04, 33-05
DTC 33-03:
FET Stuck ON (Overcurrent) (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 33-04:
FET Stuck ON (Failure) (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 33-05:
FET Stuck ON (Overcurrent Addition) (Regular Diagnosis)
terminal.
11. On the EPS motor side, check for continuity between body ground and EPS motor 2P connector No. 1 terminal,
and No. 2 terminal.
YES - Replace the EPS motor. ■
NO - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the EPS control unit and EPS motor.■
14. Measure the voltage between body ground and EPS control unit connector B (2P) No. 1 terminal, and No. 2
terminal.
YES - Repair short to power in the wire between the EPS control unit and the EPS motor.■
EPS DTC Troubleshooting: 51-01, 51-02, 51-03, 51-04, 51-05
DTC 51-01:
Torque Sensor (VT1 and VT2) (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 51-02:
Torque Sensor VT3 Differential-amplification Function (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 51-03:
Torque Sensor (VT1, VT2 Rapid-change) (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 51-04:
Torque Sensor (Temperature) (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 51-05:
Torque Sensor (Coil) (Regular Diagnosis)
Is DTC 51-01, 51-02, 51-03, 51-04, or 51-05 indicated?
EPS motor and the EPS control unit.■
9. Measure the resistance between EPS control unit connector C (16P) terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
Is there resistance 10 Ω or less at 20 °C (68 °F)?
10. Disconnect the torque sensor 3P connector.
11. On the torque sensor side, measure the resistance between torque sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No.
2.
YES - Replace the steering gearbox. ■
NO - Repair short in the wires between the EPS control unit and torque sensor.■
3.
3.
18. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS control unit connector C (16P) No. 1 terminal, and No. 3
terminal.
20. On the torque sensor side, check for continuity between body ground and torque sensor 3P connector No. 1
terminal, and No. 3 terminal.
NO - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the EPS control unit and torque sensor.■
22. Check for continuity between EPS control unit connector C (16P) terminal and the torque sensor 3P connector
terminal individually.
Sign Torque Sensor 3P Connector EPS Control Unit Connector C
(16P) Terminal
VS1 1 3
T/S GND 2 2
VS2 3 1
NO - Repair open in the wire between the EPS control unit and torque sensor.■
2, and No. 2 and No. 3 individually.
Is there resistance 10−40 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)?
NO - Replace the steering gearbox. ■
DTC 61-01:
EPS Motor Voltage (Initial Diagnosis)
DTC 61-02:
EPS Motor Voltage (Regular Diagnosis)
9. Check for continuity between torque sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
11. On the EPS motor side, check for continuity between EPS motor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
YES - Repair open in the wire between the EPS control unit and EPS motor.■
NO - Replace the EPS motor. ■
terminal.
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the EPS control unit and EPS motor.■
NO - Check for loose terminals in the EPS control unit connectors and repair if necessary. If no poor
DTC 61-03:
Open the EPS Motor Harness (Regular Diagnosis)
8. Disconnect the EPS control unit connector B (2P) and the EPS motor 2P connector.
9. Check for continuity between EPS control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 2 and EPS motor 2P connector
terminal No. 1.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the EPS control unit and EPS motor.■
10. Check for continuity between EPS control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 1 and EPS motor 2P connector
terminal No. 2.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the EPS control unit and EPS motor.■
11. On the EPS motor side, check for continuity between EPS motor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
NO - Replace the EPS motor. ■
DTC Troubleshooting: B1152
DTC B1152:
Gauge Control Module Internal Error (EEPROM error)
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to ON (II).
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more.
NO - Intermittent failure, the gauge control module is OK at this time.■
DTC B1155:
Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with the MICU (Headlight Switch Message)
NO - Intermittent failure, the gauge control module is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections
between the gauge control module and the MICU.■
Are DTCs B1155 and B1905 indicated?
YES - Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. ■
DTC B1156:
Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with the MICU (Wiper Switch Message)
DTC B1157:
Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with the MICU (MICU Message)
DTC B1159:
Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with the MICU (Door Switch Message)
DTC B1160:
Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with the MICU (Door Lock Switch)
DTC B1168:
Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with ECM/PCM (Engine Messages)
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.■
5. Check for Fuel and Emission system DTCs with the HDS.
Is any DTCs indicated?
YES - Go to the indicated DTCs, then recheck.
NO - Go to Step 6 .
8. Jump the SCS with the HDS.
10. Connect the gauge control module 32P connector No. 29 and No. 30 terminals and body ground with jumper wires.
11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector A (49P) No. 3 and No. 4 terminals and body ground individually.
YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, and
recheck. If the indication goes away, replace the original ECM/PCM. If the DTC is still present, replace
the gauge control module. ■
NO - Repair an open in the wire.■
DTC B1169:
Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with the PCM (A/T Message)
5. Check for Fuel and Emission system DTCs with the HDS.
Is any DTCs indicated?
NO - Go to Step 6 .
8. Jump the SCS with the HDS.
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
10. Connect the gauge control module 32P connector No. 29 and No. 30 terminals and body ground with jumper wires.
11. Check for continuity between PCM connector A (49P) No. 3 and No. 4 terminals and body ground individually.
YES - Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. If
the indication goes away, replace the original PCM. If the DTC is still present, replace the gauge control
module. ■
DTC B1175:
Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Malfunction
3. Wait for 30 seconds.
NO - Intermittent failure, the fuel level sensor circuit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.■
6. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector and the gauge control module 32P connector.
7. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector No. 1 and No. 3 terminals and body ground with jumper wires.
8. Check for continuity between gauge control module 32P connector No. 27 and No. 28 terminals and body ground
individually.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the gauge control module and the fuel tank unit.■
9. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test.
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK?
NO - Replace the fuel tank unit.■
DTC B1176:
Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit
NO - Intermittent failure, the fuel level sensor circuit is OK at this time.■
6. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
NO - Replace the fuel gauge sending unit. ■
12. Check for continuity between the gauge control module 32P connector No. 27 terminal and body ground.
YES - Repair a short to ground in the wire between the gauge control module and the fuel tank unit.■
DTC B1178:
F-CAN Communication Circuit Error
Are DTCs B1168, B1169, B1170, B1178, B1183 and/or B1187 indicated?
YES - Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■
NO - Intermittent failure, the F-CAN communication line is OK at this time. Check for worn or shorted wires.■
DTC B1183:
Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with EPS Control Unit (EPS Message)
5. Check for EPS system DTCs with the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 6 .
8. Disconnect EPS control unit connector C (16P).
9. Check for continuity between the gauge control module 32P connector No. 29 and No. 30 terminals and EPS
control unit connector C (16P) No. 9 and No. 10 terminals and body ground individually.
YES - Substitute a known-good EPS control unit, and recheck. If the indication goes away, replace the original
EPS control unit. If the DTC is still present, replace the gauge control module. ■
DTC B1187:
Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with SRS Unit (SRS Message)
5. Check for SRS DTCs with the HDS.
YES - Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, then recheck.■
NO - Go to Step 6 .
8. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P).
9. Check for continuity between the gauge control module 32P connector No. 29 and No. 30 terminals and SRS unit
connector A (39P) No. 17 and No. 16 terminals individually.
YES - Substitute a known-good SRS unit, and recheck. If the indication goes away, replace the original SRS
unit. If the DTC is still present, replace the gauge control module. ■
DTC B1188:
Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with MICU (RM Message)
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the
gauge control module and the MICU.■
YES - Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. ■
DTC B1905:
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit Lost Communication with MICU (DRLOCKSW Message)
4. Check for DTCs witch the HDS.
NO - Intermittent failure, the immobilizer-keyless control unit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections between the immobilizer-keyless control unit and the MICU.■
Are DTCs B1155, B1156, B1157, B1159, B1160, and B1188 all indicated with DTC B1905 at the same time?
NO - Replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit .■
DTC B1906:
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit Lost Communication with Gauge Control Module (A/T Message)
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the
gauge control module and the immobilizer-keyless control unit.■
6. Connect the HDS to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
7. Select the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, then enter the UNIT INFORMATION.
8. Check the condition of the gauge control module from the CONNECTED UNIT list.
Is NOT AVAILABLE indicated?
9. Do the gauge control module input test.
Are all inputs OK?
YES - Replace the gauge control module.
NO - Repair the faulty input, then recheck the DTCs.■
13. Measure the voltage between the gauge control module 32P connector No. 16 and No. 32 terminals and body
ground.
NO - Check the No. 1 (10 A) and the No. 20 (15 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is blown,
replace the fuse and recheck the DTCs. If the fuses are OK, repair an open in the wire between the under-
dash fuse/relay box and the gauge control module.■
15. Check for continuity between the gauge control module 32P connector No. 13 and No. 17 terminals and body
ground.
NO - Repair an open in the wire or poor ground (G501).■
16. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (16P).
17. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (16P) No. 3 terminal and the gauge control
module 32P connector No. 18 terminal.
DTC B1002:
MICU Internal Error (EEPROM Error)
YES - Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.■
NO - Intermittent failure, the MICU is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections. If the connections
are good, check the battery condition and the charging system.■
DTC B1011:
MICU Lost Communication with Gauge Control Module (VSP/NE Message)
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the No. 1 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is DTCs B1011 indicated?
between the gauge control module and under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (16P). If the connections
Are DTCs B1000 and B1011 all indicated?
YES - Go to DTC troubleshooting B1000.
NO - Go to Step 6 .
6. Select the BODY ELECTRICAL system select menu, then enter the UNIT INFORMATION menu.
7. Check the condition of the gauge control module from the CONNECTED UNIT.
Is NOT AVAILABLE indicated?
11. Measure the voltage between the gauge control module 32P connector No. 16 and No. 32 terminals and body
ground individually.
13. Check for continuity between the gauge control module 32P connector No. 13 and No. 17 terminals and body
NO - Repair an open in the wire poor ground (G501).■
14. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (16P).
16. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (16P) No. 3 terminal and gauge control
module 32P connector No. 18 terminal.
NO - An open in the wire between the MICU and the gauge control module.■
DTC B1028:
Rear Wiper Auto Stop Switch Malfunction
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).
3. Operate the rear window wiper for 15 seconds or more, then turn the rear window wiper switch OFF.
Is the fuse OK?
NO - Replace the fuse and recheck the system.■
6. Disconnect the rear window wiper motor 4P connector.
8. Measure the voltage between the rear window wiper motor 4P connector No. 1 terminal and body ground.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and rear window wiper motor.■
9. Check for continuity between the rear window wiper motor 4P connector No. 4 terminal and body ground.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the No. 4 terminal of the rear window wiper motor 4P connector and
body ground (G602) [G604].■
[ ]: LHD model
10. Do the rear window wiper motor test.
Is the rear window wiper motor OK?
NO - Replace the rear window wiper motor.■
11. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector C.
12. Measure the voltage between the rear window wiper motor 4P connector No. 3 terminal and body ground.
YES - Repair a short to power in the wire between the rear window wiper motor and under-dash fuse/relay box.■
13. Check for continuity between the rear window wiper motor 4P connector No. 3 terminal and body ground.
YES - Repair a short to ground in the wire between the rear window wiper motor and under-dash fuse/relay box.■
14. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector C (49P) No. 29 terminal and the rear window
wiper rear window wiper motor 4P connector No. 3 terminal.
NOTE: The illustration shows the RHD model and the black portion shows the lock lever. The lock lever for LHD
model is shown as the dashed lines.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the rear window wiper motor and under-dash fuse/relay box.■
DTC B1036:
IG1 Power Supply Circuit Malfunction
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connection at the gauge
control module 32P connector, and at under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (16P). If the connections
5. Measure the voltage between the gauge control module 32P connector No. 32 terminal and body ground.
YES - Faulty MICU or an open in the under-dash fuse/relay box internal circuit. Substitute a known-good under-
dash fuse/relay box and recheck.■
NO - Check for No. 22 (7.5 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check for an open in the wire
between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the gauge control module, or repair a short in the wire
between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the gauge control module.■
DTC B1077: RHD model
Windshield Wiper (As) Signal Error
3. Turn the windshield wiper switch to LOW or HIGH for 15 seconds or more, then turn the switch OFF.
Does the wiper motor work? LHD model
NO - Intermittent failure, the windshield wiper system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.■
6. Do the wiper motor test.
Does the wiper motor run and does it pulse normally?
NO - Replace the windshield wiper motor and recheck.■
7. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor 5P connector.
8. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connector A (36P) [B (36P)].
[ ]: LHD model
9. Check for continuity between the windshield wiper motor 5P connector No. 3 [No. 1] terminal and under-dash
fuse/relay box connector A (36P) No. 19 terminal or under-dash fuse/relay box connector B (36P) No. 20 terminal.
[ ]: LHD model
NO - Repair an open in the PNK wire.■
10. Check for continuity between the windshield wiper motor 5P connector No. 3 [No. 1] terminal and body ground. RHD model
[ ]: LHD model
YES - Repair a short to ground in the PNK wire.■
LHD model
12. Measure the voltage between the windshield wiper motor 5P connector No. 3 [No. 1] terminal and body ground. RHD model
[ ]: LHD model
Is there voltage?
YES - Repair a short to ground in the PNK wire.■
NO - Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.■
LHD model
Is the fuse OK?
NO - Replace the fuse and recheck the system.■
15. Do the wiper motor test.
Does the wiper motor run normally?
NO - Replace the windshield wiper motor and recheck.■
16. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector A (36P) and the windshield wiper motor 5P connector.
17. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector A (36P) terminals and the windshield wiper RHD model
motor 5P connector terminals as shown:
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector A Windshield wiper motor 5P connector
(36P)
7 1 [5]
14 4 [3]
[ ]: LHD model LHD model
NO - Repair an open in the BLU (LOW) or GRN (HIGH) wire.■
18. Check for continuity between the windshield wiper motor 5P connector No. 5 [No. 4] terminal and body ground. RHD model
[ ]: LHD model
NO - Repair an open in the BLK wire or poor ground (G202).■
LHD model
DTC B1127:
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Input Circuit Malfunction (Simultaneous input of lock and unlock signal)
3. Insert the ignition key into the driver's door key cylinder switch, and turn the key to the LOCK and UNLOCK
positions 10 times.
NO - Intermittent failure, the driver's door key cylinder switch system is OK at this time. Check for loose or
poor connections.■
5. With the driver's door key cylinder in the neutral position, select KEYLESS with the HDS, and enter the DATA
LIST.
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Are both information indicators OFF?
YES - Check the wires for continuity between the under-dash fuse/relay box and driver's door key cylinder
switch. If there is continuity, the MICU is faulty. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. ■
NO - Go to Step 7 .
7. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator 10P connector.
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES - Faulty driver's door key cylinder switch; replace the driver's door lock actuator.■
NO - Go to Step 9 .
10. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector E (12P).
11. Check for continuity between the No. 4 (UNLOCK) and No. 3 (LOCK) terminals of under-dash fuse/relay box
connector E (12P) and body ground individually.
YES - Repair a short to ground in the LOCK or UNLOCK wire.■
connector E (12P).
YES - Repair a short in the wire between the LOCK and UNLOCK wires.■
NO - Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. ■
DTC B1128:
Driver's Door Remote Switch Input Circuit Malfunction (Simultaneous input of lock and unlock signal)
2. Lock and unlock the driver's door with the driver'sdoor lock switch.
NO - Intermittent failure, the driver's door lock switch system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections.■
4. With the driver's door lock switch in the neutral position, select KEYLESS from the HDS and enter the DATA LIST.
5. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK
SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES - Check the wires for continuity between the under-dash fuse/relay box and driver's door key cylinder
switch. If there is continuity, the MICU is faulty. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.■
NO - Go to Step 6 .
6. Disconnect the power window master switch connector.
7. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK
SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES - Faulty door lock switch; replace the power window master switch.■
NO - Go to Step 8 .
10. Check for continuity between the No. 8 (LOCK) and No. 1 (UNLOCK) terminals of under-dash fuse/relay box
11. Check for continuity between the No. 8 (LOCK) and No. 1 (UNLOCK) terminals of under-dash fuse/relay box
connector E (12P).
YES - Repair a short in the wire between the LOCK and UNLOCK wires.■
DTC B1129:
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch Input Circuit Malfunction (Simultaneous input of lock and unlock signal)
3. Operate the driver's door lock knob switch several times.
NO - Intermittent failure, the driver's door lock knob switch is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections.■
5. Select KEYLESS from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, and enter the DATA LIST.
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and the DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK).
Are the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) information indicator ON and the DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) information indicator OFF with the driver's door lock knob switch in LOCK
position, and are the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) information indicator OFF and the
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) information indicator ON with the driver's door lock knob
switch in UNLOCK position?
NO - Go to Step 7 .
7. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator 10P connector.
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES - Check for an open in the driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK) wire or the driver's door lock knob switch
(UNLOCK) wire between the MICU and the driver's door lock knob switch. If OK, replace the driver's door
lock actuator.■
NO - Go to Step 9 .
connector E (12P).
YES - Repair a short in the wire between the LOCK wire and UNLOCK wire.■
DTC B1275:
Headlight OFF Position Circuit Malfunction
3. Operate each combination light switch position, then turn the combination light switch OFF.
5. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL system select menu.
6. Check each combination light switch position value with the DATA LIST menu.
When the combination light switch turns OFF:

Data List Value
Headlight Switch (OFF) ON
Headlight Switch (PARKING) OFF
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) OFF
When the combination light switch turns SMALL:

Data List Value
Headlight Switch (OFF) OFF
Headlight Switch (PARKING) ON
When the combination light switch turns ON (headlight):

Data List Value
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) ON
Are all data list values correct?

NO - Go to Step 7 .
8. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P connector.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
When the combination light switch is OFF:

Data List Value
Are all data list values indicated OFF?

13. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector M (34P).
14. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector M (34P) No. 5, No. 7, and No. 8 terminals and
body ground individually.
YES - Repair a short to ground in the wire.■
16. Do the combination light switch test.
Is the combination light switch OK?
NO - Replace the combination light switch.■
18. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector M (34P) terminals and the combination light RHD model
switch 12P connector terminals as shown:
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector M Combination light switch 12P connector
(34P)
5 9 [10]
7 8 [11]
8 10[9]
33 7[12]
LHD model
[ ]: LHD model
DTC B1276:
Headlight SMALL Position Circuit Malfunction

Data List Value

Data List Value

Data List Value

NO - Go to Step 7 .

Data List Value

(34P)
5 9 [10]
7 8 [11]
8 10[9]
33 7[12]
LHD model
[ ]: LHD model
DTC B1278:
Headlight ON Position Circuit Malfunction

Data List Value

Data List Value

Data List Value

NO - Go to Step 7 .

Data List Value

(34P)
5 9 [10]
7 8 [11]
8 10[9]
33 7[12]
LHD model
[ ]: LHD model
DTC B1279:
Dimmer Switch Circuit Malfunction
3. Turn the combination light (headlight) switch ON.
4. Change the dimmer switch from low beam to high beam.
5. Turn the combination light switch OFF and then to the passing position.
7. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL system select menu, then enter the DATA LIST.
When the passing switch is operated

Data List Value
Headlight Switch (PASSING) ON
Headlight Switch (High beam) OFF
When the headlight switch is turned ON, and the dimmer switch changed from low beam to
high beam
Data List Value
Headlight Switch (PASSING) OFF
Headlight Switch (High beam) ON

NO - Go to Step 9 .
12. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL system select menu, then enter the DATA LIST.
When the combination light switch is turned OFF

Data List Value
Headlight Switch (PASSING) OFF
Headlight Switch (High beam) OFF

NO - Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. ■
(34P)
3 3 [4]
4 1 [6]
5 9 [10]
33 7 [12]
LHD model
[ ]: LHD model
21. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector M (34P) terminals as shown:
From terminal To terminal
5 3, 4, 7, 8
7 3, 4, 8
8 3, 4
YES - Repair a short between the wires.■
NO - Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. ■
DTC B1280:
Turn Signal Switch Circuit Malfunction
3. Operate the turn signal switch in left and right positions.
5. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL system select menu, then enter the DATE LIST.
When the turn signal switch is in left position:

Data List Value
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT) ON
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT) OFF
When the turn signal switch is in right position:

Data List Value
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT) OFF
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT) ON

NO - Go to Step 7 .
10. Select the BODY ELECTRICAL system select menu, then enter the LIGHTING SYSTEM.
When the turn signal switch is in neutral position:

Data List Value
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT) OFF
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT) OFF
Are both data list values indicated OFF?

14. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector M (34P) No. 2 and No. 6 terminals and body
18. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector M (34P) No. 2, No. 6, and No. 33 terminals and RHD model
the combination light switch 12P connector No. 5 [No. 2], No. 6 [No. 1], and No. 7 [No. 12] terminals.
[ ]: LHD model
LHD model
DTC B1281:
Front Wiper MIST Position Circuit Malfunction
3. Operate each windshield wiper switch position, then turn the wiper/washer switch OFF.
5. Select WIPERS from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Check each windshield wiper switch position value with the DATA LIST menu.
When the windshield wiper switch is OFF:

Data List Value
Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW) OFF
Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH) OFF
Windshield Wiper Switch (MIST) OFF
Windshield Wiper Switch (INT) OFF

NO - Go to Step 7 .
8. Disconnect the wiper/washer switch 8P connector.
Data List Value

YES - Replace the wiper/washer switch.■
14. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector M (24P) No. 10, No. 11, and No. 12 terminals
and body ground.
When the windshield wiper switch is ON (LOW):

Data List Value
Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW) ON
When the windshield wiper switch is ON (HIGH):

Data List Value
Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH) ON
When the windshield wiper switch is MIST:
Data List Value
Windshield Wiper Switch (MIST) ON
When the windshield wiper switch is INT:

Data List Value
Windshield Wiper Switch (INT) ON

17. Do the wiper/washer switch test.
Is the wiper/washer switch OK?
NO - Replace the wiper/washer switch.■
18. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors M (34P) and Q (16P).
19. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector M (34P) terminals and the windshield RHD model
wiper/wash switch 8P connector terminals as shown:
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector M Windshield wiper/wash switch 8P connector
(34P)
10 3 [4]
11 2
12 1 [3]
[ ]: LHD model
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q Windshield wiper/wash switch 8P connector

(16P)
5 8 [5]
LHD model
[ ]: LHD model
DTC B1282:
Front Wiper INT Position Circuit Malfunction

Data List Value

NO - Go to Step 7 .
10. Select the BODY ELECTRICAL system select menu, then enter the WIPERS.
Data List Value

and body ground.

Data List Value

Data List Value
Data List Value

Data List Value

wiper/washer switch 8P connector terminals as shown:
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector M Windshield wiper/washer switch 8P connector
(34P)
10 3 [4]
11 2
12 1 [3]
[ ]: LHD model
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q Windshield wiper/washer switch 8P connector

(16P)
5 8 [5]
LHD model
[ ]: LHD model
DTC B1283:
Front Wiper LOW Position Circuit Malfunction
5. Select WIPER from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.

Data List Value

NO - Go to Step 7 .
10. Select WIPER from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
Data List Value

and body ground.

Data List Value

Data List Value
Data List Value

Data List Value

(34P)
10 3 [4]
11 2
12 1 [3]
[ ]: LHD model

(16P)
5 8 [5]
LHD model
[ ]: LHD model
DTC B1284:
Front Wiper HIGH Position Circuit Malfunction

Data List Value

NO - Go to Step 7 .
Data List Value

and body ground.

Data List Value

Data List Value
Data List Value

Data List Value

(34P)
10 3 [4]
11 2
12 1 [3]
[ ]: LHD model

(16P)
5 8 [5]
LHD model
[ ]: LHD model
How to Troubleshoot the SRS
DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Codes)
The self-diagnostic function of the SRS system allows it to locate the causes of system problems and then store this
information in memory. For easier troubleshooting, this data can be retrieved via a data link circuit.
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), the SRS indicator should come on. If it goes off after 6 seconds, the
system is normal, and is not currently detecting any abnormality.
If there is an abnormality, the system locates and defines the problem, stores this information in memory, and
turns the SRS indicator on. The data remains in the memory even when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0) or
if the battery is disconnected.
The data is stored in memory as a diagnostic trouble code (DTC).
DTCs are either latching or resetting depending on the malfunction. With resetting DTCs, the SRS indicator goes off
the next time the ignition switch is turned to ON (II) and the system is normal, but the DTC is still stored. With
latching DTCs, the SRS indicator does not turn OFF until the malfunction is repaired and the DTC is cleared.
When you connect the HDS to the 16P data link connector (DLC), you can retrieve a more detailed DTC in the
Honda Systems ‘‘SRS'' menu.
After reading and recording the DTC, proceed with the troubleshooting procedure for that code.
Precautions
Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. Make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched
to the smallest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could damage the airbag circuit or cause
accidental airbag deployment and possible injury.
Whenever the ignition switch is in ON (II), or has been turned to LOCK (0) for less than 3 minutes, be careful not to
bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries.
Before you remove the dashboard wire harness or floor wire harness, disconnect the driver's airbag connector, the
front passenger's airbag connector, both side airbag connectors, both side curtain airbag connectors, and both seat
belt tensioner connectors.
Make sure the battery is fully charged. If the battery is dead or low, measuring values may not be correct.
Do not touch a tester probe to the terminals in the SRS unit or harness connectors, and do not connect the SRS
unit terminals or the sensor terminals or the sensor terminals with a jumper wire. Use only the backprobe set and
the multimeter. Backprobe spring-loaded lock type connectors correctly.
Reading the DTC

1. Make sure the ignition switch is to LOCK (0).
DLC circuit.
5. Use the HDS to check for SRS DTCs.
6. Read and record the DTC.
9. Do the troubleshooting procedure for the DTC.
Clear the DTC Memory With the HDS

NOTE: Make sure the battery is fully charged before you begin.
1. Make sure the ignition switch is to LOCK (0).
DLC circuit.
5. In the SRS MENU of the HDS, select SRS, then DTC to clear DTC(s).
Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures
If there was a malfunction that sets a DTC, but it does not recur, it will be stored in the memory as an intermittent failure,
and the SRS indicator may come on depending on the malfunction detected.
NOTE:
Check the condition of the battery, and the charging system. Low battery voltage may cause some intermittent
failures.
A faulty cable reel can cause intermittent connections related to the driver's airbag inflator DTCs.
After checking the DTC, troubleshoot as follows:
1. Read the DTC (see Reading the DTC).
2. Clear the DTC memory (see Clear the DTC Memory).
3. Set the parking brake, then start the engine, and let it idle.
4. The SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.
5. Shake the related wire harnesses and the connectors, then look for loose connections, and poor grounds.
6. Take a test-drive (quick acceleration, quick braking, and cornering), turn the steering wheel fully left and right, and
hold it there for 5 to 10 seconds. If the problem recurs, the SRS indicator will come on.
7. If you cannot duplicate the concern, ask the customer about the conditions when it occurred, or ask the customer
to demonstrate the concern.
8. If you cannot duplicate the intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
SRS DTC Troubleshooting: 21-1x, 21-2x
DTC 21-1x (‘‘x'' can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Open in the Left Side Seat Belt Tensioner
Increased Resistance in the Left Side Seat Belt Tensioner
NOTE:
Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures and General Troubleshooting
Information.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10 seconds.
3. Read the DTC.
Is DTC 21-1x or 21-2x indicated?
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures. If another
DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.
5. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure , then wait for 3 minutes.
6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector from the left side seat belt tensioner.
7. Install a jumper wire between the No. 2 and the No. 3 terminals of the floor wire harness 4P connector.
11. Read the DTC.
NO - Faulty left side seat belt tensioner; replace the left side seat belt tensioner. ■
14. Remove a jumper wire from the floor wire harness 4P connector.
15. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (39P) from the SRS unit.
16. Install a jumper wire between the No. 12 and the No. 13 terminals of SRS unit connector B (39P).
17. Check for continuity between the No. 2 and the No. 3 terminals of floor wire harness 4P connector.
YES - Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit connector B (39P) and the SRS unit. Check the
connection between the connector and the SRS unit. If the connection is OK, replace the SRS unit. ■
NO - Open or increased resistance in the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.■
SRS DTC Troubleshooting: 21-3x
Short to Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in the Left Side Seat Belt Tensioner
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
Is DTC 21-3x indicated?
10. Read the DTC.
14. Connect an SRS short canceller (070AZ-SAA0100) to No. 12 and No. 13 terminals of the SRS unit connector B
(39P).
15. Measure the resistance between the No. 12 and No. 13 terminals of SRS unit connector B (39P). There should be
0−1.0 Ω.
Is the resistance as specified?
YES - Short in the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.■
NO - Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit. ■
Short to Power in the Left Side Seat Belt Tensioner
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
7. Connect an SRS short canceller (070AZ-SAA0100) to the No. 12 and the No. 13 terminals of SRS unit connector A
(39P).
10. Measure the voltage between the No. 12 and the No. 13 terminals of SRS unit connector B (39P) and body ground.
There should be less than 1 V.
Is the voltage as specified?
YES - Faulty left side seat belt tensioner; replace the left side seat belt tensioner. ■
NO - Short to power in the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.■
Short to Ground in the Left Side Seat Belt Tensioner
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
7. Check for continuity between the No. 12 and the No. 13 terminals of SRS unit connector B (39P) and body ground.
YES - Short to ground in the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.■
Open in the Right Side Seat Belt Tensioner
Increased Resistance in the Right Side Seat Belt Tensioner
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector from the right side seat belt tensioner.
11. Read the DTC.
NO - Faulty right side seat belt tensioner; replace the right side seat belt tensioner. ■
Short to Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in the Right Side Seat Belt Tensioner
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
7. Read the DTC.
(39P).
0−1.0 Ω.
Short to Power in the Right Side Seat Belt Tensioner
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
7. Connect an SRS short canceller (070AZ-SAA0100) to the No. 14 and the No. 15 terminals of SRS unit connector B
(39P).
YES - Faulty right side seat belt tensioner; replace the right side seat belt tensioner. ■
Short to Ground in the Right Side Seat Belt Tensioner
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
Open in the Left Side Airbag Inflator
Increased Resistance in the Left Side Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector from the left side airbag.
7. Install a jumper wire between the No. 1 and the No. 2 terminals of floor wire harness 2P connector.
11. Read the DTC.
NO - Faulty left side airbag; replace the left side airbag. ■
Short to Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in the Left Side Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
10. Read the DTC.
(39P).
0−1.0 Ω.
Short to Power in the Left Side Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
6. Disconnect the SRS unit connector B (39P) from the SRS unit.
(39P).
YES - Faulty left side airbag; replace the left side airbag. ■
Short to Ground in the Left Side Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
Open in the Right Side Airbag Inflator
Increased Resistance in the Right Side Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector from the right side airbag.
11. Read the DTC.
NO - Faulty right side airbag; replace the right side airbag. ■
NO - Open or inscreased resistance in the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.■
Short to Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in the Right Side Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
10. Read the DTC.
(39P).
15. Measure the resistance between the No. 8 and the No. 9 terminals of SRS unit connector B (39P). There should be
0−1.0 Ω.
Short to Power in the Right Side Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
(39P).
YES - Faulty right side airbag; replace the right side airbag. ■
Short to Ground in the Right Side Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
7. Check for continuity between the No. 8 and the No. 9 terminals of floor wire harness 2P connector and body
ground.
Open in the Left Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
Increased Resistance in the Left Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector from the left side curtain airbag.
7. Install a jumper wire between the No. 1 and the No. 2 terminals of floor wire harness 2P connector.
11. Read the DTC.
NO - Faulty left side curtain airbag; replace the left side curtain airbag. ■
Short to Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in the Left Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
10. Read the DTC.
(39P).
15. Measure the resistance between the No. 10 and No. 11 terminals of the SRS unit connector B (39P). There should
be 0−1.0 Ω.
Short to Power in the Left Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
6. Disconnect the SRS unit connector B (39P) from the SRS unit.
(39P).
YES - Faulty left side curtain airbag; replace the left side curtain airbag. ■
Short to Ground in the Left Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
Open in the Right Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
Increased Resistance in the Right Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector from the right side curtain airbag.
11. Read the DTC.
NO - Faulty right side curtain airbag, replace the right side curtain airbag. ■
17. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and the No. 2 terminals of the floor wire harness 2P connector.
connection between the connector and the SRS unit. If the connection is OK, replace the SRS unit . ■
Short to Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in the Right Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
10. Read the DTC.
NO - Faulty right side curtain airbag; replace the right side curtain airbag.
(39P).
15. Measure the resistance between the No. 24 and No. 25 terminals of the SRS unit connector B (39P). There should
be 0−1.0 Ω.
Short to Power in the Right Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
(39P).
YES - Faulty right side curtain airbag; replace the right side curtain airbag. ■
Short to Ground in the Right Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
8. Disconnect floor wire harness 2P connector from the right side curtain airbag.
NO - Faulty right side curtain airbag; replace the right side curtain airbag. ■
No Signal From the Left Front Impact Sensor
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
6. Check the connections between SRS unit connector A (39P) and the SRS unit, between the left engine
compartment wire harness 2P connector and the left front impact sensor, and at left engine compartment wire
harness 4P connector.
Are the connections OK?
NO - Repair the poor connections and retest.
7. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P) from the SRS unit.
(39P).
9. Disconnect the left engine compartment wire harness 2P connector from the left front impact sensor.
10. Measure the resistance between the No. 36 and the No. 37 terminals of SRS unit connector A (39P). There should
be an open circuit or at least 1 MΩ.
NO - Short in the left engine compartment wire harness or dashboard wire harness; replace the faulty
harness.■
11. Measure the resistance between the No. 36 terminal of SRS unit connector A (39P) and body ground, and between
the No. 37 terminal and body ground. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 MΩ.
NO - Short to ground in the left engine compartment wire harness or dashboard wire harness; replace the faulty
harness.■
14. Measure the voltage between the No. 36 terminal of SRS unit connector A (39P) and body ground, and between the
No. 37 terminal and body ground. There should be less than 1 V.
NO - Short to power in the left engine compartment wire harness or dashboard wire harness; replace the faulty
harness.■
17. Install a jumper wire between the No. 1 and the No. 2 terminals of left engine compartment wire harness 2P
connector.
be less than 1 Ω.
NO - Open in the left engine compartment wire harness or dashboard wire harness; replace the faulty
harness.■
19. Substitute a known-good left front impact sensor and recheck.
20. Connect SRS unit connector A (39P) to the SRS unit.
23. Read the DTC.
NO - Faulty left front impact sensor; replace the left front impact sensor. ■
SRS DTC Troubleshooting: 41-3x, 41-8x, 41-9x, 41-Ax, 41-Bx
DTC 41-3x, 41-8x, 41-9x, 41-Ax, 41-Bx (‘‘x'' can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Internal Failure of the Left Front Impact Sensor
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures and General Troubleshooting
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
Is DTC 41-3x, 41-8x, 41-9x, 41-Ax or 41-Bx indicated?
YES - Faulty left font impact sensor; replace the left front impact sensor. ■
No Signal From the Right Front Impact Sensor
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
6. Check the connections between SRS unit connector A (39P) and the SRS unit, between the right engine
compartment wire harness 2P connector and the right front impact sensor, and at right engine compartment wire
harness 4P connector.
(39P).
9. Disconnect the right engine compartment wire harness 2P connector from the right front impact sensor.
be an open circuit or at least 1 MΩ.
NO - Short in the right engine compartment wire harness or dashboard wire harness; replace the faulty
harness.■
11. Measure the resistance between the No. 38 terminal of SRS unit connector A (39P) and body ground, and between
NO - Short to ground in the right engine compartment wire harness or dashboard wire harness; replace the
faulty harness.■
14. Measure the voltage between the No. 38 terminal of SRS unit connector A (39P) and body ground, and between the
NO - Short to power in the right engine compartment wire harness or dashboard wire harness; replace the
faulty harness.■
17. Install a jumper wire between the No. 1 and the No. 2 terminals of right engine compartment wire harness 2P
connector.
be less than 1 Ω.
NO - Open in the right engine compartment wire harness or dashboard wire harness; replace the faulty
harness.■
19. Substitute a known-good right front impact sensor and recheck.
20. Connect SRS unit connector A (39P) to the SRS unit.
23. Read the DTC.
NO - Faulty right front impact sensor, replace the right front impact sensor. ■
DTC 42-3x, 42-8x, 42-9x, 42-Ax, 42-Bx (''x'' can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Internal Failure of the Right Front Impact Sensor
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
Is DTC 42-3x, 42-8x, 42-9x, 42-Ax, or 42-Bx indicated?
YES - Faulty right front impact sensor; replace the right front impact sensor. ■
Internal Failure of the Left Side Impact Sensor (first)
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
YES - Faulty left side impact sensor (first); replace the left side front impact sensor (first). ■
Internal Failure of the Right Side Impact Sensor (first)
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
YES - Faulty right side impact sensor (first); replace the right side front impact sensor (first). ■
SRS DTC Troubleshooting: 45-11
DTC 45-11:
No Signal From the Left Side Impact Sensor (second)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
YES - If DTC 45-11 is indicated alone, go to Step 4 .
If DTC except 45-11 is indicated, faulty left side impact sensor (second); replace the left side
impact sensor (second). ■
If DTC 43-11 and 45-11 are indicated, faulty left side impact sensor (first); replace the left side
impact sensor (first). ■
6. Check the connections between the floor wire harness 2P connector and the left side impact sensor (second), and
at floor wire harness 2P connector.
7. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector from the left side impact sensor (first).
8. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector from the left side impact sensor (second).
9. Measure the resistance between No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of floor wire harness 2P connector. There should be an
open circuit or at least 1 MΩ.
NO - Short in the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.■
10. Measure the resistance between No. 1 terminal of floor wire harness 2P connector and body ground, and between
NO - Short to ground in the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.■
13. Measure the voltage between No. 1 terminal of floor wire harness 2P connector and body ground, and between the
No. 2 terminal and body ground. There should be less than 1.0 V.
15. Measure the resistance between the No. 4 terminal of the floor wire harness 4P connector and the No. 1 terminal of
the floor wire harness 2P connector, and between the No. 1 terminal of the floor wire harness 4P connector and the
No. 2 terminal of the floor wire harness 2P connector. There should be 0−1.0 Ω.
NO - Open in the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.■
16. Substitute a known-good left side impact sensor (second) and recheck.
17. Connect SRS unit connector B (39P) to the SRS unit.
20. Read the DTC.
NO - Faulty left side impact sensor (second); replace the left side impact sensor (second). ■
Internal Failure of the Left Side Impact Sensor (second)
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
YES - Faulty left side impact sensor (second); replace the left side impact sensor (second). ■
DTC 46-11:
No Signal From the Right Side Impact Sensor (second)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
If DTC except 46-11 is indicated, faulty right side impact sensor (second); replace the right side
impact sensor (second). ■
If DTC 44-11 and 46-11 are indicated, faulty right side impact sensor (first); replace the right side
6. Check the connections between the floor wire harness 2P connector and the right side impact sensor (second),
and at floor wire harness 2P connector.
7. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector from the right side impact sensor (first).
8. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector from the right side impact sensor (second).
9. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of floor wire harness 2P connector. There should be
an open circuit or at least 1 MΩ.
10. Measure the resistance between No. 1 terminal of floor wire harness 2P connector and body ground, and between
13. Measure the voltage between No. 1 terminal of floor wire harness 2P connector and body ground, and between the
15. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal of the floor wire harness 4P connector and the No. 2 terminal of
the floor wire harness 2P connector, and between the No. 4 terminal of the floor wire harness 4P connector and the
No. 1 terminal of the floor wire harness 2P connector. There should be 0−1.0 Ω.
16. Substitute a known-good right side impact sensor (second) and recheck.
20. Read the DTC.
NO - Faulty right side impact sensor (second); replace the right side impact sensor (second). ■
Internal Failure of the Right Side Impact Sensor (second)
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
YES - Faulty right side impact sensor (second); replace the right side impact sensor (second). ■
SRS DTC Troubleshooting: 51-xx, 52-xx, 53-xx, 54-xx, 55-xx
DTC 51-xx, 52-xx, 53-xx, 54-xx, 55-xx (‘‘x'' can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Internal Failure of the SRS Unit
NOTE:
Before troubleshooting any of these DTCs, check the battery/system voltage and battery cable connections. If the
voltage is low, repair the charging system or replace the battery before troubleshooting the SRS. If the
battery/system voltage is now OK, ask the customer if the battery ever went dead or if the engine was started and
run with the battery in a low state of charge. A dead battery may trigger one or more of these DTCs.
Information.
3. Check that the SRS indicator goes off.
Does the SRS indicator go off?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures. If another
NO - Replace the SRS unit. ■
SRS DTC Troubleshooting: 53-FF
DTC 53-FF:
SRS Unit Programming Error
NOTE:
This DTC is indicated when a SRS unit update is not completed properly.
Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0) while updating the SRS unit. If you turn the ignition switch
to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0) before you complete the SRS unit update procedure, the SRS unit can be damaged.
Information.
1. Do the SRS unit update procedure.
2. Read the DTC.
Is DTC 53-FF indicated?
YES - Replace the original SRS unit. ■
NO - Update is complete.■
DTC 56-31:
Lost Communication with the ECM/PCM (PGM-FI system)
NOTE:
Information.
Check for any F-CAN and B-CAN communication DTCs, and troubleshoot those DTCs before doing this
troubleshooting procedure.
3. Read the DTC.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and see if the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on.
YES - Go to the MIL Circuit Troubleshooting.
NO - Go to Step 5 .
8. Install a jumper wire between the No. 16 and the No. 17 terminal of SRS unit connector A (39P).
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P) from the ECM/PCM.
10. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and the No. 4 terminals of the ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
YES - Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit connector A (39P) and the SRS unit. Check the
NO - Open in the left engine compartment wire harness or the floor wire harness; replace the faulty harness.■
SRS DTC Troubleshooting: 56-32, 56-33
DTC 56-32, 56-33:
Undefined Data Received From the ECM/PCM (PGM-FI system)
NOTE:
Information.
Check for any F-CAN and B-CAN communication DTCs, and troubleshoot those DTCs before doing this
3. Check that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on.
NO - Go to the PGM-FI system troubleshooting.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds.
7. Read the DTC.
YES - Faulty ECM/PCM; replace the ECM/PCM.
SRS DTC Troubleshooting: 85-4x, 85-63, 85-64
DTC 85-4x, 85-63, 85-64 (‘‘x'' can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Internal Failure of the OPDS Unit
NOTE:
Information.
off.
NO - Go to Step 3 .
off.
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures. ■
NO - Replace the OPDS unit and retest. If the problem is still present, replace the OPDS sensor/seat-back
cover/pad. ■
DTC 85-61:
No Signal From the OPDS Unit
DTC 85-62:
Non-stipulated Data From the OPDS Unit
Information.
2. Read the DTC.
Is the fuse OK?
NO - Replace the fuse, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II). If the fuse blows again, check for a short in the
No. 8 (7.5 A) fuse circuit (floor wire harness, or OPDS unit harness).
5. Disconnect the OPDS unit harness 18P connector (A) from the OPDS unit.
7. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the OPDS unit harness 18P connector and body ground. There
should be battery voltage.
NO - Open between the No. 8 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the No. 1 terminal of the OPDS
unit 18P connector (floor wire harness or OPDS unit harness); replace the faulty harness.■
9. Measure the resistance between the No. 12 terminal of the OPDS unit harness 18P connector and body ground.
There should be 0−1.0 Ω.
NO - Open between the No. 12 terminal of the OPDS unit harness 18P connector and body ground (G603) or
poor connection at G603. ■
12. Measure the resistance between No. 1 terminal of SRS unit connector B (39P) and body ground. There should be 1
MΩ.
NO - Short to ground between the No. 1 terminal of the SRS unit connector B (39P) and the No. 7 terminal of
the OPDS unit harness 18P connector (floor wire harness or OPDS unit harness); replace the faulty
harness.■
13. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal of SRS unit connector B (39P) and the No. 7 terminal of the
OPDS unit harness 18P connector. There should be 0−1.0 Ω.
NO - Open between the No. 1 terminal of the SRS unit connector B (39P) and the No. 7 terminal of the OPDS
unit harness 18P connector (floor wire harness or OPDS unit harness); replace the faulty harness.■
16. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the SRS unit connector B (39P) and body ground. There should
be 1 V.
NO - Short to power between the No. 1 terminal of the SRS unit connector B (39P) and the No. 7 terminal of
the OPDS unit harness 18P connector (floor wire harness or OPDS unit harness); replace the faulty
harness.■
17. Replace the OPDS unit.
19. Clear the DTC.
20. Read the DTC.
Is the DTC 85-61 or 85-62 indicated?
YES - Replace the SRS unit. ■
DTC 85-71, 85-78:
OPDS Unit Does Not Initialized
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
7. Read the DTC.
Is SRS DTC indicated?
YES - Replace the OPDS unit. ■
DTC 85-79:
OPDS Initial Check Failure
Information.
off.
NO - Go to Step 3 .
4. Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat.
off.
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures.
NO - Go to Step 7 .
off.
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures.
NO - Replace the OPDS unit and retest. If the problem is still present, replace the OPDS sensor/seat-back
cover/pad. ■
Faulty OPDS Seat-Back Sensor
Faulty OPDS Seat Support Sensor
Information.
2. Read the DTC.
3. Check the connection at the OPDS sensor harness connectors (A) and the OPDS unit harness 18P connector (B).
Is the connection OK?
NO - Repair the poor connection, and clear the DTC. ■
4. Replace the front passenger's seat-back cover/pad, and initialize the OPDS.
6. Read the DTC.
YES - Replace the OPDS unit. ■
SRS DTC Troubleshooting: A1-1x
DTC A1-1x (‘‘x'' can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Faulty Power Supply (VA line)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
Is DTC A1-1x indicated?
Is the fuse OK?
NO - Replace the fuse, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II). If the fuse blows again, check for a short to
ground in the dashboard wire harness or in the under-dash fuse/relay box No. 8 (7.5 A) fuse circuit;
replace the dashboard wire harness. If the problem is still there, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. ■
11. Measure the voltage between the No. 26 terminal of SRS unit connector A (39P) and body ground. There should be
battery voltage.
YES - Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit connector A (39P) and the SRS unit; check the
connection. If the connection is OK, replace the SRS unit. ■
NO - Open in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness.■
Faulty Power Supply (VB line)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
Is the fuse OK?
NO - Replace the fuse, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II). If the fuse blows again, check for a Short to
ground in the dashboard wire harness or in the under-dash fuse/relay box No. 6 (10 A) fuse circuit;
replace the dashboard wire harness. If the problem is still there, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. ■
11. Measure the voltage between the No. 27 terminal of SRS unit connector A (39P) and body ground. There should be
battery voltage.
YES - Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit connector A (39P) and the SRS unit; check the
connection. If the connection is OK, replace the SRS unit. ■
SRS Unit Connector A Not Properly Installed
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
4. Check the connection between the SRS unit connector A (39P) and the SRS unit.
NO - Repair the poor connection and retest.
8. Check for bent or damaged terminals on the SRS unit.
Are any terminals bent or damaged?
YES - Replace the dashboard wire harness.■
SRS Unit Connector B Not Properly Installed
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
4. Check the connection between the SRS unit connector B (39P) and the SRS unit.
NO - Repair the poor connection and retest.
8. Check for bent or damaged terminals on the SRS unit.
Are any terminals bent or damaged?
YES - Replace the floor wire harness.■
SRS DTC Troubleshooting: Ex-11
DTC Ex-11 (''x'' can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Control Operation Recorded
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
Is DTC Ex-11 indicated?
How to Troubleshoot the VSA System
System Indicator
This system has four indicators:
ABS indicator (A)
Brake system indicator (B)
VSA indicator (C)
VSA activation indicator (D)
When the system is OK, each indicator comes on for about 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch to ON (II), then
goes off.
When the system detects a problem, a DTC will be set and, depending upon the failure, the VSA modulator-control unit
will determine which indicator(s) will be turned on. If the problem goes away (system returns to normal), the indicator(s)
will be controlled in the following way depending upon the DTC that was set:
The indicator(s) will come on and stay on when the ignition switch is ON (II).
The indicator(s) will automatically go off.
The indicator(s) will go off after the vehicle is driven.
ABS Indicator
The ABS indicator comes on when the ABS function is lost. The brakes still work like a conventional system.
Brake System Indicator

The brake system indicator comes on when the EBD function is lost, the parking brake is applied, and/or the brake fluid
level is low.
NOTE: If two or more wheel speed sensors fail, the brake system indicator will come on.
VSA Indicator
The VSA indicator comes on when the VSA function is lost.
VSA Activation Indicator

The VSA activation indicator blinks when the VSA function is activating. The VSA activation indicator comes on, when the
VSA is turned OFF by using the VSA OFF switch, or the VSA function is lost.

The memory can hold all DTCs. However, when the same DTC is detected more than once, the more recent DTC is
DTC.
The DTCs are indicated in ascending number order, not in the order they occur.
The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM. Therefore, the memorized DTCs cannot be erased by disconnecting the
battery. Do the specified procedures to clear the DTCs.
Self-diagnosis
-Initial diagnosis: Done right after the ignition switch is turned to ON (II) and until the ABS and VSA indicators go
off.
-Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
When the system detects a problem, the VSA modulator-control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
Kickback
The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator-control unit is functioning, and the fluid in the reservoir is forced out to
the master cylinder, causing kickback at the brake pedal.
Pump Motor
The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator-control unit is functioning.
The VSA modulator-control unit checks the pump motor operation one time after completing initial diagnosis during
regular diagnosis when the vehicle is driven over 15 km/h (10 mph).
Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding

Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures are identical to the procedures used on vehicles without the VSA
system.
The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause of the problem is still present and the ABS and/or VSA indicator is
still on. Following a troubleshooting procedure for a code that has been cleared but does not reset can result in incorrect
diagnosis.
for troubleshooting. Find out when the ABS and/or VSA indicator came on, such as during activation, after
activation, when the vehicle was traveling at a certain speed, etc. If necessary, have the customer demonstrate the
concern.
2. When the ABS or VSA indicator does not come on during the test-drive, but troubleshooting is done based on the
DTC, check for loose connectors, poor contact of the terminals, etc. before you start troubleshooting.
3. After troubleshooting, or the repairs are done, clear the DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same conditions
that originally set the DTCs. Make sure the ABS and VSA indicators do not come on.
4. Check for DTCs from other systems which are connected via F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are related to F-CAN,
the most likely cause was that the ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with the VSA modulator-control unit
connector disconnected. Clear the DTCs. Check for fuel and emissions, and VSA codes, first. Be sure to
troubleshoot those first.
The term ‘‘intermittent failure'' means a system may have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the indicator(s) of the
system does not come on, check for loose connectors or poor contacts in the terminals related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting.

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot
the DLC circuit.
NOTE:
The HDS communication will be stopped when the vehicle speed is at 50 km/h (31 mph) or more.

the dashboard.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't troubleshoot
the DLC circuit.
troubleshooting.
How to Clear DTCs

the dashboard.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't troubleshoot
the DLC circuit.
VSA DTC Troubleshooting: 11-13, 13-13, 15-13, 17-13
DTC 11-13:
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction
DTC 13-13:
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction
DTC 15-13:
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction
DTC 17-13:
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction
sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
7. Disconnect the appropriate wheel speed sensor 2P connector.
8. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector wheel speed sensor +B
and GND terminals (see table).
DTC VSA Modulator-control Unit 36P Connector Terminal
11-13 No. 23 No. 10
13-13 No. 19 No. 6
15-13 No. 18 No. 4
17-13 No. 21 No. 8
YES - Repair short in the wires between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA modulator-control
unit.■
NO - Go to Step 9 .
9. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal and the wheel
DTC VSA Modulator-control Unit 36P Appropriate Wheel Speed Sensor
Connector Terminal 2P Connector Terminal
NO - Repair open in the wire between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA modulator-control
unit.■
DTC VSA Modulator-control Unit 36P Appropriate Wheel Speed Sensor
Connector Terminal 2P Connector Terminal
NO - Repair open in the wire between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA modulator-control
unit.■
speed sensor 2P connector terminal (see table).
11-13 No. 23 No. 10
13-13 No. 19 No. 6
15-13 No. 18 No. 4
17-13 No. 21 No. 8
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA
13. Measure the voltage between body ground and the appropriate VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal
(see table).
11-13 No. 23 No. 10
13-13 No. 19 No. 6
15-13 No. 18 No. 4
17-13 No. 21 No. 8

YES - Repair short to power in the wire between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA modulator-
control unit.■
15. Substitute a known-good wheel speed sensor.
NO - Replace the original wheel speed sensor. ■
YES - Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector. If the VSA modulator-control
NO - If the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the VSA modulator-control
unit was substituted, replace the original VSA modulator-control unit. If any other DTCs are indicated, go
to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■
DTC 11-14:
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Power Source Malfunction
DTC 13-14:
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Power Source Malfunction
DTC 15-14:
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Power Source Malfunction
DTC 17-14:
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Power Source Malfunction
DTC 12-11:
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise or Intermittent Interruption
DTC 14-11:
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise or Intermittent Interruption
DTC 16-11:
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise or Intermittent Interruption
DTC 18-11:
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise or Intermittent Interruption
NOTE: These DTCs may be caused by electrical interference. Check for aftermarket devices installed in the vehicle when
these DTC are indicated.
YES - If the DTC 12-12, 14-12, 16-12, or 18-12 is indicated at the same time, do the DTC 12-12, 14-12, 16-12, or
18-12 troubleshooting. If DTC 12-12, 14-12, 16-12, or 18-12 is not indicated, go to Step 5 .
intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel speed
12-11 Right-front
14-11 Left-front
16-11 Right-rear
18-11 Left-rear

DTC 12-12:
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the Other Sensor Circuit
DTC 14-12:
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the Other Sensor Circuit
DTC 16-12:
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the Other Sensor Circuit
DTC 18-12:
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the Other Sensor Circuit
7. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector wheel speed sensor GND
terminals (see table).
Appropriate Terminal Other Terminals
12-12 No. 10 No. 6 No. 4 No. 8
14-12 No. 6 No. 10 No. 4 No. 8
16-12 No. 4 No. 10 No. 6 No. 8
18-12 No. 8 No. 10 No. 6 No. 4
YES - Repair short in the wires between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA modulator-control
unit.■
NO - Go to Step 8 .
8. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector.
DTC 12-21:
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
DTC 14-21:
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
DTC 16-21:
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
DTC 18-21:
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
2. Check the RIGHT-FRONT, LEFT-FRONT, RIGHT-REAR, LEFT-REAR WHEEL SPEED in the VSA DATA LIST with
the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 3 .
12-21 Right-front
14-21 Left-front
16-21 Right-rear
18-21 Left-rear

DTC 12-22:
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (30 km/h (19 mph) or More)
DTC 14-22:
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (30 km/h (19 mph) or More)
DTC 16-22:
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (30 km/h (19 mph) or More)
DTC 18-22:
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (30 km/h (19 mph) or More)
1. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle between 30 km/h (19 mph) and 50 km/h (31 mph) for 70 seconds or more.
the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 3 .
12-22 Right-front
14-22 Left-front
16-22 Right-rear
18-22 Left-rear

DTC 12-23:
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (0 to 15 km/h (0 to 9 mph))
DTC 14-23:
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (0 to 15 km/h (0 to 9 mph))
DTC 16-23:
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (0 to 15 km/h (0 to 9 mph))
DTC 18-23:
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error (0 to 15 km/h (0 to 9 mph))
1. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle between 1 km/h (1 mph) and 15 km/h (9 mph).
the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 3 .
12-23 Right-front
14-23 Left-front
16-23 Right-rear
18-23 Left-rear

DTC 21-11:
Right-front Magnetic Encoder Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
DTC 22-11:
Left-front Magnetic Encoder Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
DTC 23-11:
Right-rear Magnetic Encoder Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
DTC 24-11:
Left-rear Magnetic Encoder Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
6. Inspect the appropriate magnetic encoder for dirt or debris.
DTC Appropriate Magnetic Encoder Note
21-11 Right-front Remove the driveshaft outboard joint from
22-11 Left-front the appropriate wheel hub.
23-11 Right-rear Remove the hub bearing unit.
24-11 Left-rear
Is the magnetic encoder surface OK?

YES - Replace the wheel bearing (front) or the hub bearing unit (rear):■
Front: Replace the front wheel bearing.
Rear: Replace the rear hub bearing unit.
NO - Clean off dust or dirt from the appropriate magnetic encoder surface on the wheel bearing or the hub
bearing unit, then go to Step 1 and recheck. If the DTC is still present, replace the appropriate wheel
bearing or hub bearing unit.
VSA DTC Troubleshooting: 25-12, 25-13, 26-12, 26-13, 28-12, 28-13
DTC 25-12:
Yaw Rate Sensor Internal Circuit Malfunction (Open, Short)
DTC 25-13:
Yaw Rate Sensor Internal Circuit Malfunction
DTC 26-12:
Lateral Acceleration Sensor Internal Circuit Malfunction (Open, Short)
DTC 26-13:
Lateral Acceleration Sensor Internal Circuit Malfunction
DTC 28-12:
Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Internal Circuit Malfunction (Open, Short)
DTC 28-13:
Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Communication Error
YES - Replace the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor. ■
VSA DTC Troubleshooting: 25-17, 25-18, 25-19
DTC 25-17:
Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Power Source Voltage Malfunction
DTC 25-18:
Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Internal Circuit Malfunction
DTC 25-19:
Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Startup Time Malfunction
YES - If the DTC 61-01, 61-21, 61-22, 61-23, and/or 62-21 is indicated at the same time, check the battery
performance, and do the alternator and regulator circuit troubleshooting. If the DTC 61-01, 61-21, 61-22,
61-23, and/or 62-21 is not indicated at the same time, replace the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor. ■
DTC 25-21:
Yaw Rate Sensor Neutral Position Malfunction
DTC 25-23:
Yaw Rate Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption
DTC 26-21:
Lateral Acceleration Sensor Neutral Position Malfunction
DTC 26-23:
Lateral Acceleration Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption
DTC 28-21:
Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Neutral Position Malfunction
DTC 28-23:
Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption
4. Wait 60 seconds or more.
VSA DTC Troubleshooting: 25-22
DTC 25-22:
Yaw Rate Sensor Stuck
5. Test-drive the vehicle. Check the YAW RATE S in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS while driving in corners.
Does the indicated value change?
NO - Replace the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor. ■
DTC 25-24:
Yaw Rate Sensor Gain Low
DTC 25-25:
Yaw Rate Sensor Gain High
DTC 26-24:
Lateral Acceleration Sensor Gain Low
DTC 26-25:
Lateral Acceleration Sensor Gain High
DTC 28-24:
Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Gain Low
DTC 28-25:
Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Gain High
NOTE: When the vehicle is listed and driven on up speed and down speed repeatedly, it can cause this DTC.
DTC 26-22:
Lateral Acceleration Sensor Stuck
5. Test-drive the vehicle. Check the LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS while
driving in corners.
VSA DTC Troubleshooting: 27-11, 27-26
DTC 27-11:
Steering Angle Sensor DIAG Signal Error (Initial)
DTC 27-26:
Steering Angle Sensor DIAG Signal Error (Main)
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals between the steering angle
6. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector.
8. Check for continuity between body ground and steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No. 2, No. 3, No. 4,
and No. 5 individually.
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the steering angle sensor and the VSA modulator-control
unit.■
NO - Go to Step 9 .
9. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal and the steering angle sensor
5P connector terminal individually.
Sign VSA Modulator-control Unit 36P Steering Angle Sensor 5P
SVCC No. 9 No. 5
STR-A No. 11 No. 2
STR-D No. 26 No. 3
STR-B No. 27 No. 4
SGND No. 34 No. 1
NO - Repair open in the wire between the steering angle sensor and the VSA modulator-control unit.■
10. Substitute a known-good steering angle sensor.
NO - Replace the original steering angle sensor. ■
DTC 27-21:
Steering Angle Sensor Stuck Neutral Position
DTC 27-22:
Steering Angle Sensor Stuck Offset Position
2. Turn the steering wheel left and right 90 degrees or more. Check the STEERING ANGLE in the VSA DATA LIST
with the HDS.
Is there +90 ° or more, and −90 ° or less?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals between the steering angle
NO - Go to Step 3 .
7. Measure the voltage between body ground and steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No. 2, No. 3, and No.
4 individually.
YES - Repair short to power in the wire between the steering angle sensor and the VSA modulator-control unit.■
NO - Replace the steering angle sensor. ■
DTC 27-23:
Steering Angle Sensor Counter Malfunction
5. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times.
10. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 4.
YES - Repair short in the wires between the steering angle sensor and the VSA modulator-control unit.■
11. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No. 5 and No. 2, and No. 5 and No. 4
individually.
12. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2, and No. 1 and No. 4
individually.
DTC 27-24:
Steering Angle Sensor Exchange Malfunction
2. Turn the steering wheel one turn. Check the STEERING ANGLE in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there about 288−432 °?
DTC 28-22:
Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Stuck
5. Test-drive the vehicle. Check the LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION SENSOR in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS
while driving in corners.
VSA DTC Troubleshooting: 31-xx, 32-xx, 33-xx, 34-xx, 35-xx, 36-xx, 37-xx, 38-xx
DTC 31-xx * :
ABS Right-front Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 32-xx * :
ABS Right-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 33-xx * :
ABS Left-front Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 34-xx * :
ABS Left-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 35-xx * :
ABS Right-rear Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 36-xx * :
ABS Right-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 37-xx * :
ABS Left-rear Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 38-xx * :
ABS Left-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
Subcode Malfunction Note (DTC)

01 Solenoid Initial Pulse 31-01, 32-01, 33-01, 34-01, 35-01, 36-01, 37-01, 38-01
02 Initial Feedback Signal 31-02, 33-02, 35-02, 37-02
11 Feedback Signal 31-11, 33-11, 35-11, 37-11
21 Solenoid Pulse 31-21, 32-21, 33-21, 34-21, 35-21, 36-21, 37-21, 38-21
22 Solenoid Speculative 31-22, 32-22, 33-22, 34-22, 35-22, 36-22, 37-22, 38-22
23 Solenoid Stuck ON 31-23, 32-23, 33-23, 34-23, 35-23, 36-23, 37-23, 38-23
24 Feedback Signal/Solenoid Stuck ON 31-24, 33-24, 35-24, 37-24

DTC 41-21:
Right-front Wheel Lock
DTC 42-21:
Left-front Wheel Lock
DTC 43-21:
Right-rear Wheel Lock
DTC 44-21:
Left-rear Wheel Lock
The DTCs may be indicated under these conditions:
The vehicle goes into a spin.
The ABS or VSA continues to operate for a long time.
Snow, dirt, or debris build-up on the wheel speed sensor or magnetic encoder.
Misadjusted brake pedal position switch.
Contaminated brake fluid.
2. Turn the appropriate wheel by hand.
DTC Appropriate Wheel
41-21 Right-front
42-21 Left-front
43-21 Right-rear
44-21 Left-rear

NO - Go to Step 3 .
DTC 51-11:
Motor Lock
DTC 51-13:
4. Wait 5 seconds.
5. Operate any one of the four solenoids, as listed, in the VSA FUNCTION TEST five times with the HDS.
-LFT FT SOLENOID
-RT FT SOLENOID
-LFT REAR SOLENOID
-RT REAR SOLENOID

9. Wait 5 seconds.
-LFT FT SOLENOID
-RT FT SOLENOID
-LFT REAR SOLENOID
-RT REAR SOLENOID

DTC 51-12:
4. Check the DTCs with the HDS.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA modulator-control
6. Check the No. 58 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the No. 58 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box
and the VSA modulator-control unit.■
NO - Install a new No. 58 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to Step 10 .
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 58 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and the VSA
DTC 52-12:
Motor Stuck OFF
-LFT FT SOLENOID
-RT FT SOLENOID
-LFT REAR SOLENOID
-RT REAR SOLENOID

-LFT FT SOLENOID
-RT FT SOLENOID
-LFT REAR SOLENOID
-RT REAR SOLENOID

DTC 53-01:
DTC 53-12:
NO - Repair open in the wire between the VSA modulator-control unit and body ground (G402 *1 , G203 *2 ).■
*1: LHD model
*2: RHD model
DTC 54-03:
Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck ON
DTC 54-04:
Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck OFF (Initial)
DTC 54-21:
Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck OFF (Main)
Is the fuse blown?
and the VSA modulator-control unit.■
DTC 56-01:
Initial VIG FET Stuck OFF (Initial)
DTC 56-02:
Initial VIG FET Stuck ON
DTC 56-11:
VIG FET Stuck OFF (Main)
DTC 61-01:
VSA Modulator-control Unit Initial IG Low Voltage
DTC 61-21:
VSA Modulator-control Unit Power Source Low Voltage 1
DTC 61-22:
DTC 61-23:
5. Check and note BATTERY voltage in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS.
NOTE: If the voltage is below 9.5 V, check the battery, and troubleshoot the alternator regulator circuit.
Is the difference between the two voltage readings less then 3 V?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA modulator-control
unit 36P connector. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting. If the code resets after clearing, go to
Step 8 .
NO - Go to Step 8 .
DTC 62-21:
VSA Modulator-control Unit IG High Voltage
5. Check and note BATTERY voltage in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS.
NOTE: If the voltage is beyond 15.1 V, troubleshoot the alternator regulator circuit.
Is the difference between the two voltage readings less than 3 V?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA modulator-control
unit 36P connector. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting. If the code resets after clearing, go to
Step 8 .
NO - Go to Step 8 .
DTC 64-11:
Steering Angle Sensor Power Circuit Low Voltage
8. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor 5P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
unit.■
NO - Go to Step 9 .
DTC 64-12:
Steering Angle Sensor Power Circuit High Voltage
9. Measure the voltage between steering angle sensor 5P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
DTC 65-21:
Brake Fluid Level Stuck ON
NOTE: Bleeding the brake system while the ignition switch is ON can cause this DTC.
1. Check the brake fluid level in the master cylinder reservoir.
Is the brake fluid level OK?
NO - Do the brake pad inspection: Front, rear, check for brake fluid leaks or replace worn pads. Fill the fluid
reservoir to the correct level or replace the pads, then go to Step 2 and recheck.
6. Release the parking brake.
8. Check the brake system indicator in the gauge control module.
Does the indicator come on then go off?
NO - Go to Step 9 .
9. Check the BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate the BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH as OFF?
YES - Substitute a known-good gauge control module, then go to Step 1 and recheck. If no DTCs are indicated,
replace the original gauge control module.
10. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch 2P connector, then check the BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH in the VSA
DATA LIST.
Does the HDS indicate OFF?
YES - Replace the brake fluid reservoir tank (the brake fluid level switch is included).
12. Check for continuity between brake fluid level switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the gauge control module and the brake fluid level
switch.■
NO - Substitute a known-good gauge control module, then go to Step 1 and recheck. If no DTCs are indicated,
replace the original gauge control module.
DTC 66-11:
Pressure Sensor (Inside of VSA Modulator-control Unit) Malfunction
DTC 66-14:
DTC 66-16:
DTC 66-17:
DTC 66-18:
DTC 66-19:
DTC 66-12:
8. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor 5P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
unit.■
NO - Go to Step 9 .
12. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal No. 9 and steering angle sensor
5P connector terminal No. 5.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the steering angle sensor and the VSA modulator-control unit.■
DTC 66-15:
NOTE: Brake fluid leaks from brake system can cause this DTC. Check for brake fluid leaks first.
4. Turn all four wheels by hand.
NO - Go to Step 5 .
6. Check the BRAKE PRESS in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS while moving the brake pedal.
NO - Go to Step 7 .
DTC 68-21:
Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck OFF
2. Check the BRAKE PRESS in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS. Do not press the brake pedal.
Is there 10 MPa or less?
NO - Check for brake drag or a misadjusted brake pedal position switch. If they are normal, go to Step 20 .
3. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS while moving the brake pedal.
Does it indicate ON when the pedal is pressed, and OFF when the pedal is released?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals between the brake pedal
position switch 4P connector, ECM/PCM connector A (49P), and the VSA modulator-control unit 36P
connector. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting. ■
NO - Go to Step 4 .
6. Connect brake pedal position switch 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
8. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does it indicate ON?
YES - Check the brake pedal position switch adjustment. If it is OK, replace the brake pedal position switch .■
NO - Go to Step 9 .
Is the fuse blown?
12. Check for continuity between brake pedal position switch 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
and the brake pedal position switch.■
15. Check for continuity between brake pedal position switch 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the brake pedal position switch and the ECM/PCM.■
18. Measure the voltage between brake pedal position switch 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 24 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and the brake
pedal position switch.■
19. Check for continuity between brake pedal position switch 4P connector terminal No. 2 and ECM/PCM connector A
(49P) terminal No. 42.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM and the brake pedal position switch.■
DTC 68-22:
Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck ON
2. Check the BRAKE PRESS in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS. Do not press the brake pedal.
Is there 10 MPa or more?
YES - Check the brake pedal height. If the brake pedal height is OK, go to Step 10 .
NO - Go to Step 3 .
3. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS while moving the brake pedal.
Does it indicate ON when the pedal is pressed, and OFF when the pedal is released?
NO - Go to Step 4 .
4. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS, and disconnect the brake pedal position switch
4P connector.
Does the indicator change from ON to OFF?
YES - Replace the brake pedal position switch. ■
NO - Go to Step 5 .
YES - Repair short to power in the wire between the ECM/PCM and the brake pedal position switch.■
VSA DTC Troubleshooting: 71-21, 71-22, 71-23, 71-24, 71-25, 71-26, 71-27, 71-28, 71-29, 71-2A, 71-2B, 71-2C
DTC 71-21:
DTC 71-22:
DTC 71-23:
DTC 71-24:
DTC 71-25:
DTC 71-26:
DTC 71-27:
DTC 71-28:
DTC 71-29:
DTC 71-2A:
DTC 71-2B:
DTC 71-2C:
NOTE: The DTC will be indicated when the vehicle has a different diameter tyre(s) compared to the other tyres.
DTC Sectional Note
71-24 Left-front and left-rear
71-25 Right-front and left-front
71-26 Right-rear and left-rear
71-2A Left-front and left-rear
71-2B Right-front and left-front
71-2C Right-rear and left-rear
1. Check the tyres for proper inflation and the correct size.
Is DTC 71-21, 71-22, 71-23, 71-24, 71-25, 71-26, 71-27, 71-28, 71-29, 71-2A, 71-2B, or 71-2C indicated?
YES - Replace tyres as needed until all their diameters match.■
DTC 81-07:
software substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit.
VSA DTC Troubleshooting: 81-11, 81-52, 81-54, 81-56, 81-58
DTC 81-11:
DTC 81-52:
DTC 81-54:
DTC 81-56:
DTC 81-58:
VSA DTC Troubleshooting: 81-3D, 81-3E, 81-59
DTC 81-3D:
DTC 81-3E:
DTC 81-59:
Is DTC 81-3D, 81-3E, or 81-59 indicated?
Is DTC 81-3D, 81-3E, or 81-59 indicated?
DTC 81-51:
DTC 81-53:
DTC 81-55:
DTC 81-57:
8. Measure the voltage between body ground and the appropriate VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminals
(see table).
81-51 No. 23
81-53 No. 19
81-55 No. 18
81-57 No. 21

YES - Repair short to power in the wire between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA modulator-
control unit.■
NO - Go to Step 9 .
VSA DTC Troubleshooting: 81-xx
DTC 81-xx * :
*: Any two-character subcode (Except these combinations: DTC 81-07, 81-11, 81-3D, 81-3E, 81-51, 81-52, 81-53,
81-54, 81-55, 81-56, 81-57, 81-58, and 81-59)

YES - If the DTC 81-07, 81-11, 81-3D, 81-3E, 81-51, 81-52, 81-53, 81-54, 81-55, 81-56, 81-57, 81-58, or 81-59 is
indicated at the same time, do the appropriate troubleshooting. If DTC 81-07, 81-11, 81-3D, 81-3E, 81-51,
81-52, 81-53, 81-54, 81-55, 81-56, 81-57, 81-58, or 81-59 is not indicated. Go to Step 5 .
DTC 83-13:
ECM/PCM Communication Error (Engine Malfunction)
DTC 83-14:
ECM/PCM Communication Error (A/T Malfunction)
connector A (49P) and the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
DTC 84-21:
VSA Sensor Neutral Position not Writing
DTC 86-01:
F-CAN Bus-off Malfunction
9. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal and ECM/PCM connector A (49P)
terminal (see table).
Sign VSA Modulator-control Unit 36P ECM/PCM Connector A (49P)
CAN-L No. 1 No. 4
CAN-H No. 14 No. 3
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM and the VSA modulator-control unit.■
VSA DTC Troubleshooting: 86-11, 86-21, 86-22, 86-23, 86-24, 86-25, 84-41
DTC 86-11:
F-CAN Communication with ECM/PCM Malfunction
DTC 86-21:
DTC 86-22:
DTC 86-23:
DTC 86-24:
DTC 86-25:
DTC 86-41:
F-CAN Communication with EAT/TCM Malfunction
Is DTC 86-11, 86-21, 86-22, 86-23, 86-24, 86-25, and/or 86-41 indicated?
YES - If the DTC 86-01 is indicated at the same time, do the DTC 86-01 troubleshooting. If the DTC 86-01 is not
indicated, go to Step 5 .
intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals between ECM/PCM
9. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal and ECM/PCM connector A
Sign VSA Modulator-control Unit 36P ECM/PCM Connector A (49P)
CAN-L No. 1 No. 4
CAN-H No. 14 No. 3
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM and the VSA modulator-control unit.■
DTC 86-31:
F-CAN Communication with Gauge Control Module Malfunction
intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals between the gauge control
module 32P connector and the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
Do the gauge indicators come on?
NO - Do the gauge control module troubleshooting. ■
9. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal and gauge control module
Sign VSA Modulator-control Unit 36P Gauge Control Module 32P
CAN-L No. 1 No. 29
CAN-H No. 14 No. 30
YES - Check for loose terminals in the gauge control module 32P connector. If necessary, substitute a known-
good gauge control module, then go to Step 1 and recheck. If no DTCs are indicated, replace the original
gauge control module. If DTC 86-31 resets, go to Step 10 .
NO - Repair open in the wire between the gauge control module and the VSA modulator-control unit.■
DTC 86-71:
F-CAN Communication with Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Malfunction
intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals at the yaw rate-
lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 5P connector and the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector.
Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting. ■
5. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 5P connector.
7. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal and the yaw rate-
lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 5P connector terminal (see table).
Sign VSA Modulator-control Unit 36P Yaw Rate-lateral/Longitudinal
Connector Terminal Acceleration Sensor 5P Connector
Terminal
CAN-L No. 1 No. 4
CAN-H No. 14 No. 3
NO - Repair open in the wire between the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor and the VSA modulator-control
unit.■
9. Measure the voltage between yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 5P connector terminal No. 1 and
body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and the
yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor.■
11. Reconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 5P connector.
13. Measure the voltage between yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 5P connector terminal No. 5 and
body ground.
Is there 0.1 V or less?
NO - Repair open in the wire between the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor and body ground
(G503).■
DTC 107-22:
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to cool the VSA modulator-control unit, and wait 1 hour or more.
DTC 108-21:
Steering Angle Sensor Malfunction
6. Substitute a known-good steering angle sensor.
NO - Replace the original steering angle sensor. ■
DTC 116-11:
The Functional Abnormalities of i-SHIFT System
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on a straight section of road, not a lift.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-control
unit 36P connector. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting.
5. Check for i-SHIFT system DTCs with the HDS.
Are any i-SHIFT system DTCs indicated?
YES - Do the applicable troubleshooting for the i-SHIFT system, then go to Step 6 .
NO - Go to Step 9 .
NO - Troubleshooting is complete.■
VSA DTC Troubleshooting: 121-xx, 122-xx, 123-xx, 124-xx
DTC 121-xx * :
VSA Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 122-xx * :
DTC 123-xx * :
DTC 124-xx * :
DTC Sectional Valve

121 -01 Right-front and left-rear Regulator
-02
-11
-21
-24
122 -01 Suction
-21
-22
-23
123 -01 Left-front and right-rear Regulator
-02
-11
-21
-24
124 -01 Suction
-21
-22
-23

Is DTC 121-xx, 122-xx, 123-xx, or 124-xx indicated?
Is DTC 121-xx, 122-xx, 123-xx, or 124-xx indicated?
Special Information
Special Information
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow instructions.
NOTE: Gives helpful information.
Detailed descriptions of standard workshop procedures, safety principles and service operations are not included. Please note that this manual does
contain warnings and cautions against some specific service methods which could cause PERSONAL INJURY, damage a vehicle, or make it unsafe.
Please understand that these warnings cannot cover all conceivable ways in which service, whether or not recommended by Honda, might be done or of
the possible hazardous consequences of each conceivable way, nor could Honda investigate all such ways. Anyone using service procedures or tools,
whether or not recommended by Honda, must satisfy himself thoroughly that neither personal safety or vehicle safety will be jeopardized.
All information contained in this manual is based on the latest product information available at the time of printing. We reserve the right to make changes
at any time without notice. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text, figures and tables.
HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.
Service Publication Office
All Rights Reserved

Symbols
Replacement
The welding symbols in the removal/installation have these meanings.
: 2-Plate spot welding
: MIG plug welding
: MIG welding
L= Welding length Unit: mm (in.)
( ): The number of welds
Body Dimensional Drawings
Body measuring dimensions show the distance between the forward or upper edge of positioning bosses and/or holes shown in the detail sketches.
However, the measuring points in the frame repair chart are always the centers of the holes.
Rust Black
Prevention
dots: Measuring point
The sketch shows the areas where sealer is to be applied.
Black Dot
: Sealing locations
(19)
WHEELHOUSE
(5) UPPER
L = 10 (0.4) EXTENSION
DAMPER
HOUSING
3-Plate spot
Forward Forward
Forward welding
(15)
4-Plate spot
welding
Detail
Sketch 2-Plate spot
welding
C DetailF
Sketch
Fillet welding
Butt welding
MIG plug welding

L = 330 (13.0)
SRS Information
This model has an SRS which includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard above the glove box, the seat belt
tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, the side airbags in the front seat-backs, and the side curtain airbags in the sides of the roof. The SRS unit is separate
from the airbag assembly and has built-in sensors. The following precautions should be observed when doing sheet metal work, paint work, and repair work around
the locations of the SRS components.
The SRS unit (including the safing sensor and the impact sensor) is located under the dashboard and the side impact sensors are located in each side sill
and rear wheel arch. The front impact sensors are located behind the right and left ends of the front bumper. Avoid any strong impact with a hammer or other
tools when repairing the front side frame, the lower part of the dashboard, the side sill, and rear wheel arch. Do not apply heat to these areas with a torch,
etc.
Take extra care when painting or doing body work in the area below the center pillar. Do not expose the seat belt retractor and tensioner to heat guns,
welding, or spraying equipment.
SRS electrical wiring harnesses and connectors are identified with yellow color coding. Take care when repairing this area. Prevent damage to the harness.
Do not apply heat of more than 100 °C (212 °F) when drying painted surfaces anywhere around the SRS components locations.
If strong impact or high temperature need to be applied to the areas around the locations of SRS components, remove the components before performing the
repair work.
If any of the SRS related components are damaged or deformed, be sure to replace them.
NOTE: For after-deployment procedures, and removal and replacement of SRS related components, refer to the Fit/Jazz Shop Manual.
LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR

(FIRST)
SRS INDICATOR
LEFT FRONT
LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG IMPACT SENSOR
RIGHT FRONT
IMPACT SENSOR
FRONT PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG
LEFT SIDE AIRBAG

RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
(FIRST)
LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR

(SECOND) UNDER-DASH FUSE/
(SECOND) RELAY BOX
OPDS SENSOR/
SEAT-BACK RIGHT SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG CABLE REEL
LEFT SIDE SEAT DRIVER'S AIRBAG

BELT TENSIONER
OPDS UNIT DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT SITTING SWITCH/ SRS UNIT
SEAT CUSHION PAD
RIGHT SIDE AIRBAG

RIGHT SIDE SEAT BELT TENSIONER
SRS Component Replacement/Inspection After Deployment
NOTE:
Before doing any SRS repairs, check the DTCs, refer to the appropriate Fit/Jazz Shop Manual, for the less obvious deployed components (seat
belt tensioners, front impact sensors, side airbag sensors, etc.)
Do not replace the OPDS unit unless it is physically damaged or a specific fault was found during DTC troubleshooting in the appropriate Fit/Jazz
Shop Manual.
After a collision where the seat belt tensioners deployed, replace these items:
SRS unit
After a collision where the front airbag(s) deployed, replace these items:
SRS unit
Deployed airbag(s)
After a collision where the side airbag(s) deployed, replace these items:
SRS unit
Deployed side airbag(s)
Complete seat frame
After a collision where a side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the items for the side(s) that deployed:
SRS unit
Deployed side curtain airbag(s)
Seat belt tensioner(s)
Front pillar trim
Center pillar upper trim
Quarter pillar trim
Headliner
Front grab handle
Rear grab handle
All related trim clips
Sunvisor
After a moderate to severe side or rear collision, inspect for any damage on the side curtain airbag or other related components. Replace the components
as needed.
After a collision, where a side curtain airbag has deployed, replace all trim clips on that side, even if they appear to be undamaged. Replace the clips on
these parts:
Front pillar trim
Quarter pillar trim
During the repair process, inspect these areas:
Inspect all the SRS wire harnesses. Replace, do not repair, any damaged harnesses.
Inspect the cable reel for heat damage. If there is any damage, replace the cable reel.
After the vehicle is completely repaired, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). If the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off, the SRS
is OK. If the indicator does not function properly, use the HDS to read the DTC, refer to the appropriate Fit/Jazz Shop Manual. If you cannot retrieve a
code, do the SRS Symptom Troubleshooting in the appropriate Fit/Jazz Shop Manual.
Battery Terminal Disconnection/Reconnection
Disconnection
NOTE: Some system store data in memory is lost when the battery is disconnected. Do the following procedures before disconnecting the battery.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code(s) for the audio and/or the navigation system (if equipped).
NOTE: For some models, it maybe necessary to write down the audio presets (AM and FM), because the audio unit does not retain the presets
after the battery is disconnected.
3. Disconnect and isolate the negative cable (A) from the battery.
NOTE: Always disconnect the negative cable from the battery first.
4. Disconnect the positive cable (B) from the battery.
Reconnection
NOTE: Some system store data in memory is lost when the battery is disconnected.
A
Do the following procedures to restore the systems back to normal
operation.
1. Clean the battery terminals.
2. Test the battery; refer to the appropriate Fit/Jazz Shop Manual.
3. Reconnect the positive cable (A) to the battery (B) first, then reconnect the negative cable (C) to the battery.
B
NOTE: Always connect the positive cable to the battery first.
4. Apply multipurpose grease to the terminals to prevent corrosion.
5. Install the terminal cover (D).
2.9−5.9 N·m
D (0.3−0.6 kgf·m, 2.1−4.4 lbf·ft)
6. Enter the anti-theft code(s) for the audio system and/or the navigation system (if equipped).
7. Enter the audio presets (if applicable).
8. Set the clock (for vehicles without navigation).
B
Identification Number Locations
NOTE: The illustration shows the RHD model, LHD model is similar.
Front Left doorjamb
Vehicle Identification Vehicle ldentification Number
Number (VIN) (Except KP model)(VIN) (KP model)
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Engine Number Automatic Manual

Transmission Transmission
Number Number
Lift and Support Points
NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components such as the suspension from the rear of the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall safety stands.
When substantial weight is removed from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change causing the vehicle to tip forward on the lift.
Vehicle Lift
1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A) under the vehicle's front support points (B) and rear support points (C).
2. Raise the lift a few inches, and rock the vehicle gently to be sure it is firmly supported.
3. Raise the lift to full height, and inspect the vehicle support lift points for solid contact with the lift blocks.
Safety Stands
To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same support points (B and C) as for a vehicle lift. Always use safety stands when working on or under any vehicle
that is supported only by a jack.
Floor Jack
1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the shift lever in reverse for manual transmission, or in the
P position for automatic transmission.
2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.
3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking bracket (A) or rear jacking bracket (B). Center the jacking bracket on the jack lift platform (C), and jack up the
vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands under it.
B support points and adjust them so the vehicle is level.
4. Position the safety stands under the
5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.
C
C
A
A
B
C
Body Specifications/Wheel Alignment
Front Wheel Alignment

Camber 0 ° 00 '±1 °
Caster 3 ° 20 '±1 °
Total toe 0±3 mm (0±0.12 in.)
Wheel turning angle In 40 ° 19 '±2 °
Out 33 ° 19 '±1 ° (Reference)
Unit: mm (in.)
Rear Wheel Alignment

1,490
Camber −1 ° 00±1 °
Total toe IN 2.5 mm±2.5 mm (0.10±0.10 in.) 1,695 mm (66.73 in. )
Unit: mm (in.)
2,500 mm (98.42 in. ) 1,475
L13Z1 Engine models: 3,900 mm (153.5 in. )

L15A7 Engine models: 3,920 mm (154.3 in. )
Exterior Parts Removal/Installation
NOTE:
When removing the front fender, do not deform the upper portion (A) of the front fender.
When adjusting the door in or out, replace the mounting bolts (B) (90102-SFA-305).
Apply spot sealer to the mating surface, then install the front fender, the hood, the doors, the tailgate, and the hinges.
Before attaching the front fender, apply sealer to the mating surface of the front fender and front pillar outer panel.
OUTER PANEL FRONT FENDER

REAR DAMPER
STIFFENER
SEALER OUTER PANEL
8 x 1.25 mm
FRONT FENDER 22 N·m TAILGATE HINGE
Z X (2.26kgf·m,
x 1.0 mm
16 lbf·ft)
[SECTION: XX] 18 N·m
(1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
9mm (0.35 in. )
X 5mm
(0.2 in. ) OUTER PANEL TAILGATE
Z
Round
FRONT FENDER end
6 x 1.0 mm [SECTION: ZZ]
18 N·m 8 x 1.25 mm
(1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft) 22 N·m
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) 10 x 1.25 mm
38 N·m
BATTERY BASE
HOOD
UPPER REAR
HOOD HINGE DOOR HINGE
6 x 1.0 mm
18 N·m REAR BUMPER
(1.8 kgf·m, EXTENSION
13 lbf·ft) (KQ model)
REAR DOOR
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) UPPER FRONT
DOOR HINGE
(A)
8 x 1.25 mm
LOWER REAR 29 N·m
DOOR HINGE (3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft)
FRONT FENDER (B) 8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m
FRONT DOOR
8 x 1.25 mm
LOWER FRONT 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
FRONT BUMPER DOOR HINGE
BEAM
(B) 8 x 1.25 mm
6 x 1.0 mm 8 x 1.25 mm 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
22 N·m
Front Body Construction
NOTE: Confirm that the sold as repair parts, refer to the appropriate Parts Catalog.
NOTE:
The parts marked with numbers are sold as repair parts.
The parts marked with letters are not sold separately and are shown only for reference.
[ ]: Thickness unit: mm (in.) (1) (7)
High-tension steel sheet: Tensioner strength 340 to 590 MPa.
No. Part Name Tensioner strength (MPa) Zinc-plating
(1) Hood Skin [0.6] (0.024) 340
Frame [0.5] (0.020) 270
a
(2) Front Fender [0.8] (0.031) 270
(3) Front Bulkhead Comp. b
-1 Front Bulkhead Upper Frame Set [0.6] (0.024) 270
(8)
-2 Front Bulkhead Side Stay Set [0.6] (0.024) 270
-3 Front Bulkhead Lower Cross-member Set [0.6] (0.024) 270 c
-4 Front Bulkhead (6)
Lower Cross-member Plate [0.6] (0.024) 270
(4) Front Wheelhouse Upper Member [0.7] (0.028) 590
(5) Front Damper Housing Comp.
a: Front Damper Housing [0.8] (0.031) e 270 ○
Rear d
b: Front Damper Base [2.0] (0.079) 270
-1 L. side: Wheelhouse Sub Set [0.8] Front(0.031) 270
R. side: Wheelhouse Gusset [0.8] (0.031) 270
-2 Front Dumper Extension [0.8] (0.031) 590
-3 Front Wheelhouse Lower Extension Set
c: Wheelhouse Lower Member [0.8] (0.031) b 590
d: Wheelhouse Lower Extension [0.8] (0.031) a 590
(6) Front Side Frame Comp. b c -2
a: Front Side Frame [1.8] (0.071)/Backplate, front a
-4 [1.4] (0.055)/ Rear [1.6] (0.063) 590
-3 (0.079)-5
b: Side Frame Extension [2.0] 590
-2 -1
c: Side Cross-member [1.8] (0.071) 440 ○
d: Outrigger [1.2] (0.047) 440 ○
-1 (4)
e: Inside Sill Front Extension [1.6] (0.063) 590
-1 Bumper Extension Bracket [1.8] (0.031) (5) 590
-2 Side Frame Gusset Plate [1.6] (0.063) (3) 590
-3 Side Frame Gusset [0.8] (0.031) 590
d -3
-4 Side Frame Support [1.0] (0.039) 270
-5 Bumper Beam Extension Outer Bracket [1.6] (0.063) 590 ○
(7) Dashboard Upper Comp.
a: Dashboard Upper [0.8] (0.031) 270
b: Windshield Lower [0.7] (0.028) 270
c: Dashboard Upper Side Driver's side [2.0] (0.079) c 590
Member Passenger's
-1 side [1.2] (0.047) 590
(8) Dashboard Lower [0.9] (0.035)/Extension [1.4] (0.055) 440
-2
-3
(2)
-4
Roof and Side Panel Construction
NOTE:
The parts marked (1)
with numbers are sold as repair parts.
[ ]: Thickness unit: mm (in.)
High-tension steel sheet: Tensioner strength 340 to 590 MPa.
C
No. Part Name Tensioner strength Zinc-plating
(11)
(MPa)
(1) Roof Panel [0.65] (0.026) f -1 270
(2) Side Sill Outer Panel [0.65] (0.026) e 270
(3) Front Side(9)Outer Panel Set [0.65] (0.026) 270
(4) Rear Side Outer Panel Set 270
-2
(5) Front Pillar Upper StiffenerDriver's side [1.8] (0.071)/Passenger's side [1.0] (0.039) 590
(6) Center Pillar Stiffener Set
a: Roof Side Stiffener [0.9] (0.035) 590
b: Center Pillara Upper Stiffener [1.6] (0.063) b 590
b a (8)
c: Center Pillar Lower Stiffener [0.9] (0.035) 590
(7) Side Sill Stiffener Set
a: Front Pillar Lower StiffenerDriver's side [1.6] (0.063)/Passenger's side [1.0] (0.039) 590
b: Front Pillar Lower Corner Stiffener [1.4] (0.055) 440
c: Side Sill Stiffener [1.6] (0.063) 590 a
(10)
d: Side Sill Rear Stiffener [1.2] (0.047) 590
(8) Rear Pillar Gutter Comp. (4)
c Upper Gutter [1.0] (0.039) d b
a: Rear Pillar 270
b: Rear Pillar Middle Gutter [0.65] (0.026) (3) 270
(6)
c: Rear Pillar Lower Gutter/Lower Gutter Extension [0.65] (0.026) 270
d: Rear Pillar Gutter c
d Upper Stiffener [0.7] (0.028) 270
(9) Front Pillar Inner Comp.
a: Front Pillar Inner Upper Driver's side [2.0] (0.079) *1 /Passenger's side [1.0] (0.039) *2 590 *1
a 440 *2
b: Front
(5) Pillar Inner Upper Extension [1.0] (0.039) 270
c: Front Pillar Inner Lower [1.4] (0.055) 590
d: Front Jack-up Base [1.6] (0.063) 590
b side [0.8] (0.031)
e: Roof Side RairDriver's side [1.4] (0.055)/Passenger's 590
f: Roof Side Rear Rail [0.8] (0.031) 440
(10) Center Inner Pillar [0.9] (0.035) 590
(11) Rear Inner Panel Comp.
-1 Rear Inner Panel [0.6] (0.024) 270
a: Side Sill Rear End Plate [1.0] (0.039) c 270
(7)
b: Rear Inner Stiffener [2.0] (0.079) 270
c: Rear Inner Upper Panel [0.75] (0.030) 270
-2 Rear Wheelhouse [0.7] (0.028) 270
(12) FrontaDoor Skin [0.7] (0.028) 270
Panel, Front [1.2] (0.047)/Rear [0.65] (0.026) 270
(13) Rear Door Skin [0.7] (0.028) 270
Panel, Front [1.2] (0.047)/Rear [0.65] (0.026) 270
(2)
d
b (13)
Rear
(12) Front
Front Rear
Floor and Rear Body Construction
NOTE:
The parts marked with numbers are sold as repair parts.
[ ]: Thickness unit: mm (in.)
High-tension steel sheet: Tensioner strength 340 to 590 MPa. (8)
No. Part Name Tensioner strength Zinc-plating

(MPa)
(1) Front Floor Comp.
a: Front Floor [0.6] (0.024) 270
b: Front Floor Frame [1.8] (0.071) (7) 590
a
c: Floor Center Stiffener Tunnel [0.7] (0.028) 270
Cross-member [1.6] (0.063) -2 590
-1
d: Center Cross-member [1.6] (0.063) 590
-1 Front Inside Sill [1.4] (0.055) 590
e: Front Seat Outer Bracket [1.8] (0.071) 590
f: Inside Sill Gusset [1.6] (0.063) (2) 590 ○
(2) Rear Floor Panel [0.6] (0.024) 270
(3) Rear Frame Comp.
-1 Rear Frame B [1.0] (0.039) 440
-2 Right Side Frame End Bulkhead [1.8] (0.071) 270
-3 Rear Eye Bolt Upper Stiffener [1.2] (0.047) 270
-4 Rear Eye Bolt Lower Stiffener [1.4] (0.055) 270 (3)
-5 Rear Eye Bolt Stiffener [2.6] (0.10) 440
-6 Left Side Frame End Bulkhead [1.2] (0.047) 270
b
(4) Middle Floor Cross-member (6) Comp. a c
a: Middle Floor Cross-member Stiffener [0.7] (0.028) 270
b: Middle Seat Rear Cross-member [1.0] (0.039) -3 440
c: Rear Frame A [1.2] (0.047) 590
d: Side Sill Extension [1.4] (0.055) (5) 590 ○
(5) Rear Floor Side Panel Comp. -6
a: Rear Floor Side [0.9] (0.035) 440
b: Rear Floor Side Extension [0.5] (0.02) c 270
-2
c: Rear Floor Side Gusset [1.2] (0.047) d -5 270
(4) -4
(6) Rear Floor Extension [0.6] (0.024) -1 270 ○
(7) Rear Panel Comp. b
a: Rear(1)Panel Panel [0.6] (0.024) 270
Upper Stiffener [0.7] (0.028) 270
-1 Rear Panel Side Stiffener [1.0] (0.039) 270
-2 Rear Bumper Face Stiffener [1.2] f (0.047) 270
(8) Tailgate Skin [0.65] (0.026) a 270
e Frame [0.6] (0.024) 270
a
-1
c d
b
Door and Bumper Reinforcement Beams
The door and bumper reinforcement beams used on Fit/Jazz vehicles are made from a metal equivalent to high-strength steel.
If high-strength steel is heated, the strength of the steel will be reduced. If high-strength steel is damaged, for example. In an accident, and the door and bumper
reinforcement beams are bent, the beams may crack when attempting to straighten them. If a door beam is damaged, the whole door panel assembly should be
replaced.
For this reason, the door and bumper reinforcement beams should NEVER be replaced; they should be replaced if they are damaged.
REAR DOOR
FRONT BUMPER REINFORCEMENT BEAM
REINFORCEMENT BEAM Do not repair.
Do not repair.
FRONT DOOR
REINFORCEMENT BEAM
Do not repair.
Zinc-plated Steel Plate Repair
The zinc-plated steel plate used in some panels of the Fit/Jazz require different repair techniques than ordinary steel plate. Refer to ‘‘Front Body Construction'' ,
‘‘Roof and Side Panel Construction'' , ‘‘Floor and Rear Body Construction'' for the location of the zinc-plated panels.
1. Before spot welding the zinc-plated steel plate, remove the paint from both sides of the flange to be welded. Apply sealer to the flange after welding.
NOTE: Seal the sandedZINC
surfaces thoroughly
PLATING to prevent rust.
(5−6 microns)
2. The electric continuity properties for zinc-plated steel plates differ from ordinary steel plates. When spot welding, increase the current by 10 to 20 %, or
increase the resistance welding time. Also increase the number of weld spots by 10 to 20 %.
NOTE: The MIG welding procedures for zinc-plated steel plates are similar to ordinary steel plates.
STEEL PLATE
3. Before applying putty or body filler to the zinc-plated steel plates, sand the zinc plating thoroughly to promote adhesion and prevent blistering.
NOTE: Use only epoxy-based putties and fillers on zinc-plated steel plates, and follow the manufacturer's specifications.
4. When doing paint work, protect the ground wire and the ground wire mounting hole threads with a bolt or a plug.
GROUND
WIRE
SPECIAL BOLT
GROUND WIRE
MOUNTING HOLE
PLUG
High-tension Steel Sheet Framed Area
The new high-tension steel sheet has greater tensioner strength than the conventional high-tension steel sheet. Although it's a thinner sheet, it maintains the same
strength capacity as the previous thicker ones. Because the manufacturing press process has improved, the usage area has expanded. For this vehicle, the new
high-tension steel sheet is used for its main frame and its cabin construction part to make the new model lightweight and to strengthen the safety capacity of the
high-crush absorption frame.
: New high-tension (590 MPa) steel sheet

CENTER INNER PILLAR
SIDE SILL EXTENSION
ROOF SIDE RAIL
ROOF SIDE STIFFENER
FRONT FLOOR CENTER GUIDE STAY
CROSS-MEMBER REINFORCEMENT
FRONT FLOOR
FRAME
INSIDE SILL
FRONT PILLAR
INNER UPPER
FRONT PILLAR
INNER LOWER
INSIDE SILL
EXTENSION
REAR FRAME A
SIDE SILL REAR

STIFFENER
SIDE SILL STIFFENER
CENTER PILLAR STIFFENER

FRONT PILLAR UPPER STIFFENER
FRONT SIDE FRONT PILLAR LOWER STIFFENER

FRAME DASHBOARD UPPER SIDE MEMBER
FRONT FLOOR
TUNNEL CROSS- WHEELHOUSE UPPER MEMBER
MEMBER FRONT DAMPER EXTENSION
SIDE FRAME GUSSET/ WHEELHOUSE LOWER EXTENSION/
GUSSET PLATE LOWER MEMBER
Precautions for High-tension Steel Parts Area Repair
The new high-tension steel parts of the frame are all spot welded together. In order to disassemble, drill a hole in the sections that are spot welded
together with a very sharp spot weld bit.
The new high-tension steel sheet is more rigid than previous steel sheets, making it difficult to strengthen. When an automobile's frame is partially
constructed with the new high-tension steel sheet, it should be strengthened using an accurate frame straightening system. Inspect the body and
frame once the repair is complete for stress-related damage to the sections that are not made from the new high-tension steel.
High-tension steel has more memory than normal steel, and it is necessary to monitor the body dimensions closely during the straightening
process.
Spot welding is a acceptable for replacement parts as long as the proper number of welds is used in the repair. For replacement part welding
locations, refer to ‘‘Replacement'' in this manual. If spot welding does not provide acceptable repairs, plug the welds using an MIG welder.
AIR DRILL
SPOT CUTTER
SPOT CUTTER GRINDING

MACHINE
Headlight Bracket Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
When the Front bracket (A), the upper bracket (B) and/or the lower bracket (C) of the headlight assembly (D) are broken, it can be reinstalled using the
repair brackets if it meets this criteria;
There is no damage to the headlight assembly.
The sealing of the headlight lens and headlight housing is maintained.
Replacement
1. Remove the front bumper. B
2. Remove the headlight assembly.

3. Cut or grind off the damaged front bracket (A), the upper bracket (B) and/or the lower bracket (C) so that the bosses (D) of the headlight housing
(E) are left asDshown. After removing the damaged bracket, finish the cut area with 400 grit sandpaper. Take care not to scratch the headlight
assembly.
Front Bracket
A Bracket
Upper
Lower Bracket
A
B repair bracket (B) and/or the lower repair bracket (C) on the bosses of the headlight housing (D), then
4. Install the front repair bracket (A), the upper
fasten it with the screws (E) provided with the repair bracket. C
Front Repair Bracket

Upper Repair Bracket
Lower
E Repair Bracket A
5.E Reinstall the headlight assembly.
B
6. Reinstall the front bumper. D
7. Adjust the headlights to local requirements.

C D
E
E E
E
D
C
D
E D D
Paint Safety Precautions
Most paints contain substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the container.
Observe the following precautions to maintain a safe painting work area.

Wear an approved respirator and eye protection when painting.
Wear approved gloves and appropriate clothing when painting. Avoid contact with skin.
Spray paint only in a well ventilated area.
Cover spilled paint with sand, or wipe it up at once.
If paint gets in your mouth or on your skin, rinse and wash thoroughly with water. If paint gets in your eyes, flush with water and get prompt
medical attention.
After the painting work is finished, wash your face and gargle with water.
Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames, or cigarettes.
Paint General Information
The 3-coat·3-bake (3C·3B) paint finish gives the Fit/Jazz a deep gloss and stunning finish. This manual provides information on paint defects, repair, and refinishing.
Throughout, the objective is to explain in a simple yet comprehensive manner the basic items you should know about paint repairs. Select the correct material for
the defect and repaint or refinish in the correct manner as described in this manual.
Basic Rules for Repairing a Paint Finish
To repair paint damage, always use the 2-part acrylic urethane paints designated; polish and bake each of the three coats, as in production, to maintain the original
film thickness, and to assure the same quality as the original finish.
Outline of factory painting process
Features In Each Work Process
Pretreatment and electrodeposition

Pretreatment
Electrodeposition (Chipping Primer)
Top coat
of primer Intermediate coat
In the pretreatment process, the entire body is degreased, cleaned, and coated with zinc phosphate by dipping.
After the body has been cleaned with pure water, it is placed in an electrolytic bath of soluble primer (cationic electrodeposition).
This produces a thorough corrosion inhibiting coating on the inner surface and corners of the body, pillars, sills, and panel joints.
Chipping primer is then applied to the most susceptible areas.
Intermediate coat
The intermediate coat is applied to the prepared surface to further protect against damage.
Top coat
Enamel paint and either polyester or acrylic resin paint are used in the top coat for higher solidity, smoothness, brightness, and weather resistance.
Sectional view of paint coats
CLEAR COAT 3-COAT PEARL PAINT

(White pearl)
ENAMEL COAT
CLEAR COAT
INTERMEDIATE COAT
PEARL BASE COAT
About
120 microns
(0.12 mm)
CHIPPING PRIMER COLOR BASE COAT
UNDERCOAT
(Electrodeposition)
BASE METAL
Color Chart Paint Specifications
Paint code NH-578 NH-700M NH-630M B-92P Y-66P R-513 BG-53M
Color Name Taffeta White Alabaster Silver M. Silver Stone M. Nighthawk Black P. Helios Yellow P. Rallye Red Brilliant Sky M.
P: Pearl Paint/M: Metallic Paint
ROOF MOLDING DOOR OUTER SASH TAPE

Black (NH-70 Gloss 20) Black (NH-70 Gloss 20)
FRONT PILLAR CORNER TRIM
Paint: Black (NH-555 Gloss 80)
Without paint: Black (NH-70 Gloss 20)
FUEL FILL DOOR
Body color
COWL COVER
Black (NH-696)
FRONT GRILLE
· MOLDING:
Stone silver metallic (NH-642M)
· BASE:
Bumper dark gray (NH-533)
DOOR PROTECTOR
MOLDINGS
Body color
SIDE SILL PANEL

Body color
FRONT BUMPER LOWER GRILLE
FRONT BUMPER
FRONT BUMPER LID Body color
REAR DOOR PILLAR TRIM
Black (NH-70 Gloss 20)
DOOR SASH OUTER TRIMS
REAR LICENSE TRIM

DOOR MIRROR
· MIRROR HOUSING COVER:
Body color
· Housing:
REAR BUMPER
Body color
DOOR OUTER HANDLES

Body color
REAR BUMPER LOWER TRIM
Features of Plastic Materials
Check each of the plastic parts for solvent resistance and heat resistance before you do any repair work.
Select the repair material according to materials of the plastic parts.
Alcohol can be used for degreasing in small amounts, and for short periods of time. Do not soak.
Contact your paint and material supplier for other recommended cleaners for the type of plastic you are working on.
Standard Symbol Name Heat Resistance Note
Temperature °F (°C)
AAS Acrylonitrile acrylic styrene 176 (80)
ABS Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene 176 (80)
AES Acrylonitrile ethylene styrene 176 (80)
A/EPDM/S Acrylonitrile/ethylene propylene diene 176 (80)
rubber/styrene
ASA Acrylonitrile styrene acrylate 176 (80)
CAB Cellulose acetate butylate 176 (80)
E/VAC Ethylene-vinyl acetate 176 (80)
PA Polyamide 176 (80) Battery acid (sulfuric acid) can damage the material.
PBT Polybutylene terephtalate 320 (160) Solvent can damage the material.
PC Polycarbonate plastics 248 (120) Brake fluid, wax, and grease remover can damage the
material.
PE Polyethylene 176 (80) Solvent can damage the material.
PF Phenol form aldehyde 176 (80)
PMMA Polymethyl methacrylate 176 (80) Wash remover off with water thoroughly.
POM Polyoxymethylene polyacetal 212 (100) Solvent can damage the material.
PP Polypropylene 176 (80) Solvent can damage the material.
PPO (PPE) Polyphenylene oxide 212 (100)
PS Polystyrene 140 (60)
PUR Polyurethane 176 (80)
Standard Symbol Name Heat Resistance Note

Temperature °F (°C)
PVC Polyvinyl chloride 176 (80)
SAN Styrene acrylonitrile 176 (80)
SMC Sheet molding compound 356 (180) Solvent can damage the material.
TPE Thermoplastic polyester elastomer 176 (80) Wash remover off with water thoroughly.
TPS Thermoplastic styrene elastomer 176 (80) Wash remover off with water thoroughly.
TPO Thermoplastic olefin/elastomer 176 (80) Wash remover off with water thoroughly.
TPU Thermoplastic/urethane/elastomer 176 (80) Wash remover off with water thoroughly.
UP Polyester 230 (110) Alkali can damage the material.
Types and Materials of Exterior Plastic Parts
NOTE:
For the full plastic name, refer to the features of plastic materials.
A standard symbol is stamped on the underside of each resin part to show the type of material used.
Example: ROOF MOLDING

FRONT PILLAR CORNER TRIM (TPO)
Paint: (ABS)
Without paint: (AES)
COWL COVER FUEL FILL DOOR

(PP) (PA66)
FRONT GRILLE
· MOLDING:
(ABS)
· BASE:
(AES)
DOOR PROTECTOR
MOLDINGS
(PP)
SIDE SILL PANEL

(PP)
FRONT BUMPER LOWER GRILLE
(PP) FRONT BUMPER
(PP)
FRONT BUMPER LID
(PP)
REAR DOOR PILLAR TRIM
DOOR SASH OUTER TRIMS (AES)
(AES)
REAR LICENSE TRIM

(ABS)
DOOR MIRROR
· MIRROR HOUSING COVER:
(ABS)
· Housing:
(AAS)
REAR BUMPER
(PP)
DOOR OUTER HANDLES

(PC)
REAR BUMPER LOWER TRIM
(PP)
Soft Chipping Guard Primer Coat - General Safety Precautions
The removal of paint and undercoating by stone chips immediately exposes metal to the atmosphere, causing it to oxidize. The thickness of this
oxidation increases if the process continues unchecked. The soft chipping guard primer protects against damage due to the impact of such objects.
The soft chipping guard primer coat is applied over the E. D. (electorostatically deposited) primer. It is followed by guide coating and top coating.
The soft chipping guard primer produces a smooth surface when dry. It should be sprayed so the thickness of the protective film is 20 microns.
Sectional view of paint coats:

Top coat
Intermediate coat + Chipping guard primer
Electrodeposition
Base metal
A soft chipping guard primer coat is then applied to the most susceptible area.
Spray the primer surface (2-part urethane primer surfacer) on the soft chipping guard primer coating areas when you replace parts using soft
chipping guard primer coat.
Coating Procedures
Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury.

Ventilate when spraying undercoat.
1. Sanding the replacement part.

Use a double action sander and 400 grit sandpaper.
NOTE:
Do not oversand the edges or corners of the part.
Do not expose base metal.
2. Air blowing/degreasing.
Use alcohol, and wax and grease remover.
3. Protect from overspray.
Use masking tape and paper to protect the related areas from overspray.
4. Spraying primer surfacer.
Spray about four to five coats to get 20 microns of thickness. One coat deposits about 5 to 7 microns.
Do not try to cover the surface with one heavy coat. Applying several thin coats is recommended.
Use a 2-part urethane primer surfacer and a spray gun.
Mix the primer surfacer with the correct ratio of additive and solvent.
Follow the primer surfacer manufacturer's instructions.
5. Drying.
After spraying primer surfacer, allow 7 to 10 minutes of drying time, then force dry it with infrared lamps or an industrial dryer.
6. Polishing.
Check that the primer surfacer has dried thoroughly, then sand the primer surfacer.
Use a double action sander and 400−600 grit sandpaper.
7. Intermediate coating and top coating.
Soft Chipping Guard Primer Coat - Coating Area
indicates chipping guard primer coating area.

NOTE: Make sure to coat the flange on front and rear wheel arch.
Unit: mm (in.)
HOOD SKIN
250 (9.84)
[Section AA]
OUTER PANEL
D
A C
B B
A REAR
C 150 INNER
(5.91) PANEL
250 (9.84)
[Section DD]
FRONT FENDER
[Section BB] 150

(5.91)
FRONT FENDER
[Section CC]
Floor Insulator Locations
Cut new insulators, and apply as indicated.
NOTE: Before applying, clean and degrease the floor.
(1) RIGHT DASHBOARD (3) FRONT FLOOR (4) RIGHT FRONT FLOOR (6) FRONT FLOOR REAR
LOWER INSULATOR FRONT INSULATOR MIDDLE INSULATOR CENTER INSULATOR
[X]
[Z]
[Y]
[VIEW: Z]
(2) LEFT DASHBOARD (5) LEFT FRONT FLOOR (9) REAR FLOOR
LOWER INSULATOR MIDDLE INSULATOR INSULATOR
(7) RIGHT REAR WHEELHOUSE

INSULATOR (8) LEFT REAR WHEELHOUSSE
INSULATOR
[VIEW: X]
[VIEW: Y]
Floor Insulator Sizes
Unit: mm
Unit:
Unit: mmmm (in.)
(in.)(in.)
φ:
φ: Inner diameter
R: Round
inner diameter
R: Round
(1) RIGHT DASHBOARD LOWER INSULATOR (2) LEFT DASHBOARD LOWER INSULATOR
(4)RIGHT
(6) FRONTFRONTFLOORFLOOR MIDDLE INSULATOR
REAR CENTER (7) RIGHT REAR WHEELHOUSE INSULATOR
20 20
90 (0.8) (0.8) 186 324
(7.32)
(12.8)
(3.5) 190 (7.48)
225 (8.86) 50 400 (15.7) 160
54 (2.1)
(2.0) 90 (3.5) 96(6.30)
(3.8) 140 (5.51)
136 (5.35) 90 (3.5)
140 (5.51)
φ70 (2.8)
94 60
(3.7) (2.4) R300 (11.8)
46 (1.8)
φ100
71 (2.8) (3.94)
R40 (1.6)
120 (4.72) 116 (4.57)
53
(2.1) 35 (1.4)
137 (5.39) (8)LEFT REAR WHEELHOUSE INSULATOR
68 39 130 (5.12)
(2.7) (1.5) 240 (9.45) 400 (15.7)
117 (4.61) 112 (4.41)
128 (5.04) 87 (3.4)
204 (8.04)
49 63
320(1.9)
(12.6) (2.5)
150 (5.91) R15 (0.6) R15 (0.6)
865 (34.1)
(3) FRONT FLOOR FRONT INSULATOR
1015 (39.96)
168 (6.61)
190 (7.48) 140 (5.51)
315 (12.4)
(5)LEFT
(9) REARFRONT
FLOORFLOOR MIDDLE INSULATOR
INSULATOR
437 (17.2)
1015 (39.96)
150 (5.91) 865 (34.1)
60
φ60 (2.4) 240 (9.45) 130 (2.4)
(5.12) 400 (15.7)
238 (9.37) 32 (1.3)

φ60
67 (2.6) (2.4)
R40 (1.6)
150 (5.91) R30 (1.2)
94
(3.7)
90 125
(3.5) R30
(4.92) (1.2) 68
(2.7) 330 (12.99)
305 (12.0) 320 (12.6) 160 (6.30) 140 (5.51)
192 (7.56) 177 (6.97)
Front Bulkhead Removal
NOTE: This section explains the procedures after removal of all accessories and related parts.For accessories' and related parts' removal procedure, refer to the
appropriate Shop Manual.
Mass production body welding position and number
NOTE:
Welding symbols
: 2-Plate spot welding/ : 3-Plate spot welding/ : 4-Plate spot welding/ : MIG plug welding/ : MIG welding L= Welding length Unit: mm (in.)
Construction
FRONT
Replace the front bulkhead side stay and the lower cross-member stiffener as BULKHEAD
an assembly.
If necessary, replace the bulkhead lower cross member. SIDE STAY
LOWER CROSS-MEMBER STIFFENER
FRONT BULKHEAD 6 x 1.0 mm (4)

UPPER FRAME 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
MOUNT BOLTS
BULKHEAD UPPER FRAME
GUSSET PLATE FRONT BULKHEAD

FRONT BULKHEAD SIDE MEMBER
SIDE STAY
FRONT BULKHEAD
SIDE STAY
FRONT SIDE FRAME

(1) (4)
LOWER CROSS-MEMBER
STIFFENER
GUSSET PLATE
FRONT SIDE
FRAME
(9)
Front: (1) BULKHEAD LOWER CROSS-MEMBER

Rear: (2)
BULKHEAD LOWER
CROSS-MEMBER PLATE
WHEELHOUSE LOWER
BULKHEAD LOWER CROSS-MEMBER MEMBER
Front Wheelhouse/Damper Housing Removal
Mass production body welding position and number [Wheelhouse upper member, lower member, and damper extension]
NOTE:
Welding symbols
Mass production body welding position and number [Damper housing]
NOTE:
WHEELHOUSE UPPER
Welding symbols MEMBER
(5) L=10 (0.4)
Construction
Remove the wheelhouse upper member.
Replace the wheelhouse lower member and the wheelhouse lower extension(2) DAMPER HOUSING
as an assembly.
Check the gusset plate and the side frame gusset. If necessary, replace them.
(12)
Construction
Check the front damper extension and the damper housing position for damage. If necessary, replace them.
NOTE: When(1) replacing the front damper extension, drill the position shown in [DETAIL X] and [DETAIL Z] from the outside of the dashboard upper side
(1) L=10 (0.4)
member, and drill the two spot welded points (A) at the joint for the front damper extension and the damper housing with a φ10 mm (0.4 in.) spot cutter.
Drill the two spot welded points (B) at the damper housing and the dashboard upper from under side of the damper housing.
(10) (3)
DASHBOARD UPPER
(B) Inside of the dashboard SIDE MEMBER
WHEELHOUSE upper side member.
GUSSET DAMPER HOUSING DASHBOARD UPPER
SIDE MEMBER
FRONT DAMPER
EXTENSION
DAMPER
(1) HOUSING
(1) DASHBOARD
UPPER
DASHBOARD LOWER (2)

DAMPER HOUSING HOLE
DASHBOARD UPPER (2) φ7 mm
(2) SIDE MEMBER (0.28 in.)
FRONT DAMPER
FRONT WHEELHOUSE 45 °
DASHBOARD UPPER
GUSSET EXTENSION
WHEELHOUSE UPPER
SIDE FRAME GUSSET MEMBER
FRONT DAMPER
EXTENSION
FRONT DAMPER EXTENSION
Driver's side:
3-Plate spot welding
SIDE FRAME GUSSET WHEELHOUSE LOWER
(A) MEMBER
2 mm (0.08 in.)
(7) (2) 1 mm
(3)(0.04 in.)(7)
[DATAIL X] [DATAIL Z]
Left side (10) WHEELHOUSE LOWER WHEELHOUSE LOWER MEMBER

DAMPER HOUSING Right side (11)EXTENSION
GUSSET PLATE (7) DAMPER HOUSING
Right side only WHEELHOUSE LOWER WHEELHOUSE LOWER EXTENSION

MEMBER DAMPER HOUSING DASHBOARD UPPER
FRONT SIDE FRAME SIDE MEMBER
GUSSET PLATE FRONT DAMPER

EXTENSION
DAMPER HOUSING FRONT DAMPER

EXTENSION
Front Side Frame/Outrigger Removal
Mass production body welding position and number [Front side frame]
NOTE:
Welding symbols
Mass production body welding position and number [Outrigger and side frame extension]
NOTE:
FRONT WHEELHOUSE GUSSET
Welding symbols Right side only Left side (10) DAMPER HOUSING
: 2-Plate spot welding/ : 3-Plate spot welding/ : 4-Plate spotRight
welding/
side (11): MIG plug welding/ : MIG welding L= Welding length Unit: mm (in.)
Driver's side:
Construction 3-Plate spot welding
FRONT SIDE FRAME
When removing the front sideBottom
frame,ofleave
the front floor.frame extension, the outrigger, and the front side cross-member in place.
the side
Check (7)
the side FRONT
frame extension,
SIDE the outrigger, and the frontFRONT
side cross-member
FLOOR position for damage. If necessary, replace them as an assembly. (5)
CROSS-MEMBER
NOTE:
(8)
DASHBOARD LOWER
When removing the outrigger, leave the inside sill extension attached to the body side.
Carefully drill the three welded point (A) at the joints for the tie down stiffener and outrigger.
(2) L=5 (0.2)
(7)
(11)FRAME EXTENSION
SIDE
SIDE FRAME FRONT SIDE FRAME WHEELHOUSE LOWER
EXTENSION MEMBER
SIDE FRAME GUSSET
(7)
WHEELHOUSE
L=10 (0.4)
LOWER MEMBER FRONT SIDE FRAME
DAMPER HOUSING
FRONT FLOOR FRAME
SIDE FRAME
Left side (3) EXTENSION
OUTRIGGER Right side (2) SIDE FRAME GUSSET
(3) (3)
A (5) OUTRIGGER
TIE DOWN STIFFENER DASHBOARD
LOWER
INSIDE SILL
EXTENSION
SIDE FRAME (8) (6)
EXTENSION
FRONT SIDE CROSS-MEMBER
FRONT SIDE FRAME
(5)
INSIDE SILL EXTENSION
SIDE FRAME EXTENSION

OUTRIGGER TIE DOWN
STIFFENER
OUTRIGGER C (5)
(4)
B (1)
[Z] A+B+C= (11) : Inside sill extension, tie down stiffener, and outrigger
FLOOR CENTER INSIDE SILL

STIFFENER (A)
EXTENSION
INSIDE SILL Front [VIEW: Z]
FLOOR FRAME
Front Pillar Outer Panel Removal
Mass production body welding position and number [Outer panel and front pillar lower stiffener]
NOTE:
Welding symbols
Construction
Remove the wheelhouse upper member.
Cut and pry off the outer panel at the front pillar and side sill portion.
NOTE: Select the cutting positions in consideration of the front side outer panel repair part.
Replace the front pillar outer separator. (22)
Check the front pillar lower stiffener position for damage. If necessary, replace it.
Replace the front pillar inner separator.
OUTER PANEL
FRONT PILLAR
Without outer panel
UPPER STIFFENER
FRONT PILLAR
UPPER STIFFENER
FRONT PILLAR
(20) UPPER STIFFENER
(3) INNER
(8)PANEL
OUTER PANEL
FRONT PILLAR
LOWER STIFFENER (24)
(1) Passenger's side only

OUTER PANEL
FRONT PILLAR (10) FRONT PILLAR
LOWER INNER SEPARATOR
STIFFENER
(3) INSIDE SILL

FRONT PILLAR
OUTER SEPARATOR
Without outer panel

(2)
FRONT PILLAR LOWER
CORNER STIFFENER
(11)
FRONT PILLAR SIDE SILL STIFFENER
INNER SEPARATOR
FRONT PILLAR LOWER

CORNER STIFFENER (7)
SIDE SILL STIFFENER FRONT PILLAR

OUTER SEPARATOR
(5)
SIDE SILL STIFFENER

Side Sill Outer Panel Removal
NOTE:
Welding symbols
Construction
Cut and pry off the side sill outer panel, and replace it. Top end position of the side sill
NOTE: Select the cutting positions in consideration of the side sill outerouter
panelrepair
repairpart
part. (2)
Replace the front pillar outer separator and the center pillar outer separator.
(1)
OUTER PANEL CENTER PILLAR FRONT PILLAR

OUTER SEPARATOR LOWER STIFFENER
CENTER PILLAR
STIFFENER
OUTER PANEL
(6) (6)
(7)
(13) (5)
FRONT INNER
(11) PILLAR
FRONT PILLAR
OUTER SEPARATOR
CENTER INNER PILLAR
SIDE SILL
FRONT PILLAR LOWER (19) (8) STIFFENER (6)
CORNER STIFFENER
FRONT PILLAR
OUTER SEPARATOR
Rear edge position of the side sill
outer repair part
CENTER PILLAR
STIFFENER
CENTER PILLAR
OUTER SEPARATOR
INSIDE SILL
OUTER PANEL
OUTER PANEL
SIDE SILL STIFFENER

Center Pillar Outer Panel Removal
Mass production body welding position and number [Outer panel, center pillar stiffener and side sill stiffener]
NOTE:
Welding symbols
Construction
If there is any damage to the center pillar, cut the (A) position and pry off the outer panel, and replace it.
NOTE: Select the cutting positions in consideration of the front side outer panel repair part.
Check the center pillar stiffener and side sill stiffener position for damage.
When replacing the center pillar stiffener, cut the (B) position at the roof side portion of the outer panel.
When removing the side sill stiffener, and carefully cut the (C) position at the rear wheel arch portion of the outer panel.
Replace the side sill stiffener and the side sill rear stiffener as an assembly.
Replace the center pillar outer separator and the wheel arch outer separator.
(2) (14) (2)

CENTER PILLAR (B) 20 mm (0.8 in.)
Refer to the front pillar (28)
outer panel. (27)
STIFFENER
CENTER PILLAR OUTER PANEL
STIFFENER OUTER PANEL
(B)
Front side outer panel
repair part rear edge
CENTER PILLAR ROOF SIDE
STIFFENER (2) STIFFENER
CENTER INNER PILLAR WHEEL ARCH
Without outer panel OUTER SEPARATOR
(3) CENTER4-plate welding
INNER PILLAR
(A) CENTER PILLAR
OUTER SEPARATOR
(3)
CENTER PILLAR
INNER SEPARATOR CENTER PILLAR STIFFENER
(13)
(13) (5)
SIDE SILL STIFFENER

(4)
[Z]
(29) CENTER PILLAR (11)

STIFFENER (2)
Without outer panel

(4) SIDE SILL
CENTER PILLAR REAR STIFFENER
INNER SEPARATOR
OUTER PANEL WHEEL ARCH

OUTER SEPARATOR
SIDE SILL REAR

CENTER PILLAR (9) STIFFENER
OUTER
SIDE SILL SEPARATOR
STIFFENER [VIEW: Z] (2)
(C)
OUTER PANEL
Reuse.
Roof Panel Removal
NOTE:
Welding symbols
Construction
Remove the rear roof rail mount bolts, drill the welded flange of the front roof rail, and the roof panel. Without roof panel
(4)
FRONT ROOF RAIL REAR ROOF RAIL
ROOF PANEL
OUTER PANEL
(2)
REAR INNER UPPER
FRONT ROOF EXTENSION
RAIL
[Z]
(17) (17)
ROOF PANEL
FRONT INNER UPPER

EXTENSION
REAR ROOF RAIL
REAR INNER UPPER
EXTENSION
(4)
(1) MOUNT BOLTS (3)

ROOF PANEL
6 x 1.0 mm
18 N·m
[VIEW: Z] (5)
REAR ROOF
[Z] RAIL
6 x 1.0 mm
18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft) [VIEW: Z]
Rear Side Outer Panel Removal
Mass production body welding position and number [Outer panel and rear gutter]
NOTE:
Welding symbols
Construction
(22)
Cut and pry off the rear side outer panel, and replace it.
NOTE: Select the cutting positions in consideration of the rear side outer panel repair part.
Check the rear pillar gutter position for damage. If necessary, replace the rear pillar gutter lower.
Replace the wheel arch outer separator.
(8)
OUTER PANEL
QUARTER PILLAR STIFFENER (7) REAR PILLAR
OUTER PANEL GUTTER MIDDLE
Rear side outer panel
repair part front edge
(15) [Z]
(5) INNER UPPER
EXTANSION
WHEEL ARCH OUTER
SEPARATOR INNER UPPER (9)
PANEL
4-plate welding
(5) REARREAR PILLAR
PILLAR
GUTTER
GUTTER UPPERUPPER
STIFFENER
(7)
(13)
WHEEL ARCH OUTER REAR PILLAR
SEPARATOR (4) GUTTER MIDDLE
INNER PANEL REAR PILLAR
(4) (3) GUTTER MIDDLE
70 ° REAR PILLAR
GUTTER LOWER
OUTER PANEL (5)

(11) REAR PILLAR
(3) GUTTER LOWER
REAR PANEL
Rear side outer panel

repair part front edge
(2) REAR PANEL
(7)
(4)
REAR INNER PANEL
(2)
[VIEW: Z] (2) (10)
OUTER PANEL
Rear Panel Removal
NOTE:
Welding symbols
Construction
Cut and pry off the rear panel,
REARand replace
PANEL SIDEit.
STIFFENER
(2) L=10 (0.4)
(6) 4-plate welding

4-plate welding REAR PANEL REAR FLOOR
REAR FLOOR
(8)
REAR FRAME
REAR PILLAR
REAR PILLAR
GUTTER LOWER
GUTTER LOWER (2) L=10 (0.4) (37)
REAR PANEL
REAR FRAME B
REAR PANEL SIDE STIFFENER JACK-UP STIFFENER

Rear Floor/Rear Frame Removal
Mass production body welding position and number [Rear floor, rear floor side, and rear frame B]
NOTE:
Welding symbols
Construction
(1) them.
Remove the rear floor and the rear floor side, and replace REAR FLOOR
If there is any damage to the rear frame, replace the rear frame B, and repair the rear(21)
frame A.
(6)
REAR WHEELHOUSE
MIDDLE FLOOR
CROSS-MEMBER
REAR FLOOR SIDE
(Right side shape)
MOUNT BOLTS (2)
REAR FLOOR (12)

EXTENSION
REAR FLOOR SIDE

EXTENSION
REAR FLOOR SIDE
(Left side shape)
Peel back the
rear floor
extesion. Bottom of the rear
REAR FRAME A floor side
(6) (7): Rear frame A and
REAR FLOOR EXTENSION rear frame B
[VIEW: Z] (15)
REAR FLOOR SIDE

6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
(2) (3) 7.2 lbf·ft)
REAR FLOOR SIDE

(7)
4-plate welding
[Z]
REAR FRAME B REAR FLOOR
(8) (16) SIDE EXTENSION
(4) L=10 (0.4) (4)
REAR FLOOR
REAR FRAME B
REAR FLOOR SIDE
Outside: (3)
Left and right side (8) inside: (2)
REAR FRAME A Rear floor extesion and rear floor Rear frame A and rear frame B
Front Bulkhead Installation
NOTE:
Welding symbols
: MIG plug welding
: MIG welding
1. Set the new bulkhead parts, and measure the front compartment diagonally.
2. Check the body dimensions.
Engine compartment
Front wheelhouse lower member position
Engine compartment and front floor under view
Repair chart, top view
Repair chart, side view
3. Tack weld the new parts into position.
4. Temporarily install the front fender, the hood, and the door, then check for differences in level and clearance. Check the external parts fitting
position. If necessary, check the headlight and the front bumper positions. Make sure the body lines flow smoothly.
5. Do the main welding.
Weld the front side frame (A) and the bulkhead side stay (B).
Weld the bulkhead lower cross-member (C) to the wheelhouse lower member (D), the bulkhead side stay, and the lower cross-member
stiffener (E).
6. Install the bulkhead upper frame (A).
[VIEW: Z] B A
A
[Z]
(2)
(2)
A B
(3)
D
(3)
D
(1) E
C
E
C (4) (6)
Front Wheelhouse/Damper Housing Installation
NOTE:
Welding symbols
: MIG plug welding
: MIG welding
1. Clamp the new damper housing, the front damper extension, the side frame gusset, the gusset plate, the wheelhouse lower extension, and the
bulkhead, and measure the front compartment diagonally.
Engine compartment
Engine/transmission mount position
3. Tack weld the new parts and the front bulkhead into position.
4. Temporarily install the front subframe, and check the front side frame position.
Weld the damper housing (A), to the front side frame (B), and the dashboard upper (C).
7. From the passenger's side, plug weld the holes in the dashboard lower (A) and the damper housing (B).
8. Drill the holes for welding
(2) the new front damperAextension (A). Weld the damper housing (B), the front damper extension, and the dashboard upper
side member (C).
9. Weld the damper housing (A) and wheelhouse gusset (B) to the front damper extension (C). Weld the front damper extension and the wheelhouse
lower extension (D).
B C
10. Weld the side frame gusset (A) and the gusset plate (B) to the front side frame (C), and the wheelhouse lower extension (D).
11. Weld the front A
bulkhead.
A
(9) the wheelhouse
12. Weld (2) (A). When
C upper member A reusing the wheelhouse upper member, weld it with a MIG plug welding.
B
(1)
(5)
B
A
C(3) (5) L=10 (0.4)
(2) B
(3)
B
D
Front [Z](3)
(2) A A
(12) (7) (2)
B A
(7)
(4) (4)
D (4) C
(8) C
(1) L=10 (0.4) AA
(2)
A
[VIEW: Z] (4)
D
(5)
(2)
(1)
Front Side Frame/Outrigger Installation
NOTE:
Welding symbols
: MIG plug welding
: MIG welding
1. Clamp the new side frame, and the front bulkhead, and measure the front compartment diagonally.
Engine compartment
Engine/transmission mount position
3. Tack weld the new parts and front bulkhead into position.
4. Temporarily install the front subframe, and check the front side frame position.
Weld the side frame extension (A), the front side cross-member (B), and the outrigger (C).
Weld the front side frame (D) and the side frame extension.
7. From the passenger's side, plug weld the holes in the dashboard lower (A), and the front floor (B).
8. Weld the Dfront side frame (A) to the damper housing (B) and the front wheelhouse gusset (C).
A the wheelhouse, lower member (A), and the side frame gusset D
9. Weld (B).
10.
LeftWeld the front bulkhead.
side (10) (2)
Right side (11)
(11)
(6)
(8)
(4)
(8)
A
A
(2)
C
B [Z]
C
(3)
A B (4)
(1)
(4)
(4) A B
B
Left side (11)
Right side (10) (7)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(1)
A
(4)
B
(1)
[VIEW: Z] A
Front
C
Front Pillar Outer Panel Installation
NOTE:
Welding symbols
: MIG plug welding
: MIG welding
1. Install the new front pillar inner separator (A) on the front pillar lower corner stiffener (B).
NOTE: Apply the sealer (C) all the way around the separator and inside the front pillar inner lower (D) without gaps.
2. Set the front pillar lower stiffener, and tack weld it into position.
3. Rough-cut the front side outer panel repair part, clamp it to the body, and check the dimensions.
Door hinge position
Windshield and door opening. A
4. Temporarily install the windshield, the door, the hood, and the front fender, then check for differences in level and clearance.
Check the external parts fitting position. Make sure the body lines flow smoothly.
C
5. Trim the cut and joint areas of the outer panel repair part as needed, and prepare the butt-welding connections.
6. Remove the outer panel repair part, and weld the front pillar lower stiffener (A) to the upper stiffener (B) and the side sill stiffener (C).
7. Weld the patch (A) at the cut section of the body side outer panel (B).
8. Install the new front pillar outer separator
B (A) on the (1)
front pillar lower corner stiffener (B).
(3)NOTE: Apply the sealer (C) all the way around the separator and inside the outer panel repair part (D) without gaps.
[Front pillar section] [Side sill section]
9. Clamp the outer panel repair part, and recheck the clearance and alignment of the door, the front fender, and the windshield.
40 mm
10.ADo the(1.6
main
in.) welding. Weld the(4)
outer panel repair part (A) and the
(7) patch (B).
D
11. Weld
D the wheelhouse upper member. A B
[Windshield opening]
[Side sill portion]
A
L=190 (7.48)
A
B B
(7)
(7) C
B
(18) A
B 40 mm (1.6 in.) B
C
A
L=330
(13.0)
(4)
(6) (5)
A C
(8) (3)
(3)
(7)
(4)
(7)
(12)
(16)
(1)
(2)
(11)
Side Sill Outer Panel Installation
NOTE:
Welding symbols
: MIG plug welding
: MIG welding
1. Rough-cut the side sill outer panel repair part, and clamp it to the body.
2. Check the dimensions.
Door hinge position
Windshield and door opening
3. Temporarily install the door, the hood, and the front fender, then check for differences in level and clearance. Check the external parts fitting
position. Make sure the body lines flow smoothly.
6. Install the new front pillar outer separator (A), the center pillar outer separator (B) on the front pillar lower stiffener (C), and the center pillar stiffener
(D).
[Front
[Side
NOTE:sill
pillar
section]
section]
Apply the sealer (E) all the
(5) way around the separator and inside the outer panel repair part (F) without gaps.
(2)
7. Clamp the outer panel repair part,Band
B recheck the clearance and alignment of the door and the front fender.
40 mm
8. Do the main welding. Weld the outer
A panel repair part (A) and the patch (B).
40 mm
40 mm (1.6 in.)
(1.6 in.)
BB F
L=270 (10.6)
A A
(7) (14)
(2) (2) A
(7)
[Center pillar section]
C (2)
B
E (2)
40 mm (2)
(1.6 in.)
L=310 (12.2) D (2)
40 mm
E (1.6 in.)
(21)
A B
A
B
(6)
(7)
(6) A
(5)
(1)
(11)
B
F
(8)
A (6)
A
L=330 (13.0)
Center Pillar Outer Panel Installation
NOTE:
Welding symbols
: MIG plug welding
: MIG welding
1. Clamp the side sill stiffener, and check the body dimensions.
Passenger compartment
Front floor and rear floor, under view
2. Tack weld the side sill stiffener (A) and the side sill rear stiffener (B).
3. Install the new center pillar inner separator (A) on the side sill stiffener (B).
NOTE: Apply the sealer (C) all the way around the separator and inside the center pillar stiffener (D) without gaps.
4. Install the new wheel arch outer separator
(5)(A) on the rear inner panel (B).
NOTE: Apply the sealer (C) all the way around the separator and inside the outer panel reuse part (D) without gaps.
A
5. Weld the patch (A) at the cut section of the body side outer panel (B) and weld the outer panel reuse part (C).
6. Rough-cut the front side outer panel repair part, and clamp it to the body.
B
7. Check the dimensions. B A
Front wheelhouse lower
L=260 (10.2) member position
Door hinge position
8. Temporarily install the door, the hood, and the front fender, then check for differences in level and clearance.
Check the external parts fitting position. Make sureAthe body lines flow(4)
smoothly.
C
A
10. From inside the passenger's compartment, weld the side sill stiffener (A)Cto the center pillar inner (B) and the inside sill (C).
11. Remove the outer panel repair part, and weld the center pillar stiffener (A) to the roof side stiffener (B) and the side sill stiffener (C).
(4)
B
12. Weld the patch (A) at the cut section of the body side outerBpanel (B).
D C B
13. Install the new center pillar outer separator (A) on the center
(2) pillar stiffener (B).
NOTE: Apply the sealer (C) all the way around the separator and inside the outer panel repair part (D) without gaps.
[Side sill rear
frontsection]
section]
[Z] alignment
14. Clamp the outer panel repair part , and recheck the clearance and B of the door, and the front fender.
40 mm (1.6 in.)
B
40 mm
15. Do the main welding. Weld the outer
B panel repair part (A) and the patch (B).
A (1.6 in.)
16. Weld the side Csill area.
A
B L=260 (10.2) (3)
(1)
(3)
D B
B (13)
B
(1)(2) (5)
L=170 (6.69)
A
(3)
C
L=160 (6.3)
A (7) L=160 (6.3)
L=330 (13.0) A
[VIEW: Z] (7) (29)
(25) (28) [Z]
[Center pillar section] (24)
A
40 mm (1.6 in.)
(3)In case of outer panel replacement only 40 mm (1.6 in.)C (3)
(2) D
(7)
A A
A
A B
(4)
A
(11)
C[VIEW: Z]
40 mm
(1.6 in.) B
(9)
(3)
A
In case of outer panel replacement only
(5)
(2)
Roof Panel Installation
NOTE:
Welding symbols
: MIG plug welding
: MIG welding
1. Clamp the new roof panel.
Tailgate opening
Rear pillar gutter position
Passenger's compartment
Door hinge position
3. Tack weld the front and rear corner edge of the roof panel.
4. Temporarily install the roof molding, the windshield, the tailgate and the door, then check for differences in level and clearance.
From inside the vehicle, weld the front roof rail (A) and the inner upper extension (B).
Fix the rear roof rail (C) with the mounting bolts (D).
Weld the front, rear, and side flange of the roof panel (E).
The roof area must be free of burrs and/or sharp edges to prevent damage to the side curtain airbag during deployment.
C E [Z] A
(2)
D
B
(6)
(5)
(1)
(5)
(4) E
[VIEW: Z]
E (2)
(4)
Rear Side Outer Panel Installation
NOTE:
Welding symbols
: MIG plug welding
: MIG welding
1. Clamp the new rear pillar gutter, rough-cut the rear side outer panel repair part, clamp it to the body.
Door hinge position
Tailgate opening
3. Temporarily install the door, the tailgate, and the quarter glass, then check for differences in level and clearance.
4. Trim the cut and joint areas of the outer panel repair part as needed, and prepare the butt-welding connections. Remove the outer panel repair part.
6. Install the new wheel arch outer separator (A) on the rear inner panel (B).
NOTE: Apply the sealer (C) all the way around the separator and inside the outer panel repair part (D) without gaps.
[Side sillglass
[Quarter section]
section]
7. Clamp the outer panel repair part, and recheck the clearance
B and alignment of the door, the quarter glass, and the tailgate.
B A
8. Do the main welding. Weld the outer panel repair part (A), and the patch (B).
(4)
9. Weld the rear pillar gutter lower (A), the outer panel (B), and the rear panel (C).
10.[Wheel
Weldopening,
[Door the outer
arch panel
portion
quarter (A)
rearand
andglass the rear
opening
end] andgutter middle
side sill area](B).
B
B L=230 (9.06)
40 mm
A (1.6 in.)
(7)
(5)
(4)
A 40 mm
(1.6 in.) (4)
L=153 (6.02)
(7) (12)
(4) A (3)
40 mm (1.6 in.)
A B
(8)
(5) (10) (11)
(3) D
(7)
4-plateC
welding (5)
A B
(13)
A
(2)
(7)
A
B
A
(3) A (10) C
(8)
L=330 (13.0) (11)
Rear Panel Installation
NOTE:
Welding symbols
: MIG plug welding
: MIG welding
1. Clamp the new rear panel.
Rear panel position
Tailgate opening
3. Tack weld the rear panel into position.
4. Temporarily install the tailgate, then check for differences in level and clearance.
Check the external parts fitting position. If necessary, check the taillight and the rear bumper positions. Make sure the body lines flow smoothly.
Weld the rear panel side stiffener (A) to the rear pillar gutter lower (B), and the rear pillar gutter upper stiffener (C).
6. Weld the rear panel (A) to the rear pillar gutter lower (B), the rear frame (C), and the rear floor (D).
(2) L=10 (0.4)
(2) C B
4-plate welding (9)
D
(5) A
C
B
(15)
(1)
A
(6)
(2) L=10 (0.4)
4-plate welding
D
(5)
(10)
C
A (2)
Rear Floor/Rear Frame Installation
NOTE:
Welding symbols
: MIG plug welding
: MIG welding
1. Set the new rear frame B, and measure the rear frame diagonally.
Passenger's compartment
3. Tack weld the rear frame B into position.
4. Temporarily install the trailing arm, check the rear suspension position.
5. Set the new rear floor side, and the rear floor.
6. Clamp the rear panel, check the body dimensions.
Rear panel position
Tailgate opening
7. Remove the rear panel, the rear floor, and B
the rear floor side. Plug weld the rear frame B, and the rear frame A.
8. Set the rear floor side, the rear floor, and recheck the alignment of the rear panel.
9. Do the main welding. Weld(3)
the rear floor side (A) and the floor side extension (B).
10. From the rear wheelhouse side, plug weld the rear frame B, the rear frame A, the rear floor side (C), and the floor side extension (D).
11.(4)Plug
L=10weld
(0.4)the rear floor (A). A
(5)
C (4)
(9) A
(2)
(2)
(12)
B A
[Z]
(6) (6)
A
A
A B
C (4)
(5) B
(3)
(5)
Left side: (15) Front

Right side: (15)
A (3)
[VIEW: Z] A
A
D
B
B
A
Left side: (4) Right side: (10)

(7)
Upper Body Measuring Dimensions - Front Fender Position
Unit: mm (in.)
A, a B, b
Bulkhead Upper Frame Front Fender Mount Bolt (Center of the bolt)
Locating Hole φ15 (0.59)
C
C F
b 1329 B
(52.32)
1077
(42.40) 569
(22.4)
630
(24.8)
a A
Upper Body Measuring Dimensions - Engine Compartment
Unit: mm (in.)
A, a B, b C, c
Bumper Beam Bulkhead Upper Frame Hood Hinge
Mount Hole φ12 (0.47) Mount Hole φ7 (0.28) Mount Hole φ7 (0.28) front
C F
C C F
F D, d
Front Damper Base
Locating Hole φ48 (1.89)
E, e F
Front Fender Windshield Lower
Mount Hole φ7 (0.28) Locating Hole φ7 (0.28) center
C
F
e 1356
(53.39) E
1348
(53.07) C
c
1324
(52.13)
d 1126 D
e (44.33) E
F
576
d (22.7) D
c
673 662 1208 150
(26.5) (26.1) (47.56) C (5.91)
552
(21.7)
533
1138 (21.0)
(44.80)
1062
667 (41.81)
(26.3)
749
b (29.5) B
a
1077 A
(42.40)
Upper Body Measuring Dimensions - Engine/Transmission Mount Position
Unit: mm (in.)
C, c G
Hood Hinge Engine Side Mount
Mount Hole φ7 (0.28) front Hole φ15 (0.59)
F
C
C F
D, d
Front Damper Base
Locating Hole
φ48 (1.89)
H
Transmission Mount Hole φ15 (0.59)
C
F
I
Transmission Mount Hole φ15 (0.59)
d D
c 1221 C
(48.07)
c 524 1127 418

(20.6) (44.37) (16.5)
1117 H
(43.98)
531
(20.9) 1167
(45.95)
438
1206 (17.2) C
(47.48)
972 I
(38.3)
G I
1249
(49.17)
G
Upper Body Measuring Dimensions - Front Wheelhouse Lower Member Position
Unit: mm (in.)
J K L
Wheelhouse Lower Member Front Fender Upper Mount Front Fender Lower Mount
Locating Hole φ11 (0.43) Hole φ8 (0.32) Hole φ7 (0.28)
F
F
864
(34.0)
905
(35.6)
912
(35.9)
L
Upper Body Measuring Dimensions - Door Hinge Positon
Unit: mm (in.)
M N O
Upper Front Door Hinge Lower Front Door Hinge Upper Rear Door Hinge
Mount Hole φ13 (0.51) front Mount Hole φ13 (0.51) upper Mount Hole φ13 (0.51) upper
P Q
Lower Rear Door Hinge Rear Door Switch
Mount Hole φ13 (0.51) front Mount Hole φ8 (0.32)
F
F
M
1095 O
(43.11)
1092 1134 782
(42.99) (44.65) (30.8)
Q
N 858
1021
(40.20) (33.8)
P
Upper Body Measuring Dimensions - Passenger's Compartment
Unit: mm (in.)
R, r S, s
Front Seat Mount Hole φ15 (0.59) rear Seat Belt Anchor Plate Mount Hole φ16 (0.63)
C
F F
T, t U, u
Rear Damper Mount Hole φ24 (0.94) Rear Floor Side Locating Hole φ20 (0.79)
F
C
F
C
1116
(43.94)
1722 u
(67.80) T
s 970
1318 1797 (38.2) U
(51.89) (70.75)
746
(29.4)
1200
1370 (47.24)
(53.94) S
r
1470
1100 (57.87)
(43.31)
R
Upper Body Measuring Dimensions - Rear Panel Position
Unit: mm (in.)
S, s T, t
Seat Belt Anchor Plate Mount hole φ16 (0.63) Rear Damper Mount Hole φ24 (0.94)
C C
F
V, v
Rear Trim Panel Clip Mount Hole φ8.5 (0.34)
F C
t
439 v
(17.3)
923 934
(36.3) (36.8) V
1259
(49.57)
s T
S
Upper Body Measuring Dimensions - Rear Pillar Gutter Position
Unit: mm (in.)
W, w X, x
Tailgate Support Strut Rear Bumper Mount Hole φ7 (0.28) upper
Mount Hole φ11 (0.43)
F
C
Y, y
Rear Bumper
Mount Hole φ7 (0.28) lower
1258
(49.53)
1184 390
(46.61) (15.4)
W 1185
(46.65) x
996
(39.2) 191
581 (7.52)
(22.9) y
X 938
(36.9)
846
(33.3)
Y
Opening Repair Chart - Windshield and Door Opening
Unit: mm (in.)
A B, C
Windshield Outer Panel and Roof
Lower Locating Hole Panel Windshield
center Opening Flange Notch
(3 places)
D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K
Outer Panel Door
Opening Flange Notch
(16 places)
1400.5
(55.138)
B C
H
970
1275 (38.2) D 1371
(50.20) (53.98)
649.5
(25.57)
1051
1201 (41.38)
A (47.28) K
G I
1162
(45.75)
926.5 J
727.5 (36.48)
(28.64)
F
E 601.5
1398.5 (23.68)
(55.059)
515
(20.3)
370.5
(14.59)
Opening Repair Chart - Tailgate Opening
Unit: mm (in.)
L M
Rear Roof Rail Rear Inside Upper
Flange Notch Extension Flange End
(2 places)
N
Rear Panel Upper
Stiffener Flange
Notch
1104.5
(43.484)
622.5
(24.51)
860
(33.9)
M
796.5
(31.36)
N
Upper Body Measuring Dimensions - External Parts Fitting Positon
Unit: mm (in.) Front Pillar Tailgate Roof Panel 7.0 Tailgate

Outer Panel (0.28) 0.95
Front Fender 1.5
Hood 2.0 (0.04)
4.5 (0.06)
3.0 (0.12) (0.08) Rear Side (0.18)
Outer Panel
Rear Door
Rear Side
Outer Panel
Rear Door
4.0
Front Door (0.16)
3.5
(0.14)
3.5 Front
(0.14) Door
Front Fender
Front/Rear Door
5.0
(0.20)
Side Sill
Outer Panel
5.0 (0.20)
Under Body Measuring Dimensions - Front Subframe Positon
Unit: mm (in.)
A, a B, b
Front Bumper Mount Front Subframe Mount Bolt
Clip (Center of the clip) (Center of the bolt) front
F
F
C C
C, c D, d
Front Subframe Mount Bolt Front Floor Frame Mount Bolt
(Center of the bolt) rear (Center of the bolt)
F
C
a A
500
(19.7)
905
(35.6)
940
(37.0) 627
(24.7)
1123
(44.21)
b
B
854
(33.6)
1647
(64.84)
c 755 C
(29.7)
1620
1341 (63.78) 1357
1355 (52.80) 1310
(53.35) 1009 1014 (53.43)
(39.72) (51.57) (39.92)
972
(38.3)
d D
Under Body Measuring Dimensions - Engine Compartment and Front Floor Under View
Unit: mm (in.)
A, a B, b C, c
Front Bulkhead Cross-member Front Side Frame Front Subframe Mount
Locating Hole φ20 (0.79) Locating Hole φ16 (0.63) Hole φ15 (0.59) Front
F
C
C
F
F
D, d E, e
Front Subframe Mount Front Floor Frame
Hole φ15 (0.59) rear Mount Hole φ15 (0.59)
F
F
C
C
792
(31.2)
1357 E
B (53.43)
C
A 1014
D (39.92)
1163
(45.73)
1310 1647
1206 854 (51.57) (64.84)
(47.48) (33.6)
887 1620
(34.9) (63.78) 972
866 755 (38.3)
(34.1) 960 (29.7)
(37.8) 1341
1029 (52.80)
(40.51)
998
(39.3)
419 1009
d (39.72)
a (16.5) c
b 564 e
376
(22.2) (14.8) 1355
(53.35)
895
(35.2)
Under Body Measuring Dimensions - Front Floor and Rear Floor, Under View
Unit: mm (in.)
E, e F, f G, g
Front Floor Frame Trailing Arm Bracket Rear Frame A Locating
Mount Hole φ15 (0.59) Locating Hole φ20 (0.79) Hole φ11 (0.43) front
F
C
C F
C F
H, h I, i
Rear Frame A Locating Rear Frame B Locating
Hole φ11 (0.43) rear Hole φ 25 (0.98)
F
F 689
E 514 G H (27.1) I
(20.2) 485
(19.1)
1163
(45.79)
1163
(45.79) 970
1239 (38.2)
972 1167
(45.94) (48.78) 1094
(38.3) 984
1175 (43.07)
(46.26) (38.7)
1091
1206 (42.95)
(47.48) 1059
(41.69)
523 h
e (20.6)
g i
f 211
481 (8.31)
(18.9)
275
(10.8)
Frame Repair Chart - Top View
Unit: mm (in.)
φ: Inner diameter
a1 For engine side mount φ15 (0.59) front g Floor center stiffener locating hole φ15 (0.59) l Front floor cross-member locating hole φ25 (0.98) p
a2 For engine side mount φ13 (0.51) outer h1 Front floor locating hole φ50 (1.97) front h2 Front floor locating hole φ25 (0.98) rear q
a3 For engine side mount φ15 (0.59) rear i1 Inside sill locating hole φ25 (0.98) front i2 Inside sill locating hole φ25 (0.98) rear r1
b1 For transmission mount φ15 (0.59) front j1 R Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) front m Trailing arm gusset locating hole φ20 (0.79) r2
b2 For transmission mount φ15 (0.59) wheelhouse side j1 L Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) front n1 Rear seat guide bracket locating hole φ9 (0.35) right s
b3 For transmission mount φ15 (0.59) rear j2 R Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) rear n2 Rear seat guide bracket locating hole φ9 (0.35) left t
b4 For transmission mount φ13 (0.51) j2 L Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) rear o1 For trailing arm mount φ15 (0.59) inner u
[Manual transmission model] k Front floor center locating hole φ15 (0.59) For trailing arm mount φ17 (0.67) outer v
o2
1291 (50.83) k
1020 (40.16) l i2 m o2 r1 s
359 (14.1) p q t
e1 For front subframe mount h2 n1 o1
φ15 (0.59) front 231 (9.09) d e4 f g h1 i1 j1 R k j2 R
e2 u
φ11 (0.43)
φ11 (0.43) x 15 (0.59) slot
c a3
φ25 (0.98) e3 R
CENTER LINE
b3 e3 L
b1

b2
CENTER LINE A
33 (1.30)
65 (2.56) n2 64
283 (11.1) j1 L j2 L
76 (2.52)
338 (13.3)
(2.99) 110
409 (16.1)
138 (4.33)
425 (16.7)
(5.43) 634 (25.0) 234 (9.21)
155 715 (28.2) 373 (14.7)
216 (8.50)
(6.10) 805 (31.7) 405 (15.9)
340 (13.4) 900 (35.4) 469 (18.5)
1290 (50.79) j2 R/j2 L 630 (24.8)
1450 (57.09) l 655 (25.8)
1610 (63.39) h2 862 (33.9)
1700 (66.93) i2
b4 1925 (75.79) m
1935 (76.18) n1, n2
BASE LINE BASE LINE 2000 (78.74)

Frame Repair Chart - Top View
Unit: mm (in.)
φ: Inner diameter
[Manual transmission model] k Front floor center locating hole φ15 (0.59)
1291 (50.83) k
374 (14.7)
359 (14.1)
φ15 (0.59) front
231 (9.09)
d e4 f g h1 i1 j1 R k j2 R
e2

φ11 (0.43)
φ11 (0.43) x 15 (0.59) slot
a3
c
φ25 (0.98) e3 R
CENTER LINE
b3 e3 L
b1

b2
CENTER LINE 33 (1.30)
65 (2.56)
283 (11.1) j1 L j2 L
76
338 (13.3)
(2.99)
409 (16.1)
138 425 (16.7)
(5.43)
634 (25.0)
155 715 (28.2)
216 (8.50)
(6.10) 805 (31.7)
340 (13.4) 900 (35.4)
1290 (50.79) j2 R/j2 L
1450 (57.09) l
1610 (63.39)
1700 (66.93)
b4 1925 (75.79)
1935 (76.18)
BASE LINE BASE LINE

l i2 m o2 r1 s
p q t
h2 n1 o1 v
u
A r2
A 92.7
(3.65)
n2 64
(2.52) o1
110
(4.33)
o2
234 (9.21)
373 (14.7)
405 (15.9)
469 (18.5) [Section AA]
630 (24.8)
655 (25.8)
h2 862 (33.9)
i2
m
n1, n2
2000 (78.74)
Frame Repair Chart - Side View
Unit: mm (in.)
φ: Inner diameter
a1 For engine side mount φ15 (0.59) front g Floor center stiffener locating hole φ15 (0.59) l Front floor cross-member locating hole φ25 (0.98)
a2 For engine side mount φ13 (0.51) outer h1 Front floor locating hole φ50 (1.97) front h2 Front floor locating hole φ25 (0.98) rear
a3 For engine side mount φ15 (0.59) rear i1 Inside sill locating hole φ25 (0.98) front i2 Inside sill locating hole φ25 (0.98) rear
b1 For transmission mount φ15 (0.59) front j1 R Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) front m Trailing arm gusset locating hole φ20 (0.79)
b2 For transmission mount φ15 (0.59) wheelhouse side j1 L Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) front n1 Rear seat guide bracket locating hole φ9 (0.35) right
b3 For transmission mount φ15 (0.59) rear j2 R Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) rear n2 Rear seat guide bracket locating hole φ9 (0.35) left
b4 For transmission mount φ13 (0.51) j2 L Floor frame locating hole φ15 (0.59) rear o1 For trailing arm mount φ15 (0.59) inner
k Front floor center locating hole φ15 (0.59) o2 For trailing arm mount φ17 (0.67) outer
d Front damper center hole φ48 (1.89)
d
e3 R Outrigger locating hole φ11 (0.43)
u
48
(1.89) s
d
B
[Section BB] q
b2 p
B
o2
j1 R
j1 L j2 R k o1
l i2
e2 h1 i1 h2 m
e3
e4
BASE
LINE
c b3
a2 e1
b1
a1 a3
f g r1, r2
[Manual transmission model] BASE LINE j2 L n1, n2
b4
155
(6.10)
BASE LINE
BASE LINE
Frame Repair Chart - Side View
Unit: mm (in.)
φ: Inner diameter
k Front floor center locating hole φ15 (0.59)
d Front damper center hole φ48 (1.89)
d
e3 R Outrigger locating hole φ11 (0.43)
48
(1.89)
d
B
[Section BB]
b2
B
j1 R
j1 L j2 R k
e2 h1 i1
e3
e4
BASE
LINE
c b3
a2 e1
b1
a1 a3
f g
[Manual transmission model] BASE LINE j2 L
b4
155
(6.10)
BASE LINE
BASE LINE
s
q t
o2
o1 v
l i2
h2 m
r1, r2
n1, n2
Cross Section of Body and Sealants - General
NOTE: Follow the sealer manufacturer's instructions, and apply the sealer. Note the following items:
Clean the areas to be sealed with wax and grease remover.
Wipe off any excess spot sealer with thinner. After the primer is sprayed, sealer will fill the area where the spot sealer was wiped.
Make sure you can see the sealant when the sealed part is in its proper location. For the details, refer to engine compartment and damper
housing, dashboard upper and dashboard lower, front floor, rear floor, roof panel/rear pillar gutter and rear panel, and rear wheelhouse.
When applying sealant to the engine compartment, the door opening, and the trunk lid gutter, try to match the appearance of the factory sealer.
Wipe off any excess sealer.
Apply sealer to any area that a replacement part will cover. Smooth the sealer with a brush if necessary.
Cross Section of Body and Sealants - Engine Compartment and Damper Housing
INNER UPPER FRONT PILLAR UPPER DAMPER HOUSING

STIFFENER
OUTER PANEL
DASHBOARD
UPPER SIDE MEMBER SIDE FRAME
WINDSHIELD LOWER DASHBOARD LOWER
DASHBOARD UPPER DAMPER BASE

SIDE MEMBER
BACKPLATE
DAMPER
EXTENSION SIDE FRAME
DASHBOARD LOWER
DAMPER
EXTENSION
STEERING JOINT COVER
DAMPER LOWER STIFFENER

HOUSING OUTER PANEL
DAMPER BASE
DASHBOARD INNER LOWER
DAMPER LOWER
EXTENSION
DAMPER BASE
DAMPER HOUSING DAMPER OUTER

HOUSING PANEL LOWER
DAMPER STIFFENER
HOUSING DAMPER HOUSING
INNER LOWER
DASHBOARD LOWER
WHEELHOUSE GUSSET DASHBOARD LOWER
[VIEW: Z]
BACKPLATE
OUTER
PANEL CORNER
STIFFENER
[Z] INNER LOWER
OUTRIGGER
OUTER DAMPER HOUSING SIDE FRAME DASHBOARD

PANEL SIDE FRAME EXTENSION LOWER
EXTENSION
OUTRIGGER
INNER LOWER BACKPLATE
DASHBOARD LOWER SIDE FRAME BACKPLATE OUTRIGGER

Cross Section of Body and Sealants - Dashboard Upper and Dashboard Lower
DASHBOARD UPPER WINDSHIELD LOWER DASHBOARD UPPER

SIDE MEMBER SIDE MEMBER
INNER UPPER
WINDSHIELD
DASHBOARD LOWER
UPPER
WINDSHIELD LOWER DASHBOARD LOWER

WINDSHIELD
LOWER
DASHBOARD UPPER INNER LOWER
DASHBOARD LOWER

DASHBOARD LOWER
INNER LOWER
DASHBOARD LOWER
INSIDE SILL
FRONT FLOOR
DASHBOARD LOWER DASHBOARD

LOWER
DASHBOARD LOWER DASHBOARD LOWER

EXTENSION

Cross Section of Body and Sealants - Front Floor
SIDE SILL EXTENSION
FRONT FLOOR SIDE SILL EXTENSION
INSIDE SILL
TRAILING ARM BRACKET
LOWER GUSSET
INSIDE SILL
CENTER INNER
FRONT FLOOR
MIDDLE FLOOR
CROSS-MEMBER
FRONT FLOOR
INSIDE SILL
INSIDE SILL TRAILING ARM BRACKET
EXTENSION LOWER GUSSET
FRONT FLOOR
MIDDLE FLOOR
FRONT FLOOR CROSS-MEMBER
FLOOR CAP
FLOOR CAP
FRONT FLOOR
FLOOR CAP
FRONT FLOOR FRONT FLOOR
FLOOR CAP FRONT FLOOR
FRONT FLOOR
FLOOR CENTER
FRONT FLOOR TUNNEL
FLOOR FRAME
FLOOR FRAME
UPPER STIFFENER
Cross Section of Body and Sealants - Rear Floor
REAR DAMPER REAR FLOOR SIDE REAR FLOOR SIDE LOWER GUTTER
EXTENSION REAR WHEELHOUSE EXTENSION EXTENSION
REAR INNER OUTER PANEL
SIDE SILL REAR REAR PANEL UPPER
FLOOR SIDE REAR FLOOR SIDE STIFENER
EXTENSION EXTENSION
REAR PANEL
REAR FLOOR
SIDEGUSSET
REAR FRAME
JACK-UP BASE
REAR INNER STIFFENER
REAR FLOOR SIDE

REAR PANEL CENTER STIFFENER
JACK-UP BASE REAR
FLOOR REAR PANEL
REAR FLOOR SIDE
SIDE SILL EXTENSION JACK-UP STIFFENER

MIDDLE FLOOR CROSS-
MEMBER STIFFENER REAR PANEL
REAR FLOOR SIDE
SIDE SILL REAR FLOOR REAR FLOOR

EXTENSION TRAILING ARM SIDE REAR FLOOR SIDE
INNER BRACKET
REAR
MIDDLE FLOOR FLOOR
CROSS-MEMBER REAR FLOOR
EXTENSION REAR FRAME
MIDDLE FLOORCROSS- REAR FRAME REAR FLOOR SIDE
MEMBER STIFFENER EXTENSION
REAR FLOOR REAR FLOOR EXTENSION
MIDDLE FLOOR EXTENSION
CROSS-MEMBER
REAR FLOOR
FLOOR CAP
REAR FLOOR
Cross Section of Body and Sealants - Roof Panel/Rear Pillar Gutter and Rear Panel
ROOF PANEL OUTER PANEL UPPER GUTTER
ROOF PANEL
OUTER PANEL
MIDDLE GUTTER
UPPER GUTTER
OUTER PANEL
LOWER GUTTER
[VIEW:Z]
LOWER GUTTER
EXTENSION TAILGATE HINGE
MIDDLE GUTTER
ROOF PANEL
UPPER GUTTER
OUTER PANEL LOWER GUTTER
LOWER GUTTER
MIDDLE GUTTER
[Z]
LOWER GUTTER LOWER GUTTER
EXTENSION EXTENSION
LOWER GUTTER
OUTER PANEL
OUTER PANEL
OUTER PANEL LOWER GUTTER
OUTER PANEL
REAR INNER
OUTER PANEL REAR PANEL
REAR INNER REAR PANEL

REAR
OUTER PANEL WHEEL-
HOUSE REAR FLOOR
REAR JACK-UP
INNER STIFFENER
LOWER GUTTER
REAR INNER OUTER PANEL REAR FLOOR SIDE

EXTENSION
Cross Section of Body and Sealants - Rear Wheelhouse
REAR WHEELHOUSE
REAR DAMPER BASE REAR DAMPER BASE
REAR DAMPER REAR
EXTENSION DAMPER REAR WHEELHOUSE
BASE
REAR DAMPER
EXTENSION
OUTER PANEL
REAR INNER
REAR WHEELHOUSE
REAR INNER
SIDE SILL
END PLATE
REAR INNER TRAILING ARM BRACKET

REAR DAMPER BASE REAR
WHEELHOUSE
REAR FRAME A
JACK-UP BASE
REAR INNER
TRAILING ARM
BRACKET
JACK-UP BASE
OUTER PANEL SIDE SILL REAR
END PLATE WHEELHOUSE
NUT
REAR WHEELHOUSE
INNER PANEL
SEAT BELT ANCHOR PATCH

SEAT BELT ANCHOR PATCH
REAR DAMPER
EXTENSION
REAR FRAME
Rust-preventive Treatments - General
Undercoat
Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury.

Ventilate when spraying undercoat.
NOTE:
Mask the exhaust system, oxygen sensors, and suspension mount areas to protect them from undercoat overspray.
Follow the undercoating manufacturer's instructions.
Clean the body with wax and grease remover before the undercoat is sprayed.
Apply the undercoat to the front wheelhouse, rear wheelhouse, and undersides of the front floor and rear floor, refer to undercoating diagram.
Coat the bottom of the fuel tank.
Anti-rust Agents
Anti-rust agents contain substances that are harmful if you breathe or swallow them, or get them on your skin. Wear coveralls, gloves, eye
protection, and an approved respirator while using such agents.
Ventilate when spraying an anti-rust agent as it contains a small amount of organic solvent. Keep sparks, flames and cigarettes away.
NOTE:
Do not spray an anti-rust agent on the brake system components, exhaust system components and related parts, emission control devices in the
engine compartment, ball joint covers, the fuel strainer, or exterior and interior parts.
Wipe the excess agent with a clean rag dampened with light oil.
Follow the anti-rust agent manufacturer's instructions.
Before applying an anti-rust agent, thoroughly clean the area to be coated with a steam cleaner, etc., and let it dry. Waxoyl may be applied to a
wet surface.
Apply the anti-rust agent from the installation hole and the access hole to parts in the outer panel and the frame. Spray the anti-rust agent
sufficiently until the excess amount oozes out when filling the side sill.
Rust-preventive Treatments - Undercoating Area
Apply undercoat to the areas shown.
NOTE:
Coating thickness: 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) MIN.
Front wheelhouse, rear wheelhouse, and dashboard lower coating thickness 0.5 mm (0.02 in.).
Apply the undercoat 10 mm (0.4 in.) from the edge of the welded flanges.
[FRONT WHEELHOUSE Section] [REAR WHEELHOUSE Section]

: indicates coating area.
FLOOR CENTER MIDDLE FLOOR

FRONT WHEELHOUSE INSIDE
DAMPERSILL
BASE CROSS-MEMBER REAR WHEELHOUSE
CROSS-MEMBER
FRONT FLOOR REAR INNER

OUTRIGGER PANEL FRONT FLOOR REAR
FRAME WHEELHOUSE
DAMPER HOUSING
REAR
FRAME
FRONT SIDE FRAME
REAR FLOOR SIDE 246 mm
40 mm (9.69 in.)
FRONT DAMPER (1.6 in.)
EXTENSION
10 mm
(0.4 in.) REAR
BACKPLATE FLOOR
268 mm
[SIDE SILL Section] REAR FRAME (10.6 in.)
OUTER PANEL
OUTER PANEL INSIDE SILL EXTENSION
INSIDE SILL
REAR FLOOR SIDE

SIDE SILL OUTER PANEL
30 mm
(1.2 in.) [FRONT WHEELHOUSE] 73 mm [REAR WHEELHOUSE]
(2.9 in.)
With side sill panel JACK-UP BASE or STIFFENER

Coating thickness:
more than 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) Coating thickness:
more than 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
[FRONT FLOOR FRAME Section]
FRONT FLOOR
[MIDDLE FLOOR CROSS-MEMBER Section]
MIDDLE FLOOR CROSS-MEMBER

STIFFENER
REAR FLOOR
FRAME PLATE EXTENSION
FRONT FLOOR FRAME REAR FLOOR

100 mm
[FLOOR CENTER CROSS-MEMBER Section] (3.93 in.)
FRONT FLOOR
MIDDLE SEAT CROSS-MEMBER REAR
MIDDLE FLOOR CROSS-MEMBER

FRONT FLOOR
CENTER CROSS-MEMBER
Rust-preventive Treatments - Areas to be Covered by Internal Anti-rust Agents
: indicates anti-rust agents.

TAILGATE HINGE
MIDDLE FLOOR TAILGATE
CROSS-MEMBER
REAR FRAME
INSIDE SILL
EXTENSION
HOOD JACK-UP
STIFFENER
HOOD HINGE
FLOOR CENTER
CROSS-MEMBER
MIDDLE SEAT
CROSS-MEMBER
FRONT FLOOR FRAME REAR
DASHBOARD UPPER
FLOOR TUNNEL
CROSS-MEMBER
REAR WHEEL
ARCH
SIDE SILL
FRONT SIDE
FRAME
WHEELHOUSE
UPPER MEMBER REAR DOOR
BULKHEAD LOWER OUTRIGGER
CROSS-MEMBER
REAR DOOR HINGE
SIDE FRAME GUSSET WHEELHOUSE
LOWER MEMBER
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR HINGE
FRONT FENDER
Service Precautions
General
Observe all safety precautions and notes while working.
Protect all painted surfaces and seats against dirt and scratches with a clean cloth or vinyl cover.
Work safety and give your work your undivided attention. When either the front or rear wheels are to be raised,
block the remaining wheels securely. Communicate at frequently as possible when work involves two or more
workers. Do not run the engine unless the shop or working area is well ventilated.
Before removing or disassembling parts, they must be inspected carefully to isolate the cause for which service is
necessary. Observe all safety notes and precautions and follow the proper procedures as described in this manual.
Mark or place all removed parts in order in a parts rack so they can be reassembled in their original places.
Use the special tool when use of such a tool is specified.
Parts must be assembled with the proper torque according to the maintenance standards established.
When tightening a series of bolts or nuts, begin with the center or large diameter bolts and tighten them in
crisscross pattern in two or more steps.
Use new packings, gaskets, O-rings, and cotter pins whenever reassembling.
Do not reuse parts that must be required to replace. Always replace them.
Use Honda parts and lubricants or those equivalent. When parts are to be reused, they must be inspected carefully
to make sure they are not damaged or deteriorated and are in good usable condition.
Coat or fill parts with specified grease as specified. Clean all removed parts with solvent upon disassembly.
Brake fluid and hydraulic components

-When replenishing the system, use extreme care to prevent dust and dirt from entering the system.
-Do not mix different brands of fluid as they may not be compatible.
-Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
-Because brake fluid can cause damage to painted and resin surfaces, care should be taken not to spill it on
such materials. If spilled accidentally, quickly rinse it with water or warm water from painted or resin surfaces.
-After disconnecting brake hoses or pipes, be sure to plug the openings to prevent loss of brake fluid.
-Clean all disassembled parts only in clean BRAKE FLUID. Blow open all holes and passages with compressed
air.
-Keep disassembled parts from air-borne dust and abrasives.
-Check that parts are clean before assembly.
Avoid oil or grease getting on rubber parts and tubes, unless specified.
Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the terminal part of the connectors and switches, especially if you
have silicone grease on your hands or gloves.
When spraying any agents that contain silicone, cover all the connectors, terminals, and switches in area with a
protective cloth or plastic sheet.
Upon assembling, check every part for proper installation and operation.
Electrical Troubleshooting Information
Before Troubleshooting
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box.

2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tighten the connections.
Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will
damage the alternator diodes.
Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely
damage the wiring.
3. Check the drive belt tension.
Handling Connectors
Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals.
Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with grease (except watertight connectors).
All connectors have push-down release type locks (A).
Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mounting bracket on the body or on another
component. This clip has a pull type lock.
Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector
from its mount bracket (A).
Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
Always reinstall plastic covers.
Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B).
The backs of some connectors are packed with grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated,
replace it.
Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked.
Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down.
Handling Wires and Harnesses
Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A).
Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the
clip.
After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts.
Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and
from exposed screws and bolts.
Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B).
Testing and Repairs
Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with
electrical tape.
After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them.
When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described in this manual.
If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector).
Use a probe with a tapered tip.

Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals.
Puncturing the insulation on a wire can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections.
For testing at connectors, bring the tester probe into contact with the terminal from the connector side of wire
harness connectors in the engine compartment.
For female connectors, just tough lightly with the tester probe and do not insert the probe.
When checking any control module(s) or unit(s) connector terminals, gently slide the sharp tester probe from the wire side
into the connector until it comes in contact with the terminal end of the wire.
Five-step Troubleshooting
1. Verify The Complaint
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to verify the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not
begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area.
2. Analyze The Schematic
Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current
paths from the power feed through the circuit components to ground. If several circuits fail at the same time, the
fuse or ground is a likely cause.
Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit operation, identify one or more possible causes of
the problem.
3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit
Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in Step 2 . Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the
key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are
easily accessible.
4. Fix The Problem
Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures.
5. Make Sure The Circuit Works
Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the
problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and
the original problem does not recur.
Wire Color Codes
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics:
WHT. White
YEL. Yellow
BLK. Black
BLU. Blue
GRN. Green
RED. Red
ORN. Orange
PNK. Pink
BRN. Brown
GRY. Gray
PUR. Purple
LT BLU. Light Blue
LT GRN. Light Green
The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.
Dashboard Fuse Lid Panel Removal/Installation
LHD Model
NOTE:
1. Pull the fuse lid panel (A) back by hand to release the hooks (B) and the clips.
2. Pull the fuse lid panel (A) rearward to remove it.

Dashboard Driver's Lower Cover Removal/Installation
LHD Model
NOTE:
1. Remove the fuse lid panel.
2. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (A).
-1. Use the trim tool to pry the bottom side of the panel partially out.
-2. Pry the front bottom of the panel slightly toward you and release the clips and the hooks (B).
3. Install the lower cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Open in the Front Passenger's Airbag Inflator (LHD model)
Increased Resistance in the Front Passenger's Airbag Inflator (LHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
6. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector from the front passenger's airbag.
7. Install a jumper wire between the No. 2 and the No. 3 terminals of the dashboard wire harness 4P connector.
11. Read the DTC.
NO - Faulty front passenger's airbag; replace the front passenger's airbag. ■
14. Remove a jumper wire from the dashboard wire harness 4P connector.
16. Install a jumper wire between the No. 5 and the No. 6 terminals of SRS unit connector A (39P).
17. Check for continuity between the No. 2 and the No. 3 terminals of the dashboard wire harness 4P connector.
NO - Open or increased resistance in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness.■
Short to Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in the Passenger's Airbag Inflator (LHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
10. Read the DTC.
14. Connect an SRS short canceller (070AZ-SAA0100) to the No. 5 and the No. 6 terminals of the SRS unit connector
A (39P).
15. Measure the resistance between the No. 5 and the No. 6 terminals of the SRS unit connector A (39P). There
should be 0−1.0 Ω.
YES - Short in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness.■
Short to Power in the Front Passenger's Airbag Inflator (LHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
A (39P).
10. Measure the voltage between the No. 5 and the No. 6 terminals of the SRS unit connector A (39P) and body
ground. There should be less than 1 V.
16. Measure the voltage between the No. 5 and the No. 6 terminals of SRS unit connector A (39P) and body ground.
YES - Faulty front passenger's airbag; replace the front passenger's airbag. ■
NO - Short to power in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness.■
Short to Ground in the Front Passenger's Airbag Inflator (LHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
7. Check for continuity between the No. 5 and the No. 6 terminals of SRS unit connector A (39P) and body ground.
YES - Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness: replace the dashboard wire harness.■
Fuel and Emissions Systems Connector and Harness Locations
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
LHD model
G101 2 3
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) 1
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL ENGINE 4 EVAP CANISTER
SOLENOID WIRE HARNESS
24P JUNCTION CONNECTOR 12P JUNCTION CONNECTOR MAP SENSOR PURGE VALVE
LHD model
(1) (2) (A/T) (2) (M/T) 5 (3) (4)
7
ENGINE
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) WIRE HARNESS SECONDARY
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 ENGINE 8
A/F SENSOR HO2S
INJECTOR INJECTOR INJECTOR INJECTOR WIRE(SENSOR
HARNESS 1) (SENSOR 2)
(1) (2) OUTPUT
(3) SHAFT 5 (4)6 67 OUTPUT SHAFT
(5) (6)
LHD model (COUNTERSHAFT)
4 MAF SENSOR/ (COUNTERSHAFT)
24P JUNCTION CONNECTOR SPEED SENSOR IAT SENSOR SPEED SENSOR LEFT
10P ENGINE
CONNECTOR
31
(5) (6) (M/T) (7) (8) (A/T) 9 COMPARTMENT
(9)
3 WIRE HARNESS
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS 8
CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) 6 7 8 9 10
2 11
5
12P JUNCTION No. 4 No. 3 10
LHD model 13P CONNECTOR TEST CONNECTOR (2) 14P CONNECTOR IGNITION ESP12
CONTROL UNITIGNITION
THROTTLE
13P CONNECTOR
(1)
BODY TACHOMETER
CMP SENSOR ECT SENSOR
ECM/PCM
1 A (□) (12)*
CKP SENSOR
(3) COIL (11) ECM/PCM
(4) COIL (12)
B ( ) (13)*
(7)
(10) 1 CONNECTOR
(8) (9) (10) 13 9
(11) DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS
4
11
RIGHT ENGINE 10
UNDER-DASH
COMPARTMENT UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
WIRE HARNESS FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY FUSE/RELAY ELD (5)
(K) (1) (N) (2) BOX (S) (3) BOX (T) (4) RIGHT ENGINE
30
No. 2 No. 1 ABS MODULATOR-
12P JUNCTION 12P JUNCTION COMPARTMENT
IGNITION GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
IGNITION(5) ECT SENSOR 2 APP SENSOR CONTROL
CONNECTOR
UNIT (7) CONNECTOR
3P CONNECTOR
(8)RIGHT 12
WIRE HARNESS
COIL (13) COIL (14) (15) (6) (16) (17) ENGINE
LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
ECM/PCM
COMPARTMENT WIRE C (○) (14)*
HARNESS 14ENGINE
WIRE HARNESS
WIRE
17 3 13HARNESS
LEFT ENGINE 2ND CLUTCH A/T CLUTCH A/T CLUTCH 3ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION PRESSURE PRESSURE TRANSMISSION
COMPARTMENT 29WIRE HARNESS FLUID CONTROL CONTROL FLUID
PRESSURE UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY
TRANSMISSION SOLENOID BOX (A) (8) SOLENOID PRESSURE 15
UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH SWITCH (15) RANGE SWITCH VALVE A VALVE C 14
SWITCH
FUSE/RELAY2 FUSE/RELAY BOX (A/T) (16) (A/T) (17) (A/T) (18) (A/T) (19) (A/T)11
NOTE: 28 PADDLE PADDLE
BOX (W) (6) (Q) (7)
· Connector with male terminals (double outline): view from terminal side 15
SHIFTER− SHIFTER+
· Connector with female terminals (single outline): view from wire side (DOWNSHIFT (UPSHIFT 16
27 SWITCH)
*: Connector with female terminals (single outline): view from terminal side (11) EVAPORATOR SWITCH) (13) 12
12P JUNCTION
1
(A/T with 17
TEMPERATURE (A/T with
26 paddle shifter 19 paddle
CONNECTOR (9) CABLE REEL (10)
model)
SENSOR (12) 16 shifter
model)
13P CONNECTOR 17
(14)
25 18
20
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD TRANSMISSION RANGE
SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT RELAY BOX21(23) SWITCH SUBHARNESS SHIFT
(A/T)
CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL24 ATF CONTROL
SOLENOID SOLENOID SOLENOID 23 TEMPERATURE SOLENOID
VALVE C SHIFT
VALVE A SOLENOID VALVE D 22 SENSOR VALVE B
(20) (A/T) WIRE HARNESS (A/T)(22) (A/T)
(21) (A/T) (24) (A/T) (25) (A/T)
13
22
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX (B) (9)
CRANK SENSOR 21
SUBHARNESS TEMPERATURE
14 LOCK
SHIFT
CABLE REEL (15) IGNITION SWITCH CONTROL DIAL A/CFUEL PUMP
CONDENSER SOLENOID
23 16 A/C COMPRESSOR
(16) (17) (KP model) FAN(18)
RELAY (19) (A/T)
CLUTCH RELAY 18
1RADIATOR FAN RELAY
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE 19
CONTROL
SOLENOID
8P CONNECTOR VALVE B INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT) OIL PRESSURE 15KNOCK SENSOR
20 ALTERNATOR
(26) (27) (A/T) SPEED SENSOR (28) (A/T) SWITCH (29) (30) (31)
M/T
2
BRAKE PEDAL CLUTCH PEDAL
M/T DATA LINK POSITION POSITION
NOTE: SRS UNIT A (20) CONNECTOR (21)* SWITCH (22) SWITCH (23)
(M/T)
· Connector with male terminals (double outline): view from terminal side
9 from wire side
· Connector with female terminals (single outline): view
*: Connector with female terminals (single outline): view from terminal side 3
NOTE:
· Connector with female terminals (single outline): view from wire side
*: Connector with female terminals (single outline): view from terminal side
5
NOTE:
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY
8 BOX
LHD model
G101 2 3
ROCKER ARM 4
OIL CONTROL 12P JUNCTION 1 EVAP CANISTER
SOLENOID CONNECTOR (2) MAP SENSOR PURGE VALVE 24P 5
JUNCTION CONNECTOR
LHD model
(1)
ENGINE (M/T, i-SHIFT System) (3) (4) (5)
WIRE HARNESS
G101 1 6
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) 2ND CLUTCH
ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT TRANSMISSION
WIREOUTPUT
HARNESS
SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT) FLUID
(COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED SENSOR 10P CONNECTOR PRESSURE 2 TEST TRANSMISSION
7
RANGE SWITCH
24P
MAF JUNCTION
SENSOR/ CONNECTOR 6P JUNCTION TACHOMETER
LHD model
(1)SENSOR
IAT (A/T) SPEED SENSOR (2) (A/T) (3) (A/T) CONNECTOR
SWITCH (4) (5) (A/T)
(7) 13P CONNECTOR (A/T) (9) CONNECTOR
(6) (M/T, i-SHIFT System) (8) (i-SHIFT System) (10) LEFT ENGINE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) WIRE HARNESS 5 6 WIRE
LEFTHARNESS
ENGINE
SECONDARY
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 7 ENGINE HO2S
IGNITION
A/F SENSOR
WIRE HARNESS COMPARTMENT
IGNITION IGNITION IGNITION (SENSOR 1) (SENSOR 2)
COIL (1) COIL (2) 4 COIL (3) COIL (4) (5) (6)WIRE HARNESS
LHD model21A/T CLUTCH A/T CLUTCH 3ND CLUTCH
8
PRESSURE PRESSURE TRANSMISSION SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT
CONTROL CONTROL
3 FLUID CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
ECM/PCM A (□) (11)* SOLENOID
SOLENOID PRESSURE SOLENOID ECM/PCM B (SOLENOID
) (12)* 8
SOLENOID
VALVE A VALVE C SWITCH 3 4
VALVE C 5 VALVE A VALVESUBHARNESS
D
ECM/PCM Circuit
(6) (A/T) Diagram (cont'd)
(7) (A/T) 2 (8) (A/T) (9) (A/T)
6 7(10) (A/T) CABLE REEL
(11) (A/T) 3 9
8
2
1 9
9
LHD model No. 4
10
No. 3
12P JUNCTION
410
ESP CONTROL UNIT APP SENSOR
THROTTLE
(1) BODY CMP SENSOR GAUGE CONTROL ECT MODULE
SENSOR (2)
1 CKP A/T
SENSOR (3) INJECTOR INJECTOR
CONNECTOR (4)
CLUTCH
(7)DASHBOARD
20 1 HARNESS(8)SHIFT
WIRE (9) (10) PRESSURE (11)
RIGHT ENGINE
(12)
ATF CONTROL CONTROL CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE SOLENOID SOLENOID 11
SENSOR VALVE B 8P CONNECTOR VALVE B INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT) WIRE
10 HARNESS
19(12) (A/T) (13) (A/T) (14) (A/T) (15) (A/T) RIGHT ENGINE
SPEED SENSOR (16) (A/T)
RIGHT ENGINE 10P CONNECTOR (14) AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS
ECM/PCM C (○) (13)*DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS (i-SHIFT System) RELAY BOX (15) PADDLE
COMPARTMENT 13P CONNECTOR 12P JUNCTION 14P CONNECTOR SHIFTER− 2P CONNECTOR (4) 12
WIRE HARNESS 18(1) CONNECTOR (2) (3) (DOWNSHIFT (i-SHIFT System)
No. 1 EGR VALVE SWITCH) (8) ABS MODULATOR-
EVAPORATOR
No. 2 12P JUNCTION (A/T with CONTROL
TEMPERATURE
UNIT 11
12P JUNCTION
INJECTOR INJECTOR (15) ECT SENSOR 2 13 (9)
ENGINE OIL
CONNECTOR (5) (14) CONNECTOR (6) (KE, KG models) CABLE REEL (7) (16) paddle shifter (17) SENSOR
LEFT ENGINE
(13)
LEVEL SENSOR 5 model)
COMPARTMENT
SUBHARNESSWIRE HARNESS
NOTE:
· Connector ENGINE
LEFT ENGINE with male terminals (double outline): view from terminal side
· ENGINE
Connector
COMPARTMENT with female terminals (single outline): view from wire side A/C CONDENSERWIRE
OIL
AUXILIARY 17
UNDER-DASH TRANSMISSION RANGE HARNESS
SWITCH
12
*:LEVEL
WIREConnector
HARNESS with female terminals (single outline): view from terminal sideA/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCHFAN RELAY
PEDAL
SENSOR
FUSE/RELAY16BOX (5) CLUTCH RELAY SUBHARNESS
POSITION (A/T)
SUBHARNESS CLUTCH PEDAL ATRANSMISSION
SWITCHRADIATOR FAN RELAY
4 BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (8) RANGE SWITCH 11 13
VSAACTUATOR
MODULATOR-15 POSITION SWITCH B (7) (KE, KG models)
SUBHARNESS (A/T)
CLUTCH
CONTROL UNIT 16 ENGINE OIL SWITCH (6) 5 (M/T)
PADDLE(TCM) (16) 3P CONNECTOR (M/T) OIL PRESSURE KNOCK SENSOR 14
LEVEL SENSOR (17) 3P CONNECTOR (18) CLUTCH
SHIFTER+ (17) System)
(i-SHIFT (KE, KG models)
(18)
(KE, KG models) SWITCH (19) ACTUATOR (20)
(UPSHIFT 14 14 SUBHARNESS (i-SHIFT System)
CLUTCH
SWITCH) (10) ACTUATOR SHIFT SOLENOID
13P CONNECTOR 20P CONNECTOR 12
(A/T with
SUBHARNESS
18 (11) (WithWIRE
ABS) HARNESS (A/T) 15 (11) (With VSA) 6 CABLE REEL (12)
paddle3shifter 13 12 7
model) 9 8
SHIFT SOLENOID 11 10
STARTER RELAY 2 15
WIRE HARNESS (A/T)
2 13
UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH
NOTE: ALTERNATORCRANK SENSOR
FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY 21 FUSE/RELAY ELD (13) FUSE/RELAY
· Connector(21)
(K)with
(9) male terminals (double outline):
SUBHARNESS (N) (10) view from terminal side
BOX (S) (11) 20
BOX (T) (12) 19 BOX
14(X) (14)
1 female terminals (single outline): view from wire side
· Connector with
*: Connector with female terminals (single
INERTIA 17 outline): view from terminal side 6 SHIFT LOCK GEAR SHIFT
IGNITION SWITCH SWTITCH (14) 12P JUNCTION FUEL PUMP SOLENOID CONTROL MODULE (18)
(13) (KE, KG models) CONNECTOR (15) (16) (17) (A/T) (i-SHIFT System) 16
15
16 17
22
18
NOTE:
· Connector with male terminals (double outline):M/T
view from terminal side
· Connector with female terminalsUNDER-DASH
(single outline): view from wire side 9 BOX (A) (17)
UNDER-DASH
*: Connector with female8terminalsFUSE/RELAY
FUSE/RELAY (single outline):
BOX view from terminal side
BOX (W) (15) (Q) (16) AUXILIARY
YAW RATE-LATERAL/
LONGITUDINAL UNDER-DASH
ACCELERATION 10 FUSE HOLDER
DATA LINK (22)
SRS UNIT A (19) 7 CONNECTOR (20)* SENSOR (21) (With VSA)
(i-SHIFT System)
M/T
11
7.5A 7.5A
18
12
17
NOTE: UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX 13
· Connector with female terminals (single outline): view from wire side 14

16 15
NOTE:
Brake Booster Replacement
LHD Model
1. Remove the air cleaner cover, and the air cleaner case.
2. Remove the master cylinder.
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A) from the brake booster.
4. Remove the brake lines (A) from the clamp (B).
5. Remove the engine wire harness clamp (A).

7. Remove the lock pin (A) and the joint pin (B), then disconnect the yoke from the brake pedal.
8. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts (C).
9. Remove the brake booster (A) from the engine compartment.
Be careful not to damage the booster surfaces and threads of the booster stud bolts.
Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines or other components hoses and lines.
NOTE:
Use new booster gasket (B) reassembly.
KG ABS model: Install the brake booster bracket (C) between brake booster and new gasket reassembly.
10. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Install the master cylinder after installing the brake booster.
Check the brake pedal height and free play after installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if necessary.
Bleed the brake system.
KG ABS model: Check the brake assist.
Relay and Control Unit Locations - Dashboard 1
LHD model
STARTER CUT RELAY GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

(STATER RELAY 2) *1
Wire colors: GRN,
BLU, BLK, and PUR
DAYTIME RUNNING
LIGHTS RELAY
Wire colors: BRN, WHT,
RED, GRY, and LT GRN
FRONT FOG LIGHT RELAY

Wire colors: WHT,
GRN, LT BLU, and WHT
REAR FOG LIGHT RELAY EPS CONTROL

Wire colors: PNK, UNIT
PUR, YEL, and PNK
HANDS FREE TELEPHONE
CONTROL UNIT
AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH SRS UNIT
FUSE HOLDER
IGNITION COIL RELAY
A/F SENSOR RELAY ELECTRONIC THROTTLE

CONTROL SYSTEM (ETCS) REAR WINDOW
CONTROL RELAY DEFOGGER RELAY
POWER WINDOW
RELAY (P/W)
BLOWER MOTOR
RELAY
LIGHTING RELAY 1
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY

(FI MAIN) PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 ELECTRICAL LOAD
LIGHTING RELAY 2 (FUEL PUMP) DETECTOR (ELD)
STARTER CUT RELAY
*1: i-SHIFT system (STARTER RELAY 1)*2
*2: A/T or i-SHIFT system
Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness and Front Fog Light Subharness Locations
LHD model
G451
RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS
FRONT FOG LIGHT

SUBHARNESS G402
G401
Open in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator (LHD model)
Increased Resistance in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator (LHD model)
NOTE:
Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures , General Troubleshooting
Information , and Battery Terminal Disconnection/Reconnection.
3. Read the DTC.
DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.■
5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes.
6. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector from the cable reel.
7. Install a jumper wire between the No. 2 [No. 4] and the No. 3 terminals of the cable reel 4P connector.
[ ]: KG model
8. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
11. Read the DTC.
NO - Faulty driver's airbag; replace the driver's airbag. ■
14. Remove the column cover , then disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (A) from the cable reel.
15. Install a jumper wire between the No. 2 [No. 4] and the No. 3 terminals of the dashboard wire harness 4P
connector.
[ ]: KG model
17. Read the DTC.
NO - Open or increased resistance in the cable reel; replace the cable reel. ■
23. Measure the resistance between the No. 2 [No. 4] and the No. 3 terminals of the dashboard wire harness 4P
connector. There should be less than 1.0 Ω.
[ ]: KG model
Short to Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator (LHD model)
SRS short canceller
070AZ-SAA0100
NOTE:
3. Read the DTC.
10. Read the DTC.
17. Read the DTC.
NO - Short in the cable reel; replace the cable reel. ■
A (39P).
22. Measure the resistance between the No. 3 and the No. 4 terminals of SRS unit connector A (39P). There should be
less than 1.0 Ω.
DTC 11-4x (‘‘x'' can be 0, 2 thru 9 or A thru F):
Open in the Driver's Airbag Second Inflator (LHD model)
Increased Resistance in the Driver's Airbag Second Inflator (LHD model)
NOTE:
3. Read the DTC.
7. Install a jumper wire between the No. 1 and the No. 2 terminals of the cable reel 4P connector.
9. Read the DTC.
15. Read the DTC.
NO - Open in the cable reel; replace the cable reel. ■
17. Remove the jumper wire from the dashboard wire harness 4P connector.
Short to Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in the Driver's Airbag Second Inflator (LHD model)
SRS short canceller
070AZ-SAA0100
NOTE:
3. Read the DTC.
7. Read the DTC.
11. Read the DTC.
15. Connect an SRS short canceller (070AZ-SAA0100) to No. 7 and the No. 8 terminals of the SRS unit connector A
(39P).
should be less than 1.0 Ω.
Short to Power in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator (LHD model)
SRS short canceller
070AZ-SAA0100
NOTE:
3. Read the DTC.
(39P).
There should be less than 1.0 V.
YES - Faulty driver's airbag; replace the driver's airbag. ■
YES - Short to power in the cable reel; replace the cable reel. ■
Short to Ground in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator (LHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
7. Measure the resistance between the No. 3 and the No. 4 terminals of SRS unit connector A (39P) and body
ground. There should be less than 1.0 Ω.
NO - Short to ground in the cable reel; replace the cable reel. ■
SRS DTC Troubleshooting: 11-Ax
DTC 11-Ax (‘‘x'' can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Power in the Driver's Airbag Second Inflator (LHD model)
SRS short canceller
070AZ-SAA0100
NOTE:
3. Read the DTC.
Is DTC 11-Ax indicated?
(39P).
ground. There should be less than 1.0 V.
SRS DTC Troubleshooting: 11-Bx
DTC 11-Bx (‘‘x'' can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Ground in the Driver's Airbag Second Inflator (LHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
Is DTC 11-Bx indicated?
Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness Locations
LHD model
G301
G302

WIRE HARNESS
G201
G202
Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness Locations
LHD model
G451
WIRE HARNESS
G402
G401
Dashboard Fuse Lid Panel Removal/Installation
RHD Model
NOTE:
1. Pull out the fuse lid panel (A) to detach the clips.
2. Gently pull down the bottom edge of the fuse lid panel (A) to detach the hooks (B).
Dashboard Driver's Lower Cover Removal/Installation
RHD Model
NOTE:
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (A).
-1. Use the trim tool to pry the bottom side of the panel partially out.
-2. Pry the front bottom of the panel slightly toward you and release the clips and the hooks (B).
2. Install the lower cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Open in the Front Passenger's Airbag Inflator (RHD model)
Increased Resistance in the Front Passenger's Airbag Inflator (RHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
11. Read the DTC.
Short to Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in the Front Passenger's Airbag Inflator (RHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
9. Read the DTC.
13. Connect an SRS short canceller (070AZ-SAA0100) to No. 3 and No. 4 terminals of the SRS unit connector A
(39P).
14. Measure the resistance between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminal of the SRS unit connector A (39P). There should be
0−1.0 Ω.
Short to Power in the Front Passenger's Airbag Inflator (RHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
A (39P).
13. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector from the cable reel.
YES - Faulty front passenger's airbag; replace the front passenger's airbag. ■
Short to Ground in the Front Passenger's Airbag Inflator (RHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
YES - Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness.■
SRS DTC Troubleshooting: Fx-11
DTC Fx-11 (''x'' can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Airbags and/or Tensioners Deployment Recorded
NOTE:
Information.
Refer to the DTCs shown:
-DTC F1-11: Driver's airbag and/or driver's seat belt tensioner deployed.
-DTC F2-11: Front passenger's airbag and/or front passenger's seat belt tensioner deployed.
-DTC F3-11: Driver's side airbag, left side curtain airbag, and/or driver's seat belt tensioner deployed.
-DTC F4-11: Front passenger's side airbag, right side curtain airbag, and/or front seat belt tensioner deployed.
When any airbags or tensioners have deployed, go to Component Replacement/Inspection After Deployment. ■
RHD model
G101 2 3
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL ENGINE 4
SOLENOID 24P JUNCTION CONNECTOR
WIRE HARNESS 12P JUNCTION CONNECTOR MAP SENSOR
(1)
RHD model (2) (A/T) (2) (M/T)
5 (3)
7
ENGINE
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 ENGINE 8
A/F SENSOR HO2S
INJECTOR INJECTOR INJECTOR INJECTOR WIRE(SENSOR
HARNESS 1) (SENSOR 2)
(1) (2) (3) 5 6
OUTPUT
(4) 67
SHAFT (5) (6) OUTPUT SHAFT
RHD model
EVAP CANISTER 4 (COUNTERSHAFT) MAF SENSOR/ (COUNTERSHAFT)
LEFT ENGINE
PURGE VALVE 24P JUNCTION CONNECTOR SPEED SENSOR IAT SENSOR SPEED SENSOR
(4) 30 (5) (6) (M/T) (7) 9 COMPARTMENT
(8) (A/T)
3 WIRE HARNESS
CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) 7 8
2 5 6 PADDLE SHIFTER− WIRE HARNESS
(DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) 12P JUNCTION 8
EPS CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR (2) (3) (A/T with 9 CONNECTOR (4)
No. 4 No. 3
10
(1) 4 paddle shifter model)
RHD model TEST
IGNITION IGNITION
THROTTLE COIL (11) COIL (12)
10P BODY
CONNECTOR 1
CMP SENSOR ECT SENSOR 1 CKP SENSOR
TACHOMETER ECM/PCM A (□) (12)*
(7) (9) 3 (8) (9)(10)
13P CONNECTOR (10)
CONNECTOR 9
CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS (11) LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
10
WIRE HARNESS
BRAKE PEDAL CLUTCH PEDAL 11
RIGHT ENGINE
POSITION POSITION 12P JUNCTION 12P JUNCTION 10
SWITCH (1)
COMPARTMENT SWITCH (2) CONNECTOR (3) PADDLE SHIFTER+ CONNECTOR (3) IGNITION SWITCH
WIRE HARNESS (M/T) EVAPORATOR (UPSHIFT SWITCH) (5)
CABLE REEL (5) TEMPERATURE (7) (A/T with CABLE REEL 11
(8)
29 2 SENSOR (6) paddle shifter model)
No. 2 No. 1
IGNITION
IGNITION ECM/PCM B ( ) (13)* AUXILIARY
RIGHT ENGINE
12
COIL (13) COIL (14) ECM/PCM C (○) (14)*
UNDER-HOOD RELAY BOX
1 COMPARTMENT
ECT SENSOR 2
(15) (16) WIRE HARNESS
ENGINE
28 WIRE
1 2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSIONHARNESS
13
TRANSMISSION A/CRANGE SWITCH
DATA LINK 12P JUNCTION FLUID PRESSURE (16) (A/T)
CONDENSER
CONNECTOR (6)* CONNECTOR12P(3) JUNCTION SWITCH (15)A (8)
SRS UNIT FAN RELAY RIGHT ENGINE
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE (9) CONNECTOR 12P CONNECTOR
(A/T) 16P CONNECTOR (12)
COMPARTMENT
(10) (11) 14 HARNESS
12
WIRE
11
27 A/C 15
18
COMPRESSOR
26 CLUTCH RELAY
11 17 12
25 19 16
18
A/T
ABS CLUTCH
MODULATOR- A/T CLUTCH 3ND CLUTCH24 SHIFT 20 SHIFT SHIFTTRANSMISSION RANGE
RADIATOR
PRESSURE
CONTROL UNIT UNDER-DASH 3P CONNECTOR
PRESSURE TRANSMISSION UNDER-DASH 22CONTROL UNDER-DASH
CONTROL UNDER-DASH
CONTROL ATF (A/T)
SWITCH SUBHARNESS
FAN RELAY
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS FUSE/RELAY BOX 23 21
CONTROL
(17) CONTROL (18) FLUID PRESSURE FUSE/RELAY BOX
SOLENOID FUSE/RELAY
SOLENOID FUSE/RELAY
SOLENOID TEMPERATURE
APPSOLENOID
SENSOR (13) (K) (14)
SOLENOID SWITCH (N) (15) VALVE C BOX (S)
VALVE A (16) BOXD(T) (17)
VALVE SENSOR ELD
13 (18)
VALVE
DASHBAORD WIRE A HARNESS VALVE C SHIFT SOLENOID (19) (A/T) (20) (A/T) (21) (A/T) (22) (A/T) (23) (A/T)
(17)SHIFT
(A/T) LOCK (18) (A/T) WIRE HARNESS (A/T) TEMPERATURE 13
SOLENOID FUEL PUMP (10) CONTROL DIAL (11) 2
(9) (A/T) (KZ model)
3
CRANK SENSOR
SUBHARNESS 14
NOTE: 17 4
· Connector
UNDER-DASH with male terminals (double outline): view from terminal side
UNDER-DASH 5 UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX (A) (21)
FUSE/RELAY
· Connector FUSE/RELAY
with female terminals outline): viewA/T
(singleBOX fromCLUTCH
wire side
SHIFT(W) (19)
BOX 10 (Q) (20) (single outline): viewPRESSURE 14
*: Connector
NOTE:
CONTROL with female terminals 9 from
CONTROL terminal16side INPUT SHAFT OIL
SOLENOID
· Connector with male terminals (double outline): view 8 from
SOLENOID
terminal side (MAINSHAFT) PRESSURE KNOCK
VALVE B 8P CONNECTOR VALVE B SPEED SENSOR SWITCH SENSOR ALTERNATOR
· Connector
(24) (A/T) with female terminals
M/T
(single outline): view 7 side
from(A/T)
(26) wire 15
(25) (A/T) 6 (27) (A/T) (28) (29) (30)
15
M/T
22 16
NOTE:
UNDER-DASH
· Connector with male terminals (double FUSE/RELAY
outline): viewBOX
from(B)terminal
(22) side 17
18
19
20
21

NOTE:
RHD Model
1. Remove the front wiper arms.
2. Remove the cowl cover and hood hinge covers.
3. Remove the wiper linkage assembly.
4. Remove the under cowl panel.
7. Disconnect the brake lines (A) from the ABS modulator-control unit (B).
11. Pull the brake booster (A) forward, then rotate it so the yoke (B) toward the driver's side.
12. Remove the brake booster from the engine compartment.
NOTE: Use new booster gasket (C) reassembly.
Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness Locations
RHD model
G402

WIRE HARNESS
G401
RHD model
G203

WIRE HARNESS
G201
G301
G202
Open in the Driver's Airbag Inflator (RHD model)
Increased Resistance in the Driver's Airbag Inflator (RHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
7. Install a jumper wire between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals of the cable reel 4P connector.
11. Read the DTC.
Are DTC 12-1x or 12-2x indicated?
17. Read the DTC.
23. Measure the resistance between the No. 2 and the No. 3 terminals of the dashboard wire harness 4P connector.
There should be 0−1.0 Ω.
Short to Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in the Driver's Airbag Inflator (RHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
10. Read the DTC.
17. Read the DTC.
(39P).
should be 0−1.0 Ω.
Short to Power in the Driver's Airbag Inflator (RHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
5. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure , then wait for 3 minutes.
A (39P).
Short to Ground in the Driver's Airbag Inflator (RHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
ground. There should be 0−1.0 Ω.
RHD model
2 3
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) G101 4
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL 5 EVAP CANISTER
SOLENOID 1
12P JUNCTION CONNECTOR MAP SENSOR PURGE VALVE
(1)
RHD model (2) (M/T, i-SHIFT System) (3) (4)
ENGINE
WIRE HARNESS
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) G101 1 6
2ND CLUTCH
2 TRANSMISSION
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
OUTPUT SHAFT 3FLUID PRESSURE TRANSMISSION
24P JUNCTION CONNECTOR 10P CONNECTOR SPEED SENSOR
(COUNTERSHAFT) SWITCH (4) 7 RANGE SWITCH
RHD model
(1) (A/T) (2) MAF
(A/T) SENSOR/ (3) (A/T) SPEED SENSOR (A/T) (5) (A/T)
24P JUNCTION CONNECTOR IAT SENSOR (7)
(5) ENGINE (6) (M/T, i-SHIFT System) 13P CONNECTOR (8)
17 HARNESS
WIRE ENGINE
ECM/PCM
No. 1
Circuit Diagram (cont'd) WIRE HARNESS
No. 3 No. 4 SECONDARY
No. 2
IGNITION IGNITION IGNITION5 6 7
IGNITION ENGINE A/F SENSOR ENGINELEFT ENGINE
LEFTHO2S
COIL (1) COIL (2) COIL (3) COIL (4) (SENSOR 1) (SENSORCOMPARTMENT
COMPARTMENT 2)
WIRE HARNESS WIRE HARNESS
4
(5) WIRE(6)HARNESS
RHD model
A/T CLUTCH A/T CLUTCH 3ND CLUTCH SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT 8
PRESSURE PRESSURE
3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL ATF 8
CONTROL CONTROL FLUID PRESSURE SOLENOID SOLENOID SOLENOID 9 TEMPERATURE
SOLENOID
TEST
CABLE REEL
SOLENOID SUBHARNESS SWITCH A (□) (10)*
ECM/PCM VALVE C LEFTVALVE
ENGINE A COMPARTMENT
VALVE
ECM/PCM B ( ) (11)* SENSOR
D
ECM/PCM
VALVECircuit
A Diagram 2 VALVE
(cont'd) C (8) (A/T) 8 (9) 9
(A/T) WIRE(10) (A/T)
HARNESS (11) (A/T) (12) (A/T)
TACHOMETER
(6)CONNECTOR
(A/T) (7) (A/T) 7 PADDLE10 SHIFTER−
6 (DOWNSHIFT SWITCH)
(9)
INERTIA SWITCH EPS CONTROL UNIT (4) (A/T with 9
1
(1) (KE, KG models)
10 paddle shifter model)
(2) 16P CONNECTOR (3)
RHD model 5 10P CONNECTOR
THROTTLE BODY CMP SENSOR ECT SENSOR 1 CKP SENSOR 11 (11)
(7) 16 (8) (9) (10) (i-SHIFT System)
LEFT ENGINE 12
CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS
A/T CLUTCH COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS 10
11
RIGHT
SHIFTENGINE PRESSURE 13
CONTROL
COMPARTMENT 4 CONTROL INPUT SHAFT PADDLE
15 SOLENOID
SHIFT LOCK GEARSHIFTER+
SHIFT
SOLENOID
WIRE HARNESS
IGNITION SWITCH DATA LINK (MAINSHAFT) SOLENOID
EVAPORATOR (UPSHIFT
CONTROLSWITCH)
MODULE (5)
VALVE B VALVE B 12P JUNCTION
(1) 12P 8P CONNECTOR
JUNCTION CONNECTOR (2)* (15) (A/T) SPEED SENSOR(3)
CONNECTOR (4) (A/T)
TEMPERATURE (8) (A/T
(i-SHIFT CLUTCH
with System)
(13) (A/T) (14) (A/T) (16) (A/T) paddle shifter11 ACTUATOR
model)
CONNECTOR (5) CABLE REEL (6) SENSOR (7)
No.4 No. 3 No. 2 No. 1 14 SUBHARNESS
CLUTCHECM/PCM
ACTUATORC (○) (12)*
(TCM) (12) 14 INJECTOR ENGINE OIL INJECTOR INJECTOR OIL INJECTOR (i-SHIFT System)
(i-SHIFT (13) (14) (15) PRESSURE
(16) KNOCK
3 System) LEVEL SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
(14) SWITCH
RIGHT ENGINE
SENSOR
ENGINE OIL (13) 12 COMPARTMENT
(KE, KG models) (KE, KG models) (15) 12(16)
LEVEL SENSOR WIRE HARNESS
SUBHARNESS 2 13
ENGINE OIL 12P JUNCTION ENGINE
NOTE: LEVEL SENSOR
16 CONNECTOR WIRE
CABLE
· Connector with SUBHARNESS REEL (9)
male terminals (double outline): view GAUGE CONTROL MODULE (10) (11)
SRS from terminal
UNIT A (7) side YAW RATE-LATERATERAL/
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH 4UNDER-DASH13 HARNESS
1
· Connector with female terminals (single outline): view from wire side LONGITUDINAL 15
15 SUBHARNESS (A/T)
ACCELERATION FUSE/RELAY BOX
*: Connector with female terminals (single outline): viewSHIFT
22 PUMP
FUEL from terminal
SOLENOIDside TRANSMISSION (9)RANGE SWITCH
EGR VALVE(6) AUXILIARY SENSOR (8) (With VSA) 6P(K)
JUNCTION
(17) ECT SENSOR 2 WIRE HARNESS (A/T)
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY SUBHARNESS (A/T) (20)16
CONNECTOR
BOX (19) 5 (i-SHIFT System)
(KE, KG model) (18) 14 14
6 RIGHT ENGINE
ALTERNATOR
13 8 7
(17)8 A/C
12P JUNCTION 12P JUNCTION 12 11 10 9 CONDENSER 20P CONNECTOR (14) COMPARTMENT
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR FAN RELAY (With seurity alarm15 WIRE HARNESS
system)
(12) (13) SHIFT SOLENOID 16P CONNECTOR (14)
WIRE HARNESS (A/T)
7 17
CRANK SENSOR
A/C
SUBHARNESS
UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH
COMPRESSOR UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH 16 UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY
CLUTCH RELAY FUSE/RELAY FUSE/RELAY FUSE/RELAY
ELD (13) BOX (X) (14)
NOTE: (N) (10) BOX (S) (11) BOX (T) (12) BOX (W) (15)
18
· Connector with male terminals (double outline): view from terminal
AUXILIARY
side 17
· Connector withBRAKE PEDAL
female
POSITION terminals (single outline): viewUNDER-DASH
from wire side 12P CONNECTOR
*: ConnectorWIRE
DASHBOARD with female terminals (single outline):
HARNESS
SWITCH (15) 21viewFUSE/RELAY
from terminal side (17) RADIATOR
18 APP SENSOR (18)
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS
ABS MODULATOR- BOX (16) VSA MODULATOR- FAN RELAY
CONTROL UNIT 20CONTROL UNIT 19 3P CONNECTOR
(21) 21 (21) (With VSA model) (22)
20 1
UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX (A) (17)
FUSE/RELAY BOX CLUTCH PEDAL
(16) 6
(Q) AUXILIARY
19 2
3 CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION 9
UNDER-DASH 5 M/T POSITION SWITCH A
FUSE HOLDER 4 SWITCH B (21)
(19) (20) (KE, KG models)
(i-SHIFT System) (M/T) (M/T) 10
NOTE: STARTER RELAY 2
7.5 A 7.5 A
M/T
12
18
NOTE: 17
· Connector with female terminals (single outline): view from wire side 13

14

16 15
NOTE:
RHD Model
1. Remove the front wiper arms.
2. Remove the cowl cover and hood hinge covers.
3. Remove the wiper linkage assembly.
4. Remove the under cowl panel.
7. Disconnect the brake lines (A) from the ABS/VSA modulator-control unit (B).
11. Pull the brake booster (A) forward, then rotate it so the yoke (B) toward the driver's side.
12. Remove the brake booster from the engine compartment.
NOTE:
Use new booster gasket (C) reassembly.
KE ABS model: Install the brake booster bracket (D) between brake booster and new gasket reassembly.
KE ABS model: Check the brake assist.
RHD model
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE REAR SUPER LOCKING RELAY DRIVER'S DOOR UNLOCK RELAY*1
Wire colors: BRN, BLU, Wire colors: LT GRN, BLU,
ORN, BLK, and BLU BRN, BLK, and BLU
FRONT SUPER LOCKING RELAY*2
Wire colors: LT GRN, BLU,
GRY, BLK, and BLU
HEADLIGHT LEVELING
CONTROL UNIT
(With HID)
FRONT FOG LIGHT RELAY

Wire colors: WHT,
GRN, LT BLU, and WHT
REAR FOG LIGHT RELAY

Wire colors: PNK,
PUR, YEL, and PNK
STARTER CUT RELAY
(STATER RELAY 2) *3
Wire colors: GRN,
BLU, BLK, and PUR
AUXILIARY
UNDER-DASH
SRS UNIT FUSE HOLDER
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS HORN RELAY
CONTROL UNIT (With security)
Wire colors: PUR,
WHT, ORN, and WHT
IGNITION COIL RELAY PGM-FI MAIN RELAY (FI MAIN)
LIGHTING RELAY 1 ELECTRONIC THROTTLE

CONTROL SYSTEM (ETCS)
A/F SENSOR RELAY CONTROL RELAY
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER RELAY
POWER WINDOW
RELAY (P/W)
BLOWER MOTOR
RELAY
LIGHTING RELAY 2
STARTER CUT RELAY ELECTRICAL LOAD

(STARTER RELAY 1)*4 DETECTOR (ELD)
*1: Power door locks 2 motion PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2
*2: With super locking (FUEL PUMP)
*3: i-SHIFT system
*4: A/T or i-SHIFT system
RHD model
EPS CONTROL UNIT

AUDIO UNIT
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT*1

HVAC CONTROL UNIT*2
*1: With climate control

*2: With HVAC control (push button type)
Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness, Front Fog Light Subharness, and Suspension Stroke Sensor Subharness
Locations
RHD model
G402

WIRE HARNESS
SUSPENSION STROKE FRONT FOG LIGHT

SENSOR SUBHARNESS SUBHARNESS
G401
RHD model
G203

WIRE HARNESS
G201
G301
G202
Open in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator (RHD model)
Increased Resistance in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator (RHD model)
NOTE:
3. Read the DTC.
7. Install a jumper wire between the No. 2 [No. 4] and No. 3 terminals of the cable reel 4P connector.
[ ]: KE model
11. Read the DTC.
Are DTC 12-1x or 12-2x indicated?
15. Install a jumper wire between the No. 2 [No. 4] and the No. 3 terminals of the dashboard wire harness 4P
connector.
[ ]: KE model
17. Read the DTC.
23. Measure the resistance between the No. 2 [No. 4] and the No. 3 terminals of the dashboard wire harness 4P
connector. There should be less than 1.0 Ω.
[ ]: KE model
Short to Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator (RHD model)
SRS short canceller
070AZ-SAA0100
NOTE:
3. Read the DTC.
10. Read the DTC.
17. Read the DTC.
(39P).
should be less than 1.0 Ω.
Open in the Driver's Airbag Second Inflator (RHD model)
Increased Resistance in the Driver's Airbag Second Inflator (RHD model)
NOTE:
3. Read the DTC.
7. Install a jumper wire between the No. 1 and the No. 2 terminals of the cable reel 4P connector.
9. Read the DTC.
12. Remove the column cover, then disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (A) from the cable reel.
13. Install a jumper wire between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of dashboard wire harness 4P connector.
15. Read the DTC.
NO - Open in the cable reel; replace the cable reel. ■
17. Remove the jumper wire from the dashboard wire harness 4P connector.
21. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and the No. 2 terminals of dashboard wire harness 4P connector.
Is the continuity?
Short to Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in the Driver's Airbag Second Inflator (RHD model)
SRS short canceller
070AZ-SAA0100
NOTE:
3. Read the DTC.
7. Read the DTC.
11. Read the DTC.
(39P).
16. Measure the resistance between the No. 9 and the No.10 terminal of the SRS unit connector A (39P). There should
be less than 1.0 Ω.
NO - Faulty SRS unit: replace the SRS unit. ■
Short to Power in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator (RHD model)
SRS short canceller
070AZ-SAA0100
NOTE:
3. Read the DTC.
A (39P).
ground. There should be less than 1.0 V.
Short to Ground in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator (RHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
SRS DTC Troubleshooting: 12-Ax
DTC 12-Ax (‘‘x'' can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Power in the Driver's Airbag Second Inflator (RHD model)
SRS short canceller
070AZ-SAA0100
NOTE:
3. Read the DTC.
Is DTC 12-Ax indicated?
(39P).
YES - Faulty driver's airbag: replace driver's airbag. ■
SRS DTC Troubleshooting: 12-Bx
DTC 12-Bx (‘‘x'' can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Ground in the Driver's Airbag Second Inflator (RHD model)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
YES - Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness.■
ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure
The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics.
Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions:
Replace the ECM/PCM.
Reset the ECM/PCM.
Update the ECM/PCM.
Replace or clean the throttle body.
When the engine or transmission is disassembled.
NOTE: Clearing the DTCs with the HDS does not require you to do the idle learn procedure.
Procedure
1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, lights, etc.) are off.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 2 seconds.
radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 90 °C (194 °F).
5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the throttle fully closed.
NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its running time in the 5 minutes.
6. Verify on the HDS data list that the idle learn procedure is complete.
Clutch Hydraulic System Bleeding
NOTE:
Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean genuine Honda DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid from an unopened
container. Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the
life of the system.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid.
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint or plastic. If brake fluid does contact the paint or
plastic, wash it off immediately with water.
If may be necessary to limit the movement of the release fork with a block of wood to remove all the air from the
system.
Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces.
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the clutch reservoir (A) is at the MAX (upper) level line (B).
2. Attach one end of a clear tube to the bleeder screw (A), and put the other end into a container. Loosen the bleeder
screw to allow air to escape from the system.
3. Make sure there is an adequate supply of fluid in the reservoir, then slowly push the clutch pedal all the way down.
Before releasing the pedal, have an assistant temporarily tighten the bleeder screw. Loosen the bleeder screw and
push the clutch pedal down again. Repeat this step until no more bubbles appear at the clear tube.
NOTE: Make sure the fluid level on the reservoir does not go below MIN.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw securely.
5. Refill the brake fluid in the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line.
Clutch Hose Replacement
NOTE:
Replace the clutch hose it is twisted, cracked, or if it leaks.
plastic, wash it off immediately water.
1. Do the battery removal procedure.
2. Remove the air cleaner housing.
3. Disconnect the clutch hose (A) from the clutch lines (B).
4. Remove and discard the clutch hose clips (A) from the clutch hose (B).
5. Install the clutch hose (A) with the new clutch hose clips (B).
6. Connect the clutch lines (A) to the clutch hose (B).

7. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system.
Check the clutch hose and line joint for leaks, and tighten if necessary.
Check the clutch hose for interference and twisting.
9. Install the air cleaner housing.
Clutch Master Cylinder Overhaul
Exploded View
NOTE:
Refer to the Exploded View, as needed during this procedure.
Before reassembling, check that all part are free of dust and other foreign particles.
Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so.
Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean genuine Honda DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid.
1. Remove the clutch master cylinder, then disconnect the reservoir hose and clutch line connector from the master
cylinder.
2. Pry the circlip off the clutch master cylinder.
3. Remove the pushrod with the stopper plate and the york.
4. Carefully remove the piston by applying air pressure through the clutch line hole.
5. Remove the piston assembly (A), the connector (B), and the O-ring (C).
6. Apply the rubber grease to the piston, and slide the piston assembly into the clutch master cylinder, then install
the pushrod with the stopper plate, and the circlip in the groove of the clutch master cylinder while pushing the
piston.
7. Install the connector with a new O-ring.
8. Connect the clutch line connector and the reservoir hose to the master cylinder, then install the clutch master
cylinder.
Clutch Slave Cylinder Replacement
NOTE:
3. Remove the mounting bolts (A), clutch line bracket (B), and clutch line clip (C), then remove the slave cylinder (D).
4. Disconnect the clutch line (A). Plug the end of the clutch line with a shop towel to prevent brake fluid from coming
out.
NOTE: Loosen the flare nut (B) while holding the clutch line connector (C) with a wrench.
5. Connect the clutch line (A).

NOTE: Tighten the flare nut (B) while holding the clutch line connector (C) with a wrench.
6. Apply a light coat of molybdenum to the push rod (A) of the slave cylinder.
7. Install the clutch line clip (B), clutch line bracket (C), and mounting bolts (D).
9. Check the clutch operation, and check for leaks.
Clutch Slave Cylinder Overhaul
M/T Gearshift Mechanism Replacement
NOTE: When you apply the silicone grease, make sure not to adhere to the terminal part of connectors
and surrounding switches. Also do not touch the switches and the terminal part of connector by hands
or glove that adheres the silicone grease.
M/T Shift Lever Housing Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the center console, dashboard, and related parts.
2. Remove the harness clamps.
3. Remove the lock pin (A), washer (B), and shift cable clip (C), shift cables (D) from the shift lever housing assembly
(E).
4. Remove the shift lever assembly (A) from bolts (B) and the shift cables (C).
5. Install the shift lever housing in the reverse order of removal.
DTC Troubleshooting: P0134 (41)
DTC P0134:
A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting
information.
If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled before this DTC was stored, refuel and clear the DTC with the
HDS.
If DTC P0135 is stored at the same time as DTC P0134, troubleshoot DTC P0135 first, then recheck for DTC
P0134.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0134 indicated?
A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and the ECM/PCM.■
6. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1).
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and
the ECM/PCM, then go to Step 1 .
11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0134 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in Step 10 , go to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor
1), the A/F sensor relay, and the ECM/PCM, then go to Step 1 . If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to Step 8 .
DTC P0339:
CKP Sensor Intermittent Interruption
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting
information.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds.
4. Check the CKP NOISE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Are 0 counts indicated?
NO - Go to Step 5 .
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
6. Check the CKP NOISE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM.■
7. Check for poor or loose connections and terminals at these locations:
CKP sensor
ECM/PCM
Engine ground
Body ground
Are the connections and terminals OK?
NO - Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to Step 11 .
8. Check for damage on the CKP sensor pulser plate.
Is the pulser plate damaged?
YES - Replace the CKP sensor pulser plate, then go to Step 11 .
NO - Go to Step 9 .
10. Replace the CKP sensor.
13. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS.
15. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to Step 1 .
NO - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting.■
DTC P0369:
CMP Sensor Intermittent Interruption
information.
4. Check the CMP B NOISE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 5 .
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
6. Check the CMP B NOISE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
CMP sensor and the ECM/PCM.■
CMP sensor
ECM/PCM
Engine ground
Body ground
8. Check for damage on the CMP sensor pulser plate.
Is the pulser plate damaged?
YES - Replace the CMP sensor pulser plate, then go to Step 11 .
NO - Go to Step 9 .
10. Replace the CMP sensor.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the CMP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to Step 1 .
DTC Troubleshooting: P0562
DTC P0562:
Charging System Low Voltage
NOTE:
information.
If any high current load accessories are installed, this DTC can be set.
If DTC P16BB and/or P16BC is stored at the same time as DTC P0562, troubleshoot DTC P16BB and/or P16BC
first, then recheck for DTC P0562.
4. Check under these conditions:
A/C on
Temperature control at maximum cool
Blower fan at maximum speed
Rear window defogger on
Headlights on high beam
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (min −1 ) (A/T in P or N, M/T in neutral) for 1 minute.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
then go to Step 7 .
Replace the alternator, then go to Step 7 .
alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box, and check the battery performance. ■
A/C on
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then
go to Step 1 .
DTC P1549:
Charging System High Voltage
NOTE:
information.
If a high voltage battery (24 V, etc.) is connected to the vehicle, this DTC can be stored.
A/C off
Headlights off
Rear window defogger off
YES - Replace the alternator, then go to Step 7 .
alternator and the battery terminal fuse box.■
A/C off
Headlights off
Rear window defogger off
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the alternator and the battery terminal fuse box, then go
to Step 1 .
DTC Troubleshooting: P16BB
DTC P16BB:
Alternator B Terminal Circuit Low Voltage
information.
2. Clear the DTC with HDS.
A/C on
Is DTC P16BB indicated?
alternator and the battery terminal fuse box, and check the battery performance. ■
7. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the alternator and the battery terminal fuse box (+B line).
8. Check for an open in the wire between the alternator and battery terminal fuse box at the engine wire harness.
Is the harness OK?
YES - Replace the alternator, then go to Step 9 .
NO - Repair open in the wire between the alternator and the battery terminal fuse box, then go to Step 9 .
A/C on
Is DTC P16BB indicated?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the alternator and the battery terminal fuse box, then go
to Step 1 .
DTC Troubleshooting: U0155 (126)
DTC U0155:
F-CAN Malfunction (ECM/PCM-Gauge Control Module)
information.
Is DTC U0155 indicated?
gauge control module and the ECM/PCM.■
4. Check for body electrical DTCs in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Is DTC B1168, B1169, and/or B1178 indicated?
NO - Do the gauge control module input test. ■
7. Remove the gauge control module.
10. Connect gauge control module 32P connector terminal No. 30 to body ground with a jumper wire.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A3) and the gauge control module, then go to Step 14 .
YES - Substitute a known-good gauge control module, then go to Step 14 and recheck. If DTC U0155 is not
indicated after substitution, replace the original gauge control module, then go to Step 14 .
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A4) and the gauge control module, then go to Step 14 .
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the gauge control module and the ECM/PCM, then go to
Step 1 .
Manual Transmission and M/T Differential
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Manual Capacity Fluid change 1.5 L (1.6 US qt, 1.3 Imp qt)
transmission fluid Use genuine Honda MTF Overhaul 1.6 L (1.7 US qt, 1.4 Imp qt)
Mainshaft End play 0.11−0.18 mm (0.004−0.007 in.) Adjust
Diameter of ball bearing contact area 25.987−26.000 mm (1.0231−1.0236 in.) 25.93 mm (1.020 in.)
(transmission housing side)
Diameter of distance collar contact area 28.992−29.005 mm (1.1414−1.1419 in.) 28.93 mm (1.139 in.)
Diameter of needle bearing contact area 34.984−35.000 mm (1.3773−1.3780 in.) 34.93 mm (1.375 in.)
Diameter of ball bearing contact area (clutch 25.977−25.990 mm (1.0227−1.0232 in.) 25.92 mm (1.020 in.)
housing side)
Diameter of pilot bearing contact area 14.870−14.890 mm (0.5854−0.5862 in.) ———
Runout 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Mainshaft 3rd and I.D. 39.009−39.025 mm (1.5358−1.5364 in.) 39.07 mm (1.538 in.)
4th gear Clearance 2nd-3rd 0.06−0.21 mm (0.002−0.008 in.) 0.33 mm (0.013 in.)
Endplay 4th 0.06−0.19 mm (0.002−0.007 in.) 0.31 mm (0.012 in.)
Thickness 3rd 27.92−27.97 mm (1.099−1.101 in.) 27.85 mm (1.096 in.)
4th 27.02−27.07 mm (1.064−1.066 in.) 26.65 mm (1.049 in.)
Mainshaft 5th I.D. 39.009−39.025 mm (1.5358−1.5364 in.) 39.07 mm (1.538 in.)
gear End play 0.06−0.19 mm (0.002−0.007 in.) 0.31 mm (0.012 in.)
Thickness 28.92−28.97 mm (1.139−1.141 in.) 28.95 mm (1.140 in.)
Mainshaft 4th and I.D. 29.014−29.024 mm (1.1423−1.1427 in.) 29.06 mm (1.144 in.)
5th gear distance O.D. 34.989−35.000 mm (1.3775−1.3780 in.) 34.93 mm (1.375 in.)
collar Length A 51.97−52.03 mm (2.046−2.048 in.) ———
B 24.03−24.06 mm (0.946−0.947 in.) ———
Mainshaft MBS I.D. 26.02−26.17 mm (1.024−1.030 in.) ———
distance collar Length 12.00−12.05 mm (0.472−0.474 in.) ———
Manual Transmission and M/T Differential (cont'd)

Countershaft Diameter of needle bearing contact area 34.000−34.015 mm (1.3386−1.3392 in.) 33.95 mm (1.337 in.)
housing side)
Countershaft 1st I.D. 48.509−48.525 mm (1.9098−1.9104 in.) 48.580 mm (1.9126 in.)
Countershaft 2nd I.D. 45.009−45.025 mm (1.7720−1.7726 in.) 45.07 mm (1.774 in.)
gear distance O.D. 44.489−45.000 mm (1.7515−1.7717 in.) 44.44 mm (1.7500 in.)
B 26.53−26.58 mm (1.0445−1.0464 in.) ———
collar Length 27.53−27.56 mm (1.084−1.085 in.) 27.51 mm (1.083 in.)
Reverse idler gear I.D. 15.016−15.043 mm (0.5912−0.5922 in.) 15.08 mm (0.594 in.)
Gear-to-reverse idler gear shaft clearance 0.032−0.077 mm (0.0012−0.0030 in.) 0.14 mm (0.006 in.)
Synchro ring Ring-to-gear clearance Ring pushed 0.85−1.10 mm (0.033−0.043 in.) 0.4 mm (0.02 in.)
against gear
Shift fork Finger thickness 1st-2nd and 3rd- 7.4−7.6 mm (0.29−0.30 in.) ———
4th forks
5th fork 6.7−6.9 mm (0.26−0.27 in.) ———
Fork-to-synchro sleeve clearance 0.35−0.65 mm (0.014−0.026 in.) 1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Reverse shift fork Finger width 13.5−13.8 mm (0.53−0.54 in.) ———
Fork-to-reverse idler gear clearance 1.30−1.90 mm (0.051−0.075 in.) 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
Shift arm I.D. 13.973−14.000 mm (0.5501−0.5512 in.) ———
Finger width 12.9−13.0 mm (0.508−0.512 in.) ———
Shift arm-to-shift fork clearance 0.2−0.5 mm (0.008−0.020 in.) 0.62 mm (0.024 in.)
Select lever Finger width 12.80−12.95 mm (0.504−0.510 in.) ———
Change lever Shaft-to-select lever clearance 0.05−0.35 mm (0.002−0.014 in.) 0.55 mm (0.022 in.)
Groove width 13.00−13.15 mm (0.512−0.518 in.) ———
Shaft-to-shift arm clearance 0.013−0.070 mm (0.0005−0.0028 in.) 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
M/T differential Backlash 0.05−0.15 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) ———
pinion gear
M/T differential 72 72 mm shim-to-bearing outer race clearance 0.01−0.1 mm (0.0004−0.004 in.) Adjust
mm shim in transmission housing
(L13Z1)
(L15A7)
Fuel and Emissions System Description - ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (□) (49P)
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B ( ) (49P)
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (○) (49P)
Manual transmission fluid
Clutch disc
Clutch disc Rivet head depth 1.00−1.50 mm (0.039−0.059 in.) 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
Clutch pedal
Clutch pedal Height from the floor RHD 145 mm (5.71 in.) ———
LHD 150 mm (5.91 in.) ———
Stroke 120−130 mm (4.72−5.12 in.) ———
Pressure plate
Pressure plate Warpage 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Height difference of diaphragm spring fingers 0.6 mm (0.02 in.) max. 1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
measured with dial indicator
Flywheel
Flywheel Runout on clutch mating surface 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) max. 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Reverse idler gear
Gear-to-reverse idler gear shaft clearance 0.032−0.077 mm (0.0012−0.0030 in.) 0.14 mm (0.006 in.)
Countershaft
housing side)
Countershaft 1st gear
Countershaft 2nd gear
Countershaft 1st gear distance collar
B 26.53−26.58 mm (1.0445−1.0464 in.) ———
Countershaft 2nd gear distance collar
Change lever
Select lever
Reverse shift fork
Shift fork
4th forks
5th fork 6.7−6.9 mm (0.26−0.27 in.) ———
Shift arm
Shift arm I.D. 13.973−14.000 mm (0.5501−0.5512 in.) ———
Mainshaft
housing side)
Mainshaft 4th and 5th gear distance collar
B 24.03−24.06 mm (0.946−0.947 in.) ———
Mainshaft MBS distance collar
Mainshaft 3rd and 4th gear
4th 27.02−27.07 mm (1.064−1.066 in.) 26.65 mm (1.049 in.)
Mainshaft 5th gear
M/T differential pinion gear
pinion gear
Synchro ring
against gear
Set speed does not cancel (engine rpm stays high) when the clutch pedal is pressed
2. Do the clutch pedal position switch B test.
3. Do the cruise control input test. Test the clutch pedal position switch B signal input.
Also check for
Short to ground on the WHT wire
Faulty clutch pedal position switch B
Set speed will not resume when the resume/accel switch is pressed (with the cruise control main switch turned on,
and set speed temporarily canceled by pressing the clutch pedal)
2. Check the clutch pedal position switch B adjustment.
3. Do the cruise control combination switch test.
4. Do the cruise control input test. Test the cruise control resume/accel switch B signal input. Test the clutch pedal position switch B signal input.
Also check for
Faulty clutch pedal position switch B
Open circuit, loose or disconnected terminals: LT GRN/BLK, BLU wire
Clutch Pedal Position Switch B Test
1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch B connector.
2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table.

If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch pedal position switch B.
If OK, install the clutch pedal position switch B, and adjust the pedal height.
Clutch Pedal Position Switch B Replacement
1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch B connector (A).
2. Loosen the locknut (B), then remove the clutch pedal position switch B (C).
3. Install the clutch pedal position switch B, and adjust the pedal height.
Cruise Control (ECM/PCM) Input Test
module (PCM). If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
4. Go to PGM-FI, and check for DTCs.
5. Do the following tests while monitoring parameters in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS.
NOTE: Intermittent failures are often caused by loose circuit connections. While monitoring cruise control inputs,
flex their circuits, and note if any of the test results change.
Signal to be Test condition Parameter: Desired Possible cause if result is not
tested result obtained
Brake pedal Brake pedal CRUISE BRAKE SW Faulty brake pedal position switch
position pressed, then should indicate OFF Blown No. 24 (10 A) fuse in the
switch signal released when the brake pedal under-dash fuse/relay box
is pressed and ON An open in the wire between the
when the brake pedal ECM/PCM and the brake pedal
is released. position switch
A wire shorted to ground between
the ECM/PCM and the brake
pedal position switch
Clutch pedal Clutch pedal SHIFT/CLUTCH SW Faulty clutch pedal position switch
position pressed, then should indicate OFF B
switch B released when the clutch pedal An open in the wire between the
signal (M/T is pressed and ON ECM and the clutch pedal position
model) when the clutch pedal switch B
is released. A wire shorted to ground between
the ECM and the clutch pedal
position switch B
Poor ground G401
Transmission Shift lever in D and SHIFT/CLUTCH SW Faulty transmission range switch
range switch S should indicate ON in An open in the wire between the
signal (A/T P, R, and N and OFF PCM and the transmission range
model) in D and S. switch
A wire shorted to ground between
the PCM and the transmission
range switch
Poor ground G101
Set switch Set/decel switch CRUISE CONTROL Faulty cruise control combination
signal pressed and SET SW should switch
released indicate ON when the An open in the wire between the
set/decel switch is gauge control module and the
pressed and OFF cruise control combination switch
when the set/decel A wire shorted to ground between
switch is released. the gauge control module and the
cruise control combination switch
Resume Resume/accel CRUISE CONTROL Faulty cruise control combination
switch signal switch pressed and RESUME SW should switch
released indicate ON when the An open in the wire between the
resume/accel switch gauge control module and the
is pressed and OFF cruise control combination switch
when the A wire shorted to ground between
resume/accel switch the gauge control module and the
is released. cruise control combination switch
Cancel switch Cancel switch CRUISE CONTROL Faulty cruise control combination switch
signal pressed and CANCEL SW should
released indicate ON when the
cancel switch is
pressed and OFF
when the cancel
switch is released.
Cruise control Cruise control main CRUISE CONTROL Faulty cruise control combination
main switch switch ON and OFF MAIN SW should switch
signal indicate ON when the An open in the wire between the
cruise control main gauge control module and the
switch is turned ON cruise control combination switch
and OFF when the A wire shorted to ground between
cruise control main the gauge control module and the
switch is turned OFF. cruise control combination switch
An open in the wire between the
cruise control combination switch
and ground
Signal to be Test condition Parameter: Desired Possible cause if result is not
tested result obtained
Cruise control Start the engine, CRUISE INDICATOR Faulty gauge control module
indicator turn the cruise should indicate ON
signal control main switch when the cruise
on, and drive the control is set and
vehicle above 40 OFF when the cruise
km/h (25 mph). Set control is canceled.
and cancel the
cruise control.
SIL never comes on
1. Troubleshoot shift indicator lamp.
When the clutch pedal pressed, light out of SIL is slow
SIL does not work once in a while
Shift up indicator lamp does not come on, or shift down indicator lamp does not come on
SIL stays on
Clutch Pedal Position Switch A Replacement
KE, KG models (M/T)
2. Disconnect clutch pedal position switch A connector (A).
3. Remove clutch pedal position switch A (B).
NOTE: Adjust clutch pedal position switch A.
How to Troubleshoot the Fuel and Emissions Systems
The term ‘‘intermittent failure'' means a system may have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) on the dash does not come on, check for poor connections or loose terminals at all connectors related to the
circuit that you are troubleshooting. If the MIL was on but then went out, the original problem may have been intermittent.
Service Information
Periodically, new ECM/PCM software or new service procedures may become available. Always check online for the latest
software or service information related to the DTCs or symptoms you are troubleshooting.
Opens and Shorts

‘‘Open'' and ‘‘short'' are common electrical terms. An open is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is an accidental
connection of a wire to ground or to another wire. In simple electronics, this usually means something won't work at all.
With complex electronics (such as ECMs or PCMs) this can sometimes mean something works, but not the way it's
supposed to.
MIL indication
If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, without starting the engine, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) (A)
will come on for about 20 seconds. It then goes off or brinks 5 times under various conditions. This is normal: it shows the
self-testing condition of the diagnostics for the emissions control systems.
If the MIL in the gauge assembly will come on, go to how to use the HDS.
CHECK SYSTEM display (A) Indication (CHECK OIL LEVEL SENSOR)

If display is on, engine oil level sensor may have had a failure. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) located
under the driver's side of the dashboard. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it. Then refer to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting, and begin the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL display (A) Indication

If display is on, engine oil level may have had a failure. Check the engine oil level sensor.
If the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) has come on
1. Start the engine, and check the MIL (A).
2. If the MIL stays on, connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the
dashboard.
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM and other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, go to the DLC
circuit troubleshooting.
5. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it. Also check the freeze data and/or on-board snapshot data,
and download any data found. Then refer to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting, and begin the appropriate
NOTE:
Freeze data indicates the engine conditions when the first system malfunction, misfire, or fuel trim
malfunction that activated the MIL was detected.
The HDS can read the DTC, freeze data, on-board snapshot, current data, and other engine control module
(ECM) or powertrain control module (PCM) data.
For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with the HDS.
6. If no DTCs are found, go to MIL troubleshooting.
If the MIL did not stay on

If the MIL did not stay on but there is a driveability problem, do the symptom troubleshooting.
If you can't duplicate the DTC

Some of the troubleshooting requires you to reset the ECM/PCM and try to duplicate the DTC. If the problem is
intermittent and you can't duplicate the code, do not continue through the procedure. To do so will only result in confusion
and possibly, a needlessly replaced ECM/PCM.
HDS Clear Command
The ECM/PCM stores various specific data to correct the system even if there is no electrical power such as when the
battery negative terminal is disconnected. Stored data based on failed parts should be cleared by using the ‘‘CLEAR
COMMAND'' of the HDS, if parts are replaced.
The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet this purpose. They are clear DTCs, ECM/PCM reset, and CKP
pattern clear. DTC clear command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, and on-board snapshot. This must be done
with the HDS after reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting.
The ECM/PCM reset command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and all specific data to
correct the system except CKP pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the ECM/PCM was cleared, you must do the CKP
pattern learn procedure. The CKP pattern clear command erases only CKP pattern data. This command is for repair of a
misfire or the CKP sensor.
Scan Tool Clear Command

If you are using a generic scan tool to clear commands, be aware that there is only one setting for clearing the ECM/PCM,
and it clears all commands at the same time (CKP pattern learn, idle learn, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and DTCs).
After you clear all commands, you then need to do these procedures, in this order: ECM/PCM idle learn procedure; CKP
pattern learn procedure.
DTC Clear
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is stopped.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
ECM/PCM Reset
1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS while the engine is stopped.
CKP Pattern Clear/CKP Pattern Learn

Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS)
4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS.
5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS, and follow the screen prompts.
6. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete.
Learn Procedure (without the HDS)

radiator fan comes on.
2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm
(min −1 ) down to 1,000 rpm (min −1 ) with the A/T in 2 position, or the M/T in 1st gear.
3. Repeat Step 2 several times.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 30 seconds. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete.
How to End a Troubleshooting Session (required after any troubleshooting)
NOTE: The ECM/PCM is part of the immobilizer system. If you replace the ECM/PCM, it will have a different
immobilizer code. In order for the engine to start, you must rewrite the immobilizer code with the HDS (immobilizer
system section).
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/PCM Connectors

NOTE: The ECM/PCM stays on up to about 15 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0). Jumping the SCS
line after turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) cancels this function. Disconnecting the ECM/PCM during this function,
without jumping the SCS line first, can damage the ECM/PCM.
2. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C.
NOTE: ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A=□, B=△, C=○) embossed on them for identification.
3. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the ECM/PCM connector, use the terminal test port (A) above the
terminal you need to check.
4. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminals to a commercially available digital multimeter (B), and connect the
other side of the patch cord terminals to a commercially available banana jack (Pomona Electronics Tool No. 3563
or equivalent) (C).
5. Gently contact the pin probe (male) at test port from the terminal side. Do not force the tips into the terminals.
For accurate results, always use the pin probe (male).

To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do not insert test equipment probes, paper clips, or other
substitutes as they can damage the terminals. Damaged terminals cause a poor connection and an
incorrect measurement.
Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections.
Substituting the ECM/PCM

Honda diagnostic system (HDS)
Honda interface module (HIM)
HDS pocket tester
NOTE: Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good ECM/PCM during troubleshooting procedure.
6. Remove the ECM/PCM cover (A).

7. Remove the battery setting plate, and reposition the battery (D) away from the ECM/PCM.
NOTE: Do not disconnect the battery terminals.
8. Remove the bolts (E).
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C, then remove the ECM/PCM (F).
NOTE: ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A=□, B=△, C=○) embossed on them for identification.
10. Install a known-good ECM/PCM in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: DTC P0630 ‘‘VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch'' may be stored because the VIN has not been programmed
into the ECM/PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure.
12. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
13. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
14. Enter the immobilizer code using the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the
engine.
16. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software.
OBD Status
The OBD status shows the current system status of each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is used to see if
the repair was successfully completed. The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed as:
PASSED: The on board diagnosis is successfully finished.
FAILED: The on board diagnosis has finished but failed.
EXECUTING: The vehicle is in enable criteria conditions for the DTC and the on board diagnosis is running.
NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was running but is out for the enable conditions for the DTC.
OUT OF CONDITION: The vehicle has stayed out of the enable conditions for the DTC.
DTC Troubleshooting: P0171 (45), P0172 (45)
DTC P0171:
Fuel System Too Lean
DTC P0172:
Fuel System Too Rich
NOTE:
information.
If some of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the same time as DTC P0171 and/or P0172, troubleshoot those
DTCs first, then recheck for P0171 and/or P0172.
P0102, P0103: Mass air flow (MAF) sensor
P0107, P0108: Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
P0133, P1157, P2238, P2252, P2A00: Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Sensor 1)
P0134, P0135: Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Sensor 1) heater
P0137, P0138, P0139: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2)
P0141: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) heater
P2648, P2649: VTEC system
P0443: EVAP canister purge valve
1. Check the fuel pressure.
Is the fuel pressure OK?
NO - If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel pressure regulator, then go to Step 10 .
If the pressure is too low, check the fuel pump, the fuel feed pipe, and the fuel filter. If they are OK,
replace the fuel pressure regulator, then go to Step 10 .
2. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts:

PCV valve
PCV hose
EVAP canister purge valve
Throttle body
Intake manifold
Brake booster hose
Brake booster
Intake air duct
Are the parts OK?
NO - Repair or replace parts with leaks, then go to Step 10 .
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP canister purge valve (B), and connect a vacuum pump/gauge to
the EVAP canister purge valve.
5. Apply vacuum to the hose.
Does the hold vacuum?
NO - Replace the EVAP canister purge valve, then go to Step 10 .
7. Check for these conditions:
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 70 °C (158 °F)
A/T in P or N (M/T in neutral)
All electrical loads off
8. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST with the HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm (min −1 ).
Once the engine speed is met, hold the accelerator pedal steady for more than 10 seconds.
Did the engine speed vary more than 100 rpm (min −1 ) from 2,500 rpm (min −1 )?
YES - Repeat Step 8 .
NO - Go to Step 9 .
9. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm (min −1 ), check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there about 4.3−5.3 gm/s (L12B1 engine) or 4.5−5.5 gm/s (L13Z1 engine) or 4.6−5.7 gm/s (L15A7 engine)?
YES - Check the engine valve clearances and adjust them if needed. If the valve clearances are OK, replace the
injectors, then go to Step 10 .
NO - Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to Step 10 .
14. Test-drive under these conditions:
A/T in D, M/T in 4th
Drive at a steady speed between 24−120 km/h (15−75 mph) for 15 minutes
NOTE: DTC P0171 and/or P0172 may take up to 80 minutes of test driving to set. Using the HDS, monitor the long
term fuel trim (LT FUEL TRIM) or the air fuel feed back average (AF FB AVE). If the long term fuel trim/air fuel feed
back average stays within 0.80−1.25, there is no problem at this time.
Is DTC P0171 or P0172 indicated?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, the injectors, the EVAP
canister purge valve, and the ECM/PCM, then go to Step 1 .
DTC Troubleshooting: P0300 (75) and any combination of P0301 (71), P0302 (72), P0303 (73), P0304 (74)
DTC P0300:
Random Misfire and Any Combination of the Following:
DTC P0301:
No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected
DTC P0302:
DTC P0303:
DTC P0304:
Oil pressure gauge attachment
07NAJ-P070100
Low pressure gauge assy. 1,000 kpa

07406-0070002
Oil pressure hose

07ZAJ-S5A0200
NOTE:
information.
If the misfire is frequent enough to trigger detection of increased emissions during two consecutive driving cycles,
the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300 (and some of the combination of P0301 through P0304) will be stored.
If the misfire is frequent enough to damage the catalyst, the MIL will flash whenever the misfire occurs, and DTC
P0300 (and some of the combination of P0301 through P0304) will be stored. When the misfire stops, the MIL will
remain on.
If any of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the same time as the random misfire DTCs, troubleshoot those
DTCs first, then recheck for random misfire DTCs:
P0102, P0103: Mass air flow (MAF) sensor
P0107, P0108: Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
P0171, P0172: Fuel system
P0335, P0339: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
P0365, P0369: Camshaft position (CMP) sensor
P2648, P2649: VTEC system
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in neutral).
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate FAILED?
NO - If the screen indicates PASSED, go to Step 5 . If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, wait for several
minutes, then recheck.
5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10
minutes with the HDS.
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire counts?
NO - Go to Step 6 .
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
CLV (calculated load value)
APP SENSOR
NO - If the screen indicates PASSED, go to Step 8 . If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. if the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to Step 6 and
recheck.
10. Check the fuel quality.
Is the quality good?
NO - Drain the tank and fill with a known-good fuel, then go to Step 24 .
11. Inspect the spark plugs. If the spark plugs are fouled or worn, replace them.
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
APP SENSOR
Is the fuel pressure OK?
NO - If the fuel pressure is too high, replace the fuel pressure regulator, then go to Step 24 .
If the fuel pressure is too low, check the fuel pump, the fuel feed pipe, and the fuel filter. If they are
OK, replace the fuel pressure regulator, then go to Step 24 .
A/T in P or N, M/T in neutral
All electrical loads off
17. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST with the HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm (min −1 ).
Once the engine speed is met, hold the accelerator pedal steady for more than 10 seconds.
Did the engine speed vary more than 100 rpm (min −1 ) from 2,500 rpm (min −1 )?
YES - Repeat Step 17 .
18. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm (min −1 ), check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there about 4.3−5.3 gm/s (L12B1 engine), 4.5−5.5 gm/s (L13Z1 engine), 4.6−5.7 gm/s (L15A7 engine)?
NO - Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to Step 24 .
20. Remove rocker arm oil pressure switch.
21. Attach the bolt (A) from the rocker arm oil control valve and connect the special tool as shown, the install the bolt
that was removed to the pressure gauge joint attachment.
23. Check the oil pressure at engine speeds of 1,000 rpm (min −1 ) and 2,000 rpm (min −1 ).
Is the oil pressure below 49 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm 2 , 7 psi)?

YES - Check for air in the fuel line, then go to Step 24 .
NO - Inspect the VTEC system, then go to Step 24 .
26. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS.
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
APP SENSOR
Is DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304 indicated?
YES - Check for a poor connections or loose terminals at the ignition coils, the injectors, and the ECM/PCM,
then go to the troubleshooting for DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, go to Step 1 and recheck. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
driving until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to
Step 29 .
DTC P0401:
EGR Insufficient Flow
information.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm (min −1 ) without load (in neutral) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle.
4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
NO - Go to Step 7 .
M/T in 4th
Drive the vehicle at a steady speed between 24−60 km/h (15−38 mph)
During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for 4 seconds
YES - Clean the intake manifold EGR port and EGR pipe with throttle plate and induction cleaner. Also, clean
the passage inside the EGR valve with throttle plate and induction cleaner, then go to Step 9 .
NO - If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
driving until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to
Step 5 and recheck.
8. Replace the EGR valve.
10. Reset the ECM with the HDS.
11. Do the ECM idle learn procedure.
M/T in 4th
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM. If the connections are OK,
go to Step 15 .
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and the
ECM, then go to Step 1 . If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If the
screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to Step 12 .
15. Update the ECM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM.
M/T in 4th
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM. If the ECM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM, then go to Step 16 . If the ECM was substituted, go to Step 1 .
YES - If the ECM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM was substituted, replace the original
ECM. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in Step 17 , go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.■
ECM. If the ECM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM, then go to Step 16 . If the ECM was
substituted, go to Step 1 . If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If the
DTC P0404:
EGR Control Circuit Range/Performance Problem
information.
Is the result OK?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Clean any carbon build-up on the EGR valve with
throttle plate and induction cleaner.■
NO - Go to Step 5 .
6. Disconnect the EGR valve 5P connector.
7. At the EGR valve side, measure the resistance between EGR valve 5P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
Is there 100 kΩ or more?
NO - Go to Step 8 .
8. Measure the resistance between EGR valve 5P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 4.
NO - Go to Step 9 .
9. Check for continuity between EGR valve 5P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the EGR valve and G101, then go to Step 26 .
11. Disconnect ECM connector B (49P).
12. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal B2 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM (B2) and the EGR valve, then go to Step 26 .
13. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal B2 and EGR valve 5P connector terminal No. 1.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM (B2) and the EGR valve, then go to Step 26 .
14. Remove the EGR valve.
15. Clean the intake manifold EGR port and the EGR pipe with throttle plate and induction cleaner. Also, clean the
passage inside the EGR valve with throttle plate and induction cleaner.
16. Install the EGR valve.
17. Reconnect the EGR valve 5P connector.
18. Reconnect ECM connector B (49P).
Is the result OK?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM, then go to Step 1 . If the
connections and terminals are OK, go to Step 34 .
ECM, then go to Step 1 . If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep testing until a result comes on. If the
troubleshooting.■
substituted, go to Step 1 . If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep testing until a result comes on. If the
DTC P0406:
EGR Valve Position Sensor Circuit High Voltage
information.
2. Check the EGR VLS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 4.88 V or more indicated?
EGR valve and the ECM.■
6. Measure the voltage between EGR valve 5P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4.
Is there about 5 V?
NO - Go to Step 7 .
NO - Repair open in the wire between the EGR valve and the ECM (B34), then go to Step 13 .
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM, then go to Step 1 .
substitute a known-good ECM, then recheck. If the ECM was substituted, go to Step 1 .
NO - If the ECM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM was substituted, replace the original
ECM. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■
DTC P2413:
EGR System Malfunction
information.
Is the result OK?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
EGR valve and the ECM.■
NO - Go to Step 5 .
7. Check the EGR VLS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is about 0 V indicated?
11. Measure the voltage between EGR valve 5P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
Is there about 5 V?
NO - Repair open in the wire between the EGR valve and the ECM (B19), then go to Step 44 .
22. If not already done, disconnect the EGR valve 5P connector.
25. If not already done, jump the SCS line with the HDS.
26. If not already done, disconnect ECM connector B (49P).
29. Check for continuity between EGR valve 5P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the EGR valve and G101, then go to Step 44 .
30. Reconnect ECM connector B (49P).
31. At the EGR valve side, connect the battery positive terminal to EGR valve 5P connector terminal No. 1 with a
jumper wire.
32. Start the engine, and let it idle. Then connect the battery negative terminal to EGR valve 5P connector terminal No.
5 with a jumper wire.
Does the engine stall or run roughly?
34. Remove the EGR valve.
35. Clean the intake manifold EGR port and the EGR pipe with throttle plate and induction cleaner. Also, clean the
passage inside the EGR valve with throttle plate and induction cleaner.
36. Install the EGR valve.
Is the result OK?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM, then go to Step 1 .
ECM, then go to Step 1 . If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep testing until a result comes on. If the
troubleshooting.■
substituted, go to Step 1 . If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep testing until a result comes on. If the
DTC Troubleshooting: P250A
DTC P250A:
Engine Oil Level Sensor Circuit Malfunction
information.
3. Wait 5 seconds.
Is DTC P250A indicated?
engine oil level sensor and the ECM.■
6. Disconnect the engine oil level sensor 3P connector.
8. Measure the voltage between engine oil level sensor 3P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the engine oil level sensor and the No. 31 OIL LVL (7.5 A) fuse then go
to Step 19 .
9. Check for continuity between engine oil level sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the engine oil level sensor and G101, then go to Step 19 .
10. Measure the voltage between engine oil level sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
13. Disconnect ECM connector C (49P).
14. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal C41 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM (C41) and the engine oil level sensor, then go to Step 19 .
15. Connect engine oil level sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire.
16. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal C41 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM (C41) and the engine oil level sensor, then go to Step 19 .
18. Replace the engine oil level sensor.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the engine oil level sensor and the ECM, then go to
Step 1 .
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the engine oil level sensor and the ECM. If the ECM was
updated, substitute a known-good ECM, then recheck. If the ECM was substituted, go to Step 1 .
DTC Troubleshooting: P250B
DTC P250B:
Engine Oil Level Sensor Range/Performance Problem
NOTE:
information.
When you check this DTC troubleshooting, carry out in a flat place.
Check the engine oil level and condition, before checking this DTC troubleshooting.
2. Check the ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 50 °C (122 °F) or more indicated?
NO - Keep idling until the value of ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE becomes 50 °C (122 °F) or more, then go to
Step 3 .
3. Check the ENGINE OIL LEVEL MONITOR CONDITION in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is it OK?
NO - Keep idling until the screen indicates ‘‘OK'', then go to Step 4 .
4. Maintain idling for 2 minutes.
5. Note the value of ENGINE OIL LEVEL in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
6. Stop the engine, but stop the ignition switch with ON (II) position.
7. Wait 5 minutes.
8. Check the ENGINE OIL LEVEL in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
9. Compare the value of ENGINE OIL LEVEL and the recorded value of ENGINE OIL LEVEL.
Does the value of ENGINE OIL LEVEL differ 2 mm (0.08 in.) or more?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check the engine oil level and condition.■
10. Replace the engine oil level sensor.
Is DTC P250B indicated?
Step 1 .
DTC Troubleshooting: P250E
DTC P250E:
Engine Oil Level Sensor Intermittent Interruption
information.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute.
Is DTC P250E indicated?
engine oil level sensor and the ECM.■
Oil level sensor
ECM
Engine ground (G101)
Body ground
7. Substitute a known-good engine oil level sensor.
10. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute.
NO - Replace the original engine oil level sensor, then go to Step 12 .
Step 1 .
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the engine oil level sensor and the ECM. If the ECM was
DTC Troubleshooting: U0122
DTC U0122:
F-CAN Malfunction (ECM-VSA Modulator-Control Unit)
information.
Are DTC U0029 and U0122 indicated at the same time?
YES - Go to troubleshooting for DTC U0029. ■
NO - Go to Step 3 .
gauge control module, the VSA modulator-control unit, and the ECM.■
5. Check for communication to the VSA system with the HDS.
Does the HDS communicate with the VSA modulator-control unit?
NO - Go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. ■
9. Disconnect ECM connector A (49P).
10. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal A3 and VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal
No. 14.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM (A3) and the VSA modulator-control unit, then go to Step 12 .
11. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal A4 and VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal
No. 1.
YES - Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good
VSA modulator-control unit, then go to Step 12 and recheck. If DTC U0122 is not indicated after
substitution, replace the original VSA modulator-control unit, then go to Step 12 .
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM (A4) and the VSA modulator-control unit, then go to Step 12 .
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the gauge control module, the VSA modulator unit, and
the ECM, then go to Step 1 .
Engine Wire Harness and CKP Sensor Subharness Locations
M/T
CKP SENSOR SUBHARNESS
ENGINE WIRE HARNESS
G101

Manual Transmission and M/T Differential
housing side)
4th 27.02−27.07 mm (1.064−1.066 in.) 26.65 mm (1.049 in.)
B 24.03−24.06 mm (0.946−0.947 in.) ———
Manual Transmission and M/T Differential (cont'd)

housing side)
B 26.53−26.58 mm (1.044−1.046 in.) ———
Gear-to-reverse gear shaft clearance 0.032−0.077 mm (0.0012−0.0030 in.) 0.14 mm (0.006 in.)
against gear
4th forks
5th fork 6.7−6.9 mm (0.26−0.27 in.) ———
Shift arm I.D. 13.973−14.000 mm (0.5501−0.5512 in.) ———
pinion gear
(L13Z1, L13Z3)
(L15A7, L15A8)
Clutch disc
Clutch pedal
Clutch pedal Height from the floor 150 mm (5.91 in.) ———
Stroke 120−130 mm (4.72−5.12 in.) ———
Pressure plate
Flywheel
Reverse idler gear
Countershaft
housing side)
B 26.53−26.58 mm (1.044−1.046 in.) ———
Change lever
Select lever
Reverse shift fork
Shift fork
4th forks
5th fork 6.7−6.9 mm (0.26−0.27 in.) ———
Shift arm
Shift arm I.D. 13.973−14.000 mm (0.5501−0.5512 in.) ———
Mainshaft
housing side)
Mainshaft 4th and 5th gear distance collar
B 24.03−24.06 mm (0.946−0.947 in.) ———
Mainshaft MBS distance collar
4th 27.02−27.07 mm (1.064−1.066 in.) 26.65 mm (1.049 in.)
Mainshaft 5th gear
pinion gear
Synchro ring
against gear
A/T System Description - General Operation
General Operation
General Operation (cont'd)
A/T System Component Location Index
Seven-position Transmission
Five-position Transmission
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL
A/T SOLENOID
CLUTCH VALVE A
PRESSURE
PADDLE SHIFTER − Test,
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
(DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) Replacement,
Test,
Replacement,
PGM-FI ECU
PGM-FI ECU PADDLE SHIFTER +
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
SPEED (UPSHIFT
SENSOR
INPUT SHAFT SWITCH)
(MAINSHAFT)
Replacement,
SPEED SENSOR
Replacement,
2ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION
2ND CLUTCH FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Replacement,
PRESSURE SWITCH
Replacement,
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
Test,
Replacement,
Test,
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) Replacement,
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT) PARK PIN SWITCH SHIFTDATA
LOCKLINK CONNECTOR (DLC) FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
SOLENOID 3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
OUTPUT
*: This SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
illustration shows RHD model. PARK PIN SWITCH SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
Replacement,
SHIFT SOLENOID
Replacement, VALVE D
SHIFT SOLENOID
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE (Behind
VALVE Dshift soenoid
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C valve cover)
(Behind shift soenoid
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE SHIFT SOLENOID Test,
Test,
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C valve cover)
Replacement, HARNESS CONNECTOR
SHIFT SOLENOID Replacement,
Test,
Test, Replacement,
Replacement, HARNESS CONNECTOR Replacement,
Replacement,
SHIFT SOLENOID
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE VALVESOLENOID
C
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B SHIFT
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE (BehindCshift soenoid
VALVE
Test,
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B valve cover)
Replacement, (Behind shift soenoid
Test, Test,
valve cover)
Test,
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B Replacement,
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE Bvalve cover)
Test, SHIFT SOLENOID
(Behind shift soenoid valve cover) VALVE A
Replacement,
Test, SHIFT SOLENOID
(Behind
VALVE Ashift soenoid
Replacement, ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR valve cover)
ATF TEMPERATURE valve cover)
SENSOR Test,
valve cover)
Test/Replacement,
(Behind shift soenoid valve cover) Replacement,
Test,
Test/Replacement, Replacement,
A/T System Circuit Diagram - PCM A/T Control System
Circuit Diagram - PCM A/T Control System - Seven-position Transmission
BATTE RY TE RMINAL
Circuit Diagram - PCM A/T Control System - Five-position Transmission
FUS E BOX UNDE R−DAS H FUS E /RE LAY BOX *1
*2
: W ith trailer lighting connector
: W ithout trailer lighting connector
BATTE RY
No. 1 (100 A) No. 39 (15 A)
No. 60 (50 A)
P OW E RTRAINECONTROL
MULTI−FUS
MODULE
BLOCK(P CM) P GM−FI
MAIN RE LAY 1
BATTE RY TE RMINAL
FUS E BOX BAT IG1 UNDE R−DASNo. 7 (10E /RE
H FUS A) LAYToBOX
5V To 12 V
*1 : W ith trailer lighting connector
*2 : W ithout trailer lighting connector
BATTE RY
No. 1 (100 A) No.
No.3920(15
(15A)A)
1 C13 V CC1 LS A B40 1 A/T CLUTCH
Y E L/RE D RE D/BLK P RE S S URE
IGNITION S W ITCH No. 22 (7.5 A)
CONTROL
OUTP UT S HAFT No. 3 (30 A)* 1 No. 60 (50 A) S OLE NOID
2 B38 NC V ALV E A
(COUNTE RS HAFT) BLK/W HT 2
S P E E D S E NS OR (20 A)* 2 No. 24 (15 A) P OW EMULTI−FUS
RTRAIN CONTROL
E BLK
MODULE (P CM)
BLOCK P GM−FI
MAIN RE LAY 1
3 C14 S G1
To 5 V P ADDLE S HIFTE R +
GRN/W
BAT HT IG1 No. 7 (10 A) (UP S HIFT S W ITCH)
LS B B48 CABLE RE E L
1
S UP P A47 BRN/W HT 2 A/T CLUTCH
1 C13
No. 20 V(15
CC1
A) P RE S S URE
Y E L/RE D YEL YEL GRN/ORN CONTROL
S OLE NOID
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE IGNITION S W ITCH No. 22 (7.5 A) 2 V ALV E B RIGHT
OUTP UT S HAFT 2 B38 NC
(COUNTE RS HAFT) BLK S UP
BLK/W HT
S P E E D S E NS OR No. 3 (30 A)* 1 1 B19 V CC2 1
(20 A)* 2 Y E L/BLU 32 No. 24 (15 A)
LT GRN
3 LT BLU C14 S G1
GRN/W HT LS C B26 1
INTP UT S HAFT 2 B18 NM BLU/Y E L A/T CLUTCH
(MAINS HAFT) P P OW E RTRAIN P ADDLE PSRE
HIFTE
SSRURE−
W HT/RE D (DOW NS HIFT S W ITCH)
S P E E D S E NS OR CONTROL CONTROL
MODULE (P CM) To 12 V S OLE NOID
R S DN P A48 2 V ALV E C
3 B34 S G2 2
GRN/Y E L LT BLU LT BLU BLK/W HT
BLK
To 5 V
A/T GE AR N LE FT
A/T IG1 C10
1
P OS ITION DIMMING B19 V CC2 S DN
Y E L/BLU BLK/RE D RE D
INDICATOR CIRCUIT 32
DRIV E R D LT BLU 1
CIRCUIT GRN/Y E L
INTP UT S HAFT V B S OL A1 BLK LT GRN
2 B18
A3 NM H
CAN
(MAINS HAFT) WPHT/RE
D3 D P OW E RTRAIN CONTROL
BRN
S P E E D S E NS OR MODULE (P CM) G101 2ND CLUTCH TRANS MIS S ION
FLUID P RE S S URE S W ITCH
CAN A/T GE AR 3 R B34 S G2 To 5 V MRLY A7
CONTROLLE R P OS ITION 2 E LA/T
GRN/Y 7 W HT To 12 V BLU
G501
DIMMING
INDICATOR W HT
CIRCUIT OP 2S W B8
DRIV E R N To 12 V BLU/RE D
ATF IGP A9
TE MP E RATURE CIRCUIT 1
A4 CAN L LT GRN
S E NS OR IG1 C10
D GRN/Y E L W HT LS A B40 BLK/RE D RE D 13RD CLUTCH TRANS MIS S ION
6 A3 B28
CAN H ATFT A/T CLUTCH
RE D/BLK FLUID P RE S S URE
W HT RE D/Y E LRE D ATP RV S B23 P RESSWSITCH
URE
30 YEL CONTROL
S V B S OL A1
ATP FW D B29 BRN S OLE NOID
OP 3S W B9 BLU/Y E L V ALV E A
F−CAN A4 CAN L BLU/W HT 2
S HIFT S OLE NOIDCE IV E R
TRANS ATP 2−1 B17 BLK
CAN V ALV E A 7 RE D
MRLY A7 BLU
CONTROLLE R W HT 29 BLU
ATF S E QUE NTIAL W HT RE D ATP D3 B16
TE MP E RATURE S HIFT MODE 5 B11 SH A RE D
LS B B48 1
S E NS OR S HIFT INDICATOR BLU SG 13 BLU/BLK IGP D
ATP A9B22 A/T CLUTCH
CIRCUIT 6 B28 ATFT LTBRN/W
P NK HT
GRN P RE S S URE
S TARTE R
CONTROL
W HT PG RE
17 D/Y E L ATP N B13 CUT RE LAYNOID
W HT RE D RE D/BLK S OLE
2 V ALV E B
S HIFT S OLE NOID 30 ATP R P G1
B15 B10
V ALV E B BLK BLK BLK BLK
S HIFT S OLE NOID ATP RV S B23
F−CAN ATP P B14 YEL
V ALV E A TRANS CE IV E R
229 B27 SH B ATP FW D PB29
G2 B1
ORN GRN/W HT LS C B26 BLU/Y E L BRN 1
1 5 B11 SH A BLU/BLK W HT LTA/T
GRN CLUTCH
RE D ATP S B16 BLU/Y EL
BLU LT BLU SG 13 BLU/BLK RE D
P RE S S URE
S HIFT LOCK
LG1 C445 4 9 3 8 2 6 10 7CONTROL 1 BLK
G501 ATP D B22 BRN/Y E L S OLE NOID
S OLE NOID S HIFT S OLE NOID PG 17RHD P NK V ALV E C
V ALV E C A28 S LS 2 S TARTE R
3 BLK
S HIFT S OLE NOIDBLU P NK P NK ATP N B13 CUT RE LAY
LG2 C48 RE D/BLK
BLK/BLU RE D/BLK BLU Y E L/RE D BLU/W HT
V ALV E B BLK BLK BRN/Y E L
1 B21 SH C ATP R B15 W HT P NK BRN W HT/RE D BLK
GRN LHD GRN
2 B27 SH B G101
ATP P B14 6 7 2 8 3 9 5 1 4 10
BRAKE P E DAL ORN GRN/W HT
P OS ITION S W ITCH
S HIFT S OLE NOID 1 BLU/BLK W HT FWLTDGRN RV S ST E
V ALV E D RE D A42 BK S W G101
NG101 D 2ND CLUTCH TRANS MIS S ION
LT BLU G501 FLUID P RE S S URE S W ITCH
W HT
S HIFT S OLE NOID LT GRN LT GRN R 9 D3 6
5 4 3 8 10 7 1 BLK
S HIFT LOCK V ALV E C
S OLE NOID B12 SH D 8RHD
OP 2S W B8
3 GRN/REA28
D S LS
YEL P 2
BLU P NK P NK BLU/RE D
1 B21 SH C
GRN GRN 1
MULTIP LE X INTE GRATE D BLK/BLU RE D/BLK BLU W HT/RE D BLK
LHD
CONTROL UNIT (MICU) G101
3RD CLUTCH TRANS MIS S ION
DATA LINK A32 S CS W HT P NK Y E L/RE D FLUID PBLU/W
RE S S URE
HT S W ITCH
CONNE
S HIFT BRAKE
S OLE NOID P E DAL
CTOR YEL YEL
E D P OS ITION S W ITCH
(DLC)
V ALV 1 A26 V CC4 6 7 2 8 3 5 1 4 10
BRNA42 OP 3S W B9
BK S W BLU/W HT
W HT 3 LT GRN LT GRN A18 AP S 1
8 ORN B12 S H D FW D RV S ST E
YEL GRN/RE D N D
2 A36 S G4 TRANS MIS S ION RANGE S W ITCH
BLU R S
P CM Harness Connector Terminal Locations
ACCE LE RATOR
P E DAL P
P OS ITION MULTIP LE X INTE GRATE D
S E NS OR 4 CONTROL UNIT (MICU) A25 V CC5
GRYA32 S CS
DATA LINK
CONNE CTOR1 13 64 6 Y E7L 9 10 A26 A191V CC4AP S32 4 7 8 9 10 P G1 B10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Y E L BRN BLK
(DLC) LT BLU
3 15 16 18 19 20 21 A18 A35AP11S 1
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21
5 S G5
ORNW HT
22 24 25 26 28 22 23 24 26 27 28 P G2 B1 23
2 A36 S G4 BRN
BLU
29 30 32 34 35 36 37 38 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 38 TRANS MIS S ION 29 30 31S W32ITCH
RANGE
ACCE LE RATOR
P E DAL 42 44 46 P CM
40Harness Connector Terminal
45 46 Locations
47 48 LG1 C44 43 44 46 48
P OS ITION BRN/Y E L
S E NS OR 4 A25 V CC5
GRY P CM Harness Connector Terminal Locations
A (49P ) B (49P ) C (49P )
6 A19 AP S 2 LG2 C48
LT BLU BRN/Y E L
1 3 4 6 7 9 10 1 3 4 side of female
Terminal 7 terminals
8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 A35 S G5
W HT
1 315 16
4 186 19 720 21 9 10 11 121 13 14 315 16
4 18 19 7 21
8 9 10 11 121 13 2 14 315 16
4 175 186 720 21
8 9 10
22 24 25 15 16 26 18 1928 20 21 22 23 1124 12 13 14 15 16 1726 1827 1928 21 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21
29 30 22 32 24 34 35 2536 37 38 26 28 29 2231 2332 2433 34 35 36 38 26 27 28 29 30 31 G101

32
2942 30 44
32 3446 35 4736 48
37 38 40 29 31 32 45 3446 35 4736 48
33 38 29 30 4331 44
32 46 48
42 44 46
P CM Harness
40
Connector Terminal
45 46
Locations
47 48 43 44 46 48
A (49P ) B (49P ) C (49P )
A (49P ) B (49PTerminal
) side of female terminals C (49P )
1 3 4 6 7 9 10 1 Terminal
3 4 side of female
7 terminals
8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
15 16 18 19 20 21 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 21 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21
22 24 25 26 28 22 23 24 26 27 28
29 30 32 34 35 36 37 38 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 38 29 30 31 32
42 44 46 47 48 40 45 46 47 48 43 44 46 48
A (49P ) B (49P ) C (49P )

A/T Road Test
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels.
3. Start the engine, then shift to D while pressing the brake pedal. Press the accelerator pedal, and release it
suddenly. The engine should not stall.
4. Repeat step 3 in all shift lever positions.
5. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A), and go to the A/T data list. If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM,
6. Prepare the HDS to take a HIGH SPEED SNAPSHOT (refer to the HDS user's guide for more details if needed):
Select High Speed icon.
Select these parameters:
-Vehicle Speed
-Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed (rpm)
-Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed (rpm)
-Engine Speed
-TP Sensor (1)
-APP Sensor A (V)
-ATF Temp Sensor (V)
-Battery Voltage
-Shift Control
-Brake Switch
Set the Trigger Type to Parameter.
Adjust the Parameter setting to APP Sensor A above 1.26 V.
Set the recording time to 60 seconds.
Set the trigger point to −30 seconds.
7. Find a suitable level road. When you are ready to do the test, press OK on the HDS.
8. Monitor the HDS, and accelerate quickly until the APP Sensor A reads 1.26 V. Maintain a steady throttle until the
transmission shifts to 5th gear, then slow the vehicle and come to a stop.
9. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded, or increase the recording time setting as necessary and repeat
Step 8 .
10. Adjust the parameter setting to 2.53 V. Test-drive the vehicle again. While monitoring the HDS, accelerate quickly
until the APP Sensor A reads 2.53 V. Maintain a steady throttle until the transmission shifts to 5th gear (or
reasonable speed), then slow the vehicle and come to a stop.
11. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded, or increase the recording time setting as necessary and repeat
Step 10 .
12. Accelerate quickly until the accelerator pedal is to the floor. Maintain a steady pedal until the transmission shifts to
4th gear, then slow to a stop, and save the snapshot.
13. Review each snapshot individually, and compare the Shift Command, the APP Sensor A voltage, and the Vehicle
Speed to the table below.
L13A1 Engine model: Upshifting in D

Accelerator pedal position sensor A voltage: 1.26 V
1st → 2nd 13−15 km/h (8−9 mph)
2nd → 3rd 25−28 km/h (16−17 mph)
3rd → 4th 36−41 km/h (22−25 mph)
4th → 5th 45−51 km/h (28−32 mph)
Lock-up ON 42−46 km/h (26−29 mph)
1st → 2nd 28−31 km/h (17−19 mph)
2nd → 3rd 52−58 km/h (32−36 mph)
3rd → 4th 84−90 km/h (52−56 mph)
4th → 5th 119−125 km/h (74−78 mph)
Fully-opened throttle
1st → 2nd 46−52 km/h (29−32 mph)
2nd → 3rd 84−90 km/h (52−56 mph)
3rd → 4th 141−147 km/h (88−91 mph)
Downshifting in D (Reference)
Lock-up OFF 41−45 km/h (25−28 mph)
5th → 4th 39−45 km/h (24−28 mph)
4th → 3rd 32−36 km/h (20−22 mph)
3rd → 1st 8−12 km/h (5−7 mph)
5th → 4th 178−184 km/h (111−114 mph)
4th → 3rd 118−124 km/h (73−77 mph)
3rd → 2nd 72−78 km/h (45−48 mph)
2nd → 1st 29−35 km/h (18−22 mph)
L15A1 Engine Model: Upshifting in D

1st → 2nd 13−15 km/h (8−9 mph)
2nd → 3rd 25−28 km/h (16−17 mph)
3rd → 4th 36−41 km/h (22−25 mph)
4th → 5th 45−51 km/h (28−32 mph)
1st → 2nd 28−31 km/h (17−19 mph)
2nd → 3rd 52−58 km/h (32−36 mph)
3rd → 4th 84−90 km/h (52−56 mph)
4th → 5th 119−125 km/h (74−78 mph)
1st → 2nd 48−54 km/h (30−34 mph)
2nd → 3rd 88−94 km/h (55−58 mph)
3rd → 4th 148−154 km/h (92−96 mph)
Downshifting in D (Reference)
5th → 4th 41−47 km/h (25−29 mph)
4th → 3rd 32−36 km/h (20−22 mph)
3rd → 1st 8−12 km/h (5−7 mph)
5th → 4th 178−184 km/h (111−114 mph)
4th → 3rd 124−130 km/h (77−81 mph)
3rd → 2nd 79−85 km/h (49−53 mph)
2nd → 1st 36−42 km/h (22−26 mph)
14. Check for engine braking under these conditions:

Seven-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 4th or 5th gear in D, then shift to 2. The vehicle should
immediately begin to slow down from engine braking.
Five-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 4th or 5th gear in S with sequential shift mode, then downshift
to 2nd gear by pulling the paddle shifter − (downshift switch). The vehicle should immediately begin to slow
down from engine braking.
15. For seven-position transmission: Shift to 1, accelerate from a stop at full throttle, and check for abnormal noise and
clutch slippage. Upshifts should not occur in this position.
16. For seven-position transmission: Shift to 2, accelerate from a stop at full throttle, and check for abnormal noise and
clutch slippage. Upshifts and downshifts should not occur in this position.
17. Shift to R. Then, from a full stop, accelerate at full throttle, and check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage.
18. Park the vehicle on a slope (about 16 degrees), apply the brake, and shift into P. Release the brake; the vehicle
should not move.
NOTE: Always use the brake to hold the vehicle, when stopped on an incline in gear. Depending on the grade of the
incline, the vehicle could roll backwards if the brake is released.
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), the D indicator comes on and stays on in all shift lever positions, or it
never comes on at all
Probable cause(s)
1. F-CAN communication line error
2. Gauge control module defective
3. PCM defective
Notes
Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC.
Check the indicator drive circuit in the gauge control module by using the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
A/T gear position indicator does not come on while the shift lever is in that position
Probable cause(s)
3. PCM defective
4. Transmission range switch defective
Notes
Inspect the transmission range switch.
Shift lever cannot be moved from P while you are pressing on the brake pedal
Probable cause(s)
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor defective
3. Brake pedal position switch circuit
4. Brake pedal position switch defective
5. Shift lock solenoid defective
6. Shift lock solenoid control circuit
7. Shift lock mechanism defective
8. Throttle body defective
9. Transmission range switch ATP P switch stuck OFF
10. Transmission range switch ATP P switch line opened
Notes
Inspect the APP sensor signal.
Troubleshoot the shift lock system circuit.
Test the shift lock solenoid.
Ignition switch cannot be moved from ACCESSORY (I) to LOCK (0) (key is pushed in, the shift lever in P)
Probable cause(s)
1. Interlock control system circuit
2. Key interlock solenoid stuck ON
3. Park pin switch stuck ON
4. Transmission range switch
Notes
Troubleshoot the key interlock system circuit.
HDS does not communicate with the PCM or the vehicle
Probable cause(s)
1. DLC circuit error
Notes
Troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
Shift indicator does not work on five-position transmission
Probable cause(s)
3. PCM defective
4. Transmission range switch defective
Notes
Check the F-CAN communication line by using the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
Check the indicator drive circuit in the gauge control module by gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
When you press the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) in D and S, the transmission does not upshift on five-position
transmission
Probable cause(s)
1. A problem in the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) circuit
Notes
Check the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) circuit.
When you press the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) in D and S, the transmission does not downshift on five-
position transmission
Probable cause(s)
1. A problem in the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) circuit
Notes
Check the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) circuit.
M indicator does not come on even though the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) or paddle shifter − (downshift switch)
is operated in sequential shift mode on five-position transmission
Probable cause(s)
3. PCM defective
Notes
Engine runs, but vehicle does not move in any gear
Probable cause(s)
1. Low ATF level
2. Shift cable broken or out of adjustment
3. Connection between shift cable and transmission or body is worn
4. ATF pump worn or binding
5. Regulator valve stuck or spring worn
6. ATF strainer clogged
7. Mainshaft worn or damaged
8. Final gears worn or damaged
9. Transmission-to-engine assembly error
10. Axle disengaged
Notes
Check the ATF level, and check the ATF cooler lines for leakage and loose connections. If necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the transmission control lever.
Check the stall speed.
Check the line pressure.
Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque converter housing may cause the ATF pump to seize. The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
noise or a high pitched squeak.
Be careful not to damage the torque converter housing when replacing the main ball bearing. You may also damage the ATF pump when you torque
down the main valve body. This will cause the ATF pump seize.
Install the main seal flush with the torque converter housing when replacing the main seal. If you push it into the torque converter housing until it
bottoms out, it will block the fluid return passage and result in damage.
Check the regulator valve in the regulator valve body for free movement, and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is clogged, find the damaged components that caused the debris. If no cause for contamination is
found, replace the torque converter.
Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If the differential pinion gears are worn, replace the differential assembly, replace the ATF strainer,
thoroughly clean the transmission, and clean the ATF cooler and cooler lines.
Replace the torque converter.
Inspect the countershaft and secondary shaft for wear and damage.
Check for a misinstalled transmission.
Vehicle moves in 2 and R, but not in 1st in D, D3, S, or 1
Probable cause(s)
1. 1st accumulator defective
2. 1st gears worn or damaged
3. 1st clutch defective
Notes
Check the 1st clutch pressure.
Inspect the 1st accumulator piston, O-ring, and spring for wear and damage in the servo body.
Inspect the countershaft, secondary shaft, and 1st clutch for wear and damage.
Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the clearance between the
clutch end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage, and inspect the clutch
wave-plate height. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If the wave-plate height is out of tolerance, replace the wave-plate.
If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end-plate.
Vehicle moves in D, D3, S, 1, and R, but not in 2, or in 2nd in S
Probable cause(s)
1. 2nd accumulator defective
2. 2nd gears worn or damaged
3. 2nd clutch defective
Notes
Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
Inspect the 2nd accumulator piston, O-ring, and spring for wear and damaged in the servo body.
Inspect the countershaft, secondary shaft, and 2nd clutch for wear and damage.
Inspect the 2nd clutch feed pipe. If the 2nd clutch feed pipe is scored, replace the end cover.
Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the 2nd clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
Vehicle moves in D, D3, S, 2, and 1, but not in R
Probable cause(s)
1. Shift solenoid valve D defective
2. Shift fork shaft stuck
3. Shift valve D defective
4. 5th/reverse accumulator defective
5. 5th clutch defective
6. Reverse gears worn or damaged
Notes
Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose connections.
Test the shift solenoid valve function with the HDS.
Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.
Check the 5th clutch pressure.
Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork shaft.
Inspect the servo valve O-ring.
Check the shift fork shaft detent for wear and damage.
Inspect the 5th accumulator piston, O-ring, and spring for wear and damage in the servo body.
Inspect the mainshaft and 5th clutch for wear and damage.
Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers, and inspect the engagement teeth chamfers of the countershaft 5th gear and reverse gear. Replace
the reverse gears and the reverse selector if they are worn or damaged. If the transmission makes a clicking, grinding, or whirring noise, also replace the
mainshaft 5th gear, reverse idler gear, and countershaft 5th gear.
Poor acceleration; flares when starting off in D, D3, S, 2, 1, and R; stall speed high in D, D3, S, 2, and 1
Probable cause(s)
1. Low ATF level
3. ATF pump worn or binding
4. Regulator valve stuck or spring worn
5. ATF strainer clogged
6. Torque converter check valve defective
Notes
Check the ATF level and check the ATF lines for leakage and loose connections. If necessary, clean the ATF lines.
Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is clogged, find the damaged components that caused the debris. If no cause for contamination is
found, replace the torque converter.
Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If the differential pinion gears are worn, replace the differential assembly, replace the ATF strainer,
thoroughly clean the transmission, and clean the ATF cooler and ATF lines.
Check the torque converter check valve in the main valve body for free movement, and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
Poor acceleration; flares when starting off in D, D3, S, 2, and R; stall speed high
Probable cause(s)
Notes
Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
Inspect the secondary shaft and 2nd clutch for wear and damage.
Poor acceleration; flares when starting off in D, D3, S, 2, 1, and R; stall speed high in R
Probable cause(s)
Notes
Poor acceleration; flares when starting off in D, D3, S, 2, 1, and R; stall speed low in D, 2, and 1
Probable cause(s)
2. Torque converter one-way clutch defective
3. Engine output low
4. Torque converter clutch piston defective
5. Lock-up shift valve defective
Notes
Replace the torque converter assembly.
Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator valve body for free movement, and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
Check the engine control system.
Poor acceleration; flares when starting off in D, D3, S, 2, 1, and R; stall speed low in R
Probable cause(s)
Notes
Engine idle vibration
Probable cause(s)
1. Low ATF level
3. Drive plate defective or transmission misassembled
6. ATF pump worn or damaged
8. Misassembled engine or transmission mount
Notes
Check the ATF level and check the ATF lines for leakage and loose connections. If necessary, clean the ATF lines.
Check for a misinstalled/damaged drive plate, replace the drive plate if it is worn or damaged.
Adjust the transmission and engine mounts.
Vehicle moves in N
Probable cause(s)
1. Excessive ATF
2. Foreign material in separator plate orifice
3. Relief valve defective
6. 3rd clutch defective
9. Clearance between the clutch end-plate and the top disc is incorrect
10. Needle bearing seized, worn, or damaged
11. Thrust washer seized, worn, or damaged
Notes
Check the ATF level, and drain the ATF if it is over-filled.
Check the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch pressures.
Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the separator plate orifice.
Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is clogged with particles of steel or aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is OK, find the
damaged components that caused the debris. If no cause for contamination is found, replace the torque converter.
Check the relief valve in the main valve body for free movement, and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
Inspect the mainshaft, secondary shaft, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutches for wear and damage.
Inspect the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th clutch feed pipes.
If the 2nd clutch feed pipe is scored, replace the end cover.
If the 3rd or 4th clutch feed pipe is scored, replace it and the O-rings under the feed pipe flange.
Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the 2nd clutch feed pipe or 4th clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 3rd clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
Late shift after shifting from N to D, D3, and S, or excessive shock when shifted into D, D3, and S
Probable cause(s)
2. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A defective
3. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B defective
4. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C defective
7. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor defective
8. Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor defective
9. ATF temperature sensor defective
11. Servo control valve defective
13. 1st check ball stuck
Notes
Test the solenoid valve function with the HDS.
Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve body gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings, for wear and damage.
Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve seizure.
Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor installation.
Inspect the sensor O-ring for wear and damage.
Check the 1st clutch pressure.
Check the servo control valve in the main valve body for free movement, and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
Inspect the 1st accumulator piston, O-ring, and spring for wear and damage in the regulator valve body.
Check the 1st check ball for stuck in the main valve body.
Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st clutch for wear and damage.
Late shift after shifting from N to R, or excessive shock when shifted into R
Probable cause(s)
8. Shift fork shaft stuck
10. Shift valve D defective
11. 5th/reverse accumulator defective
Notes
Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve body gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings, for wear and damage.
Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork shaft.
Inspect the servo valve O-ring.
Check the shift valve D in the main valve body for free movement, and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
Inspect the 5th accumulator piston, O-ring, and spring for wear and damage in the servo body.
Transmission does not shift
Probable cause(s)
Notes
Excessive shock or flares on all upshifts and downshifts
Probable cause(s)
Notes
Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve body gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings for wear and damage.
Excessive shock or flares on 1-2 upshift or 2-1 downshift
Probable cause(s)
5. 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch defective
9. 1st check ball stuck
10. 2nd check ball stuck
Notes
Check for clogged orifice in the transmission fluid pressure switch connector. If the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the connector.
Check the 1st and 2nd clutch pressures.
Inspect the 1st accumulator piston, O-ring, and spring for wear and damage in the servo body.
Inspect the 2nd accumulator piston, O-ring, and spring for wear and damage in the servo body.
Check the 1st check ball and 2nd check ball for stick in the main valve body.
Inspect the secondary shaft, 1st clutch, and 2nd clutch for wear and damage.
Probable cause(s)
3. 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch defective
6. 3rd accumulator defective
7. 2nd check ball stuck
Notes
Check for clogged orifice in the transmission fluid pressure switch connector. If the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the connector.
Check the 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures.
Inspect the 2nd and 3rd accumulator pistons, O-rings, and springs for wear and damage in the servo body.
Check the 2nd check ball for stick in the main valve body.
Inspect the secondary shaft, mainshaft, 2nd clutch, and 3rd clutch for wear and damage.
Inspect the 2nd and 3rd clutch feed pipes.
If the 3rd clutch feed pipe is scored, replace it and the O-rings under the feed pipe flange.
Probable cause(s)
4. 3rd accumulator defective
5. 4th accumulator defective
Notes
Check the 3rd and 4th clutch pressures.
Inspect the 3rd and 4th accumulator pistons, O-rings, and springs for wear and damage in the servo body.
Inspect the mainshaft, secondary shaft, 3rd clutch, and 4th clutch for wear and damage.
Inspect the 3rd and 4th clutch feed pipes.
If the 3rd clutch feed pipe is scored, replace it and the O-rings under the feed pipe flange.
If the 4th clutch feed pipe is scored, replace it and the O-rings under the feed pipe flange.
Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the 4th clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
Probable cause(s)
Notes
Check the 4th and 5th clutch pressures.
Inspect the 4th and 5th accumulator pistons, O-rings, and springs for wear and damage in the servo body.
Inspect the mainshaft, secondary shaft, 4th clutch, and 5th clutch for wear and damage.
Inspect the 4th clutch feed pipes. If the 4th clutch feed pipe is scored, replace it and the O-rings under the feed pipe flange.
Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the 4th clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
Noise from transmission in all shift lever positions
Probable cause(s)
1. ATF pump worn or damaged
2. Mainshaft bearing, countershaft bearing, or secondary shaft bearing defective
Notes
Be careful not to damage the torque converter housing when replacing the main ball bearing. Not torquing the valve body to specification could also
damage the ATF pump. This could cause the pump to seize.
Install the main seal flush with the torque converter housing when replacing the main seal. If you push it into the torque converter housing until it
bottoms out, it will block the fluid return passage and result in damage.
Inspect the mainshaft, countershaft, and secondary shaft bearing for wear and damage.
Vehicle does not accelerate above 50 km/h (31 mph)
Probable cause(s)
Notes
Vibration in all shift lever positions
Probable cause(s)
1. Drive plate defective or transmission misassembled
Notes
Check for a misinstalled/damaged drive plate, replace the drive plate if it is worn or damaged.
Shift lever does not operate smoothly
Probable cause(s)
1. Transmission range switch defective or out of adjustment
Notes
Inspect the transmission range switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty, replace it. If the transmission range switch is out of adjustment,
adjust it and shift cable.
Transmission does not shift into P
Probable cause(s)
3. Park mechanism defective
Notes
Check the park pawl spring installation and the park lever spring installation. If installation is incorrect, install the spring correctly. Make sure that the
park lever stop is not installed upside down. Check the distance between the park pawl shaft and park lever pin. If the distance is out of tolerance, adjust
the distance with the park lever stop.
Torque converter clutch does not disengage
Probable cause(s)
5. Lock-up control valve defective
Notes
Check the lock-up control valve in the main valve body for free movement, and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
Torque converter clutch does not operate smoothly
Probable cause(s)
Notes
Check the torque converter check valve in the regulator valve body for free movement, and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
Torque converter clutch does not engage
Probable cause(s)
Notes
Check the torque converter check valve in the regulator valve body for free movement, and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
A/T gear position indicator does not indicate shift lever positions
Probable cause(s)
1. Transmission range switch defective or out of adjustment
3. Connection between shift cable and transmission or body worn
Notes
Inspect the transmission range switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty, replace it. If the transmission range switch is out of adjustment,
adjust it and shift cable.
Speedometer and odometer do not work
Probable cause(s)
Notes
Check the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor installation.
Inspect the sensor O-ring.
Engine does not rev to high rpm, and the transmission upshifts at low rpm (engine at normal operating temperature)
Probable cause(s)
1. Engine rocker arm defective
Notes
Check the engine rocker arms.
Check for a restricted or damaged exhaust system.
A/T System Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
When you turn the ignition F-CAN communication line error Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC.
switch to ON (II), the D Gauge control module defective Check the indicator drive circuit in the gauge control module by
indicator comes on and PCM defective using the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
stays on in all shift lever
positions, or it never
comes on at all
A/T gear position indicator F-CAN communication line error Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC.
does not come on while Gauge control module defective Check the indicator drive circuit in the gauge control module by
the shift lever is in that PCM defective using the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
position Transmission range switch defective Inspect the transmission range switch.
Shift lever cannot be Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit Inspect the APP sensor signal.
moved from P while you Accelerator pedal position sensor defective Troubleshoot the shift lock system circuit.
are pressing on the brake Brake pedal position switch circuit Test the shift lock solenoid.
pedal Brake pedal position switch defective Inspect the transmission range switch.
Shift lock solenoid defective
Shift lock solenoid control circuit
Shift lock mechanism defective
Throttle body defective
Transmission range switch ATP P switch
stuck OFF
Transmission range switch ATP P switch
line opened
Ignition switch cannot be Interlock control system circuit Troubleshoot the key interlock system circuit.
moved from ACCESSORY Key interlock solenoid stuck ON Inspect the transmission range switch.
(I) to LOCK (0) (key is Park pin switch stuck ON
pushed in, the shift lever in Transmission range switch
P)
HDS does not DLC circuit error Troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
communicate with the
PCM or the vehicle
Shift indicator does not F-CAN communication line error Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC.
work on five-position Gauge control module defective Check the F-CAN communication line by using the gauge control
transmission PCM defective module self-diagnostic function.
Transmission range switch defective Check the indicator drive circuit in the gauge control module by
gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
When you press the A problem in the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) Check the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) circuit.
paddle shifter + (upshift circuit
switch) in D and S, the
transmission does not
upshift on five-position
transmission
When you press the A problem in the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) Check the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) circuit.
paddle shifter − (downshift circuit
switch) in D and S, the
transmission does not
downshift on five-position
transmission
M indicator does not come F-CAN communication line error Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC.
on even though the paddle Gauge control module defective Check the indicator drive circuit in the gauge control module by
shifter + (upshift switch) or PCM defective using the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
paddle shifter − (downshift
switch) is operated in
sequential shift mode on
five-position transmission
Engine runs, but vehicle 1. Low ATF level Check the ATF level, and check the ATF cooler lines for leakage
does not move in any gear 2. Shift cable broken or out of adjustment and loose connections. If necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
3. Connection between shift cable and Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
4. transmission or body is worn transmission control lever.
5. ATF pump worn or binding Check the stall speed.
6. Regulator valve stuck or spring worn Check the line pressure.
7. ATF strainer clogged Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque converter housing
8. Mainshaft worn or damaged may cause the ATF pump to seize. The symptoms are mostly an
9. Final gears worn or damaged rpm-related ticking noise or a high pitched squeak.
10. Transmission-to-engine assembly error Be careful not to damage the torque converter housing when
Axle disengaged replacing the main ball bearing. You may also damage the ATF
pump when you torque down the main valve body. This will cause
the ATF pump seize.
Install the main seal flush with the torque converter housing when
replacing the main seal. If you push it into the torque converter
housing until it bottoms out, it will block the fluid return passage
and result in damage.
Check the regulator valve in the regulator valve body for free
movement, and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is clogged, find
the damaged components that caused the debris. If no cause for
contamination is found, replace the torque converter.
Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If the differential
pinion gears are worn, replace the differential assembly, replace
the ATF strainer, thoroughly clean the transmission, and clean
the ATF cooler and cooler lines.
Replace the torque converter.
Inspect the countershaft and secondary shaft for wear and
damage.
Check for a misinstalled transmission.

Vehicle moves in 2 and R, 1. 1st accumulator defective Check the 1st clutch pressure.
but not in 1st in D, D3, S, 2. 1st gears worn or damaged Inspect the 1st accumulator piston, O-ring, and spring for wear
or 1 3. 1st clutch defective and damage in the servo body.
Inspect the countershaft, secondary shaft, and 1st clutch for wear
and damage.
Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and O-rings.
Check the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
clearance between the clutch end-plate and the top disc. If the
clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates
for wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wave-plate height. If
the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
If the wave-plate height is out of tolerance, replace the wave-plate.
Vehicle moves in D, D3, S, 1. 2nd accumulator defective Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
1, and R, but not in 2, or in 2. 2nd gears worn or damaged Inspect the 2nd accumulator piston, O-ring, and spring for wear
2nd in S 3. 2nd clutch defective and damaged in the servo body.
Inspect the countershaft, secondary shaft, and 2nd clutch for
wear and damage.
Inspect the 2nd clutch feed pipe. If the 2nd clutch feed pipe is
scored, replace the end cover.
Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the 2nd clutch feed
pipe is loose or damaged.
Vehicle moves in D, D3, S, 1. Shift solenoid valve D defective Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose connections.
2, and 1, but not in R 2. Shift fork shaft stuck Test the shift solenoid valve function with the HDS.
3. Shift valve D defective Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.
4. 5th/reverse accumulator defective Check the 5th clutch pressure.
5. 5th clutch defective Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork shaft.
6. Reverse gears worn or damaged Inspect the servo valve O-ring.
Inspect the 5th accumulator piston, O-ring, and spring for wear
and damage in the servo body.
Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers, and inspect the
engagement teeth chamfers of the countershaft 5th gear and
reverse gear. Replace the reverse gears and the reverse selector if
they are worn or damaged. If the transmission makes a clicking,
grinding, or whirring noise, also replace the mainshaft 5th gear,
reverse idler gear, and countershaft 5th gear.
Poor acceleration; flares 1. Low ATF level Check the line pressure.
when starting off in D, D3, 2. Shift cable broken or out of adjustment Check the ATF level and check the ATF lines for leakage and
S, 2, 1, and R; stall speed 3. ATF pump worn or binding loose connections. If necessary, clean the ATF lines.
high in D, D3, S, 2, and 1 4. Regulator valve stuck or spring worn Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
5. ATF strainer clogged transmission control lever.
6. Torque converter check valve defective Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque converter housing
may cause the ATF pump to seize. The symptoms are mostly an
rpm-related ticking noise or a high pitched squeak.
Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is clogged, find
the damaged components that caused the debris. If no cause for
contamination is found, replace the torque converter.
Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If the differential
pinion gears are worn, replace the differential assembly, replace
the ATF strainer, thoroughly clean the transmission, and clean
the ATF cooler and ATF lines.
Check the torque converter check valve in the main valve body for
free movement, and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
Poor acceleration; flares 2nd clutch defective Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
when starting off in D, D3, Inspect the secondary shaft and 2nd clutch for wear and damage.
S, 2, and R; stall speed Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and O-rings.
high Check the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
Poor acceleration; flares 1. Shift cable broken or out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
when starting off in D, D3, 2. 5th clutch defective transmission control lever.
S, 2, 1, and R; stall speed Check the 5th clutch pressure.
high in R Inspect the mainshaft and 5th clutch for wear and damage.
Poor acceleration; flares 1. Shift solenoid valve D defective Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose connections.
when starting off in D, D3, 2. Torque converter one-way clutch defective Test the shift solenoid valve function with the HDS.
S, 2, 1, and R; stall speed 3. Engine output low Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.
low in D, 2, and 1 4. Torque converter clutch piston defective Replace the torque converter assembly.
5. Lock-up shift valve defective Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator valve body for free
Poor acceleration; flares 1. Torque converter one-way clutch defective Check the engine control system.
when starting off in D, D3, 2. Engine output low Replace the torque converter assembly.
S, 2, 1, and R; stall speed 3. Torque converter clutch piston defective Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator valve body for free
low in R 4. Lock-up shift valve defective movement, and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
Engine idle vibration 1. Low ATF level Check the ATF level and check the ATF lines for leakage and
2. Shift solenoid valve D defective loose connections. If necessary, clean the ATF lines.
3. Drive plate defective or transmission Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose connections.
4. misassembled Test the shift solenoid valve function with the HDS.
5. Engine output low Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.
6. Torque converter clutch piston defective Check for a misinstalled/damaged drive plate, replace the drive
7. ATF pump worn or damaged plate if it is worn or damaged.
8. Lock-up shift valve defective Check the engine control system.
Misassembled engine or transmission mount Replace the torque converter assembly.
Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque converter housing
may cause the ATF pump to seize. The symptoms are mostly an
Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator valve body for free
Adjust the transmission and engine mounts.

Vehicle moves in N 1. Excessive ATF Check the ATF level, and drain the ATF if it is over-filled.
2. Foreign material in separator plate orifice Check the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch pressures.
3. Relief valve defective Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If the orifice is
4. 1st clutch defective clogged, remove it and clean the separator plate orifice.
5. 2nd clutch defective Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is clogged with
6. 3rd clutch defective particles of steel or aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF
7. 4th clutch defective pump is OK, find the damaged components that caused the
8. 5th clutch defective debris. If no cause for contamination is found, replace the torque
9. Clearance between the clutch end-plate and converter.
10. the top disc is incorrect Check the relief valve in the main valve body for free movement,
11. Needle bearing seized, worn, or damaged and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
Thrust washer seized, worn, or damaged Inspect the mainshaft, secondary shaft, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and
5th clutches for wear and damage.
Inspect the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th clutch feed pipes.
If the 3rd or 4th clutch feed pipe is scored, replace it and the O-
rings under the feed pipe flange.
pipe or 4th clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 3rd clutch feed pipe
is loose or damaged.
Late shift after shifting from 1. Shift solenoid valve D defective Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose connections.
N to D, D3, and S, or 2. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A Test the solenoid valve function with the HDS.
excessive shock when 3. defective Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve body
shifted into D, D3, and S 4. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings, for wear and damage.
5. defective Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve seizure.
6. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
7. defective transmission control lever.
8. Shift cable broken or out of adjustment Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and output shaft
9. Connection between shift cable and (countershaft) speed sensor installation.
10. transmission or body is worn Inspect the sensor O-ring for wear and damage.
11. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If the orifice is
12. defective clogged, remove it and clean the separator plate orifice.
13. Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor Check the 1st clutch pressure.
14. defective Check the servo control valve in the main valve body for free
15. ATF temperature sensor defective movement, and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
Foreign material in separator plate orifice Inspect the 1st accumulator piston, O-ring, and spring for wear
Servo control valve defective and damage in the regulator valve body.
1st accumulator defective Check the 1st check ball for stuck in the main valve body.
1st check ball stuck Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator valve body for free
Lock-up shift valve defective movement, and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
1st clutch defective Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st clutch for wear and damage.
Late shift after shifting from 1. Shift solenoid valve D defective Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose connections.
N to R, or excessive shock 2. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A Test the solenoid valve function with the HDS.
when shifted into R 3. defective Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve body
4. Shift cable broken or out of adjustment gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings, for wear and damage.
5. Connection between shift cable and Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.
6. transmission or body is worn Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
7. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor transmission control lever.
8. defective Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and output shaft
9. Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (countershaft) speed sensor installation.
10. defective Inspect the sensor O-ring for wear and damage.
11. ATF temperature sensor defective Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork shaft.
12. Shift fork shaft stuck Inspect the servo valve O-ring.
13. Foreign material in separator plate orifice Check the shift fork shaft detent for wear and damage.
Shift valve D defective Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If the orifice is
5th/reverse accumulator defective clogged, remove it and clean the separator plate orifice.
Lock-up shift valve defective Check the 5th clutch pressure.
5th clutch defective Check the shift valve D in the main valve body for free movement,
and check the valve spring for wear and damage.
Inspect the 5th accumulator piston, O-ring, and spring for wear
and damage in the servo body.

Transmission does not 1. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor defective Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose connections.
shift 2. Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and output shaft
defective (countershaft) speed sensor installation.
Excessive shock or flares 1. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose connections.
on all upshifts and 2. defective Test the solenoid valve function with the HDS.
downshifts 3. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve body
4. defective gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings for wear and damage.
5. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor defective Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and output shaft
6. Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (countershaft) speed sensor installation.
defective Inspect the sensor O-ring for wear and damage.
ATF temperature sensor defective Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If the orifice is
Foreign material in separator plate orifice clogged, remove it and clean the separator plate orifice.

Excessive shock or 1. Shift solenoid valve D defective Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose connections.
flares on 1-2 upshift or 2. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A Test the solenoid valve function with the HDS.
2-1 downshift 3. defective Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve body
4. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings for wear and damage.
5. defective Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.
6. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C Check for clogged orifice in the transmission fluid pressure switch
7. defective connector. If the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
8. 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector.
9. defective Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If the orifice is
10. Foreign material in separator plate orifice clogged, remove it and clean the separator plate orifice.
11. 1st accumulator defective Check the 1st and 2nd clutch pressures.
12. 2nd accumulator defective Inspect the 1st accumulator piston, O-ring, and spring for wear
13. 1st check ball stuck and damage in the servo body.
2nd check ball stuck Inspect the 2nd accumulator piston, O-ring, and spring for wear
Lock-up shift valve defective and damage in the servo body.
1st clutch defective Check the 1st check ball and 2nd check ball for stick in the main
2nd clutch defective valve body.
Inspect the secondary shaft, 1st clutch, and 2nd clutch for wear
and damage.

on 2-3 upshift or 3-2 2. defective Test the solenoid valve function with the HDS.
downshift 3. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve body
5. 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch Check for clogged orifice in the transmission fluid pressure switch
6. defective connector. If the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
7. Foreign material in separator plate orifice connector.
8. 2nd accumulator defective Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If the orifice is
9. 3rd accumulator defective clogged, remove it and clean the separator plate orifice.
2nd check ball stuck Check the 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures.
2nd clutch defective Inspect the 2nd and 3rd accumulator pistons, O-rings, and
3rd clutch defective springs for wear and damage in the servo body.
Check the 2nd check ball for stick in the main valve body.
Inspect the secondary shaft, mainshaft, 2nd clutch, and 3rd
clutch for wear and damage.
Inspect the 2nd and 3rd clutch feed pipes.
If the 3rd clutch feed pipe is scored, replace it and the O-rings
under the feed pipe flange.
5. Foreign material in separator plate orifice Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If the orifice is
6. 3rd accumulator defective clogged, remove it and clean the separator plate orifice.
7. 4th accumulator defective Check the 3rd and 4th clutch pressures.
3rd clutch defective Inspect the 3rd and 4th accumulator pistons, O-rings, and springs
4th clutch defective for wear and damage in the servo body.
Inspect the mainshaft, secondary shaft, 3rd clutch, and 4th clutch
for wear and damage.
Inspect the 3rd and 4th clutch feed pipes.
If the 3rd clutch feed pipe is scored, replace it and the O-rings
If the 4th clutch feed pipe is scored, replace it and the O-rings
Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the 4th clutch feed
5. Foreign material in separator plate orifice Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If the orifice is
6. 4th accumulator defective clogged, remove it and clean the separator plate orifice.
7. 5th accumulator defective Check the 4th and 5th clutch pressures.
4th clutch defective Inspect the 4th and 5th accumulator pistons, O-rings, and springs
5th clutch defective for wear and damage in the servo body.
Inspect the mainshaft, secondary shaft, 4th clutch, and 5th clutch
Inspect the 4th clutch feed pipes. If the 4th clutch feed pipe is
scored, replace it and the O-rings under the feed pipe flange.
Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the 4th clutch feed
Noise from transmission in 1. ATF pump worn or damaged Check the line pressure.
all shift lever positions 2. Mainshaft bearing, countershaft bearing, or Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque converter housing
secondary shaft bearing defective may cause the ATF pump to seize. The symptoms are mostly an
Be careful not to damage the torque converter housing when
replacing the main ball bearing. Not torquing the valve body to
specification could also damage the ATF pump. This could cause
the pump to seize.
Install the main seal flush with the torque converter housing when
replacing the main seal. If you push it into the torque converter
housing until it bottoms out, it will block the fluid return passage
and result in damage.
Inspect the mainshaft, countershaft, and secondary shaft bearing
Vehicle does not Torque converter one-way clutch defective Replace the torque converter assembly.
accelerate above 50 km/h
(31 mph)
Vibration in all shift lever Drive plate defective or transmission misassembled Check for a misinstalled/damaged drive plate, replace the drive
positions plate if it is worn or damaged.
Shift lever does not 1. Transmission range switch defective or out of Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose connections.
operate smoothly 2. adjustment Inspect the transmission range switch. If the transmission range
3. Shift cable broken or out of adjustment switch is faulty, replace it. If the transmission range switch is out
Connection between shift cable and of adjustment, adjust it and shift cable.
transmission or body is worn Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
transmission control lever.
Transmission does not 1. Shift cable broken or out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
shift into P 2. Connection between shift cable and transmission control lever.
3. transmission or body is worn Check the park pawl spring installation and the park lever spring
Park mechanism defective installation. If installation is incorrect, install the spring correctly.
Make sure that the park lever stop is not installed upside down.
Check the distance between the park pawl shaft and park lever
pin. If the distance is out of tolerance, adjust the distance with the
park lever stop.
Torque converter clutch 1. Shift solenoid valve D defective Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose connections.
does not disengage 2. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A Test the solenoid valve function with the HDS.
3. defective Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve body
4. Torque converter clutch piston defective gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings for wear and damage.
5. Lock-up shift valve defective Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.
Lock-up control valve defective Replace the torque converter assembly.
Check the lock-up control valve in the main valve body for free
does not operate smoothly 2. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A Test the solenoid valve function with the HDS.
4. Torque converter clutch piston defective gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings for wear and damage.
5. Torque converter check valve defective Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.
6. Lock-up shift valve defective Replace the torque converter assembly.
Lock-up control valve defective Check the torque converter check valve in the regulator valve body
for free movement, and check the valve spring for wear and
damage.
does not engage 2. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A Test the solenoid valve function with the HDS.
4. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor defective gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings for wear and damage.
5. Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.
6. defective Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and output shaft
7. Torque converter clutch piston defective (countershaft) speed sensor installation.
8. Torque converter check valve defective Inspect the sensor O-ring for wear and damage.
Lock-up shift valve defective Replace the torque converter assembly.
Lock-up control valve defective Check the torque converter check valve in the regulator valve body
for free movement, and check the valve spring for wear and
damage.
A/T gear position indicator 1. Transmission range switch defective or out of Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose connections.
does not indicate shift 2. adjustment Inspect the transmission range switch. If the transmission range
lever positions 3. Shift cable broken or out of adjustment switch is faulty, replace it. If the transmission range switch is out
Connection between shift cable and of adjustment, adjust it and shift cable.
transmission or body worn Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
transmission control lever.
Speedometer and Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor defective Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose connections.
odometer do not work Check the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor installation.
Inspect the sensor O-ring.
Engine does not rev to Engine rocker arm defective Check the engine rocker arms.
high rpm, and the Check for a restricted or damaged exhaust system.
transmission upshifts at
low rpm (engine at normal
operating temperature)
ATF Replacement
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on), and turn the engine off.
2. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking brake, block both rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle.
Make sure it is securely supported.
4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
5. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B).
6. Remove the dipstick, and refill the transmission with the recommended fluid into the dipstick guide opening (A).
Always use genuine Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift
quality.
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity:
2.5 L (2.6 US qt, 2.2 lmp qt) at change
5.85 L (6.18 US qt, 5.15 lmp qt) at overhaul
7. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission.

8. Check the ATF level.
9. Install the splash shield.
ATF Level Check
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
1. Park the vehicle on the level ground.
2. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on), then turn the engine off. Do not
allow the engine to warm up longer than the time it takes for the radiator fan to come on twice.
NOTE: Check the fluid level within 60−90 seconds after turning the engine off. Higher fluid level may be indicated if
the radiator fan comes on twice or more.
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A), and wipe it with a clean cloth.
4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper mark (A) and lower mark (B).
6. If the level is below the lower mark, check for fluid leaks at the transmission, and hose and line joints. If a problem
is found, fix it before filling the transmission.
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven when the ATF level is below the lower mark, one or more of these symptoms may
occur:
Transmission damage.
Vehicle does not move in any gear.
Vehicle accelerates poorly, and flares when starting off in the forward and reverse positions.
The engine vibrates at idle.
7. If the level is above the upper mark, drain the ATF to proper level.
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven when the ATF level is above the upper mark, the vehicle may creep forward while in N,
or have shifting problems.
8. If necessary, fill the transmission with the ATF through the dipstick guide opening (A) to bring the fluid level midway
between the upper mark and lower mark of the dipstick. Do not fill past the upper mark. Always use genuine Honda
ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
9. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission.
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement
1. Slide the ATF cooler hose (A) on the ATF filter (B) until the hose end contacts the filter housing, and secure the
hose with the clip (C) at 6−8 mm (0.24−0.31 in.) (D) from the filter housing. Install the cooler hose on the other side
of the ATF filter in the same manner.
2. Slide the ATF cooler hoses (E) over the ATF lines (F) until the hose ends contact the bulge (G), and secure the
hoses with the clip (H) at 6−8 mm (0.24−0.31 in.) (I) from the hose end.
3. Slide the ATF cooler hose (J) over the ATF line (K) until the hose end contacts the line bracket (L), and secure the
hose with the clip (M) at 6−8 mm (0.24−0.31 in.) (N) from the hose end.
4. Slide the ATF cooler hose (O) over the ATF cooler line (P) until the hose end contacts the bulge (Q), and secure
the hose with the clip (R) at 2−4 mm (0.08−0.16 in.) (S) from the hose end.
ATF Filter Replacement
1. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
2. Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF filter (B).
3. Remove the ATF filter holder (C).
4. Remove the ATF filter, and replace it.
5. Install the new ATF filter on the filter mounting bracket (D), and secure it with its holder and bolt.
6. Slide the ATF cooler hose on the ATF filter until the hose end contacts the filter housing, and secure the hose with
the clip (E) at 6−8 mm (0.24−0.31 in.) (F) from the filter housing. Install the cooler hose on the other side of the
ATF filter in the same manner.
7. Install the air cleaner assembly.
A/T Drive Plate Removal and Installation
1. Remove the transmission assembly.
2. Remove the drive plate (A) and washer (B) from the engine crankshaft.
3. Install the drive plate and washer on the engine crankshaft, and tighten the six bolts in a crisscross pattern in at
least two steps.
4. Install the transmission assembly.
A/T Housing Reverse Idler Gear Removal
1. Remove the bolts (A) securing the reverse idler gear shaft holder (B).
2. Install a 5 x 0.8 mm bolt (C) in the reverse gear shaft, and pull it to remove the reverse idler gear shaft (D) and the
gear shaft holder together.
3. Remove the reverse idler gear.

A/T Housing Reverse Idler Gear Installation
1. Lightly coat the reverse idler gear shaft (A), the needle bearing (B), and the new O-rings (C) with lithium grease.
2. Assemble the new O-rings and the needle bearing on the reverse idler gear shaft, then install the reverse idler gear
shaft in the reverse idler gear shaft holder (E). Align the D-shaped cut out of the shaft with the D-shaped area of the
holder.
3. Install the reverse idler gear in the transmission housing in the direction shown.
4. Install the reverse idler gear shaft/holder assembly in the reverse idler gear.
5. Secure the holder with the bolts.
A/T End Cover Air Check Valve Inspection and Replacement
1. Check the air check valve filter for clogging. If the filter is clogged, remove the air check valve (A), and clean the
filter thoroughly by pouring clean ATF. Do not blow out the filter with compressed air. Replace the air check valve, if
the filter or check valve (ball) is clogged or damaged.
2. Install the air check valve and a new sealing washer (B).
A/T End Cover ATF Feed Pipe Replacement
1. Remove the snap ring (A), 3rd clutch feed pipe (B), and feed pipe flange (C) from the end cover (D).
2. Install the new O-ring (E) over the 3rd clutch feed pipe.
3. Install the 3rd clutch feed pipe in the end cover by aligning the feed pipe tabs (F) with the indentations in the end
cover.
4. Install the new O-ring (G) in the end cover, then install the feed pipe flange over the 3rd clutch feed pipe.
5. Secure the 3rd clutch feed pipe and feed pipe flange with the snap ring.
6. Remove the snap ring (H) and feed pipe flange (I).
7. Check the 4th clutch feed pipe (J) and 2nd clutch feed pipe (K) for scoring and damage. Replace the end cover, if
the feed pipe is scored or damaged.
8. Install the new O-ring (L) over the 4th clutch feed pipe.
9. Install the new O-ring (M) in the end cover, then install the feed pipe flange over the 4th clutch feed pipe.
10. Secure the 4th clutch feed pipe and feed pipe flange with the snap ring.
A/T End Cover Selector Control Shaft Bearing Replacement
Driver handle 15 x 135L
07749-0010000
Driver attachment, 22 x 24 mm
07746-0010800
1. Remove the oil seal from the end cover.
2. Remove the control shaft bearing from the end cover.
3. Install the new bearing flush to the end cover with the special tools.
4. Install the new oil seal flush to the end cover with the special tools.
A/T End Cover Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal Replacement
07749-0010000
07746-0010800
1. Remove the oil seal from the end cover.
2. Install the new oil seal flush to the end cover with the special tools.
Torque Converter Housing Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal Replacement
07749-0010000
Oil seal driver attachment

07947-ZV00100
1. Remove the oil seal from the torque converter housing.
2. Install the new oil seal (A) in the torque converter housing in depth (B) of 0.5−1.5 mm (0.02−0.06 in.) below the
housing surface with the special tools.
A/T End Cover Removal
Mainshaft holder set
07PAB-0010001
1. Remove the bolts securing the ATF inlet line (A) and ATF filter holder (B), line bolt and sealing
washers, and remove the ATF inlet line, ATF hose, and ATF filter. Remove the ATF filter bracket
(C).
2. Remove the ATF outlet line bolt, line mounting bolt, sealing washers, and ATF outlet line (D).
3. Remove the transmission hanger (E) and breather hose clamp bracket (F).
4. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (G), ATF joint pipes, O-rings, ATF
pipe, and gasket.
5. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C (H), O-rings, ATF pipe, ATF joint
pipes, and gasket.
6. Remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (I) and output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor (J).
7. Remove the transmission range switch cover (K).
8. Remove the transmission range switch harness clamps (L) from the clamp bracket (M), then
remove the transmission range switch (N).
9. Remove the clamp bracket from the end cover (O).
10. Remove the connector bracket (P) from the transmission housing.
11. Remove the end cover, dowel pins, O-rings, and end cover gasket.
12. Remove the ATF lubrication pipe (Q) from the idler gear shaft.
13. Slip the special tool onto the mainshaft.

14. Engage the park pawl with the park gear.
15. Cut the lock tab (A) of the each shaft locknut (B) using a chisel (C). Then remove the locknuts and conical spring
washers from each shaft.
NOTE:
Countershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have left-hand threads.
Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the transmission.
Clean the old locknuts; they are used to install the press fit idler gears and park gear.
16. Remove the snap ring securing the idler gear to the idler gear shaft.
17. Install 6 x 1.0 mm bolts (A) on the idler gear shaft idler gear (B). Set a puller (C) on the idler gear shaft (D) with
putting a spacer (E) between the puller and idler gear shaft, then remove idler gear shaft idler gear.
18. Set the puller, 6 x 1.0 mm bolts, and spacer on the secondary shaft idler gear (F), and remove the secondary shaft
idler gear from the secondary shaft in the same manner as the removal of idler gear shaft idler gear.
19. Set the puller, 6 x 1.0 mm bolts, and spacer on the mainshaft idler gear (G), and remove the mainshaft idler gear
from the mainshaft in the same manner as the removal of idler gear shaft idler gear.
20. Set the puller, 6 x 1.0 mm bolts, and spacer on the park gear (H), and remove the park gear from the countershaft
in the same manner as the removal of idler gear shaft idler gear.
21. Remove the park pawl, park pawl spring, park pawl shaft, and stop shaft.
22. Remove the park lever from the selector control shaft.
A/T End Cover Installation
Mainshaft holder set
07PAB-0010001
Gear installer set

070AC-XFD0100
1. Install the special tool onto the mainshaft.
2. Lubricate the following parts with ATF:
Splines and threads of the mainshaft.
Splines of the mainshaft idler gear.
Old conical spring washer and old locknut.
3. Install the mainshaft idler gear (A), old conical spring washer (B), and old locknut (C) on the mainshaft (D), and
tighten the locknut to 216 N·m (22.0 kgf·m, 159 lbf·ft).
NOTE:
Do not tap the idler gear to install.
Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do not use an impact wrench.
Splines and threads of the secondary shaft and idler gear shaft.
Splines of the secondary shaft idler gear.
5. Install the secondary shaft idler gear (A) on the secondary shaft (B), and install the idler gear shaft idler gear (C) on
the idler gear shaft (D).
6. Set the special tool on the idler gear shaft and idler gear, and tighten the installer nut to install the idler gear part-
way.
NOTE: The installer nut has left-hand threads.
7. Install the old conical spring washer (A) and old locknut (B) on the secondary shaft (C), and tighten the locknut to
226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m, 166 lbf·ft).
NOTE:
Do not tap the idler gear to install.
Secondary shaft locknut has left-hand threads.
8. Retighten the installer nut to seat the idler gear in the idler gear shaft until it stops. Remove the special tool from
the idler gear shaft.
9. Install the new snap ring (A) on the idler gear shaft (B), and verify that the snap ring is seated securely into the
groove.
10. Install the park lever (A) and the park lever stop (B) on the selector control shaft (C), then install the lock bolt and
the new lock washer (D). Do not bend the lock tab of the lock washer until Step 23 .
11. Install the park pawl shaft (E), the park pawl spring (F), the park pawl (G), and the stop shaft (H) on the
transmission housing.
Threads and splines of the countershaft.
Areas where the park gear contacts the conical spring washer.
13. Install the park gear (I), the old conical spring washer (J), and the old locknut (K) on the countershaft.
14. Lift the park pawl up, and engage it with the park gear, then tighten the locknut to 226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m, 166 lbf·ft).
NOTE:
Do not tap the park gear to install.
Countershaft locknut has left-hand threads.
15. Remove the locknuts and the conical spring washers from the mainshaft, the countershaft, and the secondary
shaft.
16. Lubricate the threads of the shafts, the new locknuts and the new conical spring washers with ATF.
17. Install the new conical spring washers (A) (B) with facing stamped mark side up in the direction shown, and install
the new mainshaft locknut (C), the new countershaft locknut (D), and the new secondary shaft locknut (E).
18. Tighten the countershaft locknut and the secondary shaft locknut to 167 N·m (17.0 kgf·m, 23 lbf·ft), and tighten the
mainshaft locknut to 155 N·m (15.8 kgf·m, 114 lbf·ft).
NOTE:
Be sure to install the conical spring washers in the direction shown.
Countershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have left-hand threads.
19. Remove the special tool from the mainshaft.
20. Stake the locknuts into the shafts in depth (A) of 0.7−1.3 mm (0.03−0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm punch (B).
21. Set the park pawl (A) in the P position, then verify that the park pawl engages with the park gear (B).
22. If the park pawl does not engage fully, check the distance (C) between the pawl shaft and the extension line
connected centers of the park lever roller pin and the selector control shaft.
23. Tighten the lock bolt (D), and bend the lock tab of the lock washer (E) against the bolt head.
24. Install the ATF lubrication pipe (A) into the idler gear shaft (B).
25. Install the new gasket (C) on the transmission housing, and install the two dowel pins (D) and new O-rings (E) over
the top of the ATF feed pipes (F).
26. Install the end cover (G), and tighten the 17 bolts.
27. Using the selector control shaft end on the torque converter housing side, turn the control shaft (A) fully clockwise
(view from end cover) to the P position. Turn the control shaft back two click-stopped positions so that it is in the N
position.
NOTE: Do not squeeze the end of the selector control shaft tips together when turning the shaft. If the control shaft
tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft
and the switch.
28. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch
(C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position.
NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position.
29. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position
with the 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) blade (C).
30. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold it in the N position. Do not move the
transmission range switch while tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge.
31. Install the harness clamp bracket (A) on the end cover (B).
32. Install the connector bracket (C) on the transmission housing.
33. Connect the transmission range switch connector (D) securely, then install the harness clamps (E) on the clamp
bracket.
34. Install the transmission range switch cover (F).
35. Install the new O-ring (A) on the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (B), then install the input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor.
36. Install the new O-ring (C) on the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (D), then install the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor.
37. Install the new gasket (B) on the transmission housing, and install the ATF pipe (C) and the ATF joint pipes (D).
38. Install the new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes, and install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A.
39. Install the new gasket (A) with the blue side facing the transmission housing and the white side facing the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve body.
40. Install the ATF pipe (D) and the ATF joint pipes (E), and install the new O-rings (F) over the ATF joint pipes.
41. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C.
42. Install the ATF outlet line (A) on the torque converter housing, and secure it with the line bolt (B) and new sealing
washers (C).
43. Secure the ATF outlet line with the bracket bolt.
44. Install the transmission hanger.
45. Install the breather hose clamp bracket, and install the clamp on the bracket.
46. Install the ATF filter bracket (A).

47. Install the ATF inlet line and hose (B) on the torque converter housing, and secure it with the line bolt (C) and new
sealing washers (D).
48. Put the ATF filter (E) on its bracket, and secure with the holder (F) and the bolt.
49. Secure the inlet line with the bolts (G) on the transmission.
Torque Converter Housing Lubrication Check Valve Replacement
1. Remove the sealing bolt (A) and sealing washer (B).
2. Remove the lubrication check valve (C) from the torque converter housing (D).
3. Install the lubrication check valve, new sealing washer, and the sealing bolt.
A/T End Cover Park Lever Stop Inspection and Adjustment
1. Set the park lever in the P position.
2. Measure the distance (A) between the park pawl shaft center (B) and the extension line (C) connected centers of
the park lever roller pin (D) and control shaft (E) in the vertical direction from the extension line.
Standard: 46.8−47.8 mm (1.84−1.88 in.)
3. If the measurement is out of standard, select and install the appropriate park lever stop (A) from the table.
PARK LEVER STOP

Mark Part Number A B
1 24537-PA9-003 11.00 mm (0.433 in.) 11.00 mm (0.433 in.)
2 24538-PA9-003 10.80 mm (0.425 in.) 10.65 mm (0.419 in.)
3 24539-PA9-003 10.60 mm (0.417 in.) 10.30 mm (0.406 in.)
4. After replacing the park lever stop, make sure the distance is within tolerance.
A/T End Cover Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement
1. Remove the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A).
2. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connector.
3. Install the new 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the metal
part of the switch.
4. Remove the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (C).
6. Install the new 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and a new sealing washer (D), and tighten the metal
part of the switch.
A/T Housing and Shaft Assembly Removal
Housing puller
07HAC-PK40102
1. Remove the Dipstick (A).
2. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (B), dowel pins (C), and gasket (D).
3. Disconnect the connectors from the shift solenoid valves, and remove the solenoid harness
connector (E).
4. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts (F) (19).
5. Align the spring pin (A) on the selector control shaft (B) with the transmission housing groove (C) by turning the
control shaft with the detent plate.
NOTE: Do not squeeze the end of the selector control shaft tips together when turning the control shaft.
6. Install the special tool over the mainshaft, then remove the transmission housing, dowel pins, and gasket.
NOTE: If the top arm of your housing puller is too short, replace it with housing puller arm, 205 mm 07SAC-
P0Z0101.
7. Remove the countershaft reverse gear and needle bearing.
8. Remove the lock bolt securing the shift fork, then remove the shift fork with the reverse selector together.
9. Remove the mainshaft subassembly (A), the countershaft subassembly (B), and the secondary shaft subassembly
(C) together.
If the reverse selector hub is removed by hand, remove the 4th-5th gear and needle bearings, and remove the
mainshaft subassembly, then the countershaft subassembly and secondary shaft subassembly together.
10. Remove the baffle plate.
11. Remove the differential assembly.
A/T Shaft Assembly and Housing Installation
1. Install the differential assembly in the torque converter housing.
2. Install the baffle plate.
3. Assemble the mainshaft, countershaft, and secondary shaft.
Countershaft reverse selector hub is press-fitted type, go to Step 4 .
Countershaft reverse selector hub is not press-fitted type, go to Step 5 .
4. Join the mainshaft subassembly (A), countershaft subassembly (B), and secondary shaft subassembly (C)
together, and install them in the torque converter housing.
5. Join the countershaft subassembly and secondary shaft subassembly together, then install them in the torque
converter housing, and install the mainshaft subassembly. Install the needle bearings, 4th-5th gear, and reverse
selector hub over the countershaft.
6. Turn the shift fork shaft (A) so the large chamfered hole (B) is facing the fork bolt hole (C) of the shift fork (D).
7. Install the shift fork and reverse selector together on the shift fork shaft and countershaft. Secure the shift fork to
the shift fork shaft with the lock bolt and a new lock washer (E), then bend the lock tab of the lock washer against
the bolt head.
8. Install the needle bearing and countershaft reverse gear on the countershaft.
9. Install the reverse idler gear in the transmission housing.
10. Install the three dowel pins (A) and a new gasket (B) on the torque converter housing (C).
11. Align the spring pin (D) of the control shaft (E) with the transmission housing groove (F) by turning the control shaft
detent plate. Do not squeeze the end of the control shaft tips together when turning the shaft. If the tips are
squeezed together, it will causes a faulty shift position signal or position due to the play between the control shaft
and the switch.
12. Place the transmission housing (G) on the torque converter housing. Do not install the input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor before installing the transmission housing on the torque
converter housing.
13. Wrap a screwdriver tip with tape to prevent damage to the reverse idler gear teeth. Engage the reverse idler gear
with reverse gears by rotating the idler gear using the screwdriver.
14. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts, and tighten the bolts to 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) in at least two
steps in a crisscross pattern.
15. Install the shift solenoid harness connector (E) in the transmission housing with the new O-ring (F).
16. Connect the WHT and ORN wires connector to shift solenoid valve B. The ATF temperature sensor is assembled in
the WHT wires connector.
17. Connect the harness terminals to the solenoids:
BLU wire connector to shift solenoid valve A.
GRN wire connector to shift solenoid valve C.
YEL wire connector to shift solenoid valve D.
18. Install the shift solenoid valve cover (A), two dowel pins (B), and a new gasket (C).
19. Install the ATF dipstick.
A/T System Description - Electronic Control System
Electronic Control System
Electronic Control System (cont'd)
A/T 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement
2. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector, and remove the 2nd clutch transmission
fluid pressure switch (A).
3. Install the new 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the metal
part of the switch.
4. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connectors.
5. Connect the connector securely.
A/T 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make
sure it is securely supported.
3. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector, then remove the 3rd clutch transmission
fluid pressure switch (A).
4. Install the new 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the metal
part of the switch.
6. Connect the connector securely.
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test
2. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.
NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
3. Test A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS.
If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS.
If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS.
If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to Step 4 .
5. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector.

6. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A resistance at the connector terminals.
Standard: 3−10 Ω
If the resistance is out of standard, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A.
If the resistance is within the standard, go to Step 7 .
7. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2, and
connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1.
If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts.
If no clicking sound is heard, go to Step 8 .
8. Remove the bolt (A) securing the harness cover.

9. Remove the bolt (B) securing the ATF cooler line/hose bracket.
10. Remove the transmission hanger/air cleaner housing bracket (C).
11. Remove the mounting bolts and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A.
12. Remove the ATF pipe (B), ATF joint pipes (C), O-rings (D), and gasket (E).
13. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination.
14. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector
terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1.
Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A moves.
15. Disconnect one of the jumper wires, and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting
surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A.
16. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body and transmission housing.
17. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side up on the transmission housing.
18. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes.
19. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A.
20. Install the transmission hanger/air cleaner housing bracket, and secure the ATF cooler line/hose bracket and
harness cover with the bolts.
21. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connector securely.
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test
2. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.
3. Test A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS.
5. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector.

6. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B resistance at the connector terminals.
If the resistance is out of standard, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B.
7. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2, and
8. Remove the breather hose (A) from its clamp (B), and remove the breather hose clamp bracket (C).
9. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C.

10. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F).
12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector
Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B moves.
control solenoid valve B and C.
18. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connectors securely.
19. Install the breather hose clamp bracket, and install the breather hose on its clamp at the dot.
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test
2. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid valve C in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.
3. Test A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS.
5. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector.

6. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C resistance at the connector terminals.
If the resistance is out of standard, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C.
7. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and

10. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F).
12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector
Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves.
control solenoid valve B and C.
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement
2. Remove the bolt (A) securing the harness cover.
3. Remove the bolt (B) securing the ATF cooler line/hose bracket.
4. Remove the transmission hanger/air cleaner housing bracket (C).
5. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve connector (A).

6. Remove the mounting bolts and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (B).
7. Remove the ATF pipe (C), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F).
8. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the transmission housing.
11. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A.
12. Install the transmission hanger/air cleaner housing bracket, and secure the ATF cooler line/hose bracket and
harness cover with the bolts.
13. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connector securely.
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B and C Replacement
3. Disconnect the connectors (A) from A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C.
5. Remove the ATF pipe (D), ATF joint pipes (E), O-rings (F), and gasket (G).
6. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the transmission housing.
ATF Temperature Sensor Test/Replacement
3. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector.
4. Measure the ATF temperature sensor resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminals No. 6 and No.
7.
Standard: 50 Ω−25 kΩ
5. If the resistance is out of standard, replace the ATF temperature sensor and the solenoid harness; go to Step 6 .
The ATF temperature sensor is not available separately from the shift solenoid harness. If the resistance is within
the standard, connect the connector securely, and install the splash shield.
8. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), and gasket (C).
9. Disconnect the connectors, remove the shift solenoid harness connector (E), and replace it.
10. Install the new O-ring (F) on the new shift solenoid harness connector, and install the connector in the transmission
housing.
11. Connect the WHT and ORN wires connector to shift solenoid valve B. The ATF temperature sensor is assembled in
the WHT wires connector.
13. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, and a new gasket.
14. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect it securely.
15. Refill the transmission with ATF.
A/T Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement
2. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector, and remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor (A).
3. Install the new O-ring (B) on the new input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then install the input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor.
4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely.
A/T Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement
2. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector, and remove the output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor (A).
3. Install the new O-ring (B) on the new output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, then install the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor.
A/T Shift Solenoid Valve Test
2. Select Shift Solenoid A, B, C, and D Test in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.
3. Check that the shift solenoid valve A, B, C, and D operate with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard.
If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK. The test is complete, disconnect the HDS.
If no clicking sound is heard, go to Step 4 , and test the solenoid valve.

7. Measure shift solenoid valve resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminals below and body
ground:
No. 1: Shift solenoid valve C
No. 2: Shift solenoid valve B
No. 5: Shift solenoid valve A
No. 8: Shift solenoid valve D
If the resistance is within the standard, go to Step 8 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound.
If the resistance is out of standard, go to Step 9 .
8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the body ground, and connect another jumper wire from
the positive battery terminal to each shift solenoid harness connector terminal individually. A clicking sound should
be heard.
If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK. The test is complete, connect the connector.
If no clicking sound is heard, go to Step 9 and test shift solenoid valves.
11. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), and gasket (C).
12. Disconnect the connectors from shift solenoid valve A, shift solenoid valve B, shift solenoid valve C, and shift
solenoid valve D.
13. Measure the resistance of each solenoid valve between the connector terminal and body ground.
If the resistance is out of standard, go to Step 16 and replace shift solenoid valve.
If the resistance is within the standard, go to Step 14 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound.
14. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the body ground, and connect another jumper wire from
the positive battery terminal to each solenoid valve terminal individually.
If a clicking sound is heard, go to Step 15 and replace the shift solenoid harness.
If no clicking sound is heard, go to Step 16 and replace shift solenoid valve.
15. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A), and replace it. Install the new O-ring (B) on the shift solenoid
harness connector, and install the connector in the transmission housing, then go to Step 21 .
16. Remove the mounting bolts, then hold the solenoid valve body and remove the solenoid valves. Do not hold the
connector to remove the solenoid valve.
17. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve) (E) on the reused solenoid valve.
NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new O-rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the O-rings provided
on it.
18. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) and shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by holding the shift
solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body.
NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve connector to install the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold the solenoid valve
body.
19. Install shift solenoid valve B (black connector) by holding the solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket
contacts the servo body.
20. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting
bracket contacts the bracket of shift solenoid valve B.
NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve A before installing shift solenoid valve B. If shift solenoid valve A is installed
before installing shift solenoid valve B, it may damage to hydraulic control system.
ORN wire connector to shift solenoid valve B.
A/T Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement, and Shift Solenoid Harness Replacement
5. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector (A).

6. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (B), dowel pins (C), and gasket (D).
7. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve connectors.

If replacing shift solenoid valve(s), go to Step 8 .
If replacing the shift solenoid harness, remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A), and replace it. Install
the new O-ring (B) on the new shift solenoid harness connector, and install it in the transmission housing,
then go to Step 13 .
8. Remove the mounting bolts, then hold the solenoid valve body and remove the solenoid valves. Do not hold the
connector to remove the solenoid valve.
9. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve) (E) on the reused solenoid valve.
on it.
10. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) and shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by holding the shift
solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body.
NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve connector to install the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold the solenoid valve
body.
11. Install shift solenoid valve B (black connector) by holding the solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket
contacts the servo body.
12. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting
bracket contacts the bracket of shift solenoid valve B.
before installing shift solenoid valve B, it may damage to hydraulic control system.
ORN wire connector to shift solenoid valve B.
15. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector
A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index
A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
Gauge
A/T GEARControl Module
POSITION Self-diagnostic Function
INDICATOR
Indicator Drive Circuit
Gauge Control ModuleCheck,
Self-diagnostic Function POWERTRAIN
Indicator Drive Circuit Check, CONTROL
POWERTRAIN
MODULE
CONTROL(PCM)
MODULE (PCM)
PADDLE SHIFTER +
(UPSHIFT SWITCH)
Circuit Troubleshooting,
TRANSMISSION RANGE
Replacement,
SWITCH
Test,
Replacement,
Test,
Replacement,
PADDLE SHIFTER − (DOWNSHIFT SWITCH)

*: This illustration shows RHD model. Circuit Troubleshooting,
Replacement,

A/T Gear Position Indicator Circuit Diagram
BATTE RY TE RMINAL FUS E BOX UNDE R−DAS H FUS E /RE LAY BOX
BATTE RY
No. 1 (100 A) No. 39 (15 A)
No. 60 (50 A)
BATTE RY TE RMINAL FUS E BOX UNDE R−DAS H FUS E /RE LAY BOX
MULTI−FUS E
BATTE RY BLOCK P GM−FI
No. 1 (100 A) No. 39 (15 A) MAIN RE LAY 1
No. 7 (10 A)
BAT IG1
No. 20 (15 A)
No. 60 (50 A)
IGNITION S W ITCH MULTI−FUS E

No. 22 (7.5 A) BLOCK P GM−FI
MAIN RE LAY 1
BAT IG1 No. 29 (10 A)No. 7 (10 A)
No. 20 (15 A)
MULTIP LE X INTE GRATE D
IGINITION S W ITCH CONTROL UNITNo.(MICU)
22 (7.5 A)
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE No. 29 (10 A)
32
MULTIP LE X INTE GRATE D

P CONTROL UNIT (MICU)
A/T GE AR R
A/T
P OS ITION DIMMING 32
LT BLU
LT BLU
INDICATOR CIRCUIT
DRIV E R N
CIRCUIT P
P OW E RTRAIN CONTROL To 12 V
D MODULE (P CM)
R
To 5 V IG1 C10
S BLK/RE D RE D
A/T GE AR N A/T
P OS ITION DIMMING
CAN INDICATOR
D
CIRCUIT To 12 VV B S OL A1
BRN
CONTROLLE R DRIV E R
CIRCUIT
S E QUE NTIAL P OW E RTRAIN CONTROL
A3 CANMODULE
H IG1 C10
S HIFT MODE D3
(P CM) MRLY A7 BLK/RE D RE D
S HIFT INDICATOR BLU
CIRCUIT V B S OL A1
CAN
CONTROLLE R 2 W HT BRN
IGP A9
30 MRLY A7 LT GRN
1 BLU
F−CAN A4 CAN L
TRANS CE IV E R ATP RV
IGPS B23
A9
29 W HT LTYGRN
EL
RE D ATP FW D B29
30 BLU/Y E L
RE D W HT ATP RV S B23
ATP 2−1 B17 YBLU
EL
F−CAN ATP FWD3
D B29
TRANS CE IV E R RE D ATP B16 BLU/Y E L
RE D
29 ATP
ATP S
D B16
B22
RE D
P NK S TARTE R
SG 13RE D W HT ATP
ATP DN B22
B13 CUT RE LAY
REPD/BLK
NK
S TARTE R
A3 CAN H ATP
PG 17 ATP NR B13
B15 CUT RE LAY
RE D/BLK
To 5 V ATP
A4 CAN L ATP RP B15
B14
BLK BLK
ATP P B14
SG 13 BLU/BLK W HT LT GRN
2 BLU/BLK
5 W
4 HT 9 3 8 2 6 LT
10GRN 7 1 BLK
PG 17
A/T GE AR RE D/BLK GRY
P OS ITION 5 4 9 3 8 6 10 7 1 BLK
INDICATOR BLK BLK
P ANE L LIGHT G501 BLK/BLU RE D/BLK BLU Y E L/RE D BLU/W HT
6
RE D/BLK BLK BLK/BLU W HT RE D/BLK P NK BLU BRN W HT/RE DW HT/RE D BLK BLK
G101
6 7 2 8 3 9 5 1 4 10
W HT P NK Y E L/RE D BLU/W HT G101
2
A/T GE AR RE D/BLK GRY
6 7 2 8 3 5 1 FW 4D RV10S ST E
P OS ITION N D
INDICATOR DATA LINK G502 G501 A32 S CS
P ANE L LIGHT CONNE CTOR YEL YEL R N D D3 FW D RV S ST E
6
(DLC) RE D/BLK BLK
P R S 2
B10 P G1
BLK P 1
P ADDLE S HIFTE R +
(UP S HIFT S W ITCH) CABLE RE E L G502
B1 P G2
1 BRN A47 S UP P
GRN/ORN YEL YEL
RIGHT C44 LG1 TRANS MIS S ION RANGE S W ITCH

S UP BRN/Y E L
2 S CS A32 TRANS MIS S ION RANGE S W ITCH DATA LINK
LT GRN C48 LG2 YEL YEL CONNE CTOR
BRN/Y E L (DLC)
P G1 B10
P ADDLE S HIFTE R − BLK
(DOW NS HIFT S W ITCH)
P G2 B1
1 A48 S DN P Harness Connector Terminal Locations BRN
G101 P CM
BLK/W HT LT BLU LT BLU LG1 C44
BRN/Y E L
LE FT LG2 C48
S DN BRN/Y E L
1 3 4 6 7 9 10 1 3 4 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
LT GRN 15 16 18 19 20 21 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21
BLK
22 24 25 26 28 G501 P CM22Harness
23 24 Connector Terminal26Locations
27 28
G101
29 30 32 34 35 36 37 38 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 38 29 30 31 32
42 44 46 40 45 46 47 48 43 44 46 48
1 3 4 6 7 9 10 1 3 4 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A (49P ) 15 16 18 19 20 21 B (49P ) 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 21 C (49P ) 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21
22 24 25 26 28 22 23 24
Terminal 26 27 28
side of female terminals
29 30 32 34 35 36 37 38 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 38 29 30 31 32
42 44 46 47 48 40 45 46 47 48 43 44 46 48
A (49P ) B (49P ) C (49P )

Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch) Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Check for continuity between steering switch harness 20P connector terminals No. 8 and No. 12 while pressing the
paddle shifter − (downshift switch) and when the paddle shifter − is released.
Is there continuity while pressing the paddle shifter − and no continuity when the paddle shifter − is released?
NO - Go to Step 3 .
3. Disconnect the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) connector.
4. Check for continuity between paddle shifter − (downshift switch) connector terminals while pressing the paddle
shifter − and when the paddle shifter − is released.
Is there continuity while pressing the paddle shifter − and no continuity when the paddle shifter − is released?
YES - Replace the steering switch harness.■
NO - Replace the paddle shifter −. ■
5. Remove the cable reel.
6. Check for continuity between cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 2 and ground (G501), or repair
poor ground (G501).■
YES - Repair short in the wire between cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 5 and PCM connector terminal
A48.■
10. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A48 and cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 5.
YES - Replace the cable reel. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal A48 and the cable reel 20P connector.■
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch) Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Check for continuity between steering switch harness 20P connector terminals No. 7 and No. 12 while pressing the
paddle shifter + (upshift switch) and when the paddle shifter + is released.
Is there continuity while pressing the paddle shifter + and no continuity when the paddle shifter + is released?
NO - Go to Step 3 .
3. Disconnect the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) connector.
4. Check for continuity between paddle shifter + (upshift switch) connector terminals while pressing the paddle shifter
+ and when the paddle shifter + is released.
Is there continuity while pressing the paddle shifter + and no continuity when the paddle shifter + is released?
NO - Replace the paddle shifter +. ■
YES - Repair short in the wire between cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 6 and PCM connector terminal
A47.■
10. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A47 and cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 6.
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal A47 and the cable reel 20P connector.■
Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch) Replacement
2. Remove the four screws (A) securing the steering wheel rear cover (B), then remove the steering wheel rear cover.
3. Remove the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) connector (A) from its holder, and disconnect the connector.
4. Remove the screws (B) securing the paddle shifter − (C), remove the paddle shifter −, and replace it with a new
one.
5. Install the new paddle shifter − on the steering wheel, and secure it with the screws.
6. Connect the paddle shifter − connector securely, and install the connector in the connector holder.
7. Install the steering wheel rear cover, and secure the rear cover with the four screws.
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch) Replacement
3. Remove the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) connector (A) from its holder, and disconnect the connector.
4. Remove the screws (B) securing the paddle shifter + (C), remove the paddle shifter +, and replace it with a new
one.
5. Install the new paddle shifter + on the steering wheel, and secure it with the screws.
6. Connect the paddle shifter + connector securely, and install the connector in the connector holder.
Transmission Range Switch Test
2. Disconnect the transmission range switch harness connector (A).
3. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals Transmission Range
in the following table for each switch position. Switch Harness
4. Transmission range switch test has finished if the test results are OK. Connector Seven-
If there is no continuity between any terminals, go to Step 5 . position Transmission
Transmission Range
Switch Harness
Connector Five-
position Transmission
6. Remove the transmission range switch cover.
7. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector.
8. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between the terminals Transmission Range
in the following table for each switch position. Switch Connector
Seven-position
Transmission
Transmission Range
Switch Connector
Five-position
Transmission
9. If the transmission range switch continuity check is OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness;
remove the harness clamps (A) from the clamp bracket (B), remove the transmission range switch harness (C).
10. If there is no continuity between any terminals, remove the transmission range switch, and check the end of the
selector control shaft (A).
Selector Control Shaft Specifications:
Width (B): 6.1−6.2 mm (0.240−0.244 in.)
End Gap (C): 1.8−2.0 mm (0.07−0.08 in.)
11. The measurement of the selector control shaft end is within the standard, replace the transmission range switch. If
the measurement is out of the standard, repair the selector control shaft end, and recheck the transmission range
switch continuity.
Transmission Range Switch Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make
2. Shift to N.
3. Remove the transmission range switch cover.
4. Remove the transmission range switch.

5. Make sure the shift position is in N. If necessary, put the shift lever into N.
NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the control shaft tips are squeezed
together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and switch.
6. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch
(C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position.
NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position.
7. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position
with the 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) blade (C).
8. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the
transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge.
9. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connector securely.
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range
switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator.
11. Check that the engine starts in P and N, and does not start in any other shift lever position.
12. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in R.
13. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation.
14. Install the transmission range switch cover.

A/T System Description - Hydraulic Controls
Hydraulic Controls
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)
A/T System Description - Hydraulic Flow
Hydraulic Flow
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
A/T Pressure Test
A/T oil pressure gauge set
07406-0020005
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the proper level.
3. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely.
6. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the line pressure inspection port (A). Do not allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the hole while connecting the gauge.
7. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
8. Measure the line pressure at the line pressure inspection port in P or N while holding the engine speed at 2,000
rpm (min −1 ).
NOTE: Higher pressure may be indicated if measurements are made in the shift lever position other than P or N.
Pressure Fluid Pressure
Standard Service Limit
Line (A) 900−960 kPa (9.2−9.8 kgf/cm 2 , 850 kPa (8.7 kgf/cm 2 , 120 psi)
130−140 psi)
9. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the oil pressure gauge from the line pressure inspection port.
10. Install the sealing bolt to the line pressure inspection port with a new sealing washer, and tighten the bolt to 18 N·m
(1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft). Do not reuse the old sealing washer.
12. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 1st clutch pressure inspection port (B), then temporarily install the air
cleaner assembly.
13. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 2nd clutch pressure inspection port (C).
14. For seven-position transmission: Measure the 1st and 2nd clutch pressure.
-1. Start the engine, and shift to 1.
-2. Measure the 1st clutch pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection port while holding the engine speed at
2,000 rpm (min −1 ).
-3. Shift to 2, and measure the 2nd clutch pressure at the 2nd clutch pressure inspection port while holding the
engine speed at 2,000 rpm (min −1 ).
15. For five-position transmission: Measure the 1st and 2nd clutch pressure.
-1. Start the engine, and shift to S.
-2. Pull the paddle shifter + (upshift switch), make sure the transmission is in 1st gear, and measure the 1st
clutch pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection port while holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (min
−1 ).
-3. Upshift to 2nd gear by pulling the paddle shifter +, and measure the 2nd clutch pressure at the 2nd clutch
pressure inspection port while holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (min −1 ).
1st clutch (B) 890−970 kPa (9.1−9.9 kgf/cm 2 , 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 , 120
2nd clutch (C) 130−140 psi) psi)
16. Turn the engine off, remove the air cleaner assembly, then disconnect the oil pressure gauges from the 1st clutch
pressure and 2nd clutch pressure inspection ports.
17. Install the sealing bolts to the 1st clutch pressure and 2nd clutch pressure inspection ports with the new sealing
washers, and tighten the bolts to 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft). Do not reuse old sealing washer.
19. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 3rd clutch pressure inspection port (D) and the 4th clutch pressure
inspection port (E).
20. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 5th clutch pressure inspection port (F).
21. For seven-position transmission: Measure the 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch pressures.
-1. Start the engine, and shift to D3, then press the accelerator pedal slowly until reaching 3rd gear.
-2. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure at the 3rd clutch pressure inspection port while holding the engine speed at
2,000 rpm (min −1 ).
-3. Shift to D, and measure the 4th clutch pressure at the 4th clutch pressure inspection port.
-4. Measure the 5th clutch pressure at the 5th clutch pressure inspection port while holding the engine speed at
2,000 rpm (min −1 ).
22. For five-position transmission: Measure the 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch pressures.
-1. Start the engine, and shift to S.
-2. Upshift to 3rd gear by pulling the paddle shifter +, and measure the 3rd clutch pressure at the 3rd clutch
-3. Upshift to 4th gear by pulling the paddle shifter +, and measure the 4th clutch pressure at the 4th clutch
-4. Upshift to 5th gear by pulling the paddle shifter +, and measure the 5th clutch pressure at the 5th clutch
3rd clutch (D) 890−970 kPa (9.1−9.9 kgf/cm 2 , 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 , 120
4th clutch (E) 130−140 psi) psi)
5th clutch (F)
23. Bring the engine back to an idle, then press the brake pedal to stop the wheels from rotating.
24. Shift to R, then release the brake pedal. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm (min −1 ), and measure the 5th clutch
pressure at the 5th clutch pressure inspection port.
5th clutch (F) in R 890−970 kPa (9.1−9.9 kgf/cm 2 , 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 , 120 psi)
130−140 psi)
25. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the oil pressure gauges from the 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch pressure inspection
ports.
26. Install the sealing bolts in the 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch pressure inspection ports with the new sealing washers, and
tighten the bolts to 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft). Do not reuse the old sealing washer.
27. If any of the pressures are out of the service limit, refer to the problems and probable causes listed in the table.
Problem Probable causes
No or low line pressure Torque converter
ATF pump
Regulator valve
Torque converter check valve
Clogged ATF strainer
No or low 1st clutch pressure 1st clutch
O-rings
No or low 2nd clutch pressure 2nd clutch
O-rings
No or low 3rd clutch pressure 3rd clutch
O-rings
No or low 4th clutch pressure 4th clutch
O-rings
No or low 5th clutch pressure 5th clutch
O-rings
No or low 5th clutch pressure in R Servo valve
5th clutch
O-rings

29. Retrieve an ABS DTC with the HDS. If there is an ABS DTC, clear the DTC with the HDS.
NOTE: When rotating the front wheels off the ground by the engine, it may cause an ABS system problem.
A/T Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for galling and rough movement.
2. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
3. Check the shaft bearing surface for scoring and excessive wear.
4. Lubricate all parts with ATF during assembly.
5. Install the conical spring washer, the park gear, the reverse selector, the 33 x 45 x 7.8 mm
collar, and the gears in the direction shown.
6. Replace the locknut and the conical spring washer with new ones when assembling the
transmission. The countershaft locknut has left-hand threads.
7. Some reverse selector hubs are press-fitted to the countershaft; remove the hubs with a press,
and install them with the special tool and a press.
Torque Converter Housing Countershaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
Adjustable bearing remover set
07JAC-PH80000

07749-0010000
Oil seal driver attachment, 58 mm
07JAD-PH80101
1. Remove the countershaft bearing with the special tool.
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A).

3. Install the new countershaft bearing (B) in the housing with the special tools; install the bearing outer race surface
in height (C) of 0−0.03 mm (0−0.001 in.) above the housing surface (D). Do not install the bearing exceeding 0.03
mm (0.001 in.) high from housing surface.
A/T Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub Removal
1. Remove the reverse selector hub from the countershaft by hand. If the reverse selector hub (A) cannot be removed
by hand, it is press-fitted to the countershaft (B), and removed from the countershaft with a press. Place the 4th-5th
gear (C) on press bases (D), and place a shaft protector (E) between the countershaft and press to prevent
damaging the countershaft.
NOTE: Some reverse selector hubs are not press-fitted, and can be removed without using a press.
2. Press the countershaft out of the press-fitted reverse selector hub, and remove the countershaft while holding the
underside the countershaft. The countershaft falls down when pressing the countershaft out of the press-fitted
reverse selector hub.
3. Remove the remaining parts from the countershaft, if necessary.
A/T Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub Installation
Driver, 40 mm I.D.
07746-0030100
1. Install the 1st gear, the 2nd gear, the 3rd gear, the 33.2 x 40 x 26 mm collar, the 29 mm cotters, and the 33 x 45 x
7.8 mm collar on the countershaft, and secure them with the snap ring.
2. Install the needle bearings and the 4th-5th gear.
3. Slide the reverse selector hub (A) over the countershaft (B), then press it in place using the driver (40 mm I.D.) and
a press.
NOTE: Some reverse selector hubs are not press-fitted, and can be installed without using the a press.
A/T System Description - Power Flow
Power Flow
Power Flow (cont'd)
Power Flow (cont'd)
Power Flow (cont'd)
A/T Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
4. Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent O-ring damage.
6. Install the conical spring washer, the 40 x 63 mm thrust washer in the direction shown.
7. Replace the locknut and the conical spring washer with new ones when assembling the
transmission.
8. Check the axial clearance of the 3rd gear.
A/T Clutch Clearance Inspection
Clutch compressor attachment
07ZAE-PRP0100
1. Inspect the clutch piston, the discs, the plates, and the end-plate for wear and damage, and inspect the clutch
wave-plate phase difference, if necessary.
2. Install the clutch piston in the clutch drum. Do not install the O-rings on the clutch piston during inspection.
3. Install the wave spring (A) in the 1st clutch drum (B). Starting with the clutch wave-plate, alternately install the
wave-plates (C) (6) and discs (D) (6). Install the clutch end-plate (E) with the flat side down on the top disc.
4. Install the wave spring (A) in the 2nd clutch drum (B). Starting with the clutch flat-plate, alternately install the flat-
plates (C) (3) and the discs (D) (3). Install the clutch end-plate (E) with the flat side down on the top disc.
5. Install the wave spring (A) in the 4th clutch drum (B). Starting with the clutch flat-plate, alternately install the flat-
6. Install the wave spring (A) in the 3rd clutch drum (B). Starting with the clutch wave-plate, alternately install the
wave-plates (C) (3) and the discs (D) (3). Install the clutch end-plate (E) with the flat side down on the top disc.
7. Install the wave spring (A) in the 5th clutch drum (B). Starting with the clutch wave-plate, alternately install the
8. Install the snap ring with a screwdriver to secure the clutch end-plate.
9. Set a dial indicator (A) on the clutch end-plate (B).

10. Zero the dial indicator with the clutch end-plate lifted up to the snap ring (C).
11. Release the clutch end-plate to lower it, then put the clutch compressor attachment on the end-plate (A).
12. For the 1st, 3rd, and 5th clutches:
Press the clutch compressor attachment down with 150−160 N (15−16 kgf, 33−35 lbf) (B) using a force gauge, and
read the dial indicator (C). The dial indicator reads the clearance (D) between the clutch end-plate and top disc (E).
Take measurements in at least three places, and use the average as the actual clearance.
13. For 2nd and 4th clutches:
Press the clutch compressor attachment down with 39 N (4 kgf, 9 lbf) (B) using a force gauge, and read the dial
indicator (C). The dial indicator reads the clearance (D) between the clutch end-plate and top disc (E). Take
measurements in at least three places, and use the average as the actual clearance.
Clearance between Clutch End-Plate and Top Disc
Service Limit
1st clutch: 1.62−1.82 mm (0.064−0.072 in.)
2nd clutch: 0.5−0.7 mm (0.020−0.028 in.)
3rd clutch: 0.73−0.93 mm (0.029−0.037 in.)
4th clutch: 0.7−0.9 mm (0.028−0.035 in.)
5th clutch: 0.73−0.93 mm (0.029−0.037 in.)
14. If the clearance of the 1st, 3rd, or 5th clutch is out of the service limit, select a new clutch end-plate from the
following table.
1ST CLUTCH END-PLATES

Mark Part Number Thickness
1 22551-RPC-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22552-RPC-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22553-RPC-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22554-RPC-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22555-RPC-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22556-RPC-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22557-RPC-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22558-RPC-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22559-RPC-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
3RD and 5TH CLUTCH END-PLATES

1 22561-RPC-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22562-RPC-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22563-RPC-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22564-RPC-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22565-RPC-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22566-RPC-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22567-RPC-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22568-RPC-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22569-RPC-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
15. If the clearance of the 2nd or 4th clutch is out of the service limit, remove the clutch end-plate and check the clutch
end-plate mark. Select a new clutch end-plate from the following tables by the mark on the old clutch end-plate.
Use the AC-AL Plates table when the old clutch end-plate is marked with between AC and AL. Use the AM-AV
Plates table when the old clutch end-plate is marked with between AM and AV.
2ND and 4TH CLUTCH END-PLATES AC-AL Plates

AC 22551-RPC-004 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
AD 22552-RPC-004 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
AE 22553-RPC-004 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
AF 22554-RPC-004 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
AG 22555-RPC-004 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
AH 22556-RPC-004 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
AJ 22557-RPC-004 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
AK 22558-RPC-004 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
AL 22559-RPC-004 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
AM-AV Plates
AM 22561-RPC-004 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
AN 22562-RPC-004 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
AP 22563-RPC-004 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
AQ 22564-RPC-004 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
AR 22565-RPC-004 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
AS 22566-RPC-004 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
AT 22567-RPC-004 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
AU 22568-RPC-004 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
AV 22569-RPC-004 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
16. Install the new clutch end-plate and recheck the clearance. If the thickest clutch end-plate is installed but the
clearance is still over the service limit, replace the clutch discs and plates.
A/T Clutch Wave-plate Phase Difference Inspection
1. Place the clutch wave-plate (A) on a surface plate, and set a dial indicator (B) on the wave-plate.
2. Find the bottom (C) of a phase difference of the wave-plate, zero the dial indicator, and make a reference mark on
the bottom of the wave-plate.
3. Rotate the 1st clutch wave-plate 5 or 6 tooth of angles apart from the bottom while holding the wave-plate by its
circumference, and rotate the 3rd and 5th clutch wave-plate about 60-degrees apart from the bottom while holding
the wave-plate by its circumference. The dial indicator should be at the top (D) of a phase difference. Do not rotate
the wave-plate while holding its surface, always rotate it by holding its circumference.
4. Read the dial indicator. The dial indicator reads the phase difference (E) of the wave-plate between the bottom and
top.
Standard: 0.07−0.20 mm (0.003−0.008 in.)
5. Rotate the 1st clutch wave-plate 5 or 6 tooth of angles from the top, and rotate the 3rd and 5th clutch wave-plate
about 60-degrees. The dial indicator should be at the bottom of a phase difference (F and G). Zero the dial indicator.
6. Measure the phase difference at the other two tops (H and I) of the wave-plate by following Step 3 thru 5.
7. If two of the three measurements are within the standard, the wave-plate is OK. If two of the three measurements
are out of the standard, replace the wave-plate.
A/T Mainshaft 3rd Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the mainshaft transmission housing bearing.
2. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), the 3rd gear (B), the needle bearing (C), the thrust needle bearing (D), the 40 x
63 mm thrust washer (E), the 3rd/5th clutch (F), the 5th gear collar (G), and the transmission housing bearing (H)
on the mainshaft (I). Do not install the O-rings during inspection.
3. Install the idler gear (J) on the mainshaft by a press, then install the conical spring washer (K) and the locknut (L).
4. Tighten the locknut to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft).
5. Set the dial indicator (A) on the 3rd gear (B).
6. Lift 3rd gear (A) up while holding the mainshaft, and use the dial indicator (B) to read the 3rd gear axial clearance.
7. Measure the 3rd gear axial clearance in at least three places while moving 3rd gear. Use the average as the actual
clearance.
Standard: 0.04−0.10 mm (0.002−0.004 in.)
8. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the 40 x 63 mm thrust washer and measure its thickness (A).
9. Select and install a new thrust washer, then recheck.
THRUST WASHER, 40 x 63 mm
No. Part Number Thickness
1 90414-RPC-000 3.750 mm (0.1476 in.)
2 90415-RPC-000 3.775 mm (0.1486 in.)
3 90416-RPC-000 3.800 mm (0.1496 in.)
4 90417-RPC-000 3.825 mm (0.1506 in.)
5 90418-RPC-000 3.850 mm (0.1516 in.)
6 90419-RPC-000 3.875 mm (0.1526 in.)
7 90420-RPC-000 3.900 mm (0.1535 in.)
8 90421-RPC-000 3.925 mm (0.1545 in.)
9 90422-RPC-000 3.950 mm (0.1555 in.)
10 90423-RPC-000 3.975 mm (0.1565 in.)
11 90424-RPC-000 4.000 mm (0.1575 in.)
10. After replacing the thrust washer, make sure the clearance is within standard.
11. Disassemble the installed parts from the mainshaft.
12. Reinstall the bearing in the transmission housing.
A/T Housing Bearing Removal
07746-0010600
07NAD-PX40100
07746-0010500

07749-0010000
Snap ring pliers

07LGC-0010100
1. Remove the snap ring (A), cotter retainer (B), and cotters (C) from the idler gear shaft (D), then remove the idler
gear shaft. Do not distort the snap ring.
NOTE: If you are not removing the idler gear shaft bearing, idler gear shaft removal is not needed.
2. To remove the mainshaft bearing (A), countershaft bearing (B), secondary shaft bearing (C), and idler gear shaft
bearing (D) from the transmission housing, expand each snap ring with the snap ring pliers, then push the bearing
out.
NOTE: Do not remove the snap ring unless it's necessary to clean the grooves in the housing.
A/T Housing Bearing Installation
07746-0010600
07NAD-PX40100
07746-0010500

07749-0010000
Snap ring pliers

07LGC-0010100
1. Install the mainshaft bearing (A), countershaft bearing (B), secondary shaft bearing (C), and idler gear shaft bearing
(D) in the transmission housing in the direction shown.
2. Expand each snap ring with the snap ring pliers, and install the bearing part-way into the housing.
3. Release the pliers, then push the bearing down into the housing until the snap ring snaps in place around it.
4. After installing the bearings verify that the snap rings (A) are seated in the bearing and housing grooves, and that
the ring end gaps (B) are 0−7 mm (0−0.28 in.)
5. Install the idler gear shaft (A) in the idler gear shaft bearing.
6. Install the cotters (B) and cotter retainer (C), and secure the idler gear shaft with the snap ring (D).
Torque Converter Housing Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
07JAC-PH80000

07749-0010000
07746-0010500
07746-0010600
1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and oil seal with the special tool.
2. Install the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in the torque converter housing with the special tools.
3. Install the new oil seal flush with the housing with the special tools.
A/T Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
4. Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent O-ring damage.
6. Install the conical spring washer, idler gear, and 31 x 50 mm thrust washer in the direction
shown.
7. Replace the locknut and conical spring washer with new ones when assembling the
transmission. The locknut has left-hand threads.
8. Check the axial clearance of the 1st gear and 2nd gear.
9. Inspect the condition of the sealing rings. If the sealing rings are worn, distorted, or damaged,
replace them.
A/T System Description - Clutches and Gears
Clutches and Gears
Clutches and Gears (cont'd)
A/T Clutch Disassembly
Clutch spring compressor set
07LAE-PX40000
Clutch spring compressor attachment

07LAE-PX40100
07HAE-PL50100
Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly

07GAE-PG40200
Snap ring pliers

07LGC-0010100
1. Remove the snap ring with a screwdriver.
2. Remove the clutch end-plate (A), the clutch discs (B) (6), the clutch wave-plates (C) (6), and the wave spring (D)
from the 1st clutch drum (E).
3. Remove the clutch end-plate (A), the clutch discs (B) (3), the clutch flat-plates (C) (3), and the wave spring (D) from
the 2nd clutch drum (E).
4. Remove the clutch end-plate (A), the clutch discs (B) (4), the clutch flat-plates (C) (4), and the wave spring (D) from
the 4th clutch drum (E).
from the 3rd clutch drum (E).
from the 5th clutch drum (E).
7. Install the clutch spring compressor attachments and the clutch spring compressor bolt assembly.
8. Set the clutch spring compressor attachment (A) on the 1st clutch spring retainer (B) so the clutch spring
compressor attachment works on the clutch return spring (C).
9. If either end of the clutch spring compressor attachment is not set over the clutch return spring end, the spring
retainer may be tilted and damaged. If the retainer is tilted when compressing the return spring, reset the clutch
spring compressor attachment on the retainer at another angle.
10. Be sure the clutch spring compressor attachment (A) is adjusted to have full contact with the spring retainer (B) on
the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutches.
11. If either end of the clutch spring compressor attachment is set over an area of the spring retainer that is
unsupported by the return spring, reset the clutch spring compressor attachment over the proper position.
12. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can be removed.
13. Remove the snap ring with snap ring pliers.

14. Remove the clutch spring compressor attachments and the clutch spring compressor bolt assembly.
15. Remove the snap ring (A), the spring retainer (B), and the return spring (C).
16. Wrap a shop rag around the clutch drum, and apply air pressure to the fluid passage to remove the piston. Place a
finger tip on the other passage while applying air pressure.
17. Remove the clutch piston (A) from the clutch drum (B) of the 1st, 2nd, and 4th clutches. Remove the O-ring (C)
from the clutch piston, and O-ring (D) from the drum.
18. Remove the clutch piston (A) from the clutch drum of the 3rd and 5th clutches, and remove the outer O-ring (B) and
inner O-ring (C) from the piston.
A/T 1st Clutch Reassembly
07LAE-PX40000

07LAE-PX40100
07HAE-PL50100

07GAE-PG40200
Snap ring pliers

07LGC-0010100
NOTE: Coat all parts with ATF during reassembly.
1. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a minimum of 30 minutes.
2. Install the new O-ring (A) on the clutch piston (B), and install the O-ring (C) on the clutch drum (D).
3. Coat the piston O-ring with ATF, and install the clutch piston (A) in the clutch drum (B) while applying pressure and
rotating to ensure proper seating. Do not pinch the O-ring.
4. Install the return spring (A), and install the spring retainer (B) can be adjusted (center of tolerance) to prevent
damaging the retainer oil seal.
5. Position the snap ring (C) on the spring retainer.
7. Set the clutch spring compressor attachment (A) on the spring retainer (B), and over the clutch return spring end,
so the clutch spring compressor attachment works on the clutch return spring (C).
8. If either end of the clutch spring compressor attachment is not set over the clutch return spring end, reset the
clutch spring compressor attachment over the return spring end.
9. Coat between the mating areas of the spring retainer oil seal and the clutch piston with ATF. Compress the return
spring (A) carefully until the snap ring (B) can be installed, and install the spring retainer (C) to ensure proper
seating in the clutch piston, and over the clutch hub (D). Do not pinch the spring retainer oil seal.
10. Install the snap ring with the snap ring pliers.
12. Check that the spring retainer oil seal (A) is properly seated in the clutch piston (B).
13. If improperly seated, remove the spring retainer, and check the oil seal. If the oil seal is worn, damaged, or peeling,
replace the spring retainer, and reinstall the new retainer in the clutch piston.
14. Install the wave spring (A) in the 1st clutch drum (B). Starting with the clutch wave-plate, alternately install the
wave-plates (C) (6) and discs (D) (6). Install the clutch end-plate (E) with the flat side down on the top disc.
16. Check that the clutch piston moves by applying air pressure into the fluid passage.
A/T Clutch Inspection
1. Inspect the clutch pistons and the clutch piston check valves (A).
2. If the clutch piston check valve is loose or damaged, replace the clutch piston.
3. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
4. If the spring retainer is worn or damaged, replace it.
5. Check the oil seal (A) on the 1st clutch spring retainer for wear, damage, and peeling.
6. If the oil seal is worn, damaged, or peeling, replace the spring retainer.
7. Inspect the clutch discs, the clutch plates, and the clutch end-plate for wear, damage, and discoloration.
Clutch Discs Standard Thickness
1st clutch: 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
2nd clutch: 1.96 mm (0.077 in.)
3rd clutch: 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
4th clutch: 1.96 mm (0.077 in.)
5th clutch: 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
Clutch Plates Standard Thickness

1st clutch (wave-plates): 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
2nd clutch (flat-plates): 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
3rd clutch (wave-plates): 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
4th clutch (flat-plates): 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
5th clutch (wave-plate): 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
8. If the clutch discs are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If the clutch discs are replaced, inspect the
clearance between the clutch end-plate and the top disc.
9. If any flat-plate is worn, damaged, or discolored, replace them as a set. If the clutch flat-plates are replaced,
inspect the clearance between the clutch end-plate and the top disc.
10. If any wave-plate is worn, damaged, or discolored, replace the damaged plate with a new plate, and inspect the
other wave-plates for a phase difference. If the clutch wave-plate is replaced, inspect the clearance between the
clutch end-plate and the top disc.
11. If the clutch end-plate is worn, damaged, or discolored, inspect the clearance between the clutch end-plate and the
top disc, then replace the clutch end-plate.
A/T 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th Clutch Reassembly
07LAE-PX40000

07LAE-PX40100
07HAE-PL50100

07GAE-PG40200
Snap ring pliers

07LGC-0010100
NOTE: Coat all parts with ATF during reassembly.
1. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a minimum of 30 minutes.
2. Install the new O-ring (A) on the clutch piston (B) of the 2nd, and 4th clutches, and install the O-ring (C) on each
clutch drum (D).
3. Install the new O-rings (A) on the piston (B) of the 3rd and 5th clutches.
4. Install the clutch piston (A) in the clutch drum (B) while applying pressure and rotating to ensure proper seating. Do
not pinch the O-ring.
5. Install the return spring (A) and the spring retainer (B), and position the snap ring (C) on the spring retainer.
7. Be sure the clutch spring compressor attachment (A) is adjusted to have full contact with the spring retainer (B).
8. If either end of the clutch spring compressor attachment is set over an area of the spring retainer that is
unsupported by the return spring, reset the clutch spring compressor attachment over the proper position.
9. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can be installed.
10. Install the snap ring with the snap ring pliers.
12. Install the wave spring (A) in the 2nd clutch drum (B). Starting with the clutch flat-plate, alternately install the flat-
13. Install the wave spring (A) in the 4th clutch drum (B). Starting with the clutch flat-plate, alternately install the flat-
14. Install the wave spring (A) in the 3rd clutch drum (B). Starting with the clutch wave-plate, alternately install the
15. Install the wave spring (A) in the 5th clutch drum (B). Starting with the clutch wave-plate, alternately install the
17. Check that the clutch piston moves by applying air pressure into the fluid passage.
A/T Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
1. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), 1st gear (B), needle bearing (C), thrust needle bearing (D), 31 x 50 mm thrust
washer (E), and 1st clutch (F) on the secondary shaft (G), then secure them with the snap ring (H).
2. Measure the clearance between the snap ring (A) and the 1st clutch guide (B) with a feeler gauge (C), in at least
three places. Use the average as the actual clearance.
Standard: 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.)
3. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the 31 x 50 mm thrust washer and measure its thickness (A).
THRUST WASHER, 31 x 50 mm
1 90521-RG5-000 3.925 mm (0.1545 in.)
2 90522-RG5-000 3.950 mm (0.1555 in.)
3 90523-RG5-000 3.975 mm (0.1565 in.)
4 90524-RG5-000 4.000 mm (0.1575 in.)
5 90525-RG5-000 4.025 mm (0.1585 in.)
6 90526-RG5-000 4.050 mm (0.1594 in.)
7 90527-RG5-000 4.075 mm (0.1604 in.)
8 90528-RG5-000 4.100 mm (0.1614 in.)
9 90529-RG5-000 4.125 mm (0.1624 in.)
10 90530-RG5-000 4.150 mm (0.1634 in.)
11 90531-RG5-000 4.175 mm (0.1644 in.)
12 90532-RG5-000 4.200 mm (0.1654 in.)
13 90533-RG5-000 4.225 mm (0.1663 in.)
14 90534-RG5-000 4.250 mm (0.1673 in.)
15 90535-RG5-000 4.275 mm (0.1683 in.)
16 90536-RG5-000 4.300 mm (0.1693 in.)
17 90537-RG5-000 4.325 mm (0.1703 in.)
6. Disassemble the installed parts from the secondary shaft.
A/T Secondary Shaft 2nd Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
1. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), the needle bearing (B), the 2nd gear (C), the thrust needle bearing (D), the 43 x
54.5 mm thrust washer (E), the 39 mm cotters (F), and the cotter retainer (G) on the secondary shaft (H), then
secure them with the snap ring (I).
2. Set the dial indicator (A) on the 2nd gear (B).
3. Lift the 2nd gear (A) up while holding the secondary shaft (B), and use the dial indicator (C) to read the 2nd gear
axial clearance.
4. Measure the 2nd gear axial clearance in at least three places while moving the 2nd gear. Use the average as the
actual clearance.
Standard: 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.)
5. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the 43 x 54.5 mm thrust washer and measure its thickness.
THRUST WASHER, 43 x 54.5 mm

1 90502-RPC-000 2.900 mm (0.114 in.)
2 90503-RPC-000 2.925 mm (0.115 in.)
3 90504-RPC-000 2.950 mm (0.116 in.)
4 90505-RPC-000 2.975 mm (0.117 in.)
5 90506-RPC-000 3.000 mm (0.118 in.)
6 90507-RPC-000 3.025 mm (0.119 in.)
7 90508-RPC-000 3.050 mm (0.120 in.)
8 90509-RPC-000 3.075 mm (0.121 in.)
9 90510-RPC-000 3.100 mm (0.122 in.)
10 90511-RPC-000 3.125 mm (0.123 in.)
11 90512-RPC-000 3.150 mm (0.124 in.)
12 90513-RPC-000 3.175 mm (0.125 in.)
13 90514-RPC-000 3.200 mm (0.126 in.)
8. Disassemble the installed parts from the secondary shaft.
Torque Converter Housing Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement
07749-0010000
07746-0010500
1. Remove the bolt, then remove the lock washer (A) and bearing set plate (B).
2. Remove the secondary shaft bearing (A) by heating the housing to about 100 °C (212 °F) with a heat gun (B). Do
not heat the housing in excess 100 °C (212 °F).
NOTE: Let the housing cool to normal temperature before installing the bearing.
3. Install the new O-rings (A) on the ATF guide collar (B), then install the ATF guide collar in the housing.
4. Install the new secondary shaft bearing (C) in the direction shown.
5. Drive the secondary shaft bearing with the special tools, and install it securely in the housing.
6. Check that the bearing groove aligns with the housing surface, then install the bearing set plate with aligning the
bearing groove.
7. Install the new lock washer and bolt, then bend the lock tab of the lock washer against the bolt head.
A/T Secondary Shaft Sealing Ring Replacement
The sealing rings are synthetic resin with chamfered ends. Check the condition of the sealing rings, and replace them only
if they are worn, distorted, or damaged.
1. For a better fit, squeeze sealing rings together slightly before installing them.
2. Apply ATF to the new sealing rings, then install them on the mainshaft.
3. After installing the sealing rings, verify the following:
The rings are fully seated in the groove.
The rings are not twisted.
The chamfered ends of the rings are properly joined.
A/T Shift Cable Adjustment
2. Shift the transmission to N.
3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end.
4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) a quarter turn; the corner (C) on the socket holder will be in the
opening (D) of the shift lever bracket base (E). Then slide the holder to remove the shift cable from the bracket. Do
not remove the shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide (F).
5. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it. Pull the shift cable back two steps so that the shift position is
in N. Do not hold the shift cable guide (B) to adjust the shift cable.
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the N indicator comes on.
8. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) through the positioning holes (B) on the shift lever bracket base and into the
positioning hole on the shift lever. Use only the 6.0 mm pin.
9. Check that the shift lever is secured in N.
10. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) to place the corner (C) on the holder opposite the opening (D) in
the shift lever bracket base (E). Align the holder with the opening in the bracket, then slide the holder into the
bracket. Install the shift cable end (F) over the mounting stud (G) by aligning its square hole with the square fitting
(H) at the bottom of the stud. Rotate the holder a quarter turn until the holder stops to secure the shift cable. Do not
install the shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide (I).
11. Check that the shift cable end is properly installed on the mounting stud.
12. If the cable end is out of position on the mounting stud, remove the shift cable from the bracket, and reinstall the
shift cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the mounting stud while the shift cable in on the bracket. If the
cable end rides on the bottom of the mounting stud, rotate the stud and align the square fitting with the hole.
13. Secure the shift cable end with the nut (A).
14. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (B) that was installed to hold the shift lever.
15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Move the shift lever to each position, and check that the A/T gear position
indicator follows the transmission range switch.
16. Shift to P, and check that the shift lock works properly. Push the shift lock release, and check that the shift lever
releases, and also check that the shift lever locks when it is shifted back into P.
17. Reinstall the center console.
A/T Shift Lever Removal
opening (D) of the shift lever bracket base (E). Then slide the holder to remove the shift cable from the bracket. Do
not remove the shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide (F).
5. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light connector (A), and remove
the harness clamps (B) from the shift lever bracket base.
6. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the shift lever assembly.
A/T Shift Lever Installation
1. Install the shift lever assembly (A).
2. Connect the shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light connector (B), and install the
harness clamps (C) on the shift lever bracket base.
4. If necessary, push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it. Pull the shift cable back two steps so that the
shift position is in N. Do not hold the shift cable guide (B) to adjust the shift cable.
A/T Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly
Apply silicone grease to movable joints of the shift lock mechanism, shift lever, and lock pin rod. Keep
the connector terminals free of silicone grease.
A/T Differential Component Location Index
THRUST SHIM, 76 mm
Preload Inspection,
SPACER, 76.2mm
BEARING OUTER RACE

Replacement,
CARRIER BEARING
Replacement,
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

Replacement,
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection,
Replacement,
CARRIER BEARING
Replacement,
BEARING OUTER RACE

Replacement,
SPACER, 80mm
A/T Differential Backlash Inspection
1. Install the driveshaft and intermediate shaft into the differential assembly, and place the axles on V-blocks (A).
2. Measure the backlash of the pinion gears (B) with a dial indicator (C).
Standard: 0.05−0.15 mm (0.002−0.006 in.)
3. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the differential carrier.

A/T Differential Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement
07749-0010000
07GAD-SD40101
07746-0010600
NOTE:
Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the outer race is replaced.
Do not use shim(s) on the toque converter housing side.
Adjust the preload after replacing the bearing and the outer race.
Coat all parts with ATF during installation.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), 76.2 mm spacer (B), and 76 mm thrust shim (C) from the transmission housing
(D) by heating the housing to about 100 °C (212 °F) with a heat gun (E). Do not heat the housing more than 100 °C
(212 °F).
2. Install the 76 mm thrust shim (A), 76.2 mm spacer (B), and outer race (C) in the transmission housing (D).
3. Using the special tools, drive the outer race securely in the housing so there is no clearance between the outer
race, spacer, shim, and housing.
4. Remove the bearing outer race (A) and 80 mm spacer (B) from the torque converter housing (C).
5. Install the spacer and the new outer race in the torque converter housing.
6. Drive the bearing outer race securely in the housing with the special tools.
A/T Differential Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection
07749-0010000
07746-0010600
Diff preload inspection attachment
07HAJ-PK40201
NOTE: If the transmission housing, torque converter housing, differential carrier, tapered roller bearing, bearing outer race,
or thrust shim were replaced, the bearing preload must be adjusted.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), 76.2 mm spacer (B), and 76 mm thrust shim (C) from the transmission housing
(D) by heating the housing to about 100 °C (212 °F) with a heat gun (E). Do not heat the housing more than 100 °C
(212 °F).
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room temperature before adjusting the bearing preload.
2. Replace the tapered roller bearing when the outer race is to be replaced.
3. Do not use a shim on the torque converter housing side.
4. Install the 76 mm thrust shim (A) in the transmission housing (B). If you replace the 76 mm thrust shim with a new
one, use the same thickness shim as the old one.
5. Install the 76.2 mm spacer (C) and the bearing outer race (D) in the transmission housing.
6. Drive the outer race securely in the housing with the special tools so there is no clearance between the outer race,
spacer, shim, and housing.
7. Install the differential assembly (A) in the torque converter housing (B), and install the gasket (C) and the three
dowel pins (D) on the housing.
8. Install the transmission housing (E), and install the transmission housing mounting bolts. Tighten the 19 bolts to 44
N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) in at least two steps in a crisscross pattern.
9. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions to seat the bearings.
10. Measure the starting torque of the differential assembly with the special tool, a torque wrench (A), and a socket (B).
Measure the staring torque at normal room temperature in both directions.
Standard
New Bearing:
2.7−3.9 N·m (28−40 kgf·cm, 24−35 lbf·in.)
Reused Bearing:
2.5−3.6 N·m (25−37 kgf·cm, 22−32 lbf·in.)
11. If the starting torque is out of the standard, remove the thrust shim and measure its thickness.
12. Select a new thrust shim. To increase the starting torque, increase thickness of the thrust shim. To decrease the
starting torque, decrease the thickness of the thrust shim.
Changing the shim to the next size will increase or decrease the starting torque about 0.5−0.6 N·m (5−6 kgf·m,
5−5 lbf·in.)
THRUST SHIM, 76 mm
0A 41428-PRP-000 1.55 mm (0.0610 in.)
0B 41429-PRP-000 1.60 mm (0.0630 in.)
0C 41430-PRP-000 1.65 mm (0.0650 in.)

0D 41431-PRP-000 1.70 mm (0.0669 in.)
0E 41432-PRP-000 1.75 mm (0.0689 in.)
0F 41433-PRP-000 1.80 mm (0.0709 in.)
0G 41434-PRP-000 1.85 mm (0.0728 in.)
0H 41435-PRP-000 1.90 mm (0.0748 in.)
0I 41436-PRP-000 1.95 mm (0.0768 in.)
0J 41437-PRP-000 2.00 mm (0.0787 in.)
S 41438-PX4-700 2.05 mm (0.0807 in.)
T 41439-PX4-700 2.10 mm (0.0827 in.)
U 41440-PX4-700 2.15 mm (0.0846 in.)
A 41441-PK4-000 2.20 mm (0.0866 in.)
B 41442-PK4-000 2.25 mm (0.0886 in.)
C 41443-PK4-000 2.30 mm (0.0906 in.)
D 41444-PK4-000 2.35 mm (0.0925 in.)
E 41445-PK4-000 2.40 mm (0.0945 in.)
F 41446-PK4-000 2.45 mm (0.0965 in.)
G 41447-PK4-000 2.50 mm (0.0984 in.)
H 41448-PK4-000 2.55 mm (0.1004 in.)
I 41449-PK4-000 2.60 mm (0.1024 in.)
J 41450-PK4-000 2.65 mm (0.1043 in.)
K 41451-PK4-000 2.70 mm (0.1063 in.)
L 41452-PK4-000 2.75 mm (0.1083 in.)
M 41453-PK4-000 2.80 mm (0.1102 in.)
N 41454-PK4-000 2.85 mm (0.1122 in.)
O 41455-PK4-000 2.90 mm (0.1142 in.)
P 41456-PK4-000 2.95 mm (0.1161 in.)
Q 41457-PK4-000 3.00 mm (0.1181 in.)
R 41458-PK4-000 3.05 mm (0.1201 in.)
A 41428-PAX-000 1.575 mm (0.0620 in.)
B 41429-PAX-000 1.626 mm (0.0640 in.)
C 41430-PAX-000 1.675 mm (0.0659 in.)
D 41431-PAX-000 1.725 mm (0.0679 in.)
E 41432-PAX-000 1.775 mm (0.0669 in.)
F 41433-PAX-000 1.825 mm (0.0719 in.)
G 41434-PAX-000 1.875 mm (0.0738 in.)
H 41435-PAX-000 1.925 mm (0.0758 in.)
I 41436-PAX-000 1.975 mm (0.0778 in.)
(cont'd)
THRUST SHIM, 76 mm (cont'd)

J 41437-PAX-000 2.025 mm (0.0797 in.)
K 41438-PAX-000 2.075 mm (0.0817 in.)
L 41439-PAX-000 2.125 mm (0.0837 in.)
M 41440-PAX-000 2.175 mm (0.0856 in.)
N 41441-PAX-000 2.225 mm (0.0876 in.)
O 41442-PAX-000 2.275 mm (0.0896 in.)
P 41443-PAX-000 2.325 mm (0.0915 in.)
Q 41444-PAX-000 2.375 mm (0.0935 in.)
R 41445-PAX-000 2.425 mm (0.0955 in.)
S 41446-PAX-000 2.475 mm (0.0974 in.)
T 41447-PAX-000 2.525 mm (0.0994 in.)
U 41448-PAX-000 2.575 mm (0.1014 in.)
V 41449-PAX-000 2.625 mm (0.1033 in.)
W 41450-PAX-000 2.675 mm (0.1053 in.)
X 41451-PAX-000 2.725 mm (0.1073 in.)
Y 41452-PAX-000 2.775 mm (0.1093 in.)
Z 41453-PAX-000 2.825 mm (0.1112 in.)
0A 41454-PAX-000 2.875 mm (0.1132 in.)
0B 41455-PAX-000 2.925 mm (0.1152 in.)
0C 41456-PAX-000 2.975 mm (0.1171 in.)
0D 41457-PAX-000 3.025 mm (0.1191 in.)
13. Install the new thrust shim, then recheck the staring torque.
A/T Differential Carrier Bearing Replacement
Bearing Separator
07KAF-PS30200
Attachment, 40
07LAD-PW50601
NOTE:
The bearing and outer race should be replaced as a set.
Inspect and adjust the carrier bearing preload whenever the bearing is replaced.
Check the bearing for wear and rough rotation. If the bearing is OK, removal is not necessary.
1. Remove the final driven gear from the differential carrier when replacing the carrier bearing on the final driven gear
side. When only replacing the carrier bearing on opposite side of the final driven gear, final driven gear removal is no
needed.
2. Set a commercially available bearing separator (A) or the special tool (07KAF-PS30200) under the carrier bearing
(B).
3. Place a collar (C) on the differential carrier, and set a commercially available bearing puller (D), then remove the
carrier bearing.
4. Install the new bearing with the special tool and a press. Press the bearing on securely until it bottoms so there is
no clearance between the bearing and the differential carrier.
5. Install the final driven gear if the gear was removed.
A/T Differential Carrier, Final Driven Gear Replacement
1. Remove the final driven gear (A) from the differential carrier (B). The final driven gear bolts have left-hand threads.
2. Install the final driven gear on the differential carrier in the direction shown.
3. Tighten the bolts to 101 N·m (10.3 kgf·m, 74.5 lbf·ft) in a crisscross pattern in at least two steps.
A/T Differential Oil Seal Replacement
07749-0010000
Oil seal driver attachment

07JAD-PH80101
1. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing.
2. Remove the oil seal from the torque converter housing.
3. Install the new oil seal in the transmission housing in between 0.2 mm-deep and 0.5 mm-high from the housing
surface with the special tools.
4. Install the new oil seal in the torque converter housing in between 0.2 mm-deep and 0.5 mm-high from the housing
surface with the special tools.
A/T Idler Gear Shaft Removal and Installation
1. Remove the snap ring (A), cotter retainer (B), and cotters (C) from the idler gear shaft (D), then remove the idler
gear shaft. Do not distort the snap ring.
2. Check the snap ring and cotter retainer for wear and damage. Replace the snap ring and/or cotter retainer if the
snap ring or cotter retainer is worn, distorted, or damaged.
3. Install the idler gear shaft in the idler gear shaft bearing.
4. Install the cotters and cotter retainer, and secure the idler gear shaft with the snap ring.
A/T End Cover Idler Gear Shaft Bearing Replacement
07JAC-PH80000

07749-0010000
07746-0010400
1. Remove the idler gear shaft bearing from the end cover with the special tool.
2. Install the new bearing in the end cover with the special tools.
A/T Interlock System Component Location Index
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
PARK PIN SWITCH SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

Key Interlock System Circuit Shift Lock System Circuit
*: This illustration shows RHD model. Troubleshooting, Troubleshooting,
Test, Test,
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY
KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID
Key Interlock System Circuit
Troubleshooting,

A/T Interlock System Circuit Diagram
BATTE RY TE RMINAL FUS E BOX *1 : W ith trailer lighting connector
UNDE R−DAS H FUS E /RE LAY BOX
BATTE RY No. 3 (30 A)* 1
(20 A)* 2 No. 24 (15 A)
No. 1 (100 A) No. 39 (15 A)
BATTE RY TE RMINAL FUS E BOX *1 : W ith trailer lighting connector

UNDE R−DAS H FUS E /RE LAY BOX
BATTE RY No. 3 (30 A)* 1 No. 60 (50 A)
(20 A)* 2 No. 24 (15 A)
MULTI−FUS E
BLOCK P GM−FI
No. 1 (100 A) No. 39 (15 A) MAIN RE LAY 1
BAT IG1 No. 7 (10 A)

W HT
No.No.
20 60
(15(50
A) A)
MULTI−FUS E
IGNITION S W ITCH No. 22 (7.5 A) BLOCK P GM−FI
MAIN RE LAY 1
No. 7 (10 A)
BAT IG1
BRAKE W HT
P E DAL
1 No. 20 (15 A) P OS ITION
RE D LT BLU S W ITCH
S HIFT LOCK IGNITION S W ITCH No. 22 (7.5 A)
S OLE NOID RHD P OW E RTRAIN
3 A28 S LS CONTROL
BLU P NK P NK MODULE (P CM)
To 12 V
BRAKE
P E DAL
1 LHD P OS ITION
2 RE D 5 LT BLU S W ITCH
GRN GRN
IG1 C10 LT GRN
S HIFT LOCK BLK/RE D RE D
P ARK P IN
S OLE NOID BLK RHD P OW E RTRAIN
S W ITCH 3 A28 S LS CONTROL
1 BLU 4 P NK P NK MODULE (P CM)
GRN GRN V BVS OL
To 12 A1
BRN
LHD
2 5
GRN GRN G502 MRLY A7
IG1 C10 BLU LT GRN
P ARK P IN ACCE LEBLK
RATOR P E DAL BLK/RE D RE D
S W ITCH P OS ITION S E NS OR
1 4 To 5 V IGP A9
GRN GRN V B S OL A1 LT GRN
BRN
1 A26 V CC4
BRN
BK S W A42
G502 3 A18 AP S 1 MRLY A7 LT GRN
ORN BLU
ACCE LE RATOR P E DAL2 A36 S G4
P OS ITION S E NS OR BLU
To 5 V S CSIGP A32A9 DATA LINK
LT GRN
YEL YEL CONNE CTOR
1 A26 V CC4 (DLC)
4 BRN A25 V CC5
GRY ATP RV
BKS S W B23A42
3 A18 AP S 1 YLT
E LGRN
6 ORN A19 AP S 2
LT BLU ATP FW D B29
2 A36 S G4 BLU/Y E L
5 BLU A35 S G5
W HT ATP 2−1 B17
S CS A32 BLU DATA LINK
YEL YEL CONNE CTOR
ATP D3 B16 (DLC)
4 B10A25 P G1
V CC5 RE D
BLK
GRY
ATP D B22
6 A19 AP S 2 P NK LT GRN
LT BLU ATP RV S B23 S TARTE R
ATP N B13 YEL CUT RE LAY
5 B1
A35 P G2
S G5 RE D/BLK
BRN
W HT ATP FW D B29
ATP R B15 BLU/Y E L
ATP S B16
B10 P G1 ATP P B14 RE D
BLK C44 LG1
BRN/Y E L ATP D B22
P NK LT GRN
BLU/BLK W HT S TARTELT
R GRN
ATP N B13 CUT RE LAY
C48 B1 LG2P G2 BLU/BLK RE D/BLK
BRN/YBRN
EL 5 4 9 3 8 2 6 10 7 1 BLK
ATP R B15
ATP P B14
C44 LG1 BLK/BLU RE D/BLK BLU Y E L/RE D BLU/W HT
BRN/Y E L
G101 LT BLU W HT P NK BRN W HT/RE D BLK
MULTIP LE X INTE GRATE D BLU/BLK W HT LT GRN
RE D P −P IN G101
C48 LG2 CONTROL UNIT (MICU) ATP P BLU/BLK 6 7 2 8 3 9 5 1 4 10
BRN/Y E L 5 4 9 3 8 6 10 7 1 BLK
FW D RV S ST E
N D
4 UNDE R−DAS H
P UR FUS E /RE LAY BOX R D3
KE Y G101 No. 14 (7.5 A) LT BLU BLK/BLU RE D/BLK BLU W HT/RE D BLK
MULTIP LE X INTE GRATE D P 2 G101
INTE RLOCK RE D P −P IN
S OLE NOID CONTROL UNIT (MICU) ATP P W HT P NK Y E L/RE D BLU/W HT
3
LT BLU KE Y S OL− 1
6 7 2 8 3 5 1 4 10
4 UNDE R−DAS H
P UR FUS E /RE LAY BOX FW D RV S ST E
1 N D
KE Y No. 14 (7.5 A)
GRY KE Y S W R S
INTE RLOCK
S OLE NOID
IGNITION 3 P
KE Y LT BLU KE Y S OL−
S W ITCH TRANS MIS S ION RANGE S W ITCH
2
BLK BK S W
1
GRY KE Y S W
IGNITION G501 P CM Harness Connector Terminal Locations

KE Y
S W ITCH TRANS MIS S ION RANGE S W ITCH
2
BLK BK S W
1 3 4 6 7 9 10 1 3 4 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
15 16 18 19 20 21 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21
G501 P CM Harness Connector Terminal Locations
22 24 25 26 28 22 23 24 26 27 28
29 30 32 34 35 36 37 38 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 38 29 30 31 32
42 44 46 40 45 46 47 48 43 44 46 48
1 3 4 6 7 9 10 1 3 4 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A (49P ) 15 16 18 19 20 21 B (49P ) 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 21 C (49P ) 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21
22 24 25 26 28 22 23 24 26 27 28
29 30 32 34 35 36 37 38 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 38 29 30 31 32
42 44 46 47 48 40 45 46 47 48 43 44 46 48
A (49P ) B (49P ) C (49P )

A/T Interlock System - Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I). The shift lever must be in P.
2. Disconnect the steering lock assembly connector.
3. Check if the ignition switch can be turned to LOCK (0).
Can the ignition switch be turned to LOCK (0)?
NO - Replace the ignition key cylinder/steering lock assembly. ■
5. Move the shift lever out of P.
6. Check for continuity between steering lock assembly connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between key interlock solenoid and the MICU.■
NO - Go to Step 7 .
8. Check the Park Pin Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T data list while the shift lever is in P, and when the shift
lever is shifted to any position other than P.
Is the park pin switch signal OFF while the shift lever is in P, and ON when the shift lever is shifted out of P?
NO - Go to Step 9 .
11. Disconnect the park pin switch 2P connector, and remove it from the shift lever bracket base.
12. Check for continuity between park pin switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and No. 2.
Is there no continuity while the shift lever is in P, and continuity when the shift lever is shifted out of P?
NO - Replace the park pin switch. ■
13. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light connector.
14. Check for continuity between shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light connector
terminal No. 4 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light
connector terminal No. 4 and the MICU.■
NO - There is short in the wires between shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel
light connector and the 2P connector. Replace the shift lock solenoid; the shift lock solenoid is combined
with the park pin switch harness and the indicator panel light harness/socket, and supplied as an
assembly.■
16. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector B (36P).
18. Measure the voltage between under-dash fuse/relay box connector B (36P) terminal No. 31 and body ground.
Is there voltage?
YES - Substitute a known-good MICU and recheck.■
NO - Repair open or short in the wire between under-dash fuse/relay box connector B (36P) and the
transmission range switch.■
A/T Interlock System - Park Pin Switch Test
2. Check the Park Pin Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T data list while the shift lever is in P, and when the shift
lever is shifted to any position other than P.
3. Check that the park pin switch signal is OFF while the shift lever is in P, and signal is ON when the shift lever is
shifted out of P.
4. If the park pin switch signal is OK, test is complete, disconnect the HDS. If the signal is incorrect, go to Step 5 .
7. Remove the shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light connector from the shift lever
bracket base, then disconnect the connector.
8. Shift into P, and check for continuity between shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel
light connector terminals No. 4 and No. 5. Do not press the shift lever button. There should be no continuity.
9. Shift out of P, and check for continuity between connector terminals No. 4 and No. 5. There should be continuity.
10. If the park pin switch tests OK, repair open or short in the wire between the shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T
gear position indicator panel light connector terminal No. 4 and the MICU.
11. If the park pin switch tests incorrectly, test the park pin switch at the park pin switch 2P connector.
12. Disconnect the park pin switch 2P connector, and remove it from the bracket base.
13. Shift into P, and check for continuity between park pin switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. Do not
press the shift lever button. There should be no continuity.
14. Shift out of P, and check for continuity between connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be continuity.
15. If the park pin switch tests OK at the 2P connector, there is a break or short in the wire between shift lock
solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light connector and the 2P connector. Replace the shift
lock solenoid; the shift lock solenoid is combined with the park pin switch harness and the indicator panel light
harness/socket, and supplied as an assembly.
16. If the park pin switch fails the test, replace the park pin switch.
A/T Interlock System - Park Pin Switch Replacement
NOTE: The park pin switch is installed in the shift lever bracket base, and not available separately from the shift lever
bracket base; replace the park pin switch and the shift lever bracket base as an assembly.
1. Remove the shift lever.
2. Disassemble the shift lever.
3. Replace the park pin switch and shift lever bracket base assembly.
4. Assemble the shift lever.
5. Install the shift lever.
A/T Interlock System - Shift Lock Release and Release Spring Replacement
2. Release the lock tab retaining the A/T gear position indicator panel, and move the indicator panel up.
3. Remove the shift lock release (A) and release spring (B).
4. Apply silicone grease to the pin (C) on the shift lever bracket base, and install the shift lock release and release
spring over the pin. Keep the connector terminals free of silicone grease.
5. Install the indicator panel on the shift lever bracket base.
A/T Interlock System - Shift Lock Solenoid Test
2. Select Shift Lock Solenoid Test in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift lock solenoid operates
with the HDS.
3. Make sure that the shift lever can be moved out of P when Shift Lock Solenoid: ON. Move the shift lever back in P,
and make sure it locks with Shift Lock Solenoid: OFF.
4. Make sure that the shift lock releases when the shift lock release is pushed, and make sure it locks when the shift
lock release is released.
5. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly, troubleshoot shift lock system.
A/T Interlock System - Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement
2. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light socket (A) from the indicator panel (B), then remove the bulb (C)
from the socket.
3. Remove the shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light connector (D) from the shift
lever bracket base (E), then disconnect the connector.
4. Disconnect the park pin switch 2P connector (F).
5. Release the lock tab (G) retaining the shift lock solenoid using thin blade screwdriver, and remove the shift lock
solenoid (H).
6. Replace the shift lock solenoid, solenoid plunger (I), and plunger spring (J) assembly.
7. Apply silicone grease to the tip of the shift lock stop and solenoid plunger. Keep the connector terminals free of
silicone grease.
8. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint (K) of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock
stop (L), then push the shift lock solenoid into the shift lever bracket base securely.
9. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb in the panel light socket, then install the socket in the A/T
gear position indicator panel.
10. Route the harness (M) through the harness clamp, and connect the park pin switch 2P connector.
11. Install the shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light connector on the bracket base,
and connect the connector.
12. Test the shift lock solenoid.
A/T Interlock System - Shift Lock Stop/Shift Lock Stop Cushion Replacement
2. Remove the shift lock solenoid assembly (A).
3. Remove the shift lock stop/stop cushion (B), and replace them as an assembly.
4. Apply silicone grease to the pin (C) on the shift lever bracket base, and install the shift lock stop over the pin. Keep
the connector terminals free of silicone grease.
5. Install the shift lock solenoid assembly.
A/T Interlock System - Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Select Shift Lock Solenoid Test in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift lock solenoid operates
with the HDS.
Does the shift lock solenoid work properly?
NO - Go to Step 6 .
3. Check the Brake Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T data list while pressing the brake pedal, and when the
brake pedal is released.
Does the brake pedal position switch work properly?
NO - Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal circuit. ■
4. Check the ATP Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T data list. The shift lever must be in P.
Is the ATP Switch ON?
5. Check the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor A with the HDS in the A/T data list. Do not press the
accelerator.
Is the APP sensor A opening 5 % or more, or the APP sensor A voltage 1.16 V or higher?
YES - Check the APP Sensor. ■
NO - Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. If
the symptom goes away with a known-good PCM, replace the original PCM. ■
8. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light connector.
10. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light connector
terminal No. 1 and body ground.
NO - Check for a blown No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open or
short in the wire between the shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light
connector and the under-dash fuse/relay box.■
11. Shift to P, and press the brake pedal. Do not press the accelerator.
12. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 3 while pressing the brake pedal.
13. Release the brake pedal, and measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position
indicator panel light connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3. The shift lever must be in P.
YES - Repair short in the wire between PCM connector terminal A28 and the shift lock solenoid/park pin
switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light connector.■
14. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position
indicator panel light connector terminal No. 3, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to
connector terminal No. 1, then check that the shift lock solenoid operates.
NOTE: Do not connect the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 3 or you will damage the diode
inside the shift lock solenoid.
Does the shift lock solenoid operate properly?
YES - Check the shift lock mechanism. Replace the shift lock stop and stop cushion, if the shift lock stop is
worn or stuck.■
NO - Replace the shift lock solenoid. ■
18. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A28 and shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position
indicator panel light connector terminal No. 3.
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal A28 and shift lock solenoid connector.■
21. Check for continuity between transmission range switch connector terminal No. 10 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between transmission range switch connector terminal No. 10 and ground (G101),
or repair poor ground (G101).■
23. Measure the voltage between transmission range switch connector terminals No. 6 and No. 10.
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal B14 and the transmission range switch.■
24. Check for continuity between transmission range switch connector terminals No. 6 and No. 10.
Is there continuity while the shift lever is in P, and no continuity when the shift lever is shifted to any position other
than P?
NO - Replace the transmission range switch. ■
A/T System Description - Lock-up System
Lock-up System
Lock-up System (cont'd)
A/T Stall Speed Test
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the proper level.
2. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels.
4. Make sure the A/C switch OFF.
5. After the engine has warmed up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on), shift to D.
6. Firmly press and hold the brake pedal then, while still holding the brake pedal, press the accelerator pedal for six to
eight seconds, and note maximum engine speed. Do not move the shift lever while raising engine speed.
7. Allow 2 minutes for cooling, repeat the test for the seven-position transmission in 2, and allow 2 minutes, then
repeat test in 1.
8. Allow 2 minutes for cooling, then repeat the test in R.
NOTE:
Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic purposes only.
The stall speed should be the same in D, 2, 1, and R.
Do not test stall speed with the A/T pressure gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm
Specification: 2,200 rpm (min −1 )
Service Limit: 2,050−2,350 rpm (min −1 )
9. If any of the stall speeds are out of the service limit, refer to the problems and probable causes listed in the table.
Problem Probable Causes
Stall speed rpm high in D, 2, 1, and R ATF pump output low
Regulator valve stuck
Slipping clutch
Stall speed rpm high in 2 Slippage of 2nd clutch
Stall speed rpm high in 1 Slippage of 1st clutch
Stall speed rpm high in R Slippage of 5th clutch
Stall speed rpm low in D, 2, 1, and R Engine output low
Engine throttle valve closed
Torque converter one-way clutch slipping
Problem Probable Causes
Stall speed rpm high in D and R ATF pump output low
Regulator valve stuck
Slipping clutch
Stall speed rpm high in R Slippage of 5th clutch
Stall speed rpm low in D and R Engine output low
Engine throttle valve closed
Torque converter one-way clutch slipping
A/T Valve Body Repair
NOTE: Valve body repair is only necessary if one or more of the valves in a valve body do not slide smoothly in their bores.
Use this procedure to free the valves.
1. Soak a sheet of #600 abrasive paper in ATF for about 30 minutes.
2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a small
screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful not to scratch the bore with the screwdriver.
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF-soaked #600 paper to polish off any burrs that are on the valve,
then wash the valve in solvent and dry it with compressed air.
4. Roll up half of the ATF-soaked #600 paper and insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve. Twist the paper
slightly, so that it unrolls and fits the bore tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the paper as you push it in and
out.
NOTE: The valve body is aluminum and doesn't require much polishing to remove any burrs.
5. Remove the #600 paper. Thoroughly wash the entire valve body in solvent, then dry it with compressed air.
6. Coat the valve with ATF, then drop it into its bore. It should drop to the bottom of the bore under its own weight. If
not, repeat steps 4 and 5, then retest. If the valve still sticks, replace the valve body.
7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the valve body with solvent. Dry all parts with compressed air, then
reassemble using ATF as a lubricant.
ATF Pump Inspection
1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), the driven gear (B), and the ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the main valve
body (D). Lubricate all parts with ATF, and install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved and chamfered side
facing up.
2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive gear (A) and the driven gear (B).
ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance

Standard (New)
ATF Pump Drive Gear:
0.210−0.265 mm (0.0083−0.0104 in.)
ATF Pump Driven Gear:
0.070−0.125 mm (0.0028−0.0049 in.)
3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure the thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven gear (A) and
the valve body (B) with a straight edge (C) and a feeler gauge (D).
ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial) Clearance

A/T Valve Body and ATF Strainer Removal
1. Remove the ATF feed pipe (A) from the regulator valve body (B).
2. Remove the ATF feed pipes (C) (D) from the servo body (E).
3. Remove the ATF strainer (F) (two bolts).
4. Unhook the detent spring (G) from the detent arm (H), and remove the control shaft (I).
5. Remove the regulator valve body (10 bolts).
6. Remove the stator shaft (J) and stator shaft stop (K), then remove the regulator separator plate (L) and two dowel
pins (M).
7. Remove the servo body (11 bolts), then remove the separator plate (N) and two dowel pins (O).
8. Remove the ATF joint pipes (P) (Q).
9. Remove the cooler check valve spring (R) and cooler check valve (S), then remove the main valve body (T) (three
bolts). Do not let the check balls (U) fall out.
10. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft (V), then remove the ATF pump gears (W).
11. Remove the main separator plate (X) and two dowel pins (Y).
12. Remove the ATF magnet (Z), clean and reinstall it in the torque converter housing (AA).
13. Remove the O-ring (BB) from the stator shaft, and remove the O-ring (CC) from the ATF strainer. Install the new
ones when installing the valve bodies.
14. Clean the inlet opening (A) of the ATF strainer (B) thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it is in good
condition and that the inlet opening is not clogged.
15. Test the ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF through the inlet opening, and replace it if it is clogged or damaged.
A/T Valve Body and ATF Strainer Installation
1. Make sure that the ATF magnet is cleaned and installed in the torque converter housing.
Torque Specifications;
6 x 1.0 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
mm:
8 x 1.25 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
mm:
2. Install the main separator plate and two dowel pins on the torque converter housing.
3. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), ATF pump driven gear (B), and ATF pump driven gear shaft (C). Install the ATF
pump driven gear with its grooved and chamfered side facing down.
4. Install the main valve body.
5. Make sure the ATF pump drive gear (A) rotates smoothly in the normal operating direction, and the ATF pump
driven gear shaft (B) moves smoothly in the axial and normal operating direction.
6. If the ATF pump drive gear and ATF pump driven gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the main valve body
bolts. Realign the ATF pump driven gear shaft, and retighten the bolts to the specified torque, then recheck. Failure
to align the ATF pump driven gear shaft correctly will result in a seized ATF pump drive gear or ATF pump driven
gear shaft.
7. Make sure that the three check balls and the cooler check valve are in the main valve body, then install the cooler
check valve spring in the cooler check valve.
8. Install the ATF joint pipes between the main valve body and the torque converter housing.
9. Install the regulator separator plate and two dowel pins on the main valve body.
10. Install the new O-ring on the stator shaft, and install the stator shaft and stator shaft stop.
11. Install the regulator valve body (10 bolts).
12. Install the servo separator plate and two dowel pins on the main valve body.
13. Install the servo body (11 bolts). Install the ATF strainer with the two bolts in the bolt holes (A) in step 17, and
install the baffle plate with the two bolts in the bolt holes (B) in step 4 in shaft assembly and housing installation.
14. If the detent arm was removed, install the detent arm (A) with arm collar (B) on the servo body (C), and install the
new lock washer (D) by aligning its cutout (E) with the projection (F) of the servo body. Install and tighten the bolt,
then bend the lock tab (G) of the lock washer against the bolt head.
15. Install the control shaft (A) in the torque converter housing while aligning the manual valve lever pin (B) on the
control shaft with the guide of the manual valve (C).
16. Hook the detent arm spring (A) to the detent arm (B).
17. Install the new O-ring on the ATF strainer, and install the ATF strainer (two bolts).
18. Install the 8 x 180.5 mm ATF feed pipe in the regulator valve body.
19. Install the 8 x 192.5 mm ATF feed pipe and 8 x 180.5 mm ATF feed pipe in the servo body.
A/T Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages.
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls, it may magnetize the check balls.
3. Inspect the main valve body for scoring and damage.
4. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to valve body repair.
5. Coat all parts with ATF during assembly.
VALVE SPRING SPECIFICATIONS

Valve Springs Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)
Wire O.D. Free Length No. of Coils
Diameter
A Cut valve B spring 0.8 (0.031) 9.9 (0.290) 27.3 (1.075) 8.0
B Shift valve A spring 0.8 (0.031) 7.1 (0.280) 23.7 (0.933) 9.7
C Shift valve C spring 0.8 (0.031) 7.1 (0.280) 23.7 (0.933) 9.7
D Relief valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 9.6 (0.378) 34.1 (1.343) 10.2
E Lock-up control valve spring 0.6 (0.024) 7.1 (0.280) 29.6 (1.165) 11.2
F Cooler check valve spring 0.85 (0.033) 6.6 (0.260) 27.0 (1.063) 11.3
G Shift valve D spring 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) 15.9
H Servo control valve spring 0.8 (0.031) 9.9 (0.290) 27.3 (1.075) 8.0
A/T Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages
except the air check valve filter.
2. Inspect the regulator valve body for scoring and damage.
3. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is
spring loaded. Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly so it does not pop
out.
5. Check the air check valve filter for clogging. If the filter is clogged, remove the air check valve,
and clean the filter thoroughly by pouring clean ATF. Do not blow out the filter with compressed
air. Replace the air check valve, if the filter or the check valve (ball) is clogged or damaged.
7. Align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the stop bolt hole, then press the spring cap into
the valve body, and tighten the stop bolt.
VALVE SPRING SPECIFICATIONS

Diameter
A Stator reaction spring 4.5 (0.177) 35.4 (1.394) 30.3 (1.193) 1.92
B Regulator valve spring A 1.9 (0.075) 14.7 (0.579) 80.6 (3.173) 16.1
C Regulator valve spring B 1.6 (0.063) 9.2 (0.362) 44.0 (1.732) 12.5
D Torque converter check valve spring 1.2 (0.047) 8.6 (0.339) 33.8 (1.331) 12.2
E Lock-up shift valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 6.6 (0.260) 35.5 (1.398) 18.2
F 1st accumulator spring B 2.4 (0.094) 12.2 (0.480) 35.0 (1.378) 7.7
G 1st accumulator spring A 2.4 (0.094) 18.6 (0.732) 50.1 (1.972) 6.7
H 4th accumulator spring 2.5 (0.098) 14.6 (0.575) 29.9 (1.177) 4.9
A/T Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages.
2. Inspect the servo body for scoring and damage.
VALVE SPRINGS SPECIFICATIONS

Diameter
A Cut valve A spring 0.9 (0.035) 9.9 (0.390) 22.3 (0.878) 6.9
B Shift valve B spring 0.8 (0.031) 7.1 (0.280) 23.7 (0.933) 9.7
C 5th accumulator spring A 2.5 (0.098) 16.6 (0.654) 46.9 (1.846) 7.8
D 5th accumulator spring B 1.9 (0.075) 10.0 (0.394) 38.5 (1.516) 10.6
E 2nd accumulator spring A 1.8 (0.071) 14.6 (0.575) 43.8 (1.724) 7.9
F 2nd accumulator spring B 1.85 (0.073) 9.4 (0.370) 32.5 (1.280) 8.7
G 3rd accumulator spring A 1.8 (0.071) 14.6 (0.575) 43.8 (1.724) 7.9
H 3rd accumulator spring B 1.85 (0.073) 9.4 (0.370) 32.5 (1.280) 8.7
A/T Valve Body Shift Solenoid Valve Removal and Installation
NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve connector to remove and install the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold the solenoid valve
body.
1. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the solenoid valves by holding the solenoid valve body.
2. Install the new O-rings (E) on each solenoid valve.
with it.
3. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure the mounting
bracket contacts to the servo body.
4. Install shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure the mounting
5. Install shift solenoid valve B (black connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure the mounting
6. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure the mounting
bracket contacts to the bracket of shift solenoid valve B.
before installing shift solenoid valve B, it may damage the hydraulic control system.
A/T Valve Body Valve Installation
1. Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence shown for the main valve body, the regulator valve body, and the servo
body. Refer to the following valve cap illustrations, and install each valve cap so the end shown facing up will be
facing the outside of the valve body, then secure the valve cap with the valve cap clip.
3. Install the valve and the valve spring (A) in the valve body (B). Push the valve spring in with a screwdriver, then
install the spring seat (C).
How to Troubleshoot the A/T System
How to Check for DTCs with the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS)
When the powertrain control module (PCM) senses an abnormality in the input or output system, the D indicator (A) in the
gauge assembly (B) will usually blink.
When the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) is connected to the data link connector (DLC) (A) (located under the driver's
dashboard lower cover), it will indicate the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II) and
the appropriate menu is selected.
If the D indicator or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been reported on, or if a driveability problem is suspected, follow
this procedure:
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's manual for specific instructions.)
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), select A/T system, and observe the DTC in the DTCs MENU on the HDS screen.
If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting.
3. Record the freeze data and the on-board snapshots for all fuel and emissions DTCs and A/T DTCs.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC.
5. Clear the DTC and data.
6. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the same conditions as those indicated by the freeze data, and then
recheck for a DTC. If the A/T DTC returns, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. If the DTC does not return,
there was an intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
Symptom Troubleshooting Versus DTC Troubleshooting

Some symptoms will not trigger DTCs or cause the D indicator to blink. If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) was
reported ON or the D indicator has been blinking, check for DTCs. If the vehicle has an abnormal symptom, and there are
no DTCs stored, do the symptom troubleshooting. Check the list of probable cause(s) for the symptom, in the sequence
listed, until you find the problem.
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM Connectors

NOTE: Monitoring the powertrain control system throughout the vehicle, the PCM stays on up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0). Jumping the SCS line after turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) cancels this
function. Disconnecting the PCM during this function, without jumping the SCS line first, can damage the PCM.
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A), and jump the SCS line with the HDS.
2. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C.
3. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminal to a digital multimeter (B), and connect the other side of the patch
cord terminals to a commercially available banana jack (Pomona Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent) (C).
4. Gently slide the pin probe into the inspection port (D) at the connector terminal side. Always use the inspection
port. Do not slide the probe into the connector terminals.
For accurate result, always use the pin probe (male).

To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do not insert test equipment probes, paper clips, or other
substitutes as they can damage the terminals. Damaged terminals cause a poor connection and an
incorrect measurement.
Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections.
How to Clear A/T DTCs

3. Clear the DTC(s) with the HDS.
OBD Status
The OBD status shows the current system status of each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is used to see if
the technician's repair was successfully finished. The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed as:
PASSED: On board diagnosis is successfully finished.
FAILED: On board diagnosis has finished but failed.
NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.

1. Reset the PCM with the HDS while the engine is stopped.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds.
5. Do the PCM idle learn procedure.
6. Start the engine in P or N, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
7. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 50 km/h (30 mph) or
under the same conditions as those indicated by the freeze data.
Updating the A/T software in the PCM

Refer to the PCM Update when the A/T software updating is needed in the DTC troubleshooting.
Replacing the PCM

Refer to the PCM Replacement when replacing the PCM is needed in the DTC troubleshooting.
How to Substitute the PCM

3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC
6. Remove the PCM cover (A).
7. Remove the mounting bolts (A) from the PCM (B).

8. Disconnect PCM connectors A (C), B (D), and C (E), and remove the PCM.
9. Install a known-good PCM in the reverse order of removal.
11. Open the SCS line with the HDS.
NOTE: If DTC P0630 ‘‘VIN not Programmed or Mismatch'' will be stored because the VIN has not been programmed
into the PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure.
13. Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS.
14. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
15. Enter the immobilizer code using the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; this allows you to start the engine.
16. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
17. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software.
18. Do the CKP learn procedure.
19. Do the PCM idle learn procedure.
DTC P0705:
Transmission Range Switch (Multiple Shift-position Input)
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review General
Troubleshooting Information.
This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
3. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in each position,
and monitor the OBD status for P0705 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the HDS indicate FAILED?
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for an intermittent short in the wire between the
transmission range switch and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 2 and
recheck.■
7. Check the A/T P Switch, A/T R Switch, A/T N Switch, A/T D Switch, A/T D3 Switch, A/T 2-1 Switch, A/T S Switch,
Forward Switch (ATP FWD), and Reverse Switch (ATP RVS) inputs with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Are there any ON-inputs?
YES - Repair short in the ON-input circuit:
A/T P Switch circuit: between PCM connector terminal B14 and transmission range switch
A/T R Switch circuit: between PCM connector terminal B15 and transmission range switch
A/T N Switch circuit: between PCM connector terminal B13 and transmission range switch
A/T D Switch circuit: between PCM connector terminal B22 and transmission range switch
A/T D3 Switch circuit (seven-position transmission): between PCM connector terminal B16 and
transmission range switch connector terminal No. 3.
A/T S Switch circuit (five-position transmission): between PCM connector terminal B16 and
A/T 2-1 Switch circuit (seven-position transmission): between PCM connector terminal B17 and
Forward Switch (ATP FWD) circuit: between PCM connector terminal B29 and transmission range
switch connector terminal No. 5.
Reverse Switch (ATP RVS) circuit: between PCM connector terminal B23 and transmission range
switch connector terminal No. 1.
Go to Step 15 after repairing the circuit.
NO - Go to Step 8 .
9. Inspect the transmission range switch.
Is the test result OK?
YES - Connect the transmission range switch connector, then go to Step 10 .
NO - Replace the transmission range switch, then go to Step 15 .
10. Update the A/T software in the PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good PCM.
12. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in each position.
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the transmission range switch and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM, then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to Step
1.
14. Monitor the OBD status for P0705 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
YES - If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original
PCM, If any other DTCs were indicated on Step 13 , go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the transmission range switch and the PCM. If the
1 . If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 11 and recheck.
17. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in each position.
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the transmission range switch and the PCM, then
return to Step 16 and recheck.
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs were indicated on Step 18 , go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the transmission range switch and the PCM, then go
to Step 1 . If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 16 and recheck.
DTC P0706:
Transmission Range Switch (Open)
NOTE:
transmission.
3. Raise the front of the vehicle, make sure it is securely supported, and allow the front wheels to rotate freely. Or
raise the vehicle on a lift.
4. Start the engine. Run the engine in D until the vehicle speed reaches 40 km/h (25 mph), then slow down, and stop
the wheels.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step
4 and recheck.■
7. Inspect the transmission range switch.
Is the test result OK?
YES - Connect the transmission range switch connector, then go to Step 8 .
8. Check the control wire adjustment.
the wheels.
11 and recheck.■
13. Shift to D, and verify the A/T D Switch and Forward Switch (ATP FWD) inputs with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Are A/T D Switch and Forward Switch (ATP FWD) ON?
YES - Seven-position transmission: Go to Step 14 .
Five-position transmission: Go to Step 16 .
14. Shift to D3, and verify the A/T D3 Switch and Forward Switch (ATP FWD) inputs with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Are A/T D3 Switch and Forward Switch (ATP FWD) ON?
15. Shift to 2, and verify the A/T 2-1 Switch and Forward Switch (ATP FWD) inputs with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Are A/T 2-1 Switch and Forward Switch (ATP FWD) ON?
16. Shift to S, and verify the A/T S Switch and Forward Switch (ATP FWD) with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Are A/T S Switch and Forward Switch (ATP FWD) ON?
the wheels.
20 and recheck.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the transmission range switch and ground (G101), or repair poor ground
(G101), then go to Step 37 .
Is there voltage?
NO - Repair open in the wire between the transmission range switch and PCM connector terminal B29, then go
to Step 37 .
Is there voltage?
YES - Seven-position transmission: Go to Step 28 .
Five-position transmission: Go to Step 30 .
to Step 37 .
Is there voltage?
to Step 37 .
Is there voltage?
to Step 37 .
Is there voltage?
to Step 37 .
31. Connect the transmission range switch connector.
34. Start the engine, and run it in D until the vehicle speed reaches 48 km/h (30 mph). Slow down and stop the wheels.
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the transmission range switch and the PCM. If the
1.
PCM. If any other DTCs were indicated on Step 35 , go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■
40. Start the engine, and run it in D until the vehicle speed reaches 48 km/h (30 mph). Slow down and stop the wheels.
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the transmission range switch and the PCM, then go
to Step 1 .
troubleshooting.■
DTC P0711:
ATF Temperature Sensor (Range/Performance)
NOTE:
transmission.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait for 20 seconds.
2. Check the ATF temperature with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Does the ATF temperature exceed the ambient air temperature?
YES - Record the ATF temperature. Leave the engine off for at least 30 minutes, and go to Step 3 .
NO - Record the ATF temperature. Test the stall speed RPM three times. Go to Step 3 after stall speed
testing.
3. Check the ATF temperature with the HDS.
Does the ATF temperature change?
YES - Leave the engine off for at least 30 minutes, and go to Step 4 .
NO - Replace the ATF temperature sensor, then go to Step 13 .
4. Check the ECT SENSOR with the HDS.
Is the ECT SENSOR equal to the ambient air temperature?
NO - Leave the engine off until the ECT SENSOR reads the same as ambient air temperature, then go to Step
5.
5. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR with the HDS.
Does the ATF temperature read about the same as the ECT SENSOR?
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM. If the
connection is OK, go to Step 6 .
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait for 20 seconds, then start the engine. Warm the engine up to normal
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
8. Turn the engine off, and leave it off until the engine coolant cools to the ambient air temperature (the ECT SENSOR
reads the same as the ambient air temperature).
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). Start off in D, accelerate with the throttle opened at least 4
degrees, and run the vehicle at speeds over 30 km/h (19 mph) for at least 5 minutes. Or test-drive the vehicle in D
for at least 20 seconds while the ATF temperature reads −10 °C to 110 °C (14 °F to 230 °F) by monitoring with the
HDS. Slow down and stop the wheels.
YES - If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM, then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to
Step 1 .
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM, then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to Step 1 . If
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to Step 7 and recheck.

operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
15. Turn the engine off, and leave it off until the engine coolant cools to the ambient air temperature (the ECT SENSOR
reads the same as the ambient air temperature).
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). Start off in D, accelerate with the throttle opened at least 4
degrees, and run the vehicle at speeds over 30 km/h (19 mph) for at least 5 minutes. Or test-drive the vehicle in D
for at least 20 seconds while the ATF temperature reads −10 °C to 110 °C (14 °F to 230 °F) by monitoring with the
HDS. Slow down and stop the wheels.
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to
Step 1 .
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to
Step 1 . If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 14 and recheck.
DTC P0712:
ATF Temperature Sensor (Short)
NOTE:
transmission.
1. Check the ATF temperature sensor voltage with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the ATF Temp Sensor (V) 0.07 V or less?
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for an intermittent short in the ATFT wire
between the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM.■
3. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector at the shift solenoid valve cover.
5. Check the ATF temperature sensor voltage with the HDS.
Is the ATF Temp Sensor (V) 0.07 V or less?
8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
9. Check for continuity between shift solenoid harness connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between PCM connector terminal B28 and shift solenoid harness connector
terminal No. 6, then go to Step 16 .
10. Check for continuity between shift solenoid harness connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
YES - Replace the ATF temperature sensor, then go to Step 16 .
13. Start the engine in P, and wait for at least 20 seconds.
Step 1 .
NO - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to Step 13 and recheck.
YES - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to
Step 1 .
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM. If the HDS
indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 18 and recheck.
DTC P0713:
ATF Temperature Sensor (Open)
NOTE:
transmission.
1. Check the ATF temperature sensor voltage with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Does the ATF Temp Sensor (V) exceed 4.93 V?
ATF temperature sensor and the PCM.■
3. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector at the shift solenoid valve cover.
5. Measure the voltage between shift solenoid harness connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
Is there about 5 V?
NO - Go to Step 7 .
6. Measure the voltage between shift solenoid harness connector terminals No. 6 and No. 7.
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Replace the ATF temperature sensor, then go to Step 17 .
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal B34 and the shift solenoid harness connector,
10. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B28 and shift solenoid harness connector terminal No. 6.
Step 1 .
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 13 and recheck.
16. Connect PCM connector B (49P).

17. Connect the ATF temperature sensor connector.
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to
Step 1 .
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to
Step 1 . If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 19 and recheck.
DTC P0716:
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (Range/Performance)
DTC P0717:
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (No Signal Input)
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Check for proper input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor installation. If the sensor is installed improperly, correct the
problem, then go to Step 40 .
4. Start the engine, and run the vehicle in D at speeds over 20 km/h (12 mph) for at least 10 seconds. Slow down and
stop the wheels.
5. Monitor the OBD status for P0716 or P0717 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at the PCM and
input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connectors. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step
4 and recheck.
8. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
9. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminals C44 and body ground, and between C48 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wires between PCM connector terminals C44, C48 and ground (G101), or repair poor
ground (G101), then go to Step 39 .
10. Connect PCM connector C (49P).
11. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector.
13. Measure the voltage between input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
Is there about 5 V?
17. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B19 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector
terminal No. 1.
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal B19 and the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor, then go to Step 39 .
21. Check for continuity between input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between PCM connector terminal B18 and the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector, then go to Step 39 .
terminal No. 3.
25. Measure the voltage between input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
Is there about 5 V?
26. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector.
stop the wheels.
YES - Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to Step 40 .
terminal No. 2.
stop the wheels.
Step 1 .
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM, then recheck. If the PCM was substituted,
go to Step 1 . If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 36 and recheck.
stop the wheels.
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the
PCM, then go to Step 1 .
troubleshooting.■
PCM, then go to Step 1 . If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to Step 41 and recheck.
DTC P0718:
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (Intermittent Failure)
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and let the transmission shift through all five gears at speeds over 20
km/h (12 mph). Slow down and stop the wheels.
input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
Step 2 and recheck.
5. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector, and inspect the connector and connector terminals
to be sure they are making good contact.
Are the connector terminals OK?
NO - Repair the connector terminals, then go to Step 6 .
6. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector.
NO - Troubleshooting is complete. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 7 and recheck.■
14. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector.
Is there about 5 V?
20. Check for continuity between input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between PCM connector terminal B18 and the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to Step 37 .
terminal No. 2.
terminal No. 1.
Step 1 .
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the
troubleshooting.■
PCM, then go to Step 1 . If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 39 and recheck.
DTC P0721:
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (Range/Performance)
DTC P0722:
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (No Signal Input)
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Check for proper output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor installation. If the sensor is installed improperly, correct
the problem, then go to Step 42 .
4. Start the engine, and run the vehicle in D with the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (min −1 ) or higher, for at least 10
seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at the PCM and
output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connectors. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
Step 4 and recheck.
11. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector.
13. Measure the voltage between output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
Is there about 5 V?
17. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal C13 and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector
terminal No. 1.
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal C13 and the output shaft (countershaft) speed
21. Check for continuity between output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between PCM connector terminal B38 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
terminal No. 3.
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal C14 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
24. Connect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
26. Measure the voltage between output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
Is there about 5 V?
27. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector.
30. Start the engine, and run the vehicle in D with the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (min −1 ) or higher, for at least 10
seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
YES - Replace the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor , then go to Step 42 .
35. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B38 and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector
terminal No. 2.
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal B38 and the output shaft (countershaft) speed
stop the wheels.
Step 1 .
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the
stop the wheels.
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the
troubleshooting.■
PCM, then go to Step 1 . If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to Step 43 and recheck.
DTC P0723:
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (Intermittent Failure)
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and let the transmission shift through all five gears with the engine
speed at 2,000 rpm (min −1 ) or higher, for several minutes. Slow down and stop the wheels.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the
output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
Step 2 and recheck.
5. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector, and inspect the connector and connector
terminals to be sure they are making good contact.
Are the connector terminals OK?
NO - Repair the connector terminals, then go to Step 6 .
6. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector.
7. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and let the transmission shift through all five gears with the engine
speed at 2,000 rpm (min −1 ) or higher, for several minutes. Slow down and stop the wheels.
NO - Troubleshooting is complete. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 7 and recheck.■
14. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector.
Is there about 5 V?
20. Check for continuity between output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between PCM connector terminal B38 and the output shaft (countershaft) speed
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Replace the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, then go to Step 37 .
27. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B38 and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector
terminal No. 2.
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal B38 and the output shaft (countershaft) speed
terminal No. 1.
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal C13 and the output shaft (countershaft) speed
Step 1 .
go to Step 1 . If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 34 .
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the
troubleshooting.■
DTC P0776:
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Stuck OFF
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review General
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the proper level, and check for fluid leaks.
3. Drain the ATF through a strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or excessive clutch material.
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive clutch material?
YES - Replace the transmission, then go to Step 10 .
NO - Replace the ATF, then go to Step 4 .
5. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and let the transmission shift through all five gears. Then slow down
to a stop. Shift to N, wait for at least 3 seconds, then shift into R. Move the vehicle in reverse for at least 3
seconds, then slow down and stop the wheels.
5 and recheck.■
8. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid Valve A in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate NORMAL?
NO - Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS by the test result, but if the HDS has not determined the
cause of the failure, go to Step 9 . If any part is replaced, go to Step 10 .
9. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A.
Does A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A work properly?
YES - Repair the hydraulic system related with shift valve A, or replace the transmission, then go to Step 10 .
NO - Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A, then go to Step 10 .
to a stop. Shift to N, wait for at least 3 seconds, then shift into R. Move the vehicle in reverse for at least 3
seconds, then slow down and stop the wheels.
YES - Troubleshooting is complete.■
NO - Return to Step 10 and recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 11 and recheck.
DTC P0747:
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON
5. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D for at least 12 seconds, and let the transmission shift through all five
gears. Then slow down to a stop.
5 and recheck.
Does A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A work properly?
DTC P0751:
Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck OFF
DTC P0752:
Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON
5 and recheck.■
8. Select Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve A operates with the
HDS.
Is a clicking sound heard?
NO - Replace shift solenoid valve A, then go to Step 11 .
9 and recheck.■
DTC P0756:
Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF
DTC P0757:
Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
5 and recheck.■
8. Select Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve B operates with the
HDS.
NO - Replace shift solenoid valve B, then go to Step 11 .
YES - Repair the hydraulic system related with shift valve B, or replace the transmission, then go to Step 11 .
9 and recheck.■
DTC P0761:
Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF
DTC P0762:
Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck ON
5 and recheck.■
8. Select Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve C operates with the
HDS.
NO - Replace shift solenoid valve C, then go to Step 11 .
10. Monitor the OBD status for P0761 or P0762 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail
YES - Repair the hydraulic system related with shift valve C, or replace the transmission, then go to Step 11 .
9 and recheck.■
DTC P0766:
Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck OFF
5. Start the engine, shift to N, then into R. Move the vehicle in reverse for at least 2 seconds, and stop the wheels.
Shift to D, and test-drive the vehicle for at least 2 seconds, and let the transmission shift through all five gears, then
slow down to a stop.
5 and recheck.■
8. Select Shift Solenoid D in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve D operates with the
HDS.
NO - Replace shift solenoid valve D, then go to Step 11 .
YES - Repair the hydraulic system related with shift valve D, or replace the transmission, then go to Step 11 .
9 and recheck.■
DTC P0767:
Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck ON
gears. Then slow down to a stop. With the brake pedal pressed, shift into to R, and wait for at least 3 seconds.
5 and recheck.■
8. Select Shift Solenoid D in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve D operates with the
HDS.
NO - Replace shift solenoid valve D, then go to Step 11 .
YES - Repair the hydraulic system related with shift valve D, or replace the transmission, then go to Step 11 .
9 and recheck.■
DTC P0776:
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF
DTC P0777:
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
5 and recheck.
8. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid Valve B in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS.
Does A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B work properly?
YES - Repair the hydraulic system related with shift valve B, or replace the transmission, then go to Step 11 .
NO - Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B, then go to Step 10 .
DTC P0796:
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF
DTC P0797:
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Stuck ON
5 and recheck.■
8. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid Valve C in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS.
9. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C.
Does A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C work properly?
YES - Repair the hydraulic system related with shift valve C, or replace the transmission, then go to Step 10 .
NO - Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C, then go to Step 10 .
DTC P0812:
Transmission Range Switch ATP R Switch (Open)
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Shift to R, and verify the A/T R Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the A/T R Switch ON?
NO - Go to Step 3 .
YES - Go to Step 6
or repair poor ground (G101), then go to Step 14 .
Is there voltage?
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal B15 and the transmission range switch, then go
to Step 14 .
8. Check for continuity between transmission range switch connector terminals No. 7 and No. 10 while the shift lever
is in R, and when the shift lever is shifted to any position other than R.
Is there continuity while the shift lever is in R, and no continuity when the shift lever is shifted to any position other
than R?
YES - Go to Step 9
11. Start the engine, shift to R while pressing the brake pedal, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Move the vehicle in
reverse at speeds below 5 km/h (3 mph) for at least 2 seconds, then increase the speed and move at speeds over 5
km/h (3 mph) for at least 2 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
Step 1 .

16. Start the engine, shift to R while pressing the brake pedal, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Move the vehicle in
reverse at speeds below 5 km/h (3 mph) for at least 2 seconds, then increase the speed and move at speeds over 5
km/h (3 mph) for at least 2 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
to Step 1 .
troubleshooting.■
DTC P0842:
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (Short or Stuck ON)
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Check the 2nd Pressure Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T data list when not in 2nd gear.
Is the 2nd Pressure Switch OFF?
NO - Go to Step 6 .
4. Test-drive the vehicle:
Seven-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in D or D3 for at least 2 seconds, then slow down
to a stop.
Five-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the sequential shift mode in S for at least 2
seconds, or in D, then slow down to a stop.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check the OP2SW wire for an intermittent short to
ground between the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If the HDS indicates
NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 4 and recheck.
7. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector.
9. Check the 2nd Pressure Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the 2nd Pressure Switch OFF?
YES - Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to Step 20 .
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B8 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between PCM connector terminal B8 and the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch, then go to Step 20 .
Seven-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in D for at least 2 seconds, then press the
accelerator pedal so that the transmission upshifts into 4th gear, and drive in 4th gear for at least 2 seconds.
Slow down and stop the wheels.
Five-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the sequential shift mode in S for at least 2
seconds, then upshift to 4th gear by pulling the paddle shifter + (upshift switch), and drive in 4th gear for at
least 2 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
Step 1 .
NO - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and
the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM, then recheck. If the PCM was
substituted, go to Step 1 . If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 17 and recheck.
YES - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and
the PCM, then go to Step 1 .
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and
the PCM, then go to Step 1 . If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 23 and recheck.
DTC P0843:
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (Open or Stuck OFF)
3. Shift into 2nd gear, and verify Shift Control display in the HDS:
Seven-position transmission: Shift to 2 while pressing the brake pedal, and verify with the HDS in the A/T
data list that the Shift Control indicates 2nd.
Five-position transmission: Shift to S while pressing the brake pedal, upshift to 2nd gear by pulling the
paddle shifter + (upshift switch), and verify with the HDS in the A/T data list that the Shift Control indicates
2nd.
4. Check the 2nd Pressure Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the 2nd Pressure Switch ON?
NO - Go to Step 7 .
Seven-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 2 for at least 2 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
seconds, then slow down to a stop.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the
2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
7. Measure the 2nd clutch pressure.
Is the 2nd clutch pressure within the service limits?
NO - Repair shift valves A, B, and C, and related hydraulic circuit, or replace the transmission, then go to Step
22 .
9. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector.
11. Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector terminal and body
ground.
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to Step 22 .
15. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B8 and the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
connector terminal.
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal B8 and the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
Step 1 .
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and
DTC P0847:
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (Short or Stuck ON)
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Check the 3rd Pressure Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T data list when not in 3rd gear.
Is the 3rd Pressure Switch OFF?
NO - Go to Step 6 .
Seven-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in D for at least 2 seconds, then slow down to a
stop.
Five-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the sequential shift mode in S for at least 2
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check the OP3SW wire for an intermittent short to
ground between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, return to Step 4 and recheck.
7. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector.
9. Check the 3rd Pressure Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the 3rd Pressure Switch OFF?
YES - Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to Step 20 .
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B9 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between PCM connector terminal B9 and the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
Seven-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in D for at least 2 seconds, then press the
Step 1 .
NO - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and
YES - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and
DTC P0848:
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (Open or Stuck OFF)
3. Verify Shift Control display in the HDS while driving in 3rd gear:
Seven-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in D3, and verify with the HDS in the A/T data list
that the Shift Control indicates 3rd.
Five-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the sequential shift mode in S, and verify with the
HDS in the A/T data list that the Shift Control indicates 3rd.
4. Check the 3rd Pressure Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the 3rd Pressure Switch ON?
NO - Go to Step 7 .
Seven-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in D3 for at least 2 seconds, then slow down to a
stop.
3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
7. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure.
Is the 3rd clutch pressure within the service limits?
NO - Repair shift valves A, B, and C, and related hydraulic circuit, or replace the transmission, then go to Step
22 .
9. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector.
11. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector terminal and body
ground.
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to Step 22 .
15. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B9 and the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
connector terminal.
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal B9 and the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
Step 1 .
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and
DTC P0962:
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A (Open or Short)
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Check that DTC P0962 recurs.
NO - Go to Step 3 .
NO - Go to Step 6 .
4. In the Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control menu, select Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A at 1.0 A.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections and loose terminals at A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
Step 3 and recheck.
8. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
Is there 3−10 Ω?
9. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and ground (G101), or repair
poor ground (G101), then go to Step 19 .
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B40 and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal B40 and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A, then go to Step 19 .
ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between PCM connector terminal B40 and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A, then go to Step 19 .

16. Start the engine, and wait for at least 1 second.
Step 1 .
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the
troubleshooting.■
DTC P0963:
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A
NOTE:
transmission.
NO - Go to Step 3 .
NO - Go to Step 6 .
4. In the Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control menu, select Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A at 0.2 A.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
Step 3 and recheck.
8. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and ground (G101), or repair
10. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector.
Step 1 .
15. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector.
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the
troubleshooting.■
DTC P0966:
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B (Open or Short)
NOTE:
transmission.
NO - Go to Step 3 .
NO - Go to Step 6 .
4. In the Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control menu, select Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B at 1.0 A.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
Step 3 and recheck.
8. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
9. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and ground (G101), or repair
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B48 and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
valve B, then go to Step 19 .
ground.
valve B, then go to Step 19 .

Step 1 .
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and the
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and the
troubleshooting.■
DTC P0967:
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B
NOTE:
transmission.
NO - Go to Step 3 .
NO - Go to Step 6 .
4. In the Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control menu, select Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B at 0.2 A.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
Step 3 and recheck.
8. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and ground (G101), or repair
10. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector.
Step 1 .
15. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector.
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and the
troubleshooting.■
DTC P0970:
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C (Open or Short)
NOTE:
transmission.
NO - Go to Step 3 .
NO - Go to Step 6 .
4. In the Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control menu, select Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C at 1.0 A.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
Step 3 and recheck.
8. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
9. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and ground (G101), or repair
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B26 and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
valve C, then go to Step 19 .
ground.
valve C, then go to Step 19 .

Step 1 .
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and the
go to Step 1 . If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to Step 16 and recheck.
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and the
troubleshooting.■
DTC P0971:
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C
NOTE:
transmission.
NO - Go to Step 3 .
NO - Go to Step 6 .
4. In the Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control menu, select Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C at 0.2 A.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
Step 3 and recheck.
8. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and ground (G101), or repair
10. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector.
Step 1 .
15. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector.
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and the
troubleshooting.■
DTC P0973:
Shift Solenoid Valve A (Short)
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review General Troubleshooting
Information.
transmission.
2. Start the engine, and test-drive the vehicle:
Seven-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in D, D3, or 2 for at least 1 second, then slow
down to a stop.
second, or in D, then slow down to a stop.
NO - Go to Step 4 .
4. Select Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the shift solenoid valve A with the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 7 .
Seven-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in D, D3, or 2 for at least 1 second. Slow down to
a stop, and wait for at least 1 second.
second, or in D. Slow down to a stop, and wait for at least 1 second.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check the SH A wire for an intermittent short to ground
between shift solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 4
and recheck.
9. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
10. Measure the resistance between PCM connector terminals B11 and C44 or C48.
Is there less than 12 Ω?
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminals B11 and C44 or C48.
YES - Repair short in the wire between PCM connector terminal B11 and the shift solenoid harness connector,
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve A.
Is shift solenoid valve A OK?
NO - Replace shift solenoid valve A or the shift solenoid harness, then go to Step 22 .
16. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals A9 and C44 or C48.
NO - Check for a blown No. 39 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check the PGM-
FI main relay, and repair open or short in the wire between PCM connector terminal A9 and the under-
dash fuse/relay box, then go to Step 22 .

Step 1 .
NO - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between shift solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM, then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to Step 1 . If the
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 19 and recheck.
YES - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between shift solenoid valve A and the PCM, then go to Step 1
.
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between shift solenoid valve A and the PCM, then go to Step 1
. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 24 and recheck.
DTC P0974:
Shift Solenoid Valve A (Open)
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Start the engine in P, and wait for at least 1 second.
NO - Go to Step 4 .
4. Select Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve A with the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 7 .
5. Start the engine in P, and wait for at least 1 second. Then:
Seven-position transmission: Test-drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in D, D3, or 2 for at least 1 second. Slow
down to a stop, and wait for at least 1 second.
Five-position transmission: Test-drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the sequential shift mode in S for at least 1
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at shift
solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 4 and recheck.
13. Remove the shift solenoid harness.
14. Check for continuity between shift solenoid harness connector terminal No. 5 and the shift solenoid valve A
connector terminal.
YES - Replace shift solenoid valve A, then go to Step 25 .
NO - Replace the shift solenoid harness, then go to Step 25 .
YES - Check for a blown No. 39 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check the PGM-
FI main relay, and repair open or short in the wire between PCM connector terminal A9 and the under-
dash fuse/relay box, then go to Step 25 .
20. Connect PCM connectors.
Step 1 .
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the PCM was
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM, then go to Step 1
.
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM, go to Step 1 . If
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 27 and recheck.
DTC P0976:
Shift Solenoid Valve B (Short)
NOTE:
transmission.
Seven-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 1st gear in D, D3, or 1 for at least 1 second, then slow
down to a stop.
Five-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 1st gear in the sequential shift mode in S for at least 1
second, or in D, then slow down to a stop.
NO - Go to Step 4 .
4. Select Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve B with the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 7 .
Seven-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 1st gear in D3 for at least 1 second, then press the
accelerator pedal so that the transmission upshifts into 3rd gear, and drive in 3rd gear for at least 1 second.
second, then upshift to 3rd gear by pulling the paddle shifter + (upshift switch), and drive in 3rd gear for at
least 1 second. Slow down and stop the wheels.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check the SH B wire for an intermittent short to ground
between shift solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 4
and recheck.
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve B.
Is shift solenoid valve B OK?
NO - Replace shift solenoid valve B or the shift solenoid harness, then go to Step 22 .
NO - Check for a blown No. 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open or
short in the wire between PCM connector terminal A1 and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to Step
22 .
Step 1 .
NO - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between shift solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the PCM was
YES - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between shift solenoid valve B and the PCM, then go to Step 1
.
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between shift solenoid valve B and the PCM, then go to Step 1
DTC P0977:
Shift Solenoid Valve B (Open)
NOTE:
transmission.
Seven-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in D3, and let the transmission shift through all three gears.
Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear for at least 1 second, then slow down to a stop.
Five-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 1st thru 3rd gears in the sequential shift mode in S. Drive the
vehicle in 3rd gear for at least 1 second, then slow down to a stop.
NO - Go to Step 4 .
4. Select Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve B with the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 7 .
solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 4 and recheck.
14. Check for continuity between shift solenoid harness connector terminal No. 2 and the shift solenoid valve B
connector terminal.
YES - Replace shift solenoid valve B, then go to Step 25 .
YES - Check for a blown No. 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open or
25 .
Step 1 .
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the PCM was
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM, then go to Step 1
.
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM, then go to Step 1
DTC P0979:
Shift Solenoid Valve C (Short)
NOTE:
transmission.
Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear for at least 1 second, then slow down to a stop.
vehicle in 3rd gear for at least 1 second, then slow down to a stop.
NO - Go to Step 4 .
4. Select Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve C with the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 7 .
Seven-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in D3, and let the transmission shift through all three gears,
then slow down to a stop. Shift into P, and wait for at least 1 second.
Five-position transmission: Drive the vehicle in 1st thru 3rd gears in the sequential shift mode in S, then slow
down to a stop. Shift into P, and wait for at least 1 second.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check the SH C wire for an intermittent short to ground
between shift solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 4
and recheck.
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve C.
Is shift solenoid valve C OK?
NO - Replace shift solenoid valve C or the shift solenoid harness, then go to Step 22 .
NO - Check for a blown No. 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open or
22 .

Step 1 .
NO - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between shift solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the PCM was
YES - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between shift solenoid valve C and the PCM, then go to Step 1
.
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between shift solenoid valve C and the PCM, then go to Step 1
DTC P0980:
Shift Solenoid Valve C (Open)
NOTE:
transmission.
NO - Go to Step 4 .
4. Select Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve C with the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 7 .
5. Start the engine in P, and wait for at least 1 second. Then:
Seven-position transmission: Test-drive the vehicle in D3, and let the transmission shift through all three
gears. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear for at least 1 second, then slow down to a stop. Shift into P, and wait for
at least 1 second.
Five-position transmission: Test-drive the vehicle in 1st thru 3rd gears in the sequential shift mode in S. Drive
the vehicle in 3rd gear for at least 1 second, then slow down to a stop. Shift into P, and wait for at least 1
second.
solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 4 and recheck.
14. Check for continuity between shift solenoid harness connector terminal No. 1 and the shift solenoid valve C
connector terminal.
YES - Replace shift solenoid valve C, then go to Step 25 .
YES - Check for a blown No. 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open or
25 .
Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear for at least 1 second, then slow down to a stop. Shift into P, and wait for at least
1 second.
vehicle in 3rd gear for at least 1 second, then slow down to a stop. Shift into P, and wait for at least 1
second.
Step 1 .
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the PCM was
Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear for at least 1 second, then slow down to a stop. Shift into P, and wait for at least
1 second.
vehicle in 3rd gear for at least 1 second, then slow down to a stop. Shift into P, and wait for at least 1
second.
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM, then go to Step 1
.
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM, then go to Step 1
DTC P0982:
Shift Solenoid Valve D (Short)
NOTE:
transmission.
NO - Go to Step 4 .
4. Select Shift Solenoid D in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve D with the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 7 .
5. Start the engine in P, and wait for at least 1 second. With the brake pedal pressed, shift to N, and wait for at least
1 second.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check the SH D wire for an intermittent short to ground
between shift solenoid valve E and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 4
and recheck.
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve D.
Is shift solenoid valve D OK?
NO - Replace shift solenoid valve D or the shift solenoid harness , then go to Step 21 .
15. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals C10 and C44 or C48.
NO - Check for a blown No. 20 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open or
short in the wire between PCM connector terminal C10 and the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to
Step 21 .
1 second.
Step 1 .
NO - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between shift solenoid valve D and the PCM. If the PCM was
1 second.
YES - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between shift solenoid valve D and the PCM, then go to Step 1
.
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for an intermittent short in the wire between shift solenoid valve D and the PCM, then go to Step 1
DTC P0983:
Shift Solenoid Valve D (Open)
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Start the engine in P. With the brake pedal pressed, shift to N, and wait for at least 1 second.
NO - Go to Step 4 .
4. Select Shift Solenoid D in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve D with the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 7 .
1 second.
solenoid valve D and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to Step 4 and recheck.
14. Check for continuity between shift solenoid harness connector terminal No. 8 and the shift solenoid valve D
connector terminal.
YES - Replace shift solenoid valve D, then go to Step 24 .
16. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals C10 and C44 or C48.
YES - Check for a blown No. 20 (15A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open or
short in the wire between PCM connector terminal C10 and the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to
Step 24 .
1 second.
Step 1 .
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid valve D and the PCM. If the PCM was
1 second.
YES - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid valve D and the PCM, then go to Step 1
.
troubleshooting.■
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid valve D and the PCM, then go to Step 1
DTC Troubleshooting: P16C0
DTC P16C0:
PCM A/T Control System Incomplete Update
NOTE:
This code is indicated when PCM updating is incomplete.
1. Update the A/T software in the PCM.
2. Check whether the DTC P16C0 is indicated in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu with the HDS.
Is DTC P16C0 indicated?
YES - Replace the original PCM. ■
NO - PCM updating is complete.■
DTC P1717:
Transmission Range Switch ATP RVS Switch (Open)
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Shift to R, and verify the A/T R Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the A/T R Switch ON?
NO - Check for proper transmission range switch installation, and adjust the shift cable, then recheck.■
3. Check the Reverse Switch (ATP RVS) signal with the HDS.
Is the Reverse Switch (ATP RVS) ON?
NO - Go to Step 4 .
or repair poor ground (G101), then go to Step 15 .
Is there voltage?
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal B23 and the transmission range switch, then go
to Step 15 .
9. Check for continuity between transmission range switch connector terminals No. 1 and No. 10 while the shift lever
is in R, and when the shift lever is shifted to any position other than R.
Is there continuity while the shift lever is in R, and no continuity when the shift lever is shifted to any position other
than R?
12. Start the engine, and shift to R. Move the vehicle in reverse at speeds below 5 km/h (3 mph) for at least 2 seconds,
then increase the speed and move at speeds over 5 km/h (3 mph) for at least 2 seconds. Slow down and stop the
wheels.
Step 1 .
17. Start the engine, and shift to R. Move the vehicle in reverse at speeds below 5 km/h (3 mph) for at least 2 seconds,
then increase the speed and move at speeds over 5 km/h (3 mph) for at least 2 seconds. Slow down and stop the
wheels.
to Step 1 .
troubleshooting.■
DTC P1746:
Hydraulic Control System (Cut A Valve Stuck OFF or Cut B Valve Stuck ON)
YES - Repair cut A valve in the servo body, repair cut B valve in the main valve body, replace the main valve body
or servo body, then go to Step 7 , or replace the transmission.
5 and recheck.■
DTC P1747:
Hydraulic Control System (Cut A Valve Stuck ON or Cut B Valve Stuck OFF)
YES - Repair cut A valve in the servo body, repair cut B valve in the main valve body, replace the main valve body
or servo body, then go to Step 7 , or replace the transmission.
5 and recheck.■
DTC P1780:
Shift Control System (Transmission Default Mode)
to a stop.
3. Check for other DTCs indicated simultaneously with DTC P1780.
NOTE: DTC P1780 means there is one or more A/T DTCs about the shift control system.
Are there other DTCs?
YES - Troubleshoot the problem indicated by the DTC.■
NO - Go to Step 4 .
to a stop.
Step 1 .
NO - Go to Step 7 .
NO - Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM, then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to Step 1 . If the HDS indicates NOT
DTC Troubleshooting: U0029 (107) - A/T
DTC U0029:
F-CAN Malfunction (F-CAN bus OFF)
2. Start the engine, and run it at idle for at least 2 minutes.
3. Check whether DTC U0029 is indicated in the DTCs/Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS.
Is DTC U0029 indicated in the PGM-FI system?
YES - Troubleshoot DTC U0029 in the PGM-FI system. ■
NO - Go to Step 4 .
4. Check whether DTC U0029 is indicated in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu with the HDS.
Step 1 .
NO - Go to Step 7 .
7. Monitor the OBD status for U0029 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
DTC Troubleshooting: U0121 (107) - A/T System
DTC U0121:
F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-ABS Modulator-Control Unit)
2. Start the engine, and run it at idle for at least 2 minutes.
3. Check whether DTC U0121 is indicated in the DTCs/Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS.
Is DTC U0121 indicated in the PGM-FI system?
YES - Troubleshoot DTC U0121 in the PGM-FI system. ■
NO - Go to Step 4 .
4. Check whether DTC U0121 is indicated in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu with the HDS.
Step 1 .
NO - Go to Step 7 .
7. Monitor the OBD status for U0121 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential
Automatic Capacity Fluid change 2.5 L (2.6 US qt, 2.2 Imp qt)
transmission fluid Use genuine Honda ATF-Z1 Overhaul 5.85 L (6.18 US qt, 5.15 Imp qt)
Pressure (Seven- Line pressure At 2,000 rpm (min −1 ) in 900−960 kPa (9.2−9.8 kgf/cm 2 , 130−140 850 kPa (8.7 kgf/cm 2 ,
position P or N psi) 120 psi)
transmission) 1st clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm (min ) in 890−970 kPa (9.1−9.9 kgf/cm 2 , 130−140
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
1 psi) 120 psi)
2nd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm (min −1 ) in 890−970 kPa (9.1−9.9 kgf/cm 2 , 130−140 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
2 psi) 120 psi)
3rd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm (min −1 ) in 890−970 kPa (9.1−9.9 kgf/cm 2 , 130−140 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
3rd gear in D3 psi) 120 psi)
4th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm (min −1 ) in 890−970 kPa (9.1−9.9 kgf/cm 2 , 130−140 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
4th gear in D psi) 120 psi)
5th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm (min ) in 890−970 kPa (9.1−9.9 kgf/cm 2 , 130−140
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
Pressure (Five- Line pressure At 2,000 rpm (min −1 ) in 900−960 kPa (9.2−9.8 kgf/cm 2 , 130−140 850 kPa (8.7 kgf/cm 2 ,
transmission) 1st clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm (min −1 ) in 890−970 kPa (9.1−9.9 kgf/cm 2 , 130−140 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
1st gear in S psi) 120 psi)
2nd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm (min ) in 890−970 kPa (9.1−9.9 kgf/cm 2 , 130−140
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
2nd gear in S psi) 120 psi)
3rd gear in S psi) 120 psi)
4th gear in S psi) 120 psi)
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
Torque converter Stall speed 2,200 rpm (min −1 ) 2,050−2,350 rpm (min
Check with vehicle on level ground −1 )
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)

Clutch Clutch between clutch end-plate and top 1st ——— 1.62−1.82 mm
disc (0.064−0.072 in.)
2nd ——— 0.5−0.7 mm
(0.020−0.028 in.)
3rd ——— 0.73−0.93 mm
(0.029−0.037 in.)
4th ——— 0.7−0.9 mm
(0.028−0.035 in.)
5th ——— 0.73−0.93 mm
(0.029−0.037 in.)
Clutch return spring free length 1st 35.2 mm (1.39 in.) 34.5 mm (1.36 in.)
2nd 39.5 mm (1.56 in.) 37.4 mm (1.47 in.)
3rd 45.15 mm (1.778 in.) 43.0 mm (1.69 in.)
4th 39.5 mm (1.56 in.) 37.4 mm (1.47 in.)
5th 45.15 mm (1.778 in.) 43.0 mm (1.69 in.)
Clutch disc thickness 1st 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) ———
2nd 1.96 mm (0.077 in.) ———
3rd 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) ———
4th 1.96 mm (0.077 in.) ———
5th 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) ———
Clutch plate thickness 1st 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) When discolored
2nd 2.3 mm (0.091 in.) When discolored
3rd 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) When discolored
4th 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) When discolored
Clutch waved-plate height 1st, 3rd, and 0.07−0.20 mm (0.003−0.008 in.) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
5th clutches
1st, 3rd, and 5th clutch end-plate Mark 1 2.1 mm (0.082 in.) When discolored
thickness Mark 2 2.2 mm (0.087 in.) When discolored
Mark 3 2.3 mm (0.091 in.) When discolored
2nd and 4th clutch end-plate thickness Mark AC or AM 2.1 mm (0.082 in.) When discolored
Mark AD or AN 2.2 mm (0.087 in.) When discolored
Mark AE or AP 2.3 mm (0.091 in.) When discolored
Mark AF or AQ 2.4 mm (0.094 in.) When discolored
Mark AG or AR 2.5 mm (0.098 in.) When discolored
Mark AH or AS 2.6 mm (0.102 in.) When discolored
Mark AJ or AT 2.7 mm (0.106 in.) When discolored
Mark AK or AU 2.8 mm (0.110 in.) When discolored
Mark AL or AV 2.9 mm (0.114 in.) When discolored

ATF pump ATF pump thrust clearance 0.03−0.06 mm (0.001−0.002 in.) 0.07 mm (0.003 in.)
Clearance between ATF pump gear and Drive gear 0.210−0.265 mm (0.008−0.010 in.) ———
body Driven gear 0.070−0.125 mm (0.003−0.005 in.) ———
ATF pump driven gear I.D. 14.016−14.034 mm (0.5518−0.5525 in.) When worn or damaged
ATF pump driven gear shaft O.D. 13.980−13.990 mm (0.5504−0.5508 in.) When worn or damaged
Stator shaft Needle bearing contact I.D. Torque converter 27.000−27.021 mm (1.063−1.064 in.) When worn or damaged
side
ATF pump side 29.000−29.021 mm (1.1417−1.1426 in.) ———
Sealing ring contact area I.D. 29.000−29.021 mm (1.1417−1.1426 in.) 29.05 mm (1.144 in.)
Reverse shift fork Fork finger thickness 5.90−6.00 mm (0.232−0.236 in.) 5.40 mm (0.213 in.)
Park gear and ——— When worn or damaged
pawl
Servo body Shift fork shaft bore I.D. 14.000−14.010 mm (0.5512−0.5526 in.) When worn or damaged
Shift fork shaft valve bore I.D. 37.000−37.039 mm (1.4567−1.4582 in.) 37.045 mm (1.4585 in.)
Regulator valve Sealing ring contact I.D. 29.000−29.021 mm (1.1417−1.1426 in.) 29.05 mm (1.144 in.)
body
Mainshaft Diameter of needle bearing contact area At stator shaft 22.984−23.000 mm (0.9049−0.9055 in.) When worn or damaged
At 5th gear collar 32.975−32.991 mm (1.2982−1.2989 in.) When worn or damaged
At 3rd gear 46.986−46.999 mm (1.8498−1.8503 in.) When worn or damaged
I.D. of gears 5th gear 37.000−37.016 mm (1.4567−1.4573 in.) When worn or damaged
3rd gear 52.000−52.013 mm (2.0472−2.0478 in.) When worn or damaged
End play 5th gear 015−0.27 mm (0.006−0.106 in.) ———
3rd gear 0.04−0.10 mm (0.002−0.004 in.) ———
40 x 63 mm thrust washer thickness No. 1 3.750 mm (0.1476 in.) When worn or damaged
No. 2 3.775 mm (0.1486 in.) When worn or damaged
5th gear collar length 60.4−60.5 mm (2.380−2.381 in.) ———
5th gear collar flange thickness 3.70−3.85 mm (0.146−0.152 in.) When worn or damaged
Sealing ring thickness 1.91−1.97 mm (0.0752−0.0776 in.) 1.86 mm (0.0732 in.)
Width of sealing ring groove 2.025−2.060 mm (0.0797−0.0811 in.) 2.080 mm (0.0819 in.)
3rd clutch feed pipe O.D. 7.97−7.98 mm (0.3138−0.3142 in.) 7.95 mm (0.313 in.)
Feed pipe bushing I.D. 8.000−8.015 mm (0.3150−0.3156 in.) 8.030 mm (0.3161 in.)

Countershaft Diameter of needle bearing contact area At torque 33.504−33.517 mm (1.3191−1.3196 in.) When worn or damaged
converter housing
At 5th gear 32.986−32.999 mm (1.2987−1.2991 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse selector 35.983−35.999 mm (1.4167−1.4173 in.) When worn or damaged
hub
Reverse gear 42.000−42.016 mm (1.6535−1.6542 in.) When worn or damaged
End play 5th gear 0.04−0.27 mm (0.002−0.011 in.) ———
Reverse gear 0.10−0.25 mm (0.004−0.010 in.) ———
Reverse selector hub width 29.25−29.45 mm (1.152−1.160 in.) ———
Collar, 33.2 x 40 x 26 mm length 25.95−26.00 mm (1.022−1.024 in.) ———
Reverse selector hub O.D. 51.87−51.90 mm (2.042−2.043 in.) When worn or damaged
Secondary shaft - Diameter of needle bearing contact area 1st gear 30.986−30.999 mm (1.2199−1.2204 in.) When worn or damaged
1/2 2nd gear 42.986−42.999 mm (1.6924−1.6929 in.) When worn or damaged
4th gear collar 34.975−34.991 mm (1.3770−1.3776 in.) When worn or damaged
I.D. of gears 1st gear 38.000−38.016 mm (1.4961−1.4967 in.) When worn or damaged
2nd gear 49.000−49.016 mm (1.9291−1.9298 in.) When worn or damaged
4th gear 41.000−41.016 mm (1.6142−1.6148 in.) When worn or damaged
End play 1st gear 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.) ———
2nd gear 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.) ———
4th gear 0.10−0.22 mm (0.004−0.009 in.) ———
43 x 54.5 mm thrust washer thickness No. 1 2.900 mm (0.114 in.) When worn or damaged

Secondary shaft - 4th gear collar length 32.9−33.0 mm (1.295−1.299 in.) ———
2/2 4th gear collar flange thickness 3.75−3.90 mm (0.148−0.154 in.) When worn or damaged
Clutch feed pipe O.D. 2nd clutch 6.97−6.98 mm (0.2744−0.2748 in.) 6.95 mm (0.2736 in.)
4th clutch 11.47−11.48 mm (0.4516−0.4520 in.) 11.45 mm (0.4508 in.)
Clutch feed pipe bushing O.D. 2nd clutch 7.018−7.030 mm (0.2763−0.2768 in.) 7.045 mm (0.2774 in.)
ATF guide collar I.D. at sealing ring contact 21.200−21.221 mm (0.8346−0.8355 in.) 21.25 mm (0.8366 in.)
area
Idler gear shaft End cover bearing contact area 30.003−30.013 mm (1.1812−1.1816 in.) When worn or damaged
Cotters thickness 1.39−1.42 mm (0.055−0.056 in.) ———
Reverse idler gear Reverse idler gear shaft O.D. at needle 14.99−15.00 mm (0.590−0.591 in.) When worn or damaged
bearing contact area
I.D. 20.001−20.014 mm (0.7874−0.7880 in.) When worn or damaged
I.D. of reverse idler gear shaft contact area 14.800−14.818 mm (0.5827−0.5834 in.) ———
on transmission housing
I.D. of reverse idler gear shaft holder 14.800−14.824 mm (0.5827−0.5836 in.) When worn or damaged
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New
Wire Diameter O.D. Free Length No. of Coil
Main valve body Cut valve B spring 0.8 mm (0.031 9.9 mm (0.290 27.3 mm (1.075 8.0
spring in.) in.) in.)
Shift valve A spring 0.8 mm (0.031 7.1 mm (0.280 23.7 mm (0.933 9.7
in.) in.) in.)
Shift valve C spring 0.8 mm (0.031 7.1 mm (0.280 23.7 mm (0.933 9.7
in.) in.) in.)
Relief valve spring 1.0 mm (0.039 9.6 mm (0.378 34.1 mm (1.343 10.2
in.) in.) in.)
Lock-up control valve spring 0.6 mm (0.024 7.1 mm (0.280 29.6 mm (1.165 11.2
in.) in.) in.)
Cooler check valve spring 0.85 mm (0.033 6.6 mm (0.260 27.0 mm (1.063 11.3
in.) in.) in.)
Shift valve D spring 0.8 mm (0.031 5.6 mm (0.220 28.1 mm (1.106 15.9
in.) in.) in.)
Servo control valve spring 0.8 mm (0.031 9.9 mm (0.290 27.3 mm (1.075 8.0
in.) in.) in.)
Regulator valve Stator reaction spring 4.5 mm (0.177 35.4 mm 30.3 mm (1.193 1.92
body spring in.) (1.394 in.) in.)
Regulator valve spring A 1.9 mm (0.075 14.7 mm 80.6 mm (3.173 16.1
in.) (0.579 in.) in.)
Regulator valve spring B 1.6 mm (0.063 9.2 mm (0.362 44.0 mm (1.732 12.5
in.) in.) in.)
Torque converter check valve spring 1.2 mm (0.047 8.6 mm (0.339 33.8 mm (1.331 12.2
in.) in.) in.)
Lock-up shift valve spring 1.0 mm (0.039 6.6 mm (0.260 35.5 mm (1.398 18.2
in.) in.) in.)
1st accumulator spring B 2.4 mm (0.094 12.2 mm 35.0 mm (1.378 7.7
in.) (0.480 in.) in.)
1st accumulator spring A 2.4 mm (0.094 18.6 mm 50.1 mm (1.972 6.7
in.) (0.732 in.) in.)
4th accumulator spring 2.5 mm (0.098 14.6 mm 29.9 mm (1.177 4.9
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
Automatic Transmission and A/T Dirrerential (cont'd)

Servo body spring Cut valve A spring 0.9 mm (0.035 9.9 mm (0.390 22.3 mm (0.878 6.9
in.) in.) in.)
Shift valve B spring 0.8 mm (0.031 7.1 mm (0.280 23.7 mm (0.933 9.7
in.) in.) in.)
5th accumulator spring A 2.5 mm (0.098 16.6 mm 46.9 mm (1.846 7.8
in.) (0.654 in.) in.)
5th accumulator spring B 1.9 mm (0.075 10.0 mm 38.5 mm (1.516 10.6
in.) (0.394 in.) in.)
2nd accumulator spring A 1.8 mm (0.071 14.6 mm 43.8 mm (1.724 7.9
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
2nd accumulator spring B 1.85 mm (0.073 9.4 mm (0.370 32.5 mm(1.280 8.7
in.) in.) in.)
3rd accumulator spring A 1.8 mm (0.071 14.6 mm 43.8 mm (1.724 7.9
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
3rd accumulator spring B 1.85 mm (0.073 9.4 mm (0.370 32.5 mm (1.280 8.7
in.) in.) in.)

A/T differential Pinion shaft contact area I.D. 18.010−18.028 mm (0.709−0.710 in.) ———
carrier Clearance between carrier and pinion shaft 0.023−0.057 mm (0.001−0.002 in.) 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
Driveshaft contact area I.D. 26.025−26.045 mm (1.024−1.025 in.) ———
Clearance between carrier and driveshaft 0.045−0.086 mm (0.002−0.003 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
Intermediate shaft contact area I.D. 26.025−26.045 mm (1.024−1.025 in.) ———
Clearance between carrier and Intermediate 0.045−0.086 mm (0.002−0.003 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
shaft
Tapered roller bearing starting torque For new bearing 2.7−3.9 N·m(28−40 kgf·cm, 24−35 lbf·in.) Adjust
(preload) For reused 2.5−3.5 N·m(25−37 kgf·cm, 21−32 lbf·in.) Adjust
bearing
Final driven gear backlash (Reference) 0.085−0.144 mm (0.003−0.006 in.) 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
A/T differential Backlash 0.05−0.15 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) ———
pinion gear I.D. 18.042−18.066 mm (0.7103−0.7113 in.) ———
Clearance between pinion gear and pinion 0.055−0.095 mm (0.002−0.004 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
shaft
Automatic transmission fluid
Reverse idler gear
Reverse shift fork
Park gear and pawl
pawl
Pressure (Seven-position transmission)
1 psi) 120 psi)
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
2 psi) 120 psi)
Pressure (Five-position transmission)
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
Countershaft
converter housing
hub
Mainshaft
3rd gear 0.04−0.10 mm (0.002−0.004 in.) ———
Secondary shaft - 1/2
2nd gear 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.) ———
4th gear 0.10−0.22 mm (0.004−0.009 in.) ———
area
Clutch
disc (0.064−0.072 in.)
2nd ——— 0.5−0.7 mm
(0.020−0.028 in.)
3rd ——— 0.73−0.93 mm
(0.029−0.037 in.)
4th ——— 0.7−0.9 mm
(0.028−0.035 in.)
5th ——— 0.73−0.93 mm
(0.029−0.037 in.)
2nd 39.5 mm (1.56 in.) 37.4 mm (1.47 in.)
3rd 45.15 mm (1.778 in.) 43.0 mm (1.69 in.)
4th 39.5 mm (1.56 in.) 37.4 mm (1.47 in.)
5th 45.15 mm (1.778 in.) 43.0 mm (1.69 in.)
2nd 1.96 mm (0.077 in.) ———
3rd 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) ———
4th 1.96 mm (0.077 in.) ———
5th 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) ———
5th clutches
A/T differential carrier
shaft
bearing
A/T differential pinion gear
shaft
Idler gear shaft
Torque converter
ATF pump
Main valve body spring
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
Regulator valve body
body
Regulator valve body spring
in.) (0.579 in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.480 in.) in.)
in.) (0.732 in.) in.)
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
Servo body
Servo body spring
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.654 in.) in.)
in.) (0.394 in.) in.)
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
Stator shaft
side
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
1 psi) 120 psi)
2 psi) 120 psi)
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,

disc (0.064−0.072 in.)
2nd ——— 0.5−0.7 mm
(0.020−0.028 in.)
3rd ——— 0.73−0.93 mm
(0.029−0.037 in.)
4th ——— 0.7−0.9 mm
(0.028−0.035 in.)
5th ——— 0.73−0.93 mm
(0.029−0.037 in.)
2nd 39.5 mm (1.56 in.) 37.4 mm (1.47 in.)
3rd 45.15 mm (1.778 in.) 43.0 mm (1.69 in.)
4th 39.5 mm (1.56 in.) 37.4 mm (1.47 in.)
5th 45.15 mm (1.778 in.) 43.0 mm (1.69 in.)
2nd 1.96 mm (0.077 in.) ———
3rd 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) ———
4th 1.96 mm (0.077 in.) ———
5th 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) ———
5th clutches

side
pawl
body
3rd gear 0.04−0.10 mm (0.002−0.004 in.) ———

converter housing
hub
2nd gear 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.) ———
4th gear 0.10−0.22 mm (0.004−0.009 in.) ———

area
Wire Diameter O.D. Free Length No. of Coils
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.579 in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.480 in.) in.)
in.) (0.732 in.) in.)
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)

in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.654 in.) in.)
in.) (0.394 in.) in.)
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)

shaft
bearing
Final driven gear backlash Reference 0.085−0.144 mm (0.003−0.006 in.) 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
shaft
Starting System Circuit Diagram
A/T model
BATTERY TERMINAL
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A) T−9 No. 60 (50 A) T1 2 BAT
WHT WHT
ST
1
No. 44 (7.5 A) X3
PNK
STARTER
CUT RELAY
B16 B33
BLK GRN ORN
BLK/WHT LT GRN
BLU/WHT
B S
M SOLENOID
4
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(ON: P, N)
10
STARTER
BLK
G101
A/T Assembly Removal
Hanger plate
07MAK-PY30100
Engine support hanger

AAR-T1256-J00
This special tool is available from Snap-on Tools International, LLC.
NOTE:
Engine support hanger (AAR-T1256-J00) must be used with the side engine mount installed.
2. Do the battery terminal disconnect procedure.
4. Remove the battery base.
5. Remove the cowl cover.
6. Fix the hood in a vertical position.
7. Remove the cowl cover stiffener (A), and remove the windshield wiper motor and center-front cowl cover (B).
9. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and make sure it is securely supported.
10. Remove the wheels.
14. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector (A), A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve B connector (B), and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector (C).
15. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (D), and remove the harness cover from its bracket (E).
16. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (A).

17. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector (B), and remove the harness clamp (C) from its
bracket (D).
18. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector (A) and 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch connector (B).
19. Remove the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF cooler lines (B). Turn the ends of the cooler hoses up to prevent
ATF from flowing out, then plug the cooler hoses and lines.
20. Check for any signs of leakage at the hose joints.
21. Remove the bolt securing the harness clamp bracket (A).
22. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector (B) and 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector
(C), and remove the harness clamps (D) from the clamp brackets (E).
23. Remove the air cleaner housing mounting bracket from the transmission hanger.
24. Install the hanger plate (07MAK-PY30100) (A) to the air cleaner housing mounting bracket (B) with the 8 x 1.25 mm
bolt (C).
25. Remove the harness clamp (A) from its clamp bracket (B) located in front of the left damper top.
26. Set up the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256-J00). Carefully position the engine support hanger to the vehicle;
position both cross-arm foot bases (C) over the harness clamp brackets on both sides, and position both front
stands on the front bulkhead. Attach the hook to the hanger plate, tighten the wing nut by hand, and lift and support
the engine.
27. Insert a 5 mm Allen wrench (A) in the top of the ball joint pin (B), and remove the nuts (C), then separate the
stabilizer link (D) from the stabilizer ends (E).
28. With HID lamp model: If removing the left side lower arm, disconnect the suspension stroke sensor, and the lower
arm.
29. Remove the lock pin (F) and castle nuts (G), and separate the lower arms (H) from the knuckles (I).
30. Remove the steering gearbox mounting bolt (A), bolt (B), and stiffener (C) on the right.
31. Remove the steering gearbox mounting bolt (A), bolt (B), and stiffener (C) on the left.
32. Remove the steering gearbox mounting bolt on the middle.

33. Place a jack under the transmission, raise it just enough to take it off of the lower torque rod, and remove the lower
torque rod bolt (A) on the transmission.
34. Remove the lower torque rod nut (B) and bolt (C) on the front subframe, and remove the lower torque rod (D).
35. Remove the jack.
36. Support the front subframe with a wood piece and a jack.
37. Remove the six bolts securing the front subframe.

38. Hang the steering gearbox to the body with a strap.
39. Remove the shift cable cover.
40. Pry up the lock tab of the lock washer (A), and remove the lock bolt (B) and lock washer.
41. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder (C), and separate the shift cable (D) from the selector control shaft
end (E). Do not bend the shift cable excessively.
42. Remove the lower torque rod mounting bracket (A) and shift cable holder bracket (B).
43. Remove the torque converter cover (A), and remove the drive plate bolts (B) (eight bolts) while rotating the
crankshaft pulley.
44. Pry out the driveshafts from the differential and the intermediate shaft.
45. Coat all precision machined surfaces with clean engine oil, then put plastic bags over driveshaft ends.
46. Remove the bolts securing the heat shield (A).
47. Remove the intermediate shaft (B) and heat shield.
48. Coat all precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil, then put plastic bags over intermediate shaft ends.
49. Remove the front and upper transmission housing mounting bolts.
50. Remove the transmission ground cable terminal (A) from the transmission mount bracket (B).
51. Place a jack under the transmission, raise it just enough to take it off of the mount, and remove the transmission
mount and mount bracket.
53. Remove the rear transmission housing mounting bolts.

54. Lower the transmission by loosening the wing nut on the engine support hanger, and tilt the engine just enough for
the end of the transmission to clear the side frame.
55. Place a jack under the transmission.
56. Remove the lower transmission housing mounting bolts.

57. Slide the transmission away from the engine to remove it from the vehicle.
58. Remove the torque converter and dowel pins.

59. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it's damaged.
A/T Assembly Installation
Hanger plate
07MAK-PY30100

AAR-T1256-J00
This special tool is available from Snap-on Tools International, LLC.
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces.
1. Install the torque converter (A) on the mainshaft (B) with the new O-ring (C).
2. Install the 14 mm dowel pins (D) in the torque converter housing.
3. Place the transmission on the jack, and raise the transmission to the engine level.
4. Attach the transmission to the engine, and install the lower transmission housing mounting bolts.
5. Install the rear transmission housing mounting bolt.
6. Install the front and upper transmission housing mounting bolts.
7. Place a jack under the transmission, raise it and secure the transmission mount and mount bracket (A) on the
body and transmission housing with the new mounting bolts and new nuts loose.
8. Tighten the transmission mount bolts to the specified torque in the following order; on the middle (B), on the front
(C), and on the rear (D).
9. Remove the jack, and tighten the bolt (E) and nuts (F) on the transmission mount bracket to the specified torque.
10. Install the transmission ground cable terminal (G).
11. Install the new set ring (A) on the intermediate shaft (B).
12. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft contacts the transmission (differential) with solvent, and dry with
compressed air. Apply ATF to the intermediate shaft splines, put the heat shield (C) on the intermediate shaft, then
install the intermediate shaft; be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission.
13. Secure the heat shield with the mounting bolts.
14. Install the new set ring (A) on the left driveshaft (B).
15. Clean the areas where the left driveshaft contacts the transmission (differential) with solvent, and dry with
compressed air. Then install the left driveshaft; be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the
transmission. Turn the steering knuckle fully outward, and slide the driveshaft into the differential until you feel its
set ring fully engage the side gear.
16. Apply right driveshaft inboard-joint splines with the recommended grease.
17. Slide the right driveshaft over the intermediate shaft splines until you feel the driveshaft fully engage the
intermediate shaft set ring.
18. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate with eight bolts (A). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as necessary to
tighten the bolts to 1/2 of the specified torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross pattern. After tightening the
last bolt, check that the crankshaft rotate freely.
19. Install the torque converter cover (B).
20. Install the shift cable holder bracket (A) and lower torque rod mounting bracket (B) on the transmission.
21. Install the control lever (A) over the control shaft (B). Do not twist the boot (C).
22. Secure the shift cable bracket (D) with the bolts.
23. Secure the control lever with the new lock washer (E) and the lock bolt (F); install the flange (G) of the lock washer
with facing to transmission housing, then bend the lock tab (H) of the lock washer against the bolt head securely.
24. Install the shift cable cover.
25. Support the front subframe with a wood piece and a jack.
26. Lift the front subframe (A) up to body, and secure it with the new mounting bolts loose.
27. Tighten the right middle mounting bolt (B) first, then the left middle bolt (C), and the four remaining bolts (D) to the
specified torque.
28. Place a jack under the transmission, raise it and attach the lower torque rod (A) in the mounting bracket and front
subframe.
29. Install the new mounting bolt (B), and set the bolt tongue (C) into the stop (D) through the guide (E), then loosely
install the new nut (F).
30. Loosely install the new mounting bolt (G).
31. Remove the jack, and tighten the bolt and nut to the specified torque.
32. On the right side of the steering gearbox, secure the steering gear box (A) and stiffener (B) with the new mounting
bolt (C) and the new bolt (D) loose.
33. On the left side of the steering gearbox, secure the steering gear box (A) and stiffener (B) with the new mounting
bolt (C) and the new bolt (D) loose.
34. Loosely install the steering gearbox mounting bolt (A) and washer (B) on the middle.
35. Tighten the steering gearbox mounting bolts to the specified torque in the following order; on the right side, on the
left side, and on the middle.
36. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque securing the right side stiffener, then left side stiffener.
37. Connect the ball joints (A) to both knuckles (B), and install the new ball joint nuts (C). Tighten the nuts, then
secure the nuts with the lock pin (D).
38. Connect the stabilizer links (E) to the stabilizer ends (F), and install the nuts (G). Insert a 5 mm Allen wrench (H) in
the top of the ball joint pins (I), and tighten the nuts.
39. With HID lamp model: If the left side lower arm was removed, connect the suspension stroke sensor, to the lower
arm.
40. Remove the engine support hanger, and install the harness clamp in its bracket located in front of the left damper
top.
41. Remove the hanger plate (07MAK-PY30100) (A) and bolt (B).
42. Install the air cleaner housing mounting bracket on the transmission hanger.
43. Secure the harness clamp bracket (A) with the bolt.
44. Connect the shift solenoid harness connector (B) and 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector (C),
and install the harness clamps (D) in the clamp brackets (E).
45. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler lines (B), and secure the hoses with the clips (C).
46. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector (A) and 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
connector (B).
47. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector (A), and install the harness clamp (B) on its
bracket (C).
48. Connect the transmission range switch connector (D).
49. Install the harness cover (A) on its bracket (B), and secure the cover with the bolt.
50. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector (C), A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
C connector (D), and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector (E).
52. Install the windshield wiper motor and center-front cowl cover (A), and install the cowl cover stiffener (B).
53. Install the cowl cover.
54. Install the windshield wiper arms.
56. Install the battery base.
59. Install the wheels.
60. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift the transmission through all positions three times. Check the shift
lever operation, A/T gear position indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment.
61. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment.
62. Check the ATF level.
63. With HID lamp model: If the left side lower arm was removed, do the headlight initial position learning procedure.
64. Do the road test.
Reverse idler gear
Reverse shift fork
Park gear and pawl
pawl
1 psi) 120 psi)
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
2 psi) 120 psi)
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
Countershaft
converter housing
hub
Mainshaft
3rd gear 0.04−0.10 mm (0.002−0.004 in.) ———
2nd gear 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.) ———
4th gear 0.10−0.22 mm (0.004−0.009 in.) ———
area
Clutch
disc (0.064−0.072 in.)
2nd ——— 0.5−0.7 mm
(0.020−0.028 in.)
3rd ——— 0.73−0.93 mm
(0.029−0.037 in.)
4th ——— 0.7−0.9 mm
(0.028−0.035 in.)
5th ——— 0.73−0.93 mm
(0.029−0.037 in.)
2nd 39.5 mm (1.56 in.) 37.4 mm (1.47 in.)
3rd 45.15 mm (1.778 in.) 43.0 mm (1.69 in.)
4th 39.5 mm (1.56 in.) 37.4 mm (1.47 in.)
5th 45.15 mm (1.778 in.) 43.0 mm (1.69 in.)
2nd 1.96 mm (0.077 in.) ———
3rd 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) ———
4th 1.96 mm (0.077 in.) ———
5th 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) ———
5th clutches
A/T Shift Cable Replacement
opening (D) of the shift lever bracket base (E). Then slide the holder to remove the shift cable from the bracket.
7. Remove the shift cable cover.
8. Pry up the lock tab of the lock washer (A), and remove the lock bolt (B) and lock washer.
9. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder (C), and separate the shift cable (D) from the selector control shaft
end (E).
10. Remove the heat shield under the body.
11. Remove the nut securing the shift cable bracket (A).
12. Remove the shift cable grommet (B), and pull out the shift cable (C).
13. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet hole (D), and install the grommet in its hole. Do not bend the shift
cable excessively.
14. Secure the shift cable bracket with the nut.
15. Install the heat shield.
16. Install the control lever (A) over the control shaft (B). Do not twist the boot (C).
17. Secure the shift cable bracket (D) with the bolts.
18. Secure the control lever with the new lock washer (E) and the lock bolt (F); install the flange (G) of the lock washer
with facing to the transmission housing, then bend the lock tab (H) of the lock washer against the bolt head
securely.
19. Install the shift cable cover.
21. If necessary, push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it. Pull the shift cable back two steps so that the
shift position is in N. Do not hold the shift cable guide (B) to adjust the shift cable.
shaft
bearing
Final driven gear backlash Reference 0.085−0.144 mm (0.003−0.006 in.) 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
shaft
Idler gear shaft
Torque converter
ATF pump
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
body
in.) (0.579 in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.480 in.) in.)
in.) (0.732 in.) in.)
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
Servo body
Servo body spring
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.654 in.) in.)
in.) (0.394 in.) in.)
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
Stator shaft
side
Engine Wire Harness, CKP Sensor Subharness, Transmission Range Switch Subharness Locations
A/T
TRANSMISSION RANGE
ENGINE WIRE HARNESS SWITCH SUBHARNESS
G101

−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
1 psi) 120 psi)
2 psi) 120 psi)
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,

disc (0.064−0.072 in.)
2nd ——— 0.5−0.7 mm
(0.020−0.028 in.)
3rd ——— 0.73−0.93 mm
(0.029−0.037 in.)
4th ——— 0.7−0.9 mm
(0.028−0.035 in.)
5th ——— 0.73−0.93 mm
(0.029−0.037 in.)
2nd 39.5 mm (1.56 in.) 37.4 mm (1.47 in.)
3rd 45.15 mm (1.778 in.) 43.0 mm (1.69 in.)
4th 39.5 mm (1.56 in.) 37.4 mm (1.47 in.)
5th 45.15 mm (1.778 in.) 43.0 mm (1.69 in.)
2nd 1.96 mm (0.077 in.) ———
3rd 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) ———
4th 1.96 mm (0.077 in.) ———
5th 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) ———
5th clutches

side
pawl
body
3rd gear 0.04−0.10 mm (0.002−0.004 in.) ———

converter housing
hub
2nd gear 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.) ———
4th gear 0.10−0.22 mm (0.004−0.009 in.) ———

area
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.579 in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.480 in.) in.)
in.) (0.732 in.) in.)
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
Automatic Transmission and A/T Dirrerential (cont'd)

in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.654 in.) in.)
in.) (0.394 in.) in.)
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)

shaft
bearing
shaft
Reverse idler gear
Reverse shift fork
Park gear and pawl
pawl
1 psi) 120 psi)
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
2 psi) 120 psi)
−1 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
Countershaft
converter housing
hub
Mainshaft
3rd gear 0.04−0.10 mm (0.002−0.004 in.) ———
2nd gear 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.) ———
4th gear 0.10−0.22 mm (0.004−0.009 in.) ———
area
Clutch
disc (0.064−0.072 in.)
2nd ——— 0.5−0.7 mm
(0.020−0.028 in.)
3rd ——— 0.73−0.93 mm
(0.029−0.037 in.)
4th ——— 0.7−0.9 mm
(0.028−0.035 in.)
5th ——— 0.73−0.93 mm
(0.029−0.037 in.)
2nd 39.5 mm (1.56 in.) 37.4 mm (1.47 in.)
3rd 45.15 mm (1.778 in.) 43.0 mm (1.69 in.)
4th 39.5 mm (1.56 in.) 37.4 mm (1.47 in.)
5th 45.15 mm (1.778 in.) 43.0 mm (1.69 in.)
2nd 1.96 mm (0.077 in.) ———
3rd 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) ———
4th 1.96 mm (0.077 in.) ———
5th 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) ———
5th clutches
shaft
bearing
shaft
Idler gear shaft
Torque converter
ATF pump
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
body
in.) (0.579 in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.480 in.) in.)
in.) (0.732 in.) in.)
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
Servo body
Servo body spring
in.) in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.654 in.) in.)
in.) (0.394 in.) in.)
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
in.) (0.575 in.) in.)
in.) in.) in.)
Stator shaft
side
M/T differential 72 mm shim
(L13Z1)
(L13Z1, L13Z3)
(L15A7)
(L15A7)
(L15A7, L15A8)
Cylinder Head Component Location Index
L15A8 engine
L13Z3 engine CYLINDER HEAD COVER
Removal, ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY
in the Shop Manual,
VTECP/N 62TF000A
Rocker
Installation, ROCKER ARMArm Test,
ASSEMBLY
Rocker
VTECP/N Arm
Rocker Assembly
Arm Test,Removal,
in the Shop Manual, 62TF000A
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal,
Rocker Arm Assembly Installation,
CAM CHAIN TENSIONER
Rocker Arm Assembly Installation,
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/
CAM CHAIN
Reassembly,
Rocker
Removal,
Arm and Shaft Disassembly/
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection,
Reassembly,
Installation,
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection,
CAMSHAFT SPROCKET
O-RING Removal, CAMSHAFT THRUST
HEAD COVER in the Shop Manual,COVER
P/N 62TF000A
GASKET O-RING Installation, CAMSHAFT THRUST
in the Shop Manual,COVER
P/N 62TF000A
WATER OUTLET
VALVE COTTERS
CAM CHAIN CMP PULSE PLATE in the Shop Manual,
VALVE
TENSIONER COTTERS
SLIDER Replacement,
CMP PULSE PLATE P/N 62TF000A
in the Shop
Replacement,Manual, P/N 62TF000A
in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A
CYLINDER HEAD
CAMSHAFT
Removal,
Removal,
CAMSHAFT
Inspection for Warpage,
Inspection,
Removal,
Installation,
Inspection,
Installation,
O-RING Installation,
SPRING RETAINER CAMSHAFT POSITION
COOLANT SEPARATOR (CMP) SENSOR
CAMSHAFT POSITION
SPRING RETAINER
CYLINDER HEAD PLUG (CMP) SENSOR
O-RING VALVE COTTERS
CYLINDER HEAD
EXHAUST VALVE
SPRING O-RING VALVE COTTERS
GASKET
EXHAUST VALVE
SPRING SPRING RETAINER
SPRING RETAINER
EXHAUST VALVE DOWEL PINS
SEAL
EXHAUST VALVE INTAKE VALVE SPRING
SEAL INTAKE VALVE SPRING
VALVE SPRING ROCKER ARM OIL
SEAT CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE SPRING ROCKER ARM OIL FILTER
SEAT CONTROL SOLENOID FILTER
EXHAUST VALVE
GUIDE VALVE
EXHAUST
GUIDE
CAM CHAIN GUIDE
CHAIN CASE COVER

ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROLARM
ROCKER SOLENOID
OIL
INTAKE CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE SEAL
Removal,
INTAKE VALVE SEAL
Removal,
Installation,
Installation,
in the ShopSEAT
VALVE SPRING Manual, P/N 62TF000A
INTAKE VALVE VALVE SPRING

INTAKE VALVE GUIDE SEAT
Removal, Replacement,
INTAKE VALVE
in CRANKSHAFT
the Shop Manual, PULLEY BOLT
P/N 62TF000A CRANKSHAFT PULLEY INTAKE VALVE GUIDE
Removal,
Installation, Removal/Installation, Removal/Installation, Replacement,
in the Shop Manual, P/NManual,
in the Shop
in the Shop Manual,
62TF000A
P/N 62TF000A
P/N 62TF000A EXHAUST VALVE in the Shop Manual, P/N in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A
62TF000A
Installation,
in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A EXHAUST VALVE
Cylinder Head Removal
NOTE:
To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors carefully while holding the connector portion.
To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the engine coolant temperature drops below 38 °C (100 °F) before
loosening the cylinder head bolts.
Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection. Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or hoses, or
interfere with other parts.
1. Relieve fuel pressure.
5. Remove the fuel feed hose clamp (A) and the quick-connect fitting cover (B), then disconnect the fuel feed hose (C).
6. Disconnect the upper radiator hose (A), the heater hose (B), and the water bypass hose (C).
7. Remove the heater hose from the clamps (D).
8. Remove the intake manifold bracket C.
9. Remove the subfuel feed line.
10. Remove the intake manifold/chamber assembly.
11. Remove the warm up three way catalytic converter (WU-TWC).
Rocker arm oil control solenoid connector
13. Remove the harness holder.
14. Remove the harness holder mounting bolt (A) and the ground cable (B), then remove the harness holder (C) from
the bracket.
16. Remove the cam chain.
17. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent warpage, loosen the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the
Cylinder Head Installation
1. Clean the cylinder head and the block surface.
2. Install a new coolant separator (A) in the engine block whenever the engine block is replaced.
3. Install the new cylinder head gasket (B) and the dowel pins (C) on the engine block. Always use a new cylinder
head gasket.
4. Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TDC). Align the TDC mark (A) on the crankshaft sprocket with the pointer (B)
on the oil pump.
5. Set the camshaft TDC. The ‘‘UP'' mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be at the top, and the TDC grooves (B)
on the camshaft sprocket should line up with the top edge of the head.
6. Install the cylinder head on the engine block.
7. Apply new engine oil to the threads and under the bolt heads of all cylinder head bolts.
8. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in sequence to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft). Using a beam-type torque wrench.
When using a preset-type torque wrench, be sure to tighten slowly and do not overtighten. If a bolt makes any
noise while you are torquing it, loosen the bolt and retighten it from the first step.
9. Tighten all cylinder head bolts an additional 130 °.

10. Install the cam chain.
12. Install the harness holder (A), then install the ground cable (B).
13. Install the harness holder.

14. Connect the engine wire harness connectors, and install the wire harness clamps to the cylinder head.
15. Install the warm up three way catalytic converter (WU-TWC).
16. Install the intake manifold bracket C.
17. Install the subfuel feed line.
18. Install the intake manifold/chamber assembly.
19. Install the upper radiator hose (A), the heater hose (B), and the water bypass hose (C).
20. Install the heater hose to the clamps (D).
21. Connect the fuel feed hose (A), then install the quick-connect fitting cover (B) and the fuel feed hose clamp (C).
24. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump runs for about
2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line. Repeat this operation three times, then check for fuel leakage at any point
in the fuel line.
25. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed air from the cooling system with the heater valve open.
26. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure.
27. Inspect the idle speed.
28. Inspect the ignition timing.
Camshaft Removal
5. Remove the camshaft sprocket.
6. Remove the rocker arm assembly.
7. Remove the CMP sensor.
8. Remove the camshaft thrust cover (A), then remove the camshaft (B).
Camshaft Installation
1. Install the camshaft (A), then install the camshaft thrust cover (B) with new O-ring (C).
2. Install the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
3. Install the rocker arm assembly.
4. Install the camshaft sprocket.
6. Install the following engine wire harness connectors and wire harness clamps to the cylinder head:
CMP sensor connector
Camshaft Inspection
1. Remove the camshaft sprocket. L15A8 engine
2. Remove the rocker arm assembly, then disassemble the rocker arm.
3. Put the rocker shaft holder bridge/rocker shaft holders on the cylinder head, then tighten the bolts to the specified
torque.
Specified Torque
6 x 1.0 mm
(1)−(10): 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft) L13Z3 engine
(11): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
4. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of the cylinder head.
5. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth, and read the end play. If
the end play is beyond the service limit, replace the thrust cover and recheck. If it is still beyond the service limit,
replace the camshaft.
Camshaft End Play
6. Remove the camshaft.

7. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored, or
excessively worn.
8. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal.
9. Zero the gauge to the journal diameter.
10. Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces in the cylinder head. Measure the inside diameter of each camshaft bearing
surface, and check for an out-of-round condition.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within limits, go to Step 12 .
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the service limit, and the camshaft has been replaced, replace
the cylinder head.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the service limit, and the camshaft has not been replaced, go
to Step 11 .
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance
11. Check the total runout with the camshaft supported on V-blocks.
If the total runout of the camshaft is within the service limit, replace the cylinder head.
If the total runout is beyond the service limit, replace the camshaft, and recheck the oil clearance. If the oil
clearance is still out of tolerance, replace the cylinder head.
Camshaft Total Runout
12. Measure the cam lobe height.
Cam Lobe Height Standard (New):

INTAKE EXHAUST
L15A8 engine PRI 35.162 mm (1.3843 in.) 35.614 mm (1.4021 in.)
SEC 30.529 mm (1.2019 in.)
L13Z3 engine PRI 34.290 mm (1.3500 in.) 35.047 mm (1.3798 in.)
SEC 30.529 mm (1.2019 in.)
PRI: Primary SEC: Secondary IN: Intake

EX: Exhaust C/C: Cam Chain
VTEC Rocker Arm Test
Special Tools Required L15A8, L13Z3 engines
Air supply, 3/8
07LAJ-PR30102
Air adapter, M10 x 1.0

070AJ-0010101
1. Start the engine, and let it run for 5 minutes, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise, and visually check that all the primary rocker arms (A) and secondary rocker
arms (B) move freely.
If the primary rocker arm and secondary rocker arm move together, remove the primary and secondary
rocker arms as an assembly, and check that the pistons in the primary and secondary rocker arms move
smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the primary and secondary rocker arms as an
assembly, then retest.
If all the primary rocker arms and secondary rocker arms move freely, go to Step 4 .
4. Check that the air pressure on the shop air compressor gauge indicates over 400 kPa (4 kgf/cm 2 , 57 psi).
5. Inspect the valve clearance.
6. Install the air adapter (A) to the inspection hole, then connect the valve inspection set (B). L15A8, L13Z3 engines
7. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the specified air pressure.
Specified Air Pressure:
340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm 2 , 50 psi)
8. With the specified air pressure applied, rotate the crankshaft clockwise, and visually check that all the primary L15A8, L13Z3 engines
rocker arms (A) and secondary rocker arms (B) move together.
If the primary rocker arm and secondary rocker arm move freely and independently of each other, remove the
primary and secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and check that the pistons in the primary and secondary
rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the primary and secondary rocker arms as
an assembly, and test.
9. Remove the air supply and the VTEC adapter.
Cylinder Head Rocker Arm Assembly Removal
1. Remove the cylinder head cover. L15A8 engine
2. Loosen the rocker arm adjusting screws (A).
L13Z3 engine
3. Unscrew the rocker shaft mounting bolts two turns at a time, in sequence below. L15A8 engine
NOTE: Bundle the intake rocker arms with rubber bands (A) to keep them together as a set.
L13Z3 engine
4. Remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts, then remove the rocker arm assembly. L15A8 engine
L13Z3 engine
Cylinder Head Rocker Arm Assembly Installation
1. Install the rocker arm assembly (A). L15A8 engine
L13Z3 engine
2. Tighten each bolts two turns at a time in sequence. L15A8 engine

NOTE: Remove the rubber bands (A) from the intake rocker arms.
Specified Torque
6 x 1.0 mm
(1)−(10): 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft)
(11): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
L13Z3 engine
3. Adjust the valve clearance.
Cylinder Head Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection
2. Disassemble the rocker arm assembly.
3. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker location.
4. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.
5. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and check it for an out-of-round condition.
Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance

L15A8 engine:
Intake:
Exhaust:
Intake:
Exhaust:
6. Repeat for all rockers and shaft. If the clearance is beyond the service limit, replace the rocker shaft and all out of
service limit rocker arms. If any VTEC rocker arm needs replacement, replace the rocker arms as an assembly.
VTEC Rocker Arms L15A8 engine

7. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Push on them manually. If they do not move smoothly, replace the rocker arm
set.
NOTE:
Apply new engine oil to the rocker arm pistons when reassembling.
When reassembling the secondary rocker arm A, carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of the
rocker arm.
L13Z3 engine
8. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly.
Cylinder Head Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly
L15A8 engine
NOTE:
Identify each part as it is removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position.
Inspect the rocker arm shaft and the rocker arms.
If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in the their original location.
Remove the rocker shaft bolt before removing the rocker shaft from the No. 5 rocker shaft holder.
Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply new engine oil to any
contact points.
When replacing the rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware from the new rocker
arm assembly.
When reassembling the rocker arm and shaft assembly, position the arrows on the rocker shaft
holders facing the cam chain side.
L13Z3 engine
NOTE:
Identify each part as it is removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position.
Inspect the rocker arm shaft and the rocker arms.
If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in the their original location.
Remove the rocker shaft bolt before removing the rocker shaft from the No. 5 rocker shaft holder.
Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply new engine oil to any
contact points.
When replacing the rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware from the new rocker
arm assembly.
When reassembling the rocker arm and shaft assembly, position the arrows on the rocker shaft
holders facing the cam chain side.
Cam Chain Removal
2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The ‘‘UP'' mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be at the top,
and the TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft sprocket should line up with the top edge of the head.

8. Remove the crankshaft pulley.
9. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner.
10. Remove the A/C line bracket mounting bolt.

13. Remove the chain case. L15A8, L13Z3 engines
14. Measure the cam chain separation. If the distance is less than the service limit, replace the cam chain and cam
chain tensioner.
Standard Distance: 19 mm (0.75 in.)
15. Apply new engine oil to the sliding surface of the cam chain tensioner slider (A).
16. Hold the cam chain tensioner slider with the screwdriver, then remove the bolt (B), and loosen the bolt (C).
17. Remove the cam chain tensioner slider.

18. Remove the cam chain tensioner (A) and the cam chain guide (B).
Cam Chain Installation
on the oil pump.
2. Remove the crankshaft sprocket.
3. Set the camshaft to TDC. The ‘‘UP'' mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be at the top, and the TDC grooves
(B) on the camshaft sprocket should line up with the top edge of the head.
4. Install the cam chain on the crankshaft sprocket with the colored piece (A) aligned with the TDC mark (B) on the
crankshaft sprocket, then install the crankshaft sprocket to the crankshaft.
5. With L15A8 engine: Install the cam chain on the camshaft sprocket with the pointers (A) aligned with the three
colored pieces (B) as shown.
6. With L13Z3 engine: Install the cam chain on the camshaft sprocket with the pointer (A) aligned with the center of
the two colored pieces (B).
7. Install the cam chain tensioner (A) and the cam chain guide (B).
8. Install the cam chain tensioner slider, and tighten the bolt loosely.
9. Apply new engine oil to the sliding surface of the cam chain tensioner slider (A).
10. Rotate the cam chain tensioner slider clockwise to compress the cam chain tensioner, and install the remaining
bolt, then tighten the bolts.
11. Check the chain case oil seal for damage. If the oil seal is damaged, replace the chain case oil seal.
12. Remove the all of the old liquid gasket from the chain case mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes.
13. Clean and dry the chain case mating surfaces.
the chain case and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
NOTE: Apply liquid gasket about 2.5 mm (0.098 in.) diameter bead along the broken line (A).
15. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08C70-K0234M, 08C70-K0334M, or 08C70-X0331S) to the oil pan mating surface of the
chain case and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
NOTE:
Apply liquid gasket about 5.0 mm (0.20 in.) diameter bead to the shaded area (B).
16. Set the edge of the chain case (A) to the edge of the oil pan (B), then install the chain case on the engine block
(C).
NOTE:
When installing the chain case, do not slide the bottom surface onto the oil pan mounting surface.
17. Tighten the chain case mounting bolts. Wipe off the excess liquid gasket on the oil pan and the chain case mating L15A8, L13Z3 engines
area.
18. Install the side engine mount/bracket assembly (A), then tighten the new side engine mount/bracket assembly
mounting bolts (B).
19. Loosely tighten the new side engine mount/bracket assembly mounting nuts (C).
20. Install the ground cable (D).
22. Loosen the transmission mount bracket mounting bolts and nuts (A). M/T model
A/T model
A/T model
A/T model
A/T model
32. Install the A/C line bracket mounting bolt.

34. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner.
35. Install the crankshaft pulley.

Cylinder Head Valve Clearance Adjustment
NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 38 °C (100 °F).
2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The ‘‘UP'' mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be at the top,
and the TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft sprocket should line up with the top edge of the head.
3. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the valves you are going to check. L15A8, L13Z3 engines
Valve Clearance
Intake: 0.15−0.19 mm (0.006−0.007 in.)
Exhaust: 0.26−0.30 mm (0.010−0.012 in.)
4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting screw and the end of the valve stem on No. 1 cylinder and slide it L15A8, L13Z3 engines
back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of drag.
5. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the locknut, and turn the adjusting screw (A) until the drag on the L15A8, L13Z3 engines
feeler gauge is correct.
6. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment, if necessary.
7. Tighten the locknut to the specified torque, and recheck the valve clearance. Repeat the adjustment if necessary.
Specified Torque
7 x 0.75 mm 14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)
Apply new engine oil to the nut threads.
8. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 3 piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with the top edge
of the head.
9. Check, and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on the No. 3 cylinder.
of the head.
of the head.
Fuel and Emissions System Description - VTEC System
VTEC System (L13Z3 engine)
Operation (L13Z3 engine)
VTEC System (L15A8 engine)
Operation (L15A8 engine)
VTEC Component Location Index
ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE (ECM)/
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
General Troubleshooting
Information,
Substituting,
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL VALVE Update,
Removal/Installation, Replacement,
VTEC System Oil Pressure Troubleshooting
Oil pressure gauge joint attachment
07NAJ-P070100
Low pressure gauge assy. 1,000 kPa

07406-0070002
Oil pressure hose
07ZAJ-S5A0200
NOTE:
Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS before this procedure. If there are any DTCs indicated,
troubleshoot them first, then do this procedure.
Check that the oil pressure indicator goes off after starting engine before this procedure.
2. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
Can you hear the rocker arm oil control solenoid click?
NO - Go to Step 3 .
4. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P connector.
5. Connect the battery positive terminal (+) to terminal No. 1, and the negative terminal (−) with a wire.
Is the rocker arm oil control solenoid clicking?
ECM/PCM. ■
7. Remove the bolt (A) from the rocker arm oil control valve and connect the special tool as shown, the install the bolt
(A) that was removed to the oil pressure gauge joint attachment.
9. Check the oil pressure at the engine speed of 1,000 to 2,000 rpm (min −1 ).
NOTE: Keep the measuring time as short as possible (less than 1 minute).

14. Check the oil pressure at the engine speed of 3,500 rpm (min −1 ).
Is the oil pressure above 392 kPa (4.0 kgf/cm 2 , 56.9 psi)?
YES - The VTEC system oil pressure is normal.■
16. Remove the rocker arm oil control valve.
17. Check the rocker arm oil control solenoid filter for dirt and clogging.
Is the rocker arm oil control solenoid filter dirty or clogged?
YES - Replace the engine oil, engine oil filter, and the rocker arm oil control solenoid filter, then go to Step 18 .
that was removed to the oil pressure gauge joint attachment.
22. Replace the rocker arm oil control valve.
NO - Clean the oil passage of the cylinder block or replace the cylinder block.■
Engine Removal
Engine tilt hanger set
07KAK-SJ40101
Engine hanger stay

07KAK-SJ40200
Sub hanger stay
07MAK-PY30100
NOTE:
To avoid damaging the wiring and terminals, unplug the wiring connectors carefully while holding the connector
portion.
1. Remove the hood support rod, then use it as shown to prop the hood in the wide-open position.
6. Remove the battery cables (A) from the battery terminal fuse box.
7. Remove the harness clamps (B).
9. Disconnect the engine control module (ECM)/ powertrain control module (PCM) connectors (A) and the engine wire
harness connector (B).
10. Remove the harness clamp (C) and harness holder (D).
11. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (A) and brake booster vacuum hose (B).
13. Disconnect the secondary heated oxygen sensor (secondary HO2S) connector (A), then remove the secondary
HO2S harness from the clamps (B).
14. M/T model: Remove the shift cable.
15. M/T model: Remove the clutch slave cylinder, and clutch line bracket mounting bolt.
16. Remove the radiator cap.
17. Remove the subfuel fill cap, then retighten the subfuel cap.
18. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the subfuel feed line from the subfuel solenoid holder.
21. Remove the splash shields.

23. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator, and drain the engine coolant.
25. Drain the transmission fluid:
Manual transmission
26. Remove the under-floor three way catalytic converter (under-floor TWC).
27. A/T model: Remove the shift cable.
28. Remove the stabilizer links from the stabilizer.
29. Separate the knuckles from the lower arms.
30. Remove the driveshaft heat shield.

31. Remove the driveshafts. Coat all precision-finished surfaces with clean engine oil. Tie a plastic bags over the
driveshaft ends.
32. Remove the bolts (A) securing the steering gearbox, then remove the steering gearbox stiffeners (B).
33. Remove the A/C compressor without disconnecting the A/C hoses.
35. Remove the radiator.
36. Disconnect the heater hoses.

39. Remove the torque rod. M/T model
A/T model
41. Remove the front subframe.

43. Install the sub hanger stay.
44. Attach the special tools to the engine/transmission as shown.
A/T model
47. Check that the engine/transmission is completely free of vacuum hoses, fuel and coolant hoses, and electrical
wiring.
48. Slowly lower the engine/transmission about 150 mm (6 in.). Check once again that all hoses and electrical wiring
are disconnected and free from the engine/transmission, then lower it all the way.
49. Disconnect the chain hoist from the engine/transmission.
50. Raise the vehicle, and remove the engine/ transmission from under the vehicle.
Engine Installation
Engine tilt hanger set
07KAK-SJ40101
Engine hanger stay

07KAK-SJ40200
Sub hanger stay
07MAK-PY30100
1. Raise the vehicle on the lift, and position the engine/transmission under the vehicle. Lower the vehicle, and attach
the special tools to the engine/transmission, then lift the engine/transmission into position in the vehicle.
NOTE: Reinstall the mounting bolts and support nuts in the sequence given in the following steps. Failure to follow
this sequence may cause excessive noise and vibration, and reduce engine mount life.
2. Install the side engine mount/bracket assembly (A), then tighten the new side engine mount/bracket assembly
mounting bolts (B) and nuts (C).
3. Loosely tighten the new side engine mount/bracket assembly mounting nuts (C).
4. Install the ground cable (D).
5. Install the transmission mount bracket (A), and loosely tighten the new transmission mount bracket mounting bolts M/T model
and nuts (B).
7. Remove the engine tilt hanger set from the engine/transmission.
A/T model
8. Remove the sub hanger stay.

10. Install the front subframe, then tighten the new front subframe mounting bolts in the numbered sequence shown.
11. Install the torque rod (A). Install the new bolt with the tab (B) on the bolt head aligned with the guide (C) on the front M/T model
subframe, then loosely tighten the new torque rod mounting bolt and nut (D).
A/T model
A/T model
A/T model
17. Install the securing the steering gearbox and the steering gearbox stiffeners, then tighten the new bolts in the
numbered sequence shown.
18. Install a new set ring on the end of each driveshaft, then install the driveshafts. Make sure each ring ‘‘clicks'' into
place in the differential and the intermediate shaft.
19. Install the driveshaft heat shield.
20. Connect the lower arms to the knuckles.
21. Install the stabilizer links to the stabilizer.
22. A/T model: Install the shift cable.
23. Install the A/C compressor.

25. Install the under-floor three way catalytic converter (under-floor TWC) (A). Use new gaskets (B) and new self locking
nuts (C).
26. Install the splash shields.

28. Install the heater hoses.

29. Install the radiator.
30. M/T model: Install the clutch slave cylinder, and clutch line bracket mounting bolt.
31. M/T model: Install the shift cable.
32. Install the subfuel fill cap, then retighten the subfuel cap.
33. Connect the subfuel feed line, then install the subfuel solenoid holder bolt.
34. Connect the secondary heated oxygen sensor (secondary HO2S) connector (A), then install the secondary HO2S
harness to the clamps (B).
35. Connect the fuel feed hose (A) , then install the quick-connect fitting cover (B) and the fuel feed hose clamp (C).
36. Install the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (A) and brake booster vacuum hose (B).
37. Install the harness holder (A), then install the harness clamp (B).
38. Connect the engine wire harness connector (C) and the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module
(PCM) connectors (D).
40. Install the battery cables (A) to the battery terminal fuse box.
41. Install the harness clamps (B).
42. Install the front wheels.
43. Install the under-cowl panel.
45. Refill the transmission with fluid:
Manual transmission
47. A/T model: Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that the A/T gear position indicator follows the transmission
range switch.
48. M/T model: Check that the transmission shifts into all gear smoothly.
in the fuel line.
51. Refill the engine with engine oil.
52. Do the ECM/PCM reset procedure.
Engine Block Component Location Index
L15A8 engine
L13Z3 engine
PISTON RINGS
Replacement,
BEARING CAP BRIDGE
PISTON
Removal, BEARING CAP BRIDGE
Measurement,
DOWEL PIN
CONNECTING ROD DOWEL PIN

End Play, BEARING CAP
PISTON PIN in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A
Small End Measurement,
CRANKSHAFTRemoval,
OIL in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A
in the ShopEND
SEAL, TRANSMISSION Manual, P/N 62TF000A CRANKSHAFT
Installation, Inspection, End Play,
in the Shop
in the Shop Manual, Manual, P/N 62TF000A
P/N 62TF000A in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A
Installation, Runout,
DOWEL PIN
in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A
Out-of-Round,
CKP PULSE PLATE Removal,
CRANKSHAFT OIL Replacement, in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A
CRANKSHAFT
SEAL, TRANSMISSIONinEND the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A Installation,
End
Installation, in thePlay,
Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A
in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A Runout,
Out-of-Round,
CKP PULSE PLATE Removal,
Replacement, in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A
in the Shop Manual, P/NTHRUST WASHERS
62TF000A MAIN BEARINGS
Installation,
in theOilShop
Clearance,
Manual, P/N 62TF000A
Selection,
THRUST WASHERS MAIN BEARINGS

Oil Clearance,
Selection,
ENGINE BLOCK
Cylinder Bore Inspection,
Warpage Inspection,
Cylinder Bore Honing,
Ridge Removal,
CONNECTING ROD BEARING

Oil Clearance, KNOCK SENSOR
Selection, Replacement,
in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A CONNECTING ROD
BEARING CAP
KNOCK SENSOR
Replacement, CONNECTING ROD BOLT
Inspection,
Engine Block and Piston Inspection
1. Remove the crankshaft and the pistons.
2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks.
3. Measure the piston diameter (A) at a point 16 mm (0.6 in.) from the bottom of the skirt.
Piston Diameter
L15A8 engine:
L13Z3 engine:
Oversize Piston Diameter

L15A8 engine:
0.25: 73.230−73.240 mm (2.88307−2.88346 in.)
L13Z3 engine:
0.25: 73.222−73.232 mm (2.88275−2.88314 in.)
4. Measure wear and taper in direction Y at three levels in each cylinder as shown. If measurements in any cylinder
are beyond the Oversize Bore Service Limit, replace the engine block. If the engine block is to be rebored, refer to
Step 7 after reboring.
Cylinder Bore Size

Oversize
0.25: 73.250−73.265 mm (2.8839−2.8844 in.)
Reboring limit: 0.25 mm (0.01 in.) max.
Bore Taper
Limit: (Difference between first and third measurement) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
5. Scored or scratched cylinder bores must be honed.
6. Check the top of the engine block for warpage. Measure along the edges and across the center as shown.
Engine Block Warpage

7. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore diameter and the piston diameter. If the clearance is near or
exceeds the service limit, inspect the piston and engine block for excessive wear.
Piston-to-Cylinder Clearance
L15A8 engine:
L13Z3 engine:
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection
1. To check rod bearing-to-journal oil clearance, remove the bearing cap bridge.
2. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half.
3. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half with a clean shop towel.
4. Place plastigage across the rod journal.
5. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the bolts to 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) +90 °.
NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
6. Remove the rod cap and bearing half, and measure the widest part of the plastigage.
Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance
L15A8 engine:
L13Z3 engine:
7. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new, complete
bearing with the same color code(s), and recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the
caps to adjust clearance.
8. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed above
or below the current one), and check clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the
appropriate larger or smaller bearing, replace the crankshaft and start over.
Rod Bearing Selection

1. Inspect each connecting rod for cracks and heat damage.
Connecting Rod Big End Bore Code Locations

2. Each rod falls into one of four tolerance ranges (from 0 to 0.024 mm (0.0009 in.), in 0.006 mm (0.0002 in.)
increments) depending on the size of its big end bore. It's then stamped with a number or bar (1, 2, 3, or 4)
indicating the range. You may find any combination of 1, 2, 3, or 4 in any engine.
If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or
scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent.
Normal Bore Size: 43.0 mm (1.69 in.)
Connecting Rod Journal Code Location

3. The connecting rod journal codes are stamped on the crankshaft.
4. Use the big end bore codes and rod journal codes to select appropriate replacement bearings from the following L15A8 engine
table.
NOTE: Color code is on the edge of the bearing.
L13Z3 engine
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement
Main Bearing Clearance Inspection
1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance, remove the bearing cap bridge and bearing halves.
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a clean shop towel.
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main journal.
4. Reinstall the bearings and bearing cap bridge, then tighten the bearing cap bolts to 25 N·m (2.5 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft) in
the proper sequence.
NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
5. Tighten the bearing cap bolts an additional 40 °.
6. Remove the bearing cap bridge and bearings again, and measure the widest part of the plastigage.
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance

7. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the bearing.
Install a new, complete bearing with the same color code(s), and recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or
scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
8. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed above
or below the current one), and check again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate
larger or smaller bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over.
Main Bearing Selection

Crankshaft Bore Code Location
1. Letters have been stamped on the end of the block as a code for the size of each of the five main journal bores.
Write down the crank bore codes.
If you can't read the codes because of accumulated dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper.
Clean them only with solvent or detergent.
Main Journal Code Location

2. The main journal codes are stamped on the crankshaft.
3. Use the crank bore codes and crank journal codes to select the appropriate replacement bearings from the L15A8 engine
following table.
NOTE: Color code is on the edge of the bearing.
L13Z3 engine
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
G101 2 3
ROCKER ARM ENGINE
OIL CONTROL 4 EVAP CANISTER
SOLENOID WIRE HARNESS
24P JUNCTION CONNECTOR 12P JUNCTION CONNECTOR MAP SENSOR PURGE VALVE
(1) (2) (A/T) (2) (M/T) 5 (3) (4)
ENGINE 7
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 ENGINE HO2S
IGNITION IGNITION IGNITION IGNITION A/F SENSOR
32 COIL (2) WIRE(SENSOR
HARNESS1) (SENSOR 2)
COIL (1) COIL (3) 5 6COIL (4) 7 (5) 8 (6)
OUTPUT 4 SHAFT 6 OUTPUT SHAFT
DASHBOARD WIRE(COUNTERSHAFT)
HARNESS MAF SENSOR/ (COUNTERSHAFT) LEFT ENGINE
24P JUNCTION
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR 3 SPEED SENSOR 6 7
IAT SENSOR 8 SPEEDCABLE REEL SUBHARNESS
SENSOR 10PCOMPARTMENT
CONNECTOR
31 Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
(5) (6) (M/T) (7)
9 10(8) (A/T)
11 9 8
(9)
5 WIRE HARNESS
2
12P JUNCTION
13P CONNECTOR CONNECTOR (2) 14P CONNECTOR ESP12
CONTROL UNIT
(1) (3) No. 4 (4) No. 3 FUEL SUBHARNESS
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS
INJECTOR INJECTOR
13
THROTTLE BODY CMP SENSOR ECT SENSOR 1 CKP SENSOR (11) (12) 10
(7) 1 TEST4
(8) (9) (10) 10 9
13P CONNECTOR TACHOMETER ECM/PCM A (□) (12)* ECM/PCM B ( ) (13)*
(10) CONNECTOR
UNDER-DASH (11) UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH FUEL
FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY FUSE/RELAY ELD (5) SUBHARNESS
(K) (1)
RIGHT ENGINE (N) (2) BOX (S) (3) BOX (T) (4)
10
COMPARTMENT 11
RIGHT
RIGHTENGINE
ENGINE
WIRE HARNESS 12P JUNCTION 12P JUNCTION COMPARTMENT
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE (5) CONNECTOR (7)
COMPARTMENT
CONNECTOR (8)WIRE HARNESS
APP SENSOR
No. 2 No. 1 SUBFUEL (6) AUXILIARY WIRE HARNESS
30 INJECTOR
LEFT ENGINE INJECTOR SOLENOID ECT SENSOR 2 UNDER-HOOD 11 14
COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS (14)
(13) (15) (16) RELAY BOX (17) 12
LEFT ENGINE ENGINE
COMPARTMENT WIRE 3HARNESS WIRE
ECM/PCM C (○) (14)* HARNESS
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX (A) (8)
19
UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH 13
FUSE/RELAY FUSE/RELAY BOX 2ND CLUTCH A/T CLUTCH A/T CLUTCH 3ND CLUTCH 15
BOX (W) (6) (Q) (7) TRANSMISSION PRESSURE PRESSURE 12
TRANSMISSION
29 2 FLUID PADDLE SUBFUEL
CONTROL
PUMP
PADDLE CONTROL FLUID
PRESSURE SHIFTER− TRANSMISSION RELAY
SOLENOID
SHIFTER+ SOLENOID PRESSURE 11
ABS MODULATOR- 3P CONNECTOR
SWITCH (15) RANGE SWITCH VALVE A VALVE C 14
SWITCH
(19) (DOWNSHIFT
CONTROL UNIT (UPSHIFT
(18) 28 (A/T) SWITCH) (11) (16) (A/T) EVAPORATOR (17) (A/T)SWITCH) (13) (18) (A/T) (19) (A/T) 16
(A/T with TEMPERATURE (A/T with 15
12P JUNCTION
1
CONNECTOR (9) CABLE REEL (10) paddle shifter SENSOR (12) paddle shifter 13P CONNECTOR 12
model) model) (14)
27
17
26 19 16
18
25 20
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD TRANSMISSION RANGE
SHIFT
NOTE: CONTROL
SHIFT
SHIFT
BOX (B) (9) RELAY BOX21
(23) SWITCH SUBHARNESS SHIFT
(A/T)
CONTROL CONTROL24 terminal side 21 ATF CONTROL
· Connector with male terminals
SOLENOID (double outline):SOLENOID
SOLENOID view from 23 TEMPERATURE SOLENOID
VALVE
· Connector C female terminals
with VALVE
SHIFT A
(single outline):VALVE D
view from wire side 22 SENSOR 13
VALVE B
(20) (A/T)
*: Connector (21) (A/T)SOLENOID
with female terminals (22) (A/T)
(single outline): 20 (24) (A/T) (25) (A/T)
WIRE HARNESS (A/T) view from terminal side SHIFT LOCK
CRANKCABLE
SENSORREEL (15) IGNITION SWITCH FUEL PUMP SOLENOID
SUBHARNESS (17) (18) (A/T) 14
22 (16) 1
18 17
13 A/C CONDENSER
A/C COMPRESSOR FAN RELAY
CLUTCH RELAY 18
17 RADIATOR FAN RELAY
15
A/T CLUTCH 19
PRESSURE 2
CONTROL M/T 16
M/T
SOLENOID BRAKE PEDAL CLUTCH PEDALROCKER ARM
8P CONNECTOR VALVE B INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT) OIL PRESSURE KNOCKPOSITION
SENSOR ALTERNATOR
POSITION OIL PRESSURE
SPEED SENSOR (28) (A/T) DATA LINK
SWITCH (29)
(26) SUBFUEL A(27)
SRS UNITPUMP(19)(A/T) FUEL INDICATOR 4P CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR (20)* (30)AUXILIARY
SWITCH (21) (31) SWITCH (22) SWITCH
(10) UNIT 9 (12) UNDER-DASH (M/T) (32)
(11) FUSE HOLDER
(13) 3
4
NOTE: 5
· Connector with male terminals (double outline): view from terminal side 15A
NOTE: 6
NOTE: UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
· Connector with male terminals (double outline): view from terminal
UNDER-DASH
side FUSE/RELAY BOX
Fuel and Emissions Systems Circuit Diagram
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram

ECM/PCM
24P JUNCTION
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) CONNECTOR*1
(12P JUNCTION
CONNECTOR*2)E F
C19 2
BLK/RED
SINJ 7
B31 3 1
RED/GRN 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 YEL YEL/BLK
VG+ 13 K 4 1 MAF
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK SUBFUEL
SENSOR
B33
C5
13P CONNECTOR 13P CONNECTOR
5 2
SOLENOID
BLK/RED 13P 10
BLK/YEL
BRN *3 CONNECTOR BLK/YEL
VG−
INJ1 YEL
12 V 1 No. 1 INJECTOR
*1 9 8
GRN/YEL IAT
YEL BLK/YEL
2 2 JUNCTION
24P SENSOR
B RED/YEL
11 CONNECTOR*1
13P K H BLK/YEL 1
B35 YEL/BLK (12P JUNCTION1
*1
B32 GRN/YEL CONNECTOR
VTS 12 CONNECTOR)*2
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd)RED/YEL
RED
C6
IAT
8P CONNECTOR
BLK/YEL BRN
2 2
INJ2
B28 N
RED/YEL LT O
GRN BLK/YEL
6
WHT
9 No. 2 INJECTORROCKER ARM
ATFT 8 2 OIL CONTROL
A47 6 7 2 7
YEL GRN/YEL
YEL WHTGRN/YEL
B24
C29 YEL 1 1 SOLENOID
SUPP RED/WHT
RED A RED RED/WHT
ATFSHIFTER+
TEMPERATURE
1
ECT1
AFS+ PADDLE
YEL/BLK G101 (UPSHIFTSENSORSWITCH)2
1 RED/YEL ECT SENSOR 1
C7
C30
B11 *1 *2 BLK 21 3
BLU 5 BLK/YEL
B3 RED/YEL GRN
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) INJ3
AFS−
SHA
BLU/BLK
YEL/BLU YEL/BLU
BLU 2
No. 4 3 INJECTOR
24P JUNCTION CONNECTOR
PCS
A48 7 5 824P JUNCTION CONNECTOR 2 WHT/BLK
SHIFT SOLENOID
C9
B10 LT BLU R O 10 LT BLU LT GRN/ EVAP CANISTER
SDNP GRN
BLK RED PADDLEVALVE SHIFTER− AA/F SENSOR
PURGE VALVE
AFSHTC
PG1 13P CONNECTOR 2 (DOWNSHIFT 1 (SENSOR 1)
B27 14P P
GRN/WHT UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY YEL/BLKBOX ORN SWITCH)
CONNECTOR 2 12 1
SHB
B1
C8 PURA BLK BLK
BRN YEL T Q 2
20 19 21 23 24 22 13 15 14 16 18 17
PG2
INJ4 L P G SHIFT1 SOLENOID
AK CABLE REEL BLK/YEL VALVE B4 INJECTOR
3 A9B46
C13
C2 1
(1) No. 3 1
WHT B21 BRN YEL/RED T 13P CONNECTOR YEL/RED
IG1 6 IGPVCC1
B36 GRNWHT/BLU G501 WHT/BLUGRN
YEL PGMETCS
ALTL
SHC
A34 PUR 11 B12 MICU 2 2
YEL WHT/REDGRN/RED 42
*4 IG2 4 A46 LT GRN LT GRN
C11
SHO2S
ECT2 B22 WHT/RED A/F 3
SHIFT11SOLENOID
ORN GRN/RED GRN 3 12P JUNCTION GRN/YELGRN/WHT
1 J YEL
+B ST S-NET5V
MAP
B4 B2 24P JUNCTION
CONNECTOR AD AE AFVALVE AG C AH
24SENSOR AI AJ
PNK A10 PUR CONNECTOR WHT/GRN AB
BLK/WHT RELAY
A22B12
B47
SO2SHTC
C14 YEL B5
8 G101 ECTMAP SENSOR
SENSOR 2
SG6 GRN/RED ORN 17 16 13 15 YEL 3
C44
SUBRLY
SHD WHT/RED GRN/WHT BLK/YEL
IGNITION SWITCH ALTF
SG1 BRN/YEL B6 C D
A7LG1 V
BLU *2 BLU/24P JUNCTION *1 SHIFT SOLENOID ALTERNATOR
B8 CONNECTOR WHT SECONDARY
BLK U 10 BRAKE PEDAL VALVE D HO2S
MRLY
B14
B45 LT GRN 4 5 6 11 12
5V C48 BLU/BLK POSITION24PSWITCH (2)BLU 16
BATTERY C1
ATPP WHT BRN/YEL 4
WHT/GRN
WHT
24P B9
JUNCTION CONNECTOR BRN/YEL JUNCTION
3 CONNECTOR(SENSOR 2)
ALTC
A42
A3
LG2 YEL/BLK
2
10P CONNECTOR K-LINE
(14) IGIETCS
WHT LT GRN WHT B14 LT GRN Brake pedal pressed: closed
BKSW
CANH
B7
B40 RED 7 1 4 Brake 10
1 released:
pedal
*5 C10C31 BLK/ YEL/RED
RED/BLK 3 12 8 9 10 11
LT GRN WHT BLU/WHT 1 WHT 1 PGM-FI open
(15) B15
OPSW
LSA RED GRN WHT CANH MAIN
WHT
IG1CMP WHT 6 B17 22 21 23 24 (6) 5 3 3 6
A4
ATPR 13P YEL BLU/BLK YEL (5) BLK/YEL20 BLK/BLU 19 21 Brake 222 pedal P24RELAY
9 23
pressed: 1 open To
C15
A41 24PRED 3 RED RED pedal OIL PRESSURE
BATTERY A21CANLCONNECTORWHT
BRN B18 4 4 1 2 BLK 7 Brake released: closed
SWITCH
CANL
SPARK
B34 JUNCTION RED Y1 WHT BRN/YELWHT R PLUG
G1 TERMINAL IGPLS1
BKSWNC
ETCSRLY GRN/YEL
CONNECTOR 1 A/TICM
CLUTCH PRESSUREEPS
FUSE BOX LT BLU B31 9 2 2
SG2
B13
A44 N 2 BRN Y3 RED/BLK BRN RED/BLK CONTROL CMP SOLENOID
N
SENSOR VALVE
CONTROL A
RED BRN/YEL B GRN/ G101 GRN/ GRN/
B48 PNK B24 ELD3 8 1 IGNITION
No. 1 COIL UNIT YEL
ATPN
WEN BRN/WHT GRY PNK PNK YEL YEL D PGM-FI
A16LSB
A26 BLK B33 Y2 GRN/ 1 GRN/ MAIN
ORN
13P CONNECTOR YEL 2 128 11 BRN
IMOFPR 3 14P 1 YEL 3 2 D 3 *5YEL 2
RELAY A
VCC4
A33 G501 10 YEL/BLK RED YEL BLU 3 BLK
B22
A18 GRN BLK/YEL CONNECTOR GRN (S)*4
3
3 To
A1C16 B25 T1 (7) SPARK
FPR2
C32
ATPD
APSA WHT/GRN BRN WHT 2
(12) 1 ORN
3
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE 4 PLUG
VBSOL
IGPLS2 BLU WHT
CONTROL
FICM G SOLENOID 2 H VALVE I B
BLU L M 2 E 7 (3)
A36
CKP
B26 W1 BRN 1 2 1
*1 B23 RED BLU YEL 1
LSC
SG4
BLU/YEL
WHT YEL
(8) 1 29 No.
B16 2 9 2 IGNITION COIL 2
A25 U B27 S1 BRN/YEL BLU BRN BRN RED WHT 2 4
12P JUNCTIONATPD3*5 BLU ORN GRY IGNITION B
CONNECTOR C12 B28
6 10BLK 5 2
VCC5
(ATPS)*4 BLU/YEL 13P
3P CONNECTOR RED
YEL/RED
3 CKP SENSOR *1COIL SUBFUEL
A19 BLU WHT X3 CONNECTORBLK/YEL
10 A/T1 CLUTCH (13)
6PRESSURE
RELAYPUMP RELAY To
VCC3
C17 PNK B21 13 7 1 11 BLU 1
B17
APSB WHT/BLK YEL YEL WHT/RED
RED LT CONTROL SOLENOID 1 VALVE CSPARK
Z A24
IGPLS3 K7 1 WHT
10 A PLUGB
C20
A35 1 4 2 8 ICM 312P
ATP2-1 PNKRED/BLK ORN I BLK BRN
BLKRED 5
6 4 A32
ELD
TPSA
12 11
24P 5 Q1 G101 WHT
4
(4)
JUNCTION 2
C46
SG5 JUNCTION YEL 1 YEL1 CONNECTOR
SCS 14P
RED/BLU
CONNECTOR 3 Q2 WHT
RED/BLU No. 3 IGNITION APPCOIL
TRANSMISSION SENSOR A/B
PNK C21
B19
KS 3 2 CONNECTOR BLU BRN/YEL UNDER-DASH 1 RANGE AUXILIARY
SWITCH
*6 B29 YEL/BLU
RED YEL/BLU 3 UNDER-DASH
Q8 (9) FUSE/RELAY
AK BOX WHT 6
VCC2
TPSB LT BLU ETCSHOLDER (15 A)
ATPFWD CONNECTOR 3
4PBLK/YEL 4 KNOCK5 SENSOR
FUSE
CONTROL To
B18
C18 11J G101 WHT1 2 2ND SPARK
C43
12P WHT/RED
WHT/BLU 1 2 CLUTCH RELAY
A43
NM A25 YEL 1 YEL 5 THROTTLE PLUG
JUNCTION GRN
IGPLS4 PUR BLU 13P CONNECTOR WHT2 ICMTRANSMISSION
Clutch pedal pressed: FLUID
open
SG3
B23
CRMTCLS
CONNECTOR ClutchPRESSURE ACTUATOR
SWITCH
2 P
*1: A/T G101 (10) BLK BRN2 2 2 3 4pedal released: closed
X S BLK
ATPRVS *1: A/T ORN BLK GRN/YEL
WHT
C4 *2:YEL/RED
M/T 1 P THROTTLE BODY
A15 *2: M/T BLK/ BLU/RED No. 4 IGNITION COIL 4
PNK YEL 3 4 CLUTCH PEDAL INPUT SHAFT SUBFUEL PUMP
ETCSM+
ACC N1 (11) POSITION SWITCH (MAINSHAFT)
B8 PNK AC SPEEDSTARTER SENSOR
BLK
G302 LT BLU CUT
*1 A29
OP2SW 8 G502 8 13P 2 3RD CLUTCH RELAY
C3 CONNECTOR FUEL PUMP
TRANSMISSION
TEST TACHOMETER FLUID
A6 LT BLU
NEP YEL 13P 12P PRESSURE
BLUCONNECTOR SWITCH
ETCSM− GRN JUNCTION D 10 C
FANC
B9 CONNECTOR 10
8 7
CONNECTOR BRN 1
M A28 4 7 BLU/WHT 3
K-LINE
W
OP3SW PNK LT BLU PNK G502
SLS GRY 7 1 1 1
BLU *1
G101 YEL/REDLT BLU WHT
14P
K-LINE CANH
FUSES: B38 CONNECTOR 2 SHIFT LOCK
BLK/WHT 9 17SOLENOID
A30 YEL
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX: NC*1: A/TBLU Y
RED
To AUDIOCANL UNIT
(1)No. 26 A/F SENSOR5(10 A)13P VSSOUT
*2: M/T Q WHT
6
3
CONNECTOR CANH AD AE AF AG GRN/WHT
AH AJ ABS
(2)No.
BARO 39 IGP (15 A) *3: With cruise control R
AI
MODULATOR-
SENSOR
(3)No. 33 IGNITION COIL (15 A)*1:
A38 A/T 14 5 PUR OUTPUT 1 SHAFT CONTROL UNIT
RED ORN
RED DATA LINK ORN
(Built into
(4)No. 52 ETCS (15 A) *1:*6:
TAC M/T
A/T (with cruise CANL 3 CONNECTOR
A/C
(COUNTERSHAFT)
2
the ECM/PCM) 4S COMPRESSOR
(5)No. 20 FUEL PUMP (15 A) *4:control)
*1:A/T
A/T(with paddle shifter model) YEL YEL SPEED SENSOR
CLUTCH RELAY
12
(6)No. 12 ALTERNATOR (105 *5:
14PA/T (without paddle shifter
A) RED 13P CONNECTOR PNK 3 EVAPORATOR
CONNECTOR 16 TEMPERATURE
(10 A) *3: With cruise control
(7)No. 7 MISSION SOLENOIDmodel) PNK
SENSOR
(8)No. 24 STOP, HORN (15 A) BRN
5
A/C
(9)No. 22 METER (7.5 A) 4 CONDENSER
4
(10)No. 10 A/C (7.5 A) BLK FAN RELAY
(11)No. 1 BACK UP (7.5 A) 3
GRN
(12)No. 60 IG SW (50 A) V W X Y
(13)No. 44 STARTER (7.5 A)
AA G502
12P JUNCTION *1: A/T 18
RADIATOR
BATTERY TERMINAL FUSE BOX:
CONNECTOR AB AA AC Z 4 FAN RELAY
K-LINE
(14)20 A
(15)100 A 4 3 17
BLU GRN
3 CANH
*1:1A/T 16
BLU
AUXILIARY CANL
30 UNDER-HOOD RELAY BOX SRS UNIT
WHT
CANH
GAUGE CONTROL
29 MODULE
RED
CANL
Engine will not start (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
2. Test the starter.
4. Troubleshoot the fuel pump circuit.
Also check for
Low compression
No ignition spark
Intake vacuum leaks
Locked up engine
Broken cam chain
Fuel contamination
Engine will not start (MIL comes on and stays on, no DTCs set)
Also check for
Low compression
No ignition spark
Intake vacuum leaks
Locked up engine
Broken cam chain
Fuel contamination
No power to ECM/PCM
No ground to ECM/PCM
Shorted reference voltage
MIL comes on and stays on, or never comes on at all, no DTCs set
1. Troubleshoot the MIL circuit.
Engine will not start (MIL works OK, no DTCs set, immobilizer indicator stays on or flashes)
1. Check the immobilizer system.
Engine starts but stalls immediately (MIL works OK, no DTCs set, immobilizer indicator stays on or flashes)
Also check for
Camshaft timing
Low compression
Intake vacuum leaks
Fuel contamination
Weak spark
Engine is hard start (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
3. Test the throttle body.
Also check for
Low compression
Intake air leaks
Fuel contamination
Weak spark
Engine is hard to start (engine coolant temperature below 20 °C (68 °F) and/or fuel grade (alcohol contained level)
above 61 %)
1. Troubleshoot the subfuel pump circuit.
2. Test the subfuel pressure.
3. Test the subfuel solenoid.
Cold fast idle too low (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
3. Throttle body cleaning.
Also check for
Incorrect valve adjustment
Cold fast idle too high (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
Also check for
After warming up, idle speed is below specifications without load (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
1. Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit.
Also check for
Intake vacuum leaks
After warming up, idle speed is above specifications without load (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
2. Inspect the APP sensor.
Also check for
Intake vacuum leaks
Idle speed fluctuates (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
2. Test the fuel pressure.
3. Test the injectors.
5. Inspect the PCV valve.
7. Troubleshoot the A/C signal circuit.
8. Troubleshoot the VTEC system oil pressure.
Also check for
Fuel contamination
Intake vacuum leaks
Misfire or rough running (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
1. Check the spark plugs.
Also check for
Low compression
Valve clearance
Fuel contamination
Fails emission test (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
1. Inspect the three way catalytic converter (TWC).
5. Check the EVAP system.
Also check for
Fuel contamination
Low compression
Broken cam chain
Low power (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
2. Check the air cleaner element.
4. Inspect the three way catalytic converter (TWC).
Also check for
Fuel contamination
Low compression
Camshaft timing
Engine oil level
Engine stalls (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
4. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal circuit.
Also check for
Intake vacuum leaks
Faulty harness and sensor connections
Fuel contamination
Difficult to refuel
1. Inspect the breather line and the suction line.
HDS does not communicate with the ECM/PCM or the vehicle
Low subfuel indicator does not come on
1. Troubleshoot the low fuel indicator unit circuit.
Low subfuel indicator stays on
1. Troubleshoot the low fuel indicator unit circuit.
Fuel and Emissions Systems Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Engine will not start (MIL works OK, no 1.Test the battery. Low compression
DTCs set) 2.Test the starter. No ignition spark
3.Check the fuel pressure. Intake vacuum leaks
4.Troubleshoot the fuel pump circuit. Locked up engine
Broken cam chain
Fuel contamination
Engine will not start (MIL comes on and Troubleshoot the DLC circuit. Low compression
stays on, no DTCs set) No ignition spark
Intake vacuum leaks
Locked up engine
Broken cam chain
Fuel contamination
No power to ECM/PCM
MIL comes on and stays on, or never Troubleshoot the MIL circuit.
comes on at all, no DTCs set
Engine will not start (MIL works OK, no Check the immobilizer system.
DTCs set, immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes)
Engine starts but stalls immediately Check the immobilizer system. Camshaft timing
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set, Low compression
immobilizer indicator stays on or Intake vacuum leaks
flashes) Fuel contamination
Weak spark
Engine is hard start (MIL works OK, no 1.Test the battery. Low compression
DTCs set) 2.Check the fuel pressure. Intake air leaks
3.Test the throttle body. Fuel contamination
Weak spark
Engine is hard to start (engine coolant 1.Troubleshoot the subfuel pump circuit.
temperature below 20 °C (68 °F) and/or 2.Test the subfuel pressure.
fuel grade (alcohol contained level) 3.Test the subfuel solenoid.
above 61 %)
Cold fast idle too low (MIL works OK, 1.Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Incorrect valve adjustment
no DTCs set) 2.Check the idle speed.
3.Throttle body cleaning.
Cold fast idle too high (MIL works OK, 1.Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Incorrect valve adjustment
3.Test the throttle body.
After warming up, idle speed is below 1.Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit. Intake vacuum leaks
specifications without load (MIL works 2.Test the throttle body. Incorrect valve adjustment
OK, no DTCs set)
After warming up, idle speed is above 1.Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit. Intake vacuum leaks
specifications without load (MIL works 2.Inspect the APP sensor.
OK, no DTCs set)
Idle speed fluctuates (MIL works OK, no 1.Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Fuel contamination
DTCs set) 2.Test the fuel pressure. Intake vacuum leaks
3.Test the injectors.
4.Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit.
5.Inspect the PCV valve.
7.Troubleshoot the A/C signal circuit.
8.Troubleshoot the VTEC system oil pressure.
Misfire or rough running (MIL works OK, 1.Check the spark plugs. Low compression
no DTCs set) 2.Test the fuel pressure. Valve clearance
3.Test the injectors. Fuel contamination
4.Troubleshoot the fuel pump circuit.
Fails emission test (MIL works OK, no 1.Inspect the three way catalytic converter (TWC). Fuel contamination
DTCs set) 2.Check the spark plugs. Low compression
3.Test the fuel pressure. Broken cam chain
5.Check the EVAP system.
Low power (MIL works OK, no DTCs 1.Test the fuel pressure. Fuel contamination
set) 2.Check the air cleaner element. Low compression
3.Test the throttle body. Camshaft timing
4.Inspect the three way catalytic converter (TWC). Engine oil level
Engine stalls (MIL works OK, no DTCs 1.Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Intake vacuum leaks
set) 2.Test the fuel pressure. Faulty harness and sensor
3.Check the idle speed. connections
4.Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal circuit. Fuel contamination
5.Check the spark plugs.
Difficult to refuel Inspect the breather line and the suction line.
HDS does not communicate with the Troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
ECM/PCM or the vehicle
Low subfuel indicator does not come on Troubleshoot the low fuel indicator unit circuit.
Low subfuel indicator stays on Troubleshoot the low fuel indicator unit circuit.
Fuel and Emissions System Description - Vacuum Lines
Vacuum Hose Routing
Vacuum Distribution
Fuel and Emissions System Description - EVAP Control Diagram
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram
EVAP System Component Location Index
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)

EVAPORATIVE
TWO WAY VALVE (SUBFUEL) CANISTER PURGE VALVEEMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
Test, Replacement, EVAP System
Replacement, in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A
Troubleshooting,
Replacement,
FUEL FILL CAP
ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE (ECM)/
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSIONInformation,
(EVAP)
CANISTER Substituting,
FILTER
Update,
Replacement,
Replacement,
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
TWO WAY VALVE (MAINFUEL)
Test,
Replacement,
EVAP System Troubleshooting
1. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP canister purge valve (B) and connect a vacuum pump/gauge (C) to
the hose.
NOTE: Engine coolant temperature must be below 60 °C (140 °F).
Is there vacuum?
YES - Inspect vacuum hose routing. If OK, replace the EVAP canister purge valve.■
NO - Go to Step 3 .
3. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm (min −1 ) without load (A/T in N or P, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan
comes on, then hold the engine speed to 3,000 rpm (min −1 ).
Is there vacuum?
NO - Inspect vacuum hose routing. If OK, replace the EVAP canister purge valve. ■
5. Reconnect the vacuum hose to the EVAP canister purge valve.
6. Remove the fuel fill cap.
8. Disconnect drain tube (A) from the EVAP canister and connect the combination gauge kit and tube joint adapter to
EVAP canister (B).
9. Lower the vehicle.
10. Start the engine and raise speed to 3,000 rpm (min −1 ).
Does vacuum appear on gauge within 1 minute?
YES - See EVAP two way valve test to complete. Evaporative emission controls are OK.■
NO - Replace the EVAP canister. ■
EVAP Canister Replacement
2. Disconnect the hoses (A) and tube (B).
3. Remove the EVAP canister (C).
NOTE: Align the marks (D) on the hose as shown, then insert the hose. Make sure the clamp is positioned as
shown.
EVAP Two Way Valve Test
Combination gauge kit 20/−100 kPa
07YAJ-0010610
Tube joint adapter

07410-5790503
2. Remove the EVAP two way valve.
3. Disconnect the vapor line from the EVAP two way valve (A). Connect it to the combination gauge kit and tube joint
adapter and the vacuum pump (B) as shown.
4. Apply vacuum slowly and continuously while watching the gauge. The valve should open below 1.33 kPa (1.0
mmHg, 0.04 in.Hg).
If the vacuum hold below 1.33 kPa (1.0 mmHg, 0.04 in.Hg), go to Step 5 .
If the vacuum doesn't hold, replace the EVAP two way valve.
5. Move the vacuum pump from the vacuum fitting to the pressure fitting (A) as shown.
6. Slowly pressurize the vapor line while watching the gauge. The valve should open above 5.07 kPa (38 mmHg, 1.5
in.Hg).
If the pressure hold below 5.07 kPa (38 mmHg, 1.5 in.Hg), the valve is OK.
If the pressure doesn't hold, replace the EVAP two way valve.
EVAP Two Way Valve Replacement
MAINFUEL
1. Lift the vehicle, and support with jackstands.
2. Remove the bolt (A).
3. Pull the EVAP two way valve (A) and the hoses (B) out of the frame.
4. Disconnect the hoses (B) from the EVAP two way valve (A).
5. Remove the EVAP two way valve lower stay (A) and EVAP two way valve cover (B).
Subfuel
1. Remove the EVAP two way valve cover (A).
2. Disconnect the hoses (A).

3. Remove the nut (B).
4. Remove the EVAP two way valve (C).
Electronic Throttle Control System Component Location Index
THROTTLE ACTUATOR and

THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
CONTROL RELAY
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)/

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
Information,
Substituting,
ACCELERATOR Update,
PEDAL POSITION Replacement,
ACCELERATOR PEDAL MODULE
(APP) SENSOR Removal/Installation,
Signal Inspection, in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A
APP Sensor Signal Inspection
NOTE:
This procedure checks the APP sensor in this fully closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor stores
DTCs which are covered in other troubleshooting procedures.
Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are indicated,
Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the pedal. If
you find a problem, replace the accelerator pedal module.
4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK.
If it is not 0 %, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM, then go to Step 5 .
If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal module, then go to Step 1 .
Subfuel Pressure Relieving
Before disconnecting subfuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disabling the subfuel pump and then
disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment.
2. Remove the subfuel fill cap, then retighten the subfuel cap.
3. Remove the bolt (A), then disconnect the subfuel feed line (B).
4. Place a rag or shop towel over the subfuel feed line (A) and (B).
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, with a new O-ring (C).
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the subfuel pump runs for about 2 seconds,
the fuel pressure in the line rises. Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel leakage.
Fuel and Emissions System Description - Fuel Supply System
Fuel Supply System
Fuel and Emissions System Description - Subfuel Supply System
Subfuel Supply System
Fuel Supply System Component Location Index
SUBFUEL TANK
FUEL LINE/ Draining,
QUICK-CONNECT FITTING Replacement,
Precautions,
Removal, FUEL RAIL
Installation,
FUEL TANK
SUBFUEL PUMP Draining,
Circuit Troubleshooting, Replacement,
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
Replacement, BREATHER LINE and
SUCTION LINE
Inspection,
FUEL FILL CAP
ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE (ECM)/
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Information,
Substituting,
Update,
Replacement,
FUEL FILL PIPE

PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 Removal/Installation,
in the Shop Manual

Suppliment, P/N 62TF020
FUEL TANK UNIT
Removal and Installation,
FUEL PUMP
Replacement,
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
FUEL NOZZLE Test,
FUEL LINE/
QUICK-CONNECT FITTING
FUEL LINE/ Precautions,
QUICK-CONNECT FITTING Removal,
Precautions, Installation,
Removal,
Installation, FUEL FEED LINE FUEL FILTER
Replacement,
FUEL VAPOR LINE FUEL LINE/
QUICK-CONNECT FITTING
Precautions,
Removal,
Installation,
Fuel Pressure Test
Fuel gauge assy. 600 kPa
07406-0040004
Fuel pressure gauge attachment set

07ZAJ-S5A0101
Fuel attachment C hose
07ZAJ-S7C0100
Fuel attachment C joint

07ZAJ-S7C0200
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting. Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel gauge assy.
If the engine starts, go to Step 5 .
If the engine does not start, go to Step 4 .
4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: Listen to the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump
should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on.
If the pump runs, go to Step 5 .
If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting.
5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should be 380−430 kPa (3.9−4.4 kgf/cm 2 , 55−63 psi).
If the pressure is OK, the test is complete.
If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pump and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel
pressure.
Subfuel Pressure Test
Fuel pressure gauge
07406-0040004
1. Relieve the subfuel pressure.
2. Disconnect the fuel feed line. Attach the fuel pressure gauge.
If the pressure is out of specification, replace the subfuel pump, then recheck the subfuel pressure.
Subfuel pressure
Subfuel pressure Pressure with fuel pressure gauge 200−250 kPa (2.0−2.5 kgf/cm 2 , 28−36 psi)
connected
Fuel Breather Line and Suction Line Inspection
3. Disconnect the fuel vapor hose (A) from the fuel tank unit and let the fuel tank pressure out of a fuel tank.
4. Reconnect the fuel vapor hose (A).
5. Disconnect the suction line (A) from the fuel tank unit, and connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0−30 in.Hg (B) to the
hose as shown.
6. Start the engine, and check the vacuum.
If there is vacuum, go to Step 7 .
If there is no vacuum, replace the fuel filter.
If the line holds vacuum, check for blockage in the suction line. If there is blockage, replace the suction line.
10. Remove the fill neck tube cover (A).
11. Disconnect the breather line (A), then plug the suction joint (B) with a rubber cap (C).
If the line holds vacuum, check for blockage in the breather line between the fuel tank and the suction joint. If
there is blockage, replace the fuel tank.
14. Connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0−30 in.Hg (A) to the filler side of the breather line (B), and apply air pressure to
the line.
If the air pressure holds, check for blockage between the suction line and the filler neck on the breather pipe,
and replace the part that is causing the blockage.
If the air pressure does not hold, go to Step 15 .
15. Remove the rubber cap from the suction line, and reconnect the breather pipe to the suction line.
16. Connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0−30 in.Hg (A) to the suction line (B), and apply pressure to the line.
If the air pressure holds, the breather line and the suction line are OK.
If the air pressure does not hold, check for a vacuum leak in the suction line, and replace the suction line if
necessary.
Fuel Filter Replacement
4. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (A).
5. Remove the fuel filter (C), and the fuel filter band (D).
6. Remove the bolt (A), then open the band (B).

7. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with new retainers.
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test
NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit Diagram.
1. Check the No. 22 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box before testing.
If no problem is found, go to Step 3 .
If DTC B1175 or B1176 is indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
5. Remove the bolts (A), the wire (B), then remove the parking brake lever (C).
6. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor.

7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B).
8. Measure the voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the ignition switch to ON
(II). There should be battery voltage.
If the voltage is OK, go to Step 9 .
If the voltage is not as specified, check for:
-a short in the LT GRN wire to ground.
-an open in the LT GRN or BLK wire.
10. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank.
11. Measure the resistance between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the float at E (EMPTY),
LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions.
If you do not get the following readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit.
Float Position F 91.2 mm (3.6 in.) 1/2 46 mm (1.8 in.) LOW 13.7 mm (0.5 E 6 mm (0.2 in.)
in.)
Resistance (Ω) 18.5 to 21.5 203.3 to 213.3 569.1 to 583.1 772 to 788
12. Reconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.

13. Remove the No. 1 BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds, then reinstall
it.
15. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates ‘‘F'' with the float at F.
If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicate ‘‘F'', replace the gauge assembly.
If the gauge is OK, the test is complete.
NOTE:
The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the bottom of the gauge dial when the ignition switch is to LOCK (0),
regardless of the fuel level.
Remove the No. 1 BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds after
completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct
fuel level.
Fuel Indicator Unit Replacement
1. Lower the glove box.
2. Disconnect the fuel indicator connector (A).
3. Remove the fuel indicator unit (B).
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precaution
The fuel line/quick-connect fittings (A), (B), (C), and (D) connect the fuel rail (E) to the fuel feed hose (F), the fuel feed
hose to the fuel line (G), the subfuel pump (H) to the subfuel feed hose (I), the fuel line (J) to the fuel tank unit (K), the fuel
filter (L) to the fuel feed hose (M).
When removing or installing the fuel feed hose, the fuel tank unit, the fuel tank, the subfuel tank, the subfuel pump, the
subfuel feed hose, or the fuel return hose, it is necessary to disconnect or connect the quick-connect fittings.
Pay attention to the following:
The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, subfuel feed hose, and quick-connect fittings are not heat-resistant; be careful not to
damage them during welding or other heat-generating procedures.
The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, subfuel feed hose, and quick-connect fittings are not acid-proof; do not touch them
with a shop towel that was used for wiping battery electrolyte. Replace them if they come in contact with
electrolyte or something similar.
When connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed hoses, fuel line, subfuel feed hose, and quick-connect fittings, be
careful not to bend or twist them excessively. Replace them if they are damaged.
A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot be reused once it has
been removed from the line. Replace the retainer when:
replacing the fuel rail.
replacing the fuel line.
replacing the fuel pump.
replacing the fuel filter.
replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
replacing the subfuel tank.
replacing the subfuel pump.
it has been removed from the line.
it is damaged.
Location Manufacturer Retainer color Line diameter
A Tokai Green or BLUE 8 mm (0.31 in.)
B Sanoh GREEN 6.3 mm (0.25 in.)
C Sanoh White 9.5 mm (0.37 in.)
D Sanoh White 8 mm (0.31 in.)
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal
NOTE: Before you work on fuel the lines and fittings, read the ‘‘Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions''.
1. If equipped, remove the quick-connect fitting cover from the fuel line. Raise the cover (A) the fuel line (B), and
remove it as shown.
2. Relieve the fuel pressure, and the subfuel pressure.
3. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings (A) for dirt, and clean them if needed.
4. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting. Hold the connector (A) with one hand, and squeeze the
retainer tabs (B) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (C). Pull the connector off.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the line (D) or other parts. Do not use tools.
5. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or damage.
If it is dirty, clean the connector with a pressure washer, and dry it with the compressed air.
If it is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel filter, or the fuel feed line.
6. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out, cover the disconnected connector and line ends with plastic bags
(A).
NOTE: The retainer cannot be reused once it has been removed from the line.
Replace the retainer when:
replacing the fuel feed line.
it is damaged.
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation
NOTE: Before you work on fuel lines and fittings, read the ‘‘Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions''.
1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or damage, and clean it if needed.
2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) if the retainer is damaged, or after:
replacing the fuel feed line.
removing the retainer from the line.
Use the same manufacturer retainer and the same size retainer when the replacing the retainer.
3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer (B) from the mating
line.
NOTE:
When replacing the fuel tube/quick-connect fitting assembly at the engine compartment, remove the air
cleaner, and the cover (C).
When installing the fuel tube/quick-connect fitting assembly at the engine compartment, align the mark (D)
on the fuel tube.
4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the line (A), and align the retainer locking tabs (B) with the connector grooves Connection with new
(C). Then press the quick-connect fittings onto the line until both retainer tabs lock with a clicking sound. retainer
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of new engine oil on the line end.
Reconnection to
existing retainer
Connection to new fuel

line
5. When you reconnecting the connector with the old retainer, make sure the connection is secure and the tabs (A) Reconnection to
are firmly locked into place; check visually and also by pulling the connector (B). When you replacing the fuel line existing retainer
with a new one, make sure you remove the ring pull (C) upwards after you confirm the connection is secure.
NOTE: Before you remove the ring pull, make sure the fuel line connection is secure. If the connection is not
secure, the ring pull could break when you try to remove it.
6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II) (but do not operate the starter
motor). The fuel pump will run for about 2 seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat two or three times, and
check that there is no leakage in the fuel supply system.
line
7. If equipped, install the quick-connect fitting cover. Set the groove of the cover (A) on the fuel line (B) as shown, then
install it. Make sure the cover is firmly locked in place.
Fuel Line Inspection
Fuel Nozzle Replacement
1. Relieve subfuel pressure.
2. Remove the subfuel solenoid.
3. Push the engine wire harness holder lock (A).
4. Remove the engine wire harness holder (B) from the injector pipe, and put it on the injector pipe.
5. Remove the subfuel pipe mounting bolts (C).
6. Pull out the subfuel pipe from the intake manifold, then rotate it forward 180° and pull it out in the direction shown.
NOTE: Do not scratch or damage the surface of the subfuel nozzle.
7. Remove the clip (A), and the nozzle (B).

8. Coat the new O-ring (C) with clean engine oil, and insert the fuel nozzle (B) with the clip (A) into the subfuel pipe
(D).
9. Coat the new O-ring (E) with clean engine oil, insert the fuel nozzle.
10. Install the subfuel pipe and the subfuel nozzle in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Do not scratch or damage the surface of the subfuel nozzle and O-ring.
11. Install the subfuel pipe mounting bolts (A).

12. Install the engine wire harness holder (B).
13. Install the subfuel solenoid.
the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel leakage.
15. Install the intake manifold stay.
Fuel pressure regulator
Fuel pressure Pressure with fuel pressure gauge 380−430 kPa (3.9−4.4 kgf/cm 2 , 55−63 psi)
regulator connected
Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement
2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel sending unit) (A) from the fuel tank unit (B).
3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit:
When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connector (C) is firmly
locked into place.
When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure. Be careful not to bend or
twist it excessively.
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and
the fuel tank.
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting
If you suspect a problem with the fuel pump, check that the fuel pump actually runs; when it is on, you will hear some
noise if you listen to the fuel fill port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned on. If the fuel pump does not make noise, check as follows:
2. Open the fuse lid (A), then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
4. Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
NO - Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. ■
Replace the PGM-FI main relay 1 .■
YES - Go to Step 6
NO - Check the No. 20 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.■
If the fuse is OK, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. ■
7. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
10. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A16.
NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 2 and the ECM/PCM (A16).■
11. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2.
12. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal A7 to body ground with a jumper wire.
14. Measure the voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal A16 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the ECM/PCM (A7, A16).■
Replace PGM-FI main relay 2. ■

16. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the voltage between under-dash fuse/relay box connector B (36P)
terminal No. 31 and body ground within 2 seconds.
ECM/PCM. ■
18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the voltage between under-dash fuse/relay box connector B (36P)
terminal No. 31 and body ground after 2 seconds.
NO - If needed, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to Step 19 .
22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground within 2 seconds.
24. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2.
25. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
26. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground.
YES - Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 .■
NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 2 and the fuel tank unit 4P connector.■
28. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
YES - Replace the fuel pump. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the fuel tank unit 4P connector and G502. ■
Fuel Tank Draining
2. Using a hand pump, a hose, and a container suitable for fuel, draw the fuel from the fuel tank.
3. Reinstall the fuel tank unit.
Fuel Tank Replacement
1. Drain the fuel tank, then disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (A), the fuel vapor hose (B),
and the quick-connect fittings (C).
3. Remove the fill neck tube cover (D), then disconnect the fuel fill tube (E) and the suction hose
(F). Slide back the clamps, then twist the hoses as you pull to avoid damaging them.
4. Remove the fuel tank guard bracket (G) and the fuel tank protector (H).
5. Place a jack or other support under the tank (I).
6. Remove the strap bolts and the straps (J).
7. Remove the fuel tank.
Fuel tank
Fuel tank Capacity 42 L (11.0 US gal, 9.2 Imp gal)
Fuel Tank Unit Removal and Installation
Fuel sender wrench
07AAA-S0XA100
Removal
3. Remove the bolts (A), the wire harness (B), the remove the parking brake lever (C).

6. Disconnect the fuel vapor hose (C), the suction hose (D), the quick-connect fittings (E) from the fuel tank unit.
7. Using the special tool, loosen the locknut (A).
8. Remove the locknut (A) and the fuel tank unit (B).
Installation
1. Temporarily attach a new base gasket (A) to the fuel tank unit (B), then insert the fuel tank unit partially into the
fuel tank.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the new base gasket.
Be careful not to bend the fuel gauge sending unit.
Do not coat the base gasket with oil.
2. Transfer the base gasket (A) from the fuel tank unit to the fuel tank.
3. Align the marks (B) on the fuel tank and fuel tank unit, then insert the fuel tank unit into the fuel tank until the fuel
tank unit rests on top of the base gasket.
NOTE: To avoid a fuel leak, check the base gasket, visually or by hand, to make sure it is not pinched.
4. Using the special tool, tighten a new locknut (A) to the specified torque.
NOTE:
After tightening, make sure the marks are still aligned.
After installation, check the base gasket, visually or by hand, to make sure it is not pinched.
5. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector, then connect the quick-connect fitting, the suction hose, and the fuel
vapor hose.
motor). The fuel pump will run for about 2 seconds, and fuel pressure rises. Repeat this two or three times, then
7. Install the access panel, the parking brake lever, and the center console.
Subfuel Pump Replacement
Fuel sender wrench, clysler fuel pump module wrench
No. 7998
, or equivalent, commercially available

1. Remove the subfuel tank.
2. Set the fuel subtank (A) to the vice.
3. Using the tool, loosen the locknut (B). Remove the subfuel pump (C).
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new gasket (D) and locknut plate (E).
NOTE:
Align the marks (F) on the fuel tank and the fuel tank unit, then tighten a new locknut by hand.
After installation and tightening, check the base gasket visually or by hand to be sure the gasket is not
pinched.
Do not coat the base gasket with engine oil.
Subfuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting
If you suspect a problem with the subfuel pump, check that the subfuel pump actually runs; when it is on, you will hear
some noise if you listen to the subfuel fill port with the subfuel fill cap removed. The subfuel pump should run for 2 seconds
when the ignition switch is first turned on. If the subfuel pump does not make noise, check as follows:
2. Remove the subfuel pump relay from the auxiliary under-hood relay box.
4. Measure the voltage between the subfuel pump relay 4P connector terminals No. 2, No.4 and body ground
individually.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the subfuel pump relay and the auxiliary under-dash fuse holder
(15 A) fuse. Also replace the auxiliary under-hood fuse box (15 A) fuse.■
Repair open in the wire between the auxiliary under-dash fuse holder (15 A) fuse and the ignition
switch.■
6. Connect subfuel pump relay 4P connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the subfuel pump relay and the ECM/PCM (A33).■
10. Test the subfuel pump relay.
Is the subfuel pump relay OK?
NO - Replace the subfuel pump relay .■
11. Reinstall the subfuel pump relay.
12. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the voltage between subfuel pump relay 4P connector terminal No.
1 and body ground within 2 seconds.
ECM/PCM. ■
15. Remove the glove box.
16. Disconnect the fuel subharness 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness.
17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the voltage between dashboad wire harness 4P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2 within 2 seconds.
19. Check for continuity between body ground and dashboad wire harness 4P connector terminal No. 2.
YES - Repair open in the wire between the subfuel pump relay and the fuel subharness 4P connector.■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the fuel subharness 4P connector and G502. ■
20. Remove the right front fender.
21. Disconnect the subfuel pump 4P connector.
22. Connect subfuel pump 4P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
23. Check for continuity between body ground and fuel subharness 4P connector terminal No. 1.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the subfuel pump and the fuel subharness 4P connector.■
24. Connect subfuel pump 4P connector terminal No. 4 to body ground with a jumper wire.
25. Check for continuity between body ground and fuel subharness 4P connector terminal No. 2.
YES - Replace the subfuel pump. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the subfuel pump and the fuel subharness 4P connector.■
Subfuel Tank Draining
1. Remove the subfuel fill cap.
2. Using a hand pump, a hose, and a container suitable for fuel, draw the fuel from the subfuel tank.
Subfuel Tank Replacement
3. Remove the right headlight.
4. Remove the front pillar corner trim.
5. Remove the right side front inner fender clips.
7. Disconnect the subfuel feed pump 4P connector (A).
8. Remove the bolt (B) from the subfuel pump subharness holder (C).
9. Remove the bolt (D) and nut (E) from the fuel subtank (F).
10. Remove the subfuel feed pipe protector (A) and (B).

12. Remove the bolt (B) from the subfuel tank (C).
Subfuel tank
Subfuel tank Capacity 0.76 L (0.20 US gal, 0.17 Imp gal)
Subfuel Tank Low Fuel Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
Subfuel tank Low fuel indicator does not come on
2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function.
Does the subfuel tank low fuel indicator flash?
NO - Substitute a known-good gauge control module, and recheck. If the subfuel tank low fuel indicator circuit
is OK, replace the original gauge control module. ■
4. Connect fuel indicator unit 5P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
6. Check the subfuel tank low fuel indicator.
Is the subfuel tank low fuel indicator indicated?
8. Disconnect the fuel indicator unit 5P connector.
10. Measure the voltage between fuel indicator unit 5P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the fuel indicator unit and the No. 22 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box.■
11. Measure the voltage between fuel indicator unit 5P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 5.
YES - Replace the fuel indicator unit .■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the fuel indicator unit and G502. ■
13. Remove the gauge control module.
16. Check the subfuel tank low fuel indicator.
Is the subfuel tank low fuel indicator indicated?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the fuel indicator unit and the gauge control module.■
NO - Replace the original gauge control module. ■
Subfuel Tank Low Fuel Indicator stays on with enough fuel

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the subfuel tank low fuel indicator.
Does the subfuel tank low fuel indicator stay on for more than 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch to ON
(II)?
NO - Go to Step 3 .
3. Measure the voltage between fuel indicator unit 5P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
NO - Replace the fuel indicator unit.
8. Measure the voltage between dashboard wire harness 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the fuel indicator unit (sensor out line) and the fuel subharness.■
9. Measure the voltage between dashboard wire harness 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the fuel indicator unit (sensor in line) and the fuel subharness.■
11. Reconnect the fuel subharness 4P connector to the dashboard wire harness.
15. Measure the voltage between subfuel pump 4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the dashboard wire harness (sensor out line) and the subfuel pump.■
16. Measure the voltage between subfuel pump 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
YES - Replace the subfuel pump. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the fuel subharness (sensor in line) and the subfuel pump.■
18. Disconnect the fuel indicator unit 5P connector.
19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the subfuel tank low fuel indicator.
Does the subfuel tank low fuel indicator stay on for more than 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch to ON
(II)?
YES - Repair short in the wire between the fuel indicator unit and the gauge control module.■
23. Check for continuity between dashboard wire harness 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the fuel indicator unit (sensor out line) and the fuel subharness.■
26. Check for continuity between subfuel pump 4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the dashboard wire harness (sensor out line) and the subfuel pump.■
NO - Replace the fuel indicator unit .■
PGM-FI System Component Location Index
MAINFOLD ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR
Replacement,
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
Replacement,
IGNITION COIL RELAY
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR 1
Replacement,
IGNITION COILS
A/F SENSOR RELAY
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF)
SENSOR/
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
(IAT) SENSOR
Replacement,
in the Shop Manual,
P/N 62TF000A
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN
SENSORENGINE CONTROL
MODULE
(SECONDARY (ECM)/
HO2S) (SENSOR 2)
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
Replacement,
MODULE
in the Shop (PCM)
Manual, P/N 62TF000A
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) General Troubleshooting
SENSOR (SENSOR 1) Information,
Replacement, Substituting,
in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A Update,
Replacement,
SUBFUEL DATA LINK CONNECTOR

SOLENOID (DLC)
Test, General Troubleshooting OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
ELECTRICAL LOAD PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 Information, SPEED SENSOR (AT)
Replacement, DETECTOR (ELD) Circuit Troubleshooting,
Replacement,
in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
INJECTORS SPEED SENSOR (M/T)
KNOCK SENSOR CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
in the Shop Manual,
P/N 62TF000A
ENGINE COOLANT OIL PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE (ECT) SWITCH
SENSOR 2
Replacement,
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Make sure the HDS and its DLC cable are working properly.
NOTE: Make sure the HDS is properly connected to the DLC.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the HDS.
Does the HDS identify the vehicle?
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated?
YES - Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■
NO - If the HDS does not communicate with the SRS system, go to Step 5 .
If the HDS does not communicate with the ABS system, go to Step 7 .
If the HDS does not communicate with the EPS system, go to Step 9 .
If the HDS does not communicate with the IMMOBI (immobilizer) system, go to Step 11 .
If the HDS does not communicate with the BODY ELECTRICAL system, go to Step 13 .

6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the SRS indicator.
Does the SRS indicator stay on?
YES - Go to the SRS system's general troubleshooting information. ■
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the ABS indicator.
Does the ABS indicator stay on?
YES - Go to the ABS system's general troubleshooting information. ■
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the EPS indicator.
Does the EPS indicator stay on?
YES - Go to the EPS system's general troubleshooting information. ■
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the immobilizer indicator.
Does the immobilizer indicator stay on or flash?
YES - Go to the immobilizer system's troubleshooting. ■
14. Check the gauge display.
Is Error 2 indicated?
YES - Check for B-CAN system DTCs.■
17. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No. 7 and body ground.
Is there 5 Ω or less?
18. Continue to check for continuity between DLC terminal No. 7 and body ground, while disconnecting these parts,
one at a time:
SRS unit connector A (39P)
ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector
EPS control unit connector C (16P)
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector
Audio unit 24P connector
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (16P)
Does continuity go away when one of the above components is disconnected?
YES - Replace the part caused an open when it was disconnected.■
NO - Repair short in the wire between the DLC (K-line) and the ABS control unit, the SRS unit, the EPS control
unit, the immobilizer-keyless control unit, the audio unit, the under-dash fuse/relay box, or the
ECM/PCM.■
19. Connect DLC terminal No. 7 to body ground with a jumper wire.
20. Check for continuity between body ground and these connector terminals:
Connector Terminal
SRS unit A (39P) No. 18 (BLU)
ABS control unit 25P No. 10 (BLU)
EPS control unit C (16P) No. 16 (BLU)
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P No. 5 (BLU)
Audio unit 24P No. 3 (BLU)
Under-dash fuse/relay box Q (16P) No. 2 (BLU)
Is there continuity between the DLC terminal and each of the terminals in the chart?
YES - Replace the part that does not communicate with the HDS.■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the DLC (K-line) and the appropriate connector.■
21. Check for B-CAN system DTCs without the HDS.
Is DTC U0029 and/or U0100 indicated?
24. Measure the voltage between DLC terminal No. 16 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No. 16 and the No. 1 BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box.■
25. Measure the voltage between DLC terminals No. 4 and No. 16.
NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No. 4 and body ground (G502).■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A3) and DLC terminal No. 6.■
ECM/PCM. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A4) and DLC terminal No. 14.■
Does the engine start and idle smoothly?
YES - Go to F-CAN circuit troubleshooting. ■
36. Check the No. 60 IGSW (50 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Repair open in the wire the No. 60 IGSW (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. If the wire is OK go to Step
37 .
NO - Repair short in the wire the No. 60 IGSW (50 A) fuse and the under-dash fuse/relay box. Also replace the
No. 60 IGSW (50 A) fuse.■
37. Inspect the No. 39 IGP (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
38. Remove the blown No. 39 IGP (15 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
39. Open the fuse lid (A), then remove the PGM-FI main relay 1 (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
40. Check for continuity between body ground and PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3
individually.
YES - Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. ■
41. While disconnecting each of the parts or connectors below, one at a time, check for continuity between PGM-FI
main relay 1 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
PGM-FI main relay 2
ECM/PCM connector A (49P)
Each injector 2P connector
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 3P connector
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 3P connector
Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay
YES - Replace the part that made the short to body ground go away when disconnected. If the part is the
ECM/PCM, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace
the original ECM/PCM. Also replace the No. 39 IGP (15 A) fuse.■
42. Disconnect these parts or connectors:
PGM-FI main relay 2
ECM/PCM connector A
Injectors
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay
43. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 and each item. Also replace the No. 39 IGP (15 A)
fuse.■
NO - Replace PGM-FI main relay 1. Also replace the No. 39 IGP (15 A) fuse.■
44. Inspect the No. 20 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
45. Remove the blown No. 20 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
47. Test PGM-FI main relay 2.
Is the fuse OK?
NO - Replace PGM-FI main relay 2. Also replace the No. 20 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse.■
48. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
50. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P).
51. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal C10 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the No. 20 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (C10), or PGM-
FI main relay 2. Also replace the No. 20 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse.■
52. Disconnect the fuel pump 4P connector.
53. Check for continuity between fuel pump 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the fuel pump and PGM-FI main relay 2. Also replace the No. 20 FUEL
PUMP (15 A) fuse.■
NO - Check the fuel pump, and replace it if necessary. Also replace the No. 20 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse.■
55. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors A (49P) and C (49P).
57. Measure the voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal C10 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 20 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (C10).■
58. Measure the voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal A7 and body ground.
NO - Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.
YES - Test PGM-FI main relay 1. If the relay is OK, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software,
or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-
good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A7) and PGM-FI main relay 1.■
NO - Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A9) and PGM-FI main relay 1.■
69. Test PGM-FI main relay 1.
Is PGM-FI main relay 1 OK?
NO - Replace the PGM-FI main relay 1 .■
71. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals B1, B10, C2, C44, and C48
individually.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B1, B10, C2, C44, C48) and G101.■
73. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal C13 and body ground, while disconnecting
these parts, one at a time:
MAP sensor 3P connector
Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector
YES - Repair the part that caused an open when it was disconnected.■
NO - Repair short in the between the ECM/PCM (C13) and the MAP sensor or the output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor.■
75. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal B19 and body ground, while disconnecting
the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 3P connector.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B19) and the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor.■
NO - Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor. ■
77. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal C12 and body ground, while disconnecting
the throttle body 6P connector.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (C12) and the throttle body.■
NO - Replace the throttle body. ■
79. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A26 and body ground, while disconnecting
the APP sensor 6P connector.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A26) and APP sensor A.■
NO - Replace the accelerator pedal module. ■
ECM/PCM. ■
81. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A25 and body ground, while disconnecting
the APP sensor 6P connector.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A25) and APP sensor B.■
NO - Replace the accelerator pedal module. ■
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( * ) applies to the CANL line.
3. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P), then disconnect the HDS.
4. Measure the resistance between ECM/PCM connector terminals A3 and A4.
Is there about 95−116 Ω?
NO - Go to Step 5 .
5. Disconnect these connectors:
Gauge control module 32P
ABS modulator-control unit 25P
EPS control unit C (16P)
SRS unit A (39P)
6. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminals A3 and A4.

YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM terminals A3 and A4 * .■
NO - Go to Step 7 .
8. Check for continuity between gauge control module 32P connector terminal No. 30 and body ground.
YES - With ABS: Go to Step 9 .
Without ABS: Go to Step 10 .
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A3) and the gauge control module.■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A3) and the ABS modulator-control unit.■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A3) and the EPS control unit.■
11. Remove the jumper wire from ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
13. Check for continuity between gauge control module 32P connector terminal No. 29 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A4) and the gauge control module.■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A4) and the ABS modulator-control unit.■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A4) and the EPS control unit.■
16. Reconnect the gauge control module 32P connector.
Is there about 108−132 Ω?
NO - Substitute a known-good gauge control module, If the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace the original
gauge control module. ■
Is there about 2.34−2.86 kΩ?
NO - Substitute a known-good ABS modulator-control unit, If the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace the original
ABS modulator-control unit. ■
21. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 46P connector (with ABS) or the gauge control module 32P connector
(without ABS).
22. Reconnect EPS control unit connector C (16P).
NO - Substitute a known-good EPS control unit, If the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace the original EPS
control unit. ■
25. Reconnect SRS unit connector A (39P).
ECM/PCM. ■
NO - Substitute a known-good SRS unit. If the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace the original SRS unit. ■
27. Disconnect these connectors:
Gauge control module 32P
ABS modulator-control unit 25P
EPS control unit C (16P)
SRS unit A (39P)
YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM terminals A3 and the gauge control module, the ABS
modulator-control unit, the EPS control unit, the SRS unit, or the DLC.■
YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM terminals A4 and the gauge control module, the ABS
modulator-control unit, the EPS control unit, the SRS unit, or the DLC.■
NO - With ABS: Go to Step 34 .

35. Reconnect the gauge control module 32P connector.
39. Reconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector (with ABS) or the gauge control module 32P connector
(without ABS).
43. Reconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P).
44. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P).
YES - Replace the SRS unit. ■
ECM/PCM. ■
Injector Test
NOTE: Check the following items before testing; idle speed, ignition timing, and idle CO%.
4. Select ONE INJECTOR in INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
5. Disable each injector at a time by selecting number of an injector which you want to step.
6. Inspect the change in the idle speed.
If the idle speed drop is almost the same for each cylinder, the fuel injectors are normal.
If the idle speed or quality remains the same when you disconnect a particular injector, faulty injector is
suspected. Replace the injector and retest.
7. Check the clicking sound of each injector by means of a stethoscope when the engine is idling.
If any fuel injector fails to make the typical clicking sound, check the sound again after replacing the
injector.
If clicking sound is still absent, check the following.
-Whether there is wire breakage or poor connection in the YEL/BLK wire between the PGM-FI main relay 1
and the junction connector.
-Whether the junction connector is open or corroded.
-Whether there is wire breakage or poor connection in the YEL/BLK wire between the junction connector
and the injector.
-Whether there is any short-circuiting, wire breakage or poor connection in the wire between the injector
and the ECM/PCM.
If all is OK, the test is complete.
10. Disconnect the injector connector.
11. Measure the resistance between injector (A) terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be 10−13 Ω.
If the resistance is OK, go to Step 12 .
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the injector.
If the fuel pressure is as specified, check the following:
-Whether there is wire breakage, or poor connection in the YEL/BLK wire between the PGM-FI main relay
1 and the junction connector.
-Whether there is wire breakage, or poor connection in the YEL/BLK wire between the junction connector
and the injector.
and the ECM/PCM.
If the fuel pressure is not as specified, recheck the fuel pressure.
Injector Replacement
2. Remove the intake manifold, and intake manifold chamber.
3. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the quick-connect fitting (B).
4. Disconnect the injector connectors (C).
5. Remove the fuel rail mounting nuts (D) from the fuel rail (E).
6. Remove the fuel rail and the injectors from the cylinder head.
7. Remove the injector clips (F) from the fuel rail.
8. Remove the injectors (G) from the fuel rail.
9. Coat the new O-rings (black) (A) with clean engine oil, and insert the injectors (B) into the fuel
rail (C).
10. Install the injector clips (D).
11. Coat the new injector O-rings (brown) (E) with clean engine oil.
12. Install the fuel rail and the injectors in the cylinder head (F).
13. Install the fuel rail mounting nuts (G).
14. Connect the injector connectors (H).
15. Connect the quick-connect fitting (I).
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for
about 2 seconds, the fuel rail will be pressurized. Repeat this two or three times, then check for
fuel leakage.
17. Reinstall the intake manifold, and intake manifold chamber.
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting
Does the MIL indicator flash?
NO - Substitute a known-good gauge control module, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a
known-good gauge control module, replace the original gauge control module. ■
4. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is a short indicated?
ECM/PCM. ■
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A32) and the DLC.■
ECM/PCM. ■
Subfuel Solenoid Test
3. Select the SUBFUEL SOLENOID ON and OFF in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
4. Check the clicking sound of subfuel solenoid by means of a stethoscope.
If any subfuel solenoid fails to make the typical clicking sound, check the sound again after replacing the
subfuel solenoid.
-Whether there is wire breakage or poor connection in the YEL/BLK, YEL wire between subfuel pump relay
and the subfuel solenoid.
-Whether there is wire breakage or poor connection in the WHT wire between subfuel pump relay and the
auxiliary under-dash fuse holder (15 A) fuse.
-Whether there is any short-circuiting, wire breakage or poor connection in the wire between the subfuel
solenoid and the ECM/PCM.
6. Disconnect the subfuel solenoid 2P connector.
7. Measure the resistance between subfuel solenoid (A) terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be 10.3 Ω.
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the subfuel solenoid.
8. Remove the subfuel solenoid.
9. Check the subfuel solenoid for dirt or rusty.
If it is dirty or rusty, replace the subfuel solenoid, and the fuel nozzle.
Subfuel Solenoid Replacement
3. Remove the intake manifold stay (B).
4. Disconnect the connector (C) from the subfuel solenoid.
5. Remove the harness band (D) from the subfuel solenoid holder (E).
6. Place the wrench (A), then remove the bolts (B).

7. Remove the injector clip (C) from the subfuel solenoid.
8. Coat the new O-ring (A) with clean engine oil, and insert the subfuel solenoid (B) into the subfuel solenoid holder
(C).
9. Install the injector clip (D).
10. Coat the injector O-ring (E) with clean engine oil, and insert the subfuel solenoid into the subfuel pipe (F).
11. Place the wrench (G), then tighten the bolts (H).
12. Install the bolt (A).

13. Install the subfuel feed pipe (B), with a new O-ring (C).
14. Reconnect the connector (D).
the subfuel pressure in the subfuel line rises. Repeat this two or three time, then check for fuel leakage.
16. Install the harness band (E).
17. Install the intake manifold stay (F).
Idle Control System Component Location Index
A/C COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH RELAY
Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting,
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)/

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
ALTERNATOR Information,
A/C COMPRESSOR Signal Circuit Substituting,
Troubleshooting, Update,
Replacement,
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

Signal Circuit Troubleshooting,

Idle Speed Inspection
NOTE:
Before checking the idle speed, check these items:
-The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been reported on, and there are no DTCs.
-Ignition timing
-Spark plugs
-Air cleaner
-PCV system
-Headlight OFF
1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard, or a
tachometer (B) to the test tachometer connector (C).
3. When using the HDS, make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit
troubleshooting.
5. Check the idle speed without load conditions: headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air conditioner off.
Idle speed should be:
L13Z3 engine
M/T 700±50 rpm (min −1 )
A/T 700±50 rpm (min −1 ) (in N or P)
L15A8 engine
M/T 700±50 rpm (min −1 )
A/T 700±50 rpm (min −1 ) (in N or P)
6. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with high electric load (A/C switch on, temperature set to max cool, blower fan on
High, and headlights on high beam).
Idle speed should be:
M/T 790±50 rpm (min −1 )

A/T 790±50 rpm (min −1 ) (in N or P)
NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. If the idle speed is still
not within specification, go to symptom troubleshooting.
7. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector.
Engine idle
Engine idle Idle speed without load M/T (in neutral) 700±50 rpm
A/T (in N or P)
Idle speed with high electrical load (A/C M/T (in neutral), 790±50 rpm
switch ON, temperature set to max cool, A/T (in N or P)
blower fan on High, rear window defogger
ON, and headlights on high beam)
Idle CO 0.1 % max
A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Turn the blower switch on.
3. Turn the A/C switch on.
4. Check the A/C CLUTCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
NO - Do the A/C system test. ■
5. Check the A/C system.
Does the A/C system operate?
YES - The air conditioning system circuit is OK.■
NO - Go to Step 6 .
8. Activate the A/C CLUTCH in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
Is there a clicking noise from the A/C compressor clutch?
YES - Do the A/C system test. ■
NO - Go to Step 9 .
13. Momentarily connect ECM/PCM connector terminal A15 to body ground with a jumper wire several times.
ECM/PCM. ■
NO - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/C compressor clutch relay and the ECM/PCM. If
the connections are OK, check the A/C compressor clutch relay, repair open in the wire between the
ECM/PCM (A15) and the A/C compressor clutch relay and the other A/C systems.■
Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Monitor the ALTERNATOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
3. Check if the indicated percentage varies when the headlight switch is turned on.
Does the percentage vary?
YES - The alternator signal circuit is OK.■
NO - Go to Step 4 .
4. Turn the headlight switch off and the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
8. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal B47.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B47) and the alternator.■
NO - Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit. ■
Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM. ■
Intake Air System Component Location Index
THROTTLE BODY
Test,
Cleaning,
AIR CLEANER
in the Shop Manual Supplement,

P/N 62TF020
Element Inspection/
Replacement,
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
Exploded View
Removal
2. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose (B).
3. Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector.
4. Remove the dipstick.
6. Remove the intake manifold bracket C.
7. Remove the subfuel pipe from the intake manifold.
Installation
1. Install the subfuel pipe (A) to the intake manifold.
2. Install the intake manifold bracket C (B).
3. Install the intake manifold (C) with new gaskets (D), and tighten the bolts and nuts in a crisscross pattern in three
steps, beginning with the inner bolt.
4. Install the dipstick.
5. Connect the EGR valve connector.
6. Install the PCV hose (A) and harness holder (B).

Intake Manifold Chamber Removal and Installation
Exploded View
Removal
3. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and wire harness clamps from the intake manifold chamber.
Throttle actuator connector
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor connector
4. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and the harness clamp (B).
5. Remove the water bypass hose from the clamp (C).
6. Remove the throttle body without disconnecting the water bypass hoses.
7. Remove the intake manifold bracket mounting bolts.
Installation
1. Install the intake manifold chamber (A) with a new gaskets (B), and tighten the bolts in a crisscross pattern in three
2. Loosen the intake manifold bracket mounting bolt (A). Tighten the mounting bolts (B), then tighten the mounting
bolt (A).
3. Install the throttle body (A) with a new gasket (B).
4. Install the water bypass hose to the clamp (A).

5. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (B) and the harness clamp (C).
6. Install the engine wire harness connectors and wire harness clamps to the intake manifold chamber.
MAP sensor connector
Intake Manifold/Chamber Assembly Removal and Installation
Exploded View
Removal
3. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and wire harness clamps from the intake manifold chamber.
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor connector
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector
4. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and the harness clamp (B).
5. Remove the water bypass hose from the clamp (C).
6. Remove the throttle body without disconnecting the water bypass hoses.
10. Remove the intake manifold bracket mounting bolts.
Installation
1. Install the intake manifold/chamber assembly (A) with a new gasket (B), and tighten the bolts and nuts in a
crisscross pattern in three steps, beginning with the inner bolt.
2. Loosen the intake manifold bracket mounting bolt (A). Tighten the mounting bolts (B), then tighten the mounting
bolt (A).
3. Install the throttle body (A) with a new gasket (B).


6. Install the water bypass hose to the clamp (A).
7. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (B) and the harness clamp (C).
8. Install the engine wire harness connectors and wire harness clamps to the intake manifold chamber.
MAP sensor connector
EGR valve connector
Throttle Body Test
5. Check REL TP SENSOR in the DATA LIST the HDS. The reading should be below 2.46 deg. If it is not, clean the
throttle body.
Throttle Body Removal/Installation
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve is
activated.

2. Remove the harness clamp (A).
3. Disconnect the throttle body connector (B), and the EVAP canister purge valve connector (C).
4. Disconnect and plug the water bypass hoses (D), the purge hose (E).
5. Remove the throttle body (F).
6. Remove the purge pipe (G), the water bypass hoses, and the purge hose from the throttle body.
7. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new gasket (H), then refill the radiator with
engine coolant.
NOTE:
If you replace or clean the throttle body, go to Step 8 .
If you did not replace or clean the throttle body, this procedure is complete.
Align the marks (I) on the hose and throttle body, then insert the hose. Make sure the
clamp (J) is positioned as shown.
Align the mark (K) on the hose as shown, then insert the hose. Make sure the clamp (L)
is positioned as shown.
Engine Lubrication Component Location Index
O-RING CRANKSHAFT POSITION

(CKP) SENSOR
Replacement,
in the Shop Manual,

P/N 62TF000A
DRAIN BOLT
WASHER
OIL PAN
Removal,
in the Shop Manual,
P/N 62TF000A
Installation,
in the Shop Manual,
P/N 62TF000A
OIL SCREEN
(L13Z3 engine)
OIL FILTER
Replacement,
in the Shop Manual,

P/N 62TF000A
OIL FILTER FEED PIPE

Replacement,
in the Shop Manual,

P/N 62TF000A
DIPSTICK TUBE
OIL PAN GASKET

GASKET
OIL SCREEN
(L15A8 engine)
GASKET
OIL PUMP
Overhaul,
O-RING
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Circuit Diagram,
OIL/AIR SEPARATOR Test,
Installation, in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A
in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A Replacement,
Oil Pressure Test,
Engine Oil Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
Sub hanger stay
07MAK-PY30100
Removal
2. Remove the alternator mounting bolt, then install the sub hanger stay.
3. Attach the chain to the sub hanger stay. Lift and support the engine with the chain.
5. Remove the oil screen (A), then remove the oil pump (B). L15A8 engine
L13Z3 engine
Inspection
1. Remove the screws from the oil pump housing, then separate the pump housing and pump cover.
2. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance between the inner rotor (A) and the outer rotor (B). If the inner-to-
outer rotor clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the oil pump assembly.
Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance

3. Check the pump housing-to-rotor axial clearance between the rotors (A) and pump housing (B). If the pump
housing-to-rotor axial clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the oil pump assembly.
Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance

4. Check the pump housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance between the outer rotor (A) and the pump housing (B). If the
pump housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the oil pump assembly.
Pump Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance

5. Inspect both rotors and the pump housing for scoring or other damage. Replace the parts, if necessary.
6. Check that the oil pump turns freely.
Installation L15A8 engine
1. Clean the O-ring groove and the mating surface of the engine block.
2. Install the oil pump (A) with a new O-ring (B).
3. Install the oil screen (C) with a new gasket (D).
L13Z3 engine
6. Remove the chain and sub hanger stay, then tighten the alternator mounting bolt.
Right Front Fender Removal/Installation
FFV Model
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front fender and body.
Front bumper
Headlight
Front pillar corner trim
2. Remove the front inner fender.
3. Remove the fuel filler cap (A).
4. Remove the fuel fill door trim.
5. Remove the bolts from the right front fender (A).
6. From back of the front fender (A), remove the fuel fill door opener cable (B) from the fuel filler lid (C), take care not to
scratch the front fender.
7. Install the front fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the fuel fill door latch is installed properly.
Make sure the fuel fill door opens properly and locks securely.
Apply touch-up paint to the front fender installation bolts, and around the front fender.
Front fender in or out until it's flush with the door, and up or down as necessary to equalize the gaps.
Apply multipurpose grease to the fuel fill door latch.
Front Fender Fairing Replacement - Supplement
Right Front Fender Fairing - FFV Model
1. Remove the front right fender.
2. Remove the hooks (A), then remove the front fender fairing (B) from the front right fender (C).
3. Install the front fender fairing in the reverse order of removal.
Front Inner Fender Replacement
FFV Model
NOTE:
1. For some models: Remove the side sill panel.
2. Remove the front inner fender (A).
-1. On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B), and remove the front splash guard
(C) (for some models).
-2. From under the front bumper (D), remove the screw (E) securing the front bumper, the
splash shield (F), and the front inner fender.
-3. Remove the clip (G) securing the front bumper and the front inner fender.
-4. From the wheel arch, remove the screw (H), clips (I, J, K), clips (L).
-5. Release the hook (M) of the splash shield, then remove the front inner fender.
NOTE: To remove the clips G, I, pry the inner the clip up at the edge near the line (N) on
its head.
3. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Pull the lower end of the drain tube (A) down fully, then the inner fender (B) fasten the tube with the clips (C).
And make sure that water is drained through the tube.
Fuel Fill Door Adjustment
FFV Model
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front fender.
1. Remove the fuel fill door trim.
2. Slightly loosen the hinge mounting bolts (A).
3. Adjust the fuel fill door (B) in or out until it's flush with the front fender, and up or down as necessary to equalize the
gaps.
4. Tighten the hinge mounting bolts.
5. Check that the fuel fill door opens properly and locks securely, and check that the rear of the door is flush with the
front fender.
6. Apply multipurpose grease to each location indicated by the arrows.

7. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts and around the hinges.
8. Reinstall the fuel fill door trim.
Fuel Fill Door Trim Replacement
FFV Model
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front fender and body.
1. Remove the fuel filler cap.
2. Remove the screw securing the fuel fill door trim (A).
3. Remove the fuel fill door trim (A) with the drain tube (B) from the front fender (C).
4. Disconnect the drain tube (A) from the fuel fill door trim (B).
5. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal and make sure the drain tube is connected securely.
Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement
FFV Model
1. Remove the driver's side kick panel.
2. Remove the bolt, then remove the fuel fill door opener handle (A).
3. Disconnect the fuel fill door cable (B) from the fuel fill door release handle. Take care not to bend the cable.
4. Install the fuel fill door release handle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the fuel fill door opener cable is connected properly.
Make sure the fuel fill door opens properly.
Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement
FFV Model
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body and related parts.
Left front inner fender
Driver's side kick panel
3. Disconnect the fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the fuel fill door opener (B). Take care not to
kink the cable.
4. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (C, D). Release the fuel fill door opener cable from the
clips (E, F, G) being wound onto the opener cable off, then remove the fuel fill door opener cable
from the grommet (H). Take care not to kink the cable.
Make sure the fuel fill door opens properly and locks securely.
Hood Opener Cable Replacement
FFV Model
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body and the related parts.
Left front inner fender
2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the hood latch (B), and disconnect the hood opener
cable from the hood release handle (C). Take care not to kink the cable.
3. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (D, E), release the cable from the clips (F, G, H) being
wound onto the opener cable off, then remove the hood opener cable from the grommet (I). Take
care not to kink the cable.
Make sure the cable is connected properly.
Fuse to Components Index - Auxiliary Under-dash Fuse Holder
Auxiliary Under-dash Fuse Holder (FFV)

Fuse Number Amps Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
1 ——— Not used
2 15 A Subfuel pump relay, Subfuel solenoid (via subfuel pump relay)
AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH
FUSE HOLDER
*
1 2
*: Not used
A/C Compressor Thermal Protector Replacement
1. Remove the bolt and the holder (A). Disconnect the field coil connector (B), then remove the thermal protector (C).
2. Replace the thermal protector (A) with a new one, and apply silicone sealant (B) to the bottom of the thermal
protector.
3. Install the thermal protector in the reverse order of removal.
SRS Precautions and Procedures
General Precautions
Please read the following precautions carefully before servicing the airbag system. Observe the instructions described in
this manual, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries.
Except when doing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), disconnect the negative
cable from the battery, then wait for 3 minutes before starting work.
NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0) or the battery cables are
disconnected from the battery.
Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not
install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs.
Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it.
Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or
deformation.
Before disconnecting the SRS unit connectors, always disconnect the appropriate SRS parts connectors.
Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA
(0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could
cause accidental deployment and possible injury.
Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag.
Steering-Related Precautions
Cable Reel Alignment
Misalignment of the cable reel could cause an open in the wiring, making the SRS system, remote steering wheel
controls, and the horn inoperative. Center the cable reel whenever you do the following.
-Installation of the steering wheel
-Installation of the cable reel
-Installation of the steering column
-Other steering-related adjustment or installation
Do not disassemble the cable reel.
Do not apply grease to the cable reel.
If the cable reel shows any signs of damage, replace it with a new one. For example, if it does not rotate smoothly,
replace the cable reel.
Airbag Handling and Storage

Do not disassemble an airbag. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or
reused.
For temporary storage of an airbag during service, observe the following precautions.
Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put anything on the airbag.
To prevent damage to the airbag, keep it away from any oil, grease, detergent, or water.
Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200 °F/93 °C).
Never do electrical tests on the airbags, such as measuring resistance.
Do not position yourself in front of the airbag during removal, inspection, or replacement.
For proper disposal of a damaged airbag , refer to airbag disposal.
The side curtain airbag module assembly is a long, jointed part containing an inflator (A), a flexible bag (B), and
brackets (C). When removing or installing the side curtain airbag inflator assembly, never do these things:
-Drop the curtain airbag.
-Cut, tear, or real the tape.
-Handle the flexible bag (B).
SRS Unit, Front and Side Impact Sensors
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes
before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS unit.
Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors or side impact sensors when the ignition
switch is at ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the
SRS unit, front impact sensors or side impact sensors. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage
or injury.
After a collision where a front airbag, side airbags, side curtain airbags, or a seat belt tensioner deployed, go to
Component Replacement/Inspection after Deployment. After a collision where the airbags or the side airbags did
not deploy, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit, front impact sensors and side impact
sensors. Replace all damaged parts.
Do not disassemble the SRS unit, front impact sensors and side impact sensors.
Be sure the SRS unit, front impact sensors and side impact sensors are installed securely with the mounting bolts
torqued to 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) whenever you remove or replace the SRS unit, all impact sensors, always
install the components with new TORX bolts.
Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit or the side impact sensors.
Wiring Precautions
Some of the SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer covering, and the SRS connectors can be identified by
their yellow color. Observe the instructions.
Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring.
If there is an open or damage in SRS wiring, replace the harness.
Be sure to install the harness wires so they do not get pinched or interfere with other parts.
Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean, and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal
contact. Poor grounds can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose.
Do not use any silicone based cleaners or lubricants on any SRS connectors or terminals.
Precautions for Electrical Inspections

When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector (except
waterproof connector). Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not
tamper with the connector.
Use a U-shaped probe. Do not insert the probe forcibly.

Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting.
Using improper tools could cause an error in inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact.
SRS Unit Connectors

When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the SRS unit connector (A), use the terminal test port (B) below the terminal
(C) you need to check. Gently insert the pin probes of the tester or jumper wire at the terminal test port from the terminal
side.
NOTE:
Do not insert the pin probes of the tester or jumper wire at the terminal port and SRS short canceller terminal port
(D).
To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do not insert the test equipment probes, paper clips, or other
substitutes as they can damage the terminals. Damaged terminals cause a poor connection and an in correct
measurement.
Water Proof Connectors for SRS System

When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the water proof connector (A), use the terminal test port (B) above the terminal
(C) you need to check. Gently contact the pin probe of the tester or jumper wire at the terminal test port from the terminal
side.
NOTE:
Do not insert the pin probes of the tester or jumper wire at the terminal port.
To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do not insert the test equipment probes, paper clips, or other
substitutes as they can damage the terminals. Damaged terminals cause a poor connection and an in correct
measurement.
Lever-Locked Connector
The SRS unit connectors have a lever lock.
SRS Unit Connectors

Disconnecting
To release the lock, pull the lever (A) while pushing the lock (B), on the outside of the connector, then pull the connector
(C).
Connecting
To reconnect the connector, push in on the connector sleeve (A). As the connector is pressed in, the lever (B) moves to
the locked position.
Spring-Loaded Lock Connector

Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded lock.
Front Airbag Connectors

Disconnecting
To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector.
Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector.
Connecting
To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector, and press on the back of the sleeve-side connector in the direction shown. As
the two connector halves are pressed together, the sleeve (A) is pushed back by the pawl (C). Do not touch the sleeve.
Side Airbag Connector

Disconnecting
To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector.
Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half.
Connecting
Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side connector clicks.
Opening the SRS Unit Shorting Connectors for Diagnosis

SRS short canceller
070AZ-SAA0100
NOTE:
To prevent damaging the connector cavity, insert the short canceller straight into the cavity from the terminal side.
Before installing the short canceller, wash it with electrical contact cleaner, then dry it with compressed air.
Do not use the short canceller if it is damaged.
Make sure to remove the short canceller before reconnection.
When SRS unit connectors A (39P) or B (39P) are disconnected, a short circuit is created in the connector by its own
function to prevent an airbag deployment. The circuit may need to be open sometimes when diagnosis is done on the
system. Insert the short canceller (070AZ-SAA0100) in the specified cavities when it is necessary to keep the circuit open
for diagnosis.
Terminal numbers are shown from the wire side of the female terminals. Insert the short canceller(s) into the cavities on
the terminal side of the connector.
Seats with Side Airbags
Seats with side airbags have a ‘‘SIDE AIRBAG'' label on the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-back
cover/pad etc.) of seats with and without airbags are different, make sure you install only the correct replacement parts.
When cleaning, use a damp cloth to clean the seat. Do not soak the seat with liquid. Do not spray steam on the
seat.
Do not repair a torn or frayed seat-back cover. Replace the seat-back cover.
After a collision where the side airbag was deployed, replace the side airbag and seat frame with new parts. If the
seat-back cushion is split, it must be replaced.
Never put aftermarket accessories on the seat (covers, pads, seat heaters, lights, etc.).
Disconnecting System Connectors

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Wait for 3
minutes before starting the following procedures.
Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (1), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P
connector (2).
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait for 3 minutes.
Driver's Airbag
2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the
cable reel.
Front Passenger's Airbag

3. Lower the glove box, then remove the connector clip. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A)
from the dashboard wire harness (B).
Side Airbag
4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness.
Side Curtain Airbag

6. Disconnect both floor wire harness 2P connectors (A) from the side curtain airbags.
Seat Belt Tensioner

Without side curtain airbag
With side curtain airbag
8. Disconnect both floor wire harness 4P connectors (A) from the seat belt tensioners.
SRS Unit
10. Remove the heater joint duct.
11. Disconnect SRS unit connectors A (39P) and B (39P) from the SRS unit.
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Audio unit power switch will not turn on (No information display and no
sound)
Audio unit power switch will not turn on (No information display and no sound)
NOTE:
2. Push the power button on to see if audio unit turns on.
Does the audio unit display operate properly, and does the audio unit sound normal?
NO - Go to Step 3 .
3. Turn off the audio unit, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Check the No. 1 (10 A) and No. 14 (7.5 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
NO - Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.■
5. Remove the audio unit. Check that the audio unit connectors are properly connected.
NOTE: Eject the CD before removing the audio unit to prevent damaging the CD player′s load mechanism.
Are they connected properly?
NO - Repair poor connections and reconnect the connectors, and recheck the function.■
6. Disconnect audio unit connector A (24P).
8. Measure the voltage between body ground and audio unit connector A (24P) No. 14 and No. 24 terminals
individually.
NO - Repair open or short in the wire(s) between the No. 1 (10 A) and No. 14 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box and the audio unit.■
10. Reconnect audio unit connector A (24P).
12. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 12 and body ground.
Is there less than 0.1 V?
YES - Substitute a known-good audio unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original audio unit.■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the audio unit and body ground (G503).■
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Audio unit power switch will not turn off
Audio unit power will not turn off
NOTE:
Check for aftermarket accessories plugged into the vehicle's accessory power sockets.
2. Push the power switch to see if the audio unit turn off.
Does the audio unit turn off?
NO - Go to Step 3 .
Does the audio unit turn off?
YES - Replace the audio unit. ■
NO - Go to Step 4 .
4. Remove the audio unit. and disconnect audio unit connector A (24P).
NOTE: Eject the CD before removing the audio unit to prevent damaging the CD player's load mechanism.
5. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector A (24P) No. 14 terminal and body ground.
YES - Check for short to power on the PUR wire.
NO - Substitute a known-good audio unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - No sound is heard from speaker(s) (display is normal)
No sound is heard from the speaker(s) (display is normal)
NOTE:
Set the fader and balance positions to the center.
Set the VOL knob except MIN position.
1. Do the speaker check mode with the self-diagnostic function.
Do any or all of the speakers fail to sound?
YES - If at least one speaker is OK, go to Step 6 .
If all speakers fail to sound, go to Step 2 .
NO - System is OK at this time. Check for poor connections at the audio unit and speakers.■
2. Make sure the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. Remove the audio unit and disconnect audio unit connector A (24P).
4. Check for continuity between audio unit connector A (24P) No. 14 terminal and body ground according to the table.
Speaker Audio unit connector Wire color
Left front door speaker A23 (+) LT BLU
A22 (−) LT GRN
Right front door speaker A19 (+) BRN
A18 (−) RED
Left rear door speaker A11 (+) GRY
A10 (−) BRN
Right rear door speaker A7 (+) BLU
A6 (−) ORN
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire(s) between the audio unit and the faulty speaker(s).
NO - Go to Step 5 .
5. Test the speaker(s).
Is the speaker OK?
YES - Go to Step 13 .■
NO - Replace the speaker(s) and recheck.■
6. Make sure the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. Check the faulty speaker(s) face for damage.
Is there any damage?
YES - Replace the speaker(s) and recheck.■
NO - Go to Step 8 .
8. Test the speaker(s) with no sound.
Is the speaker OK?
NO - Replace the speaker(s) and recheck.■
9. Remove the audio unit and disconnect audio unit connector A (24P).
10. Connect the speaker connector terminal (+) and (−) with a jumper wire.
11. Check for continuity between both pairs of speaker wires (+) and (−) at audio unit connector A (24P) according to
the table.
A22 (−) LT GRN
A18 (−) RED
A10 (−) BRN
A6 (−) ORN
NO - Repair open in the wires between the audio unit and the faulty speaker(s).■
13. While disconnecting the speaker connector(s), check for continuity between both pairs of speaker wires (+) and (−)
at audio unit connector A (24P) according to the table.
A22 (−) LT GRN
A18 (−) RED
A10 (−) BRN
A6 (−) ORN
YES - Repair short in the wire(s) between the audio unit and the faulty speaker(s).■
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Audio system sound is weak or distorted (display is normal)
Audio system sound is weak or distorted (display is normal)
NOTE:
2. Turn on the audio unit and check for sound in each mode (AM, FM, and CD).
Is there sound from the speakers, and is the sound quality normal in each mode?
YES - Intermittent failure. The system is OK at this time. Check for loose connections at the audio unit and
each speaker.■
NO - Speakers all work, sound quality is poor.■
If the sound quality is poor only with AM or FM, go to poor AM or FM radio reception or
interference.
If the sound is poor in all modes, go to no sound is heard from speaker(s).
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Audio unit button illumination does not work
Audio unit button illumination does no work
NOTE:
Is the fuse OK?
NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck.■
3. Turn the combination lighting switch to the parking light position.
4. Check the illumination of the audio unit buttons.
Are the buttons illuminated?
YES - Intermittent failure: the audio unit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at the audio unit
connector A (24P).■
NO - Go to Step 5 .
5. Check the illumination of several other buttons not related to the audio system.
Are the buttons illuminated?
NO - Troubleshoot the dashboard illumination circuit.■
9. With the headlight switch still on, measure the voltage between audio unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 13 and
body ground.
YES - Check the connections at audio unit connector A (24P). If all connections are OK, replace the audio unit.
■
NO - Repair open in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the audio unit.■
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Audio disc does not eject
Audio disc does not eject
NOTE:
Disc labels should not be used in the audio unit. They may damage the player mechanism.
Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals
Does the system turn on?
NO - Go to Audio unit power switch will not turn on. ■
3. Check to see if the disc ejects correctly with no binding when you push the EJECT button.
Does the disc eject properly?
NO - Go to Step 4 .
5. Substitute a known-good center panel
Is the symptom still present?
YES - Replace the original center unit.■
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Volume does not increase with speed
Volume does not increase with speed
NOTE:
1. Test-drive the vehicle at highway speeds and monitor if the volume increases.
Does the volume increase?
NO - Go to Step 2 .
2. Verify SVC mode setting in audio unit sound adjustment set-up.
Is the SVC set to off?
YES - Change setting to MID and retest.■
NO - Go to Step 3 .
4. Remove the audio unit , and disconnect audio unit connector A (24P).
6. Drive the vehicle and have an assistant measure the voltage at audio unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 15.
Is there a 0−5 V pulse?
YES - Substitute a known-good audio unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
NO - Repair opens or shorts in the wire between audio unit connector A (24P) No. 15 terminal and ECM/PCM
connector A (49P) No. 30 terminal. If no opens are found, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM and
recheck. If the symptom/indicated goes away, replace the original ECM/PCM. ■
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Volume is too high or too low when driving at freeway speeds
Volume is too high or too low when driving at freeway speeds
1. Test-drive the vehicle at highway speeds and monitor volume level.
Is the volume level too high or too low?
NO - internal failre, the system is OK at this time.■
2. Change SVC mode setting in sound adjustment set-up to MID and retest.
Is the volume level still too high, or too low?
YES - Replace the audio unit. ■
NO - Improper (SVC) setting for the customer's sound preference, Advise the customer to try different SVC
settings.■
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Audio remote switch does not work properly
Audio remote switch does not work properly
NOTE:
2. Turn on the audio unit and check the audio unit operation (volume up, volume down, CH (UP), CH (DOWN),
MODE).
Is the audio unit operation OK?
NO - Go to audio unit button does not work. ■
4. Do the audio remote switch test.
Is the audio remote switch OK?
NO - Replace the audio remote switch.
7. Reconnect the audio remote switch, and measure the resistance between audio unit connector A (24P) terminals
No. 5 and No. 16 as specified in the table.
AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH TABLE

Button held down VOL DOWN VOL UP CH (−) CH (+) MODENo button
pressed
Resistance about 100 Ω about 357 Ω about 775 Ω about 1.7 kΩ about 3.7 kΩ about 10 kΩ
Is the resistance OK?

NO - Repair short or high resistance in the circuit between the audio unit and the audio remote switch. If the
wires are OK, replace the cable reel. ■
8. Check for continuity between body ground and the No. 5 and No. 16 terminals of audio unit connector A (24P)
individually.
YES - Repair short to body ground in the circuit between the audio unit and the audio remote switch. If the wires
are OK, replace the cable reel. ■
original audio unit. ■
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Audio unit button does not work
Audio unit button does not work
NOTE:
If the audio unit does not turn on, go to audio unit power switch will not turn on.
2. Using the owner's manual, check if the symptom is duplicated that uses the faulty button.
Is the symptom duplicated?
NO - The system is OK. There is a possibility of doing an improper operation.■
4. Substitute a known-good center panel. and recheck.
Is the symptom still present?
YES - Replace the original center panel.■
NO - Replace the audio unit.
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Audio unit disc indicator does not work
Audio unit disc indicator does not work
NOTE: CD with labels should not be used in the audio unit. They may damage the player mechanism.
1. Turn on the audio system.
2. Insert a known-good disc or press the EJECT button.
Is the DISC indicator (LED) indicated?
YES - The audio unit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at audio unit and center panel.■
original audio unit. If the symptom is still present, substitute a known-good center panel, and recheck. If
the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original center panel.■
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - USB audio device input sound is low or cannot be heard
USB audio device input sound is low or cannot be heard
NOTE:
2. Do the speaker check mode with the self-diagnostic mode.
Do all speakers make a sound?
NO - Go to no sound is heard from speaker(s).■
4. Connect the customer′ s USB device to a known-good vehicle that equipped with the USB adapter and check the
USB device operation.
Is the USB device working properly?
NO - USB device is faulty. Also check the USB cable and USB adapter connector condition.■
5. On the customer′s vehicle, connect the customer′s USB device to the USB adapter.
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and turn on the audio unit.
7. Check if the USB device can be operated with the audio unit (Folders or Files UP/DOWN, etc.).
Can the USB device be operated but no sound is heard?
NO - If the sound is normal, USB device is OK at this time. If the USB device cannot be operated, Go to USB
audio device does not work. ■
9. Disconnect audio unit connector C (14P).
10. Disconnect USB adapter unit connector A (14P).
11. Check for continuity between the terminals of audio unit connector C (14P) according to the table.
From terminal(wire color) To terminals(wire color)
C4 (PNK) C5 (BRN), C6 (WHT), C13 (RED), C14 (LT BLU)
C5 (BRN) C6 (WHT), C13 (RED), C14 (LT BLU)
C6 (WHT) C13 (RED), C14 (LT BLU)
C13 (RED) C14 (LT BLU)
Is there continuity between any of the terminals?

YES - Short in the wires between audio unit and USB adapter unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.■
12. Check for continuity between audio unit connector C (14P) and USB adapter unit connector A (14P) according to
the table.
Audio unit connector USB adapter unit connector Wire color
C5 A5 BRN
C6 A6 WHT
C13 A13 RED
C14 A14 LT BLU
YES - Substitute a known-good USB adapter unit, then reconnect all of the connectors and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original USB adapter unit. If the symptom/indication is still
present, replace the audio unit.■
NO - Open in the wire(s) between the audio unit and the USB adapter unit. Replace the affected shielded
harness.■
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - USB audio device does not work
USB audio device does not work
NOTE:
Check the USB device requirement:
-Mass-storage class ready digital audio player with USB 2.0 port
-More than 256 MB of RAM
-Supports MP3, WMA, and AAC (encorded with the i-Tunes) files, DRM files are not supported
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and turn on the audio unit.
2. Push the AUX button to select USB mode.
Is USB NO DATA displayed?
NO - Go to Step 8 .
4. Connect the customer's USB device to a known-good vehicle that equipped with the USB adapter and check the
USB device operation.
Is the USB device working properly?
NO - USB device is faulty. Also check the USB cable and USB adapter connector condition.■
5. On the customer′s vehicle, remove the USB adapter.
6. Disconnect USB adapter unit connector B (5P).
7. Check for continuity between the terminals of USB adapter unit connector B (5P) and USB adapter 5P connector
according to the table.
USB adapterunit connector USB adapterconnector
B1 1
B2 2
B3 3
B4 4
YES - Substitute a known-good USB adapter cable and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace
the original USB adapter cable. If the symptom/indication still present, go to Step 9 .
NO - Open in the wire(s) between the USB adapter unit and the USB adapter. Replace the affected shielded
harness.■
9. Remove the audio unit. Check that the audio unit connectors and the USB adapter unit connectors properly
connected.
Is the connectors properly connected?
NO - Connect the connectors and recheck.■
10. Disconnect USB adapter unit connector A (14P).
12. Measure the voltage between body ground and USB adapter unit connector A (14P) No. 1 and No. 2 terminals
individually.
13. Measure the voltage between body ground and audio unit connector C (14P) No.1 and No.2 terminals individually.
YES - Repair open or short in the wire(s) between the audio unit and the USB adapter unit.■
NO - Replace the audio unit.■
15. Disconnect audio unit connector C (14P).
16. Check for continuity between audio unit connector C (14P) No. 11 terminal and USB adapter unit connector A (14P)
No. 11 terminal.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the audio unit and the USB adapter unit.■
17. Check for continuity between the terminals of audio unit connector C (14P) according to the table.
From terminal(wire color) To terminals(wire color)
C3 (GRY) C9 (YEL), C10 (GRN)
C9 (YEL) C10 (GRN)
Is there continuity between any of the terminals?

YES - Short in the wires between the audio unit and the USB adapter unit. Replace the affected shielded
harness.■
18. Check for continuity between the terminals of audio unit connector C (14P) and USB adapter unit connector A
(14P) according to the table.
Audio unit connector USB adapter unit connector Wire color
C9 A9 YEL
C10 A10 GRN
YES - Substitute a known-good USB adapter unit, then reconnect all of the connectors and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original USB adapter unit. If the symptom/indication is still
present, replace the audio unit. ■
NO - Open in the wire(s) between the audio unit and the USB adapter unit. Replace the affected shielded
harness.■
Poor AM or FM radio reception or interference
Also check for
Antenna lead and/or sublead short or open in the wire
Audio unit power switch will not turn on (No information display and no sound)
Audio unit power switch will not turn off
No sound is heard from the speaker(s) (display is normal)
Audio system sound is weak or distorted (display is normal)
Audio unit button illumination does not work
Audio disc does not eject
Volume does not change
Volume does not increase with speed
Volume is too high or too low when driving at freeway speeds
Audio disc does not load
Audio disc does not play
Audio disc skips
Also check for
Tyre pressure (over-inflated), disc smudged, dirty, or scratched
Audio remote switch does not work properly
Audio unit button does not work
Audio unit disc indicator does not work
USB audio device input sound is low or cannot be heard
Also check for
Requirement of the USB devices (see Owner's manual)
USB audio device does not work
Also check for
Requirement of the USB devices (see Owner's manual)
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Poor AM or FM radio reception or interference Symptom Troubleshooting Antenna lead and/or sublead short or open in
the wire
Audio unit power switch will not turn on (No information display Symptom Troubleshooting
and no sound)
Audio unit power switch will not turn off Symptom Troubleshooting
No sound is heard from the speaker(s) (display is normal) Symptom Troubleshooting
Audio system sound is weak or distorted (display is normal) Symptom Troubleshooting
Audio unit button illumination does not work Symptom Troubleshooting
Audio disc does not eject Symptom Troubleshooting
Volume does not change Symptom Troubleshooting
Volume does not increase with speed Symptom Troubleshooting
Volume is too high or too low when driving at freeway speeds Symptom Troubleshooting
Audio disc does not load Symptom Troubleshooting
Audio disc does not play Symptom Troubleshooting
Audio disc skips Symptom Troubleshooting Tyre pressure (over-inflated), disc smudged,
dirty, or scratched
Audio remote switch does not work properly Symptom Troubleshooting
Audio unit button does not work Symptom Troubleshooting
Audio unit disc indicator does not work Symptom Troubleshooting
USB audio device input sound is low or cannot be heard Symptom Troubleshooting Requirement of the USB devices (see Owner's
manual)
USB audio device does not work Symptom Troubleshooting Requirement of the USB devices (see Owner's
manual)
Audio System Self-diagnostic Function
Audio Unit Self-diagnostic Mode
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Make sure turn off the audio unit.
2. Push and hold the preset No. 1 and No. 6 buttons. While holding the buttons, push the power
button (A). Release the buttons and the self-diagnostic mode begins.
3. Each time you press the preset button, the diagnostic state is displayed according to the table.
Button Desired result Diagnostic procedure
operation
Pressing the The audio unit (center panel) Audio unit button does
preset No. 2 buttons or audio remote switch not work.
button name and/or value should be Audio remote switch
displayed (Except power does not work properly.
button)
APressing the The all of display segments If all of display segments does
preset No. 3 should become on/go off not come on, replace the audio
button unit.
BPressing the When the parking light switch Audio unit button
preset No. 4 is on, the illumination steps illumination does not
button should be changed from − work.
step to 22 step while adjusting Gauge control module
the dash brightness control (Lighting)
knob
CPressing the When you drive the vehicle, Volume does not increase with
preset No. 5 the VSP indicates the vehicle speed.
button speed in km/h.
4. If the diagnosis result is not matching the desired result, do the affected system
troubleshooting.
5. The self-diagnostic mode ends when you turn off the audio unit or turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0).
Speaker Check Mode

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Make sure turn off the audio unit.
2. Push and hold the preset No. 1 and No. 3 buttons. While holding the buttons, push the power
button (A). Release the buttons and the speaker check mode begins. Low-Frequency hum
should sound from left front door speaker.
3. Each time you press the or button, the speaker outputs a beep and test the speakers
in the order listed. The volume of beep can de adjusted with the VOL PUSH SELECT knob.
Order of Speakers
( ) is (1)→(2)→(3)→(4)→(5)
pressed:
( ) is (1)→(5)→(4)→(3)→(2)
pressed:
Speaker Displayed Segments

(1) Left front door speaker SPKR FR-L
(2) Right front door speaker SPKR FR-R
(3) Right rear door speaker SPKR RR-R
(4) Left rear door speaker SPKR RR-L
(5) All speakers SPKR ALL
4. If any speaker(s) fail to sound, go to symptom troubleshooting.

5. The speaker check mode ends when you turn off the audio unit or turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0).
Audio Unit Removal/Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component location.
Also review the precautions and procedures in the SRS section before doing repairs or service.
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts.
Lay a workshop towel under the parts when working on them to protect the face panel from scratches or other
damage.
Do not work in a dusty or dirty place.
Discharge static electricity from your body before and during the work.
Do not touch the circuit board(s) with your bare hands.
Do not work with dirty hands.
Be careful not to fold the flat plate cable.
Eject the CD before remove the audio unit to prevent damaging the CD player′s load mechanism.
If you are replacing the audio unit, write down the audio presets (if possible), and enter them into the new audio
unit.
1. If equipped with the anti-theft codes, make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio system.
2. Remove the center lower cover.
3. Under the audio unit, remove the bolt (A).
4. Open the dashboard upper tray lid. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver in the groove (A), then pull the screwdriver shaft up
slightly.
5. Pull the center panel (A) out and disconnect the connectors, then remove the center panel.
NOTE: When you disconnect audio unit connector A, while pushing the tab (B), pull the lever (C) up and disconnect
the connector.
6. With USB adapter, remove the USB adapter unit.
7. Remove the mounting screws and bolts from the audio unit (A), then remove the bracket (B).
8. Remove the screws and the audio unit (A) from the center panel (B).
9. Install the audio unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure all connectors are secure.
If needed, enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system.
Set the clock.
Cylinder Head Removal
NOTE:
To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors carefully while holding the connector portion.
To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the engine coolant temperature drops below 38 °C (100 °F) before
loosening the cylinder head bolts.
6. Disconnect the upper radiator hose (A), the heater hose (B), and the water bypass hose (C).
7. Remove the heater hose from the clamps (D).
9. Remove the warm up three way catalytic converter (WU-TWC).
11. Remove the harness holder.
12. Remove the harness holder mounting bolt (A) and the ground cable (B), then remove the harness holder (C) from
the bracket.
15. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent warpage, loosen the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the
Cylinder Head Installation
1. Clean the cylinder head and the block surface.
2. Install a new coolant separator (A) in the engine block whenever the engine block is replaced.
3. Install the new cylinder head gasket (B) and the dowel pins (C) on the engine block. Always use a new cylinder
head gasket.
on the oil pump.
5. Set the camshaft TDC. The ‘‘UP'' mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be at the top, and the TDC grooves (B)
on the camshaft sprocket should line up with the top edge of the head.
6. Install the cylinder head on the engine block.
7. Apply new engine oil to the threads and under the bolt heads of all cylinder head bolts.
8. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in sequence to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft). Using a beam-type torque wrench.
When using a preset-type torque wrench, be sure to tighten slowly and do not overtighten. If a bolt makes any
noise while you are torquing it, loosen the bolt and retighten it from the first step.
9. Tighten all cylinder head bolts an additional 130 °

12. Install the harness holder (A), then install the ground cable (B).
13. Install the harness holder.

14. Connect the engine wire harness connectors, and install the wire harness clamps to the cylinder head.
15. Install the warm up three way catalytic converter (WU-TWC).
16. Install the intake manifold/chamber assembly.
17. Install the upper radiator hose (A), the heater hose (B), and the water bypass hose (C).
18. Install the heater hose to the clamps (D).
19. Connect the fuel feed hose (A), then install the quick-connect fitting cover (B) and the fuel feed hose clamp (C).
in the fuel line.
Camshaft Removal
5. Remove the camshaft sprocket.
7. Remove the CMP sensor.
8. Remove the camshaft thrust cover (A), then remove the camshaft (B).
Camshaft Installation
1. Install the camshaft (A), then install the camshaft thrust cover (B) with new O-ring (C).
2. Install the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
4. Install the camshaft sprocket.
6. Install the following engine wire harness connectors and wire harness clamps to the cylinder head:
CMP sensor connector
VTEC System (L13Z1 engine)
Operation (L13Z1 engine)
VTEC System (L15A7 engine)
Operation (L15A7 engine)
VTEC Component Location Index
ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE (ECM)/
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Information,
Substituting,
Update,
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL VALVE Replacement,

VTEC System Oil Pressure Troubleshooting
Oil pressure gauge joint attachment
07NAJ-P070100
Low pressure gauge assy. 1,000 kPa

07406-0070002
Oil pressure hose
07ZAJ-S5A0200
NOTE:
Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS before this procedure. If there are any DTCs indicated,
Check that the oil pressure indicator goes off after starting engine before this procedure.
2. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
Can you hear the rocker arm oil control solenoid click?
NO - Go to Step 3 .
Is the rocker arm oil control solenoid clicking?
ECM/PCM. ■
(A) that was removed to the oil pressure gauge joint attachment.
9. Check the oil pressure at the engine speed of 1,000 to 2,000 rpm (min −1 ).

YES - The VTEC system oil pressure is normal.■
16. Remove the rocker arm oil control valve.
17. Check the rocker arm oil control solenoid filter for dirt and clogging.
Is the rocker arm oil control solenoid filter dirty or clogged?
YES - Replace the engine oil, engine oil filter, and the rocker arm oil control solenoid filter, then go to Step 18 .
22. Replace the rocker arm oil control valve.
NO - Clean the oil passage of the cylinder block or replace the cylinder block.■
Fuel and Emissions System Description - EVAP Control Diagram
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram
EVAP System Component Location Index
RHD model
LHD model EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE VALVE
Replacement, FUEL FILL CAP
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
EVAP System Troubleshooting,
Replacement,
FUEL FILL CAP
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
TWO WAY VALVE
Test,
Replacement,
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER FILTER
Replacement,
ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE (ECM)/
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION Information,
(EVAP) CANISTER Substituting,
EVAP System Troubleshooting, Update,
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
TWO WAY VALVE
Test,
Replacement,
EVAP System Troubleshooting
07YAJ-0010610
Tube joint adapter

07410-5790503
RHD model
the hose.
Is there vacuum?
NO - Go to Step 3 .
3. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm (min −1 ) without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan
Is there vacuum?
8. Disconnect the drain tube joint (A) from the EVAP canister and connect the combination gauge kit and tube joint
adapter to EVAP canister (B).
9. Install the air cleaner.
LHD model
the hose.
Is there vacuum?
NO - Go to Step 3 .
3. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm (min −1 ) without load (A/T in N or P, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan
Is there vacuum?
8. Disconnect drain tube (A) from the EVAP canister and connect the combination gauge kit and tube joint adapter to
EVAP canister (B).
9. Lower the vehicle.
EVAP Canister Replacement
RHD model
3. Remove the EVAP canister (B).
4. Remove the EVAP two way valve (C) from the EVAP canister.
NOTE: Align the marks (D) on the hose as shown, then insert the hose. Make sure the clamp is positioned as
shown.
LHD model
2. Disconnect the hoses (A) and tube (B).
3. Remove the EVAP canister (C).
4. Remove the EVAP two way valve (D) from the EVAP canister.
NOTE: Align the marks (E) on the hose as shown, then insert the hose. Make sure the clamp is positioned as
shown.
EVAP Two Way Valve Test
07YAJ-0010610
Tube joint adapter

07410-5790503
2. Remove the EVAP two way valve.
3. Disconnect the vapor line from the EVAP two way valve (A). Connect it to the combination gauge kit and tube joint
adapter and the vacuum pump (B) as shown.
4. Apply vacuum slowly and continuously while watching the gauge. The valve should open below 1.33 kPa (1.0
mmHg, 0.04 in.Hg).
If the vacuum hold below 1.33 kPa (1.0 mmHg, 0.04 in.Hg), go to Step 5 .
If the vacuum doesn't hold, replace the EVAP two way valve.
5. Move the vacuum pump from the vacuum fitting to the pressure fitting (A) as shown.
6. Slowly pressurize the vapor line while watching the gauge. The valve should open above 5.07 kPa (38 mmHg, 1.5
in.Hg).
If the pressure hold below 5.07 kPa (38 mmHg, 1.5 in.Hg), the valve is OK.
If the pressure doesn't hold, replace the EVAP two way valve.
EVAP Two Way Valve Replacement
1. Remove the EVAP canister. RHD model
2. Disconnect the hose (A).
3. Remove the EVAP two way valve (B).
LHD model
Electronic Throttle Control System Component Location Index
THROTTLE ACTUATOR and

THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
CONTROL RELAY
ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION
(APP) SENSOR
Signal Inspection,
ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE (ECM)/
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Information,
Substituting,
Update,
Replacement,
ACCELERATOR PEDAL MODULE
*:
*: This
This illustration
illustration shows
shows RHD
RHD model.
model. Removal/Installation,
APP Sensor Signal Inspection
NOTE:
This procedure checks the APP sensor in this fully closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor stores
DTCs which are covered in other troubleshooting procedures.
Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are indicated,
Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the pedal. If
you find a problem, replace the accelerator pedal module.
If it is not 0 %, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM, then go to Step 5 .
If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal module, then go to Step 1 .
Fuel Pressure Test
Fuel gauge assy. 600 kPa
07406-0040004
Fuel pressure gauge attachment set

07ZAJ-S5A0101
Fuel attachment C hose
07ZAJ-S7C0100
Fuel attachment C joint

07ZAJ-S7C0200
2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting. Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel gauge assy.
4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: Listen to the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump
should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on.
If the pump runs, go to Step 5 .
If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting.
If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the
fuel pressure.
Fuel Filter Replacement
The fuel filter should be replaced whenever the fuel pressure drops below the specified value, after making sure that the
fuel pump and the fuel pressure regulator are OK.
2. Remove the fuel gauge sending unit (A), and the reservoir (B).
3. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (C), the fuel pump (D), and the wire harness (E) from the fuel filter set (F).
When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors are firmly
locked into place.
When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly
locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively.
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with new O-rings (G). When installing the fuel tank unit, align the
marks on the unit and the fuel tank.
NOTE:
Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil; do not use any other oil or fluid.
Do not pinch the O-rings during installation.
Use all the new parts supplied in the fuel filter replacement kit.
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test
NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit Diagram.
1. Check the No. 22 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box before testing.
If no problem is found, go to Step 3 .
If DTC B1175 or B1176 is indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
5. Remove the bolts (A), the wire (B), then remove the parking brake lever (C).

8. Measure the voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the ignition switch to ON
(II). There should be battery voltage.
If the voltage is OK, go to Step 9 .
If the voltage is not as specified, check for:
-a short in the LT GRN wire to ground.
-an open in the LT GRN or BLK wire.
10. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank.
11. Measure the resistance between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the float at E (EMPTY),
LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions.
If you do not get the following readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit.
Float Position F 109.5 mm (4.3 1/2 61 mm (2.4 in.) LOW 24.7 mm (1.0 E 16 mm (0.6 in.)
in.) in.)
Resistance (Ω) 19 to 21 203.3 to 213.3 529.8 to 714.1 772 to 788
12. Reconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.

13. Remove the No. 1 BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds, then reinstall
it.
15. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates ‘‘F'' with the float at F.
If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicate ‘‘F'', replace the gauge assembly.
If the gauge is OK, the test is complete.
NOTE:
The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the bottom of the gauge dial when the ignition switch is to LOCK (0),
regardless of the fuel level.
Remove the No. 1 BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds after
completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct
fuel level.
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions
The fuel line/quick-connect fittings (A), (B), (C) connect the fuel rail (D) to fuel feed hose (E), the fuel feed hose to the fuel
line (F), and the fuel line (G) to the fuel tank unit (H). When removing or installing the fuel feed hose, fuel tank unit, or fuel
tank, it is necessary to disconnect or connect the quick-connect fittings.
Pay attention to the following:
The fuel feed hose, fuel line and quick-connect fittings are not heat-resistant; be careful not to damage them during
welding or other heat-generating procedures.
The fuel feed hose, fuel line and quick-connect fittings are not acid-proof; do not touch them with a shop towel
which was used for wiping battery electrolyte. Replace them if they came into contact with electrolyte or something
similar.
When connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed hose, fuel line and quick-connect fittings, be careful not to bend or
twist them excessively. Replace them it damaged.
A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot be reused once it has
been removed from the line. Replace the retainer when:
replacing the fuel tank.
it has been removed from the pipe.
it is damaged.
Location Manufacturer Retainer color Piping diameter
A Tokai Blue green 8 mm (0.3 in.)
B Tokai Green 6.3 mm (0.3 in.)
C Sanoh White 9.5 mm (0.4 in.)
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal
NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings, read the ‘‘Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions''.
1. If equipped, remove the quick-connect fitting cover from the fuel line. Raise the cover (A) the fuel line (B), and
remove it as shown.
3. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings (A) for dirt, and clean them if needed.
4. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting. Hold the connector (A) with one hand, and squeeze the
retainer tabs (B) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (C). Pull the connector off.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the line (D) or other parts. Do not use tools.
5. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or damage.
If it is dirty, clean the connector with a pressure washer, and dry it with the compressed air.
If it is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel filter or the fuel feed line.
6. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out, cover the disconnected connector and line ends with plastic bags
(A).
NOTE: The retainer cannot be reused once it has been removed from the line.
Replace the retainer when:
it is damaged.
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation
NOTE: Before you work on fuel lines and fittings, read the ‘‘Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions''.
1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or damage, and clean it if needed.
2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) if the retainer is damaged, or after:
removing the retainer from the line.
Use the same manufacturer retainer and the same size retainer when replacing the retainer.
3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer (B) from the mating
line.
NOTE:
When replacing the fuel tube/quick-connect fitting assembly at the engine compartment, remove the air
cleaner, and the cover (C).
When installing the fuel tube/quick-connect fitting assembly at the engine compartment, align the mark (D)
on the fuel tube.
4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the line (A), and align the retainer locking tabs (B) with the connector grooves Connection with new
(C). Then press the quick-connect fittings onto the line until both retainer tabs lock with a clicking sound. retainer
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of new engine oil on the line end.

line
Reconnection to
existing retainer
5. When you reconnect the connector with the old retainer, make sure the connection is secure and the tabs (A) are Reconnection to
firmly locked into place; check visually and also by pulling the connector (B). When you replace the fuel line with a existing retainer
new one, make sure you remove the ring pull (C) upwards after you confirm the connection is secure.
NOTE: Before you remove the ring pull, make sure the fuel line connection is secure. If the connection is not
secure, the ring pull could break when you try to remove it.
motor). The fuel pump will run for about 2 seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat two or three times, and
line
7. If equipped, install the quick-connect fitting cover. Set the groove of the cover (A) on the fuel line (B) as shown, then
install it. Make sure the cover is firmly locked in place.
Fuel Line Inspection
RHD model
LHD model
Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement
2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel sending unit) (A) from the fuel tank unit (B).
When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connector (C) is firmly
locked into place.
When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure. Be careful not to bend or
twist it excessively.
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and
the fuel tank.
Fuel Tank Draining
2. Using a hand pump, a hose, and a container suitable for fuel, draw the fuel from the fuel tank.
3. Reinstall the fuel tank unit.
Fuel Tank Unit Removal and Installation
Fuel sender wrench
07AAA-S0XA100
Removal
3. Remove the bolts (A), the wire harness (B), the remove the parking brake lever (C).

6. Disconnect the suction hose (C), the fuel vapor hose (D), the quick-connect fitting (E) from the fuel tank unit.
7. Using the special tool, loosen the locknut (A).
8. Remove the locknut (A) and the fuel tank unit (B).
Installation
1. Temporarily attach a new base gasket (A) to the fuel tank unit (B), then insert the fuel tank unit partially into the
fuel tank.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the new base gasket.
Be careful not to bend the fuel gauge sending unit.
Do not coat the base gasket with oil.
2. Transfer the base gasket (A) from the fuel tank unit to the fuel tank.
3. Align the marks (B) on the fuel tank and fuel tank unit, then insert the fuel tank unit into the fuel tank until the fuel
tank unit rests on top of the base gasket.
NOTE: To avoid a fuel leak, check the base gasket, visually or by hand, to make sure it is not pinched.
4. Using the special tool, tighten a new locknut (A) to the specified torque.
NOTE:
After tightening, make sure the marks are still aligned.
After installation, check the base gasket, visually or by hand, to make sure it is not pinched.
5. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector, then connect the quick-connect fitting, the suction hose, and the fuel
vapor hose.
motor). The fuel pump will run for about 2 seconds, and fuel pressure rises. Repeat this two or three times, then
7. Install the access panel, the parking brake lever, and the center console.
Injector Test
NOTE: Check the following items before testing; idle speed, ignition timing, and idle CO%.
4. Select ONE INJECTOR in INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
5. Disable each injector at a time by selecting number of an injector which you want to step.
6. Inspect the change in the idle speed.
If the idle speed drop is almost the same for each cylinder, the fuel injectors are normal.
If the idle speed or quality remains the same when you disconnect a particular injector, faulty injector is
suspected. Replace the injector and retest.
7. Check the clicking sound of each injector by means of a stethoscope when the engine is idling.
If any fuel injector fails to make the typical clicking sound, check the sound again after replacing the
injector.
-Whether there is wire breakage or poor connection in the YEL/BLK wire between the PGM-FI main relay 1
and the junction connector.
-Whether there is wire breakage or poor connection in the YEL/BLK wire between the junction connector
and the injector.
and the ECM/PCM.
If all is OK, the test is complete.
10. Disconnect the injector connector.
11. Measure the resistance between injector (A) terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be 10−13 Ω.
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the injector.
If the fuel pressure is as specified, check the following:
-Whether there is wire breakage, or poor connection in the YEL/BLK wire between the PGM-FI main relay
1 and the junction connector.
-Whether there is wire breakage, or poor connection in the YEL/BLK wire between the junction connector
and the injector.
and the ECM/PCM.
If the fuel pressure is not as specified, recheck the fuel pressure.
Injector Replacement
2. Remove the intake manifold, and intake manifold chamber.
3. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the quick-connect fitting (B).
4. Disconnect the injector connectors (C).
5. Remove the fuel rail mounting nuts (D) from the fuel rail (E).
6. Remove the fuel rail and the injectors from the cylinder head.
7. Remove the injector clips (F) from the fuel rail.
8. Remove the injectors (G) from the fuel rail.
9. Coat the new O-rings (black) (A) with clean engine oil, and insert the injectors (B) into the fuel
rail (C).
10. Install the injector clips (D).
11. Coat the new injector O-rings (brown) (E) with clean engine oil.
12. Install the fuel rail and the injectors in the cylinder head (F).
13. Install the fuel rail mounting nuts (G).
14. Connect the injector connectors (H).
15. Connect the quick-connect fitting (I).
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for
about 2 seconds, the fuel rail will be pressurized. Repeat this two or three times, then check for
fuel leakage.
17. Reinstall the intake manifold, and intake manifold chamber.
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting
Does the MIL indicator flash?
NO - Substitute a known-good gauge control module, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a
known-good gauge control module, replace the original gauge control module. ■
4. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is a short indicated?
ECM/PCM. ■
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A32) and the DLC.■
ECM/PCM. ■
Idle Control System Component Location Index
ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE (ECM)/
A/C COMPRESSOR POWERTRAIN CONTROL
CLUTCH RELAY (RHD model) MODULE
BRAKE (PCM)
PEDAL POSITION
Signal Circuit General Troubleshooting
SWITCH
Troubleshooting, Information,
Signal Circuit
Substituting,
Troubleshooting,
ALTERNATOR A/C COMPRESSOR Update,
A/C COMPRESSOR Signal Circuit CLUTCH RELAY (LHD model) Replacement,
Troubleshooting, Signal Circuit
*: This illustration shows RHD model. Troubleshooting,
A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Turn the blower switch on.
3. Turn the A/C switch on.
4. Check the A/C CLUTCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
NO - Do the A/C system test. ■
5. Check the A/C system.
Does the A/C system operate?
YES - The air conditioning system circuit is OK.■
NO - Go to Step 6 .
8. Activate the A/C CLUTCH in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
YES - Do the A/C system test. ■
NO - Go to Step 9 .
13. Momentarily connect ECM/PCM connector terminal A15 to body ground with a jumper wire several times.
ECM/PCM. ■
NO - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/C compressor clutch relay and the ECM/PCM. If
the connections are OK, check the A/C compressor clutch relay, repair open in the wire between the
ECM/PCM (A15) and the A/C compressor clutch relay and the other A/C systems.■
Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Monitor the ALTERNATOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
3. Check if the indicated percentage varies when the headlight switch is turned on.
Does the percentage vary?
YES - The alternator signal circuit is OK.■
NO - Go to Step 4 .
4. Turn the headlight switch off and the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
8. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal B47.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B47) and the alternator.■
NO - Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit. ■
Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM. ■
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
Exploded View
Removal
3. Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector.
Installation
1. Install the intake manifold (A) with new gaskets (B), and tighten the bolts and nuts in a crisscross pattern in three
3. Connect the EGR valve connector.

Throttle Body Test
5. Check REL TP SENSOR in the DATA LIST the HDS. The reading should be below 2.46 deg. If it is not, clean the
throttle body.
Throttle Body Removal/Installation
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve is
activated.

2. Remove the harness clamp (A).
3. Disconnect the throttle body connector (B), and the EVAP canister purge valve connector (C).
4. Disconnect and plug the water bypass hoses (D), the purge hose (E).
5. Remove the throttle body (F).
6. Remove the purge pipe (G), the water bypass hoses, and the purge hose from the throttle body.
7. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new gasket (H), then refill the radiator with
engine coolant.
NOTE:
If you replace or clean the throttle body, go to Step 8 .
If you did not replace or clean the throttle body, this procedure is complete.
Be careful not to damage to drops the plates (I).
Align the marks (J) on the hose and throttle body, then insert the hose. Make sure the
clamp (K) is positioned as shown.
Align the mark (L) on the hose as shown, then insert the hose. Make sure the clamp (M)
is positioned as shown.
Front Inner Fender Replacement
NOTE:
1. For some models: Remove the side sill panel.
2. Remove the front inner fender (A).
-1. On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B), and remove the front splash guard
(C) (for some models).
-2. From under the front bumper (D), remove the screw (E) securing the front bumper, the
splash shield (F), and the front inner fender.
-3. Remove the clip (G) securing the front bumper and the front inner fender.
-4. From the wheel arch, remove the screw (H), clip (I, J, K), clip (L).
-5. Release the hook (M) of the splash shield, then remove the front inner fender.
NOTE: To remove the clips G, I, pry the inner the clip up at the edge near the line (N) on
its head.
3. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Check if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace them with
new ones.
Push the clips and the hook into place securely.
Hood Opener Cable Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body and the related parts.
Front inner fender
2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the hood latch (B), and disconnect the hood opener
cable from the hood release handle (C). Take care not to kink the cable.
3. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (D, E), and peel the vinyl tapes (F) being wound onto the
opener cable off, then remove the hood opener cable from the grommet (G). Take care not to
kink the cable.
Check if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace them with
new ones.
Make sure the cable is connected properly.
A/C Switch Test
1. Remove the A/C switch.
3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulbs or the switch.
A/C Switch Replacement
1. Remove the heater control panel.
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) and push out the A/C switch (B) from behind the heater control panel.
3. Remove the holder (A) and bulbs (B).

4. Install the A/C switch in the reverse order of removal.
A/C Evaporator Core Replacement
2. Remove the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel.
4. Remove the bolt from the A/C line clamp (A).
5. Open the clamp (A), then remove the A/C lines (B).
6. Remove the blower unit.
7. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the A/C line (A) from the evaporator core and remove the O-rings (B).
8. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the evaporator temperature sensor and the blower resistor, then remove the
connector clip (B). Remove the self-tapping screws, the expansion valve cover (C), and the seal (D).
9. Carefully pull out the evaporator core assembly (A) without bending the lines, then remove the plate (B).
10. Pull out the evaporator temperature sensor (A) from the evaporator core.
11. Install the evaporator temperature sensor in the evaporator core, and note these items:
When the evaporator temperature sensor (A) is installed into the new evaporator core, set the sensor into
the factory-preset position (B, C).
When the evaporator temperature sensor is reinstalled into the original evaporator core, set the sensor into
the new position (D, E) because the fin may be deforming by the previous installation.
12. Install the core in the reverse order of removal and note these items:
If you're installing a new evaporator core, add refrigerant oil (SP-10).
Make sure that there is no air leakage.
Charge the system.
Heater Fan Switch Test
3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the heater fan switch.
Heater Control Cable Removal/Installation
Mode Control Cable
2. Set the mode control dial to VENT ( ).
3. Detach the mode control cable housing from the clamp (A), and disconnect the inner cable (B) from the mode
control linkage (C).
Make sure insert the ring (D) in the groove (E).
After installation, operate the control panel controls to see whether it works properly.
Recirculation Control Cable

2. Set the recirculation control lever to RECIRCULATE ( ).
3. Detach the recirculation control cable housing from the clamp (A), and disconnect the inner cable (B) from the
recirculation control linkage (C).
4. Turn the recirculation control linkage fully clockwise, and hold it. Attach the recirculation control cable to the
recirculation control linkage, then snap the recirculation control cable housing into the clamp.
5. After installation, operate the control panel controls to see whether it works properly.
Air Mix Control Cable (Except KZ, KP, and MA models)

2. Set the temperature control dial to MAX COOL.
3. Detach the air mix control cable housing from the clamp (A), and disconnect the inner cable (B) from the air mix
control linkage (C).
Make sure insert the ring (D) in the groove (E).
After installation, operate the control panel controls to see whether it works properly.
Temperature Control Dial Test
KZ, KP, and MA models
1. Remove the heater control panel, and disconnect the temperature control dial 4P connector.
2. Measure the resistance between the temperature control dial No. 3 and No. 4 terminals while rotating the adjusting
dial and compare them with shown in the graph.
3. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the temperature control dial.
Heater Unit/Core Replacement
2. Disconnect the A/C lines from the evaporator core.
3. Except KZ, KP, and MA models:
Drain the engine coolant from the radiator.
From the inlet heater hose, remove the clip (A). Slide the hose clamps (B) back, then disconnect the inlet
heater hose (C) and the outlet heater hose (D) from the heater unit. Engine coolant will run out when the
hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts
or the painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately.
4. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines or brake lines, etc.
5. Remove the dashboard.
6. Disconnect the connector (A) from the evaporator sensor. Remove the wire harness (B).
7. Remove the duct (A) and the drain hose (B). Remove the mounting nuts and blower-heater unit (C).
8. Remove the self-tapping screws and the heater core cover (A).
9. Except KZ, KP, and MA models; Remove the stay (B), grommet (C), and carefully pull out the heater core (D).
10. Install the heater core, and the evaporator core in the reverse order of removal.
11. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Except KZ, KP, and MA models:
-Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses, and install the hose clamps securely.
-Refill the cooling system with engine coolant.
-Make sure that there is no coolant leakage.
Make sure that there is no air leakage.
Refer to the evaporator core replacement.
Manual Transmission and M/T Differential (i-SHIFT)
transmission Use genuine Honda MTF Overhaul 1.6 L (1.7 US qt, 1.4 Imp qt)
fluid
Diameter of bushing surface 14.870−14.890 mm (0.5854−0.5862 in.) 14.77 mm (0.5815 in.)
Diameter of distance collar 28.992−29.005 mm (1.1414−1.1419 in.) 28.93 mm (1.139 in.)
(clutch housing side)
Mainshaft 3rd, I.D. 3rd/4th/5th 39.009−39.025 mm (1.5358−1.5364 in.) 38.95 mm (1.533 in.)
4th, 5th, and 6th 6th 35.009−35.025 mm (1.3783−1.3789 in.) 34.95 mm (1.376 in.)
gears Clearance 2nd-3rd 0.06−0.21 mm (0.002−0.008 in.) 0.30 mm (0.012 in.)
End play 4th 0.06−0.19 mm (0.002−0.007 in.) 0.28 mm (0.011 in.)
5th 0.06−0.14 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) 0.23 mm (0.009 in.)
6th 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) 0.25 mm (0.010 in.)
4th 25.52−25.57 mm (1.005−1.007 in.) 25.45 mm (1.002 in.)
5th 22.42−22.47 mm (0.883−0.885 in.) 22.35 mm (0.880 in.)
6th 23.92−23.97 mm (0.942−0.944 in.) 23.85 mm (0.939 in.)
Mainshaft I.D. 29.014−29.024 mm (1.1423−1.1427 in.) 29.03 mm (1.143 in.)
4th/5th gears O.D. 34.989−35.000 mm (1.3775−1.3780 in.) 34.94 mm (1.376 in.)
distance collar Length A 48.97−49.03 mm (1.9279−1.9303 in.) ———
B 22.53−22.56 mm (0.887−0.888 in.) ———
gear distance Length 24.03−24.08 mm (0.946−0.948 in.) ———
collar
Countershaft Diameter of ball bearing contact area 26.020−26.033 mm (1.0244−1.0249 in.) 25.97 mm (1.022 in.)
Diameter of needle bearing contact area 34.000−34.015Bmm (1.3386−1.3392 in.) 33.95 mm (1.337 in.)
32 mmA shim-to-bearing inner race 0.04−0.10 mm (0.0016−0.0039 in.) Adjust
clearance
gear End play 0.06−0.16 mmB(0.002−0.006 in.) 0.25 mm (0.010 in.)
Thickness 21.42−21.47 mm (0.843−0.845 in.) ———
Countershaft I.D. 48.509−48.525 mm (1.9098−1.9104 in.) 48.52 mm (1.910 in.)
2nd gear End play 0.06−0.14 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) 0.23 mm (0.009 in.)
Thickness 26.42−26.47 mm (1.040−1.042 in.) ———
Manual Transmission and M/T Differential (i-SHIFT) (cont'd)

collar Length 21.53−21.58 mm (0.848−0.850 in.) ———
2nd gear O.D. 44.489−44.5 mm (1.7515−1.7520 in.) 44.44 mm (1.750 in.)
Reverse idler I.D. 18.016−18.043 mm (0.7093−0.7104 in.) 18.08 mm (0.712 in.)
gear Gear-to-reverse gear shaft clearance 0.032−0.077 mm (0.0013−0.003 in.) 0.14 mm (0.006 in.)
against gear
Shift fork Finger thickness 1st-2nd fork 6.7−6.9 mm (0.26−0.27 in.) ———
3rd-4th and 5th- 7.4−7.6 mm (0.29−0.30 in.) ———
6th fork
Reverse shift Finger width 14.7−14.9 mm (0.527−0.587 in.) ———
fork Fork-to-reverse idler gear clearance 0.20−0.60 mm (0.007−0.024 in.) 1.2 mm (0.047 in.)
Shift arm I.D. 14.013−14.058 mm (0.5517−0.5535 in.) ———
Shift piece diameter at contact area 0.20−0.60 mm (0.008−0.024 in.) 0.7 mm (0.028 in.)
Shift arm-to-change lever clearance 0.013−0.085 mm (0.0005−0.0033 in.) ———
Select lever O.D. 13.941−13.968 mm (0.5489−0.5499 in.) ———
Shift arm cover clearance 0.032−0.127 mm (0.0013−0.0050 in.) ———
Inter lock I.D. 14.000−14.077 mm (0.5512−0.5542 in.) ———
Inter lock to select lever 0.032−0.136 mm (0.0013−0.0054 in.) ———
Shift piece I.D. 14.000−14.068 mm (0.5512−0.5539 in.) ———
Shift-piece-to select lever clearance 0.032−0.127 mm (0.0013−0.0050 in.) ———
Shift fork diameter at contact area 0.2−0.5 mm (0.008−0.020 in.) ———
pinion gear
M/T differential 80 mm shim-to-bearing outer race 0.01−0.10 mm (0.0004−0.0039 in.) Adjust
80 mm shim clearance in transmission housing
Starting System Component Location Index
i-SHIFT model
STARTER CUT RELAY 1

Test,
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

Test,
Pedal Height Adjustment,
STARTER CUT RELAY 2
Test,
BATTERY
Test,
STARTER TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting, Function Test,
Performance Test, Replacement,
Overhaul,
i-SHIFT model
BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX
No. 24 (10 A)
BATTERY UNDER−DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. 3 (20 A) No. 60 (40 A) BAT ST
T−9 T1
WHT
W1 IG1
No. 44 (Not used) No.12 (10 A)

X3 IGNITION SWITCH
B17
1 3
STATER
CUT RELAY 1
2 4
X2
B16 B33 B4
GRN PNK
GRN PUR
PUR AUXILIARY
BLK
UNDER−DASH
1 4 FUSE HOLDER
STATER
CUT RELAY 2
No. 1 No. 2
(7.5 A) (7.5 A)
2 3
BLU BLK
B S PUR GRY LT GRN YEL WHT
3 1
BRAKE
PEDAL
M SOLENOID POSITION
SWITCH
4 2
BRN LT GRN
STARTER
G401 (RHD)
G302 (LHD)
ECM A43 A13 A14 A8 A41 A42

PUR STEN STRLY STRLD STS BKSWNK BKSW
12V 12V 12V
BLU
TCM A10
STEN
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting
i-SHIFT model
NOTE:
Air temperature must be between 15 and 38 °C (59 and 100 °F) during this procedure.
After this inspection, you must reset engine control module (ECM), otherwise the ECM will continue to stop the fuel
injectors from functioning. Select ECM reset using the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS).
The battery must be in good condition and fully charged.
Is the fuse OK?
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM. If it does not, troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
Dose it indicate OFF?
NO - Inspect the brake pedal position switch.
6. Press the brake pedal, and check the BRAKE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Dose it indicate ON?
NO - Go to Step 7 .
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the brake pedal position switch 4P connector terminal No. 1 and under-
hood fuse/relay box.■
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the ECM from damage.
12. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal A42 and the brake pedal position switch 4P connector
terminal No. 2.
YES - Inspect the brake pedal position switch. ■
NO - Repair open in the wire between ECM (A42) and the brake pedal position switch 4P connector terminal
No. 2.■
13. Hook up the following equipment:
Ammeter, 0−400 A
15. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS OFF on the HDS.
16. With the shift lever in N position, the brake pedal pressed, turn the ignition switch ON (II), and press the engine
start switch.
Did the starter crank the engine normally?
YES - The starting system is OK. Go to Step 21 .
17. Check the battery condition. Check electrical connections at the battery, the negative battery cable to body, the
engine ground cables, and the starter for looseness and corrosion. Then try cranking the engine again.
Did the starter crank the engine?
YES - Repairing the loose connection corrected the problem. The starting system is OK. Go to Step 23 .
NO - Check the following:
If the starter will not crank the engine at all, go to Step 18 .
If the starter cranks the engine erratically or too slowly, go to Step 20 .
If the starter does not disengage from the flywheel ring gear when you release the switch, replace
the starter, or remove and disassemble it and check for the following:
-Solenoid plunger and switch malfunction
-Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning clutch
18. Make sure the transmission is in Neutral, and set the parking brake. Disconnect the connector (A) from the starter
solenoid S terminal. Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive terminal to the solenoid terminal.
Did the starter crank the engine?
NO - Remove the starter, and repair or replace as necessary.■
19. Check the following items in the order listed until you find the open circuit:
The BLK wire and connectors between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the starter cut relay 2.
The BLU wire and connectors between the starter cut relay 2 and the starter.
20. While cranking the engine, check the cranking voltage and the current draw.
Is the cranking voltage greater than or equal to 8.0 V (KQ, KZ models), 9.0 V (Except KQ, KZ models) and the
current draw less than or equal to 200 A (KQ, KZ models), 150 A (Except KQ, KZ models)?
NO - Replace the starter, or remove and disassemble it, and check for the following:
Drag in the starter armature
Shorted armature winding
Excessive drag in the engine
21. Check the engine speed while cranking the engine.
Is the engine speed above 100 rpm (min −1 )?

NO - Replace the starter, or remove and disassemble it, and check for the following:
Open circuit in the starter armature commutator segments
Excessively worn starter brushes
Open circuit in the commutator brushes
Dirty or damaged helical splines or drive gear
Faulty drive gear clutch
22. Remove the starter, and inspect its drive gear and the flywheel ring gear for damage. Replace any damaged parts.
23. Select ECM reset to cancel ALL INJECTORS OFF on the HDS.
M/T Component Location Index
DIFFERENTIAL
CHANGE LEVER
ASSEMBLY
REVERSE SHIFT FORK

Clearance Inspection,
SHIFT FORK
Clearance
Inspection,
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION FLUID Removal, Disassembly/
Inspection and Installation, Reassembly,
Replacement, BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH Disassembly,
Test, Reassembly,
MAINSHAFT ASSEMBLY
COUNTERSHAFT ASSEMBLY
MAINSHAFT Clearance Inspection,
Disassembly, Countershaft Disassembly,
Inspection,
REVERSE Reassembly, Inspection,
IDLER GEAR Thrust Clearance Adjustment, Reassembly,
Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement, Bearing Replacement,
Hard to shift into 1st gear
1. Check and/or replace the MTF.
2. Check the clutch.
3. Check the change lever assembly.
4. Check the 1st synchro ring and the 1st gear.
5. Check the 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub.
Hard to shift into 2nd gear
3. Check the 2nd synchro ring and the 2nd gear.
4. Check the 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub.
Hard to shift into 3rd gear
3. Check the 3rd synchro ring and the 3rd gear.
4. Check the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub.
Hard to shift into 4th gear
3. Check the 4th synchro ring and the 4th gear.
4. Check the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub.
4. Check the 5th/6th synchro sleeve and hub.
4. Check the 5th/6th synchro sleeve and hub.
Hard to shift into reverse
2. Check the clutch.
4. Check the reverse shift fork and reverse idler gear.
5. Check reverse gears.
HDS does not communicate with the ECM or the vehicle
Noise from the transmission
2. Check the MTF level (unfilled or in surplus the transmission with the MTF).
3. Check the transmission gears.
4. Check the transmission bearings.
5. Check the differential carrier, the final driven gear, and the carrier bearings.
Transmission jumps out of gear
2. Check the detent ball springs.
3. Check the teeth of the synchro rings and the gears.
4. Check for bent, deform, or damage of the shift forks.
M/T System Symptom Troubleshooting
Hard to shift into 1st gear 1.Check and/or replace the MTF.
2.Check the clutch.
3.Check the change lever assembly.
4.Check the 1st synchro ring and the 1st gear.
5.Check the 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub.
Hard to shift into 2nd gear 1.Check and/or replace the MTF.
3.Check the 2nd synchro ring and the 2nd gear.
4.Check the 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub.
Hard to shift into 3rd gear 1.Check and/or replace the MTF.
3.Check the 3rd synchro ring and the 3rd gear.
4.Check the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub.
Hard to shift into 4th gear 1.Check and/or replace the MTF.
3.Check the 4th synchro ring and the 4th gear.
4.Check the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub.
4.Check the 5th/6th synchro sleeve and hub.
4.Check the 5th/6th synchro sleeve and hub.
Hard to shift into reverse 1.Check and/or replace the MTF.
2.Check the clutch.
4.Check the reverse shift fork and reverse idler gear.
5.Check reverse gears.
HDS does not communicate with the ECM or the Troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
vehicle
Noise from the transmission 1.Check and/or replace the MTF.
2.Check the MTF level (unfilled or in surplus the transmission with the MTF).
3.Check the transmission gears.
4.Check the transmission bearings.
5.Check the differential carrier, the final driven gear, and the carrier bearings.
Transmission jumps out of gear 1.Check and/or replace the MTF.
2.Check the detent ball springs.
3.Check the teeth of the synchro rings and the gears.
4.Check for bent, deform, or damage of the shift forks.
MTF Inspection and Replacement
1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine OFF.
2. Raise the vehicle on a lift and make sure it is securely supported.
4. Remove the filler plug (A) and sealing washer (B), check the condition of the MTF and make sure it is at the proper
level (C).
5. If the MTF is dirty, remove the drain plug (A) and drain the MTF.
6. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B), and refill the transmission with MTF to the proper level.
Always use Genuine Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF).
Fluid Capacity
1.4 L (1.5 US qt, 1.2 Imp qt) at fluid change
1.6 L (1.7 US qt, 1.4 Imp qt) at overhaul
7. Install the filler plug (C) with a new sealing washer (D).
10. Without service reminder system, this procedure is complete.
With service reminder system

11. If the service reminder system required to replace the MTF, reset the service reminder system, and this procedure
is complete. If the service reminder system did not require to replace the MTF, go to Step 12 and reset the MTF life
with the HDS.
14. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM. If it doesn't communicate, troubleshoot the DLC
circuit.
15. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS.
16. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS.
17. Select SERVICE REMINDER in the EU MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS.
18. Reset SERVICE REMINDER ITEM 3 (shows MTF) with the HDS.
transmission Use genuine Honda MTF Overhaul 1.6 L (1.7 US qt, 1.4 Imp qt)
fluid
Clutch System Description
Self-Adjusting Clutch (SAC)
Clutch Component Location Index
CRANKSHAFT PILOT BEARING

Inspection,
Replacement,
CLUTCH DISC
Inspection and Removal,
Installation,
PRESSURE PLATE
Inspection and Removal,
Installation,
RELEASE BEARING
Removal,
Inspection,
Installation,
FLYWHEEL
Inspection,
Replacement,
Clutch Replacement
Stop collar
070AF-SMGC150
Ring gear holder

07LAB-PV00100
Pressure plate compressor
070AE-0010100
Center shaft
070AF-SMGC140
Bearing remover shaft 15

07936-KC10100
Bearing remover head 15
07936-KC10200

07749-0010000
07946-1870100
Engine Side
You must use the pressure plate compressor, the center shaft, and the stop collar required to remove and install the
clutch pressure plate or you will damage it.
Pressure Plate Inspection and Removal
1. Remove the transmission.
2. Remove the transmission mount.
3. Check the evenness of the height of the diaphragm spring fingers using the center shaft, the stop collar (A), and a
feeler gauge (B). If the height difference is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate and clutch disc as
a set.
4. Install the center shaft (A), the stop collar (B), the pressure plate compressor (C), and the ring gear holder (D).
5. Turn the center screw (E) clockwise by hand to apply pressure on the diaphragm spring. Continue turning the
center screw until it stops.
6. Loosen the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in the pattern shown in several steps, then remove the bolts.
7. Turn the center screw (B) on the pressure plate compressor counterclockwise by hand to release the pressure,
then install two pressure plate mounting bolts by finger-tight to hold the pressure plate (C).
8. Remove the stop collar, the pressure plate compressor, then remove the finger-tightened bolts and the pressure
plate.
9. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for wear at the release bearing contact area.
10. Inspect the pressure plate surface (A) for wear, cracks, and burning.
11. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and a feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the
most measurement difference is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate and clutch disc as a set.
Clutch Disc Inspection and Removal

12. Remove the clutch disc (A) and clutch center shaft (B).
13. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slippage or oil. If the clutch disc looks burnt or is oil soaked, replace
the clutch disc and the pressure plate as a set. If the clutch disc is oil soaked, find and repair the source of the oil
leak.
14. Measure clutch disc thickness. If the measurement is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc and
pressure plate as a set.
15. Measure the rivet depths from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the measurement
is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc and pressure plate as a set.
Standard (New): 1.1 mm (0.043 in.) min.
Flywheel Inspection
16. Remove the ring gear holder.
17. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage.
18. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks and burning.
19. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B). Through at least two full turns with pushing against the
flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the measurement is not within
the standard, replace the flywheel, and recheck the runout. Go to Step 20 .
Flywheel Replacement
20. Install the ring gear holder.
21. Loosen the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Remove the bolts, then remove the
flywheel and the ring gear holder.
22. Install the flywheel on the crankshaft, and install the mounting bolts finger-tight.
23. Install the ring gear holder (A), then torque the flywheel mounting bolts (B) in a crisscross pattern in several steps.
Pilot Bearing Inspection

24. Inspect the crankshaft pilot bearing for wear and damage.
25. Inspect the inside surface of the crankshaft pilot bearing with your finger. If the crankshaft pilot bearing is not
smooth, replace it; go to Step 26 .
Pilot Bearing Replacement
26. Remove the crankshaft pilot bearing (A) using the bearing remover shaft (B), bearing remover head (C), and the
sliding hammer weight (D).
27. Install the new pilot bearing (A) into the crankshaft using the 15 x 135L driver handle (B) and 28 x 30 mm bearing
driver attachment (C). Apply a light coat of molybdenum grease to the bearing surface.
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation

NOTE: The clutch disc and pressure plate are a matched set and must be replaced together.
28. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splines of the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch disc slides
freely on the mainshaft.
29. Apply a light coat of molybdenum grease to the crankshaft pilot bearing (A).
30. Apply molybdenum grease to the splines (B) of the clutch disc (C), then install the clutch disc using the clutch
center shaft (D).
31. Align point marks (A) across the pressure plate (B) and flywheel (C).
32. Install the pressure plate and the mounting bolts (D) by finger-tight.
33. Install the stop collar (A) and the pressure plate compressor (B).
34. Turn the center screw (C) clockwise by hand to apply pressure on the diaphragm spring. Continue turning the
center screw until it stops.
35. Be careful not to damage the pressure plate (D). Tighten (180 degrees apart) the pressure plate mounting bolts (E)
in the pattern as shown in several steps.
Specified Torque: 25 N·m (2.6 kgf·m, 19 lbf·ft)
36. Turn the center screw on the pressure plate compressor counterclockwise by hand to release the pressure.
Remove the pressure plate compressor, the stop collar, the center shaft, and the ring gear holder.
37. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height.
38. Do the release bearing inspection, and replace if it necessary.
39. Install the transmission mount.
40. Install the transmission.
Transmission Side
Release Bearing Removal
2. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B).
3. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing by squeezing the release fork set spring (D). Remove the
release bearing (E).
Release Bearing Inspection

4. Check the play of the release bearing by spinning it by hand. If there is excessive play or noise, replace the release
bearing.
NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent.
Release Bearing Installation
5. Apply molybdenum grease to the release fork (A), release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release
bearing guide (D) in the shaded areas, then set the release fork set spring (E).
NOTE: Replace the release fork bolt if necessary.
6. With the release fork (A) slide between the release bearing pawls (B), install the release bearing on the mainshaft
while inserting the release fork through the hole (C) in the clutch housing.
7. Align the detent (D) of the release fork with the release fork bolt (E), then press the detent of the release fork over
the release fork bolt squarely.
8. Install the release fork boot (F). Make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing.
9. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B) and that the
release bearing slides smoothly. Wipe off any excess grease.
Clutch disc
Clutch disc Rivet head depth 1.1 mm (0.043 in.) 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)
Pressure plate
Height of diaphragm spring fingers measured 0.8 mm (0.03 in.) 1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
with feeler gauge and special tool
Flywheel
Flywheel Runout on clutch mating surface 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) max. ———
i-SHIFT System Fail Safe Action Index
SAE Fault Code Malfunction Criteria Fail Safe Action
(DTC)
P0504 Diagnosis by the brake information in the F-CAN Driving in manual mode is impossible.
signal.
Received brake signal did not change for 3 drive
cycles or more.
i-SHIFT drive cycle is established under these
conditions (Once all of these conditions
mentioned are satisfied, 1 drive cycle is
established.):
-Two minutes elapsed after the ignition switch
is turned ON.
-Gear is shifted to the 3rd gear or higher.
-Speed has reached 16 km/h or more.
P0512 Diagnosis by Starter Switch Signal (STS). None

P0562 Diagnosis by voltage input. i-SHIFT indicator comes on (When voltage
decreases, symptoms such as delay in motor
Monitors the VBATT (+B) signal when voltage operation occur).
has reached 9 V or less.
P0563 Diagnosis by voltage input. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.

Monitors the VBATT (+B) signal when voltage
reached 28 V or more.
P0603 Diagnosis by the TCM internal circuit check function. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
Control is terminated and the condition
Performs ROMSUM check of the Keep Alive when a malfunction has been detected
Memory (KAM), and assumes a malfunction if (gear position, clutch position) is kept.
the RONSUM value does not match.
P0605 Diagnosis by the TCM internal circuit check function. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
Checks the RONSUM in the rewritable part of when a malfunction has been detected
the ROM, and assumes a malfunction if the (gear position, clutch position) is kept.
RONSUM value does not match.
P0666 Diagnosis by the TCM internal temperature sensor i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
signal.
When the input value is higher or lower than the
designed value.
P0702 Determination by VCC voltage input value. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
When the input value is higher or lower than the when a malfunction has been detected
designed value. (gear position, clutch position) is kept.
P0780 Diagnosis by shift position while shifting gears. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
Even if synchro position is not reached, but
reaching the connecting part in the gear has
failed at least three times.
P0810 Diagnosis by the value from the clutch actuator i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
position sensor. When vehicle speed exceedes a certain
speed (varies with the speed gear
When the position sensor value does not retained), the clutch actuator position
change even if the clutch actuator has been when the malfunction occurred is
commanded to operate. retained, and control is performed.
When vehicle speed is below a certain
speed, the mode becomes Neutral.
Although the engine can be restarted,
the time elapsed to start the engine after
pressing the starter switch is longer
than usual (about 1 sec).
P0882 Diagnosis by input voltage value and F-CAN signal i-SHIFT indicator comes on (If the F-CAN signal
value. from the ECM is sent continuously, control
continues until the IG1 in the ECM turns OFF).
When voltage input value in the TCM is almost
0 V, even if the IG1 signal (received F-CAN
value) of the ECM is ON.
(DTC)
P0883 Diagnosis by input voltage value and F-CAN signal i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
value.
When voltage input value in the TCM is almost
equal or more than the battery voltage, even if
the IG1 signal (received F-CAN value) of the
ECM is OFF.
P0904 Diagnosis by sensor signal. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
Fixed at the speed gear when a
Monitors PULSES SELECT signal. malfunction has been confirmed
When the line for PULSES SELECT signal is (connects or disconnects the clutch by
open. vehicle speed).
When the line for PULSES SELECT signal is
about 0 V (GND short).
When the line for PULSES SELECT signal is
almost equal to the battery voltage (BATT
short).
P0909 Diagnosis by neutral width. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.

When the neutral width of the change actuator
is 15.5 mm or above, or 25.5 mm or below
Output from the sensor does not change even if
the output value in the select actuator position
does not detect electrical malfunction in the
sensor.
Fixed at the speed gear at the time a
Monitors PULSES SHIFT signal. malfunction has been confirmed.
When the line for PULSES SHIFT signal is Connects or disconnects the clutch by
open. vehicle speed.
When the line for PULSES SHIFT signal is
about 0 V (GND short).
When the line for PULSES SHIFT signal is
almost equal to the battery voltage (BATT
short).
P0919 Diagnosis by time spent in neutral position learning. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
When confirmation of a neutral position is not
possible.
Output from the sensor does not change even if
the output value in the shift actuator position
does not detect electrical malfunction in the
sensor.
P0942 Diagnosis by in-gear action. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.

When synchro position cannot be achieved
even if shift/select is operated and in-gear
action is performed of halt condition.
P16C0 CPU performs self-diagnosis while ignition switch is i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
ON, and determines whether the malfunction has been Control termination other than alteration
recorded or not. of information.
P19E4 Diagnosis by gear actuator's input energy (calculated Transmission Temp indicator comes on.
value).
For a certain period of time, an input from 2400
W to 3000 W, or an energy input from 1600 W
to 2000 W occurred.
(DTC)
P19E5 Diagnosis by the value from the clutch actuator i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
position sensor. When vehicle speed exceedes a certain
Clutch actuator position sensor value is beyond retained), the clutch actuator position
the range of design value. when the malfunction occurred is
retained, and control is performed.
P19E6 Diagnosis by clutch temperature value. Creep termination.
If clutch temperature value reaches 300 °C (572
°F) or more.
P19E7 Diagnose when Clutch Contact Position 3 Learning i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
was not completed or in progress.
P19E8 Diagnosis using VSPOUT signal. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
When VSPOUT signal is 0 V or approximately
equal to the battery voltage.
P19E9 Diagnosis by ECU BRAKE AND signal. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
When ECU BRAKE AND signal is 0 V or
approximately equal to the battery voltage.
P19EA Diagnosis by Starter Enable signal return input value. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
When Starter Enable signal return value is 0 V
or approximately equal to the battery voltage.
P19EB Diagnosis using F-CAN signal. None
(Cannot perform commands and alteration
Diagnostic software protection not active. necessary for KEY inspection.)
P19EC Diagnosis by SUPPLY signal. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
Fixed at the speed gear when
Monitors SENSOR SUPPLY SHIFT signal. malfunction was confirmed (connects or
When SENSOR SUPPLY SHIFT signal is about disconnects the clutch by vehicle
0 V (GND short). speed).
P19ED Diagnosis by SUPPLY signal. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
Monitors SENSOR SUPPLY SHIFT signal. malfunction has been confirmed
When the line for SENSOR SHIFT signal is (connects or disconnects the clutch by
P19EE Diagnosis by SUPPLY signal. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
Monitors SENSOR SUPPLY SHIFT signal. malfunction has been confirmed
When the line for SENSOR SUPPLY SHIFT (connects or disconnects the clutch by
signal is almost equal to the battery voltage vehicle speed).
(BATT short).
P19EF Diagnosis by GND signal. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
Monitors SENSOR GND SHIFT signal. malfunction has been confirmed
When the line for SENSOR GND SHIFT signal (connects or disconnects the clutch by
is open. vehicle speed).
P19F0 Diagnosis by SENSOR signal. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
Monitors DIRECTION SHIFT signal. malfunction has been confirmed
When the line for DIRECTION SHIFT signal is (connects or disconnects the clutch by
about 0 V (GND short). vehicle speed).
Monitors DIRECTION SHIFT signal. malfunction has been confirmed
When the DIRECTION SHIFT signal is almost (connects or disconnects the clutch by
equal to the battery voltage (BATT short). vehicle speed).
When the line for DIRECTION SHIFT signal is
open.
(DTC)
P19F3 Diagnosis by SUPPLY signal. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
Monitors SENSOR SUPPLY SELECT signal. malfunction has been confirmed
When SENSOR SELECT signal is about 0 V (connects or disconnects the clutch by
(GND short). vehicle speed).
When the line for SENSOR SELECT signal is (connects or disconnects the clutch by
When the line for SENSOR SUPPLY SELECT (connects or disconnects the clutch by
signal is almost equal to the battery voltage vehicle speed).
(BATT short).
P19F6 Diagnosis by GND signal. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
Monitors SENSOR GND SELECT signal. malfunction has been confirmed
When the line for SENSOR GND SELECT (connects or disconnects the clutch by
signal is open. vehicle speed).
Monitors DIRECTION SELECT signal. malfunction has been confirmed
When the line for DIRECTION SELECT signal is (connects or disconnects the clutch by
about 0 V (GND short). vehicle speed).

Monitor of DIRECTION SELECT signal. malfunction has been confirmed
When DIRECTION SELECT signal is a rough (connects or disconnects the clutch by
voltage of the battery (BATT short). vehicle speed).
When the line for DIRECTION SELECT signal is
open.
P19FA Diagnosis using F-CAN signal. None
Torque instability signal received at the TCM is
set at 10 minutes. or above.
P19FB Diagnose when Clutch Contact Position 1/2 Learning None
was completed or in progress. (1st or reverse gear only can be shifted. Drive
at very slow speed available.)
When all phases of learning was not completed.
P19FC Diagnosis when Shift Change Actuator Position i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
Learning and Synchronizing Position Learning is Control terminated (Engine startup
completed or in progress. impossible).
P19FD Diagnosis by Shift Change Actuator Position Learning None

value.
Shift Position Gear 1/3/5 is +11.4 mm or above,
+7.4 mm or below.
Shift Position Gear 2/4/6/R is −6.2 mm or
above, −10.2 mm or below.
Select Position Gear 1/2 is −2.8 mm or above,
−5.8 mm or below.
Select Position Gear 3/4 is +2.1 mm or above,
−0.9 mm or below.
Select Position Gear 5/6 is +7.6 mm or above,
+4.6 mm or below.
Select Position Gear R is +11.95 mm or above,
+9.45 mm or below.
Synchronizer Position Gear 1/3/5 is +8.2 mm or
above, +0.2 mm or below.
Synchronizer Position Gear 2/4/6 is +1.1 mm or
above, −6.9 mm or below.
A fault code is recorded if one of the conditions above
exists.
(DTC)
P19FE Diagnosis by Clutch Contact Position learning value. None
Clutch Contact Position (long term) is 14 mm or
above, or 7 mm or below.
Clutch Contact Position (medium term) is 14
mm or above, or 7 mm or below.
Clutch Contact Position (short term) is 14 mm
or above, or 7 mm or below.
exists.
P19FF Diagnosis by Friction Coefficient value. None
Friction Coefficient #1 is 865 or above, or 171 or
below.
below.
below.
Friction Coefficient General is 865 or above, or
171 or below.
exists.
P2785 Diagnosis by motor temperature value and PCB Transmission Temp indicator comes on.
sensor's input value. Gearshift limit (from 1st to 5th and R
only) by Shift map for use during
Motor temperature is 195 °C or above. occurrence of malfunction.
PCB sensor's input value is 118 °C or above.
exists.
P2786 Diagnosis by gear actuator's input energy (calculated i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
value). Fixed at the speed gear when a
malfunction has been confirmed
For a certain period of time, an input of 3000 W (connects or disconnects the clutch by
or more, or an energy input of 2000 or more vehicle speed).
occurred.
P2787 Diagnosis by clutch temperature value. Transmission Temp indicator comes on.
Creep termination.
If clutch temperature value reaches 400 °C or
more.
U0100 Diagnosis using CAN signal. i-SHIFT indicator comes on.
When vehicle speed exceedes a certain
When TCM cannot receive signals from the speed (varies with the speed gear
ECM. retained), the clutch actuator position
when the malfunction occurred is
If vehicle speed is over 5 km/h, the
When TCM cannot receive signals from gear position at malfunction is retained, and
shift control module. control is done (change in auto mode
from manual mode).
When vehicle speed is below 5 km/h,
the mode becomes Neutral.
When TCM cannot receive signals from gauge
control module.
(DTC)
U0401 Diagnosis using CAN signal. DTC set caused by IAT sensor
malfunction/ECT sensor malfunction:
When an INVALID value is included in the ECM None
data received by the TCM. For DTC set caused by other ECM
malfunctions: When vehicle speed
exceedes a certain speed (varies with
the speed gear retained), the clutch
actuator position when the malfunction
occurred is retained, and control is
performed.
U0404 Diagnosis using CAN signal. Fail safe action is classified according to
malfunction mode.
If the data received by the TCM from the gear
shift control module contains an abnormal or Auto/Manual range abnormality: i-SHIFT
INVALID value. indicator comes on. However, shifting
between Automatic and manual is not
possible.
For abnormality in other range and
abnormality in the data received: i-SHIFT
indicator comes on.
If vehicle speed is over 5 km/h, the
position at malfunction is retained, and
control is done. When vehicle speed is
below 5 km/h, the mode becomes
Neutral.

If the shift lever is not at the N position:
When TCM cannot receive signals from ABS or Speed gear is fixed at malfunction
VSA. occurrence. However, to prevent engine
stall, clutch opening and closing is
controlled.
When shift lever is at the N position:
Shifts gear to Neutral, and thereafter,
Neutral mode is maintained even if shift
lever is moved to other positions.
U1400 Diagnosis using CAN signal. When vehicle speed exceedes a certain
Abnormality exists in the ECM data received by retained), the clutch actuator position
TCM. when the malfunction occurred is
U1401 Diagnosis using CAN signal. None
TCM received a shift down request, but when
gear is shifted, maximum engine speed is
exceeded.
U1402 Diagnosis using CAN signal. None

Before TCM received 5-gear-down request, it
received 4-gear-down request.
When ABS or VSA unit detects
INVALID value in the ABS or VSA data received malfunction: Disables downshift when
by TCM. When 1 piece of data is included. brake is depressed.
If ABS or VSA unit did not detect a
malfunction: None
(DTC)
U1404 Diagnosis using CAN signal. When ABS or VSA unit detects
malfunction: Disables downshift when
Abnormality exists in the ABS or VSA data brake is depressed.
received by TCM. If ABS or VSA unit has not detect a
malfunction: None
If shift lever is not at the N position:
When multiple INVALID values are included in Speed gear is fixed at malfunction
the ABS or VSA data received by the TCM. occurrence. However, to prevent engine
stall, clutch opening and closing is
controlled.
When shift lever is at the N position:
Shifts gear to Neutral, and thereafter,
Neutral mode is maintained even if shift
lever is moved to other positions.
i-SHIFT System Description - Overview
i-SHIFT
Gear Shift Control Module and Paddle Shifter
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Clutch Actuator
Transmission Shift Change Actuator (Shift Actuator Motor)
Transmission Shift Change Actuator (Select Actuator Motor)
Auto Mode Gear-shifting Map
Manual Mode Gear-shifting Map
Prevents Mis-shifting System
TCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (37P)
TCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (42P)
i-SHIFT System Component Location Index
GAUGE CONTROL TRANSMISSION

PADDLE SHIFTER SHIFT
+
MODULE CHANGE
(UPSHIFTACTUATOR
SWITCH)
CLUTCH FLUIDCircuit
TUBETroubleshooting,
ASSEMBLY (Shift
CircuitActuator,
Troubleshooting,
Select Actuator)
Test,
Replacement,
GEAR SHIFT
CONTROL MODULE
Replacement,
CLUTCH PIPE ASSEMBLY

Replacement,
PADDLE SHIFTER −
(DOWNSHIFT SWITCH)
Test,
Replacement,
CLUTCH ACTUATOR (TCM)
Function Test,
Learning,
The illustration shows the LHD model; RHDBleeding,
model is similar.
Replacement,
i-SHIFT System Circuit Diagram
BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH UNDER−DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
IG1 No. 12 (10 A) *1 *1: LHD model

YEL YEL *2: RHD model
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
BAT MODULE (TCM)
TRANSMISSION SHIFT
WHT CHANGE ACTUATOR *2 CHANGE ACTUATOR
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) CHANGE ACTUATOR
SUBHARNESS A SUBHARNESS B
No. 60 (IGN)(50 A) C D
(Without VSA) *1 : LHD model
10P CONNECTOR *2 : RHD model
BATTERY TERMINAL B21ABS MODULATOR
No. 60 (BAT)(40 A) 10 1
FUSEACTUATOR
CLUTCH BOX GRN GRN
RED WHT
SELECT
CONTROL UNIT
No. 1 (100 A) MOTOR No. 53 (10 A) *2 *1 SELECT
STARTER
WHT PNK PNK 11
YEL 12 14P
CUT RELAY ACTUATOR
GAUGEMOTOR
CONTROL
CLUTCH CONNECTOR*1 MODULE
B32 9 6
ACTUATOR LT BLU LT BLU
MOTOR SELECT
CLUTCH ACTUATOR
MOTORRED WHT SUBHARNESS2P CONNECTOR*1 30 SELECT ACTUATOR
14P CONNECTOR*2 A B WHT
PUR
TRANSMISSTION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) CANH MOTOR ROTATING
ECM
10P CONNECTOR1*1 PULSE/ROTATING
A28 DIRECTION SENSOR
10 4*2 i−SHIFT
WHT PNK
B3
VBU 7 3 29 INDICATOR
WHT WHT
SELECT *1 REDA13
A9
SENSOR 2 CANL
LT GRN YEL YEL STRLY
SUPPLY
IG1 A B *1
A4
B10 4 6 A8
CLUTCH YEL LT GRN LT GRN LT GRN 4 MULTI
STS LT GRN LT GRN STS INFORMATION
ACTUATOR SELECT
DIRECTION DISPLAY
STROKE RED WHT
SENSOR A33PNK 7 A3
RED WHT WHT WHT
CANH CANH
B11 *1 5 5
ORN ORN
SELECT16P
A31
WHT
PULSECONNECTOR*
6
1 RED RED WHT A4
RED
CANL5 CANL YAW RATE−LATERAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
B2 8 RED
BRN15 BRN 9 2
SELECT SG RED WHT
WHT RED
8 *2
CHANGE ACTUATOR
C D
SUBHARNESS A 12
PNK 5 13P 5 YEL *1
B30 CONNECTOR*2 5 6 20P 4 1
GEAR SHIFT CONTROL MODULE 6 RED
SHIFT *2 *2 CONNECTOR*1
MOTOR SHIFT
16P CONNE CTOR* 2 16P CONNE CTOR* 2
5 ACTUATOR
RED WHT MOTOR *2
VBU *1
B31
A10 1 6
A43
BLU 16P
6 SHIFT BLU
STEN
PUR PUR
2
MOTOR STEN 6SHIFT ACTUATOR
5 CONNECTOR*
IG1 MOTOR ROTATING
A35 3 A28 PULSE/ROTATING
3 GRN GRY GRY
VSA MODULATOR− DIRECTION SENSOR
CANH BKAND CONTROL UNIT BKAND
B20 3
YEL (With VSA)
A3
SHIFT 5 A33
9 SENSOR BRN LT BLU LT BLU PADDLE
CANL VSSAMT
SUPPLY VSSAMT
SHIFTER (+)
CABLE (UPSHIFT
A20 8 REEL A44 SWITCH)
B8 PNK RED RED 4
7 WEN BRN
6 7 WEN 2
SHIFT BRN GRN/ORN
S−UP DIRECTION *2
+ A29 RIGHT
6 S−UP
PG A425
B9 1
PNK LT GRN LT GRN
A N SHIFT 7 BRAKE PEDAL BKSW
PULSE BLK POSITION PADDLE
R SWITCH A41 SHIFTER (−)
8 BRN (DOWNSHIFT
− BKSW SWITCH)
1 B1 5 8 NC 2 2
GRY
S−DN SHIFT SG
G151 LT GRN16 BLK/WHT
SHIFT LEVER
POSITION 16P CONNE CTOR* 2
LEFT
S−DN
SENSOR 12 1
2 12
GND LT GRN
BLK BLK
G502 G501
i-SHIFT System Symptom Troubleshooting - Engine doesn't crank
Engine Doesn't Crank
2. Press the brake pedal, and change the shift lever to the N position.
3. Check the MECHANICAL GEAR STACK FOR STARTER ENABLE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is the starter enable signal OK?
YES - Test the starter. ■
NO - Go to Step 4 .
4. Check the FOOTBRAKE ON SIGNAL FOR STARTER ENABLE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
NO - Do the brake pedal position switch signal circuit troubleshooting. ■
5. Check the CLUTCH OPEN SIGNAL FOR STARTER ENABLE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 6 .
6. Check the CLUTCH POSITION in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there more 15 mm (0.6 in.)?
YES - Check for these conditions, and repair if necessary:■
Clutch disc and pressure plate
Diaphragm spring
Release bearing
NO - Check for these conditions, and repair if necessary:■
Slave cylinder
Release fork
7. Check the NEUTRAL SHIFTER SIGNAL FOR STARTER ENABLE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is the starter enable OK?
NO - Go to Step 8 .
8. Move the shift lever in N, then check the SHIFT VALID N FROM SHIFTER in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
It is OK?
NO - Replace the gear shift control module. ■
9. Check the ENGAGE GEAR NEUTRAL in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the gear change into the N position?
NO - Repair the transmission internal failure.■
10. Make sure the battery is fully charged.
NO - Substitute a known-good TCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
TCM, replace the original TCM . ■
i-SHIFT System Symptom Troubleshooting - No transmission power to wheels
No Transmission Power to Wheels
2. Press the brake pedal, and change the shift lever to the A/M position.
Is the brake switch OK?
NO - Do the brake pedal position switch signal circuit troubleshooting. ■
4. Check that the gear position indicator is displayed in 1st gear while in Auto mode.
NOTE: When all the doors are closed, the gear position indicator should not flash. If the gear position indicator
flashes, go to Step 5 .
Is the gear position displayed?
NO - Go to Step 5 .
Leaks at hoses and line joints and connections, and repair if necessary.
Clutch lines for damage and leaks. Also check for bent clutch lines.
Reservoir level.
Are they OK?
NO - Repair the problems, then go through Step 1 to 4 and make sure it is normal.■
6. Do the i-SHIFT system learning (static mode).
7. Check that the gear position indicator is displayed in 1st gear while in Auto mode.
Is the 1st gear position displayed?
NO - Update the TCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good TCM, then recheck. If
the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good TCM, replace the original TCM. ■
8. Read out error memory and remove errors if present.
9. Check the clutch, concentric slave cylinder.
It is OK?
NO - Repair the problems, then go through Step 1 to 4 and make sure it is normal.■
10. Do the ENGAGE GEARS in the FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU with the HDS, and try to shift the position that cannot
be shifted.
Does the actuator move normally?
YES - Update the TCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good TCM, then recheck. If
NO - Repair the transmission internal failure, then go through Step 1 to 4 and make sure it is normal.■
i-SHIFT System Symptom Troubleshooting - Non-Creep
Non-creep
NOTE: The creep function is only supported in gears, 1, 2, and R.
2. Check these parameters in the DATA LIST with the HDS (check signal change inactive/active):
IDLE SWITCH
BRAKE SWITCH
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
CLUTCH TEMPERATURE (with a clutch temperature increased to higher degrees, creeping torque is
reduced linearly. With a clutch temperature of 300 °C creeping function is inactive).
Do they show the proper valve?
NO - Repair the items that did not show the proper valve.■
3. Press the brake pedal, and change the shift lever to the A/M position.
4. Compare the TARGET GEAR and the ACTUAL GEAR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is the gear position OK?
Is the i-SHIFT system learning OK?
NO - Repeat the i-SHIFT system learning (static mode) and the i-SHIFT system bleeding. ■
6. Test-drive, under these conditions:
Full load start at least five times.
Shift to every gear.
NOTE: During test drive, read out the actual clutch temperature with the HDS. Do not start test drive with clutch
temperature of 100 °C.
7. Clear any DTCs with the HDS.
8. Check the creep condition.
Is it OK?
YES - Vehicle is normal.■
NO - Go to Step 1 and recheck.
i-SHIFT System Symptom Troubleshooting - Engine stalls when stopping
Engine Stalls When Stopping
1. Check the clutch line for leaks and low fluid level.
Is there any problems?
YES - Repair the problem part, then go to Step 2 .
NO - Go to Step 3 .
2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (invoked due to repair).
3. Bleed hydraulic system to remove any air bubbles.
Was the i-SHIFT system learning (static mode) successfully completed?
NO - Go to Step 5 .
NO - Bleed hydraulic system to remove any air bubbles, then do the i-SHIFT system learning (static mode). ■
6. Test-drive the vehicle for 10 minutes with at least 5 full load start.
NOTE: During the test-drive, read out the actual clutch temperature with the HDS. Do not start test-drive with clutch
temperature above 100 °C (212 °F).
Was the test successfully completed?
NO - Go to Step 7 .
NO - Bleed the hydraulic system to remove any air bubbles, then do the i-SHIFT system learning (static
mode). ■
i-SHIFT System Symptom Troubleshooting - i-SHIFT indicator stay on, but no DTCs are stored
i-SHIFT indicator stay on, but no DTCs are stored
Does the i-SHIFT indicator flash?
NO - Update the TCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good gauge control module,
and recheck. If the i-SHIFT indicator circuit is OK, replace the original gauge control module. ■
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the TCM. If it does not, troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
YES - Go to the troubleshooting DTC U0155. ■
i-SHIFT System Functional Test
Clutch Actuator Full Stroke Operation
By the command from the HDS, the master cylinder in the clutch actuator is moved to full stroke position.
This functional test can be done under these conditions:
IG switch on.
Engine not running.
N position.
Drivers side door closed.
Engage Gears
By the command from the HDS, the clutch actuator and transmission shift change actuator operates, and shifts to any
gear.
This functional test can be done under these conditions:
IG switch on.
Engine not running.
N position.
Synchronizing position learning has been completed.
NOTE:
Specify a gear, and forcibly shift to that gear (usual paddle shifter is until 2nd).
When diagnosing malfunction of the TCM or Motor, use it depending on the cause of malfunction.
HDS does not communicate with the TCM or the vehicle
i-SHIFT indicator does not come on
2. Check the i-SHIFT INDICATOR LIGHT F-CAN in the DATA LIST with the HDS. If it is NG, replace the TCM.
i-SHIFT indicator stays on, but no DTCs are stored
i-SHIFT position indicator does not come on
2. Substitute a known-good TCM, then recheck. If it is OK, replace the original TCM.
i-SHIFT position indicator does not change or a gear position does not match
2. Move the shift lever to all position then check the SHIFT VALID N or D or A/M or + or − or R FROM SHIFTER in the DATA LIST with the HDS. If it
is NG, replace the gear shift control module.
Paddle shifter + (upshift switch) does not gear change
1. Paddle shifter + (upshift switch) circuit troubleshooting.
2. Paddle shifter + (upshift switch) test.
Paddle shifter − (downshift switch) does not gear change
1. Paddle shifter − (downshift switch) circuit troubleshooting.
2. Paddle shifter − (downshift switch) test.
Manual mode does not gear change of gear shift control module
1. Move the shift lever to all positions then check the SHIFT VALID N or D or A/M or + or − or R FROM SHIFTER in the DATA LIST with the HDS. If
it is NG, replace the gear shift control module.
Engine doesn't crank
No transmission power to wheels
Non-creep
Engine stalls when stopping
All segments of the gear position indicator turn on. (When starting the engine, N is not indicated on the gear position
indicator although the shift lever is at N position)
1. Make sure the shift lever is at N position, press the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
3. Keep the brake pedal pressed until the gear position indicator indicates N. If the gear position indicator does not change to N, inspect the battery.
i-SHIFT System Symptom Troubleshooting
HDS does not communicate with the TCM or the vehicle Troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
i-SHIFT indicator does not come on 1.Do the gauge control module troubleshooting.
2.Check the i-SHIFT INDICATOR LIGHT F-CAN in the DATA LIST with the HDS. If it is NG,
replace the TCM.
i-SHIFT indicator stays on, but no DTCs are stored Symptom troubleshooting.
i-SHIFT position indicator does not come on 1.Do the gauge control module troubleshooting.
2.Substitute a known-good TCM, then recheck. If it is OK, replace the original TCM.
i-SHIFT position indicator does not change or a gear 1.Do the gauge control module troubleshooting.
position does not match 2.Move the shift lever to all position then check the SHIFT VALID N or D or A/M or + or − or
R FROM SHIFTER in the DATA LIST with the HDS. If it is NG, replace the gear shift
control module.
Paddle shifter + (upshift switch) does not gear change 1.Paddle shifter + (upshift switch) circuit troubleshooting.
2.Paddle shifter + (upshift switch) test.
Paddle shifter − (downshift switch) does not gear change 1.Paddle shifter − (downshift switch) circuit troubleshooting.
2.Paddle shifter − (downshift switch) test.
Manual mode does not gear change of gear shift control Move the shift lever to all positions then check the SHIFT VALID N or D or A/M or + or − or
module R FROM SHIFTER in the DATA LIST with the HDS. If it is NG, replace the gear shift control
module.
Engine doesn't crank Symptom troubleshooting.
No transmission power to wheels Symptom troubleshooting.
Non-creep Symptom troubleshooting.
Engine stalls when stopping Symptom troubleshooting.
All segments of the gear position indicator turn on. (When 1.Make sure the shift lever is at N position, press the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
starting the engine, N is not indicated on the gear position 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
indicator although the shift lever is at N position) 3.Keep the brake pedal pressed until the gear position indicator indicates N. If the gear
position indicator does not change to N, inspect the battery.
i-SHIFT System Bleeding
NOTE:
Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean genuine Honda DOT 4 Brake Fluid from an unopened container.
Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
Make sure dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid.
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir (A) is at the MAX (upper) level line (B).
2. Remove the bleeder screw cap. Attach a hose to the bleeder (A), and suspend the hose in a container of brake
fluid.
3. Do the CLUTCH FILLING in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw securely.
5. Do the CLUTCH FLUID AIR BLEEDING in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS.
6. Refill the brake fluid in the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line.
7. Check the clutch operation and check for leaking fluid.
i-SHIFT System Learning
The i-SHIFT learning must be done so the TCM can learn characteristic information of the system. There are two learning
modes, ‘‘Dynamic mode'' and ‘‘Static mode'', and the learning information is different between these two. It can only be
done by doing the DYNAMIC MODE LEARNING or the STATIC MODE LEARNING in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the
HDS. The ‘‘Dynamic mode'' requires driving procedures, and the ‘‘Static mode'' does not require any driving procedures.
i-SHIFT System Learning (Dynamic Mode)
i-SHIFT system learning (Dynamic Mode) is learned through the following steps with the HDS.
1. Shift change actuator position learning.
2. Synchronizing position learning.
3. Clutch contact position 1 learning.
5. Clutch friction learning.
Tasks necessary in the learning process.
Replace the clutch actuator (TCM).
Replace the clutch disc.
Replace the pressure plate.
Replace the flywheel.
i-SHIFT System Learning (Static Mode)

i-SHIFT system learning (static mode) is learned through the following steps with the HDS.
1. Shift change actuator position learning.
2. Synchronizing position learning.
Tasks necessary in the learning process.
Replace the transmission shift change actuator.
Removal/installation the slave cylinder.
Disassembly/reassembly the transmission.
Removal/installation the transmission.
When performing the following maintenance, perform Learning.
i-SHIFT System i-SHIFT System
Learning (Dynamic Learning (Static
Mode) Mode)
Replace the clutch actuator (TCM). ○ ×
Replace the transmission shift change actuator. × ○
Removal/installation the slave cylinder. × ○
Replace the clutch disc. ○ ×
Replace the pressure plate. ○ ×
Replace the flywheel. ○ ×
Removal/installation the transmission. × ○
Disassembly/reassembly the transmission. × ○
○: Maintenance to fall under

×: Maintenance to not fall under
Shift Change Actuator Position Learning

The transmission shift change actuator operates automatically and learns the transmission's neutral position (neutral
reference) and the gear end position (from 1st to 6th and R) and stores the learning value into the TCM.
The shift change actuator position learning is required after these maintenance operations:
Removal/installation the transmission shift change actuator.
The shift change actuator position learning can be done by using the HDS under these conditions:
IG switch on.
Engine not running.
N position.
NOTE:
The commands are sorted for each gear, and can be shifted by the HDS.
Depending on the gear position, shifting may become difficult. If unsuccessful after trying three times to shift, it is
considered Fail.
Usually, learning is done in the order R-1-2-3-4-5-6; but if there is failure at 2nd gear, try to relearn by shifting to
another gear at once as in the order R-1-2-3-2-4-2-5-6.
Synchronizing Position Learning

The transmission shift change actuator operates automatically and learns the synchro-timing (determined from the change
of engine torque) just before gear is applied, and stores the learning value to the TCM.
The synchronizing position learning is required after these maintenance operations:
Removal/installation the transmission shift change actuator.
Synchronizing position learning can be done by using the HDS under these conditions:
Engine running.
N position.
Foot brake on.
Parking brake on.
Shift change actuator position learning has been completed.
NOTE:
The commands are sorted for each gear, and can be shifted by the HDS.
In synchronizing position learning, a failure once is considered as fail.
When performed together with shift change actuator position learning, learning values for both processes are stored
in the EEPROM.
Clutch Contact Point 1·2 Learning

The clutch actuator automatically operates, learns the initial torque application on the clutch disc, and stores the learning
value into the TCM.
‘‘1'' means that the clutch actuator operated once and has learned the temporary value; ‘‘2'' means that the clutch actuator
operated twice and has done accurate learning. The learning value is stored in the TCM.
The clutch contact position 1·2 learning is required after these maintenance operations:
Removal/installation the slave cylinder.
Replace the fly wheel.
Clutch contact position 1 and 2 learning can be done by using the HDS under these conditions:
Engine running.
N position.
Foot brake on.
Parking brake on.
After the engine has warmed up (Engine torque is stable).
NOTE:
The trigger has been set, and the function starts to operate when the shifter is changed from N to D.
Perform the learning of clutch contact Position 1 and 2 in succession.
If this learning process is not completed, the vehicle cannot be driven.
Clutch Friction Learning

The HDS stores the initial values specified for a certain model into the TCM.
Also, the HDS commands to increase the learning speed and perform driving test, and sends the frictional coefficient
adjustment of the initial value to the TCM.
The clutch friction learning is required after these maintenance operations:
The clutch friction learning can be done by using the HDS under the these conditions:
Clutch contact position 2 learning has been completed.
With the road surface resistance acting, rotate the wheels of the vehicle, and apply 1st gear until 6th gear.
NOTE:
Since there is no driving load during lift-up, correct adjustment cannot be achieved, thus connect the HDS and
perform the driving test.
In the Driving Test Mode, the specialized Shift Pattern and Auto does not perform downshift.
Clutch Contact Position 3 Learning

After the coefficient of friction is input during the clutch friction learning, the procedure is done in the same manner as in
clutch contact position 2 and the final learning is performed and stored in the TCM.
The clutch contact position learning is required after these maintenance operations:
Removal/installation the slave cylinder.*1
Removal/installation the transmission.*1
Disassembly/reassembly the transmission.*1
The clutch contact position 3 learning can be done by using the HDS under these conditions:
Engine running.
N position.
Foot brake on.
Parking brake on.
After the engine has warmed up (Engine torque is stable).
NOTE:
The trigger has been set, and the function starts to operate when the shifter is changed from N to D.
Driving Test is not needed when performing the maintenance for*1, so perform clutch contact position 1, 2, and 3
learning in succession.
i-SHIFT Clutch Actuator/TCM Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch body.
4. Remove the battery harness clamps (A), then release the lock and remove the clutch actuator connector (B).
5. Remove the battery base bolts (C) and the reservoir tube (D), then remove the battery base (E).
6. Remove the bolts (A) from the slave cylinder (B) so as not to bend the clutch line.
7. Remove the clutch reservoir tank (A) from the bulkhead (B).
NOTE:
Do not spill brake fluid from the reservoir tank.
When remove the reservoir tank, fix the reservoir tank by hand.
8. Disconnect the clutch actuator connector (A) and the ground cable (B).
9. Release the lock and remove the transmission shift change actuator connector (A), then remove the transmission
shift change actuator harness cover (B) and the harness clip (C).
10. Disconnect the transmission shift change actuator connector (A).

11. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
13. Loosen the bolts (A), then remove the clutch actuator (B) with the clutch pipe comp (C) and the clutch fluid tube
assembly (D).
14. Install the clutch actuator in the reverse order of removal.
17. Do the i-SHIFT system learning (dynamic mode).
i-SHIFT Clutch Fluid Tube Assembly Replacement
NOTE:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off
3. Disconnect the clutch fluid tube (A) from the clutch actuator (B). Plug the end of the clutch fluid with a shop towel
to prevent brake fluid from coming out.
4. Lower the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
5. Remove the clutch reservoir tank (A) from the bulkhead (B), then remove the reservoir tube (C) from the clips (D).
Replace to the new clutch fluid tube assembly.
6. Install the clutch reservoir tank (A) on the bulkhead (B), then install the reservoir tube (C), from the clips (D).
NOTE:
Make a mark (E) on this side and insert the tube into the clip.
When install the reservoir tank, fix the reservoir tank by hand.
8. Connect the clutch fluid tube (A) on to the clutch actuator (B).
NOTE:
Match the mark of tube (C) with the mark of grommet (D).
Install the tube till the mark is matched to the protrusion of tube.
Application of oil is not allowed.
i-SHIFT Clutch Pipe Assembly Replacement
NOTE:
Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surface.
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off
1. Remove the slave cylinder (A) from the transmission housing (B), so as not to bend the clutch line.
4. Remove the clip (A) then Disconnect the clutch pipe comp (B) from the clutch actuator (C). Plug the end of the
clutch line with a shop towel to prevent brake fluid from coming out.
5. Connect the clutch pipe comp (A) with the new O-ring (B) then install the clip (C) from the clutch actuator (D).
NOTE:
No clip protrude after install.
Confirm the connector being set certainly.
7. Lower the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
8. Pull the boot (A) back, and apply grease to the boot and slave cylinder rod (B). Reinstall the boot.
9. Apply a light coat of molybdenum grease to the tip of the push rod the slave cylinder and the release fork.
10. Install the slave cylinder (C) on the transmission housing (D).
i-SHIFT Gear Shift Control Module Replacement
NOTE: LHD model is shown, RHD model is similar.
2. Disconnect the connector (A), then remove the gear shift control module (B).
NOTE: If the gear shift control module needs to be replaced, remove the shift lever knob (C) from the gear shift
control module.
3. Install the gear shift control module (A), then connect the connector (B).
NOTE: If the gear shift control module was replaced, install the shift lever knob (C) to the gear shift control module
(turn the shift lever knob clockwise for 11 to 13 times, and make sure the shift pattern on the knob is at the right
place).
Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch) Circuit Troubleshooting
before doing repair or service.
2. Check for continuity between steering switch harness 20P connector terminals No. 8 and No. 12 while pressing
paddle shifter − (downshift switch) and when the switch is released.
Is there continuity while pressing paddle shifter − (downshift switch) and no continuity when the switch released?
NO - Go to Step 3 .
3. Disconnect the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) connector.
4. Check for continuity between paddle shifter − (downshift switch) connector terminals while pressing the switch and
when the switch is released.
Is there continuity while pressing the switch and no continuity when the switch released?
NO - Replace the paddle shifter − (downshift switch).
6. Check for continuity cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 5 and gear shift control
module 12P connector terminal No. 1.■
NO - Go to Step 8 .
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and shift to the A position.
9. Measure voltage between cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 2 and No. 5.
Is there battery voltage in neutral position and no voltage while pressing shift − (minus) switch?
12. Disconnect gear shift control module 12P connector.
13. Check for continuity between gear shift control module 12P connector terminal No. 1 and cable reel 20P connector
terminal No. 5.
YES - Check for loose or poor connections at gear shift control module 12P connector terminal No. 1. If the
connection is OK, substitute a known-good gear shift control module and recheck.■
NO - Repair open in the wire between gear shift control module 12P connector terminal No. 1 and cable reel
20P connector.■
Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch) Test
2. Check the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) for continuity between steering switch harness 20P connector
terminals No. 8 and No. 12.
There should be continuity while pressing the paddle shifter − (downshift switch), and no continuity when the switch
is released.
3. Paddle shifter − (downshift switch) test has finished if the test result is OK.
If the switch works incorrectly at the 20P connector, test the switch at the switch connector.
4. Remove paddle shifter − (downshift switch) connector from its holder, and disconnect the connector.
5. Check the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) for continuity between the switch connector terminals while pressing
the switch and when the switch is released.
There should be continuity while pressing the switch, and no continuity when the switch is released.
6. Replace the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) if the switch works incorrectly.
7. Replace the steering switch harness if the switch is OK.
Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch) Replacement
3. Remove the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) connector (A) from its holder, and disconnect the connector.
4. Remove the screws (B) securing the paddle shifter − (C), remove the paddle shifter −, and replace it with a new
one.
5. Install the new paddle shifter − on the steering wheel, and secure it with the screws.
6. Connect the paddle shifter − connector securely, and install the connector in the connector holder.
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch) Circuit Troubleshooting
before doing repair or service.
2. Check for continuity between steering switch harness 20P connector terminals No. 7 and No. 12 while pressing
paddle shifter + (upshift switch) and when the switch is released.
Is there continuity while pressing paddle shifter + (upshift switch) and no continuity when the switch released?
NO - Go to Step 3 .
3. Disconnect the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) connector.
4. Check for continuity between paddle shifter + (upshift switch) connector terminals while pressing the switch and
when the switch is released.
Is there continuity while pressing the switch and no continuity when the switch released?
NO - Replace the paddle shifter + (upshift switch).
6. Check for continuity cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 6 and gear shift control
module 12P connector terminal No. 7.■
NO - Go to Step 8 .
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and shift to the A position.
9. Measure voltage between cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 2 and No. 6.
Is there about 5 V in neutral position and no voltage while pressing paddle shifter + (upshift switch)?
12. Disconnect gear shift control module 12P connector.
13. Check for continuity between gear shift control module 12P connector terminal No. 7 and cable reel 20P connector
terminal No. 6.
YES - Check for loose or poor connections at gear shift control module 12P connector terminal No. 7 If the
connection is OK, substitute a known-good gear shift control module and recheck.■
NO - Repair open in the wire between gear shift control module 12P connector terminal No. 7 and cable reel
20P connector.■
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch) Test
2. Check the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) for continuity between steering switch harness 20P connector terminals
No. 7 and No. 12.
There should be continuity while pressing the paddle shifter + (upshift switch), and no continuity when the switch is
released.
3. Paddle shifter + (upshift switch) test has finished if the test result is OK.
If the switch works incorrectly at the 20P connector, test the switch at the switch connector.
4. Remove paddle shifter + (upshift switch) connector from its holder, and disconnect the connector.
5. Check the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) for continuity between the switch connector terminals while pressing the
switch and when the switch is released.
There should be continuity while pressing the switch, and no continuity when the switch is released.
6. Replace the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) if the switch works incorrectly.
7. Replace the steering switch harness if the switch is OK.
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch) Replacement
3. Remove the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) connector (A) from its holder, and disconnect the connector.
4. Remove the screws (B) securing the paddle shifter + (C), remove the paddle shifter +, and replace it with a new
one.
5. Install the new paddle shifter + on the steering wheel, and secure it with the screws.
6. Connect the paddle shifter + connector securely, and install the connector in the connector holder.
i-SHIFT Transmission Shift Change Actuator Replacement
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surface.
3. Remove the transmission shift change actuator harness cover (A) and the harness clip (B).
4. Disconnect the transmission shift change actuator connectors (A). Remove the cotter pin (B) and select wire
washer (C).
5. Disconnect the select actuator rod (D) and shift actuator rod (E) with joint covers (F) from the change lever
assembly (G).
6. Remove the transmission shift change actuator (H), then remove the dowel pins (I) from the top of the transmission
housing.
7. Install the transmission shift change actuator in the reverse order of removal with the new cotter pin.
NOTE:
Be careful of assemble direction of joint cover.
Application of grease is not allowed at installation to the rods.
Install the select wire washer certainly.
TCM Replacement
NOTE:
1. Remove the clutch actuator from the body.
2. Remove the clip (A) then remove the clutch pipe comp (B) and the clutch fluid tube assembly (C) from the clutch
actuator (D). Plug the end of the clutch line with a shop towel to prevent brake fluid from coming out.
3. Remove the clutch actuator cover cap (A) and bolt (B). Remove the harness clips (C).
4. Remove the clutch actuator (D) from the clutch actuator bracket (E).
5. Remove the bolts (A) then remove the clutch actuator cover (B) from the clutch actuator case (C). Remove the
clutch actuator case with the clutch actuator collar (D) and the O-ring (E) from the clutch actuator (F).
NOTE: Do not damage the wire harness.
6. Pull the fixtures (A) then disconnect the clutch actuator connectors (B). Remove the clutch actuator grommet (C)
from the clutch actuator (D). Replace to the new clutch actuator.
7. Connect the clutch actuator connectors (A) on the new clutch actuator (B), then fix the connectors by pushing the
fixtures (C). Install the clutch actuator grommet (D) on the clutch actuator.
8. Install the clutch actuator (A) on the clutch actuator case (B) with the clutch actuator collar (C) and the O-ring (D).
NOTE:
Do not damage the wire harness.
Match the mark of harness grommet with the mark of case at the angle shown.
Install the O-ring in the ditch of the collar certainly.
9. Install the clutch actuator cover (E) on the clutch actuator case.
10. Install the clutch actuator (A) from the clutch actuator bracket (B).
11. Install the bolt (C) and new clutch actuator cover cap (D). Install the harness clips (E).
12. Install the clutch fluid tube assembly (A) to the clutch actuator (B). Install the clutch pipe comp (C) with the new O-
ring (D) then install the clip (E) to the clutch actuator.
NOTE:
Match the mark of tube (F) with the mark of grommet (G).
Install the tube till the mark is matched to the protrusion of tube.
No clip protrude after install.
Confirm the connector being set certainly.
Apply industrial alcohol to the clutch tube assembly is allowed of installation.
13. Install the clutch actuator on the body.
15. Do the i-SHIFT system learning (dynamic mode).
M/T Assembly Removal
AAR-T-1256-J00
1. Secure the hood in the wide open position (support rod in the lower hole).
3. Remove the cowl covers and hood hinge cover.
4. Remove the wiper motor.
5. Remove under-cowl panel.
8. Remove the clutch actuator (TCM).
9. Remove the transmission shift change actuator.
10. Remove the air cleaner stay.
11. Disconnect the back-up light switch connector (A), then remove the harness clips (B).
12. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) connector (A), then remove the harness clamp bracket (B).
13. Remove the purge control SOL.V. hose (A). Install the hanger plate (B) to the air cleaner housing mounting bracket
(C) with the 8 x 1.25 mm bolt (D).
14. Install the engine support hanger (A) with the hook (B) to the vehicle. Tighten the wing nut (C) by hand, and lift and
support the engine.
15. Remove the one upper transmission mounting bolt.
16. Remove the ground cable (A), transmission mount nuts (B), and transmission mount bolts (C), from the
transmission bracket (D).
19. Drain the transmission fluid. Reinstall the drain plug using a new sealing washer.
20. Remove the right and left driveshafts.
21. Remove the heat cover.
22. Remove the clutch pipe stay.
23. Remove the transmission mount bracket (A).

NOTE: The bracket is used in the production process, not necessary to be reinstalled.
24. Remove the clutch case cover.

25. Securely support the transmission with a transmission jack.
26. Remove the torque rod.
27. Remove the torque rod bracket.
28. Remove the lower transmission mounting bolts.

29. Pull the transmission away from the engine until the transmission mainshaft clears the clutch pressure plate.
30. Slowly lower the transmission. Check once again that all hoses and electrical wiring are disconnected and free
from the transmission then lower it completely. Remove the two dowel pins.
M/T Assembly Installation
AAR-T-1256-J00
1. Make sure two dowel pins (A) are installed in prescribed hole on the engine block as shown.
2. Check the release bearing, and reinstall the release bearing and the release fork with applying appropriate grease.
3. Place the transmission on the transmission jack, and raise it to the engine unit level.
4. Install the lower transmission mounting bolts.
5. Install the torque rod bracket with new bolt (A) and bolts (B).
6. Loosely install the torque rod new bolt (A), new nut (B) and new bolt (C), then remove the transmission jack.
7. Install the clutch case cover.
8. Install the clutch pipe stay.
9. Install the heat cover.

10. Install the right and left driveshafts.
12. Install the transmission mount bracket (A), and loosely tighten the new transmission mount bracket mounting bolts
and nuts (B).
14. Loosen the wing nut (A). Remove the hook (B) and engine support hanger (C) from the vehicle.
15. Remove the hanger plate (A) to the air cleaner housing mounting bracket (B) with the 8 x 1.25 mm bolt (C). Install
the purge control SOL.V. hose (D).
16. Tighten the transmission mount mounting bolts and nuts in the numbered sequence shown.
17. Tighten the torque rod with the bolts and nut to the specified torque value.
18. Install the one upper transmission mounting bolts.
19. Connect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) connector (A), then install the harness clamp bracket (B).
20. Connect the back-up light switch connector (A), then install the harness clips (B).
21. Install the air cleaner stay.
22. Install the transmission shift change actuator.
23. Install the clutch actuator (TCM).
25. Refill the transmission fluid to the proper level.
28. Install the wiper motor.
29. Install the hood hinge cover and cowl cover.
32. Check the clutch operation.
33. Check the wheel alignment and adjust it if necessary.
34. Test-driver the vehicle.
M/T Assembly Disassembly
Exploded View - Clutch Housing
Exploded View - Transmission Housing

NOTE: Place the clutch housing on two pieces of wood thick enough to keep the mainshaft from hitting the workbench.
1. Remove the detent bolts (A), springs (B), steel balls (C).
2. Remove the 20 mm bolt (D) and 20 mm washer (E).
3. Remove the change lever assembly (A) and the 8 x 10 mm dowel pins (B).
4. Remove the transmission hanger (A) and back-up light switch (B).
5. Remove the drain plug (A), filler plug (B) and the speed sensor (C), then remove the O-ring (D).
6. Remove the 8 mm flange bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps.
7. Remove the 32 mm sealing cap (A).

8. Expand the 69 mm snap ring (B) on the countershaft ball bearing, and remove it from the groove using a pair of
snap ring pliers.
9. Remove the transmission housing (C) and 14 x 20 mm dowel pins (D).
10. Remove the reverse shift fork.
11. Remove the reverse idler gear (A) and reverse gear shaft (B).
12. Apply tape to the mainshaft splines to protect the seal, then remove the mainshaft assembly (A) and countershaft
assembly (B) with the shift forks (C) from the clutch housing (D).
13. Remove the 36 mm spring washer (E) and 26 mm washer (F).
14. Remove the differential assembly (A) and magnet (B).
15. Remove the oil gutter plate (A), 52 x 62 mm shim (B), and oil guide plate M.
M/T Assembly Reassembly
NOTE: Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact surfaces.
1. Install the magnet (A) and differential assembly (B).
2. Install the 36 mm spring washer (A) and 26 mm washer (B) over the ball bearing (C). Note the installation direction
of the spring washer.
3. Apply tape on the mainshaft spline (D) to protect the seal. Install the mainshaft and countershaft (E) into the shift
forks (F), and install them as an assembly.
4. Install the reverse idler gear (A) and the reverse gear shaft (B).
5. Install the reverse shift fork.
6. Select the proper size 52 x 62 mm shim (A) according to the measurements made during the mainshaft thrust
clearance adjustment. Install the oil gutter plate (B), oil guide plate M, and the 52 x 62 mm shim into the
transmission housing (C).
7. Remove any dirt and oil from the transmission housing sealing surface. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08C70-K0234M,
08C70-K0334M, or 08C70-X0331S) to the sealing surface. Make sure you seal the entire circumference of the bolt
holes to prevent oil leakage.
NOTE: Do not install components if too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket. Instead, remove the
old residue and reapply the liquid gasket.
8. Install the 14 x 20 mm dowel pins (A).

9. Place the transmission housing over the clutch housing, being careful to line up the shafts.
10. Lower the transmission housing the rest of the way as you expand the 69 mm snap ring (B). Release the snap ring
so it seats in the groove of the countershaft bearing.
11. Check that the 69 mm snap ring is securely seated in the groove of the countershaft bearing.
Dimension (1) as installed:
3.3−6.5 mm (0.13−0.25 in.)
12. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08C70-K0234M, 08C70-K0334M, or 08C70-X0331S) to the threads of the 32 mm sealing
cap (C), and install it on the transmission housing.
13. Install the 8 mm flange bolts finger-tight.

14. Tighten the 8 mm flange bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps.
Specified Torque: 8 x 1.25 mm 27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
15. Remove any dirt and oil from the change lever cover sealing surface. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08C70-K0234M,
08C70-K0334M, or 08C70-X0331S) to the sealing surface.
16. Install the 8 x 14 mm dowel pins (A), and change lever assembly (B).
17. Install the drain plug (A), filler plug (B), speed sensor (C), and new O-ring (D).
18. Install the detent bolts (A), the springs, and the steel balls with new washers.
19. Install the 20 mm bolt (B) and a new 20 mm washer (C).
20. Install the new washer (A), the back-up light switch (B), and the transmission hanger (C).
Back-up Light Switch Test
1. Disconnect the back-up light switch 2P connector (A).
2. Check for continuity between the back-up light switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be
continuity when the shift lever is in reverse. If the result is faulty, go to Step 3 .
3. Remove the back-up light switch (A). Check for continuity between the back-up light switch 2P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2. There should be continuity when the switch end (B) is pressed, and no continuity when the switch
end is released. If the result is faulty, replace the back-up light switch. If the switch is OK, check the reverse shift
piece in the transmission.
4. Install the removed or the new back-up light switch and new washer.
5. Connect the back-up light switch 2P connector.
M/T Clutch Housing Countershaft Bearing Replacement
Adjustable bearing remover head, 20−40 mm
07JAC-PH80100
Bearing remover shaft

07JAC-PH80200
Slide hammer weight
07741-0010201

07JAD-PL90100
1. Remove the needle bearing (A) using the special tool, then remove the oil gauge plate C.
2. Position the oil guide plate C and new needle bearing (A) in the bore of the clutch housing (B).
3. Install the needle bearing using the special tools.
M/T Clutch Housing Differential Thrust Clearance Adjustment
Inner driver handle, 40 mm
07746-0030100
1. Install the 80 mm shim that's the same size as the one you removed.
2. Install the differential assembly into the clutch housing.

3. Install the transmission housing onto the clutch housing, then tighten the 8 mm flange bolts in a crisscross pattern
in several steps.
Specified Torque: 8 x 1.25 mm 27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
4. Use the special tool to bottom the differential assembly in the clutch housing.
5. Measure clearance between 80 mm shim and bearing outer race in transmission housing.
Standard: 0.01−0.10 mm (0.0004−0.0039 in.)
6. If the clearance is more than the standard, select a new shim from the following table. If the clearance measured in
step 5 is within the standard, go to Step 9 .
80 mm Shim
Type Part Number Thickness
A 41441-PL3-B00 1.00 mm (0.039 in.)
B 41442-PL3-B00 1.10 mm (0.043 in.)
C 41443-PL3-B00 1.20 mm (0.047 in.)
D 41444-PL3-B00 1.30 mm (0.051 in.)
E 41445-PL3-B00 1.40 mm (0.055 in.)
F 41446-PL3-B00 1.50 mm (0.059 in.)
G 41447-PL3-B00 1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
H 41448-PL3-B00 1.70 mm (0.067 in.)
J 41449-PL3-B00 1.80 mm (0.071 in.)
K 41450-PL3-B00 1.05 mm (0.041 in.)
L 41451-PL3-B00 1.15 mm (0.045 in.)
M 41452-PL3-B00 1.25 mm (0.049 in.)
N 41453-PL3-B00 1.35 mm (0.053 in.)
P 41454-PL3-B00 1.45 mm (0.057 in.)
Q 41455-PL3-B00 1.55 mm (0.061 in.)
R 41456-PL3-B00 1.65 mm (0.065 in.)
S 41457-PL3-B00 1.75 mm (0.069 in.)
7. Remove the bolts and transmission housing.

8. Replace the thrust shim selected in step 6, then recheck the clearance.
9. Reinstall the transmission.
Reverse idler gear
Reverse idler I.D. 18.016−18.043 mm (0.7093−0.7104 in.) 18.08 mm (0.712 in.)
gear Gear-to-reverse gear shaft clearance 0.032−0.077 mm (0.0013−0.003 in.) 0.14 mm (0.006 in.)
M/T Clutch Housing Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
07JAC-PH80100

07JAC-PH80200
Slide hammer weight
07741-0010201

07749-0010000

07746-0010300
07746-0010400
1. Remove the ball bearing (A) from the clutch housing (B) using the special tool.
2. Remove the oil seal (A) from the clutch side. Be careful when removing the seal so the clutch housing is not
damaged.
3. Drive the new oil seal in from the transmission side using the special tools.
4. Drive the new ball bearing in from the transmission side using the special tools.
M/T Clutch Housing Mainshaft Thrust Clearance Adjustment
Catch adapter
07GAJ-PG20110
Base collar
07GAJ-PG20120
Base adapter
07GAJ-PG20130
Magnet stand base

07979-PJ40001
1. Remove the 52 x 62 mm shim (A) and oil guide plate M from the transmission housing (B).
2. Thoroughly clean the spring washer (A) and washer (B) before installing them on the ball bearing (C). Note the
installation direction of the spring washer.
3. Install the 3rd/4th synchro hub, the distance collar, the 5th synchro hub, the distance collar, and ball bearing on the
mainshaft.
NOTE: Refer to the mainshaft reassembly Exploded View.
4. Install the mainshaft in the clutch housing.
5. Place the transmission housing over the mainshaft and onto the clutch housing.
6. Secure the clutch and transmission housings with several 8 mm bolts.
NOTE: It is not necessary to use sealing agent between the housings for this procedure.
7. Light tap the mainshaft with a plastic hammer.
8. Attach the special tools to the mainshaft as follows:

Back-out the catch adapter bolt (A) and loosen the two hex bolts (B).
Fit the holder over the mainshaft so its lip is toward the transmission.
Align the catch adapter lip around the groove at the inside of the mainshaft splines, then tighten the hex
bolts.
9. Seat the mainshaft fully by tapping its end with a plastic hammer.
10. Thread the catch adapter bolt in until it just contacts the wide surface of the base adapter.
11. Zero a dial gauge (A) on the end of the mainshaft.
12. Turn the catch adapter bolt (B) clockwise; stop turning when the dial gauge (A) has reached its maximum
movement. The reading on the dial gauge is the amount of mainshaft thrust clearance.
NOTE: Do not turn the catch adapter bolt more than 60 degrees after the needle of the dial gauge stop moving.
Applying more pressure with the catch adapter bolt could damage the transmission.
13. If the reading is with in the standard, the clearance is correct. If the reading is not within the standards, select the
appropriate shim needed from the table, and recheck the thrust clearance.
Standard: 0.11−0.18 mm (0.004−0.007 in.)
(Example)
Measure reading: 1.93 mm (0.0759 in.)
Subtract the middle of the clearance standard 0.14 mm (0.0055 in.) from the total clearance measurement.
1.93 − 0.14 = 1.79 mm (0.0705 in.)
Select the shim closest to the amount calculated, for example the 1.78 mm (0.0701 in.) shim.
14. With oil guide plate M and the appropriate size shim installed in the transmission housing, check the thrust
clearance again to verify the clearance is within the standard.
52 x 62 mm Shim
A 23931-PZ9-000 0.85 mm (0.0335 in.)
B 23932-PZ9-000 0.88 mm (0.0346 in.)
C 23933-PZ9-000 0.91 mm (0.0358 in.)
D 23934-PZ9-000 0.94 mm (0.0370 in.)
E 23935-PZ9-000 0.97 mm (0.0382 in.)
F 23936-PZ9-000 1.00 mm (0.0394 in.)
G 23937-PZ9-000 1.03 mm (0.0406 in.)
H 23938-PZ9-000 1.06 mm (0.0417 in.)
I 23939-PZ9-000 1.09 mm (0.0429 in.)
J 23940-PZ9-000 1.12 mm (0.0441 in.)
K 23941-PZ9-000 1.15 mm (0.0453 in.)
L 23942-PZ9-000 1.18 mm (0.0465 in.)
M 23943-PZ9-000 1.21 mm (0.0476 in.)
N 23944-PZ9-000 1.24 mm (0.0488 in.)
O 23945-PZ9-000 1.27 mm (0.0500 in.)
P 23946-PZ9-000 1.30 mm (0.0512 in.)
Q 23947-PZ9-000 1.33 mm (0.0524 in.)
R 23948-PZ9-000 1.36 mm (0.0535 in.)
S 23949-PZ9-000 1.39 mm (0.0547 in.)
T 23950-PZ9-000 1.42 mm (0.0559 in.)
U 23951-PZ9-000 1.45 mm (0.0571 in.)
V 23952-PZ9-000 1.48 mm (0.0583 in.)
W 23953-PZ9-000 1.51 mm (0.0594 in.)
X 23954-PZ9-000 1.54 mm (0.0606 in.)
Y 23955-PZ9-000 1.57 mm (0.0618 in.)
Z 23956-PZ9-000 1.60 mm (0.0630 in.)
AA 23957-PZ9-000 1.63 mm (0.0642 in.)
AB 23958-PZ9-000 1.66 mm (0.0654 in.)
AC 23959-PZ9-000 1.69 mm (0.0665 in.)
AD 23960-PZ9-000 1.72 mm (0.0677 in.)
AE 23987-PZ9-000 1.75 mm (0.0689 in.)
AF 23988-PZ9-000 1.78 mm (0.0701 in.)
AG 23989-PZ9-000 1.81 mm (0.0713 in.)
AH 23990-PZ9-000 1.84 mm (0.0724 in.)
AI 23991-PZ9-000 1.87 mm (0.0736 in.)
AJ 23992-PZ9-000 1.90 mm (0.0748 in.)
AK 23993-PZ9-000 1.93 mm (0.0760 in.)
AL 23994-PZ9-000 1.96 mm (0.0772 in.)
AM 23995-PZ9-000 1.99 mm (0.0783 in.)
AN 23996-PZ9-000 2.02 mm (0.0795 in.)
AO 23997-PZ9-000 2.05 mm (0.0807 in.)
AP 23998-PZ9-000 2.08 mm (0.0819 in.)
AQ 23999-PZ9-000 2.11 mm (0.0831 in.)
M/T Countershaft Disassembly
1. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a bench vise with wood blocks.
2. Remove the special bolt (left-hand threads).
3. Support ball bearing (A) 6th gear (B) on steel blocks (C), then use a press (D) and an attachment (E) to press the
countershaft out of the ball bearing.
4. Remove the 32 mm shim and distance collar.
5. Support 4th gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the countershaft (E)
out of the 5th gear.
6. Support 2nd gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the countershaft (E)
out of 3rd gear.
7. Support 1st gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the countershaft (E)
out of the 1st/2nd synchro.
M/T Countershaft Reassembly
Exploded View
07746-0030100

07746-0030300
1. Clean all parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to all contact surfaces.
2. Install the distance collar, the needle bearing, and 1st gear onto the countershaft.
3. Install the double cone synchro assembly (A) by aligning the synchro cone fingers (B) with the grooves in 1st gear
(C), then install the synchro spring (D).
4. Install the 1st/2nd synchro hub (A) by aligning the synchro cone fingers (B) with the grooves in the 1st/2nd synchro
hub (C).
5. Install the reverse gear.
6. Install the synchro spring (A).

7. Install the double cone synchro assembly (B) by aligning the synchro cone fingers (C) with the grooves in the
1st/2nd synchro hub (D).
8. Install the distance collar and needle bearing.
9. Install 2nd gear (A) by aligning the synchro cone fingers (B) with the grooves in 2nd gear (C).
10. Support the countershaft (A) on the steel blocks, then install 3rd gear (B) using the special tool and a press (C). Do
not exceed the maximum pressure.
11. Install the 4th gear (A) using the special tool and a press (B). Do not exceed the maximum pressure.
12. Install the 5th gear (A) using the special tool and a press (B). Do not exceed the maximum pressure.
13. Install 6th gear (A) using the special tools and a press (B). Do not exceed the maximum pressure.
14. Install the 32 mm shim and the old ball bearing (A) using the special tools and a press.
15. Measure the clearance between the old bearing (A) and the 32 mm shim (B) with a feeler gauge (C).
Standard: 0.04−0.10 mm (0.0016−0.0039 in.)
16. If the clearance is more than the standard, select a new shim from the following table. If the clearance measured in
Step 17 is within the standard, replace only the new ball bearing.
32 mm Shim
A 23971-RPF-000 1.56 mm (0.061 in.)
B 23972-RPF-000 1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
C 23973-RPF-000 1.64 mm (0.065 in.)
D 23974-RPF-000 1.68 mm (0.066 in.)
E 23975-RPF-000 1.72 mm (0.068 in.)
F 23976-RPF-000 1.76 mm (0.069 in.)
G 23977-RPF-000 1.80 mm (0.071 in.)
H 23978-RPF-000 1.84 mm (0.072 in.)
J 23979-RPF-000 1.88 mm (0.074 in.)
K 23980-RPF-000 1.92 mm (0.076 in.)
L 23981-RPF-000 1.96 mm (0.077 in.)
M 23982-RPF-000 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
N 23983-RPF-000 2.04 mm (0.080 in.)
P 23984-RPF-000 2.08 mm (0.082 in.)
Q 23985-RPF-000 2.12 mm (0.083 in.)
R 23986-RPF-000 2.16 mm (0.085 in.)
S 23987-RPF-000 2.20 mm (0.087 in.)
T 23988-RPF-000 2.24 mm (0.088 in.)
U 23989-RPF-000 2.28 mm (0.090 in.)
V 23990-RPF-000 2.32 mm (0.091 in.)
17. Support 6th gear (A) on steel blocks (B) then use a press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the countershaft out
of the ball bearing.
18. If necessary, install the 32 mm shim selected in step 15, then recheck the clearance.
19. Install 6th gear (A) using the special tools and a press (B). Do not exceed the maximum pressure.
20. Install the new ball bearing (A) using the special tools and a press.
21. Tighten the new special bolt (A) (left-hand threads).
M/T Countershaft Assembly Clearance Inspection
1. Measure the clearance between the 1st gear (A) and the distance collar (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the clearance
is more than the service limit, go to Step 2 .
Standard: 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.)
2. Measure the thickness of the distance collar.

If the thickness is not within than the standard, replace the distance collar.
If the thickness is within the standard, go to Step 3 .
Standard: 21.53−21.58 mm (0.848−0.850 in.)
3. Measure the thickness of the 1st gear.

If the thickness is less than the standard, replace 1st gear.
If the thickness is within the standard, replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub and revers gear as a set.
Standard: 21.42−21.47 mm (0.843−0.845 in.)
4. Measure the clearance between the 2nd gear (A) and 3rd gear (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the clearance is more
than the service limit, go to Step 5 .
Standard: 0.06−0.14 mm (0.02−0.006 in.)

If the thickness is not within the standard, replace the distance collar.
Standard: 26.53−26.56 mm (1.044−1.046 in.)
6. Measure the thickness of the 2nd gear.

If the thickness is less than the standard, replace 2nd gear.
If the thickness is within the standard, replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub and revers gear as a set.
Standard: 26.42−26.47 mm (1.040−1.042 in.)
Countershaft
Countershaft Diameter of ball bearing contact area 26.020−26.033 mm (1.0244−1.0249 in.) 25.97 mm (1.022 in.)
32 mm shim-to-bearing inner race 0.04−0.10 mm (0.0016−0.0039 in.) Adjust
clearance
M/T Countershaft Inspection
1. Inspect the gear surface and bearing surface for wear and damage, then measure the countershaft at points A, B,
and C. If any part of the countershaft is less than the service limit, replace it with a new one.
Standard:
A Ball Bearing Surface (Transmission Housing Side):
26.020−26.033 mm (1.0244−1.0249 in.)
B Distance Collar Surface:
38.987−39.000 mm (1.5349−1.5354 in.)
C Needle Bearing Surface (Clutch Housing Side):
34.000−34.015 mm (1.3386−1.3392 in.)
Service Limit:
A: 25.97 mm (1.022 in.)
B: 38.94 mm (1.533 in.)
C: 33.95 mm (1.337 in.)
2. Inspect the runout by supporting both ends of the countershaft. Rotate the countershaft two complete revolutions
when measuring the runout. If the runout exceeds the service limit, replace the countershaft with a new one.
Standard: 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.
Thickness 21.42−21.47 mm (0.843−0.845 in.) ———
2nd gear End play 0.06−0.14 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) 0.23 mm (0.009 in.)
Thickness 26.42−26.47 mm (1.040−1.042 in.) ———
2nd gear O.D. 44.489−44.5 mm (1.7515−1.7520 in.) 44.44 mm (1.750 in.)
M/T Change Lever Assembly Disassembly/Reassembly
Exploded View
07746-0010700

07749-0010000
1. Remove the breather cap (A), detent bolt (B), washer (C), spring (D), and steel ball (E). Remove the detent bolt (F).
2. Remove the special bolt (A) and spring washer (B).

3. Remove the change lever (C) and shift arm (D) from the shift arm cover (E).
4. Remove the oil seal (F).
NOTE: When installing, turn the alloy surface of the thrust washer to the shift arm cover side.
5. Remove the spring pins (A) from the select lever (B).
NOTE: Install the spring pins into the interlock with the groove of the spring pins at the angle shown.
6. Remove the select lever from the shift arm cover (C), then remove the shift piece (D) and the interlock (E).
7. Remove the oil seal (F).
9. Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surface. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08C70-K0234M, 08C70-K0334M, or
08C70-X0331S) to the sealing surface.
10. Install the oil seal (A) using the special tools.
Inter lock
Inter lock I.D. 14.000−14.077 mm (0.5512−0.5542 in.) ———
Inter lock to select lever 0.032−0.136 mm (0.0013−0.0054 in.) ———
Select lever
Select lever O.D. 13.941−13.968 mm (0.5489−0.5499 in.) ———
Shift arm cover clearance 0.032−0.127 mm (0.0013−0.0050 in.) ———
M/T Reverse Shift Fork Clearance Inspection
1. Measure the clearance between the reverse idler gear (A) and the reverse shift fork (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the
clearance is more than the service limit, go to Step 2 .
Standard: 0.20−0.60 mm (0.007−0.024 in.)
2. Measure the width of the reverse shift fork.

If distance is not within the standard, replace the reverse shift fork.
If distance is within the standard, replace the reverse gear.
Standard: 14.7−14.9 mm (0.527−0.587 in.)
Reverse shift fork
Reverse shift Finger width 14.7−14.9 mm (0.527−0.587 in.) ———
fork Fork-to-reverse idler gear clearance 0.20−0.60 mm (0.007−0.024 in.) 1.2 mm (0.047 in.)
M/T Shift Forks Clearance Inspection
NOTE: The synchro sleeve and synchro hub should be replaced as a set.
1. Measure the clearance between each shift fork (A) and its matching synchro sleeve (B). If the clearance exceeds
the service limit, go to Step 2 .
Standard: 0.35−0.65 mm (0.014−0.026 in.)
2. Measure the thickness of the shift fork fingers.

If the thickness is not within the standard, replace the shift fork.
If the thickness is within the standard, replace the synchro sleeve.
Standard:
1st/2nd shift fork:
6.7−6.9 mm (0.26−0.27 in.)
3rd/4th, 5th/6th shift fork:
7.4−7.6 mm (0.29−0.30 in.)
3. Measure the clearance between the shift fork (A) and the shift piece (B). If the clearance exceeds the service limit,
go to Step 4 .
Standard: 0.2−0.5 mm (0.008−0.020 in.)
4. Measure the width of the shift piece.

If the width is not within the standard, replace the shift piece.
If the width is within the standard, replace the shift fork.
Standard: 15.9−16.0 mm (0.626−0.630 in.)
M/T Shift Forks Disassembly/Reassembly
Prior to reassembly, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact parts.
Shift fork
Shift fork Finger thickness 1st-2nd fork 6.7−6.9 mm (0.26−0.27 in.) ———
3rd-4th and 5th- 7.4−7.6 mm (0.29−0.30 in.) ———
6th fork
Shift piece
Shift piece I.D. 14.000−14.068 mm (0.5512−0.5539 in.) ———
Shift-piece-to select lever clearance 0.032−0.127 mm (0.0013−0.0050 in.) ———
Shift fork diameter at contact area 0.2−0.5 mm (0.008−0.020 in.) ———
M/T Shift Arm Clearance Inspection
1. Measure the clearance between the shift arm (A) and shift piece (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the clearance
exceeds the service limit, go to Step 2 .
Standard: 0.20−0.60 mm (0.008−0.024 in.)
2. Measure the diameter of the shift piece.

If the diameter is not within the standard, replace the shift piece.
If the diameter is within the standard, replace the shift arm.
Standard: 16.00−16.20 mm (0.630−0.638 in.)
Shift arm
Shift arm I.D. 14.013−14.058 mm (0.5517−0.5535 in.) ———
Shift piece diameter at contact area 0.20−0.60 mm (0.008−0.024 in.) 0.7 mm (0.028 in.)
Shift arm-to-change lever clearance 0.013−0.085 mm (0.0005−0.0033 in.) ———
M/T Mainshaft Disassembly
1. Support 5th gear (A) on steel blocks, and press the mainshaft out of the 5th/6th synchro hub (B), 6th gear (C) and
ball bearing (D). Use of a jaw-type puller can damage the gear teeth.
2. Support the 3rd gear (A) on steel blocks, and press the mainshaft out of the 3rd/4th synchro hub (B). Use of a jaw-
type puller can damage the gear teeth.
M/T Mainshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
07746-0030100

07746-0030300
1. Clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to all contact surfaces except the 3rd/4th and 5th
synchro hubs.
2. Install the needle bearing and 3rd gear on the mainshaft.
3. Install the 3rd gear synchro ring and synchro spring on the shaft.
4. Install the 3rd/4th synchro hub (A) by aligning the synchro cone fingers (B) with the grooves in 3rd/4th synchro hub
(C).
5. Install the 3rd/4th synchro hub using the special tool.
6. Install the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve (A) by aligning the stops (B) with the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub. After
installing, check the operation of the 3rd/4th synchro hub set.
7. Install the 4th gear synchro spring and ring, 4th gear and needle bearing, the distance collar, and 5th gear and its
needle bearing on the shaft.
8. Install the 5th gear synchro ring and synchro spring on the shaft.
9. Install the 5th/6th synchro hub (A) using the special tool.
10. Install the 5th/6th synchro sleeve.
11. Install the distance collar and the 6th gear.
12. Install the new ball bearing (A) using the special tools.
M/T Mainshaft Assembly Clearance Inspection
NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace the synchro sleeve and hub as a set.
1. Support the bearing inner race with an appropriate sized socket (A), and push down on the mainshaft (B).
2. Measure the clearance between 2nd (C) and 3rd (D) gears with a feeler gauge (E).
If the clearance is more than the service limit, go to Step 3 .
If the clearance is within the service limit, go to Step 4 .
Standard: 0.06−0.21 mm (0.002−0.008 in.)
3. Measure the thickness of 3rd gear.

If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace 3rd gear.
If the thickness is within the service limit, replace the 3rd/4th synchro hub and 3rd/4th synchro sleeve as a
set.
Standard: 27.02−27.07 mm (1.064−1.066 in.)
4. Measure the clearance between 4th gear (A) and the distance collar (B) with a dial indicator (C). If the clearance is
more than the service limit, go to Step 5 .
Standard: 0.06−0.19 mm (0.002−0.007 in.)
5. Measure distance (1) on the distance collar.

If distance (1) is not within the standard, replace the distance collar with a new one.
If distance (1) is within the standard, go to Step 6 .
Standard: 22.53−22.56 mm (0.887−0.888 in.)
6. Measure the thickness of 4th gear.

If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace 4th gear.
If the thickness is within the service limit, replace the 3rd/4th synchro hub and 3rd/4th synchro sleeve as a
set.
Standard: 25.52−25.57 mm (1.005−1.007 in.)
7. Measure the clearance between the distance collar (A) and 5th gear (B) with a dial indicator (C). If the clearance is
Standard: 0.06−0.14 mm (0.002−0.006 in.)

Standard: 22.53−22.56 mm (0.887−0.888 in.)

If the thickness is within the service limit, replace the 5th/6th synchro hub and 5th/6th synchro sleeve as a
set.
Standard: 22.42−22.47 mm (0.883−0.885 in.)
10. Measure the clearance between the 6th gear (A) and angular ball bearing (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the
Standard: 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.)
If the thickness is not within the standard, replace the distance collar.
Standard: 24.03−24.08 mm (0.946−0.948 in.)

If the thickness is within the service limit, replace the 5th/6th synchro hub and 5th/6th synchro sleeve as a
set.
Standard: 23.92−23.97 mm (0.942−0.944 in.)
Mainshaft
Diameter of bushing surface 14.870−14.890 mm (0.5854−0.5862 in.) 14.77 mm (0.5815 in.)
Diameter of distance collar 28.992−29.005 mm (1.1414−1.1419 in.) 28.93 mm (1.139 in.)
Mainshaft 4th/5th gears distance collar
Mainshaft I.D. 29.014−29.024 mm (1.1423−1.1427 in.) 29.03 mm (1.143 in.)
4th/5th gears O.D. 34.989−35.000 mm (1.3775−1.3780 in.) 34.94 mm (1.376 in.)
distance collar Length A 48.97−49.03 mm (1.9279−1.9303 in.) ———
B 22.53−22.56 mm (0.887−0.888 in.) ———
B
Mainshaft 6th gear distance collar
gear distance Length 24.03−24.08 mm (0.946−0.948 in.) ———
collar
M/T Mainshaft Inspection
1. Inspect the gear surface and bearing surface for wear and damage, then measure the mainshaft at points A, B, C,
D, and E. If any part of the mainshaft is less than the service limit, replace it with a new one.
Standard:
A Ball Bearing Surface (Transmission Housing Side):
24.987−25.000 mm (0.9837−0.9843 in.)
B Distance Collar Surface:
28.992−29.005 mm (1.1414−1.1419 in.)
C Needle Bearing Surface:
34.984−35.000 mm (1.3773−1.3780 in.)
D Ball Bearing Surface (Clutch Housing Side):
25.977−25.990 mm (1.0227−1.0232 in.)
E Bushing Surface:
14.870−14.890 mm (0.5854−0.5862 in.)
Service Limit:
A: 24.93 mm (0.981 in.)
B: 28.93 mm (1.139 in.)
C: 34.93 mm (1.375 in.)
D: 25.92 mm (1.020 in.)
E: 14.77 mm (0.5815 in.)
2. Inspect the runout by supporting both ends of the mainshaft. Rotate the mainshaft two complete revolutions when
measuring the runout. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the mainshaft with a new one.
Mainshaft 3rd, 4th, 5th, and 6th gears
Mainshaft 3rd, I.D. 3rd/4th/5th 39.009−39.025 mm (1.5358−1.5364 in.) 38.95 mm (1.533 in.)
4th, 5th, and 6th 6th 35.009−35.025 mm (1.3783−1.3789 in.) 34.95 mm (1.376 in.)
gears Clearance 2nd-3rd 0.06−0.21 mm (0.002−0.008 in.) 0.30 mm (0.012 in.)
End play 4th 0.06−0.19 mm (0.002−0.007 in.) 0.28 mm (0.011 in.)
5th 0.06−0.14 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) 0.23 mm (0.009 in.)
6th 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) 0.25 mm (0.010 in.)
4th 25.52−25.57 mm (1.005−1.007 in.) 25.45 mm (1.002 in.)
5th 22.42−22.47 mm (0.883−0.885 in.) 22.35 mm (0.880 in.)
6th 23.92−23.97 mm (0.942−0.944 in.) 23.85 mm (0.939 in.)
M/T Differential Component Location Index
CARRIER BEARING
Replacement,
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

Replacement,
Replacement,
CARRIER BEARING
Replacement,
M/T Differential Backlash Inspection
1. Place the differential assembly on V-blocks (A), and install both axles.
2. Measure the backlash of both pinion gears (B) with a dial indicator (C). If the backlash is not within the standard,
replace the differential carrier.
M/T Differential Carrier Bearings Replacement
Commercially available
bearing puller

07746-0030100
1. Check the carrier bearings for wear and rough rotation. If they rotate smoothly and their rollers show no signs of
wear, the bearings are OK.
2. Remove the carrier bearings (A) with commercially available bearing puller (B).
3. Install the new bearing (A) with the 40 mm inner driver handle and a press. Press each bearing on until it bottoms.
There should be no clearance between the bearings and the carrier.
NOTE: Turn the seal (B) part of the bearing to the outside of differential, and install it.
M/T differential 80 mm shim-to-bearing outer race 0.01−0.10 mm (0.0004−0.0039 in.) Adjust
80 mm shim clearance in transmission housing
M/T Differential Oil Seal Replacement
07749-0010000

07NAD-P200100
07JAD-PL90100
1. Remove the oil seal (A) from the transmission housing (B).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the transmission housing while removing the oil seals.
2. Remove the oil seal (A) from the clutch housing (B).
3. Install the new oil seal in the transmission housing with the special tools.
4. Install the new oil seal in the clutch housing with the special tools.
pinion gear
M/T Differential Final Driven Gear/Carrier Replacement
1. Remove the bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the final driven gear from the differential
carrier.
2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfer on the inside diameter facing the carrier. Tighten the bolts in a
crisscross pattern in several steps.
M/T Synchro Ring and Gear Inspection
1. Inspect the inside of each synchro ring (A) for wear.
Inspect the teeth (B) on each synchro ring for wear (rounded off).
2. Inspect the teeth (A) on each synchro sleeve and matching teeth on each gear for wear (rounded off).
3. Inspect the thrust surface (A) on each gear hub for wear.
4. Inspect the cone surface (B) on each gear hub for wear and roughness.
5. Inspect the teeth on all gears (C) for uneven wear, scoring, and cracks.
6. Coat the cone surface of each gear with MTF, and place its synchro ring on it. Rotate the synchro ring, making
sure that it does not slip.
7. Measure the clearance between each gear (A) and its synchro ring (B) all around the gear. Hold the synchro ring
against the gear evenly while measuring the clearance. If the clearance is less than the service limit, replace the
synchro ring and gear.
Synchro Ring-to-Gear Clearance
Standard: 0.655−1.334 mm (0.026−0.053 in.)
Double Cone Synchro and Triple Cone Synchro-to-Gear Clearance Synchro ring-to-gear
Standard:
(1): Outer Synchro Ring (B) to Synchro Cone (C) 0.70−1.19 mm (0.028−0.047 in.)
(2): Synchro Cone (C) to Gear (A) 0.50−1.04 mm (0.020−0.041 in.)
(3): Outer Synchro Ring (B) to Gear (A) 0.95−1.68 mm (0.037−0.066 in.)
Service Limit:
(1): 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) Double cone synchro
(2): 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) and triple cone
(3): 0.6 mm (0.024 in.) synchro-to-gear
Synchro ring
against gear
M/T Synchro Sleeve and Hub Inspection and Reassembly
1. Inspect the gear teeth on all synchro hubs and synchro sleeves for wear (rounded off corners).
2. Install each synchro hub (A) in its mating synchro sleeve (B), and check for free movement. Make sure to match
the three sets of longer teeth (C) (120 degrees apart) on the synchro sleeve with the three sets of deeper grooves
(D) in the synchro hub.
NOTE:
Do not install the synchro sleeve with its longer teeth in the 1st/2nd and 5th/6th synchro hub slots (E)
because it will damage the spring ring.
If replacement is required, always replace the synchro sleeve and synchro hub as a set.
Engine Wire Harness, CKP Sensor Subharness, Change Actuator Subharness A/B, Clutch Actuator Subharness, and Engine
Oil Level Sensor Subharness Locations
i-SHIFT system
CHANGE ACTUATOR SUBHARNESS B
ENGINE WIRE HARNESS
CLUTCH ACTUATOR SUBHARNESS
ENGINE OIL LEVEL

SENSOR SUBHARNESS
CHANGE ACTUATOR
SUBHARNESS A
G101 G151

DTC P0615: RHD model
Starter Relay STRLD Circuit Malfunction
information.
LHD model
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
starter relay 1, starter relay 2, and the ECM.■
6. Check the 7.5 A fuse in the auxiliary under-dash fuse box.
Is the fuse OK?
NO - Replace the 7.5 A fuse in the auxiliary under-dash fuse box, then go to Step 12 .
9. Open the fuse lid (A), then remove starter relay 1 (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
10. Connect starter relay 1 4P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
11. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal A14 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM (A14) and starter relay 1, then go to Step 12 .
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at starter relay 1, starter relay 2, and the ECM, then go to
Step 1 .
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at starter relay 1, starter relay 2, and the ECM. If the ECM
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM, then recheck. If the ECM was substituted, go to Step 1 .
Starter Relay 2 Malfunction
information.
2. Check the STARTER CUT RELAY in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
LHD model
Is the 2.2 V or less indicated?
NO - Go to Step 7 .
5. Open the fuse lid (A), then remove starter relay 1 (B) for the under-dash fuse/relay box.
6. Test start relay 1.
Is start relay 1 OK?
YES - Replace starter relays 2, then go to Step 23 .
NO - Replace starter relay 1, then go to Step 23 .
8. Open the fuse lid (A), then remove starter relay 1 (B) for the under-dash fuse/relay box. RHD model
NO - Replace starter relay 1, then go to Step 23 . LHD model
12. Remove the starter relay 2 for the auxiliary under-dash fuse/relay box.
18. Check for continuity starter relay 1 4P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground.
Is the 1 MΩ or more?
19. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector X (3P).
20. Check for continuity under-dash fuse/relay box connector X (3P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM (A14) and the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to Step 23 .
21. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector B (36P).
22. Check for continuity under-dash fuse/relay box connector B (36P) terminal No. 16 and body ground.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and starter relay 2, then go to Step 23 .
NO - Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to Step 23 .
26. Do the idle learn procedure.
YES - Check for poor connection or loose terminals at starter relay 1, starter relay 2, and the ECM, then go to
Step 1 .
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at starter relay 1, starter relay 2, and the ECM, If the ECM
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM, then recheck. If the ECM was substituted, go to Step 1 .
Starter Relay 1 Malfunction
information.
LHD model
Is the 3.2 V or more indicated?
4. Open the fuse lid (A), then remove starter relay 1 (B) for the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the 3.2 V or more indicated?
11. Measure the voltage between ECM connector terminal A14 and body ground.
YES - Repaire short to power in the wire between the ECM (A14) and starter relay 1, then go to Step 12 .
15. Do the ECM idle learn procedure .
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at starter relay 1 and the ECM, then go to Step 1 .
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at starter relay 1 and the ECM. If the ECM was updated,
DTC Troubleshooting: P15B7
DTC P15B7:
Starter Control System Low Input
information.
Is DTC P15B7 indicated?
TCM and the ECM.■
Is there voltage?
YES - Substitute a known-good TCM, then go to Step 14 . If DTC P15B7 is not indicated, replace the original
TCM, then go to Step 14 .
12. Disconnect TCM connector A (37P).
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM (A43) and the TCM, then go to Step 14 .
15. Reconnect all connectors and the battery.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the TCM and the ECM, then go to Step 1 .
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the TCM and the ECM. If the ECM was updated,
DTC Troubleshooting: P15B8
DTC P15B8:
Starter Control System High Input
information.
TCM and the ECM.■
Is there voltage?
YES - Substitute a known-good TCM, then go to Step 14 . If DTC P15B8 is not indicated, replace the original
TCM, then go to Step 14 .
13. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal A43 and TCM connector A (37P) terminal No. 10.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM (A43) and the TCM, then go to Step 14 .
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the TCM and the ECM, then go to Step 1 .
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the TCM and the ECM. If the ECM was updated,
DTC Troubleshooting: P15BF
DTC P16BF:
Starter Relay Circuit Malfunction
information.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS and wait 5 seconds.
Is DTC P16BF indicated?
starter cut relay and the ECM.■
6. Remove starter relay 1.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM (A13) and starter relay 1, then go to Step 9 .
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at starter relay 1 and the ECM, then go to Step 1 .
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the starter cut relay and the ECM. If the ECM was
DTC U0101:
F-CAN Malfunction (ECM-TCM)
information.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
gauge control module, the TCM, and the ECM.■
5. Check the No. 60 AMT (40 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
NO - Repair short in the wire between the No. 60 AMT +B (40 A) fuse and the TCM. Also replace the No. 60
AMT +B (40 A) fuse, then go to Step 19 .
6. Remove the TCM.
7. Check for poor connections at TCM connector A (37P).
NO - Repair the poor connections or loose terminals at TCM connector A (37P), then go to Step 19 .
9. Reconnect the engine compartment wire harness 10P connector; LHD model, RHD model.
10. Reconnect the ground cable of the TCM to the body ground.
12. Measure the voltage between TCM connector A (37P) terminal No. 28 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 60 AMT (40 A) fuse and the TCM, then go to Step 19 .
14. Check for continuity between TCM connector A (37P) terminal No. 29 and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the TCM and body ground (G151), then go to Step 19 .
YES - Update the TCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good TCM, then go to Step
20 and recheck. If DTC U0101 is not indicated with a known-good TCM, replace the original TCM, then go
to Step 20 .
20. Install the TCM.
21. Reconnect all connectors and the battery.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the gauge control module, the TCM, and the ECM, then
go to Step 1 .
DTC U0103:
F-CAN Malfunction (ECM-TCM)
information.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES - Go to the i-SHIFT system's general troubleshooting information. ■
gauge control module, the TCM, and the ECM.■
How to Troubleshoot the i-SHIFT System
i-SHIFT Indicator
Under normal conditions, the i-SHIFT indicator (A) comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position, then
goes off after the engine is started. This indicates that the LED and its circuit are operating correctly.
If there is a failure in the system after the engine is started, the i-SHIFT indicator will stay on.
The i-SHIFT indicator comes on under certain conditions even if the i-SHIFT system is working normally. Here are some
examples:
When you use high-powered wireless equipment in the vehicle.
When the battery voltage suddenly drops below 9 volts or rises above 16 volts.
Transmission Temp Indicator

When the temperature of the clutch actuator, the gear actuator or the clutch actuator base rises, the indicator comes on.
If this indicator comes on, avoid full-throttle acceleration, frequently shifting, and driving at high speed. The indicator will go
off when the temperature of the i-SHIFT control system or clutch system drops. It is possible to continue driving normally
with the indicator off.

The memory can hold 10 DTCs. However, when the same DTC is detected more than once, the more recent DTC is
DTC.
The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM. Therefore, the memorized DTCs cannot be canceled by disconnecting
the battery. Do the specified procedures to clear the DTCs.
Self-diagnosis
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the system does the following:
Turns the i-SHIFT indicator on.
Memorizes the DTC.
When the system detects a problem, the TCM shifts to fail-safe mode.
NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on at the same time as the i-SHIFT indicator, check for i-SHIFT
system DTCs and troubleshoot them first.
The term ‘‘intermittent failure'' means a system may have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the i-SHIFT indicator does
not come on, check for poor connections or loose terminals at all connectors related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting. If the indicator comes ON, but then went out, the original problem may have been intermittent.
How to Check for DTCs with the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS)
If the i-SHIFT indicator has been reported on, or if a driveability problem is suspected, follow this procedure:
1. If the i-SHIFT indicator stays on, connect the HDS to the DLC (A).
3. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it.
NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with the HDS.
4. After recording the DTCs, clear all DTCs.
5. Recheck the system under the same conditions as the problem has been reported on. If the DTC returns, go to the
DTC troubleshooting index. If the DTC does not return, there was an intermittent problem within the circuit. Make
sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
How to Clear DTCs

1. With the ignition switch to LOCK (0), connect the HDS to the DLC (A).
3. Clear the DTC(s) with the HDS.
How to Substitute the TCM
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the TCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
5. Replace the clutch actuator (TCM).
7. Update the TCM if it does not have the latest software.
8. Reset the TCM with the HDS.
9. Do the i-SHIFT Learning (dynamic mode).

1. When the ignition switch to LOCK (0), connect the HDS to the DLC (A).
How to Update the TCM

NOTE:
Make sure you have the latest software on the HDS.
To ensure the latest program is installed, do a TCM update whenever the TCM is substituted or replaced.
You can not update a TCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program.
Before you update the TCM, make sure the battery is fully charged.
To prevent TCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, sunroof,
door locks, etc.) during the update.
If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing
during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the DLC. This
will prevent TCM damage.
High temperature in the engine compartment might cause the TCM to become too hot to run the update. If the
engine has been running before this procedure, open the hood and cool the engine compartment.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) but do not start the engine.
3. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the vehicle and connect the Honda
interface module (HIM).
4. If the software in the TCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS or the HIM from the DLC, and go back to the procedure
that you were doing.
If the software in the TCM is not the latest, do the TCM update procedure as described on the HIM label or in the
TCM update system.
NOTE: If the TCM update system requires you to cool the TCM, follow what is shown on the screen.
5. Do the i-SHIFT Learning (dynamic mode).
DTC Troubleshooting: P0504 (136-2)
DTC P0504:
Brake Pedal Position Signal Malfunction (from ECM by F-CAN)
1. Check the BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH SIGNAL (NORMAL OPEN) and the BRAKE PEDAL POSITION
SWITCH SIGNAL (NORMAL CLOSE) in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the NORMAL OPEN SIGNAL indicate OFF and NORMAL CLOSE SIGNAL indicate ON while the brake
pedal is not pressed, and changes to the opposite when the brake pedal is pressed?
NO - Go to the brake pedal position switch circuit troubleshooting. ■
DTC P0512:
Starter Signal Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: If the engine is started without using the starter switch, DTC P0512 is stored.
6. Disconnect the clutch actuator subharness 10P connector from the engine compartment wire harness.
8. Measure voltage between clutch actuator subharness 10P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
YES - Remove the clutch actuator assembly, then check for the clutch actuator subharness, if the wire harness
is OK, substitute a known-good TCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-
good TCM, replace the original TCM. ■
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the starter switch and the TCM.■
DTC P0562:
TCM Power Source Circuit (+B) Low Voltage
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check if the battery condition and charging system are OK.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait for at least 1 second.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the battery terminal fuse box, under-dash fuse/relay box
and the TCM. If OK, update the TCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good
TCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good TCM, replace the original
TCM. ■
DTC P0563:
TCM Power Source Circuit (+B) High Voltage
NOTE: If a high voltage battery (24 V, etc.) is connected to the vehicle, this DTC can be stored.
YES - Check the battery condition and charging system.■
DTC P0603:
TCM Internal KAM Error
DTC P0605:
TCM Programming Error
DTC P0666:
TCM Internal Temperature Sensor Signal Malfunction
DTC P0702:
TCM Internal CPU Power Supply Circuit Malfunction
DTC P0780:
Transmission Shift Change System Malfunction
3. Test-drive the vehicle and change the shift lever from 1st to 6th gear positions, and the reverse position.
6. Check for foreign matter between the change actuator motors, the arms and the actuator rods.
Are there any foreign matters?
YES - Repair as necessary and recheck.■
NO - Go to Step 7 .
7. Test-drive the vehicle and check the shift position it cannot be shifted.
9. Remove the transmission shift change actuator (A), then connect the shift actuator motor and select actuator motor
6P connectors.
11. Do the ENGAGE GEARS in the FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU with the HDS, and try to shift the position that could
not be shifted.
Does the actuator motor move normally?
YES - Repair the transmission internal failure.■
NO - Replace the change actuator motor. ■
DTC P0810:
Clutch Operation Problem
3. Do the CLUTCH ACTUATOR FULL STROKE OPERATION in the FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU with the HDS.
8. Check the clutch hose and pipe between the slave cylinder and the TCM if they are twisted or cracked.
Are they OK?
NO - Replace the damaged hose or pipe.■
9. Remove the clutch pipe assembly from the clutch actuator.
Slave cylinder
Release syatem
DTC P0882:
TCM Power Input Voltage Lower than ECM Power Input Signal
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check for Fuel and Emissions systems DTCs. If any DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot the
indicated DTCs first.
8. Disconnect the clutch actuator subharness 10P connector.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Repair an open in the wire between the No. 12 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the clutch
actuator subharness 10P connector.■
12. Remove the No. 12 (10 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
13. Check for continuity between clutch actuator subharness 10P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
YES - Repair a short in the wire between the No. 12 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the clutch
actuator subharness 10P connector, and replace the No. 12 (10 A) fuse.■
NO - Remove the clutch actuator assembly, and check for clutch actuator subharness. If the wire harness is
OK, substitute a known-good TCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-
DTC P0883:
TCM Power Input Voltage Higher than ECM Power Input Signal
NOTE: If there is communication error between the ECM and TCM, DTC P0883 is not stored.
6. Check the IGNITION SWITCH ON SIGNAL in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
NO - Update the ECM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM . If the ECM was
updated, check for IG1 line between the ignition switch and the ECM.■
DTC P0904:
Select Actuator Motor Rotating Pulse Sensor Signal Circuit Malfunction
4. Change the shift lever in D, N, D, and N.
7. Disconnect the select actuator motor 6P connector.
NO - Replace the transmission shift change actuator. ■
11. Disconnect the change actuator subharness B 10P connector.
12. Check for continuity between select actuator motor 6P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
YES - Repair a short to ground in the wire of the change actuator subharness B.■
14. Measure voltage between select actuator motor 6P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
YES - Repair a short to power in the wire of the change actuator subharness B.■
15. Check for continuity between select actuator motor 6P connector terminal No. 5 and change actuator subharness
B 10P connector terminal No. 5.
YES - Remove the clutch actuator assembly, and check for change actuator subharness A. If the wire harness
NO - Repair an open in the wire of the change actuator subharness B.■
DTC P0909:
Transmission Shift Change Actuator Neutral Position Learned Value Out of Range
3. Do the i-SHIFT System Learning (Static Mode).
7. Check the shift actuator and select actuator rods.
Are they good condition?
YES - Replace the transmission shift change actuator. ■
DTC P0910:
Select Actuator Motor System Malfunction
7. Reconnect the 6P connectors to the transmission shift change actuator.
9. Change the shift lever from D to N, then from N to D, and check the select actuator rod (A) operation.
Does the select actuator rod move smoothly?
12. Change the shift lever from D to N, then from N to D, and measure voltage between select actuator motor 6P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 6.
Does the battery voltage change from positive (or negative) to negative (or positive) depending by the shift lever
operation?
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
Does the voltage change from 0 V (or battery voltage) to battery voltage (or 0 V) depending by the shift lever
operation?
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the TCM and the transmission shift change actuator.■
operation?
DTC P0914:
Shift Actuator Motor Rotating Pulse Sensor Signal Circuit Malfunction
4. Change the shift lever in D, then operate the shift lever between + and − positions.
7. Disconnect the shift actuator motor 6P connector.
NO - Replace the transmission shift change actuator. (A few DTCs related with open circuit will be stored at
this time.)■
11. Remove the clutch actuator assembly.
12. Disconnect TCM connector B (40P).
13. Check for continuity between shift actuator motor 6P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
YES - Repair a short to ground in the wire of the change actuator subharness A.■
15. Measure voltage between shift actuator motor 6P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
YES - Repair a short to power in the wire of the change actuator subharness A.■
17. Check for continuity between shift actuator motor 6P connector terminal No. 5 and TCM connector terminal B9.
YES - Substitute a known-good TCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
TCM, replace the original TCM. ■
NO - Repair an open in the wire of the change actuator subharness A.■
DTC P0919:
Transmission Shift Change Actuator Neutral Position Learning Time Out
7. Check if the shift arm (A) moves smoothly.
Does the shift arm move smoothly?
DTC P0920:
Shift Actuator Motor System Malfunction
7. Reconnect the 6P connectors to the transmission shift change actuator.
9. Change the shift lever from D to N, then from N to D, and check the shift actuator rod (A) operation.
Does the shift actuator rod move smoothly?
12. Change the shift lever from D to N, then from N to D, and measure voltage between shift actuator motor 6P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 6.
Does the battery voltage change from positive (or negative) to negative (or positive) depending by the shift lever
operation?
operation?
operation?
DTC P0942:
Clutch Hydraulic System Malfunction
3. Change the shift lever in D.
6. Make sure the clutch fluid is full in the reservoir, then check the clutch hose and line joint for leaks.
Is it OK?
NO - Replace the hose or tighten the joint if necessary.■
8. Change the shift lever in N.
9. Do the CLUTCH ACTUATOR FULL STROKE OPERATION in the FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU with the HDS.
10. Check the CLUTCH POSITION ACTUAL in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there more than 15 mm (0.6 in.)?
YES - Check for these conditions, and repair if necessary:■
Clutch disc and pressure plate
Diaphragm spring
Release bearing
Slave cylinder
Release fork
DTC Troubleshooting: P16C0 (99-1)
DTC P16C0:
TCM Programming Error
NOTE:
DTC P16C0 is stored when the i-SHIFT system update is not completed.
Do not turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) while updating the i-SHIFT system. If you turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0) before completion, the i-SHIFT system can be damaged.
1. Do the i-SHIFT system update procedure.
Is DTC P16C0 indicated?
YES - Replace the TCM. ■
NO - Update is complete.■
DTC Troubleshooting: P19E4 (162-8)
DTC P19E4:
Gear Shift Actuator Temperature Out of Range
NOTE: DTC P19E4 is stored when the gear change motor is protection mode. This can be caused due to frequent
UP/DOWN operation. In this case, it is not a malfunction.
1. Check whether the driver changed gears excessively while driving.
Did the driver change gears excessively while driving?
YES - Not failure, just a rise of the transmission shift change actuator temperature due to excessive gear
changes.■
NO - Go to Step 2 .
4. In order to cool the system, wait for at least 1 hour.
5. Test-drive the vehicle for at least 10 minutes.
Is DTC P19E4 indicated?
DTC P19E5:
Clutch Actuator Stroke Sensor Signal Out of Range
DTC P19E6:
Clutch Temperature Too High (Over 300 °C (572 °F))
NOTE:
DTC P19E6 is stored when the clutch temperature is higher than 300 °C (572 °F).
If the DTC P19E6 is stored, the system stops the creep control.
The value of the clutch temperature is reset when the DTC is cleared with the HDS.
The clutch temperature is high when the UP/DOWN operation is done frequently at a short time.
NO - The system is OK at this time (Failure by air in the fluid).■
DTC P19E7:
Clutch Contact Position 3 Learning Not Completed
NOTE: If the Clutch Contact Position 3 Learning is incomplete after replacing the clutch disc, repeat the Clutch Contact
Position 3 Learning several times. If the Clutch Contact Position 3 Learning is still incomplete, check the clutch disc
installation.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm (min −1 ) without load until the radiator fan comes on, then let
it idle.
4. Turn the headlight switch to ON.
5. Do the i-SHIFT System Learning (Dynamic Mode).
9. Do the i-SHIFT System Learning (Dynamic Mode).
YES - Go to Step 8 and repeat the steps.
NO - Clutch Contact Position 3 Learning is complete.■
DTC P19E8:
Vehicle Speed Signal Malfunction (from ECM by Signal Line)
3. Start the engine, and change the shift lever in D.
4. Compare the speedometer indication and the VEHICLE SPEED in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the HDS indication match with the speedometer?
NO - Go to Step 5 .
5. Check the VEHICLE SPEED in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 0 km/h (0 mph) indicated?
YES - Repair a short to ground in the wire between the ECM (A33) and the TCM (A3).■
NO - Go to Step 6 .
YES - Repair a short to power in the wire between the ECM (A33) and the clutch actuator subharness.■
13. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal A33 and clutch actuator subharness 10P connector terminal
No. 5.
YES - Remove the clutch actuator assembly, and check for clutch actuator subharness. If the wire harness is
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the ECM (A33) and the clutch actuator subharness.■
DTC P19E9:
Brake Pedal Position Signal Malfunction (from ECM by Signal Line)
2. Press and release the brake pedal continuously for at least 2 minutes.
3. With the brake pedal released, check the BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH AND SIGNAL in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 4 .
YES - Repair a short to power in the wire between the ECM (A28) and the TCM (A35).■
NO - Go to Step 8 .
No. 3.
DTC Troubleshooting: P19EA (132-1)
DTC P19EA:
Starter Signal Malfunction (from ECM by Signal Line)
2. With the shift lever in N and the brake pedal pressed, check the STARTER ENABLE SIGNAL in the DATA LIST
with the HDS.
NO - Go to Step 3 .
YES - Repair a short to power in the wire between the ECM (A43) and the TCM (A10).■
NO - Go to Step 7 .
No. 1.
DTC Troubleshooting: P19EB (133-1)
DTC P19EB:
TCM initialization with Tester Error
NOTE: If DTC P19EB is indicated, replace the TCM.
DTC Troubleshooting: P19EC (150-21)
DTC P19EC:
Shift Actuator Motor Rotating Pulse/Rotating Direction Sensor Supply Signal Circuit Low Voltage
Is DTC P19EC indicated?
Is DTC P19EC indicated?
YES - Repair a short to ground in the wire between the TCM (B20) and the shift actuator motor.■
this time.)■
DTC Troubleshooting: P19ED (150-22)
DTC P19ED:
Shift Actuator Motor Rotating Pulse/Rotating Direction Sensor Supply Signal Circuit High Voltage
Is DTC P19ED indicated?
8. Connect the shift actuator motor 6P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground with a jumper wire.
Is DTC P19ED indicated?
YES - Repair an open in the wire between the TCM (B20) and the shift actuator motor.■
this time.)■
DTC Troubleshooting: P19EE (150-23)
DTC P19EE:
Shift Actuator Motor Rotating Pulse/Rotating Direction Sensor Supply Signal Circuit High Voltage
Is DTC P19EE indicated?
9. Measure voltage between the shift actuator motor 6P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
YES - Repair a short to power in the wire between the TCM (B20) and the shift actuator motor.■
DTC Troubleshooting: P19EF (151-22)
DTC P19EF:
Shift Actuator Motor Position Sensor Ground Line Open
Is DTC P19EF indicated?
9. Disconnect TCM connector B (40P).
10. Check for continuity between TCM connector terminal B1 and shift actuator motor 6P connector terminal No. 2.
NO - Repair an open in the wire of the change actuator subharness A.■
DTC Troubleshooting: P19F0 (152-21)
DTC P19F0:
Shift Actuator Motor Rotating Direction Sensor Signal Circuit Low Voltage
Is DTC P19F0 indicated?
YES - Repair a short to ground in the wire between the TCM (B8) and the shift actuator motor.■
this time.)■
DTC P19F2:
Shift Actuator Motor Rotating Direction Sensor Signal Circuit High Voltage
8. Connect shift actuator motor 6P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground with a jumper wire.
YES - Repair an open in the wire between the TCM (B8) and the shift actuator motor.■
16. Disconnect the TCM connector B (40P).
18. Measure voltage between shift actuator motor 6P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
YES - Repair a short to power in the wire of the change actuator subharness A.■
DTC P19F3:
Select Actuator Motor Rotating Pulse/Rotating Direction Sensor Supply Signal Circuit Low Voltage
YES - Repair a short to ground in the wire between the TCM (B2) and the select actuator motor.■
this time.)■
DTC P19F4:
Select Actuator Motor Rotating Pulse/Rotating Direction Sensor Supply Signal Circuit High Voltage
8. Connect select actuator motor 6P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground with a jumper wire.
YES - Repair an open in the wire between the TCM (B3) and the select actuator motor.■
this time.)■
DTC P19F5:
Select Actuator Motor Rotating Pulse Sensor Signal Circuit High Voltage
NO - Remove the clutch actuator assembly, and check for change actuator subharness A. If the wire harness
is OK, replace the transmission shift change actuator. ■
DTC P19F6:
Select Actuator Motor Position Sensor Ground Line Open
9. Check for continuity between change actuator subharness B 10P connector terminal No. 8 and select actuator
motor 6P connector terminal No. 2.
NO - Repair an open in the wire of the change actuator subharness B.■
DTC P19F7:
Select Actuator Motor Rotating Direction Sensor Signal Circuit Low Voltage
YES - Repair a short to ground in the wire between the TCM (B10) and the select actuator motor.■
this time.)■
DTC P19F9:
Select Actuator Motor Rotating Direction Sensor Signal Circuit High Voltage
8. Connect select actuator motor 6P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground with a jumper wire.
YES - Repair an open in the wire between the TCM (B10) and the select actuator motor.■
NO - Remove the clutch actuator assembly, and check for change actuator subharness A. If the wire harness
DTC Troubleshooting: P19FA (160-21)
DTC P19FA:
Clutch Contact Position Adaptation Condition Error
Is DTC P19FA indicated?
5. Check the ENGINE TORQUE DISTURBANCE SIGNAL in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does it indicate ACTIVE more than 10 minutes?
6. Check for Fuel and Emissions systems DTCs with the HDS.
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated?
YES - Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
NO - Electrical load change is continuing. Do the i-SHIFT System Learning (Static Mode) and the i-SHIFT
System Learning (Dynamic Mode). ■
DTC Troubleshooting: P19FB (160-22)
DTC P19FB:
Clutch Contact Position 1 and 2 Learning Not Completed
NOTE: If the Clutch Contact Position 1, 2 Learning is incomplete after replacing the clutch disc, repeat the Clutch Contact
Position 1, 2 Learning several times. If the Clutch Contact Position 1, 2 Learning is still incomplete, check the clutch disc
installation.
Is DTC P19FB indicated?
Is DTC P19FB indicated?
YES - Go to Step 7 and repeat the steps.
NO - Clutch Contact Position 1, 2 Learning is complete.■
DTC Troubleshooting: P19FC (160-23)
DTC P19FC:
Shift Change Actuator Position Learning Not Completed
NOTE:
DTC P19FC is stored when the Shift Change Actuator Position Learning is incomplete.
Make sure the battery is fully charged.
Is DTC P19FC indicated?
YES - Go to Step 3 , and repeat the steps. If DTC P19FC is stored again after doing the i-SHIFT System
Learning (Static Mode), check the repair error, or there is a problem in a replacement part.
DTC Troubleshooting: P19FD (160-24)
DTC P19FD:
Shift Change Actuator Position Learning Value Out of Range
Is DTC P19FD indicated?
Is DTC P19FD indicated?
YES - Do the i-SHIFT System Learning (Static Mode), and recheck. If DTC P19FD is stored again, replace the
transmission shift change actuator. ■
DTC Troubleshooting: P19FE (160-25)
DTC P19FE:
Clutch Contact Position Adaptation Learning Value Out of Range
Is DTC P19FE indicated?
12. Do the CLUTCH FLUID FILLING in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS.
Slave cylinder
Release system
DTC Troubleshooting: P19FF (160-26)
DTC P19FF:
Clutch Friction Coefficient Learning Value Out of Range
3. Test-drive the vehicle and change the shift lever from 1st to 6th gear.
Is DTC P19FF indicated?
12. Do the CLUTCH FLUID FILLING in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS.
Slave cylinder
Release system
DTC P2785:
Clutch Actuator Temperature Too High
NOTE: DTC P2785 is stored when the clutch motor is protection mode. This can be caused due to frequent UP/DOWN
operation. In this case, it is not a malfunction.
YES - Not failure, just a rise of the clutch actuator temperature due to excessive gear changes.■
NO - Go to Step 2 .
2. Check the CLUTCH ACTUATOR TEMPERATURE and the TRANSMISSION SHIFT CHANGE ACTUATOR
TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is the clutch actuator temperature about 195 °C (383 °F) or more, or the transmission shift change actuator
temperature about 118 °C (244 °F) or more?
NO - Go to Step 6 .
NO - Go to Step 6 .
6. Test-drive the vehicle with changing gears frequently for at least 15 minutes.
8. Check the release fork moves smoothly.
Does the release fork move smoothly?
NO - Replace the release bearing. ■
DTC P2786:
Transmission Shift Change Actuator Temperature Too High
YES - Replace the transmission shift change actuator.■
DTC P2787:
Clutch Temperature Too High (Over 400 °C (752 °F))
NOTE: DTC P2787 is stored when the clutch is protection mode. This can be caused due to frequent UP/DOWN
operation. In this case, it is not a malfunction.
YES - Not failure, just a rise of the clutch temperature due to excessive gear changes.■
NO - Go to Step 2 .
2. Test-drive the vehicle for at least 15 minutes with the Auto mode, then repeat a start and a stop several times.
Does the clutch slip?
YES - Replace the clutch. ■
NO - Go to Step 3 .
5. Check the CLUTCH TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is the clutch temperature about 400 °C (752 °F) or more?
DTC Troubleshooting: U0100 (107-11)
DTC U0100:
F-CAN Malfunction (TCM Lost Communication with ECM)
Are DTC U0103, U0155, and U1261 indicated?
8. Wait for at least 30 seconds.
12. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal A3 (A4) * and clutch actuator subharness 10P connector
terminal No. 7 (No. 6) * .
*: CANL
YES - Remove the clutch actuator assembly, and check for change actuator subharness. If the wire harness is
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the clutch actuator subharness 10P connector and the ECM (A3 (A4)
* ).■
*: CANL
18. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal A3 (A4) * and clutch actuator subharness 10P connector
terminal No. 7 (No. 6) * .
*: CANL
YES - Update the ECM if it does not have latest software. If the ECM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM, replace the original
ECM. ■
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the clutch actuator subharness 10P connector and the ECM (A3 (A4)
* ).■
*: CANL
DTC U0103:
F-CAN Malfunction (TCM Lost Communication with Gear Shift Control Module)
9. Disconnect the gear shift control module 12P connector.
11. Connect gear shift control module 12P connector terminal No. 3 (No. 9) * and body ground with jumper wires.
*: CANL
12. Check for continuity between clutch actuator subharness 10P connector terminal No. 7 (No. 6) * and body ground.
*: CANL
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the clutch actuator subharness 10P connector and the gear shift
control module.■
15. Disconnect the gear shift control module 12P connector.
17. Connect gear shift control module 12P connector terminal No. 3 (No. 9) * and body ground with jumper wires.
*: CANL
*: CANL
YES - Substitute a known-good gear shift control module, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away
with a known-good gear shift control module, replace the original gear shift control module. ■
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the clutch actuator subharness 10P connector and the gear shift
control module.■
DTC U0155:
F-CAN Malfunction (TCM Lost Communication with Gauge Control Module)
11. Connect gauge control module 32P connector terminal No. 30 (No. 29) * and body ground with jumper wires.
*: CANL
*: CANL
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the clutch actuator subharness 10P connector and the gauge control
module.■
17. Connect gauge control module 32P connector terminal No. 30 (No. 29) * and body ground with jumper wires.
*: CANL
*: CANL
YES - Substitute a known-good shift lever, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-
good shift lever, replace the original shift lever. ■
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the clutch actuator subharness 10P connector and the gauge control
module.■
DTC U0401:
F-CAN Malfunction (TCM Received Invalid Data from ECM)
4. Change the engine speed from idle to 4,000 rpm (min −1 ) twice.
YES - Check for Fuel and Emissions systems DTCs with the HDS.■
DTC U0404:
F-CAN Malfunction (TCM Received Invalid Data from Gear Shift Control Module)
3. Change the shift lever in all positions.
YES - Substitute a known-good gear shift control module, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away
with a known-good gear shift control module, replace the original gear shift control module. ■
DTC U1261:
F-CAN Malfunction (TCM Lost Communication with ABS/VSA Modulator-Control Unit)
NOTE: If DTC U1261 is stored at the same time as DTC U1405, troubleshoot DTC U1261 first, then recheck for DTC
U1405.
9. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector (or the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector).
11. With ABS: Connect ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal No. 1 (No. 17) * and body ground with
jumper wires.
With VSA: Connect VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal No. 14 (No. 1) * and body ground with
jumper wires.
*: CANL
*: CANL
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the clutch actuator subharness 10P connector and the ABS (or VSA)
15. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector (or the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector).
17. With ABS: Connect ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal No. 1 (No. 17) * and body ground with
jumper wires.
With VSA: Connect VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal No. 14 (No. 1) * and body ground with
jumper wires.
*: CANL
*: CANL
YES - Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away
with a known-good VSA modulator-control unit, replace the original VSA modulator-control unit. ■
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the clutch actuator subharness 10P connector and the VSA
DTC U1400:
F-CAN Malfunction (TCM Received Out of Range Data from ECM)
6. Check for Fuel and Emissions systems DTCs with the HDS.
YES - Go to the Fuel and Emissions systems indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO - Go to Step 7 .
7. Check these parameters in the DATA LIST with the HDS:
ENGINE SPEED
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
Is the value 10,001 rpm (min −1 ), 151 °C (304 °F), and 151 °C (304 °F) or more?
YES - Remove the clutch actuator assembly, and substitute a known-good TCM, then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good TCM, replace the original TCM. ■
NO - Update the ECM if it does not have the latest software. If the ECM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM, replace the original
ECM. ■
DTC U1401:
F-CAN Malfunction (TCM Received Invalid Shift Down Command While Cruise Control from ECM)
3. Test-drive the vehicle with cruise control.
YES - Check for Fuel and Emissions systems.■
DTC U1402:
F-CAN Malfunction (TCM Received Invalid Shift Down Command While Cruise Control from ECM)
3. Test-drive the vehicle with cruise control.
YES - Check for Fuel and Emissions systems DTCs with the HDS.■
DTC U1403:
F-CAN Malfunction (TCM Received Invalid Data from ABS/VSA Modulator-Control Unit)
3. Test-drive the vehicle for at least 10 km/h (6.2 mph).
YES - Check for ABS (VSA) system DTCs with the HDS.■
DTC U1404:
F-CAN Malfunction (TCM Received Out of Range Data from ABS/VSA Modulator-Control Unit)
3. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes.
5. Check for ABS (VSA) system DTCs with the HDS.
Are any ABS (VSA) system DTCs indicated?
YES - Go to the VSA system indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
NO - Go to Step 6 .
7. Check each WHEEL SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does any of wheel speeds indicate 2,594 rpm?
YES - Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away
with a known-good VSA modulator-control unit, replace the original VSA modulator-control unit. ■
NO - Remove the clutch actuator assembly, and substitute a known-good TCM, then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good TCM, replace the original TCM. ■
DTC U1405:
F-CAN Malfunction (TCM Received Invalid Data from ABS/VSA Modulator-Control Unit)
NOTE: If DTC U1261 is stored at the same time as DTC U1405, troubleshoot DTC U1261 first, then recheck for DTC
U1405.
YES - Check for ABS (VSA) system DTCs with the HDS.■
Starting System Component Location Index
STARTER CUT RELAY

(A/T model)
Test,
BATTERY
Test,
STARTER TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (A/T model)

Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting, Test,
Performance Test, Replacement,
Overhaul,
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE:
Air temperature must be within 15−38 °C (59−100 °F) during this procedure.
After this inspection, you must reset the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM).
Otherwise, the ECM/PCM will continue to stop the fuel injectors from functioning.
The battery must be in good condition and fully charged.
1. Hook up the this equipment:
Ammeter, 0−400 A
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't communicate, troubleshoot the
DLC circuit.
5. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS STOP on the HDS.
6. Set the parking brake, then with the shift lever in P or N (A/T model) or neutral (M/T model), turn the ignition switch
to START (III).
Does the starter crank the engine normally?
YES - The starting system is OK. Go to Step 13 .
NO - Go to Step 7 .
8. Check the battery condition. Check the electrical connections at the battery, the negative battery cable to the
body, the engine ground cables, and the starter for looseness and corrosion. Then try cranking the engine again.
Does the starter crank the engine normally?
YES - Repairing the loose connection corrected the problem. The starting system is OK. Go to Step 13 .
NO - Based on the following symptoms, take the appropriate action:
If the starter will not crank the engine at all, go to Step 9 .
If the starter cranks the engine erratically or too slowly, go to Step 11 .
If the starter will not disengage from the flywheel ring gear (M/T model) or torque converter ring gear
(A/T model) when you release the key, replace the starter, or remove and disassemble it, and
check for the following:■
-Starter solenoid and switch malfunction
-Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning clutch
9. Make sure the transmission is in N or P (A/T model) or neutral (M/T model) then, disconnect the 1P connector (A)
from the starter S terminal. Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive terminal to the S terminal.
Does the starter crank the engine?
NO - Remove the starter , and repair or replace it as necessary.■
10. Check the following items in the order listed until you find the open circuit:
The YEL wire and connectors between the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and the ignition switch.
The BLK/WHT wire and connectors between the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
The ignition switch.
The transmission range switch (A/T model) and connector.
The starter cut relay (A/T model).
Does these items OK?
NO - Repair or replace it, then go to Step 13 .
11. While cranking the engine, check the cranking voltage and the current draw.
Is the cranking voltage greater than or equal to 9 V and is the current draw less than or equal to 150 A?
NO - Replace the starter, or remove and disassemble it, and check for these problems:■
Drag in the starter armature
Shorted armature winding
Excessive drag in the engine
Open circuit in the starter armature commutator segments
Excessively worn starter brushes
Open circuit in the starter brushes
Dirty or damaged helical splines or drive gear
Faulty drive gear clutch
12. Remove the starter, and inspect its drive gear and the flywheel ring gear (M/T model) or torque converter ring gear
(A/T model) for damage. Replace any damaged parts.
13. Select ECM/PCM reset to cancel ALL INJECTORS STOP on the HDS.
M/T System Description
Reverse Lockout System
Hard to shift into 1st gear
Probable cause(s)
1. Worn or incorrect MTF.
2. Clutch defective.
3. 1st synchro ring defective.
4. 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub defective.
5. 1st gear defective.
6. Change lever assembly defective.
Check and/or replace the MTF.
Check the clutch.
Check the 1st synchro ring.
Check the 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub.
Check 1st gear.
Check the change lever assembly.
Hard to shift into 2nd gear
Probable cause(s)
2. 2nd synchro ring defective.
3. 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub defective.
4. 2nd gear defective.
Check the 2nd synchro ring.
Check the 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub.
Check 2nd gear.
Hard to shift into 3rd gear
Probable cause(s)
2. 3rd synchro ring defective.
3. 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub defective.
4. 3rd gear defective.
Check the 3rd synchro ring.
Check the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub.
Check 3rd gear.
Probable cause(s)
2. 4th synchro ring defective.
3. 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub defective.
4. 4th gear defective.
Check the 4th synchro ring.
Check the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub.
Check 4th gear.
Probable cause(s)
2. 5th synchro ring defective.
3. 5th synchro sleeve defective.
4. 5th gear defective.
Check the 5th synchro ring.
Check the 5th synchro sleeve and hub.
Check 5th gear.
Hard to shift into reverse
Probable cause(s)
2. Clutch defective.
3. Reverse shift fork defective.
4. Reverse idler gear defective.
5. Reverse gear defective.
Check the clutch.
Check the reverse shift fork.
Check the reverse idler gear.
Check reverse gear.
Noise from the transmission
Probable cause(s)
2. Low MTF level.
3. Worn or damaged transmission gears.
4. Worn or damaged transmission bearings.
Check the MTF level.
Check the transmission gears.
Check the transmission bearings.
Shift lever does not operate smoothly
Probable cause(s)
2. Shift cable defective.
3. Joint in shift cable and transmission or body.
Check the shift cable.
Check joint in the shift cable.
Transmission jumps out of gear
Probable cause(s)
2. Detent ball springs defective.
3. Worn gear dogs.
Check the detent ball springs.
Check the gear dogs.
M/T Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom Probable cause(s) Diagnostic procedure
Hard to shift into 1st 1. Worn or incorrect MTF. Check and/or replace the MTF.
gear 2. Clutch defective. Check the clutch.
3. 1st synchro ring defective. Check the 1st synchro ring.
4. 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub defective. Check the 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub.
5. 1st gear defective. Check 1st gear.
6. Change lever assembly defective. Check the change lever assembly.
Hard to shift into 2nd 1. Worn or incorrect MTF. Check and/or replace the MTF.
gear 2. 2nd synchro ring defective. Check the 2nd synchro ring.
3. 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub defective. Check the 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub.
4. 2nd gear defective. Check 2nd gear.
Hard to shift into 3rd 1. Worn or incorrect MTF. Check and/or replace the MTF.
gear 2. 3rd synchro ring defective. Check the 3rd synchro ring.
3. 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub defective. Check the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub.
4. 3rd gear defective. Check 3rd gear.
Hard to shift into 4th 1. Worn or incorrect MTF. Check and/or replace the MTF.
gear 2. 4th synchro ring defective. Check the 4th synchro ring.
3. 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub defective. Check the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub.
4. 4th gear defective. Check 4th gear.
Hard to shift into 5th 1. Worn or incorrect MTF. Check and/or replace the MTF.
gear 2. 5th synchro ring defective. Check the 5th synchro ring.
3. 5th synchro sleeve defective. Check the 5th synchro sleeve and hub.
4. 5th gear defective. Check 5th gear.
Hard to shift into 1. Worn or incorrect MTF. Check and/or replace the MTF.
reverse 2. Clutch defective. Check the clutch.
3. Reverse shift fork defective. Check the reverse shift fork.
4. Reverse idler gear defective. Check the reverse idler gear.
5. Reverse gear defective. Check reverse gear.
Noise from the 1. Worn or incorrect MTF. Check and/or replace the MTF.
transmission 2. Low MTF level. Check the MTF level.
3. Worn or damaged transmission gears. Check the transmission gears.
4. Worn or damaged transmission bearings. Check the transmission bearings.
Shift lever does not 1. Worn or incorrect MTF. Check and/or replace the MTF.
operate smoothly 2. Shift cable defective. Check the shift cable.
3. Joint in shift cable and transmission or body. Check joint in the shift cable.
Transmission jumps out 1. Worn or incorrect MTF. Check and/or replace the MTF.
of gear 2. Detent ball springs defective. Check the detent ball springs.
3. Worn gear dogs. Check the gear dogs.
Clutch Replacement
Clutch alignment tool set
07PAF-0020000
Ring gear holder

07LAB-PV00100
Sliding hammer weight
07741-0010201
Driver handle, 15 x 135 L

07749-0010000
Bearing remover shaft 15

07936-KC10100
Bearing remover head 15
07936-KC10200

07946-1870100
Engine Side
Pressure Plate Inspection and Removal
2. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for height using the dial indicator (A). If the height is more than the service limit,
replace the pressure plate.
3. Install the ring gear holder (A) and the clutch alignment tool set (B).
4. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate mounting bolts (C) in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then
remove the pressure plate (D).
5. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for wear at the release bearing contact area.
6. Inspect the pressure plate (A) surface for wear, cracks, and burning.
7. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the
warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate.
Clutch Disc Inspection and Removal

8. Remove the clutch disc (A) and the clutch alignment tool set (B).
9. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slippage or oil. If the clutch disc looks burnt or is oil soaked, replace
the clutch disc. If the clutch disc is oil soaked, find and repair the source of the oil leak.
10. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the measurement is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc.
Standard (New): 7.25−7.95 mm (0.285−0.313 in.) max.
11. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the measurement is
less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc.
Standard (New): 1.00−1.50 mm (0.039−0.059 in.) max.
Flywheel Inspection
12. Remove the ring gear holder.
13. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage.
14. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks and burning.
15. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B). Through at least two full turns with pushing against the
flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the measurement is not within
the standard, replace the flywheel, and recheck the runout. Go to Step 16 .
Flywheel Replacement
16. Install the ring gear holder.
17. Loosen the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Remove the bolts, then remove the
flywheel and the ring gear holder.
18. Install the flywheel on the crankshaft, and install the mounting bolts finger-tight.
19. Install the ring gear holder (A), then torque the flywheel mounting bolts (B) in a crisscross pattern in several steps.
Pilot Bearing Inspection

20. Inspect the crankshaft pilot bearing for wear and damage.
21. Inspect the inside surface of the crankshaft pilot bearing with your finger. If the crankshaft pilot bearing is not
smooth, replace it; go to Step 22 .
Pilot Bearing Replacement

22. Remove the crankshaft pilot bearing (A) using the bearing remover shaft (B), bearing remover head (C), and the
sliding hammer weight (D).
23. Install the new pilot bearing (A) into the crankshaft using the 15 x 135L driver handle (B) and 28 x 30 mm bearing
driver attachment (C). Apply a light coat of molybdenum grease to the bearing surface.
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation
24. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splines of the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch disc slides
freely on the mainshaft.
25. Apply a light coat of molybdenum to the crankshaft pilot bearing (A).
26. Apply molybdenum grease to the splines (B) of the clutch disc (C), then install the clutch disc using the clutch
alignment tool set (D).
27. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting bolts (B) finger-tight.
28. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the
diaphragm spring.
PRESSURE PLATE MOUNTING BOLT TORQUE:
25 N·m (2.6 kgf·m, 19 lbf·ft)
29. Remove the ring gear holder (A), and the clutch alignment tool set (B).
30. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height.
31. Do the release bearing inspection, and replace if it necessary.
Transmission Side
Release Bearing Removal
2. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B).
3. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing by squeezing the release fork set spring (D) with pliers.
Remove the release bearing (E).
Release Bearing Inspection

4. Check the play of the release bearing by hand. If there is excessive play or noise, replace the release bearing.
NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent.
Release Bearing Installation

5. Apply Molybdenum Grease to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release
bearing guide (D) in the shaded areas, then set the release fork set spring (E).
NOTE: Replace the release fork bolt if necessary.
6. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while
inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing.
7. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt
squarely.
8. Install the release fork boot (F). Make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing.
9. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B), and that the
release bearing slides smoothly. Wipe off any excess grease.
M/T Assembly Removal
AAR-T-1256-J00
3. Remove the cowl covers and hood hinge cover.
5. Remove under-cowl panel.
8. Remove the air cleaner stay.
9. Remove the battery base bolts (A), loosen the two bolts (B), remove the battery harness clamp (C) and the bracket
bolt (D) then remove the battery base (E).
10. Remove the clutch hose bracket (A) and the slave cylinder (B). Remove the clutch line from the clip (C), then
carefully move the slave cylinder out of the way to avoid bending the clutch line.
NOTE:
Do not disconnect the clutch line joints.
Do not press the clutch pedal after the slave cylinder has been removed.
11. Disconnect the back-up light switch connector (A), then remove the harness clip (B).
12. Remove the lock pins (A), shift cable bracket bolts (B), and harness clip (C), then disconnect the shift cables (D),
from the change lever assembly (E). Carefully remove both cables and the shift cable bracket (F) together to avoid
bending the cables.
13. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) connector.
14. Remove the purge control SOL.V. hose (A). Install the hanger plate (B) to the bolt hole (C) at the air cleaner
housing mounting bracket with the 8 x 1.25 mm bolt.
15. Install the engine support hanger (A) with the hook (B) to the vehicle. Tighten the wing nut (C) by hand, and lift and
support the engine.
16. Remove the one upper transmission mounting bolt.
17. Remove the ground cable (A), transmission mount nuts (B), and transmission mount bolt (C), from the transmission
bracket (D).
20. Drain the transmission fluid. Reinstall the drain plug using a new sealing washer.
21. Remove the right and left driveshafts.
22. Remove the heat cover.
23. Remove the clutch case cover.

24. Securely support the transmission with a transmission jack.
25. Remove the torque rod.
26. Remove the torque rod bracket.
27. Remove the lower transmission mounting bolts.

28. Pull the transmission away from the engine until the transmission mainshaft clears the clutch pressure plate.
29. Slowly lower the transmission. Check once again that all hoses and electrical wiring are disconnected and free
from the transmission then lower it completely. Remove the two dowel pins.
M/T Assembly Installation
AAR-T-1256-J00
1. Make sure two dowel pins (A) are installed in prescribed hole on the engine block as shown.
2. Check the release bearing, and reinstall the release bearing and the release fork with applying appropriate grease.
3. Place the transmission on the transmission jack, and raise it to the engine unit level.
4. Install the lower transmission mounting bolts.
5. Install the clutch case cover.
6. Install the torque rod bracket with new bolt (A) and bolts (B).
7. Loosely install the torque rod new bolt (A), new nut (B) and new bolt (C), then remove the transmission jack.
8. Install the heat cover.

9. Install the right and left driveshafts.
11. Tighten the new transmission mount bolts (A), three new engine mount nuts (B), and ground cable (C) to the
specified torque value.
12. Loosen the wing nut (A). Remove the hook (B) and engine support hanger (C) from the vehicle.
13. Remove the hanger plate (A) to the air cleaner stay (B) with the 8 x 1.25 mm bolt (C). Install the purge control
SOL.V. hose (D).
14. Tighten the torque rod with the bolts and nut to the specified torque value.
15. Install the one upper transmission mounting bolts.
16. Connect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) connector.
17. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the cable ends (A), and connect the cable end to the change lever assembly
(B), then install the shift cable bracket (C), harness clip (D) and the lock pins (E). Do not bend or damage the shift
cables.
NOTE: When you apply the silicone grease, make sure not to adhere to the terminal part of connectors and
surrounding switches. Also do not touch the switches and the terminal part of connector by hands or glove that
adheres the silicone grease.
18. Connect the back-up light switch connector (A), then install the harness clip (B).
19. Apply a light coat of molybdenum grease to the end of the slave cylinder rod (A). Install the slave cylinder (B) and
clutch line bracket (C). Install the clutch line in the clip (D). Take care not to bend the clutch line.
20. Install the battery base (A) and harness clip (B).
21. Install the air cleaner stay.

24. Refill the transmission fluid to the proper level.
28. Install the hood hinge cover and cowl cover.
30. Check the wheel alignment and adjust it if necessary.
31. Test-driver the vehicle.
M/T Assembly Disassembly
Exploded View - Clutch Housing
Exploded View - Transmission Housing

NOTE: Place the clutch housing on two pieces of wood thick enough to keep the mainshaft from hitting the workbench.
1. Remove the release bearing and the release fork.
2. Remove the set screws (A), the 12 mm washers (B), the springs (C), the steel balls (D) and the back-up light
switch (E).
3. Remove the change lever assembly (A) and 8 x 10 mm dowel pins (B).
4. Remove the drain plug (A), filler plug (B), the sealing washers (C), and the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (D), the O-
rings (E).
5. Remove the 8 mm flange bolts (A) and transmission hanger (B) in a crisscross pattern in several steps.
6. Remove the 32 mm sealing screw (A).

7. Expand the 52 mm snap ring (B) on the countershaft ball bearing, and remove it from the groove using a pair of
snap ring pliers.
8. Remove the transmission housing (C) and 14 x 20 mm dowel pins (D).
9. Remove the reverse idler gear (A) and the reverse gear shaft (B).
10. Remove the reverse shift fork.
11. Remove the reverse lock cam.
12. Tape the mainshaft splines, then remove the mainshaft assembly (A) and the countershaft assembly (B) with the
shift forks (C) from the clutch housing (D).
13. Remove the 8 mm special bolt (E) and the 8 mm spring washer (F).
14. Remove the 36 mm spring washer (G) and the 26 mm washer (H).
15. Remove the differential assembly (A), and the magnet (B).
16. Remove the oil gutter plate (A), the oil guide plate M (B), and the 72 mm shim (C).
M/T Assembly Reassembly
NOTE: Prior to reassembly, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply MTF to any contact surfaces.
1. Install the magnet (A) and differential assembly (B).
2. Install the 8 mm spring washer (A) and the 8 mm special bolt (B).
3. Install the 36 mm spring washer (C) and 26 mm washer (D) over the ball bearing (E). Note the installation direction
of the spring washer.
4. Tape the mainshaft splines (F) with vinyl tape to protect the seal. Install the mainshaft and countershaft (G) into the
shift forks (H), and install them as an assembly.
5. Install the reverse lock cam.
6. Install the reverse shift fork.
7. Install the reverse idler gear (A) and reverse gear shaft (B).
8. Select the proper size 72 mm shim (A) according to the measurements made during the Mainshaft Thrust
Clearance Adjustment. Install the oil gutter plate (B), oil guide plate M (C) and 72 mm shim into the transmission
housing (D).
9. Clean any dirt or oil from the transmission housing and clutch housing mating surface. Apply liquid gasket (P/N
08C70-K0234M, 08C70-K0334M, or 08C70-X0331S) to the sealing surface as shown.
10. Install the 14 x 20 mm dowel pins (A).

11. Make the finger (B) of tapered cone ring touch the 5th shift fork (C) as shown.
12. Lower the transmission housing the rest of the way as you expand the 52 mm snap ring (D). Release the snap ring
so it seats in the groove of the countershaft bearing.
13. Check that the 52 mm snap ring is securely seated in the groove of the countershaft bearing.
Dimension (1) as installed: 4.6−8.3 mm (0.18−0.33 in.)
14. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08C70-K0234M, 08C70-K0334M, or 08C70-X0331S) to the threads of the 32 mm sealing
screw (E), and install it on the transmission housing.
15. Install the transmission hanger (A) and the 8 mm flange bolts finger-tight.
16. Tighten the 8 mm flange bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps.
17. Clean any dirt or oil from the change lever assembly sealing surface. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08C70-K0234M,
08C70-K0334M, or 08C70-X0331S) to the sealing surface.
18. Install the 8 x 10 mm dowel pins (A) and change lever assembly (B).
19. Install the set screws (A), new 12 mm washers (B), springs (C), and steel balls (D).
20. Install the new washer (E) and back-up light switch (F).
21. Install the new washers (A), drain plug (B), filler plug (C), new O-ring (D), and vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (E).
Back-up Light Switch Test
1. Disconnect the back-up light switch 2P connector (A).
2. Check for continuity between the back-up light switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be
continuity when the shift lever is in reverse. If the result is faulty, go to Step 3 .
3. Remove the back-up light switch (A). Check for continuity between the back-up light switch 2P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2. There should be continuity when the switch end (B) is pressed, and no continuity when the switch
end is released. If the result is faulty, replace the back-up light switch. If the switch is OK, check the reverse shift
piece in the transmission.
4. Install the removed or the new back-up light switch and new washer.
5. Connect the back-up light switch 2P connector.
M/T Clutch Housing Countershaft Bearing Replacement
07JAC-PH80100

07JAC-PH80200
07741-0010201

07749-0010000

07746-0010400
1. Remove the needle bearing (A) using the 20−40 mm adjustable bearing remover head (B), sliding hammer weight
(C) and bearing remover shaft (D), then remove oil guide plate C (E).
2. Position the oil guide plate C (A) and new needle bearing (B) in the bore of the clutch housing (C).
3. Press in the needle bearing using the 15 x 135L driver handle (D), 52 x 55 mm bearing driver attachment (E).
M/T Clutch Housing Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
07JAC-PH80100

07JAC-PH80200
07741-0010201

07749-0010000

07746-0010200
07746-0010400
1. Remove the differencial assembly.
2. Remove the ball bearing (A) from the clutch housing (B) using the 20−40 mm adjustable bearing remover head (C),
sliding hammer weight (D) and bearing remover shaft (E).
3. Remove the oil seal (A) from the clutch side.

Be careful when removing the oil seal so the clutch housing is not damaged.
4. Drive the new oil seal in from the transmission side using the 15 x 135L driver handle (A) and 37 x 40 mm bearing
driver attachment (B).
5. Drive the new ball bearing (A) in from the transmission side using the 15 x 135L driver handle (B) and 52 x 55 mm
bearing driver attachment (C).
M/T Clutch Housing Mainshaft Thrust Clearance Adjustment
Base adapter
07GAJ-PG20130
Base collar
07GAJ-PG20120
Catch adapter
07GAJ-PG20110
1. Remove the 72 mm shim (A) and oil guide plate M (B) from the transmission housing (C).
2. Install the 3rd/4th synchro hub (A), the distance collar (B), the 5th synchro hub (C), distance collar (D), and ball
bearing (E) on the mainshaft (F), then install the assembled mainshaft in the transmission housing (G).
3. Install the washer (H) on the mainshaft.
4. Measure distance (1) between the end of the transmission housing and washer with a straight edge and vernier
caliper. Measure at three locations and average the reading.
5. Measure distance (2) between the end of the clutch housing (A) and bearing inner race (B) with a straight edge and
depth gauge. Measure at three locations and average the readings.
Shim Selection Formula

6. Select the proper 72 mm shim from the chart. Follow the example below, and use the measurements you made in
steps 4 and 5:
(Basic Formula)
(1) + (2) − (0.75 + 0.11) = shim thickness (maximum)
(1) + (2) − (0.75 + 0.18) = shim thickness (minimum)
Add distance (1) (step 4) to distance (2) (step 5).

0.75 mm (0.029 in): Spring washer, a dimension in the installation.
0.11 mm (0.004 in): Minimum thrust clearance.
0.18 mm (0.007 in): Maximum thrust clearance.
(For example)
2.41 + 0.22 − (0.75 + 0.11) = 1.77 mm (0.070 in.)
2.41 + 0.22 − (0.75 + 0.18) = 1.70 mm (0.067 in.)
7. Take the middle value of the minimum value and the maximum value, and select shim of 1.74 mm (0.069 in).
72 mm Shim
A 23931-P21-000 0.60 mm (0.0236 in.)
B 23932-P21-000 0.63 mm (0.0248 in.)
C 23933-P21-000 0.66 mm (0.0260 in.)
D 23934-P21-000 0.69 mm (0.0271 in.)
E 23935-P21-000 0.72 mm (0.0283 in.)
F 23936-P21-000 0.75 mm (0.0295 in.)
G 23937-P21-000 0.78 mm (0.0307 in.)
H 23938-P21-000 0.81 mm (0.0319 in.)
I 23939-P21-000 0.84 mm (0.0331 in.)
J 23940-P21-000 0.87 mm (0.0343 in.)
K 23941-P21-000 0.90 mm (0.0354 in.)
L 23942-P21-000 0.93 mm (0.0366 in.)
M 23943-P21-000 0.96 mm (0.0378 in.)
N 23944-P21-000 0.99 mm (0.0390 in.)
O 23945-P21-000 1.02 mm (0.0402 in.)
P 23946-P21-000 1.05 mm (0.0413 in.)
Q 23947-P21-000 1.08 mm (0.0425 in.)
R 23948-P21-000 1.11 mm (0.0437 in.)
S 23949-P21-000 1.14 mm (0.0449 in.)
T 23950-P21-000 1.17 mm (0.0461 in.)
U 23951-P21-000 1.20 mm (0.0472 in.)
V 23952-P21-000 1.23 mm (0.0484 in.)
W 23953-P21-000 1.26 mm (0.0496 in.)
X 23954-P21-000 1.29 mm (0.0508 in.)
Y 23955-P21-000 1.32 mm (0.0520 in.)
Z 23956-P21-000 1.35 mm (0.0531 in.)
AA 23957-P21-000 1.38 mm (0.0543 in.)
AB 23958-P21-000 1.41 mm (0.0555 in.)
AC 23959-P21-000 1.44 mm (0.0567 in.)
AD 23960-P21-000 1.47 mm (0.0579 in.)
AE 23961-P21-000 1.50 mm (0.0591 in.)
AF 23962-P21-000 1.53 mm (0.0602 in.)
AG 23963-P21-000 1.56 mm (0.0614 in.)
AH 23964-P21-000 1.59 mm (0.0626 in.)
AI 23965-P21-000 1.62 mm (0.0638 in.)
AJ 23966-P21-000 1.65 mm (0.0650 in.)
AK 23967-P21-000 1.68 mm (0.0661 in.)
AL 23968-P21-000 1.71 mm (0.0673 in.)
AM 23969-P21-000 1.74 mm (0.0685 in.)
AN 23970-P21-000 1.77 mm (0.0697 in.)
AO 23971-P21-000 1.80 mm (0.0709 in.)
8. Install the 72 mm shim (A) selected and oil guide plate M (B) in the transmission housing (C).
9. Throughly clean the spring washer (A) and washer (B) before installing them on the clutch housing side ball bearing
(C). Note the installation direction of the spring washer.
10. Install the mainshaft in the clutch housing.
11. Place the transmission housing over the mainshaft and onto the clutch housing.
12. Tighten the clutch and transmission housings with several 8 mm bolts.
NOTE: It is not necessary to use sealing agent between the housings.
13. Tap the mainshaft with a plastic hammer.
14. Slide the base collar (B), and base adapter (C) over the mainshaft (A).
15. Attach the catch adapter (A), base collar (B), and base adapter (C) to the mainshaft as follows:
Back-out the mainshaft holder bolt (D) and loosen the two hex bolts (E).
Fit the holder over the mainshaft so its lip is towards the transmission.
Align the mainshaft holder's lip around the groove at the inside of the mainshaft splines, then tighten the hex
bolts.
16. Seat the mainshaft fully by tapping its end with a plastic hammer.
17. Thread the mainshaft holder bolt in until it just contacts the wide surface of the mainshaft base.
18. Zero a dial gauge (A) on the end of the mainshaft.

19. Turn the mainshaft holder bolt (B) clockwise; stop turning when the dial gauge (A) has reached its maximum
movement. The reading on the dial gauge is the amount of mainshaft end play.
Do not turn the mainshaft holder bolt more than 60 degrees after the needle of the dial gauge stops moving, this
may damage the transmission.
20. If the reading is within the standard, the clearance is correct. If the reading is not within the standard, recheck the
shim thickness.
Standard: 0.11−0.18 mm (0.004−0.007 in.)
M/T Countershaft Disassembly
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View in the countershaft reassembly as need removing components except pressing into the
countershaft.
1. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a bench vise with wood blocks.
2. Use a chisel (A) to raise the locknut tab (B) from the groove in the countershaft.
3. Remove the locknut (left-hand threads) (A) and the spring washer (B).
out of the ball bearing * (F).
*L15A7 engine: Needle bearing
out of the 4th gear.
6. Support 3rd gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the countershaft (E)
out of the 3rd gear.
M/T Countershaft Assembly Clearance Inspection
1. Measure the clearance between the 1st gear (A) and the countershaft (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the clearance is
Standard: 0.03−0.12 mm (0.001−0.005 in.)
2. Measure the length of the 1st gear distance collar as shown.

If the thickness is not within than the standard, replace the distance collar.
Standard: 26.53−26.58 mm (1.044−1.046 in.)
3. Measure the thickness of the 1st gear.

If the thickness of 1st gear is less than the service limit, replace 1st gear with a new one.
If the thickness of 1st gear is within the service limit, replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub with a new one.
Standard: 27.42−27.47 mm (1.080−1.081 in.)
4. Measure the clearance between the 2nd gear (A) and 3rd gear (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the clearance is more
than the service limit, go to Step 4 .
Standard: 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.)

If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the distance collar with a new one.
If the thickness is within the service limit, go to Step 5 .
Standard: 27.53−27.56 mm (1.084−1.085 in.)
6. Measure the thickness of the 2nd gear.

If the thickness of 2nd gear is less than the service limit, replace 2nd gear with new one.
If the thickness of 1st gear is within the service limit, replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub with a new one.
Standard: 27.41−27.46 mm (1.079−1.081 in.)
M/T Countershaft Inspection
1. Inspect the gear surface and bearing surface for wear and damage, then measure the mainshaft at points A, B, and
C. If any part of the mainshaft is less than the service limit, replace it with a new one.
Standard:
A (Ball bearing contact area):
24.980−24.993 mm (0.9835−0.9840 in.)
B (Distance collar contact area):
36.487−36.500 mm (1.4365−1.4370 in.)
C (Needle bearing contact area):
34.000−34.015 mm (1.3386−1.3392 in.)
Service Limit:
A: 24.93 mm (0.981 in.)
B: 36.44 mm (1.4346 in.)
C: 33.95 mm (1.337 in.)
2. Inspect the runout by supporting both ends of the countershaft. Rotate the countershaft two complete revolutions
when measuring the runout. If the runout exceeds the service limit, replace the countershaft with a new one.
M/T Change Lever Clearance Inspection
1. Measure the clearance between change lever (A) and the select lever (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the clearance is
Standard: 0.05−0.35 mm (0.002−0.014 in.)
2. Measure the groove width of the change lever.

If distance is not within the standard, replace the change lever with a new one.
If distance is within the standard, replace the select lever with a new one.
Standard: 13.00−13.15 mm (0.512−0.518 in.)
M/T Change Lever Assembly Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE: Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply grease to contact
surfaces as shown.
M/T Reverse Shift Fork Clearance Inspection
1. Measure the clearance between reverse idler gear (A) and the reverse shift fork (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the
Standard: 1.30−1.90 mm (0.051−0.075 in.)
2. Measure the width of the reverse shift fork.

If distance is not within the standard, replace the reverse shift fork with a new one.
If distance is within the standard, replace the reverse idler gear with a new one.
Standard: 13.5−13.8 mm (0.53−0.54 in.)
M/T Shift Forks Clearance Inspection
NOTE: The synchro sleeve and synchro hub should be replaced as a set.
1. Measure the clearance between each shift fork (A) and its matching synchro sleeve (B). If the clearance exceeds
the service limit, go to Step 2 .
Standard: 0.35−0.65 mm (0.014−0.026 in.)
2. Measure the thickness of the shift fork (A) fingers.

If the thickness of the shift fork finger is not within the standard, replace the shift fork with a new one.
If the thickness of the shift fork finger is within the standard, replace the synchro sleeve with a new one.
Standard:
1st/2nd, 3rd/4th shift forks: 7.4−7.6 mm (0.29−0.30 in.)
5th shift fork: 6.7−6.9 mm (0.26−0.27 in.)
3. Measure the clearance between the shift forks (A) and the shift arm (B). If the clearance exceeds the service limit,
go to Step 4 .
Standard: 0.2−0.5 mm (0.008−0.020 in.)
4. Measure the width of the shift arm (A).

If the width of the shift arm is not within the standard, replace the shift arm with a new one.
If the width of the shift arm is within the standard, replace the shift fork or shift piece with a new one.
Standard: 12.9−13.0 mm (0.508−0.512 in.)
M/T Shift Forks Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE: Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply MTF to all contact
surfaces.
M/T Mainshaft Disassembly
Bearing separator set
07631-0010000
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View in the mainshaft Reassembly as need removing components except pressing into the
mainshaft.
1. Remove the angular ball bearing (A) using bearing separator set (B).
2. Remove the tapered cone ring, distance collar, synchro ring and 5th synchro sleeve.
3. Support 5th gear (A) on steel blocks, and press the mainshaft out of the 5th synchro hub (B).
NOTE: Do not use a jaw-type puller; it can damage the gear teeth.
4. Support the 3rd gear (A) on steel blocks, and press the mainshaft out of the 3rd/4th synchro hub (B).
NOTE: Do not use a jaw-type puller; it can damage the gear teeth.
M/T Mainshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
07746-0030100

07746-0030300
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed during this procedure.
1. Clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant all contact surfaces except the 3rd/4th and 5th synchro
hubs.
2. Install the needle bearing (A) and 3rd gear (B) onto the mainshaft (C).
3. Install the synchro ring (D) with the synchro spring (E) onto the 3rd gear.
4. Install the 3rd/4th synchro hub (A) by aligning the synchro ring fingers (B) with the grooves (C) in the 3rd/4th
synchro hub.
NOTE: Make sure the installing direction of the 3rd/4th synchro hub.
5. Press in the 3rd/4th synchro hub (A) using the 40 mm inner driver handle (B) and 30 mm inner bearing driver
attachment (C).
6. Install the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve (A) by aligning the stops (B) of the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and 3rd/4th synchro
hub. After installing, check the operation of the 3rd/4th synchro hub set.
7. Install the synchro ring (A) with the synchro spring (B) by aligning the synchro ring fingers (C) with the grooves (D)
in the 3rd/4th synchro hub.
8. Install 4th gear (E) onto the synchro ring.
9. Install the 4th/5th gear distance collar (A) with the needle bearings (B) and 5th gear (C).
10. Install the synchro ring (D) with the synchro spring (E) onto the 5th gear.
11. Install the 5th synchro hub (A) by aligning the synchro ring fingers (B) with the grooves (C) in the 5th synchro hub.
12. Press in the 5th synchro hub (A) using the 40 mm inner driver handle (B) and 30 mm inner bearing driver
attachment (C).
13. Install the 5th synchro sleeve (A) by aligning the slots of the 5th synchro sleeve and the 5th synchro hub (B). After
installing, check the operation of the 5th synchro hub set.
NOTE: The slots layout is inequable. Set correctly them.
14. Install the synchro ring (A) with the synchro spring (B) by aligning the synchro ring fingers (C) with the grooves (D)
in the 5th synchro hub.
15. Install the distance collar (E) and tapered cone ring (F).
16. Press in the new angular ball bearing (A) using the 40 mm inner driver handle (B) 30 mm inner bearing driver
attachment (C) and press (D).
M/T Mainshaft Assembly Clearance Inspection
NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace the synchro sleeve and hub as a set.
1. Support the bearing inner race with a socket (A), and push down on the mainshaft (B).
2. Measure the clearance between 2nd (C) and 3rd (D) gears with a feeler gauge (E).
Standard: 0.06−0.21 mm (0.002−0.008 in.)
3. Measure the thickness of 3rd gear.

If the thickness of 3rd gear is less than the service limit, replace 3rd gear with a new one.
If the thickness of 3rd gear is within the service limit, replace the 3rd/4th synchro hub with a new one.
Standard: 27.92−27.97 mm (1.099−1.101 in.)
4. Measure the clearance between 4th gear (A) and the distance collar (B) with a dial indicator (C). If the clearance is
Standard: 0.06−0.19 mm (0.002−0.007 in.)
5. Measure distance (1) on the spacer collar.

Standard: 24.03−24.06 mm (0.946−0.947 in.)

If the thickness of 4th gear is less than the service limit, replace 4th gear with a new one.
If the thickness of 4th gear is within the service limit, replace the 3rd/4th synchro hub with a new one.
Standard: 27.02−27.07 mm (1.064−1.066 in.)
7. Measure the clearance between the distance collar (A) and 5th gear (B) with a dial indicator (C). If the clearance is
Standard: 0.06−0.19 mm (0.002−0.007 in.)

Standard: 24.03−24.06 mm (0.946−0.947 in.)

If the thickness of 5th gear is less than the service limit, replace 5th gear with a new one.
If the thickness of 5th gear is within the service limit, replace the 5th synchro hub with a new one.
Standard: 28.92−28.97 mm (1.139−1.141 in.)

If the thickness of distance collar is not within standard, replace the distance collar with a new one.
Standard: 12.00−12.05 mm (0.472−0.474 in.)
M/T Mainshaft Inspection
1. Inspect the gear surface and bearing surface for wear and damage, then measure the mainshaft at points A, B, C,
D and E. If any part of the mainshaft is less than the service limit (except E), replace it with a new one.
Standard:
A (Ball bearing contact area):
25.987−26.000 mm (1.0231−1.0236 in.)
B (Distance collar contact area):
28.992−29.005 mm (1.1414−1.1419 in.)
C (Needle bearing contact area):
34.984−35.000 mm (1.3773−1.3780 in.)
D (Ball bearing contact area):
25.977−25.990 mm (1.0227−1.0232 in.)
E (Pilot bearing contact area):
14.870−14.890 mm (0.5854−0.5862 in.)
Service Limit:
A: 25.93 mm (1.020 in.)
B: 28.93 mm (1.139 in.)
C: 34.93 mm (1.375 in.)
D: 25.92 mm (1.020 in.)
2. Inspect the runout by supporting both ends of the mainshaft. Rotate the mainshaft two complete revolutions when
measuring the runout. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the mainshaft with a new one.
M/T Differential Component Location Index
CARRIER BEARING
Replacement,
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

Replacement,
Replacement,
CARRIER BEARING
Replacement,
M/T Differential Backlash Inspection
1. Place the differential assembly on V-blocks (A), and install both axles.
2. Measure the backlash of both pinion gears (B) with a dial indicator (C). If the backlash is not within the standard,
replace the differential carrier.
M/T Differential Carrier Bearings Replacement
Commercially available
bearing puller

07746-0030100
1. Check the carrier bearings for wear and rough rotation. If they rotate smoothly and their rollers show no signs of
wear, the bearings are OK.
2. Remove the carrier bearings (A) with commercially available bearing puller (B).
3. Install the new bearing (A) with the 40 mm inner driver handle and a press. Press each bearing on until it bottoms.
There should be no clearance between the bearings and the carrier.
NOTE: Turn the seal (B) part of the bearing to the outside of differential, and install it.
M/T Differential Oil Seal Replacement
07749-0010000
Oil seal driver attachment, 62 x 72 mm

07JAD-PN00100
1. Remove the differential assembly.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the transmission housing while removing the oil seals.
2. Remove the oil seal (A) from the transmission housing (B).
3. Remove the oil seal (A) from the clutch housing (B).
4. Install the new oil seal (A) in the transmission housing (B) with the 15 x 135L driver handle (C) and the 64 x 72 mm
oil seal driver attachment (D).
5. Install the new oil seal (A) in the clutch housing (B) with the 15 x 135L driver handle (C) and the 64 x 72 mm oil
seal driver attachment (D).
M/T Differential Final Driven Gear/Carrier Replacement
1. Remove the bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the final driven gear from the differential
carrier.
2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfer on the inside diameter facing the carrier. Tighten the bolts in a
crisscross pattern in several steps.
M/T Synchro Ring and Gear Inspection
1. Inspect the inside of each synchro ring (A) for wear. Inspect the teeth (B) of each synchro ring for wear (rounded
off).
2. Inspect the teeth (A) on each synchro sleeve and matching teeth on each gear for wear (rounded off).
3. Inspect the thrust surface (A) on each gear hub for wear.
4. Inspect the cone surface (B) on each gear hub for wear and roughness.
5. Inspect the teeth on all gears (C) for uneven wear, scoring, and cracks.
6. Coat the cone surface of each gear with transmission fluid, and place its synchro ring on it. Rotate the synchro
ring, making sure that it does not slip.
7. Measure the clearance between each gear (A) and its synchro ring (B) all the way round. Hold the synchro ring
against the gear evenly while measuring the clearance. If the clearance is less than the service limit, replace the
synchro ring and gear.
Synchro Ring-to-Gear Clearance

Standard: 0.85−1.10 mm (0.033−0.043 in.)
M/T Synchro Sleeve and Hub Inspection and Reassembly
1. Inspect gear teeth on all synchro hubs and synchro sleeves for rounded off corners, which indicate wear.
2. Install each synchro hub (A) in its mating synchro sleeve (B), and check for freedom of movement. Be sure to
match the three sets of longer teeth (C) (120 degrees apart) on the synchro sleeve with the three sets of deeper
grooves (D) in the synchro hub. Do not install the synchro sleeve with its longer teeth in the synchro hub slots (E)
because it will damage the spring ring.
NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace the synchro sleeve and synchro hub as a set.
Manual Transmission and M/T Differential (Except i-SHIFT)
housing side)
4th 27.02−27.07 mm (1.064−1.066 in.) 26.65 mm (1.049 in.)
Mainshaft 4th/5th I.D. 29.014−29.024 mm (1.1423−1.1427 in.) 29.06 mm (1.144 in.)
B 24.03−24.06 mm (0.946−0.947 in.) ———
MBS distance I.D. 26.02−26.17 mm (1.024−1.030 in.) ———
Manual Transmission and M/T Differential (Except i-SHIFT) (cont'd)

housing side)
B 26.53−26.58 mm (1.044−1.046 in.) ———
against gear
4th forks
5th fork 6.7−6.9 mm (0.26−0.27 in.) ———
Shift arm I.D. 13.973−14.000 mm (0.5501−0.5512 in.) ———
pinion gear
(L12B1, L13Z1)
(L15A7)
M/T model
BATTERY TERMINAL UNDER−DASH

FUSE BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A) T−9 No. 60 (50 A) T1
WHT
WHT
BAT IGNITION
ST SWITCH
BLK PNK
BLK/WHT
B S
M SOLENOID
STARTER
M/T Component Location Index
GEARSHIFT MECHANISM
Replacement,
CHANGE LEVER ASSEMBLY

Disassembly/ Reassembly,
DIFFERENTIAL
REVERSE LOCK CAM SHIFT
in theLEVER
Shop HOUSING
Manual,
Replacement,
P/N 62TF000A
TRANSMISSION
CHANGE LEVER
ClearanceRemoval,
Inspection,
in the ShopinManual,
the ShopP/NManual, P/N 62TF000A
62TF000A
Installation,
BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH Disassembly,
SHIFT FORK
Test, in the Shop Manual,Inspection,
Clearance P/N 62TF000A
TRANSMISSION FLUID in the Shop Manual, Reassembly,
Inspection and Replacement, P/N 62TF000A in the Shop Manual,
in the Shop P/N 62TF000A
Manual,
P/N 62TF000A
REVERSE Disassembly/ Reassembly,
IDLER GEAR
in the Shop Manual,
P/N 62TF000A
MAINSHAFT ASSEMBLY
Clearance Inspection, COUNTERSHAFT ASSEMBLY
REVERSE SHIFT FORK MAINSHAFT COUNTERSHAFT
Clearance Inspection, Disassembly, Disassembly,
in the Shop Manual, Inspection, Inspection,
P/N 62TF000A in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A
Reassembly, Reassembly (L13Z1, L15A7),
Thrust Clearance Adjustment, Reassembly (L12B1),
in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A Bearing Replacement,
Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement, in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A
MTF Inspection and Replacement
1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine OFF.
2. Raise the vehicle on a lift and make sure it is securely supported.
4. Remove the filler plug (A) and sealing washer (B), check the condition of the MTF and make sure it is at the proper
level (C).
5. If the MTF is dirty, remove the drain plug (A) and drain the MTF.
6. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B), and refill the transmission with MTF to the proper level.
Always use Genuine Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF).
Fluid Capacity
1.5 L (1.6 US qt, 1.3 Imp qt) at fluid change
1.6 L (1.7 US qt, 1.4 Imp qt) at overhaul
7. Install the filler plug (C) with a new sealing washer (D).
10. Without service reminder system, this procedure is complete.
With service reminder system

11. If the service reminder system required to replace the MTF, reset the service reminder system, and this procedure
is complete. If the service reminder system did not require to replace the MTF, go to Step 12 and reset the MTF life
with the HDS.
14. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM. If it doesn't communicate, troubleshoot the DLC
circuit.
15. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS.
16. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS.
17. Select SERVICE REMINDER in the EU MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS.
18. Reset SERVICE REMINDER ITEM 3 (shows MTF) with the HDS.
Clutch Component Location Index
NOTE: RHD model is shown, LHD model is similar.

CLUTCH ASSIST BUSH A
CLUTCH ASSIST SPRING
CLUTCH ASSIST BUSH B

CLUTCH
MASTER PEDAL PAD STOPPER
RESERVOIR HOSE CYLINDER
SEAL CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION
Replace. SWITCH B
(With CRUISE CONTROL)
LOCK or CLUTCH PEDAL
PIN ADJUSTING BOLTS
RESERVOIR RETAINING CLIP (Without CRUISE CONTROL)
Replace. Test,
Adjustment,
CLUTCH PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH A
(With SHIFT INDICATOR LAMP)
CLUTCH LINE Test,
CONNECTOR Adjustment,
O-RING PEDAL PIN CLUTCH PEDAL ASSEMBLY

Replace. Replacement,
Adjustment,
CLUTCH LINE
FLYWHEEL CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER

Inspection, CLUTCH HOSE Clutch Hydraulic System
in the Shop Manual, Bleeding,
in the Shop Manual, Overhaul,
CLUTCH LINE BRACKET A
CLUTCH
PILOT BEARING LINE CLUTCH HOSE CLIPS
Inspection, BRACKET Replace.
in the Shop Manual, B
P/N 62TF000A
Replacement, RELEASE BEARING
in the Shop Manual, Removal,
P/N 62TF000A in the Shop Manual,
P/N 62TF000A
CLUTCH DISC Inspection,
Inspection and Removal, in the Shop Manual,
in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A P/N 62TF000A
Installation, Installation,
in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A in the Shop Manual,
P/N 62TF000A
SLAVE CYLINDER
Replacement,
in the Shop Manual, P/N 62TF000A PRESSURE PLATE
Overhaul, CLUTCH LINE Inspection and Removal,
Installation,
Clutch disc
Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement
NOTE:
Without cruise control: Clutch pedal adjusting bolt is substituted as clutch pedal position switch B.
3. Remove the cowl cover and hood hinge cover.
6. LHD model: Remove the air cleaner housing.
7. Remove the brake fluid from the clutch master cylinder reservoir with a syringe.
8. Remove the driver's dashboard under cover.
9. Pry out the lock pin (A), and pull the pedal pin (B) out of the yoke. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (C).
10. LHD model: Remove the clutch pipe bracket bolts (A).
11. LHD model: Remove the reservoir hose from two clips.
12. Disconnect the reservoir hose (A), then remove the clutch line (B) from the clutch master cylinder (C). Plug or wrap
the end of the reservoir hose and clutch line with a shop towel to prevent brake fluid from coming out.
NOTE:
Loosen the flare nut (D) while holding the clutch line connector (E) with a wrench.
Inspect the hose. If the hose has damage, leaks interference, or twisting, replace it.
13. Remove the clutch master cylinder seal (F) from the clutch master cylinder.
14. Remove the retaining clip (A), then remove the clutch line connector (B) and the O-ring (C) from the master cylinder
(D).
15. Install the clutch line connector (A) with a new O-ring (B), then set in a new retaining clip (C) to the master cylinder
(D).
NOTE: Apply the rubber grease on the O-ring and joint part (E) of the clutch line connector.
16. To prevent the retaining clip (A) from coming off, pry apart the tip (B) of the clip with a screwdriver.
17. Install the new clutch master cylinder seal (A) to the clutch master cylinder (B).
18. Connect the clutch line (C), and reservoir hose (D).
NOTE: Tighten the flare nut (E) while holding the clutch line connector (F) with a wrench.
19. LHD model: Install the two reservoir hose clips.
20. LHD model: Install the clutch pipe bracket bolts (A).
21. Make sure the hose clamps (A) are positioned on the master cylinder (B) and reservoir (C) as shown. LHD model
22. LHD model: Install the air cleaner housing.
RHD model
23. Install the master cylinder mounting nuts (A).

24. Apply multipurpose grease to the pedal pin (B), and slide it into the yoke, then install a lock pin (C).
25. Adjust the clutch pedal, clutch pedal position switch A, and clutch pedal position switch B.
27. Install the driver dashboard under cover.
30. Install the cowl cover and hood hinge cover.
32. Check the clutch operation, and check for leaks.
Clutch Pedal Assembly Replacement
NOTE:
Without cruise control: The adjusting bolt is substituted as clutch pedal position switch B.
The illustrations show RHD model.
1. Remove the driver's dashboard under cover .
2. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch A and the clutch pedal position switch B connectors (C).
3. Pry out the lock pin (D), and pull the pedal pin (E) out of the yoke.
4. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (F) and the clutch pedal mounting nuts (G).
5. Remove the clutch pedal assembly (H).
6. Remove clutch pedal position switch A and clutch pedal position switch B.
7. Loosely install clutch pedal position switch A and clutch pedal position switch B.
8. Install the clutch pedal assembly (A).

9. Install the clutch pedal mounting nuts (B) and master cylinder mounting nuts (C).
10. Apply multipurpose grease to the pedal pin (D), and slide it into the yoke, then install a lock pin (E).
11. Adjust the clutch pedal, clutch pedal position switch A, and clutch pedal position switch B.
NOTE: Connect the switch connectors after adjusting them.
13. Install the driver's dashboard under cover .
Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch A, and Clutch Pedal Position Switch B Adjustment
NOTE:
With cruise control: For cruise control, check clutch pedal position switch B.
With shift indicator lamp: For shift indicator, check clutch pedal position switch A.
Without cruise control: The adjusting bolt is substituted as clutch pedal position switch B. The clutch pedal height
adjustment is same procedure as with clutch pedal position switch B.
Remove the driver's floor mat before adjusting the clutch pedal.
If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and push rod, the release bearing will be held against
the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems.
1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch A and the clutch pedal position switch B connectors.
2. Loosen the clutch pedal position switch B locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch B until it no
longer touches the clutch pedal (C).
3. Loosen the clutch pushrod locknut (D), and turn the pushrod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F), and the
stroke (G) at the clutch pedal.
F Clutch Pedal Height:
LHD model: 150 mm (5.91 in.)
RHD model: 145 mm (5.71 in.)
G Clutch Pedal Stroke:

120−130 mm (4.72−5.12 in.)
4. Tighten the clutch pushrod locknut (A).

5. With the clutch pedal released, turn in clutch pedal position switch B until it contacts the clutch pedal.
6. Turn in clutch pedal position switch B an additional 3/4 to 1 turn.
7. While holding clutch pedal position switch B, tighten the locknut (C).
8. Loosen the clutch pedal position switch A locknut (B).

9. Adjust the position of clutch pedal position switch A. Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, then release the
clutch pedal (C) and hold it at the height, so that the switch should be ON/OFF at clutch pedal position switch A
ON/OFF height.
C Clutch Pedal Position Switch A ON/OFF Height:
LHD model: 36.8−42.0 mm (1.45−1.65 in.)
RHD model: 36.2−41.9 mm (1.43−1.65 in.)
10. While holding clutch pedal position switch A, tighten the locknut.
12. Connect the clutch pedal position switch A and the clutch pedal position switch B connectors, then check the
cruise control and the shift indicator lamp operation.
Clutch pedal
LHD 150 mm (5.91 in.) ———
Stroke 120−130 mm (4.72−5.12 in.) ———
Pressure plate
Flywheel
M/T Clutch Housing Differential Thrust Clearance Adjustment
07746-0030100
1. Remove the left driveshaft side oil seal.
2. Install the 72 mm shim (A) that's the same size as the one you removed.
3. Install the differential assembly (A) into the clutch housing.

4. Install the transmission housing onto the clutch housing, then tighten the 8 mm flange bolts in a crisscross pattern
in several steps.
8 x 1.25 mm
27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
5. Use the 40 mm inner driver handle to bottom the differential assembly in the clutch housing.
6. Measure clearance between 72 mm shim and bearing outer race in transmission housing.
Standard: 0.01−0.1 mm (0.0004−0.004 in.)
7. If the clearance is more than the standard, select a new 72 mm shim from the following table. If the clearance
measured in Step 6 is within the standard, go to Step 10 .
72 mm Shim: L12B1 engine

A 41441-PL3-A000 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.)
B 41442-PL3-A000 1.1 mm (0.0433 in.)
C 41443-PL3-A000 1.2 mm (0.0472 in.)
D 41444-PL3-A000 1.3 mm (0.0512 in.)
E 41445-PL3-A000 1.4 mm (0.0551 in.)
F 41446-PL3-A000 1.5 mm (0.0591 in.)
G 41447-PL3-A000 1.6 mm (0.0630 in.)
H 41448-PL3-A000 1.7 mm (0.0669 in.)
J 41449-PL3-A000 1.8 mm (0.0709 in.)
K 41450-PL3-A000 1.05 mm (0.0413 in.)
L 41451-PL3-A000 1.15 mm (0.0453 in.)
M 41452-PL3-A000 1.25 mm (0.0492 in.)
N 41453-PL3-A000 1.35 mm (0.0531 in.)
P 41454-PL3-A000 1.45 mm (0.0571 in.)
Q 41455-PL3-A000 1.55 mm (0.0610 in.)
R 41456-PL3-A000 1.65 mm (0.0650 in.)
S 41457-PL3-A000 1.75 mm (0.0689 in.)
8. Remove the bolts and transmission housing.

9. Replace the thrust shim selected in Step 7 , then recheck the clearance.
10. Install the new left driveshaft side oil seal.
11. Reinstall the transmission housing.
Reverse idler gear
M/T Countershaft Reassembly
Exploded View
Countershaft
housing side)
B 26.53−26.58 mm (1.044−1.046 in.) ———
Change lever
Select lever
Reverse shift fork
Shift fork
4th forks
5th fork 6.7−6.9 mm (0.26−0.27 in.) ———
Shift arm
Shift arm I.D. 13.973−14.000 mm (0.5501−0.5512 in.) ———
Mainshaft
housing side)
Mainshaft 4th/5th gear distance collar
Mainshaft 4th/5th I.D. 29.014−29.024 mm (1.1423−1.1427 in.) 29.06 mm (1.144 in.)
B 24.03−24.06 mm (0.946−0.947 in.) ———
MBS distance collar
MBS distance I.D. 26.02−26.17 mm (1.024−1.030 in.) ———
4th 27.02−27.07 mm (1.064−1.066 in.) 26.65 mm (1.049 in.)
Mainshaft 5th gear
pinion gear
Synchro ring
against gear
VTEC System (L12B1 engine)
Operation (L12B1 engine)
(L12B1, L13Z1)
Safety Messages
Safety Messages
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help you make informed decisions, we have provided safety
messages, and other safety information throughout this manual. Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you
about all the hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. You must use your own good judgment.
You will find important safety information in a variety of forms including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or
CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
Instructions − how to service this vehicle correctly and safely.

All information contained in this manual is based on the latest product information available at the time of printing. We
reserve the right to make changes at anytime without notice. No part of this publication may be reproduced, or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text, figures, and tables.
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. The purpose of this message is
to help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
All Rights Reserved HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.
Wiring Diagram
Gauges
Under−dash
Auxiliary
ECM/PCM
MICU
Audio
Immobilizer
ABS, System
Battery,
A/T
Power
SRS Gear
Heating/Air
EPS Fuse/Relay
Under−hood
System,
Windows,
Battery
Position
Terminal
Power Box
Ignition
Relay
Indicator
Conditioning,
Wipers/Washers, Box,
Key
Mirrors
Fuse
Panel
Rear
Combination Box,Charging
Switch,
Light, Accessory
System,
Under−dash
Window
Light Interior
Defogger
Switch, Starting
Power
Lights,
Fuse/Relay
Cable Reel, Socket,
System,
Back−up
Box
Steering Door
FuelLock
Lights,
Wheel Pump,
BrakeActuators
Horns
lights,
Switches, FrontWarning
Hazaed PositionSwitch
Lights, Taillights, License Plate lights, Turn Signal Lights, Headlights
A AA
AA *5 B BB CC
CC
C
11
10
13
12
15
14
16987654321 No . 1 (10 A)*2
F USE
(1− C)
15 PNK
*7
PNK
AL ARM CO NT RO L SIREN
UL T RASO NIC
1 SENSO R
IG NIT IO N SW IT CH
OFF
*6 (RHD mo d el) *7 *5 (L HD mo d el)
2 No . 1 (10 A)*2 +B No . 1 (10 A)*2 No . HAZ A)*2W ARNING

1 (10ARD T URN SIG NAL No . 5 (10 A)*L2EF T T URN T URN SIG NAL RIG HT T URN L EF T T URN No T
. URN
12 (10SIG 2
A)*NAL No . 24 (10 A)*2
RIG HT T URN
MICU +B
(12− D)
PNK BACK UP
F USE BACK UP F USE No . 23 (10 A)*2 F USESW IT CH SW IT CH F USE SIG NAL L IG HT INDICAT O R SIG NAL L IG HT MICU
(12− B)
SIG NAL L IG HT F USE
INDICAT O R SIG NAL LF IG
USEHT
(1− C) SIREN (1− C) F USE (1− C)
(8− D) (8− D) (2− C) (9− B) No . 1 (10 A)*2ACC (7− D) (In tern al co n n(9− C) n )
ectio (9− B) (2−(7−
C) D) (9− C) (2− D)
151 13 13 (2− D) 15 53 12 MICU (+142
B BACK UP) (12− A) 58 75
BAT TUNDER−
ERY DASH No . 10 (7.5 A)*2
F USE/REL AY BO X SENSO R 4 G RN
2 SENSO R
72 104 No . 10 (7.5 A)*2
F USE CO M CO M 2 BAT IG 2 (In tern al co n n ectio n )
(1− C) (2− C) No . 60 (IG N) (50 A)*
BL K 1 ST ART ER (3− C) 113 114 115
F USE 11 W
116
HT*7 117 118 119 O RN 120 121 122 123 116 117 118
49 · BL O W119
ER MO T O R REL120
AY (1− B) 121 122 123
33 49 (1− A)
MICU (12− A, B) IG 1 A) *2
No . 16 (10PNK 13 · INDIVIDUAL MAP L IG HT (9− A) · REAR W INDO W DEF O G G ER REL AY (2− A)
MICU MICU (12− A)
YEL F USE
(2− C) (12− B) · CEIL ING L IG HT (9− A)
1M G ND G ND L T G RN G RN YEL W HT
No . SIREN CO
2 (60 A)* No . 56 (30 A)*
BL K YEL
(13− B) PNK 128
L T G RN129BRN 130BL U BL U BLBL OW U ER BL U W HT 59 W HT W HT W HT BRNW HT BL U BL50UD)127AUXIL IARY
BL U UNDER− HO OWDHT 126
3 5 W HT 3 2 (In
EPSternCO
al NT RO L UNIT
MO T O R
ST
PNK 14
· DAT A L INK[PUR]
CO NNECT O R (DL C) (4− REL AY BOW
X HT
(3− A) W HT W HT
G RY PNK PNK co n n ectio n ) PNK DIMMING 100
CIRCUIT REL AY · G AUG E CO NT RO L MO DUL E (6− C)
(In tern al co n n ectio n ) (In tern al co n n ectio COnMPUL ) L T BL SOURY BL K BL K (1− C) · IMMO BIL IZ ER− KEYL ESS CO NT RO L UNIT (10− A)
G RN
L IG HT ING REL AY 1
T URNING − O F F 2 2 2 2 · AUDIO UNIT (16− A, B) CO MBINAT IO N No . 22 (7.5 A)*
CIRCUIT No . 3 (20 A)* No . 17 (20 A)* No . 19 (20 A)* No . 18 (20 A)* 22 L IG HT SW IT CH No . 10 (7.5 A )
REAR (7− B) W INDO W F USE F USE CEIL ING F USE 10 V ST ABIL IZ ING F USE BL U BRN 51 · PO W ER MIRRO R SW IT CH (11− D) W HT F USE
G1 DEF O INDIVIDUAL CARG O AREA PNK RED PNK 15 · CARG O AREA L IG HT (9− B)
NoG. G3*ER 3 REL AY (1−
1 MAP PL IG HT
C)
R N
(1− D) L IG HT
2 D D3 12 L IG HT
(1− D)
1
CIRCUIT (1− D) No . 22 (7.5 A)*2 No . 1 (10 A)*2 · A/C SW IT CH (15− C) (2− C)
W IPER/W ASHER SW IT CH C C25 G 604 W HT G 602(L ED) 3 UNDER− DASH F USE/REL ED)AY BO Q X 13 (2−(LC)ED)
(6− D)
YEL FG USE RN F USE · AL ARM G RN CO NT RO L SIREN*4 (12− A) · REAR W INDO W DEF O G G ER SW IT CH (15− D)
16(L ED) (L ED) 30 (L ED) (L ED) (L N5 32 M2 M6 C13 31 B34 M20 Q6 E11 (2−A28 C41 (1− C) · UL T RASO NIC SENSO C13 B34 E7 M20 Q6 A28 C41 IG NIT IO N SW IT CH
PUR 34 REAR W INDO W DEF O G G ER SW BLITUCH (15− G RND) A PNK 47HT 48 PUR BRN D) R*4 (12− A) L T BL U O RN (ACC) T URN SIG NAL SW IT CH
W (2− B)
UL T RASO NIC HAZ T URN T URN 66 14
2 +B T URN L T URN R T URN R
No . 59 (20 A)*2 1 (8 W ) (8 W ) (8 W ) HAZ ARD
SW *8 L SW R SW 2
1 *7 T URN L 3 1
48
No . 1 (100DAT A)* A L INK BL U IO N INDICAT BRN 35 REAR W INDO W DEF O G G RED ER (15− D) BACK− PURUP · UNDER−
L IG HT DASH UNDER− DASH DAT A L INK
2 2
No . 58 (30 A/TA)* G2EARNo . 37 (30 A)*2 No . 11 (7.5 A)*2 CO (DL C)
NNECT O R G AUG E CO NTA/T ROKLG EAR PO SIT
BL F RO NT
O R81DRIVE AL TCIRCUIT
ERNAT O R (3− B) No . 11 (7.5 A)* F RO2 NT No . 2 (60 A)*1 ECM/PCM SW IT CH F USE/REL AY F USE/REL AY L EF T RIG HT (O p en : CO NNECT O R (DL C) (O p en : BRAKE
F USE PO SIT IO NF USE F USE (4− D) G RY W MO ASH DUL E (6− B) PASSENG ER'S W ASH DRIVER'S F USE 4 1PASSENG F USE
ER'S (NEP) (O n th e tran X*8
BOsmissio n BL O WBO ERX
No .SIDE5 (10 A)* 2
BACK− UP BACK− UP Brake p ed al p ressed (4− D)) Brake p ed al released ) PEDAL
(1.4
(1−W A)) INDICAT O(1− R A) (2− C) W ASH AIRBAG (2− C) [3] [5]
AIRBAG (1− A) (4− A) DRIVER'S
h o u sin g ) (2− C) MO T O(2− R C) L EF T SIDE RIG HT
MICU LL IGEFHTT AIN SIDE RIG
(In tern HTal SIDE
co
L IG nnHTectio n ) (Clo se: (Clo se: PO SIT IO N
AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG 1 AIRBAG3 CURT ) AT O RAIRBAG CURT AIN(21W AIRBAG 52
IG NIT IO N COW ILASHER PANEL L IG HT OFF ON ON OFF O NW INFASH L ATBRN O RO F F INF L AT O R (5 W ) RED INF L AT O R (CloPURsed·: 9 INF L AT OLRT BL(21W UINF L PNK R ) MICU (IG 1 BACK L TBrake )*8 (12−p ed B)al released ) Brake p ed al RED p ressed ) SW IT CH
REL AY SW IT5CH 4 57 93 92 O F F 4O N 57 2 86INF
In LRAT p oOsitio
RSTnART
(3− C)
) ER* INF L AT O R
1
INF L AT O
1 No . 13 (20 A)*
(1− A) MIST HI 3 LO 2
PO W ER W INDO W MAST ER SW IT CH 111 [4]E CO NT RO L [3] 20 15 PO W ER MIRRO R SW IT CH 154 111
2 2
No . 20 (15 A) *2 No . W (10 A) *2
1 HT G AUG No . 14 (7.5 A) *2 · IMMO BIL IZ ER− KEYL ESS 1 BL U No . 13 (20 A)*2 No . 49 (15 A)*2*4 4 No . 35 (15 A)* No . 50 (15 A)*
76 SIL DR SIL DR O F F KC DR F USEL O KC DR MO DUL E SIL AS SIL RA CO NT RO L UNIT (10− A) *5 L EF T SIDE
F USE F USE SIL RD HI HO O D RADIO F USEDR DR F USEL T G RN 53 DR L EF T SIDE DR 9 F USE REM DR REM DR RIG HT · SIDEIMO
T /GBIL F IZUSEER− KEYL ESS
UNL O CK (2− LOC)CK INTUNL O CK (1− C) L O CK (6− B) UNL O CK UNL O CK (2− D) UNL O CK · MICU (12− D) SW *6 SW (2− D)SW RA SW RD (2− B) SWBACK−AS UP L IG HTSENSO
IMPACT SW IT SW CH*
R (F (9− B)
DRIRST ) (2− B) IMPACT
UNL O CK
(SECO
SENSO R
ND) L O CK IMPACT SENSO
LSW
CO EFNTTRO R(2−L(FB)UNIT
IRST )(10− A)
G3RN/W HT MICU (12−
· ABS No .D)14AT
(7.5 A)*
G AUG E CO NT RO G AUG
L MO E DUL
CO NT E RO L MO DUL E 32 16 ST ART ER IG NIT IO N PG M− F I 43 MO DUL O R− CO NT RO L
E2 (In tern61alE9co n n ectioDRIVER'Sn ) E4 14 E3 94 M24 1 C46 2 69 C45 110 [1] A29 BL U M23 67 C40 C26 45 C32 C33 E1 E8 C22
DO 4OR 1 3 *3 2 8LDO OR 7 DO O R 6 DO O R No . 1 (100 A)*1 APP SENSO R A/B BL O W ER No . 12 (10 A)*2
CUT REL AY
(ST CUT )
SW IT CH
(ST )
MAIN REL AY 2
(F UEL PUMP) No . 24 (10 A)*2
· UNIT (13− A)
L EF TNT RO L UNIT (13− C)
A DAT A INK F USE ECM/PCM BEEPER
(4− B) O R G RNF USE *61 BAT T ERY EPS CO
LO [1]CK BRN PG M− [3]F I RED G AUG G[4]
PG EM− CO FNT F I RO L 2 NoCO
IPUR L O2O
(10[5]A)* CKR No . 8 (7.5 2
A)*[6] L O CK [7] 3 2 L O CK AS 2 3 RESIST
AS 2 2 1 2 (1− A) 1 2 (10 (2−A)* 21 *5 3 2 4 *3 (2− 1 B) L EF
2 T FLRO 1BL U F USE
T NT 3 RIG HT2 OFRN RO NT (14− A)
B KNO B RED MAIN REL WAY
HT 21 MO DUL PUR
RN
MAIN
PG M−
E (6−REL B)(30
AY 1 BL U
. 6 NNECT
KNO W B HT
PUR
RED 2ER− KNO B
F RO NT 2
G RN 3 KNO B AM/F M
W HT
PUR (1−
L EF A)T W HT
PUR
L T BL U RIG
1 G RN
HT (2− C) 2
PNK
2
ECM/PCM
No . 12 3D) AM/F M
(2−L TB)G RN BL U
YEL *3 BL
G
UDO
RY
ONTR SPEAKER (2− D) DO O· RSRS UNIT
SPEAKER
2 No .MICU MAIN
No . 37
REL AY A)* 1 F USE F USE No
IMMO. 1 (10
BIL A)*
IZ No . 14 (7.5 A)* PG M− F I MAIN No . 1 (10 A)* No . 14 (7.5 A)* F USE 1 2 EPS CO RO L AUDIO UNIT (16− A, C)
No
BL. K20 (15 A)* (F I 10
MAIN)(7.5 A)* MICU
(F(F I MAIN)
I MAIN) G AUG(4−
(DL C)
E CO D) NT RO L (2− C) FKEYL
*6 BL U PASSENG 4
ABSCKP
ER'S MO SENSO
DUL AT O R− CO NT RO L UNIT
RPUR ANT CMP
ENNA SENSO RREAR DIMMING G RN REAR A MICU T EMPERAT URE F USE
BL K (5− D) 1 BL K ANT ENNA BRN *5 UNITL T*3G RN ·
SECO NDARY
F USE 8F[7]
USE
(2− (12−
B) D) 9 [6] 2 (12−
(2− 7B) [8]
B) 6 [9] MO(2− DUL
C)
E
USE
7W[8]HT ESS F USE
A/C CO MPRESSO (FRS 7RELR + B) AY(13−2 A) 8 CIRCUIT B
(12− D)CO NT RO L DIAL
58 F USE (2− C) 70 BRN/YEL 47 BRN/YEL BRN/YEL 40
(13− C) 19 17 74 HO 2S ·
(2− C) (2− C) No . IL
39L UMINAT
(15 A)* IO CO MPUL SO56 RY (1− COC) NT RO L UNIT (2−UT
CL D)CH REL AY (F UEL PUMP) AUDIO UNIT CO MPUL81 SO RY 82 (1− C) (2− D)
KEY IL L UMINAT IO N 92N 93 IL L UMINAT (6− B) IO N54 G RN IL L UMINAT
− O F F (10− IO NA) IL L UMINAT IO N IL L UMINAT(2− B) IO3N F(16−
AIL CABL
2−C)SAF E E PUR1 No . 3CABL E 2 83 (15−84B) PUR 58 (SENSO R 2) 5
153 REDCO NTDO M PNK T URNING
CO NT RO L & 14 COUNT RO(3−
BL L &A) 69 CO NT136 RO L & ECM/PCM 2 (MRL Y) (4− A) 3 W INDSHIEL
1 D 2*3 − O F F 5 G RY
T URNING (20 A)* 4 153 14 REARNo W. INDO
6 (10W 69 2RED*3 87LWTHT G RN
*3W ER
YEL L T3 G2RN
BL U*3 YEL MAST
1 L FT ROGNT RNPASSENG
L OW 3INDSHIEL ER'S
3 D/O RG RN*3 O RN*3 L T BL U 3 G RN*3
LT G L RN (4−3C)BRN*3
PUR60 CO NT L IG RO HTL & G RN 50 38 ROW L N& 37 CO NT RO L UP & [L TCIRCUIT
G RN] O F FYEL UN− DIMMING CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
REEL
OW FF IPER MO CIRCUIT
T O REVAPO RAT[4] O5F F
REEL G RY W IPER MO HTT O R
A)*
16 PO L EF T W INDO W
* ER HT SW IT CH DOA)
T (11−SRS
O RG RY* CK
REAR ACT
PNK* UAT
W INDO WINPUT SHAF T O RN*
154 T G RN* PUR*
111
[2]
DIMMING
(L ED)UN− CIRCUIT LDIMMING
O CK(AUTCIRCUIT ORED) 158AUXIL O RN UNDER−
DIMMING
IARY (AUTBL
CIRCUIT HOO )KO D(7− B)DIMMING
111 UN− CIRCUIT BL U DIMMING CIRCUIT YEL /BL UN−
O10
4R V ST ABIL6IZ ING 1 3 2 L EF T RIG O UTRIGPUT SHAF F RO NT 2 1 2 REAR 1
F OA/C
R PO L INT ER (RED) F O R SCAL E (AMBER)
O CK REL AY F OBO 92
X A/C(AMBER) 93 F O RL O
R DIAL L CK
CD (W HIT E) 109 F RO F NT
O R L CD (W HIT77 E) L O CK F OYELR L CD (AMBER) 39 L EFBRN T K
L O CK
BRN/YEL T EMPERAT
RIG HT URE
CIRCUIT 2ECT HO OSENSO
D R2 156 1 REARYEL
157 1 REAR MAP 1SENSO REARR PUR*G10RN(CO 1 REAR
UNT ERSHAF 54 T ) PNK1 UNIT WKNO
PASSENG (VB) (14−
ASHER CKER'S MO A)
SECURITTO R Y1 DRIVER'S
(MAINSHAF T) HIG H BEAM DRIVER'S L IG HT87 LW
1 INDO
T
TIMMO
GAT
AIL W
RNGCH
G AT
BILEIZ ER
CO NDENSER RADIAT O RNo . 58 (30 A)*2 CO MPRESSO R C PASSENG
P UP ER'S R DO WNN REARD UP88 S DO WREAR
SENSO
N R BL K(6− D) UP SW IT CH MAL DOFW N158BL
UNCT IO KN ABS 91 DO O R EPS DO O R SRS DO O RYEL HIG H No . SPEED DO OSENSO
R 2 SIDE R2 [4]AIRBAG DOSENSO
OR 1 [3] SPEED
R INDICAT
MASSEG O R DO
SENSOOR R L T G RNINDICAT O RO ILDO O R ING REL
SEAT BEL T DEF
AYL 2O
INDICAT G ERO R
YEL LE T SW
BL UIT CH L O W F UEL LOW
DRIVER'S F AN REL AY F AN REL REDAY
UN− YELW /BLHTK DRIVER'S
CL UT CH REL AY L T G RNDO OR
(L ED) YEL /BL (L ED)
K
5
ABS (L ED)MO DUL· DO
37 AT OOR−
INJECT R(L ED)
COO RSNT RO (4−LA)ANT ECM/PCM
(L ENNA
UNIT
(5−
ED) L EAD
B)
DO
BLO KR A/T MICUG EAR PO(Clo SITsedIO N: W HT /REDO R
INDICAT W HT /BL U W HTINDICAT /G RN O R SW IT CH INDICAT OSW R IT CHMICUINDICAT G OBL
RN/YEL R K SW IT 3T CHEMPERAT F
10 (7.5
SW ANT A)*
IT CHENNA L EAD
4 URE(Clo sed : CUT OMICU
USE F F SW IT CH (LINDICAT
ED) O T(Clo
R sed : INDICATUN− OR (L ED) O CK W
LPRESSURE HTCK
LO REMAINDER REL SW(LAY
(Clo
IT CH
ED)
(3− A) (3− A)L O CK DO
(3− O A) R RED L O CK KNO B (MR + B) (13− L
A)O CK KNO
· CKP SENSO R (4− B) B L O CK KNO B INDICAT A O R DRIVE
Ho o d o p en ) AUDIO
L AMP (MIL ) (L ED) (Clo sed : (Clo
(L ED) No . 7 (10(12− sed : (Clo sed : (Clo sed : L O CK [PUR]
SW IT CH (2− B) sed :
DO O R SEQ UENT IAL L O CK
17 SW IT CH
YEL /BL K 1 CH C 2 A2 (12− D)
A) 1 C7W HT2 A)*) 2B)
(L ED) 1 2Do o r o INDICAT
3pED) O RC) 1
(2− INDICAT
HT Do o r o2p en(L) ED) 3BL (12− O RD) (L ED) 1 Do o p3en ) (L ED)
2 o r C5 INDICAT O R INDICAT O R BL
T ailg
U ate o p en )
L O CK KNO B 9 BRN 8
SHIF T MO
16
DO DEW NA/C UP KEY
CO MPRESSO10 CYL96VMPDR INDER
R 1
105 · SWCMP IT CH
106
SENSO R (4− B) CO MPUL SO RY C8 SW IT
G RY CIRCUIT L T (6−
BL1 U No (L
BRN. 27 UNIT
ED)(30
(16− A)*
A,
2
OB)RN BL U
DoK/YEL
BL o r o p en )
(In tern al co n n ectio
Do o r o p en
n ) (L
BL K/YEL enBL
) K/W
55
K/W HTDo o r1o p en )
107 LC16
T
108BL U (LTED)
L
IG G RN
NIT IO N SW IT CH (L ED)BRN RED
SW IT CH MR +78 [PUR]G RY 79 G RN CLYEL UT CHLSW KITAY
REL CH 76BL U CAN PNK /BL K 3 PUR 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 G RY PNK PUR BRN PCM
153 (VBSO L ) (5− B) YEL
2 1
134 B 133 F SR + BCO NT RO SHIF L131 TIGINDICAT
UNIT 1 R K−/BL
O 132 INE YEL /BL H K 1365YEL
CAN L YEL /BL135K T URNING − O IG91
N1
O RNB YEL+B 153
YEL NEP L T G RN YEL MAING RN PUR1
143 1 17 1 2MICU (+ B DO
YEL /RED G RN/W HT 3 O R L OYEL 51 (12− D)
CK) /RED G RN/W HT YEL /BL U SCS
G RN/YEL K− L INE (ST ) G RN/YEL
CIRCUIT [10] 5 156ANT ENNA CIRCUIT
157SUB L EAD 10 4 3 SW IT 2CH YEL ANT ENNA SUB L EAD BL INKING L T BL U DIMMING (2− B) INDICAT O R
(L ED) 10 [5] (L ED) (L ED) (L ED) (LSIT
ED)IO N INDICAT O R DRIVE PO W ER 114
No . 43 (7.5PG 12 UP
A)* LDO GW N SVCC PL SA/BL 1 PLIG SBNIT IO SG NYEL ND2 /BL K A/T MICUG EAR PO (L ED)
MICU CIRCUIT SECO NDARY 2 L EF T [RIG
INDICAT
CIRCUIT
HT ] REAR
ECM/PCM · CIRCUIT
ECM/PCM DRIVE5 CIRCUIT
BL K RED/W HT
STBL
F USE ARTK/RED
RE CUT20 TBL KRN L T G RN YEL KMICU (12− B) YEL /BL BL KWKHT YEL /BL (12− LKTD)G76 RN A/C CO MPRESSO BL38K RECM/PCM
CL(12−UT CHD) (IG (15−P)A)(4− A) BL K BL K HO 2S DO O R LOORCK
BRN/YEL
DRIVE
(4− ACT CIRCUIT
C) UAT OR BRN/YEL EXT(4− C) BL K W INDOBRN W
(1−RELC) AY 2 1 CO IL REL AY 3 W HT 4 4 31 FR L C IG G RN/RED BL K/W HT RET RACT W HT /RED END 47 MAST ER
(ST CUT ) RED*3 W1HT *3 RED PUR*1 W HT *31 G RN L T BL U* 13 PNK3
BRN* YEL BRN*3 3 BL U
O RN*BRN/YEL O RN*3 GYEL
202 * YEL BRN*3 L T BL U*3 G O RN*3 PUR*3 L T G RN* 3
8 (7.5 RED
No . PNK*
3
A)*2RED*
3 W(SENSO
HT *3 RBL 2) U*3 YEL *3 (1) [3] O*4RN MICU
( · ) (12− D) SW IT CH MICU (12− B)
MICU A13IG 1MICUNo . 33RED PG2+A4 2 602 2 [4]
No(2−. 20D)(15 A)*2 BL(12−
U B) (12− B) (15 A)* M−
B FI W HT A3B− CAN A24 A14 D3 D2 D1 No . 29 (10 A)* VO L T AG EA13 REG UL AT O R (In tern A24 al co n n ectio n ) A14 DIMMING D3
4 G 602 W HT *10
D2
YEL
D1
56 · SRS UNIT (VA) (14− A) L T BL U
A23 A22 W HT WA19
HT
G RN/YELPUR
A18
G 502 MAIN BACK REL AY. 162 2 4 3 W ER1SUPPUL Y CIRCUIT / G 604 2 CIRCUIT [PUR] G RN/YEL [PUR]
F USE 12 1 IL L + 2BRN 16 SCT (F UEL5 4PUMP)
Y NoUP 7K− 3
L INENo . 2 G RY No
+ B . 3 BL K/YEL 10 No . CPU/PO 4
ACC
6W9 ERIG NIT IO NBL
SUPPUL Y CO
ANT
U IL S (4−
CIRCUIT
+ B / C) RF SH 22 RF IN G RN BRN/YEL
21 13 14 IL L + PO 11 + B ACC 18 EPS MICU (+ RO
ANT B +SMAL
B L LRF T ) SH
(12− C) RF IN · O RED/BL 4 (14− D) F R F R F R
(2− C) 71 144 G 501 [9]
[10] [PUR]145ABS MO DUL AT O R− CO NT RO L UNIT G 502PNK [1] KEY 77
CO NT RO[2] ECM/PCM
L L ERGAREA (ACC) (5− A)
603 NET W O RK CO NT RO L L ER G 601 G 301 CO NT RO L L ER AREA NET W O RK CO NT RO L L ER A/C PRESSURE (6− D) BL K/W
CO NT
HT L UNIT W HT /RED PDS UNIT U * BRN/YEL
L + G 501 L − PNK R+ [G G 602 F R
[G 601] KEY [G 603] [G 302] ACCESSO RY SW IT CH 604] R−
62 2 2 (In tern 2 2 KEY IG NIT IO N B /RED G RN/W HT 7 2 8 5
IMMO BIL IZ 16ER− KEYL 17ESS CO NT RO L27UNIT 26al co n nAUDIO ectio nBRN )
UNIT 6 5 39 4 ECM/PCM 3(IMO F PR) INT (5− ERLB) O CK 3 YEL4
SW IT CH 5 KEY 6 L T BL U 6PO W ER 7 8 9 2 10
YEL 11 24 25 36 37 AUDIO UNIT 4 38G RN/YEL 39 2
BRN A BRN A/C CO NDENSO RED R BL U YEL 7 UNDER− DASH F USE/REL AY BO XSO (2− A) ID
L ENO SW IT CH B SO CKET No . 11 (7.5 *3
A)* 1 *4 G A− NET *7 G A− NET G A− NET
BL K O RN [PUR] A9 BL U W HT G RN C5FHPNK AN RELA4 AY
L T BL FUR A3F R A46 F R
W HT FR A15 FRR− CAN A16T RANSCEIVER
RR A30 RR G RR
101 A38 A10 RECT IF IER A34 2 A20 A37 C13 C11 REMO C14T E B38 T AIL G AT E DUL AT O R− CO G
B19101 B18 GYEL
A−F UEL
NET G A− NET G A−GNET AUDIO AUDIOB34 AUDIO
C10 L − al co n n ectio n CAN
(InILtern ) L
G NDCAN VB L +C6CAN H L − VA C7 RA1+ C8 R− RA1− YEL BRN
LLA1+
+ FC32 LL− A1− VSSO YEL
PUR
PUR R+C31
G RN LR−
CAN A1−
G RN
RED L A1+ A25 G RYA19RA1−
L T G RN A35RA1+ RED
No 30 (30 A)*PUR
. A26 REDA18 G ND YEL VCC6 A36 BL K
BL U L SA− SCT L SA+ RSA− RSA+ BL L
UCA1− L CA1+ B4 RCA1− PURL OREMO
RCA1+W BRN IG57HT S−·LOG
LB36 ONABS
L
RYBS1−
CK MO
ACT C46 LCRUISE
UAT BS1+OLR UNIT (IG NT G RY L UNIT
RO
CRUISE C48(IG 1) (13− FA)O G BUS+ L IG HT REAR RN SH RBS1−L +RBS1+ L −
CAN L S− NET R+ ACC IMO LFPR UT B− T RANSCEIVER
T AC SG 6 ET C2 ACT EMP Y K− L INE VCC1 MAP G ND1
SG T EMPERAT T EURE NC INDICAT O·VSS REPS O UTCO NT CO RO NT ROVCC2L 1)NM
MAIN (13− B) BUS PUMPSH
INDICAT O R
BUS−
F O G L IG HT SG 2 HO RN
O
IGRN1A)*2 L T BL U IGA1 P G RN INJ1 1 IG KEY INJ2 2 O RN W INDSHIEL D/ *3 40CAN UEL PUMP CAN(3− HC) REAR
*4 L T BL U 2 L T BL U *8
SRS UNIT SEL ECT / A3
19 RADIAT O R F AN REL AY (3− A) No . AY
REL 44 (7.5 A)*
No . 47 (30 21 S− NET LG A12 SW A23 A22K−INJ3 L INE A19INJ4 A18
78 W A/C CO NDENSOA11
CKP A10
T O R (15− A)W INDO WCMPA7 A6 VCC5 APSB SG 5 VCC4 [O RN] APSA A12 SG 4IL L UMI ILA4L UMI SO 2SHT C A5 INDICATA16 O R SHO(L 2SED) 2 KS INDICAT
A15 OR INDICAT LO GR 2 C3(L ED) C9 INDICAT C10 O R C4 C6 C14
F USE MR− RED SRS SRS AT P BL U REAR W INDO R F AN ATMO P HO 5
W IPER
ECM/PCM
(+ ) (− ) RESET (L ED) (L ED) 1 (L ED) 4 (L ED)
2 7 2 1GNo W ASHER MO T O R DRELRN AT P6 D3* 4 5 2 ASHER SW IT CH 2 W ER W INDO W 3 YEL 4 LL IGTHT BLINGU
(1− C) G ND G ND No . 1RL3(10− G A)*ND No
RL. +22B (7.5AUDIOG
TA)*ND
RR−
ACHO ND. G
MET
UNIT 14 ND
ER (7.5
RR
(16− B 2 FL
2SPEEDO
+A)* No 6− G
MET . 56 RVS
ND
ER(30 K− A)*
L
F UEL L2AT
FINE +GPBAUG
W
No
PEN . E21
F R−
AT 5G
(15
P ND2AT PFNR + B(8−
RA)* ATL FPC)
S−D L F S+ AT P 2-1WRF INDSHIEL
S− RF DFS+WWIPER AY AT P S* MO4 TGOAUG R 3 E CO PG SS+ SDNP2W IPER/W SUPP F L BC VBSO L No T
O P2SW . /S
5 (10 GF RBC
ND
A)* 2 VS1 SWVS2
ECM/PCM IT CH PO
OB)P3SWAY RL BO) M−No . 24 (10 SHA A)*2RCBO M+ SHB RRBO SHC REL AY 1LGRP− TSHD
/S G ND L RP+VS1
GNT
L IG
RY* 4 HT ING
RRP−
VS2 AT E FRRP+
T(7− A) No . 29 (10M− A)*2 O DSM+
MICUEL D F USE MICU NEP F USE ELMICUECT
F USE RO NICC) F USE F USE MICU MO T O R (8− B) (8−TC) NT RO L MOMICU DUL E (7− A) (8− A) MICU MICU F USE
MICU PCM (5− REL
MICU (P/W F USE MICU AUG E CO
MICU REL
RO L AYMO 2 DUL F USE 3
PNK* 4 1
SL ST HRO T T L E MRL Y SUBRL Y IG 1ET CS(12− C) ET CSRL Y AL(3−T FC) AL C AL T L LG1 SG 3 T PSA T PSB4 VCC3
7(12− D) 8ET CS 2M+ ET CS M− BKSW(1− D) BKSW NC CRMT CL S INDICAT O R DRIVE CIRCUIT (1− IGD)PL S1 IG PL S2 IG PL S3 IG PL S4
(12− D) 25 (1−
24 C) 5 D) (2− D)14 A
(12− (12−
15(2−D) D) 4 6 (2− D) 3
3 B23 12B14
(2− C) B1518 B13 2 B22 B17 2.6 KΩ B29 B16 A1 B (12− B, C) A48 A47 (12−
No .B,43C)(7.5 A)*2 A1 (2−B8(12−
C) B, C2 C) C3 C1(12−2 C)B9 (2−
B1D) B11 17B2 B27 (12− B, B21 C) (12− C) (1−
C2
B12 C3D) C1 B28 (1− C) B1 B2
2 BRN CO
28
2A28 NT RO L SYST
29 EM 18 31 36 37 38 39 23 19 21 No . 12 (10A42 A)* 16 18 12 13 14 15 1
148 A24 159 12 A2965 (ET 150 CS) 68 CO NTA/F RO AYSENSO R 64
L 63 A7 A22 C1 146 A21 B47
85 B45
100 B46 C44 C43 96C20 118 C21 2 C12152 C4 L T52
117GC3 89 122 29 A4190 CO MPRESSO 73 A43 121 23 C15 26 YEL C16 18 C17
95
A/C 149 [PUR] AY O R REL
116 RN 20 A/C YEL R BL CL UT3CH REL AY
U* INDICAT58
(3− A)
O R · AL T ERNAT O R 101 (3− B) BL123
K G RN O RN POWWHT ER PUR L T BL
W INDO WU
4 CO BL K 1 522 REL RADIAT
BL K6 19(7.5 3 220 L2T BL T UHERMALL T G RN97 BRN 12614 1 RED 3127153 4 128 G RY129 BRN 130 4 1 3 3 98
BL U 42 O RN 131 99 132 133 134 1 3 135
4 1 136 3
G RNPNKG RN*3YEL BLBL U U 102
NDENSER BRN No
F AN2. 22 A)* BRN*3 RED* L T BL U*329 G RN*3 30 L18T BL U*3 YEL13 *3 BL K 17 RED*3 W HT PNK (0.98 W ) 27 · BL SECOU HT
W *3
NDARY HO 282S (SENSO R 2) (4− C) [PUR] REL AY (P/W )
F AN No . 26 (10 A)* F USE
MO T O(2−R D) PRO T ECT O R · MAF SENSO R (5− D)
MO T O R RADIAT O R OFF · EVAPL IG CANIST ER PURG E VAL G VE (5− D)
L T BL U 66 F AN REL G RNPUR W HTRED /BL K UP DO W N8 A/FF RO SENSO
41 NT ECM/PCMR (4− D) (ET CSRL Y) UP (4− B) DO W N L EF T L IG HTUPS DO W N RIG HT 4 BL U/RED BL U/W HT BL U/BL K G RN/W HT HT G RN W HT RN/RED W HT /G RED/YEL
RN G RN/YELW HT /BL4K
PNK*
LBL
T G G RN K G RYAY YEL
U/BL K BL WUPNK BL U PASSENGBL ER'S L T BL U REAR BL K REAR 2 BL K 2 2 2
· BRAKE 2 PEDAL PO SIT IO N SW IT CH*7 (9− C) RY*4 G RY 3W WHT HT/BL U
KRN BL KBL1U/BL RED WYELHT 1G RY L T BL U G RY BL
O RN HT RED/BLGKRN PNK
O RN L T BL U BL U PO W ERG RN
U/YEL
PNK
RED
BRN BL K G RN PO W
RED BL U O RN ER G RN
(1.96 W × 4)
PUR BL K No .
YEL47 (30 A)*
PO 2W ER
BL U G RN RED 3
(0.56 W ) G RN O RN PNK PNK G YEL BL U YEL G RN G RY
G RY*
RED
G RY (In tern al G RY (In tern al 2 G(InRYtern al (In tern al
2
(In tern al
1 co n n ectio n ) 2OGFRN F 1 PUR O F F W INDO 2W 1 W HT O F F 2 O F F[L T G 1W RN]
INDO W L T BL U OF F BLO FUF BLWKINDO W
(In ternBL Ual PNK W HT /G RNWco
(In
HTtern al (In tern al 5BL U* 2 W HT1 (In tern al 8 W HT (In A3tern al A9 6 (In
A10 . 3*37al A4
Notern A6 A14
No . 30 (30 A)*2 PNK co n n ectio n ) No . co 52n(15 A)*
n ectioPNK n) PULBL
co
2n U
SER
[1]n ectioRED n) co n1n[2] ectio n) RED [W BRN BL K BL K coBL nU/RED
nRED Lectio
T BLnU) 2 n n21 ectio n )A/CYELCO coNDENSER
n n ectio n )F AN REL 1 AY (3− LT A) G RN BLBL KU co n n ectio1 n) RED co n n ectio1n ) co n n ectio n1)PNK
L T BL UBRN/YEL
W HT 9 O RNECM/PCM SW IT CH O RN G RN SW PURITHTCH] YEL SW IT CH G RY F USE BL K
F USE PNK 19 PNK L T BL U BL U ORED RN OWRN HT 2 79HT3 RADIAT
W OREDR 42
F AN (SUBRL
MO ECM/PCM
TO WRHT Y)
(15− (4−
[PUR]
/RED A)A)1 ETWCS)
(IG HT /G (4−RNA) W HT /BL U BRN/YEL G RN RED/BL K RED BL U YEL /RED 1 YEL
No . 16L T (10GA)*RN 1 BRN PUR IG NIT IO N 1 : 13 1 : 12 1 : 11 G A− NET G A− NET G A− NET (1− A) G A− NET G A− NET G A− NET
(1− C) BL K*3 BL1 K*
3 BL U*3 RED*3 T EMPERAT URE CO NT RO L 2 1 9 2ND 3RD
PUR
BL U CL UT CH 59O RN REAR
CO IL W
(1− A)BL U
REL
INDO AY W W IPER
9 2 : 6 MO2T O
G RN
: 5R BRN*
(8− : 34
2 B)
YEL
BUS
PNK*SH 3 L TBUS+ G8 RN*3L T BUS−
W HT BL U* 3W HT
3 3 AUDIO AUDIO PUR 84
AUDIO
2 3 A19 DIAL HEAT ER F AN BL U 1 6 158 CL UT CH
BL U
111
BL U
CL UT CH 159 PEDAL No . 1 No . 2 NoSH . 3 L+ LNo
− . 4
2 L T BL U1 95BL K 2 1 L13EF TA/C F RO NT2 1 RIG2HT A34 F RO2NT A355 L EF92T A7 REAR [B20] 2 RIG HT5 REAR 94M10 1BL UPO SIT IO N 1 1 IG NIT IO N CO IL1
LBL T BL U
8 K 4 A14DO 93 C29 M11 M12 M13 2 QSW 5 IT 5 CH M14 M15 T RANSMISSIO
5 RIG HT N T RANSMISSIO
REAR 97 N REAR 88 6 REAR 14
IG NIT IO N CO 3IL IG NIT2 IO N CO IL 1IG NITBL IO N CO IL
K
DRIVER'S PO W ER BRN W INDO W MO T O R 1012 102SHIF T
DO OR COSPEAKER
MPRESSO R7
G RN DO O R SPEAKER
98 8099 ECM/PCM 1
(F ANC) O R(4− SPEAKER
D) DO O4R SPEAKER AL T ERNAT
3
F ROONT R PASSENG ER'S L EF T 10 9 F L UID F L UID 6
L EF T SIDE ST ART SW IT CH
ERCENT
13 15 USB ADAPT 2 ER UNIT
G 502 [PUR]
IG 1 No . 22 (7.5 G 503 A)* ACC CL UT CH
RR 3 RR SEAT G 503BEL T MICU IG 1 PRESSURE
SHIF
(O pTen : ER SHIF T RIG HT SIDE SHIF T 2 SHIF T 1 3 +B 2 HO
1 RN
+B L O CK IG 1 IG 1 F R W IP F R W IP F R W IP RR W IP F R W IP F R SIT
INF O HI & L SEAT
W IPT ING F
89R SWW IPIT CH F4R W IP 90 CO MBI 1 2 6 52 SEAT1 BEL DATTA3 L INK P/W PRESSURE SEAT 2 T + B HO RN SO
BEL 1 SEAT
tch pIDBELed al T1 (5−
ECM/PCM ENO IDSEAT BEL T L ENO ID
AUDIO
BACK IC METFER USE IC IC AUDIO IC LHOO RN HI 3 HEAT ER CO NT RO L PANEL O SETINT /& L O MIST W ASHBUCKLIL E M (+ ) IL1M (− (12−) BACKB) SWPADDL IT CHBUCKL
NoE . 20 ECO(15 NNECTA)*21 O RRL Y SWBUCKL IT CHPADDL
AUDIO E EREMO T E SW ITLBUCKL
Clu ENO
CH SOB)L5VE SO
ITRESUME3 VE C1 2 SO L ENO ID
SET
VAL VE3 D
AT F2 3 SMAL L MAIN 2 G3 ND(L O W )
86109 TUP
REMO E BLSO U/W L110
ENO
HTWF RID W IPER
HT /REDBL K/BL UW ASHER W HT
111 BL U 3 BRN
3 REAR YEL /RED AS
3 NNECT O R 112 · 1W ASH G ND W IP
SW SW55IT CH
VAL VE A) E
p ressed VAL B A/CBUCKL SW E CH
VAL T EMPERTW HT
USB L TUSB USB
(2− D) CO NT
CRUISE GRO RY L CO MBINAT IO N G RY BL U RED REMO T E G RY SEL W INDBRN*
ECT /RESET RED* G RY + BL·T BL DAT U*A LGINK RN*CO IMMO BIL SWIZ ER−RESET KEYL ESSSW
SW SW (W IPER) SW BL U G RY LT BL U DO W SWN IT CH(DL C) W HT SW IT UP
(8−
RED
CHA) W HT BL K/RED SW se:IT CH
60 ECM/PCM (IG SW1)IT(4− CHA) BL K URESH (IN)VBUS DATNoA− . 23 (10 A)*
10 T EST G36ND 9SHIEL D IO WNINDO42/ W 41(DL C) (4− D) 82 84 CO83 NT RO L UNIT (10− A) (4−108D) 107 (Clo SENSO R BL U G RN
T ACHO MET SW
ER IT CH66(8− C) 4 1 6 2
7 2 INF O RMAT8 SW
3 IT CH 9 5 10 No . 7 (10 A)* 2 F UEL Clu tch p ed al F UEL BL K/YEL BL K/YEL 2
BRN BL K/YEL
3 2 O
AUT BRNT URN 3 BL K/YEL BRN BL K/YEL
AUT O T URN
L CO
EFtern
TNNECT
REAR G 101 n ) RIG HT REAR L EF T F RONo NT. 35 (15 A)*RIG HT F RO (8− NT B) · ECM/PCM (5− A) MICU (12− D) G 501 G 501
MICU EL D ECM/PCM (In
EPS al coO nRn ectio 3 IG NIT IO N DAT PG AM−L INKFI A/F SENSO BL
R U RED ABS MO GLRYMICU · O RN No . 10 (7.5L EF A) *2
PADO L E SHIF T ER
T PNK A BL U F USE L EF T W HT TO L EFRQTUE SENSO R RIG HT EPS MO
2 RIG
T OHT
T ANK R released ) G AUG E T O RQ UE RIGSENSO HT UNIT R B5 EPS MO B1T O RUNIT
(12− D)(1− 1 A)L125
EF T CO (5−NT A)RO L 1 RIG HT 4 KEY SW IT CH 4 COMAIN NNECT O R REL1 LLAY TEFBL TU EL ECT RO 1NICRIG · 43
T HRO
HT · DUL
T T L E(13−
UNIT FA)ROAT NTOPASSENG
R− CO NT RO ER'S
AL T ERNAT DO
(12−OR O R L O CK ACT UAT
D) F USE O R3(10− REARC)(8− B, C) G RN(2− C) BL
2 KSIDE 1G *3
RN
F RO NT 3 FBL RO KNT*4 2
UNITBL K
SIDE SENDING BL K 1 REAR
F RO NTUNIT F RO NT WLHEEL SPEED SENSO R RIG HT (DLREL C) AY 1 (1− 2 CO NT1RO L SYST 2 L EF1 T [RIG HT(3− ] REAR DO O R L O CK ACT UAT OC)R (10−TC)URN T URNMICU REDT URN 61 UNIT IMMO BIL IZ ER− KEYL ESS CO NT RO L UNIT (IG 1)T URN (10− A)
EF T (10− B) *3
*4 N A) L ICENSE *3LROICENSE
EMEPS CO · NT RO L AT UNIT (13− B)
CKD)ACT UAT O R (10− C)
(2− T URN T URN 7
PO SIT IO (13− N B) PO SIT IO N L T BL U T AIL L IG HT T AIL(4− L IG(F I MAIN)
D)HT PL AT E D (ET CS) S*4 CO NTPL AT·L EREL
SRSAY · T AIL
UNIT (14−GA) E LO SIG NAL BL K BL K BL OSIG W ER T HRO
NAL MO TTO TL RE SIG NAL BRAKE PEDAL SIG NAL BL K
SIG NAL BL K SIG NAL PNK*4
85
L IG HT 5 L IG HT 111 (5 W ) 155 (2−6B) R L IG HT (2− B) 5 L11IG HT BL K RELLAY IG HTACT UAT O R L IG HT L IG
IT HT L IG HT 1
(5 W ) (5 W )
(5 W )
2 (5 WL) EF T F RO NT D3* (5 WRIG ·) HT 9*3 1049 L IG HT B 3 (5 W ) 4 8(21 W)
PO SIT IO N SW
(21 W )
CH 7 14 13 L IG HT 15 12 No . 24 (10 A)*
2 2 2 2 No . 36 (15 A)* 2 2 COFMBI
RO NT 2 (21 W ) 2 1 2 (9− C) 2 1 (5 W ) G EARBO X
ST EERING
3 G 502 2 (21 W ) HO RN SW IT CHST EERING G EARBO X
G 203 PNK IMPACT SENSO R
SMAL L H/L 5 44 5 IMPACT G ND SENSO
· DRIVER'S R DIM DO O PASSING R L O CK ACT H/L G 402
UAT O R (10− D) No . 57 (30 A)* 1 G 301 P− PIN 1 1 HO RN 1 UP G 301 L EFRIG T SIDE
HT RIG HT SIDE (8− B) O PDS UNIT
[G 402] P 2 L T SW1 O RN*
PG PG SG SG CHK SG O F2*F SW (L IG HT · RIG ) HTSW [L EF T ] SW REAR DO 2 OO R NL[GOSW 301]ACT UAT O R (10− D)
1CK BACK L T ACS 2 1 AT P− P AT P− R SW W HT 22 BL O W ER MOSW T O R (15− B)+ HO RN + HO RN SEAT BEL T SEAT BEL T
EL D DAT A L INK · F UEL L ID L O CK ACT UAT O R (10− D) (In tern al co n n ectio n ) T ENSIO NER T ENSIO NER
CO NNECT O R (DL C) 5 62 PG M− F I MAIN REL AY 2 (F UEL PUMP) (2− A) (W ith secu rity)
N2 K10 Q9 M16 M7 M8 F1*RO NT M33 M3 M4 M5 L EF T C21 BLA21K RIG
BL KHTn ) B32 B26 T HRO T T L E Q BO
BL10DYK BL K Q 11 BL KA13(L HD mo d el) A13 BL K B30 (RHD mo d el)
G 202 G 202 (4− D)
PASSENG ER'S REAR G 101 G 502 (In tern al co n nREAR ectio
G 502 G 401 G 502 PNK*4
PO W ER PO W ER PO W ER BL K
(In tern al co n n ectio n ) No . 49 (15 A)*2 W INDO W W INDO W *4 W INDO W
RED G RN
MICU
124 PNK YEL 10 ECM/PCM
MO 45T O R(EL · FD)RO (4−NTA)PASSENG ER'S DO O R L O CK ACTMO UATTO ORR (10− C) MO T O R No . 21 (15 A)*2 (In tern al co n n ectio n ) DO W N L EF T
(12− D) *5RIG HT
· L EF T [RIG HT ] REAR DO O R L O CK ACT UAT O R (10− C) L EF T SIDE 10 4 63 MICU SIDE(IG 1 W ASHER) 10 (12− A)
BL K BL KBL K BLBL K K BL K BL K BL K BL K BL K G RY BL K BL U BL·K T AILLGTAT BL E UL O CKWACT HT UAT ORED R (10− C) BL K G RN T URN
REDSIG NAL L T BL U BL K G RN BL K PARK BLGK501 OBL
RNK G RN T URN SIG NAL MIRRO R ACT UAT BLOKR RET RACT ACT UAT O R5 G RY 1 RET RACT ACT UAT O R
L IG HT L IG HT 1 USB ADAPT ER CABL E
G 501 MUL T I F USEG 504 BLSHIFO CKT PO SIT IO N SENSO R G 101 G 603 G 603 G 501 PIN
G 601 G 603 G 602 G 601
No . 50 (15 A)*2 (L ED)
SW
(L ED)
SECURIT Y
YEL 46 · DRIVER'S DO O R L O CK ACT UAT O R (10− D) HO RN L EF T PO W ER MIRRO R
No . 60 (IG N) (50 A)*2 MUL T IPL EX 1 · RIG HT [L EF T ] REAR DO O R L O CK ACT UAT O R (10− D) *5 5 *6
CO NT RO L 11 IG NIT IO N SW FITUELCH (2− L IDB)L O CK ACT UAT O R (10− *3 D)
G 501 INSPECT IO N W HT ·
100 Ω CO NNECT O R 137 138HO RN 139 140 141 142 143 BL K 144 145 BL K 146 147 BL K
(In tern al co n n ectio n ) 148
SW IT CH
270 Ω 470 Ω 1.2 kΩ No . 60 (AMT 3.9 kΩ ) (40 A)* 102 kΩ 103
SEL ECT / L EF T RIG HT
BACK− UP A/C
RESET INF O S− DN HO RN S− UP
HO RN L EF T F RO NT
CO MBINAT IO N L IG HT SW IT CH (8− D) L IG HT T RANSMISSIO N
VO L VO L SWPRESSURE
IT CH SW IT CH RANG E SW IT CH
SW IT CH (3− D) PO SIT IO N
CH CH (9− C) SW IT CH (8− A) 33 L IG HT
DO W N UP L IG HT S (15− C) (5− A) G502 (9− A) MAIN
G 501( ) G 502 ( ) G 502 (− G) 501 (+ ) MO DE G 501 LGIG501HT S PADDL E SHIF T ER − PADDL E SHIF T ER + RESUME CANCEL SET L IG HT S SW IT CH
(L EDx3) (L EDx2) (DO W NSHIF T SW IT CH) (UPSHIF T SW IT CH) (L EDx3)
G 401 G 202 G 604 G 602 G 602 G 604 G 604 G 502 G 401 G 401 G 202 G 301 G 501 G 602
[G 202] [G 401] [G 604] [G 602] *8 [G 501] [G 302] [G 202] *8 [G 401] [G 451] *4 [G*3502] UNDER− DASH
F USE/REL AY
BO X
AUDIO REMO T E SW IT CH *3 *4 *4 *3 (2− A)
SEL ECT /RESET /INF O RMAT IO N SW IT CH CRUISE CO NT RO L CO MBINAT IO N SW IT CH
Maintenance Schedule for Normal and Severe Conditions - Australia
This maintenance schedule outlines the minimum required maintenance that you should perform to ensure the trouble-free operation of the vehicle. Due
to regional and climatic differences, some additional service may be required. Please consult the warranty booklet for a more detailed description.
The following items must be used for ‘‘severe conditions'' indicated on schedule, if the vehicle is driven MAINLY under the specified conditions A to F.
Engine oil and engine oil filter: A/B/C/D/E
Transmission fluid
M/T: B/D
A/T: B/C/D/F
A: Driving less than 8 km (5 miles) per trip or, in freezing temperatures, driving less than 16 km (10 miles) per trip.
B: Driving in extremely hot over 35 °C (95 °F) conditions.
C: Extensive idling, or long periods of stop-and-go driving.
D: Towing trailer, driving with a loaded roof rack, or driving in mountainous conditions.
E: Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.
F: Driving more than 20,000 km (12,500 miles) per year, or driving at high speed frequently.
Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first km x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0112.5125.0
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
Replace engine oil * Normal Conditions Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 1 year
Severe Conditions Every 5,000 km (3,125 miles) or 6 months
Replace engine oil filter * Normal Conditions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Replace air cleaner element Every 30,000 km (18,750 miles)
Inspect valve clearance Every 40,000 km (25,000 miles)
Replace fuel filter ● ●
Replace spark plugs Every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)
Inspect and adjust drive belt ● ● ● ● ●
Look for cracks and damage, then check the deflection and tension.
Inspect idle speed ●
Replace engine coolant At 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years, then
Use genuine Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. every 100,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years
Replace Manual Transmission Fluid Normal Conditions ●
Use genuine Honda MTF. Severe Conditions ● ● ●
Replace Automatic Transmission Fluid Normal Conditions ● ●
Use genuine Honda ATF-Z1. Severe Conditions ● ● ● ●
*: Only severe schedule is required in some countries, refer to local warranty booklet.
miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0112.5125.0
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
Check front and rear brakes Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)
Check the brake pad and disc thickness. Check for damage.
Check the calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness.
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years
Use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid. We recommend genuine Honda Brake Fluid.
Check the brake fluid level is between upper and lower marks on the reservoir.
Check parking brake adjustment ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check the parking brake operation.
Replace dust and pollen filter ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Rotate tyres Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)
Check tyre inflation and condition at least once per month.
Visually inspect the following items:
Check for correct installation and position, check for cracks, deterioration, rust, and leaks.
Check tightness of screws, nuts, and joints. If necessary, retighten.
Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
Check rack grease and steering linkage.
Check the boot for damage and leaking grease.
Suspension components
Check the bolts for tightness.
Check all dust covers for deterioration and damage.
miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0112.5125.0
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
Driveshaft boots
Check the boot and boot band for cracks.
Check rack grease.
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS lines) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check the master cylinder and ABS modulator-control unit and leakage.
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Check levels and check for leaks. If necessary, add.
Engine coolant
MTF
ATF
Brake fluid
Clutch fluid
Windshield washer fluid
Exhaust system
Check the exhaust pipe and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness.
Fuel lines, and connections
Check fuel lines for loose connections, cracks, and deterioration.
Retighten loose connections and replace any damaged parts.
Maintenance Schedule for Normal and Severe Conditions - Except Australia
This maintenance schedule outlines the minimum required maintenance that you should perform to ensure the trouble-free operation of the vehicle. Due
to regional and climatic differences, some additional service may be required. Please consult the warranty booklet for a more detailed description.
The following items must be used for ‘‘severe conditions'' indicated on schedule, if the vehicle is driven MAINLY under the specified conditions A to F.
Engine oil and engine oil filter: A/B/C/D/E
Transmission fluid
M/T: B/D
A/T: B/C/D/F
A: Driving less than 8 km (5 miles) per trip or, in freezing temperatures, driving less than 16 km (10 miles) per trip.
B: Driving in extremely hot over 35 °C (95 °F) conditions.
C: Extensive idling, or long periods of stop-and-go driving.
D: Towing trailer, driving with a loaded roof rack, or driving in mountainous conditions.
E: Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.
F: Driving more than 20,000 km (12,500 miles) per year, or driving at high speed frequently.
miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0112.5125.0
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
Replace engine oil * Normal Conditions Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 1 year
Replace engine oil filter * Normal Conditions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Replace air cleaner element Every 30,000 km (18,750 miles)
Inspect valve clearance Every 40,000 km (25,000 miles)
Replace fuel filter ● ●
Replace spark plugs Every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)
Inspect and adjust drive belt ● ● ● ● ●
Look for cracks and damage, then check the deflection and tension.
Inspect idle speed ●
Replace engine coolant At 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years, then
Use genuine Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. every 100,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years
Replace Manual Transmission Fluid Normal Conditions ●
Use genuine Honda MTF. Severe Conditions ● ● ●
Replace Automatic Transmission Fluid Normal Conditions ● ●
Use genuine Honda ATF-Z1. Severe Conditions ● ● ● ●
*: Only severe schedule is required in some countries, refer to local warranty booklet.
miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0112.5125.0
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
Check front and rear brakes Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)
Check the brake pad and disc thickness. Check for damage.
Check the calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness.
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years
Use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid. We recommend genuine Honda Brake Fluid.
Check the brake fluid level is between upper and lower marks on the reservoir.
Check parking brake adjustment ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check the parking brake operation.
Replace dust and pollen filter ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Rotate tyres Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)
Check tyre inflation and condition at least once per month.
Visually inspect the following items:
Check for correct installation and position, check for cracks, deterioration, rust, and leaks.
Check tightness of screws, nuts, and joints. If necessary, retighten.
Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
Check rack grease and steering linkage.
Check the boot for damage and leaking grease.
Suspension components
Check the bolts for tightness.
Check all dust covers for deterioration and damage.
miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0112.5125.0
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
Driveshaft boots
Check the boot and boot band for cracks.
Check rack grease.
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS lines) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Check the master cylinder and ABS modulator-control unit and leakage.
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Check levels and check for leaks. If necessary, add.
Engine coolant
MTF
ATF
Brake fluid
Clutch fluid
Windshield washer fluid
Exhaust system
Check the exhaust pipe and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness.
Fuel lines, and connections
Check fuel lines for loose connections, cracks, and deterioration.
Retighten loose connections and replace any damaged parts.
Mileage / Year
km mile
20,000km/1year
Mileage / Year
km mile
20,000km/1year
Design Specifications
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
DIMENSION Overall length 3,900−3,920 mm (153.5−154.3 in.)
Overall width 1,695 mm (66.7 in.)
Overall height 1,525 mm (60.0 in.)
Wheelbase 2,500 mm (98.4 in.)
Track 15 inch wheel Front 1,490 mm (58.7 in.)
model Rear 1,475 mm (58.1 in.)
16 inch wheel Front 1,475 mm (58.1 in.)
model Rear 1,460 mm (57.5 in.)
Ground clearance 150 mm (5.9 in.)
Seating capacity Five (5)
WEIGHT (except KQ) Curb weight M/T 1,045 kg (2,304 lbs)
A/T 1,070 kg (2,359 lbs)
WEIGHT (KQ) Curb weight M/T 1,025−1,040 kg (2,260−2,293 lbs)
(L13Z1) A/T 1,070−1,093 kg (2,359−2,410 lbs)
Curb weight M/T 1,048−1,060 kg (2,310−2,337 lbs)
(L15A7) A/T 1,075−1,085 kg (2,370−2,392 lbs)
ENGINE Type Water-cooled, 4-stroke SOHC i-VTEC engine
Cylinder arrangement Inline 4-cylinder, transverse
Bore and stroke L13Z1 73 x 80 mm (2.87 x 3.15 in.)
L15A7 73 x 89.4 mm (2.87 x 3.52 in.)

Displacement L13Z1 1,339 cm 3 (82 cu in.)
L15A7 1,496 cm 3 (91 cu in.)
Compression ratio L13Z1 10.5
L15A7 10.4
Valve train Chain drive, SOHC 2 valves per cylinder
Lubrication system Forced, wet sump, with trochoid pump
Oil pump displacement at 6,300 engine 45.3 L (47.9 US qt, 39.9 lmp qt)
rpm (min −1 )
Water pump displacement at 6,000 engine 120 L (127 US qt, 106 lmp qt)
rpm (min −1 )
STARTER Type Gear reduction
Normal output Except L13Z1 KP, 0.7 kW
KQ
L13Z1 KP, KQ 0.6 kW, 0.7 kW
Hour rating 30 seconds
Rotation direction Clockwise as viewed from drive end
CLUTCH Type Single plate dry, diaphragm spring

MANUAL Type Synchronized, five-speed forward, one reverse
TRANSMISSION Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio (L13Z1) 1st 3.461
2nd 1.869
3rd 1.235
4th 0.948
5th 0.809
Reverse 3.307
Final 4.294
Gear ratio (L15A7: except IN) 1st 3.461
2nd 1.869
3rd 1.303
4th 1.054
5th 0.853
Reverse 3.307
Final 4.294
Gear ratio (L15A7: IN) 1st 3.307
2nd 1.750
3rd 1.235
4th 0.948
5th 0.809
Reverse 3.307
Final 4.625
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
AUTOMATIC Type Electronically controlled automatic, five-speed forward, one reverse,
TRANSMISSION three-element torque converter with lock-up clutch
Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio 1st 2.995
2nd 1.678
3rd 1.066
4th 0.760
5th 0.551
Reverse 1.956
Final 4.562
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
STEERING Type Electrical power-assisted rack and pinion
Overall ratio 16.09
Turns, lock-to-lock 3.29
Steering wheel diameter 370 mm (14.6 in.)
SUSPENSION Type Front Independent strut with stabilizer, coil spring
Rear Torsion beam, coil spring
Shock absorber Front and rear Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
TYRES Size See tyre information label attached to the doorjambs
BRAKES Type of service brake Front Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Rear Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Type of parking brake Mechanical actuating, rear wheels
Pad friction surface area (swept area) Front 40.8 cm 2 (6.32 sq in.) x 2
Rear 21.0 cm 2 (3.26 sq in.) x 2

AIR Compressor Type Scroll
CONDITIONING Capacity 77.1 mL (4.7 cu in.)/rev.
Maximum speed 10,000 rpm (min −1 )
Lubricant capacity 80 mL (2 2/3 fl·oz, 2.8 Imp·oz)
Lubricant type SP-10
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type Corrugated fin
Blower Type Radial
Motor type 170 W/12 V
Speed control 4 speed
Maximum capacity 400 m 3 (14,126 cu ft)/h
Temperature control Air-mix type
Compressor clutch Type Dry, single plate, Poly V-belt drive
Electrical power consumption 42 W maximum at 12 V
at 20 °C (68 °F)
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity 370−420 g (13.1−14.8 oz)
ELECTRICAL Battery KZ, KP 12 V−30 Ah/20 HR (12 V−24 Ah/5 HR)
RATINGS KQ 12 V−35 Ah/20 HR (12 V−28 Ah/5 HR)
IN 12 V−30 Ah/20 HR (12 V−27 Ah/5 HR)
Fuses Battery terminal fuse box (with 100 A, 60 A, 30 A
trailer light connector)
Battery terminal fuse box 100 A, 60 A, 20 A
(without trailer light connector)
Under-dash fuse/relay box 50 A, 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
Light bulbs Headlight high/low beam 12 V−60/55 W
Front turn signal lights 12 V−21 W
Mirror turn signal lights LED
Side turn signal lights 12 V−5 W
Front position lights 12 V−5 W
Rear turn signal lights 12 V−21 W
Brake/taillights 12 V−21/5 W
High mount brake light 12 V−21 W
Back-up lights 12 V−21 W
License plate lights 12 V−5 W
Ceiling lights 12 V−8 W
Cargo area light 12 V−5 W
Front individual map lights 12 V−8 W
Gauge lights LED
Indicator lights 12 V−0.84 W
Washer reservoir Capacity 2.5 L (2.6 US qt, 2.2 Imp qt)
Body Specifications
1,490 mm (58.7 in.) *1

1,475 mm (58.1 in.) *2
1,695 mm (66.7 in.)
2,500 mm (98.4 in.)
3,900−3,920 mm (153.5−154.3 in.) 1,475 mm (58.1 in.) *1

1,460 mm (57.5 in.) *2
*1: 15 inch wheel model

*2: 16 inch wheel model
Wiring Diagram Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ABS . 13
Accessory Power Socket . 10
Audio System . 16
Auxiliary Under-hood Relay Box . 3
A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Light . 9
Back-up Lights . 9
Battery Terminal Fuse Box . 1
Battery . 1
Brake Lights . 9
Cable Reel . 8
Charging system . 3
Combination Light Switch . 8
Data Link Connector . 4
Door Lock Actuators . 10
ECM/PCM . 4, 5
EPS . 13
Front Position Lights . 9
Fuel Pump . 3
Gauges . 6, 7
Hazard Warning Switch . 8
Headlights . 9
Heating/Air Conditioning . 15
Horns . 3
Ignition Key Switch . 10
Immobilizer System . 10
Interior Lights . 9
License Plate Lights . 9
MICU . 12
Power Mirrors . 11
Power Windows . 11
Rear Window Defogger . 15
SRS . 14
Starting System . 3
Steering Wheel Switches . 8
Taillights . 9
Turn Signal Lights . 9
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box . 1, 2
Wipers/Washers . 8
Engine Electrical
Ignition coil Rated voltage 12 V
Firing order 1−3−4−2
Spark plug Type NGK: IZFR6K13
DENSO: SKJ20DR-M13
Gap 1.2−1.3 mm (0.047−0.051 in.) ———
Ignition timing At idle (check the M/T (in neutral): 0±2 ° BTDC
white mark) A/T (in N or P): 0±2 ° BTDC
Drive belt Tension Auto-tensioner
Alternator Output At 13.5 V and 95 A
normal engine
temperature
Coil (rotor) resistance At 20 °C (68 °F) 2.1−2.3 Ω
Slip ring O.D. 22.7 mm (0.89 in.) 21.2 mm (0.83 in.)
Brush length 23.0 mm (0.91 in.) 18.0 mm (0.71 in.)
Brush spring tension 4.1−5.3 N (0.42−0.54 kgf, 0.93−1.19 lbs)
Starter Output Except L13Z1 0.7 kw
KP, KQ
L13Z1 KP, KQ 0.6 kw, 0.7 kw
Commutator mica depth 0.45−0.75 mm (0.018−0.030 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Commutator runout 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) max. 0.4 mm (0.02 in.)
Commutator O.D. 27.9−28.0 mm (1.098−1.102 in.) 27.0 mm (1.06 in.)
Brush length 9.7−10.3 mm (0.38−0.41 in.) 6.0 mm (0.20 in.)
Engine Assembly
Compression Pressure check at 250 rpm (min −1 ) with Minimum 980 kPa (10.0 kgf/cm 2 , 142 psi) ———
wide open throttle. (See Design Specs for Maximum 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm 2 , 28 psi) ———
ratio) variation
Cylinder Head
Head Warpage 0.07 mm (0.0028 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Height 119.9−120.1 mm (4.720−4.728 in.) ———
Camshaft End play 0.05−0.25 mm (0.002−0.010 in.) 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance 0.045−0.084 mm (0.0018−0.0033 in.) 0.100 mm (0.004 in.)
Total runout 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
Cam lobe height L13Z1 Intake, primary 34.290 mm (1.3500 in.) ———
Intake, secondary 30.529 mm (1.2019 in.) ———
Exhaust 35.047 mm (1.3798 in.) ———
L15A7 Intake, primary 35.241 mm (1.3874 in.) ———
Exhaust 35.471 mm (1.3964 in.) ———
Valve Clearance (cold) Intake 0.15−0.19 mm (0.006−0.007 in.) ———
Exhaust 0.26−0.30 mm (0.010−0.012 in.) ———
Stem O.D. Intake 5.48−5.49 mm (0.216−0.216 in.) 5.45 mm (0.215 in.)
Exhaust 5.45−5.46 mm (0.215−0.215 in.) 5.42 mm (0.213 in.)
Stem-to-guide clearance Intake 0.020−0.050 mm (0.0008−0.0020 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Valve seat Width Intake 0.850−1.150 mm (0.0335−0.0453 in.) 1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
Stem installed height Intake 46.1−46.5 mm (1.815−1.831 in.) 46.8 mm (1.843 in.)
Valve spring Free length L13Z1 Intake 51.17 mm (2.014 in.) ———
Exhaust 57.26 mm (2.254 in.) ———
L15A7 Intake 48.55 mm (1.911 in.) ———
Exhaust 54.52 mm (2.146 in.) ———
Valve guide I.D. Intake 5.51−5.53 mm (0.217−0.218 in.) 5.55 mm (0.219 in.)
Installed height Intake 15.85−16.35 mm (0.624−0.644 in.) ———
Exhaust 15.85−16.35 mm (0.624−0.644 in.) ———
Rocker arm Arm-to-shaft clearance Intake 0.019−0.058 mm (0.0007−0.0023 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Engine Block
Block Warpage of deck 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Bore diameter 73.000−73.015 mm (2.8740−2.8746 in.) 73.065 mm (2.8776 in.)
Bore taper ——— 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Reboring limit ——— 0.25 mm (0.01 in.)
Piston Skirt O.D. at 16 mm (0.6 in.) from bottom of L13Z1 72.972−72.982 mm (2.8729−2.8733 in.) 72.97 mm (2.8728 in.)
skirt L15A7 72.980−72.990 mm (2.8732−2.8736 in.) 72.97 mm (2.8728 in.)
Clearance in cylinder L13Z1 0.018−0.043 mm (0.007−0.0017 in.) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
L15A7 0.010−0.035 mm (0.0004−0.0014 in.) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Ring groove width Top 1.050−1.060 mm (0.0413−0.0417 in.) 1.080 mm (0.0425 in.)
Second 1.020−1.030 mm (0.0401−0.0405 in.) 1.050 mm (0.0413 in)
Oil 2.005−2.020 mm (0.0789−0.0795 in.) 2.050 mm (0.0807 in.)
Piston ring Ring-to-groove clearance Top 0.065−0.090 mm (0.0026−0.0035 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Second 0.030−0.055 mm (0.0012−0.0022 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
Ring end gap Top 0.15−0.30 mm (0.006−0.012 in.) 0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
Second 0.30−0.42 mm (0.012−0.017 in.) 0.65 mm (0.026 in.)
Oil 0.20−0.70 mm (0.008−0.028 in.) 0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
Piston pin O.D. 17.996−18.000 mm (0.7085−0.7087 in.) ———
Pin-to-piston clearance 0.010−0.017 mm (0.0004−0.0007 in.) ———

Connecting rod Pin-to-rod interferemce 0.019−0.036 mm (0.007−0.0014 in.) ———
Small-end bore diameter 17.964−17.977 mm (0.707−0.708 in.) ———
Large-end bore diameter Nominal 43.0 mm (1.69 in.) ———
End play installed on crankshaft 0.15−0.35 mm (0.006−0.014 in.) 0.40 mm (0.016 in.)
Crankshaft Main journal diameter 49.976−50.000 mm (1.9676−1.9685 in.) ———
Rod journal diameter 39.976−40.000 mm (1.5739−1.5748 in.) ———
Rod/main journal taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
Rod/main journal out-of-round 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
End play 0.10−0.35 mm (0.004−0.014 in.) 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
Crankshaft Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance 0.018−0.036 mm (0.0007−0.0014 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
bearing Rod bearing clearance L15A7 0.020−0.038 mm (0.0008−0.0015 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
L13Z1 0.026−0.044 mm (0.0010−0.0017 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
Engine Lubrication
Engine oil Capacity Engine overhaul 4.2 L (4.4 US qt, 3.7 Imp qt) ———
Oil change including oil filter 3.6 L (3.8 US qt, 3.2 Imp qt) ———
Oil change without oil filter 3.4 L (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt) ———
Oil pump Inner rotor-to-outer rotor clearance 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor 0.100−0.175 mm (0.0039−0.0069 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
clearance
Pump housing-to-rotor axial 0.02−0.06 mm (0.001−0.002 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
clearance
Relief valve Relief valve, oil pressure with oil At idle 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm 2 , 10 psi) min. ———
temperature at 80°C (176°F)
At 3,000 rpm (min −1 ) 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm 2 , 50 psi) min. ———
Cooling
Radiator Coolant capacity (Includes engine, L13Z1 M/T With heater Engine overhaul 5.02 L (1.326 US gal, 1.104 Imp gal)
heater, hoses, and reservoir) Coolant change 4.53 L (1.197 US gal, 0.997 Imp gal)
Use genuine Honda All Season Without heater Engine overhaul 4.59 L (1.213 US gal, 1.010 Imp gal)
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
Coolant change 4.10 L (1.083 US gal, 0.902 Imp gal)
A/T With heater Engine overhaul 4.94 L (1.305 US gal, 1.087 Imp gal)
Without heater Engine overhaul 4.51 L (1.192 US gal, 0.992 Imp gal)
L15A7 M/T With heater Engine overhaul 5.03 L (1.329 US gal, 1.107 Imp gal)
Coolant Coolant capacity 0.44 L (0.116 US qt, 0.097 Imp qt)
reservoir
Radiator cap Opening pressure 93−123 kPa (0.95−1.25 kgf/cm 2 , 14−18 psi)
Thermostat Opening temperature Begins to open 76−80 °C (169−176 °F)
Fully open 90 °C (194 °F)
Valve lift at fully open 8.0 mm (0.31 in.) min.
Fuel and Emissions

regulator connected
Engine idle Idle speed without load (L13Z1) M/T (in neutral) 650±50 rpm
A/T (in N or P) 700±50 rpm
Idle speed without load (L15A7) M/T (in neutral), 700±50 rpm
A/T (in N or P)
Idle CO 0.1 % max.
Clutch
LHD 150 mm (5.91 in.) ———
Stroke 120−130 mm (4.72−5.12 in.) ———
Steering
Steering wheel Rotational play measured at outside edge 0−10 mm (0−0.39 in.)
with engine running
Initial load measured at outside edge with 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 lbf)
engine running
Gearbox Angle of rack guide screw loosened from 10±3 °
locked position
Suspension
Wheel alignment Camber Front 0 ° 00 ′±1 °
Rear −1 ° 00 ′±1 °
Caster Front 3 ° 20 ′±1 °
Total toe-in Front 0±3 mm (0±0.12 in.)
Rear 2.5±2.5 mm (10±0.10 in.)
Front wheel turning angle Inward 40 ° 19 ′±2 °
Outward 33 ° 19 ′±1 °
(reference)
Wheel Steel wheel runout Axial 0−1.0 mm (0−0.04 in.) 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial 0−1.0 mm (0−0.04 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Aluminium wheel runout Axial 0−0.7 mm (0−0.03 in.) 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial 0−0.7 mm (0−0.03 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Wheel bearing End play Front 0−0.05 mm (0−0.002 in.)
Rear 0−0.05 mm (0−0.002 in.)
Brakes
Parking brake Distance traveled when lever pulled with 196 6 to 8 clicks
N (20 kgf, 44 lbf) of force
Brake pedal Pedal height (carpet moved aside) M/T 139 mm (5.5 in.)
A/T 138 mm (5.4 in.)
Free play 1−5 mm (0.04−0.20 in.)
Brake disc Thickness Front 20.9−21.1 mm (0.82−0.83 in.) 19.0 mm (0.75 in.)
Rear 8.9−9.1 mm (0.35−0.36 in.) 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Runout ——— 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.)
Parallelism ——— 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.)
Brake pad Thickness Front 9.5−10.2 mm (0.37−0.41 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Rear 6.8−7.5 mm (0.27−0.30 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Brake booster Master cylinder oil pressure Vacuum booster Brake pedal Master cylinder oil pressure kPa (kgf/cm 2 , psi)
Vacuum kPa pressure N (kgf,
(mmHg, in.Hg) lbf)
0 (0, 0) 98 (10, 22) 0 (0, 0)
196 (20, 44) Except LHD (M/T) 577 (5.9, 84)
LHD (M/T) 501 (5.1, 73)
66.7 (500, 19.7) 98 (10, 22) Except LHD (M/T) 4,523 (46.1, 656)
LHD (M/T) 4,235 (43.2, 614)
196 (20, 44) Except LHD (M/T) 9,538 (97.3, 1.383)
LHD (M/T) 9,468 (96.5, 1.373)
Air Conditioning
Capacity of system 370−420 g (13.1−14.8 oz)
Refrigerant oil Type SP-10 (P/N 38897-P13-A01, 38898-P13-003, or 38899-P13-A01)
Capacity of components Condenser 25 mL (5/6 fl·oz, 0.9 Imp·oz)
Evaporator 35 mL (1 1/6 fl·oz, 1.2 Imp·oz)
Each line and 10 mL (1/3 fl·oz, 0.4 Imp·oz)
hose
Receiver/Dryer 10 mL (1/3 fl·oz, 0.4 Imp·oz)
Compressor 80−90 mL (2 2/3−3 fl·oz, 2.8−3.2 Imp·oz)
Compressor Field coil resistance At 20 °C (68 °F) 3.15−3.45 Ω
Pulley-to-armature plate clearance 0.35−0.65 mm (0.014−0.026 in.)
VIN, Engine, and Transmission Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number
a. Manufacturer, Make, and Type of Vehicle
MRH: Honda Automobile (Thailand) Co., Ltd.
MHR:GE6
MRH P.T. Honda
7 3Prospect
0 9 Motor, Indonesia
P 000001
b. Line, Body and Engine Type
GE6: Jazz/L13Z1
GE8: Jazz/L15A7
c.a BodybType and
c dTransmission
e f g Typeh
7: 4-door Hatchback/5-speed Manual
8: 4-door Hatchback/5-speed Automatic
d. Vehicle Grade (Series)
3: S (except IN model)
4: S (IN model)
5: 1.3GLI, 1.5VTI, V
6: 1.5VTIS, SV, E
8: S-MA
9: V-MA
e. Fixed Code or Check Digit
f. Model Year
9: '09
Production Year (IN model)
g. Factory Code
P: AYUTTHAYA Factory in Thailand
J: KARAWANG Factory in Indonesia
h. Serial Number
Engine Number
a. Engine Type
L13Z1: 1.3 L SOHC i-VTEC Sequential Multiport Fuel-injected engine
L15A7:
L13Z1 1.5 L SOHC i-VTEC Sequential Multiport Fuel-injected engine
- 1700001
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
a.a Transmission
b Type
F1R4: 5-speed Manual (L13Z1)
F1S4:
F1R4 5-speed Manual (L15A7 except IN model)
- 8000001
F1S5: 5-speed Manual (L15A7 for IN model)
SG0A: 5-speed Automatic
b. Serial Number
a b
Applicable Area Code List
MODEL APPLICABLE GRADE NAME ENGINE TRANSMISSION MANUFACTURER NAME
AREA CODE TYPE TYPE
Jazz KQ 1.3GLI L13Z1 5MT Honda Automobile (Thailand)
5AT Co.,Ltd.
1.5VTI, 1.5VTIS L15A7 5MT
5AT
KZ S, V, SV L15A7 5MT
5AT
S-MA, V-MA
KP S L13Z1 5MT
5AT
V L15A7 5MT
5AT
IN S, E L15A7 5MT P.T. Honda Prospect Motor,
5AT Indonesia
VIN, Engine, and Transmission Number Locations
NOTE: The illustration shows the RHD model, LHD model is similar.
Left side doorjump:

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations
Front Passenger's Compartment:
NOTE: The illustration shows the RHD model, the LHD model is symmetrical.
NOTE: The illustration shows the RHD model, the LHD model is similar.
Driver's doorjamb:
NOTE: The illustration shows the RHD model, the LHD model is symmetrical.
Abbreviations
List of automotive abbreviations which may be used in shop manual.
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
A/C Air Conditioning, Air Conditioner
ACEA Association des Constructeurs Europeens d' Automobiles
ACL Air Cleaner
A/F Air Fuel Ratio
AHB Advanced Hydraulic Booster
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
ALT Alternator
AMP Ampere(s)
ANT Antenna
API American Petroleum Institute
APP Accelerator Pedal Position
APPROX. Approximately
ASSY Assembly
A/T Automatic Transmission
ATDC After Top Dead Center
ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid
ATT Attachment
AUTO Automatic
AUX Auxiliary
BARO Barometric
BAT Battery
BCM Battery Condition Monitor
BDC Bottom Dead Center
BTDC Before Top Dead Center
CARB Carburetor
CAT or CATA Catalytic Converter
CD Compact Disc
CHG Charge
CKF Crankshaft Speed Fluctuation
CKP Crankshaft Position
CLV Calculated Load Value
CMBS Collision Mitigation Brake System
CMP Camshaft Position
CO Carbon Monoxide
COMP Complete
CPB Clutch Pressure Back up
CPC Clutch Pressure Control
CPU Central Processing Unit
CVT Continuously Variable Transmission
CVTF Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid
CYL Cylinder
CYP Cylinder Position
DIFF Differential
DLC Data Link Connector
DLI Distributor Less Ignition
DOHC Double Overhead Camshaft
DOT Department of Transportation
DPF Diesel Particulate Filter
DPI Dual Point Injection
DPSF Dual Pump System Fluid
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
EBD Electronic Brake Distribution
ECM Engine Control Module
ECT Engine Coolant Temperature
EGR Exhaust Gas Recirculation
EGT Exhaust Gas Temperature
ELD Electrical Load Detector
EPR Evaporator Pressure Regulator
EPS Electrical Power Steering
ETCS Electronic Throttle Control System
EVAP Evaporative Emission
EX Exhaust
F Front
FIA Fuel Injection Air
FL Front Left
FP Fuel Pump
FR Front Right
FRP Fuel Rail Pressure
FSR Fail Safe Relay
FWD Front Wheel Drive
GAL Gallon
GND Ground
GPS Global Positioning System
H/B Hatchback
HBA Hydraulic Brake Assist
HC Hydrocarbons
HDS Honda Diagnostic System
HFT Hands Free Telephone
HID High Intensity Discharge
HIM Honda Interface Module
HO2S Heated Oxygen Sensor
HPS Hydraulic Power Steering
HVAC Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
IAB Intake Air Bypass
IAC Idle Air Control
IACV Idle Air Control Valve
IAR Intake Air Resonator
IAT Intake Air Temperature
ICM Ignition Control Module
ID Identification
ID or I.D. Inside Diameter
i-DSI Intelligent-Dual & Sequential Ignition
IG or IGN Ignition
IMA Idle Mixture Adjustment
Integrated Motor Assisted
IMMOBI. Immobilizer (Immobiliser)
IMRC Intake Manifold Runner Control
IMT Intake Manifold Tuning
IN Intake
INJ Injection
INT Intermittent
IQA Injector Quantity Adjustment (Diesel model)
ISV Intake Shutter Valve
KS Knock Sensor
L Left
L/C Lock-up Clutch
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LEV Low Emission Vehicle
LF Left Front
LH Left Handle
LHD Left Handle Drive
LR Left Rear
LSD Limited Slip Differential
L4 In-line Four Cylinder (engine)
MAF Mass Air Flow
MAP Manifold Absolute Pressure
MAX. Maximum
MBS Mainshaft Brake System
MCK Motor Check
MCM Motor Control Module
MCU Moment Control Unit
MICS Multiplex Integrated Control System
MICU Multiplex Integrated Control Unit
MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
MIN. Minimum
MPI Multi Point Injection
M/S Manual Steering
M/T Manual Transmission
MTF Manual Transmission Fluid
NOx Oxides of Nitrogen
OBD On-board Diagnostic
OD or O.D. Outside Diameter
OPDS Occupant Position Detection System
O2S Oxygen Sensor
PAIR Pulsed Secondary Air Injection
PCM Powertrain Control Module
PCV Positive Crankcase Ventilation
Proportioning Control Valve
PDU Power Drive Unit
PGM-FI Programmed-fuel Injection
PGM-IG Programmed Ignition
PH Pressure High
PL Pilot Light or Pressure Low
PMR Pump Motor Relay
P/N Part Number
PRI Primary
P/S Power Steering
PSF Power Steering Fluid
PSP Power Steering Pressure
PSW Pressure Switch
Qty Quantity
R Right
REF Reference
RH Right Handle
RHD Right Handle Drive
RL Rear Left
RON Research Octane Number
RR Rear Right
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
SCS Service Check Signal
SEC Second, Secondary
SOHC Single Overhead Camshaft
SOL Solenoid
SPEC Specification
S/R Sun Roof
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
STD Standard
SW Switch
T Torque
TB Throttle Body
T/B Timing Belt
TC Torque Converter
TCM Transmission Control Module
TCS Traction Control System
TDC Top Dead Center
TFT Thin Film Transistor
T/N Tool Number
TP Throttle Position
TPMS Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
TWC Three Way Catalytic Converter
VC Viscous Coupling
VCM Variable Cylinder Management
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VSA Vehicle Stability Assist
VSS Vehicle Speed Sensor
VTEC Variable Valve Timing & Valve Lift Electronic Control
VVIS Variable Volume Intake System
V6 V-engine Six Cylinder (engine)
W With
W/O Without
WOT Wide Open Throttle
2WD Two Wheel Drive
4WD Four Wheel Drive
4AT 4-speed Automatic Transmission
5AT 5-speed Automatic Transmission
5MT 5-speed Manual Transmission
6MT 6-speed Manual Transmission
P Park
R Reverse
N Neutral
D4 Drive (1st through 4th gear)
D3 Drive (1st through 3rd gear)
D Drive
M Manual mode
S Second
L Low
O/D Over Drive
1ST Low (gear)
2ND Second (gear)
3RD Third (gear)
4TH Fourth (gear)
5TH Fifth (gear)
6TH Sixth (gear)
Lubricants and Fluids
Used engine oil may cause skin cancer if repeatedly left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods.
Although this is unlikely unless you handle used oil on a daily basis, it is still advisable to thoroughly
wash your hands with soap and water as soon as possible after handling used oil.
For the details of the lubrication points and the type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated
index and the various work procedures (such as Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement, Overhaul,
Installation, etc.) contained in each section.
Application Lubricant or Fluid
A Engine Always use API service grade SL or higher SAE
viscosity: See chart.
B Manual transmission Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
Always use genuine Honda MTF * . Using motor oil
can cause stiffer shifting because it does not
contain the proper additives.
Automatic transmission Honda ATF-Z1
Always use genuine Honda ATF-Z1. Using a non-
Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
C Brake system (including ABS lines) Brake Fluid DOT 3 or DOT 4
D Clutch system (manual transmission) We recommend genuine Honda Brake Fluid. Using
a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and
decrease the life of the system.
E Release fork (manual transmission) Multipurpose Grease
F Battery terminals
G Brake booster clevis pin
H Clutch master cylinder clevis pin (manual
I transmission)
J Fuel fill door
K Hood hinges and hood latch
Tailgate hinges
L Caliper piston boot Rubber Grease
M Caliper piston seal, caliper pins and boots Silicone Grease
N Shift cable ends (manual transmission)
O Air conditioning compressor Compressor Oil:SP-10 (P/N 38897-P13-A01 or
38899-P13-A01)
for refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a)
P Cooling system Always use genuine Honda All Season
If genuine Honda MTF is not available, use API service SL or higher grade motor oil with a viscosity
of SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 as a temporary replacement.
NOTE:
Lubricate the following grease using the recommended lubricants and fluids.
In corrosive area, more frequent lubrication is necessary.
The illustration shows the RHD model, the LHD model is symmetrical.
Alternator
Alternator Output At 13.5 V and 95 A
normal engine
temperature
Coil (rotor) resistance At 20 °C (68 °F) 2.1−2.3 Ω
Slip ring O.D. 22.7 mm (0.89 in.) 21.2 mm (0.83 in.)
Brush length 23.0 mm (0.91 in.) 18.0 mm (0.71 in.)
Brush spring tension 4.1−5.3 N (0.42−0.54 kgf, 0.93−1.19 lbs)
Drive belt
Drive belt Tension Auto-tensioner
Coolant reservoir
Coolant Coolant capacity 0.44 L (0.116 US qt, 0.097 Imp qt)
reservoir
Radiator
Radiator Coolant capacity (Includes engine, L13Z1 M/T With heater Engine overhaul 5.02 L (1.326 US gal, 1.104 Imp gal)
heater, hoses, and reservoir) Coolant change 4.53 L (1.197 US gal, 0.997 Imp gal)
Use genuine Honda All Season Without heater Engine overhaul 4.59 L (1.213 US gal, 1.010 Imp gal)
L15A7 M/T With heater Engine overhaul 5.03 L (1.329 US gal, 1.107 Imp gal)
Radiator cap
Radiator cap Opening pressure 93−123 kPa (0.95−1.25 kgf/cm 2 , 14−18 psi)
Thermostat
Thermostat Opening temperature Begins to open 76−80 °C (169−176 °F)
Fully open 90 °C (194 °F)
Valve lift at fully open 8.0 mm (0.31 in.) min.
Head
Head Warpage 0.07 mm (0.0028 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Height 119.9−120.1 mm (4.720−4.728 in.) ———
Camshaft
Camshaft End play 0.05−0.25 mm (0.002−0.010 in.) 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance 0.045−0.084 mm (0.0018−0.0033 in.) 0.100 mm (0.004 in.)
Total runout 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
Cam lobe height L13Z1 Intake, primary 34.290 mm (1.3500 in.) ———
Exhaust 35.047 mm (1.3798 in.) ———
L15A7 Intake, primary 35.241 mm (1.3874 in.) ———
Exhaust 35.471 mm (1.3964 in.) ———
Rocker arm
Rocker arm Arm-to-shaft clearance Intake 0.019−0.058 mm (0.0007−0.0023 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Valve
Valve Clearance (cold) Intake 0.15−0.19 mm (0.006−0.007 in.) ———
Exhaust 0.26−0.30 mm (0.010−0.012 in.) ———
Stem O.D. Intake 5.48−5.49 mm (0.216−0.216 in.) 5.45 mm (0.215 in.)
Stem-to-guide clearance Intake 0.020−0.050 mm (0.0008−0.0020 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Valve guide
Valve guide I.D. Intake 5.51−5.53 mm (0.217−0.218 in.) 5.55 mm (0.219 in.)
Installed height Intake 15.85−16.35 mm (0.624−0.644 in.) ———
Exhaust 15.85−16.35 mm (0.624−0.644 in.) ———
Valve spring
Valve spring Free length L13Z1 Intake 51.17 mm (2.014 in.) ———
Exhaust 57.26 mm (2.254 in.) ———
L15A7 Intake 48.55 mm (1.911 in.) ———
Exhaust 54.52 mm (2.146 in.) ———
Valve seat
Valve seat Width Intake 0.850−1.150 mm (0.0335−0.0453 in.) 1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
Stem installed height Intake 46.1−46.5 mm (1.815−1.831 in.) 46.8 mm (1.843 in.)
Compression
Compression Pressure check at 250 rpm (min −1 ) with Minimum 980 kPa (10.0 kgf/cm 2 , 142 psi) ———
wide open throttle. (See Design Specs for Maximum 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm 2 , 28 psi) ———
ratio) variation
Block
Block Warpage of deck 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Bore diameter 73.000−73.015 mm (2.8740−2.8746 in.) 73.065 mm (2.8776 in.)
Bore taper ——— 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Reboring limit ——— 0.25 mm (0.01 in.)
Connecting rod
Connecting rod Pin-to-rod interferemce 0.019−0.036 mm (0.007−0.0014 in.) ———
Small-end bore diameter 17.964−17.977 mm (0.707−0.708 in.) ———
Large-end bore diameter Nominal 43.0 mm (1.69 in.) ———
End play installed on crankshaft 0.15−0.35 mm (0.006−0.014 in.) 0.40 mm (0.016 in.)
Crankshaft
Crankshaft Main journal diameter 49.976−50.000 mm (1.9676−1.9685 in.) ———
Rod journal diameter 39.976−40.000 mm (1.5739−1.5748 in.) ———
Rod/main journal taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
Rod/main journal out-of-round 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
End play 0.10−0.35 mm (0.004−0.014 in.) 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
Crankshaft bearing
Crankshaft Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance 0.018−0.036 mm (0.0007−0.0014 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
bearing Rod bearing clearance L15A7 0.020−0.038 mm (0.0008−0.0015 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
L13Z1 0.026−0.044 mm (0.0010−0.0017 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
Piston
Piston Skirt O.D. at 16 mm (0.6 in.) from bottom of L13Z1 72.972−72.982 mm (2.8729−2.8733 in.) 72.97 mm (2.8728 in.)
skirt L15A7 72.980−72.990 mm (2.8732−2.8736 in.) 72.97 mm (2.8728 in.)
Clearance in cylinder L13Z1 0.018−0.043 mm (0.007−0.0017 in.) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
L15A7 0.010−0.035 mm (0.0004−0.0014 in.) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Ring groove width Top 1.050−1.060 mm (0.0413−0.0417 in.) 1.080 mm (0.0425 in.)
Second 1.020−1.030 mm (0.0401−0.0405 in.) 1.050 mm (0.0413 in)
Oil 2.005−2.020 mm (0.0789−0.0795 in.) 2.050 mm (0.0807 in.)
Piston pin
Piston pin O.D. 17.996−18.000 mm (0.7085−0.7087 in.) ———
Pin-to-piston clearance 0.010−0.017 mm (0.0004−0.0007 in.) ———
Piston ring
Piston ring Ring-to-groove clearance Top 0.065−0.090 mm (0.0026−0.0035 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Second 0.030−0.055 mm (0.0012−0.0022 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
Ring end gap Top 0.15−0.30 mm (0.006−0.012 in.) 0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
Second 0.30−0.42 mm (0.012−0.017 in.) 0.65 mm (0.026 in.)
Oil 0.20−0.70 mm (0.008−0.028 in.) 0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
Fuel and Emissions Systems Circuit Diagram
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram

ECM/PCM
24P JUNCTION
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) CONNECTOR*1
(12P JUNCTION
CONNECTOR*2)E F
B31 3
RED/GRN 3 2 1 4 5 6 7
VG+ K 4 1 MAF
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK SENSOR
B33
C5 5 2
BLK/RED 13P 10
BLK/YEL
BRN *5 CONNECTOR BLK/YEL
VG−
INJ1
12 V 1 No. 1 INJECTOR
*1 9 8
GRN/YEL IAT
YEL BLK/YEL
2 2 JUNCTION
24P SENSOR
RED/YEL
11 CONNECTOR*1
13P K H BLK/YEL 1
B35 YEL/BLK (12P JUNCTION1
*1
B32 GRN/YEL CONNECTOR
VTS 12 CONNECTOR)*2
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd)RED/YEL
RED
C6
IAT
8P CONNECTOR
BLK/YEL BRN
2 2
INJ2
B28 N
RED/YEL LT O
GRN *3 BLK/YEL
6 9
WHT No. 2 INJECTOR
ROCKER ARM
ATFT 1 2 OIL CONTROL
A47 6 7 2 7
YEL GRN/YEL
YEL WHTGRN/YEL
B24
C29 YEL 1 1 SOLENOID
SUPP RED/WHT
RED A RED RED/WHT ATFSHIFTER+
TEMPERATURE
1
ECT1
AFS+ PADDLE
YEL/BLK G101 (UPSHIFT SENSORSWITCH)2
1 RED/YEL ECT SENSOR 1
C7
C30
B11 *1 *2 BLK 21 3
BLU 5 BLK/YEL
B3 RED/YEL
*3 GRN
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) INJ3
AFS−
SHA
BLU/BLK
YEL/BLU *10 13P CONNECTOR
YEL/BLU
BLU 2
No.4 3 INJECTOR
PCS
A48 12P JUNCTION 2 5 824P JUNCTION CONNECTOR 2 11 WHT/BLK
SHIFT SOLENOID
C9
B10 LT BLU R CONNECTOR O 10 LT GRN/ LT GRN/ EVAP CANISTER
SDNP GRN
BLK RED RED 3 PADDLEVALVE SHIFTER− AA/F SENSOR
PURGE VALVE
AFSHTC
PG1 13P CONNECTOR 2 (DOWNSHIFT 1 (SENSOR 1)
B27 16P P
GRN/WHT UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY YEL/BLK BOX ORN SWITCH)
CONNECTOR 2 12 1
SHB
B1
C8 14P PURA WHT BLK
BRN YEL
CONNECTOR T Q 2
20 19 21 23 24 22 13 15 14 16 18 17
PG2
INJ4 6 5 11 12 L P G SHIFT1 SOLENOID
8 CABLE REEL BLK/YEL VALVE B4 INJECTOR
3 A9B46
C13
C2
16P CONNECTOR
*10 1
(1) No. 3 1
*8 WHT B21 BRN YEL/RED T (20P CONNECTOR)*6 YEL/RED
IG1 6 IGPVCC1
B36 GRNWHT/BLU G501 WHT/BLU GRN
YEL PGMETCS
ALTL
SHC
A34 PUR B12 MICU 2 2
LT GRN WHT/RED GRN/RED 42
IG2 4 A46C11
SHO2S B22 WHT/RED LT GRN
ORN ECT2
GRN/RED GRN 14 12P JUNCTION GRN/YEL GRN/WHT A/F 3
SHIFT11SOLENOID
1 (18)*6 J YEL
+B ST S-NET5V
MAP
B4 B2 24P JUNCTION
CONNECTOR AD AE AFVALVE AG C AH
24SENSOR AI AJ
PNK A10 PUR YEL CONNECTOR WHT/GRN AB
BLK/WHT RELAY
A22B12
B47
SO2SHTC
C14
7
YEL B5
8 G101 ECTMAP SENSOR
SENSOR 2
SG6 GRN/RED ORN 17 12 16 13 15 YEL 3
C44
SUBRLY
SHD WHT/RED GRN/WHT BLK/YEL
IGNITION SWITCH ALTF
SG1 BRN/YEL *10 B6
(16)*6 C D
A7LG1 V
BLU BLU/24P JUNCTION *1 SHIFT SOLENOID ALTERNATOR
B8 CONNECTOR WHT SECONDARY
BLK 4 3 2 U 9 BRAKE
10 8 PEDAL VALVE D HO2S
MRLY
B14
B45 LT GRN
5V C48 BLU/BLK (5)BRN/YEL(6) (11) POSITION
(12) 24PSWITCH (2)BLU 16
BATTERY C1
ATPP WHT BRN/YEL 4
WHT/GRN
WHT
B9 JUNCTION
3 CONNECTOR(SENSOR 2)
ALTC
A42
A3
LG2 *10 *10 *10
YEL/BLK
2
10P CONNECTOR *10 K-LINE
(14) IGIETCS
WHT LT GRN WHT B14 LT GRN Brake pedal pressed: closed
BKSW
CANH
B7
B40 RED 7 1 4 Brake pedal 10
1 released:
*5 C10C31 BLK/ YEL/RED
RED/BLK 3 12 8 9 10 11
LT GRN WHT BLU/WHT 1 WHT 1 PGM-FI open
(15) B15
OPSW
LSA RED GRN WHT CANH MAIN
WHT
IG1CMP WHT 6 B17 (6) 5 3 3 6
A4
ATPR 13P YEL BLU/BLK YEL (5) BLK/YEL 20 BLK/BLU19 21 22
Brake 2 pedal P24RELAY
9 23
pressed: 1 open To
C15 24PRED 3 RED (21) OIL PRESSURE
BATTERY A21A41
CANLCONNECTOR WHT
BRN B18 4 4(22) 1 2 BLK
(23) RED pedal
7 (24)
Brake released: closed
SWITCH
CANL
SPARK
B34 JUNCTION RED Y1 WHT BRN/YEL
*2 WHT *2 *2 *2 R PLUG
G1 TERMINAL IGPLS1
BKSWNC
ETCSRLY GRN/YEL
CONNECTOR 1 A/TICMCLUTCH PRESSUREEPS
FUSE BOX LT BLU B32 9 2 2
SG4
B13
A44 N 2 BRN Y3 RED/BLK BRN RED/BLK *3 CONTROL CMP SOLENOIDN
SENSOR VALVE
CONTROL A
RED BRN/YEL GRN/ G101 GRN/ GRN/
B48 PNK B25 ELD3 8 1 IGNITION
No. 1 COIL UNIT YEL
ATPN
WEN BRN/WHT GRY 14P CONNECTOR PNK PNK YEL YEL D PGM-FI
A16 Y2
LSB
A26 2 ORN12BLK11 B34 14 14 12 4 GRN/ 1 GRN/ MAIN
3 8 16P3 BRN
1 YEL 3 2 D *9YEL 2
RELAY A
IMOFPR
VCC4 14P YEL/BLK RED YEL BLU
3
G501 BLK/YEL CONNECTOR BLK To
B22
A18 *10 CONNECTOR (S)*8
3
A1C16 B26 T1 (7) 9 1 SPARK
C32
ATPD
APSA WHT/GRN BRN WHT 2
(12) ORN
3
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE PLUG
VBSOL
IGPLS2 1 *10 BLU CONTROL
FICM G SOLENOID 2 H VALVE I B
BLU L M 2 E 7 (3)
A36
CKP
B26 W1 9 BRN 1 2
*1 B24 RED BLU 1
LSC
SG4
BLU/YEL
WHT YEL
(8) 1 29 No.
*7 12P JUNCTIONB16 2 9 2 IGNITION COIL
A25 U B28 S1 BRN/YEL BLU BRN BRN RED 4 TEMPERATURE
CONNECTOR 14P BLU ORN 13P CONNECTOR 2
ATPD3*9 CONNECTOR 6 GRY
10BLK 5 IGNITION B
C12
VCC5
(ATPS)*8 B29 RED *3 2 SENSOR CONTROL
BLU/YEL
3P CONNECTOR YEL/RED CKP COIL
A19 BLU WHT X3 *10 BLK/YEL
10
3
A/T CLUTCH(13) 6
DIAL
PRESSURE
RELAY To
VCC3
C17 PNK B21 11 BLU1
A20 YEL YEL 6 WHT/REDRED 1 LT CONTROL 1SOLENOID
5 VALVE CSPARK
Z B17
APSB WHT/BLK GRN GRN PLUG
A24
IGPLS3
VCC6
C20 4 K7 1 10
8 ICM A B
A35 ORN I BLK BLK RED 2 312P
5
ATP2-1*3PNKRED/BLK BRN 8
6 4 A32A37
ELD
TPSA
11 12
24P 15 5 Q1 G101 WHT (4)
4
JUNCTION
C46
SG5 PURJUNCTION YEL 1 1 PUR 4CONNECTOR
SCSACTEMP
(12) (11) RED/BLU
CONNECTOR 3 Q2 WHT
RED/BLU No. 3 IGNITION APPCOIL
TRANSMISSION SENSOR A/B
PNK C21
B19
KS*10 *10 16P BLU BRN/YEL UNDER-DASH7 1 RANGE
*4 B29 YEL/BLU
RED CONNECTOR YEL/BLU 3 6 SWITCH
YEL Q8 (9) FUSE/RELAY BOX WHT YEL 6
VCC2
TPSB LT BLU 3 ETCS
ATPFWD 4
B18
C18 *3 G101 BLK/YEL
WHT 2 2ND KNOCK 5 SENSOR CONTROL To
*10
C43 11J 16P CONNECTOR 1 CLUTCH RELAY SPARK
A43 WHT/RED
WHT/BLU 1
NM GRN A26 5 THROTTLE PLUG
IGPLS4 PUR *3 BLU 13P CONNECTOR WHT 2 ICMTRANSMISSION
Clutch pedal pressed: FLUID
open
SG3
B23
CRMTCLS *3 Clutch PRESSURE ACTUATOR
SWITCH
2
3 2 *1:*11A/T A34 G101 (10) BRN2 2 3 pedal released: closed
X S
ATPRVS *1: A/T 15 BRN GRN BLK GRN/YEL
WHT 21
C4
A29
A15 *2:YEL/RED
*2: M/T
M/T
LT BLU (19)*6 *3 BLK/ BLU/RED No. 4 IGNITION P
TEST THROTTLE
COIL 4
TACHOMETER BODY
PNK 3 YEL4 4 3 CLUTCH PEDAL INPUT SHAFT
NEP
ETCSM+ CONNECTOR
ACC N1 (11) POSITION SWITCH (MAINSHAFT)
12PB8 PNK AC SPEEDSTARTER SENSOR
BLK
13P G401 LT BLU12P 3RD CLUTCH CUT
*1 JUNCTION 4 8 CONNECTOR 8
OP2SW
C3
CONNECTOR 8 7 CONNECTOR FUEL PUMP RELAY
TRANSMISSION FLUID
A6 YEL (6)*6 12P PRESSURE SWITCH
13P *3 D 10 C BLU
ETCSM− GRN CONNECTOR JUNCTION
FANC
B9 1 10
A28 16P CONNECTOR *10 9 7 BRN *3 BLU/WHT 3
M W LT BLU PNK K-LINE G502
OP3SW PNK CONNECTOR
SLS (20P GRY 7 12P JUNCTION 1 1 1
BLU *1
G101 YEL/REDLT BLU WHT
CONNECTOR)*6 16PK-LINE CONNECTOR CANH
CONNECTOR
*10 SHIFT LOCK
FUSES: B38
BLK/WHT 9 2 17SOLENOID
A30 YEL
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX: NC*1: A/TBLU Y
RED
To AUDIO CANL UNIT
(1)No. 26 A/F SENSOR5(10 A)13P VSSOUT
*2: M/T Q WHT
6
3
CONNECTOR *10 CANH AD AE AF AG GRN/WHTAH AJ ABS
(2)No.
BARO 39 IGP (15 A) *5: With cruise control R
AI
MODULATOR-
SENSOR
(3)No. 33 IGNITION COIL (15 A)*1:
A38 A/T 414 BRN OUTPUT 1 SHAFT CONTROL UNIT
RED RED DATA LINK ORN
(Built into
(4)No. 52 ETCS (15 A) *1:*3:
TAC
*3 RHD
A/T model CANL
(PUR)*10
CONNECTOR
A/C
(COUNTERSHAFT)
2
the ECM/PCM) 4S COMPRESSOR
(5)No. 20 FUEL PUMP (15 A) 16P *3:*4:
*1: M/T
RHD
A/T (with
model cruise YEL SPEED SENSOR
CLUTCH RELAY
14P 12
(6)No. 12 ALTERNATOR (10 *8:CONNECTOR
A)
control)
A/T(with paddle shifter model) RED CONNECTOR PNK 3 EVAPORATOR
13 *9: 16 TEMPERATURE
(7)No.
*10 7 MISSION SOLENOID (10
*10:
A/T *3:model
A)LHD RHDpaddle
(without model shifter PNK
SENSOR
(8)No. 24 STOP, HORN (15 A)model) *5: With cruise control BRN
5
A/C
(9)No.
5 22 METER (7.5 A) *10: LHD*6: With headlight adjuster
model 4 CONDENSER
*7: KZ, KP models 4
(10)No.
14P 10 A/C (7.5 A) BLK FAN RELAY
CONNECTOR *10: LHD model
(11)No. 1 BACK UP (7.5 A) 3
GRN
(12)No. 60 IG SW (50 A) V W X Y
(13)No. 44 STARTER (7.5 A)
AA G502
12P JUNCTION *1: A/T 18
RADIATOR
BATTERY TERMINAL FUSE BOX:
CONNECTOR AB AA AC Z 4 FAN RELAY
*3: RHD model K-LINE
(14)20 A (with trailer lighting connecter: 30 A)
(15)100 A 4
BLU
*10: LHD model 3 17
3 GRN CANH
*1:1A/T 16
*3: RHDBLU
model AUXILIARY CANL
*6: With headlight adjuster 30 UNDER-HOOD RELAY BOX SRS UNIT
*3: RHD model
*10: LHD model WHT
CANH
GAUGE CONTROL
*10: LHD model MODULE
29
*11: With SRS RED
CANL
Engine will not start (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
2. Test the starter.
Also check for
Low compression
No ignition spark
Intake vacuum leaks
Locked up engine
Broken cam chain
Fuel contamination
Engine will not start (MIL comes on and stays on, no DTCs set)
Also check for
Low compression
No ignition spark
Intake vacuum leaks
Locked up engine
Broken cam chain
Fuel contamination
No power to ECM/PCM
MIL comes on and stays on, or never comes on at all, no DTCs set
1. Troubleshoot the MIL circuit.
Engine will not start (MIL works OK, no DTCs set, immobilizer indicator stays on or flashes)
Engine starts but stalls immediately (MIL works OK, no DTCs set, immobilizer indicator stays on or flashes)
Engine is hard starting (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
Also check for
Low compression
Intake air leaks
Fuel contamination
Weak spark
Cold fast idle too low (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
3. Throttle body cleaning.
Also check for
Cold fast idle too high (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
Also check for
After warming up, idle speed is below specifications without load (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
Also check for
Intake vacuum leaks
After warming up, idle speed is above specifications without load (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
2. Inspect the APP sensor.
Also check for
Intake vacuum leaks
Idle speed fluctuates (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
3. Except KQ model: Test the injectors.
5. Inspect the PCV valve.
7. Troubleshoot the A/C signal circuit.
Also check for
Fuel contamination
Intake vacuum leaks
Misfire or rough running (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
Also check for
Low compression
Valve clearance
Fuel contamination
Fails emission test (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
1. Except KQ model: Inspect the three way catalytic converter (TWC).
2. Except KQ model: Check the spark plugs.
5. Check the EVAP system.
Also check for
Fuel contamination
Low compression
Broken cam chain
Low power (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
2. Check the air cleaner element.
4. Except KQ model: Inspect the three way catalytic converter (TWC).
Also check for
Fuel contamination
Low compression
Camshaft timing
Engine oil level
Engine stalls (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
4. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal circuit.
5. Except KQ model: Check the spark plugs.
Also check for
Intake vacuum leaks
Faulty harness and sensor connections
Fuel contamination
Difficult to refuel
1. Inspect the breather line and the suction line.
HDS does not communicate with the ECM/PCM or the vehicle
Fuel and Emissions Systems Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Engine will not start (MIL works OK, no 1.Test the battery. Low compression
DTCs set) 2.Test the starter. No ignition spark
3.Check the fuel pressure. Intake vacuum leaks
4.Troubleshoot the fuel pump circuit. Locked up engine
Broken cam chain
Fuel contamination
Engine will not start (MIL comes on and Troubleshoot the DLC circuit. Low compression
stays on, no DTCs set) No ignition spark
Intake vacuum leaks
Locked up engine
Broken cam chain
Fuel contamination
No power to ECM/PCM
MIL comes on and stays on, or never Troubleshoot the MIL circuit.
comes on at all, no DTCs set
Engine will not start (MIL works OK, no Check the immobilizer system.
DTCs set, immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes)
Engine starts but stalls immediately Check the immobilizer system.
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays on or
flashes)
Engine is hard starting (MIL works OK, 1.Test the battery. Low compression
no DTCs set) 2.Check the fuel pressure. Intake air leaks
3.Test the throttle body. Fuel contamination
Weak spark
Cold fast idle too low (MIL works OK, 1.Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Incorrect valve adjustment
3.Throttle body cleaning.
Cold fast idle too high (MIL works OK, 1.Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Incorrect valve adjustment
After warming up, idle speed is below 1.Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit. Intake vacuum leaks
specifications without load (MIL works 2.Test the throttle body. Incorrect valve adjustment
OK, no DTCs set)
After warming up, idle speed is above 1.Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit. Intake vacuum leaks
specifications without load (MIL works 2.Inspect the APP sensor.
OK, no DTCs set)
Idle speed fluctuates (MIL works OK, no 1.Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Fuel contamination
DTCs set) 2.Test the fuel pressure. Intake vacuum leaks
3.Except KQ model: Test the injectors.
4.Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit.
5.Inspect the PCV valve.
7.Troubleshoot the A/C signal circuit.
Misfire or rough running (MIL works OK, 1.Check the spark plugs. Low compression
no DTCs set) 2.Test the fuel pressure. Valve clearance
3.Test the injectors. Fuel contamination
4.Troubleshoot the fuel pump circuit.
Fails emission test (MIL works OK, no 1.Except KQ model: Inspect the three way catalytic converter (TWC). Fuel contamination
DTCs set) 2.Except KQ model: Check the spark plugs. Low compression
3.Test the fuel pressure. Broken cam chain
5.Check the EVAP system.
Low power (MIL works OK, no DTCs 1.Test the fuel pressure. Fuel contamination
set) 2.Check the air cleaner element. Low compression
3.Test the throttle body. Camshaft timing
4.Except KQ model: Inspect the three way catalytic converter (TWC). Engine oil level
Engine stalls (MIL works OK, no DTCs 1.Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Intake vacuum leaks
set) 2.Test the fuel pressure. Faulty harness and sensor
3.Check the idle speed. connections
4.Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal circuit. Fuel contamination
5.Except KQ model: Check the spark plugs.
Difficult to refuel Inspect the breather line and the suction line.
HDS does not communicate with the Troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
ECM/PCM or the vehicle
Fuel pressure regulator
regulator connected
Fuel tank
Engine idle
Engine idle Idle speed without load (L13Z1) M/T (in neutral) 650±50 rpm
A/T (in N or P) 700±50 rpm
Idle speed without load (L15A7) M/T (in neutral), 700±50 rpm
A/T (in N or P)
Idle CO 0.1 % max.
Ignition timing
Ignition timing At idle (check the M/T (in neutral): 0±2 ° BTDC
white mark) A/T (in N or P): 0±2 ° BTDC
Ignition coil
Ignition coil Rated voltage 12 V
Firing order 1−3−4−2
Spark plug
Spark plug Type NGK: IZFR6K13
DENSO: SKJ20DR-M13
Gap 1.2−1.3 mm (0.047−0.051 in.) ———
Oil pump
Oil pump Inner rotor-to-outer rotor clearance 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor 0.100−0.175 mm (0.0039−0.0069 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
clearance
Pump housing-to-rotor axial 0.02−0.06 mm (0.001−0.002 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
clearance
Relief valve
Relief valve Relief valve, oil pressure with oil At idle 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm 2 , 10 psi) min. ———
temperature at 80°C (176°F)
At 3,000 rpm (min −1 ) 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm 2 , 50 psi) min. ———
Engine oil
Engine oil Capacity Engine overhaul 4.2 L (4.4 US qt, 3.7 Imp qt) ———
Oil change including oil filter 3.6 L (3.8 US qt, 3.2 Imp qt) ———
Oil change without oil filter 3.4 L (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt) ———
Starter
Starter Output Except L13Z1 0.7 kw
KP, KQ
L13Z1 KP, KQ 0.6 kw, 0.7 kw
Commutator mica depth 0.45−0.75 mm (0.018−0.030 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Commutator runout 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) max. 0.4 mm (0.02 in.)
Commutator O.D. 27.9−28.0 mm (1.098−1.102 in.) 27.0 mm (1.06 in.)
Brush length 9.7−10.3 mm (0.38−0.41 in.) 6.0 mm (0.20 in.)
Wheel alignment
Wheel alignment Camber Front 0 ° 00 ′±1 °
Rear −1 ° 00 ′±1 °
Caster Front 3 ° 20 ′±1 °
Total toe-in Front 0±3 mm (0±0.12 in.)
Rear 2.5±2.5 mm (10±0.10 in.)
Front wheel turning angle Inward 40 ° 19 ′±2 °
Outward 33 ° 19 ′±1 °
(reference)
Wheel bearing
Wheel bearing End play Front 0−0.05 mm (0−0.002 in.)
Rear 0−0.05 mm (0−0.002 in.)
Wheel
Wheel Steel wheel runout Axial 0−1.0 mm (0−0.04 in.) 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial 0−1.0 mm (0−0.04 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Aluminium wheel runout Axial 0−0.7 mm (0−0.03 in.) 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial 0−0.7 mm (0−0.03 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment
Inspection
1. Pull the parking brake lever (A) with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf) of force to fully apply the parking brake. The parking
brake lever should be locked within the specified number of clicks.
Lever locked clicks: 6 to 8
2. If the number of lever clicks is not as specified, adjust the parking brake.
Adjustment
2. Press the brake pedal several times.
4. Loosen the parking brake adjusting nut (A).
7. Make sure the lever (A) on the rear brake caliper contacts the stop pin (B).
NOTE: The parking brake lever will contact the stop pin when the parking brake adjusting nut is loosened.
9. Pull the parking brake lever 1 click.
10. Tighten the parking brake adjusting nut until the parking brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels are turned.
11. Release the parking brake lever fully, and check that the parking brakes do not drag when the rear wheels are
turned. Readjust if necessary.
12. Make sure the parking brake lever within the specified number of clicks (6 to 8 clicks).
Parking brake
Parking brake Distance traveled when lever pulled with 196 6 to 8 clicks
N (20 kgf, 44 lbf) of force
Parking Brake Cable Replacement
Exploded View
NOTE:
The parking brake cables must not be bent or distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and premature cable failure.
Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure.
2. Loosen the parking brake cable adjustment nut.
3. Remove the parking brake cable clip (A) from the brake cable (B).
4. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the lever (C).
5. Remove the parking brake cable mounting hardware, then remove the cable.
6. Install the parking brake cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Be careful not to bend or distort the cable.
Make sure the parking brake cable clip is fully seated on the cable housing.
Adjust the parking brake.
Brake System Bleeding
NOTE:
Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean genuine Honda DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid from an unopened
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off
The reservoir connected to the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding
procedure and checked after bleeding each wheel location. Add fluid as required.
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir (A) is at the MAX (upper) level line (B).
2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure.
3. Start the bleeding at the driver's side of the front brake system.
NOTE: Bleed the calipers or the wheel cylinders in the sequence shown.
4. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed screw (B), then, loosen the bleed screw to allow air to escape Front
from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw securely.
5. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line.
6. Repeat the procedure for each brake circuit until there are no air bubbles are in the fluid.
Rear
Conventional Brake Component Location Index
MASTER CYLINDER
Brake System Bleeding,
Replacement,
Disassembly,
Reassembly,
BRAKE BOOSTER
Inspection,
Replacement,
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

Circuit Diagram,
Parking Brake Switch Test,
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test,
BRAKE HOSE and LINE

Inspection,
Brake Hose Replacement,
REAR BRAKE
Pad Inspection and
Replacement,
Disc Inspection,
Disc Replacement,
Caliper Overhaul,
PARKING BRAKE
Inspection and Adjustment,
Cable Replacement,
BRAKE PEDAL FRONT BRAKE

Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Pad Inspection and Replacement,
Position Switch Adjustment, Disc Inspection,
Disc Replacement,
Replacement, Caliper Overhaul,
*: The illustration shows RHD model, LHD model is similar.

Brake booster
Brake booster Master cylinder oil pressure Vacuum booster Brake pedal Master cylinder oil pressure kPa (kgf/cm 2 , psi)
Vacuum kPa pressure N (kgf,
(mmHg, in.Hg) lbf)
0 (0, 0) 98 (10, 22) 0 (0, 0)
196 (20, 44) Except LHD (M/T) 577 (5.9, 84)
LHD (M/T) 501 (5.1, 73)
66.7 (500, 19.7) 98 (10, 22) Except LHD (M/T) 4,523 (46.1, 656)
LHD (M/T) 4,235 (43.2, 614)
196 (20, 44) Except LHD (M/T) 9,538 (97.3, 1.383)
LHD (M/T) 9,468 (96.5, 1.373)
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul
Exploded View
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different. If
these caliper pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid pad wear, and possibly uneven
tyre wear.
To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or the brake pads.
When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean genuine Honda DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid from an unopened
Coat the piston, the piston seal groove, and the caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
Use recommended greases in the front caliper set.
After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
When you apply the silicone grease, make sure not to adhere to the terminal part of connectors and surrounding
switches. Also do not touch the switches and the terminal part of connector by hands or glove that adheres the
silicone grease.
Disassembly
1. Remove the caliper body.
2. Set the wooden block (A) or several shop towels to the caliper body (B) as shown. Blow out the piston with
compressed air gradually, and remove the piston from the caliper body.
NOTE: Do not put the hand into the caliper body because the piston will come out hardly from the caliper body.
3. Remove the piston boot (A) and the piston seal (B) from the caliper body (C).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the inner surface of the cylinder wall with the tool.
Reassembly
1. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the new piston seal (A), then install it into the groove in the caliper body.
2. Apply a thin coat of rubber grease to the new piston boot (B), then install it into the groove in the caliper body.
3. Apply the brake fluid to the outer surface of the piston, then set the piston in place on the caliper body.
4. Mount the commercially available brake caliper piston compressor tool (A) on the caliper body (B).
5. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston compressor tool. Make sure that the piston boot is properly
positioned into the groove of the piston.
NOTE:
Do not press the piston diagonally, and do not press it forcibly.
Be careful not to damage the piston boot when press the piston.
6. Install the caliper body.
Brake disc
Brake disc Thickness Front 20.9−21.1 mm (0.82−0.83 in.) 19.0 mm (0.75 in.)
Rear 8.9−9.1 mm (0.35−0.36 in.) 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Runout ——— 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.)
Parallelism ——— 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.)
Brake Hose and Line Inspection
1. Inspect the brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting.
2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leaks. Also check for bent brake lines.
3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
4. Check the master cylinder and the ABS modulator-control unit for damage and leaks.
Connection Component Connected Specified Torque Note
Point to Value
A Front brake caliper Brake hose 34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 Banjo
lbf·ft) bolt
Bleed screw 8 N·m (0.8 kgf·m, 6
lbf·ft)
B Rear brake caliper Brake hose 34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 Banjo
lbf·ft) bolt
Bleed screw 9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 7
lbf·ft)
C Brake hose Brake line 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 Flare nut
lbf·ft)
D Master cylinder Brake line 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 Flare nut
lbf·ft)
E ABS modulator-control Brake line 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 Flare nut
unit lbf·ft)
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Inner pad
Inspection Outer pad

3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and the outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the backing
plate.
Brake pad thickness:
Standard: 9.5−10.2 mm (0.37−0.41 in.)
4. If the brake pad thickness of any of the pads is less than the service limit, replace the front brake pads as a set.
Replacement
1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.
4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A).
5. Remove the flange bolt (B) while holding the caliper pin (C) with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the pin boot,
and pivot the caliper (D) up out of the way. Check the hose and the pin boots for damage and deterioration.
6. Remove the pad shims (A) and the brake pads (B).
7. Remove the pad retainers (A).

8. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks.
Verify that the caliper pins (C) move in and out smoothly. Clean and lube if needed.
9. Inspect the brake disc, and check for damage and cracks.
10. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess grease off the retainers. Keep grease off the brake disc and the brake pads.
11. Mount a commercially available brake caliper piston compressor tool (A) on the caliper body (B).
12. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston compressor tool so the caliper will fit over the brake pads. Make
sure the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down.
NOTE: Be careful when pressing in the piston; brake fluid might overflow from the master cylinder's reservoir. If
brake fluid gets on any painted surface, wash it off immediately with water.
13. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor tool.
14. Apply Molykote M77 grease to the pad side of the shims (A), the back of the brake pads (B) and the other areas
indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess grease off the pad shims and the brake pads. Keep grease off the brake
discs and the brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce stopping ability.
15. Install the brake pads and the pad shims correctly. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the upper
inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a
momentary loss of braking efficiency.
16. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the flange bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque while holding the
caliper pin (B) with a wrench being careful not to damage the pin boot.
17. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (C).
19. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work.
NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a
set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
20. Add brake fluid as needed.
21. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks.
Brake pad
Brake pad Thickness Front 9.5−10.2 mm (0.37−0.41 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Rear 6.8−7.5 mm (0.27−0.30 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Brake pedal
Brake pedal Pedal height (carpet moved aside) M/T 139 mm (5.5 in.)
A/T 138 mm (5.4 in.)
Free play 1−5 mm (0.04−0.20 in.)
Gearbox
Gearbox Angle of rack guide screw loosened from 10±3 °
locked position
Steering wheel
Steering wheel Rotational play measured at outside edge 0−10 mm (0−0.39 in.)
with engine running
Initial load measured at outside edge with 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 lbf)
engine running
A/C condenser fan does not run at all (but radiator fan runs with the A/C on)
1. A/C condenser fan circuit troubleshooting
Also check for
Blown fuse No. 47 (30 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G202
Both fans do not run with the A/C on (but the A/C compressor runs with the A/C on)
1. Radiator and A/C condenser fan common circuit troubleshooting
Also check for
Blown fuse No. 30 (30 A) and No. 47 (30 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G202
The A/C compressor clutch does not engage (but both fans run with the A/C on)
1. A/C compressor clutch circuit troubleshooting
Also check for
Blown fuse No. 43 (7.5 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box
A/C system does not come on (both fans and the A/C compressor do not work); heater is OK
1. A/C pressure switch circuit troubleshooting
Also check for
Poor ground at G502
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE:
Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if any of these items are working properly with the A/C switch ON;
condenser fan, radiator fan, A/C compressor, or if the heater does not work. Refer to the symptom troubleshooting
index.
Check the A/C high-side pressure.
1. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.
3. Measure the voltage between the A/C pressure switch 2P connector No. 2 terminal and body ground.
5. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the A/C pressure switch.
NO - Replace the A/C pressure switch.■
6. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.
7. Disconnect the A/C switch 5P connector.
9. Measure the voltage between the A/C switch 5P connector No. 2 terminal and body ground.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/C pressure switch and the A/C switch.■
11. Test the A/C switch.
Is the A/C switch OK?
NO - Replace the A/C switch.■
12. Disconnect the heater fan switch 8P connector.
13. Check for continuity between the A/C switch 5P connector No. 1 terminal and the heater fan switch 8P connector
No. 6 terminal.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/C switch and the heater fan switch.■
14. Test the heater fan switch.
Is the heater fan switch OK?
NO - Replace the heater fan switch. ■
15. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor and test it.
Is the evaporator temperature sensor OK?
NO - Replace the evaporator temperature sensor. ■
damage.
18. Check for continuity between the following terminals of ECM/PCM connector A (49P) and the evaporator
temperature sensor 2P connector.
49P: 2P:
No. 10 No. 2
No. 38 No. 1
YES - KZ, KP, and MA models: Go to Step 19 .
Except KZ, KP, and MA models: Go to Step 22 .
NO - Repair open in the wire(s) between the ECM/PCM and the evaporator temperature sensor.■
19. Test the temperature control dial.
Is the temperature control dial OK?
NO - Replace the temperature control dial. ■
20. Check for continuity between the following terminals of ECM/PCM connector A (49P) and the heater control panel
6P connector.
49P: 6P:
No. 10 No. 6
No. 20 No. 5
No. 37 No. 4
NO - Repair open in the wire(s) between the ECM/PCM and the heater control panel. Also check the heater
control panel harness.■
21. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector A (49P) No. 37 terminal and body ground.
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the ECM/PCM and the temperature control dial.■
22. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector A (49P) No. 38 terminal and body ground.
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the ECM/PCM and the evaporator temperature sensor.■
NO - Check for loose wires or poor connections at ECM/PCM connector A (49P), the evaporator temperature
sensor 2P connector, the A/C pressure switch 2P connector, the A/C switch 5P connector and at the
heater fan switch 8P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, and
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original ECM/PCM.■
24. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.
25. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
27. Measure the voltage between under-dash fuse/relay box connector A (36P) No. 21 terminal and body ground with
the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors connected.
YES - Repair open in the wire between the A/C pressure switch and the MICU.■
NO - Check for loose wires or poor connections at the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the connections are OK,
substitute a known-good MICU and recheck. If the symptom goes away, replace the original MICU .■
Refrigerant
Capacity of system 370−420 g (13.1−14.8 oz)
Refrigerant oil
Refrigerant oil Type SP-10 (P/N 38897-P13-A01, 38898-P13-003, or 38899-P13-A01)
Capacity of components Condenser 25 mL (5/6 fl·oz, 0.9 Imp·oz)
Evaporator 35 mL (1 1/6 fl·oz, 1.2 Imp·oz)
Each line and 10 mL (1/3 fl·oz, 0.4 Imp·oz)
hose
Receiver/Dryer 10 mL (1/3 fl·oz, 0.4 Imp·oz)
Compressor 80−90 mL (2 2/3−3 fl·oz, 2.8−3.2 Imp·oz)
Compressor
Compressor Field coil resistance At 20 °C (68 °F) 3.15−3.45 Ω
Pulley-to-armature plate clearance 0.35−0.65 mm (0.014−0.026 in.)
Heating and A/C Component Location Index
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY BLOWER UNIT EVAPORATOR CORE

Removal/Installation, (Located in the heater unit)
UNDER-DASH
Component FUSE/RELAY
Replacement, BOX
Replacement,
SERVICE VALVE
(LOW-PRESSURE SIDE) EVAPORATOR EXPANSION
CORE VALVE
AUXILIARY
(Located-inReplacement,
the heater unit) UNDER-HOOD
ECM/PCM
Replacement, RELAY BOX (LHD model)
HEATER UNITA/C CONDENSER

FAN RELAY
Replacement,
Test,
SERVICE VALVE
(HIGH-PRESSURE SIDE)
BLOWER RESISTOR
Test,
DUST AND A/C COMPRESSOR

POLLEN FILTER CLUTCH RELAY
Replacement, Test,
EVAPORATOR
RADIATOR FAN RELAY
Test, TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
Test,
MODE CONTROL CABLE
SIGHT GLASS RECEIVER/DRYER
(For some models) RADIATOR FAN DESICCANT
RECIRCULATION Replacement,
CONTROL CABLE A/C CONDENSER FAN
Removal/Installation, A/C CONDENSER
A/C PRESSURE SWITCHReplacement,
A/C COMPRESSOR
Replacement, HEATER CORE
Clutch Check, AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD (Except KZ, KP, and MA models)
Clutch Overhaul, RELAY BOX (RHD model) Removal/Installation,
Thermal Protector Replacement,
Relief Valve Replacement,AIR MIX CONTROL CABLE
A/C COMPRESSOR (Except KZ, KP, and MA models)
RHD model is shown, LHD modelRELAY
CLUTCH is similar. Removal/Installation,
RADIATOR FAN RELAY
Test, Test,
A/C SWITCH HEATER FAN SWITCH
Test, A/C CONDENSER Test,
Replacement, FAN RELAY
Test, TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
Test,
RHD model is shown, LHD model is HEATER
similar. CONTROL PANEL
Disassembly and Reassembly,

Heating and A/C Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TERMINAL *1: RHD model

FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX *2: LHD model
IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY : CAN line
No. 1 (100 A) T-9 No. 60 (IG) (50 A) T1 BAT S1 No. 10 (7.5 A) Q14
WHT WHT ORN BRN BRN
IG2
No. 29 (10 A) FUSE

No. 47 No. 30 No. 43 No. 57 (In the under-dash
(30 A) (30 A) (7.5 A) (30 A) fuse/relay box)
A36 A22 A3 A33
RED LT BLU LT GRN BRN* 1

GRY
PUR* 2
A/C A/C BLOWER

CONDENSER 2* 1 RADIATOR COMPRESSOR MOTOR
2 FAN RELAY 4 1* 2 FAN RELAY 4 1 CLUTCH RELAY 4 3 RELAY 1
3 4
BLOWER
1 3 1* 1 3 2 3 4 2 MOTOR
1 2
2* 2 S2
WHT WHT BLU
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD K1 INDICATOR LIGHT

RELAY BOX A/C PURESSURE (0.98 W) (0.56 W)
SWITCH
BLU RED GRN WHT PNK BLK 2 1 2
RED BLU
2 2
1
A/C
CONDENSER RADIATOR THERMAL
FAN MOTOR FAN MOTOR PROTECTOR BLU
1 1 G501
1
RED
BLK BLK A/C A21 A/C SWITCH 1 5

COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH BLOWER
ACS RESISTOR
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX MICU
B-CAN No. 29 (10 A) FUSE

(In the under-dash
A6 A15 Q3 fuse/relay box)
FAN C ACC L GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE GRN* 1 2 4 3
A4 29
CAN L RED CAN L LT GRN* 2
LT BLU
18
B-CAN
A3 30
CAN H WHT CAN H GRY
LT BLU* 1 RED YEL BLU WHT BLK
(KZ, KP, and MA models) ORN* 2
2
4 7 8 2
VCC6 A20 5 2 VCC
GRN GRN
5V 2
1 3
LIGHTS
(1.96 W × 4)
ACTEMP A37 4 3 ACTEMP OFF 4
PUR PUR
TEMPERATURE
TAC A38 1 2 CONTROL DIAL
ORN
EVAPORATER
TEMPERATURE YEL HEATER FAN 1 6
SENSOR SWITCH
SG6 A10 6 4 SG
YEL YEL YEL
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE YEL
HEATER CONTROL PANEL 1
(ETC) SENSOR 2
TW2 A34 2 1 BLK BLK
LT GRN
ECM/PCM
G202 G502 G502 G502
Blower motor runs, but one or more speeds are inoperative
1. Blower motor circuit troubleshooting
Also check for
Blower motor does not run at all
1. Blower motor circuit troubleshooting
Also check for
Blown fuse No. 10 (7.5 A) and No. 57 (30 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G501
Heating and A/C Symptom Troubleshooting
Blower motor runs, but one or more speeds are Blower motor circuit troubleshooting Cleanliness and tightness of all connectors
inoperative
Blower motor does not run at all Blower motor circuit troubleshooting Blown fuse No. 10 (7.5 A) and No. 57 (30 A) in
the under-dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G501
A/C condenser fan does not run at all (but A/C condenser fan circuit troubleshooting Blown fuse No. 47 (30 A) in the under-dash
radiator fan runs with the A/C on) fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G202
Both fans do not run with the A/C on (but the Radiator and A/C condenser fan common circuit Blown fuse No. 30 (30 A) and No. 47 (30 A) in
A/C compressor runs with the A/C on) troubleshooting the under-dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G202
The A/C compressor clutch does not engage A/C compressor clutch circuit troubleshooting Blown fuse No. 43 (7.5 A) in the under-dash
(but both fans run with the A/C on) fuse/relay box
A/C system does not come on (both fans and A/C pressure switch circuit troubleshooting Poor ground at G502
the A/C compressor do not work); heater is OK Cleanliness and tightness of all connectors
Heater Control Panel Removal/Installation
2. Remove the control cables from the blower/heater unit.
3. Remove the screw and pull the heater control panel (A).
4. Disconnect the connectors and remove the heater control panel.
5. Install the control panel in the reverse order of removal. After installation, operate the control panel controls to see
whether it works properly.
Heater Control Panel Disassembly/Reassembly
2. Using a snap ring pliers, widen the cable stops (A) in the cable holder (B), then pull out the
recirculation control cable (C), mode control cable (D), and air mix control cable (E).
3. Hook the tip of the new control cables to the dial or slider, then push the cable housing into the
cable holder until it locks into place.
4. After assembly, check that the lever slides or the dial turns smoothly through the full stroke
from right to left.
Blower Unit Removal/Installation
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover and the glove box.
2. Remove the recirculation control cable from the blower unit.
3. Cut the plastic cross brace (A) in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area (B). Retain plastic cross
brace to be reinstalled later.
4. Remove the bolts, and the glove box frame (A).
5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the blower motor. Remove the clips (B).
6. Remove the self-tapping screws and the passenger's heater duct (A).
7. Remove the self-tapping screws and the mounting nuts, and pull the blower unit (A) out.
8. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal. Make sure that there is no air leakage.
Blower Unit Component Replacement
NOTE: The these items when overhauling the blower unit.
The blower motor (A) and the dust and pollen filter (B) can be placed without removing the blower unit.
Before reassembly, make sure that the recirculation control linkage and door move smoothly.
Emblem/Sticker Replacement
NOTE: When removing the emblems, take care not to scratch the body.
1. To remove the front ‘‘H'' emblem, remove the upper front grille.
2. To remove the rear ‘‘H'' emblem, remove the rear license trim.
3. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil,
grease, and water from getting on the surface.
4. Apply the emblems where shown.
Lower Front Grille Replacement
NOTE: With front air spoiler
2. Detach the clips and the hooks (A) by using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with the protective tape, then remove the
front bumper lower grille (B) from the front bumper (C).
NOTE: To remove the clips, pry the inner clip up at the edge near the line (D) on its head.
3. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Push the clips and the hooks into place securely. Without front air spoiler
Gauges Circuit Diagram
[ ]: LHD model
*1: With security
*2: With paddle shifter +/−
*3: With cruise control
BATTERY TERMINAL *4: With multi information display
FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE RELAY BOX : CAN line
BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH
[ ]: LHD model *4: Without multi information display
No. 1 (100 A) T-9 No. 1 (10 A) *1: A/T *5: With SRS
WHT No. 60 (IGN) (50 A) T1 BAT *2: With cruise control *6: With side airbag
WHT *3: With multi information display *7: With side turn signal light (Mirror type)
IG1
No. 22 (7.5 A) W1
YEL
(RHD model) (LHD model)
Q8 N1 LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
TURN SIGNAL MICU TURN SIGNAL
LT BLU PNK (MIRROR TYPE) (MIRROR TYPE)
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32 16 GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
BLU BLU WHT WHT A
BEEPER ILLUMINATION ILLUMINATION ILLUMINATION ILLUMINATION BLU ILLUMINATION

WHT& ILLUMINATION
CONTROL & CONTROL & CONTROL & CONTROL & CONTROL CONTROL &
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE *1 DIMMING CIRCUIT DIMMING CIRCUIT DIMMING CIRCUIT DIMMING CIRCUIT 9 6
DIMMING CIRCUIT GAUGE CONTROL
DIMMING CIRCUITMODULE
10 V FOR POINTER (RED) FOR SCALE (AMBER) FOR DIAL (AMBER) FOR LCD (WHITE) FOR LCD (WHITE) FOR LCD (AMBER)
A STABILIZING DIMMING
SECURITY HIGH BEAM IMMOBILIZER CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
SPEEDOMETERTACHOMETERFUEL METER INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR *3 A
COMPULSORY (LED) (LED) (LED)
BRAKE
TURNING-ON COMPULSORY (LED) (LED) (LED)
SYSTEM (LED) (LED) (LED)
CIRCUIT TURNING-OFF BLINKING DIMMING INDICATOR INDICATOR
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DRIVE SIDE (LED)
CIRCUIT HIGH AIRBAG
MALFUNCTION EPS SRS ABS CIRCUIT MESSAGE LOW FUEL LOW OIL SEAT BELT CHARGING DOOR
INDICATOR TEMPERATURE CUTOFF
INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR PRESSURE REMINDER SYSTEM INDICATOR
*1 LAMP (MIL) (LED) (LED) (LED) INDICATOR (LED) (LED) INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR (LED)
(LED) (LED) (LED) (LED) (LED) (LED)
CPU/POWER
A/TSUPPLY
GEAR CIRCUIT/ *5 *6 CPU/POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/
CONTROLLER
POSITION
AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
FAIL-SAFE INDICATOR INDICATOR DRIVE CIRCUIT INDICATOR DRIVE CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT DRIVE *2 LEFT
CIRCUIT RIGHT
TURN TURN
SEQUENTIAL SIGNAL SIGNAL
F-CAN TRANSCEIVER B-CAN SUPPLY
TRANSCEIVER SPORTSHIFT INDICATOR INDICATOR TURN SIGNAL/
CPU/POWER CIRCUIT/ SELECT/ CPU/POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/ (LED) (LED) HAZARD RELAY
ILLUMI ILLUMI MODE SHIFT
CAN L CAN H CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
(+) (−)
A SWITCH
RESET INDICATOR
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER (Sounder)
*3 *4 LOW CRUISE CRUISE LIGHTS-ON

2.6 kΩ TEMPERATURE CONTROL MAIN INDICATOR
INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR (LED)
29 30 MULTI 18 ODO/TRIP (LED) (LED) 27 (LED) 28 *2 22 19 20 14 15 No. 24 (10 A) FUSE No. 29 (10 A) FUSE 13 17
INFORMATION LCD (UNDER-DASH (UNDER-DASH
DISPLAY DISPLAY FUSE/RELAY BOX)
INDICATOR DRIVE CIRCUIT FUSE/RELAY BOX)
GRN
RED WHT [LT GRN] LT GRN BLK PNK BLU RED GRN PUR
24 23
ORN GRY
1 10
CABLE
1 REEL
CRUISE CRUISE CRUISE GRY 11 ORN 3
· ECM/PCM · MICU CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
· EPS CONTROL UNIT FUEL 5*3 6*3
· IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS FUEL MAIN RESET SET
· SRS UNIT CONTROL UNIT GAUGE SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH BLK BLK
TANK
· ABS MODULATOR- UNIT SENDING
CONTROL UNIT UNIT
· DATA LINK CONNECTOR *3
(DLC) SELECT/RESET/
3 INFORMATION SELECT/
INFORMATION
SWITCH RESET SWITCH
SWITCH LIGHT LIGHT
(LED) (LED)
2 BRAKE FLUID
1
LEVEL SWITCH PARKING
2*3 3*3 1*3
(Closed:10 BRAKE
9 SWITCH 4
CABLE Float down) (Closed:
REEL (Open: Lever pulled)
1 Float up)3 4 9
PUR GRN BLK
BLK
G501 G501 G501

*4
G301
[G302]
Headliner Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Front pillar trim, both sides:
Center pillar upper/lower trim, both sides:
Quarter pillar trim, both sides:
Individual map light
Ceiling light
Sunvisors, both sides
Grab handles, four places
Rear center seat belt (for some model)
Ultrasonic sensor (for some model)
3. Remove the roof wire harness (A) by detaching the harness clips (B, C, D) and disconnect the roof wire harness
connector (E) from the driver's side front pillar.
4. Remove the antenna lead (A) by detaching the harness clips (B) and disconnect the antenna lead connector (C)
from the passenger's side front pillar.
5. Disconnect the tailgate sub lead connectors (A, B) by detaching the harness clips (C, D).
6. Lower the headliner (A). With child seat tether
-1. Remove the front door inner seals (B), rear door inner seals (C), and tailgate weatherstrip (D) from each roof anchor model
portion.
-2. Release the clips (E, F) from the headliner.
-3. Lower the headliner.
With ultra sonic sensor

model
Without child seat

tether anchor and ultra
sonic sensor model
7. With the help of an assistant, pull the headliner (A) out through the tailgate opening. Do not bend the headliner.
Bending the headliner will crease and damage it.
8. For some model: Remove the screws, and release the hooks (A), then remove the retractor cover bracket (B) and
retractor cover (C) from the headliner (D).
9. Remove the cushion tapes, then remove the roof wire harness (A) and antenna lead (B) from the headliner (C). RHD model
LHD model
10. Without side curtain airbags: If necessary, detach the hooks, then remove the front roof side pad (A).
11. Without side curtain airbags: If necessary, remove the hooks and screws, and remove the center roof side pad (A)
with a glove rail bracket (B), then release the hooks (C) and remove the bracket from the pad.
12. With side curtain airbags: If necessary, remove the grab handle bracket mounting bolts (A) and the side curtain
airbag mounting screw (B), then remove the grab handle bracket (C) from each side by releasing the hooks (D).
13. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Headliner
If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the headliner and removed trim pieces with new ones.
To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect removed
pieces and replace them if they have any of these types of damage:
-Any crease or tears in the headliner (A)
-Any cracks or breakages in the grab handle (B)
-Any damages around the grab handle holes (C) or sunvisor holes in the headliner
-Any cracks in the sunvisor stay base (D)
-Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shaft (E) Grab handle
-Any cracks in the sunvisor base (F)
-Any cracks or breakages in the vanity mirror base (G)
-Any clip bases (H) which have come off the headliner
When installing the grab handle, push on the handle against the bracket (I) until the clips (J) snap into place
securely.
Replace the removed cushion tape with new ones. Sunvisor
Check that both sides of the headliner are securely attached to the trim.
Make sure the headliner overlaps the trim pieces correctly.
When reinstalling the headliner through the tailgate opening, be careful not to fold or bend it. Also, be careful
not to scratch the body.
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the dashboard/steering hanger beam.
Take care not to scratch the dashboard, body and other related parts.
Front seats, both sides
Kick panels, both sides
Center console
Glove box
Fuse lid panel:
-RHD model
-LHD model
Passenger's dashboard undercover
Front pillar trim, both sides:
Steering column
AC control cables
Driver's side
3. From under the dash, disconnect the right engine compartment wire harness connector (A), the left engine
compartment wire harness connector (B), the driver's door wire harness connectors (C), the interior wire harness
connectors (D), floor wire harness connector (E), and remove the bolt (F), then release the battery cable (G) from
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (H).
Center
4. Disconnect the sub harness connectors (A).
5. Release the harness clips (A), then disconnect the blower motor connector (B).
6. Remove the heater joint duct (A).
7. From under dash, disconnect SRS control unit connector A and remove the bolt (B). Remove the ground bolt (C)
using a TORX T30 bit.
8. Detach the wire harness clips (A), then disconnect the parking brake switch connector (B), fuel pump connector
(C), and A/T position switch connector (D) (A/T model).
Passenger's side
9. From under the dash, disconnect the passenger's floor wire harness connectors (A), passenger's door wire harness
connector (B), the left engine compartment wire harness connectors (RHD model)/the right engine compartment
wire harness connectors (LHD model) (C), and SRS sensor sub harness connector (D).
10. Detach all of the harness and the connector clips.
11. Remove the special bolts (A, B) from outside the passenger's door. RHD model is shown; LHD model is
symmetrical.
-1. Remove the caps (C).
-2. Loosen the special bolts until its threads have come off the side bracket (D) of the steering hanger beam. The
bolt will be screwed into the inside threads of the collar bolt (E) by loosening the bolt. Because of the thread
lock on the threads of the bolt, the bolt and the collar bolt will be fixed.
-3. Loosen the bolt again to screw the collar bolt into the fixed space adjuster (F) until it is stopped by the
stopper (G). This will provide a gap (H) between the collar bolt and the body.
12. If the collar bolts (A) are not screwed fully into the fixed space adjuster when removing the special bolts, slightly
screw the collar bolt into the space adjuster with a 21 mm open-end wrench (B). In this case, the special bolt
should be replaced with a new one because its thread locks were worn out.
13. From outside the driver's door, remove the caps (A), then remove the bolts (B, C, D, E, F).
14. Lift up on the dashboard (A) to release it from the guide pins (B, C). Carefully remove the dashboard through the
front door opening. Take care not to scratch the body with the collar nuts on the passenger's side.
NOTE: Do not rest the dashboard on its lower center cover opening, or it may be damaged. Lay it on its front or
back.
15. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Special bolt tightening
Make sure the dashboard fits onto the guide pins correctly. on passenger's side
Before tightening the bolts, make sure the wire harnesses are not pinched.
Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly.
Before reinstalling the dashboard, be sure the collar bolt (A) on passenger's side can be screwed/unscrewed
lightly by hand, and then screw all of them into the fixed space adjuster (B) until they contact the stoppers
(C) by hand. Do not tighten them fully with any tools.
Before reinstalling the dashboard, try to screw the special bolt (D) into the loosened collar bolt. If the collar
bolt is not unscrewed by screwing the special bolt, replace this special bolt with a new one.
After setting the dashboard on the body, reinstall all of the mounting bolts to the dashboard, tighten the
driver's side bracket to the specified torque, then torque the special bolt D on the passenger's side. First
screw the special bolt into the collar bolt A, they will be fixed because of the thread lock on the bolt.
Continue tightening the bolt with the collar bolt, they are loosened from the fixed space adjuster B until the
collar bolt contacts the inside face of the body. Then tighten the bolts again to the specified torque.
Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the bolts securing the center joint bracket and the
dashboard before reinstallation.
After tightening the dashboard mounting bolts, tighten the center joint bracket mounting bolts, and then
tighten the center frame mounting bolts.
Check for any DTCs that may have been set during repairs, and clear them.
Exterior Lights Component Location Index
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LIGHTS-ON INDICATOR
HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT

Replacement,
LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS

Replacement,
BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH (M/T)

Test, MICU
(Built into the under-dash
fuse/relay box) (A/T)
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH Test,
Test/Replacement, Input Test,
HEADLIGHT Replacement, Replacement,
Replacement, BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
TAILLIGHT and BRAKE LIGHT Test,
Replacement, Adjustment,
Bulb Replacement, Bulb Replacement,
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT Bulb Replacement,
Replacement,
RHD model FRONT POSITION LIGHT
is shown, LHD model is similar.
Bulb Replacement,
Bulb Replacement,
BACK-UP LIGHT
Replacement,
Bulb Replacement,
Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the steering column covers. RHD model
2. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B).
3. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch.
LHD model
4. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
system.
If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch
position according to the tables.
-If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
Exterior Lights (MICU) Input Test
NOTE:
Before performing the input tests, check the No. 1, No. 5, No. 22, No. 24, No. 32, No. 34, No.
48, and No. 51 fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
The illustration shows the RHD model and the black portion shows the lock lever. The lock lever
for LHD model is shown as the dashed lines.
3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors A, B, C, K, M, N, Q, and W.
NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals.
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the
system.
If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
N2 BLK Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground
wire
K10 BLK Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground
wire
M16 BLK Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground
wire
Q9 BLK Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground
wire
W1 YEL Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to Blown No. 60
(II) ground: There should be (IGN) (50 A) fuse
battery voltage. in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
Faulty ignition
switch
An open in the
wire
A24 PNK Ignition switch ON Connect W1 terminal and Blown bulb
(II) A24 terminal with a Poor ground
jumper wire: The right (G202) [G401]
headlight (low beam) An open in the
should come on. wire
A30 GRNIgnition switch ON Connect W1 terminal and Blown bulb
(II) A30 terminal with a Poor ground
jumper wire: The right (G202) [G401]
headlight (high beam) An open in the
B29 BRN Ignition switch ON Connect W1 terminal and Blown bulb
(II) B29 terminal with a Poor ground
jumper wire: The left (G401) [G202]
headlight (low beam) An open in the
B13 GRYIgnition switch ON Connect W1 terminal and Blown bulb
jumper wire: The left (G401) [G202]
headlight (high beam) An open in the
A8 GRYIgnition switch ON Connect W1 terminal and Blown bulb
(II) A8 terminal with a jumper Poor ground
wire: The right front (G202) [G401]
position light should An open in the
come on. wire
B30 GRYIgnition switch ON Connect W1 terminal and Blown bulb
jumper wire: The left front (G401) [G202]
position light should An open in the
come on. wire
C42 GRYIgnition switch ON Connect W1 terminal and Blown bulb
(II) C42 terminal with a Poor ground
jumper wire: The taillights (G602, G604)
and license plate lights An open in the
C21 GRNIgnition switch ON Connect W1 terminal and Blown bulb
(II) C21 terminal with a Poor ground
jumper wire: The back-up (G602, G604)
lights should come on. An open in the
wire
[ ]: LHD model

M8·M33BLU·BLKCombination light Check for continuity Faulty
switch OFF between M8 and M33 combination light
terminals: There should switch
be continuity. An open in the
wire
Combination light Check for continuity Faulty
switch in any between M8 and M33 combination light
other position terminals: There should switch
than OFF be no continuity. A short in the
wire
M7·M33GRY·BLKCombination light Check for continuity Faulty
switch (SMALL between M7 and M33 combination light
position) ON terminals: There should switch
wire
be no continuity. A short in the
wire
M5·M33RED·BLKCombination light Check for continuity Faulty
switch (headlight) between M5 and M33 combination light
ON terminals: There should switch
wire
wire
M4·M33WHT·BLK
switch lever between M4 and M33 combination light
pulled (Passing) terminals: There should switch
wire
switch lever between M4 and M33 combination light
released (OFF) terminals: There should switch
wire
M3·M33 LT Combination light Check for continuity Faulty
BLU·BLKswitch (Dimmer) between M3 and M33 combination light
in high beam terminals: There should switch
position be continuity. An open in the
wire
switch (Dimmer) between M3 and M33 combination light
in low beam terminals: There should switch
position be no continuity. A short in the
wire
B10(M/T)
LT GRN Ignition switch Connect W1 terminal Blown bulb
ON (II) and shift and B10 terminal with a Faulty back-up
lever in R jumper wire: The back- light switch
position up lights should come Poor ground
on. (G602, G604)
An open in the
wire
B26(A/T)GRN Shift lever in R Check for continuity to Faulty
position ground: There should be transmission
continuity. range switch
Poor ground
(G101)
An open in the
wire
Q3 GRN Under all Check for continuity An open in the wire
[LT condition between the Q3
GRN] terminal and the gauge
control module No. 18
terminal: There should
be continuity.
Check for continuity to A short to ground in the
ground: There should be wire
no continuity.
[ ]: LHD model
Brake Lights Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TERMINAL *1: Without trailer lighting connector

FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX *2: With trailer lighting connector
BATTERY [ ]: LHD model
No. 3 (20 A)*1 (30 A)*2 B23
WHT
No. 24
(15 A)
C14 B35 B28
LT GRN LT GRN WHT
1
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
(Closed: Pedal pressed)
2
LT GRN
ECM/PCM
3 3 3
LEFT HIGH MOUNT RIGHT
BRAKE LIGHT BRAKE LIGHT BRAKE LIGHT
(21 W) (21 W) (21 W)
2 2 2
BLK BLK BLK
G604 G602 G602

[G604]
High Mount Brake Light Replacement
2. Push in the clips, and remove the cover (A) from the high mount brake light (B).
High Mount Brake Light: 21 W
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (C) from the bulb socket (D).

4. Remove the two mounting bolts and the high mount brake light.
Headlights, Front Position Lights, Taillights, and License Plate Lights Circuit Diagram
*1: HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (LED)

*2: LIGHT-ON INDICATOR (LED)
[ ]: LHD model
: CAN line
BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A) T-9 No. 60 (IGN) (50 A)
WHT
IGNITION SWITCH
IG1 T1
YEL WHT
BAT GAUGE CONTROL MODULE COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
CPU/POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/ DIMMER

CONTROLLER AREA
NETWORK CONTROLLER HI PASSING OFF
( )
B-CAN ( )
W1 TRANSCEIVER *1 *2 LO
3 1 10 8 9 7
18 [4] [6] [9] [11] [10] [12]
GRN LT BLU WHT BLU GRY RED BLK

LIGHTING LIGHTING [LT GRN]
No. 22 No. 1 No. 29
(7.5 A) (10 A) RELAY 1 RELAY 2 (10 A)
MICU Q3 M3 M4 M8 M7 M5 M33 MICU

IG1 +B BACK UP B-CAN
SG PG
M16 Q9 N2 K10
No. 34 No. 48 No. 32 No. 51

(10 A) (10 A) (10 A) (10 A)
B29 B13 A24 A30 B30 A8 C42
BRN GRY PNK GRN GRY GRY GRY
1 3 1 3
GRY GRY GRY GRY
LOW HIGH LEFT LOW HIGH RIGHT

(55 W) (60 W) HEADLIGHT (55 W) (60 W) HEADLIGHT
2 2
1 1 4 4 1 1
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK

2 2 2 2 2 2
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
FRONT FRONT TAILLIGHT TAILLIGHT LICENSE LICENSE
POSITION POSITION (5 W) (5 W) PLATE PLATE
LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT
(5 W) (5 W) (5 W) (5 W)
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
G501 G502 G501 G502 G401 G202 G401 G202 G604 G602 G602 G602
[G202] [G401] [G202] [G401] [G604] [G604]
Taillight Replacement
1. Open the tailgate and remove the maintenance lid.
2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the taillights (B).
3. Remove the mounting nuts from the taillight.
4. Install the taillight in the reverse order of removal.
Interior Lights Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A) T-9 No. 1 (10 A) C37
WHT PNK
G5
PNK
PNK PNK PNK

1 2 1
(8 W)
(8 W) (8 W)
ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF

(5 W)
1 CEILING 2 CARGO AREA

LIGHT LIGHT
INDIVIDUAL
MAP LIGHT
BLU PUR
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX G7 C18
MICU
DRIVE CIRCUIT DRIVE CIRCUIT
C32 C33 C40 C26 C22

LT GRN
BLU GRN PNK ORN

1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR FRONT DRIVER'S LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR 2 TAILGATE
DOOR SWITCH DOOR SWITCH PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH DOOR SWITCH DOOR SWITCH LATCH SWITCH
(Closed: (Closed: DOOR SWITCH (Closed: (Closed: (Closed: (Closed:
Door open) Door open) (Closed: Door open) Door open) Door open) Tailgate open)
Door open)
BLK
G602
(Without security) (With security)
Mirrors Component Location Index
MOUNT
POWER MIRROR
Replacement,
SKULL CAP
MIRROR HOLDER
Replacement,
REARVIEW MIRROR
Replacement,
Rearview Mirror Replacement
1. Release the hooks (A), then pull the mirror base cover (B) down.
2. Pull the hook (A) down to release it from the mount (B), and slide the mirror base (C) rearward, then remove the
rearview mirror (D).
3. Install the mirror base cover on the mirror base securely.
4. Fit the mirror base (A) over the mount (B), and secure the rearview mirror with the spring (C) and hook (D).
MICS Self-diagnostic Function
NOTE: Use only if the HDS is unavailable.
Test Mode 1
MPCS short connector
07WAZ-0010100
2. RHD model: Remove the fuse lid panel, and remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. LHD
model: Remove the fuse lid panel.
3. Check the No. 1 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is blown, find and correct the cause, then replace the
fuse.
4. Turn the ceiling light switch in ‘‘DOOR'' (middle) position. Close all doors. Turn the ignition
switch to ON (II).
NOTE: If the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, the beeper will beep.
5. Connect the MPCS short connector (A) to the MICU service check connector (B), and turn the
switch (C) on.
6. After 5 seconds, the ceiling light should come on for 2 seconds, go out, then blink once for 0.2
second. This means that you are in Test Mode 1 of the self-diagnostic function.
7. About 1 second after step 5, the ceiling light will blink and indicate the DTC, and repeat it every
3 seconds. If there is more than one DTC, the system will indicate them in ascending order,
beginning from the DTC with the lowest numerical value. Troubleshoot the DTCs as indicated
below:
DTC Cause and Troubleshooting
1 The MICU cannot receive signals sent from the MICU itself (for checking the
sending signals), or the MICU cannot receive signals from the gauge control
module. If DTC 1 only indicates, substitute a known-good gauge control
module and an MICU one at a time, in that order, and recheck for the DTC
after each substitution.
5 The MICU cannot receive signals (VSP/NE message) from the gauge
control module. If DTC 5 only indicates, substitute a known-good gauge
control module, and recheck for the DTC.
How to cancel the Test Mode 1

NOTE: To cancel Test Mode 1, turn off the MICU short connector switch for more than 10 seconds or turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0).
Test Mode 2
1. While in Test Mode 1, turn off the MPCS short connector switch (A) for about 5 to 10 seconds,
then turn it on again.
2. The ceiling light should come on for 2 seconds, go out, then blinks twice more at 0.2 second
intervals. This means the system has gone from Test Mode 1 to Test Mode 2.
3. While still in Test Mode 2, operate the switches in the table shown. If the circuit is OK, the
ceiling light blinks once. If the circuit is faulty, the ceiling light does not blink.
If the ceiling light do not blink even a switch is operated, check two or three other circuits
listed in the table. If the ceiling light blinks for each circuit, the additional circuits are OK,
repair the short or open circuit that failed the test in Step 3 .
If the ceiling light does not blink again, this multiple failed circuits mean that the control
unit has failed without triggering a DTC. Test a few more circuits. If they also fail, test the
MICU input test. If all the input tests prove OK, substitute a known-good MICU or gauge
control module one at a time, then recheck. If the system works properly, the part that
was substituted is faulty; replace it.
Driver's door lock switch (UNLOCK) Windshield wiper MIST switch
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK) Windshield washer switch
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) Rear window wiper switch
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK) Rear window washer switch
Driver's door key cylinder switch Turn signal switch (LEFT)
(UNLOCK) * Turn signal switch (RIGHT)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK) Hazard warning switch
* Headlight switch (ON)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch Headlight switch (OFF)
(UNLOCK) * Lighting switch
Left rear door lock knob switch Dimmer switch
Passing switch
(UNLOCK) *
Right rear door lock knob switch Hood switch *
Brake pedal position switch
(UNLOCK) * Transmission range switch (P)
Driver's door switch Transmission range switch (R)
Front passengers' door switch Ignition key switch
Left rear door switch
Right rear door switch
Tailgate latch switch
Audio switch
Windshield wiper HI/LO switch
Windshield wiper INT/LO switch
*: With security
How to cancel the Test Mode 2

NOTE: To cancel Test Mode 2, disconnect the MPCS short connector from the multiplex control inspection connector for
more than 10 seconds or turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
MICS System Description
The MICU that is combined with the under-dash fuse/relay box is one of the B-CAN network components. The MICU controls many systems related to
the body controller area and security system, and also works as a gateway to diagnose the other B-CAN connected ECUs with the HDS.
Refer to each system circuit diagram for details.
MICU Control Function Index
Hardware Fail-safe Control
Software Fail-safe Control
B-CAN
Gateway Function
Network ‘‘Loss of Communication'' Error Checking Function
Self-diagnostic Function
Wake-up and Sleep Function
Fail-safe Function
Power Supply Voltage Monitoring Function
Headlights
Turn Signal
Entry Light
Cargo Area Light
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rear Window Wiper Operation
Washer Operation
Key Interlock
Key-in Reminder
Power Window Timer (Key-off operation)
Collision Detection Signal (CDS)
Power Door Locks
Door Lock Response Operation
Keyless Entry System
Power Door Locks (LOCK operation)
Power Door Locks (UNLOCK operation)
Security Alarm System
Answer Back Response Operation
Answer Back Response Operation
Ultrasonic System
A/C Pressure Switch
MICS Circuit Diagram
[ ]: LHD model
: CAN line
: Other communication line
BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A) T-9 No. 1 (10 A)
WHT
No. 2 (60 A) T1 No. 60 (IGN) (50 A)

WHT
IGNITION SWITCH
S3 No. 14 (7.5 A)
ACC RED
BAT No. 11 (7.5 A)
W1
IG1 YEL
PG SG
MICU
No. 22 No. 20 No. 6

(7.5 A) (15 A) (10 A)
+B J3 J1
BACK
MICU IG1 IG1 UP ACC IG1 MICU IG1 IG1
A32 B11 M14 N2 K10 Q9 M16
Q8 K8 Q3 N1 N18 Q2 P2
MULTI PLEX
CONTROL
GRN INSPECTION
[LT BLU] PNK BLU CONNECTOR BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
G501 G501 G502 G502 G501

WHT
PNK PNK
BLU BLU BLU BLU
GRN GRN
LT BLU PNK [LT BLU] RED PNK BLU [LT BLU] PNK BLU PNK PUR BLU PUR BLU PUR BLU WHT PUR BLU
32 16 18 2 1 5 4 16 7 A24 A14 A3 A27 A18 16 10 A2 C8 C16

IG1 +B B-CAN IG1 +B K-LINE B-CAN +B K-LINE +B ACC K-LINE IG1 K-LINE IG1 K-LINE +B IG1 K-LINE
BACK UP BACK UP BACK UP BACK UPRADIO BACK UP
IMMOBILIZER- DATA LINK ABS MODULATOR-
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE AUDIO UNIT SRS UNIT CONTROL UNIT EPS CONTROL UNIT
KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (DLC)
MAIN
S-GND P-GND LG LG GND GND GND GND GND MR-GND GND
13 17 7 5 4 A12 A28 A29 24 25 A1
BRN BRN
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK

BRN
BRN/YEL
G501 G501 G101 G502 G503 G504 G203 G402

[G402] [G301]
How to Troubleshoot the Body Electrical
Tips and Precautions
Before Troubleshooting
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box.

2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections.
Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will
damage the alternator diodes.
Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely
damage the wiring.
Handling Connectors
Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals.
Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors).
All connectors have push-down release type locks (A).
Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another
component. This clip has a pull type lock.
Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector
from its mount bracket (A).
Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
Always reinstall plastic covers.
Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
Check for loose retainers (A) and rubber seals (B).
The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is
contaminated, replace it.
Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked.
Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down.
Handling Wires and Harnesses
Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A).
After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts.
Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust components and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes,
and from exposed screws and bolts.
Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B).
Testing and Repairs
Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with
electrical tape.
Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. If there is an open or damage is SRS wiring or terminals,
replace the harness.
After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them.
When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described in this manual.
If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector).
Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A.

Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals.
Five-step Troubleshooting
1. Verify The Complaint:
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to verify the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not
begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area.
2. Analyze The Schematic:
Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current
paths from the power feed through the circuit components to ground. If several circuits fail at the same time, the
fuse or a ground is a likely cause.
Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit operation, identify one or more possible causes of
the problem.
3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit:
Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in Step 2 . Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the
key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are
easily accessible.
4. Fix The Problem:
Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures.
5. Make Sure The Circuit Works:
Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the
problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and
the original problem does not recur.
Wire Color Codes

The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics:
WHT. White
YEL. Yellow
BLK. Black
BLU. Blue
GRN. Green
RED. Red
ORN. Orange
PNK. Pink
BRN. Brown
GRY. Gray
PUR. Purple
LT BLU. Light Blue
LT GRN. Light Green
The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.
Troubleshoot the B-CAN Circuit Related Problems
How to check for DTCs with the HDS (preferred method)
The HDS can check the F-CAN and B-CAN communication status, read and clear the DTCs, display
the data list, and perform function test.
Check for DTCs
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with vehicle.
NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the vehicle, troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
4. Select the BODY ELECTRICAL, then select the desired TEST MODE menu, and check the
DTCs. If the DTCs do not pertain to the select menu, select the All DTC Check icon to view all
Body DTCs.
NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the HDS user's manual.
5. If any DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NOTE: If the DTC B1000, B1150, B1178, and/or B1900 are stored, troubleshoot these DTCs first
(beginning with the lowest number).
How to check for DTCs without the HDS (Use only if the HDS is unavailable)
MPCS short connector
07WAZ-0010100
If the HDS is unavailable, using the following method, you can check the B-CAN communication
status, DTCs, and some F-CAN communication status related with the gauge control module.
Check for DTCs

2. Connect the MPCS short connector (A) to the MICU service check connector (B), and turn the
switch (C) ON.
3. After 5 to 10 seconds, the DTCs which have been detected and stored individually by various B-
CAN unit, will be indicated one by one on the odo/trip display if the communication line between
the MICU and the gauge control module is OK. To scroll through the DTCs, press the
select/reset button.
The unit that has stored the code can be identified by the number shown on the odo/trip display.
Control Unit Control Unit I.D. Number
MICU 10
Gauge control module 50
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 96
NOTE: Also you can check the B-CAN communication status by following methods:
The MICU self-diagnostic function Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2 can check some
communication status and some switch circuits.
The gauge control module self-diagnostic function can check the communication status.
How to Clear the DTCs with the HDS

1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS from the data link connector (DLC).
How to Clear the DTCs without the HDS

1. While in DTCs indication status, press and hold the SELECT/RESET switch for more than 10 seconds.
2. Turn the MPCS short connector switch off, and disconnect the connector from the MICU service check connector.
HDS Inputs and Commands
Certain inputs happen so quickly that the HDS cannot update fast enough. Hold the switch that is being tested while
monitoring the Data List. This should give the HDS time to update the signal on the Data List.
Because the HDS software is updated to support the release for newer vehicles it is not uncommon to see system
function tests that are not supported.
Make sure that the most current software is loaded.
Input
System Menu Data List Data List Indication
Lighting Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Hazard Switch OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (OFF) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (PARKING) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (High Beam) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (PASSING) OFF/ON
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT) OFF/ON
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT) OFF/ON
Interior Light Command OFF/ON
Left Turn Signal Command OFF/ON
Right Turn Signal Command OFF/ON
Cargo Light Command OFF/ON
Headlight Command OFF/ON
Headlight High Beam Command OFF/ON
Parking Light Command OFF/ON
Input
Gauges Cruise Control Main Switch (ACC switch) OFF/ON
Cruise Control Set Switch OFF/ON
Cruise Control Resume Switch OFF/ON
Engine Oil Pressure Switch OFF/ON
Gauge Select/Reset Switch OFF/ON
Parking Brake Switch OFF/ON
Brake Fluid Level Switch OFF/ON
Select/Reset Switch OFF/ON
INFO Next Switch OFF/ON
Fuel Sending Unit Input 2 v
ABS Indicator OFF/ON
EBD Indicator (Electronic Brake Distribution) OFF/ON
Cruise Control Main Switch Indicator OFF/ON
MIL Indicator OFF/ON
Low Oil Pressure Indicator OFF/ON
Charging System Indicator OFF/ON
Cruise Main Switch ON Indicator OFF/ON
High Beam Indicator OFF/ON
Parking Light ON Indicator OFF/ON
Low Fuel Warning Indicator OFF/ON
Security Indicator OFF/ON
Seat Belt Indicator OFF/ON
Door Open Indicator OFF/ON
A/T Indicator OFF/ON
SRS Indicator OFF/ON
Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator OFF/ON
Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch OFF/ON
A/T Gear Position Switch (R) OFF/ON
A/T Gear Position Switch (P) OFF/ON
Input
Door Locks Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Passenger's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Rear Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Passenger's Rear Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Door LOCK Command OFF/ON
Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Wipers Brake Pedal Position Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (MIST) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (INT) OFF/ON
Windshield Washer Switch OFF/ON
Rear Wiper Switch ON/OFF
Windshield Wiper Motor PARK Switch OFF/ON
Rear Wiper Command ON/OFF
Rear Washer Command ON/OFF
Windshield Wiper Motor HI Command OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor LO Command OFF/ON
Windshield Washer Motor Command OFF/ON
Rear Wiper Auto Stop Switch OFF/ON
Input
Keyless Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Trunk Lid/Tailgate Switch OFF/ON

Input
Security Ignition Key Cylinder Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Trunk Lid/Tailgate Switch OFF/ON
Trunk Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Hazard Switch OFF/ON
Hood Switch OFF/ON
Security Hazard Signal Command OFF/ON
Headlight Command OFF/ON
Headlight High Beam Command OFF/ON
Parking Light Command OFF/ON
Horn Command ON/OFF
A/C A/C Pressure Switch/Thermal Protector OFF/ON
Output
System Menu HDS Description Note
Door locks LOCK all doors Outputs LOCK signal 1 time (0.6 sec) to all
door
UNLOCK all doors Outputs UNLOCK signal 1 time (0.6 sec) to
all door
Lighting Interior Light Command Illuminates for 30 seconds
Hazard flasher Blinks turn signal (left and right) for 15
seconds
LEFT Turn Signal Command Blinks for 5 seconds
RIGHT Turn Signal Command Blinks for 5 seconds
Headlight Command Operates headlight (low) for 15 seconds
Headlight HIGH Beam Command Operates headlight (high) for 15 seconds
Parking Light Command Operates small lights for 15 seconds
Cargo Area Light Illuminates for 30 seconds
Security Horn Command Operates horn for 1 second
Wipers/washers Windshield Wiper Motor LOW Command Operates windshield wiper for 5 seconds (low
speed)
Windshield Wiper Motor HIGH Command Operates windshield wiper for 5 seconds
(high speed)
Windshield Washer Command Operates windshield washer for 5 seconds
Rear window washer motor command Operates for 5 seconds
Rear Wiper motor Operates for 5 seconds
Loss of Communication DTC cross-reference chart
When an ECU is unable to communicate with the other ECUs on the CAN circuit, the other control units will set loss of
communication DTCs. Use this chart to find the control unit that is not communicating.
1. Find the Transmitting Control Unit that is in the same row as all of the loss of communication DTCs retrieved.
2. Perform the input test for the transmitting control unit.
Bus Off and Internal Error Codes

DTC type Related Unit
MICU Gauge Control Immobilizer-Keyless
Module Control Unit
BUS OFF B1000 B1150 B1900
ECU (EEPROM) Error B1002 B1152
Transmitting Control Message Receiving Unit/Loss of Communication DTC

Unit MICU Gauge Control Immobilizer-Keyless
Module Control Unit
MICU RM B1188
HLSW B1155
WIPSW B1156
MICU B1157
DOORSW B1159
DRLOCKSW B1160 B1905
Gauge Control Module VSP/NE B1011
A/T B1906
ECM/PCM ENG B1168
A/T B1169
ABS Modulator-Control ABS B1170
Unit
EPS Control Unit EPS B1183
SRS SRS B1187

HORN RELAY (RHD)
Wire colors: PUR,
WHT, ORN, and WHT
HORN RELAY (LHD)

Wire colors: PUR,
PUR, ORN, and PUR
SRS UNIT IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS

CONTROL UNIT
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY

(FI MAIN)
IGNITION COIL RELAY ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE CONTROL
LIGHTING RELAY 1 SYSTEM (ETCS)
CONTROL RELAY
REAR WINDOW
A/F SENSOR RELAY DEFOGGER RELAY
POWER WINDOW
RELAY (P/W)
BLOWER MOTOR
RELAY
LIGHTING RELAY 2 ELECTRICAL LOAD

DETECTOR (ELD)
STARTER CUT RELAY PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2
(ST CUT) (FUEL PUMP)

EPS CONTROL UNIT

AUDIO UNIT

Power Relay Test
Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it.
Relay Test
A/C compressor clutch relay Normally-open type
A/C condenser fan relay
A/F sensor relay
Blower motor relay
ETCS control relay
Horn relay
Ignition coil relay
Lighting relay 1
Lighting relay 2
PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN)
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
Power window relay (P/W)
Radiator fan relay
Rear window defogger relay
Starter cut relay (ST CUT)
Normally-open type
Check for continuity between the terminals:
There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when battery power is connected to the No. 4
terminal, and body ground is connected to the No. 3 terminal.
There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected.
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Connector Locations
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

Socket Ref Terminal Connects to
A 11 36 Right engine compartment wire harness
A/F sensor relay 3 4
B 12 36 Left engine compartment wire harness
Blower motor relay 2 4
C 13 49 Floor wire harness
E 18 12 Driver's door wire harness
Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay 7 4
F 17 6 Driver's door wire harness
G 16 8 Roof wire harness
H (optional connector) 15 8 Not used
Ignition coil relay 5 4
J (MICU service check connector) 14 3
K 21 10 Dashboard wire harness
Lighting relay 1 4 4
Lighting relay 2 20 4
M 22 34 Dashboard wire harness
N 23 8 Dashboard wire harness
P (SRS) 31 4 Dashboard wire harness
PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 6 4
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 10 4
Power window relay (P/W) 1 4
Q 30 16 Dashboard wire harness
R 29 ——— Not used
Rear window defogger relay 8 4
S 25 3 Dashboard wire harness
Starter cut relay (ST CUT) 9 4
T 26 2 Dashboard wire harness
W 24 1 Dashboard wire harness
X 28 3 Dashboard wire harness
Y (Electrical load detector) 27 3 Dashboard wire harness
T-9 19 ——— Left engine compartment wire harness
3 4 5 6
7
2 8
1 9
10
20
11
12
13
14
19
18 17 16 15
(view of front side)
22 23
21
24
31 25
26
30
27
29
28
(view of back side)
Ground Circuit Identification
BLK B Battery
RHD model
*1: RHD model
BRN E No. 1 ignition coil *2: LHD model
G1
RHD model No. 2 ignition coil
BLK C No. 3 ignition
Engine mount coil
bracket
No. 4 ignition coil
ECM/PCM (PG2)
LHD model BLK I
ECM/PCM (PG2)
G2 Rocker arm oil control solenoid
BLK D
BRN/YEL E Transmission
ECM/PCM (LG2)mount bracket
LHD model
G201 BLK I Right side turn signal light (fender type)
BLK E ECM (PG1)
G3 BLK I Brake fluid level switch
BLK E BLK E PCM (PG1)
BLK J Steering gearheadlight
box
BLK I Right
BLK E BLK F Transmission range switch
BLK I Hood switch (with security)
G201 BLK BLK

I I
BLK E Right
Right front frontpressure
position
position
A/T clutch light solenoid valve A
light control
Right frontpressure
A/T clutch turn signal lightsolenoid*:valve
control
RHD model
BLK K Gauge control [ ]: LHDB model
Right front turnmodule
A/T clutch signal (PG)
light
pressure control solenoid valve C
BLK I Windshield wiper motor [ ]: LHD model
BLK
BLK K
BLK K : J
IBLK Gauge control module (SG)
MICU headlight
Right (PG)
B : Battery ground cable C Engine ground cable D : Transmission ground Left headlight
cable
BLK
BLK K
BLK
K I Ignition key switch
MICURadiator
(SG) fan motor *: RHD model
G301 BRN/YEL E
BLK MBLK J Left front
Right brake position light
light/taillight *: RHD model
BLK
BLK KK Steering wheel
Radiator
Databack-up
Right link switches
fan motor
connector
light (DLC)
BLK BLK
K I (Via cable
Audio reel)
unitcondenser
A/C fan motor
G401 BLK
BLKMK
BLK BLK
K J Steering
Leftwheel
Fuelrear
Right pump turn switches
frontsignal
turn signal
light light
BLK J (ILLMI)Windshield
(Via cable reel)*
wiper motor
Left headlight
BLK K BLK K BRN/YELBLK
E O Front ECM/PCM (LG1) rear/left rear power window motors
passenger's/right
A/C switch
BLK BLK
J J (Via
Left power
front windowlight
A/C position
condenser main
fan switch)
motor
BLK M BLK N Right license plate light
Power
Left window
license platemaster
light switch
G202 BLK K HeaterCKP fan switch
BRN/YEL E BRN H High sensorlight
BLK K BLK J BLK O Left mount
Driver's
frontdoor brake
turn lock knob
signal switch/
light
key window
Rear
Left cylinder switch
side turndefogger (−) terminal
signal light (fender type)
G503 BLK K Heater
Tailgate control
latchside
Right [Left] panel
switch light
turn signal light (mirror type)
BRN/YEL E CMP sensor
BLK KBLK I Rear
Powerwindow
ABS
mirror wiper motor
modulator-control
switch unit (GND)
G202 BLK IJ Clutch
ABS pedal position switch
modulator-control unit (GND) *1
BLK K Audio
(M/T with unit
cruise control)
BLK K SRS unit (VA)
BLK K MICU (PG)
JUNCTION
BLK M BLK T Rear center seat
CONNECTOR BLK BLK
BRN/YEL
K I E BRN J BRN K Parkrear link belt
Dataswitch
ABS
pin
buckle (DLC)
connector
modulator-control switch
unit (MR-GND)
(with seat belt reminder)*
Immobilizer-keyless control unit
BLK
BLK K
IK MICU
ABS (SG)
modulator-control
SRS unit (VB) unit (MR-GND)
BLK K A/T gear position indicator panel light
BLK M BLK U Ultrasonic sensor (with ultrasonic)
BLK K ELD
G203 BLK BLK
K J Hazard EPS controlswitch
warning unit *2
UNDER-DASH
G401 FUSE/RELAY BOX
G504 BLK K Rear window
Data linkdefogger switch
connector (DLC)
BRN K
(Internal connection)
G402 BLK K BlowerImmobilizer-keyless
motor relay control unit
G602
BLK K Rear window defogger switch (ILLMI)
BLK M Driver's seat belt buckle switch
BLK J EPS
Rearcontrol unitbelt buckle switch
right seat
BLK U Front
(withpassenger's
rear seat seat
belt belt buckle switch
reminder)*
I BLK BRN/YEL
: Right engine compartment wire harness K E Accessory
(with power
passenger's socket
seat belt reminder)*
G301
BLK M BLK Q Rear leftrear
Right seatdoor
belt buckle switch
lock knob switch
BLK K BLK P (with
Leftrear
(with seatside
belt turn
security)*
[Right] reminder)*
signal light (mirror type)
BLK U BLK U Front passenger's seat belt sitting
Front passenger's door lock knob switch
switch (with security)
G501 Secondary HO2S WHT/RED E (with passenger's
ECM/PCM seat belt reminder)*
G402
(Sensor 2)
G101 BLK I Right side turn signal light (fender type)
G601 BLK
Knock U
sensor BLK V RED/BLU E OPDS unit (with side airbag)
ECM/PCM
G502 BLK J EPS torque sensor

BLK U BLK R Left rearLeft
door lock
side knob
turn switch
signal light(with security)
(fender type)
G451 : E : Engine wire harness F : Transmission range switch subharness H : CKP sensor subharness
K Dashboard wire harness P : Front passenger's door wire harness
BLK J Brake fluid level switch
J : Left engine compartment wire harness K : Dashboard wire harness : shielding
Hood switch (with security)
K : Dashboard wire harness O : Driver's door wire harness
G603
K : Dashboard wire harness M : Floor wire harness Q : Right rear door wire harness
G302
I : Right engine compartment wire harness BLK
J : MLeft engine compartment wire harness Left brake light/taillight
Left back-up light
I : Right engine compartment wire harness
BLK M Left rear turn signal light

J : Left engine compartment wire harness
Alarm control siren (with ultrasonic)
G604
M : Floor wire harness N : Tailgate wire harness R : Left rear door wire harness
T : Reminder wire harness U : Ultrasonic sensor subharness V : OPDS unit harness

Power Circuit Identification
BATTERY *1: With trailer lighting connector

BLK Starter
BLK BATTERY TERMINAL FUSE BOX

A No. 1 (100 A)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX BLK Alternator
G1 B
No. MULTI
2 (60 A)FUSE/RELAY
UNDER-DASH FUSE BLOCKBOX
WHT EPS control unit
C
No. 25 (NotNo. 60 (IGN) (50 A)
used)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX WHT 2 [ ]: LHD model
IGNITION SWITCH
No. 3 (30 A)*1 (20 A)*2
D 1
WHT UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 60 (IGN) (50 A) UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX [ ]: LHD model
FUSE No. 60 (AMT) (40 A) IGNITION
No. 30 (30 A) *1: A/T
(UNDER-DASH COIL RELAY
FUSE/RELAY BOX) E LT BLU 3 Radiator fan relay*2: M/T
POWER WINDOW
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAYRELAYNo.BOX
PGM-FI 28 (Not
(P/W) H
WHTuesd)
2 UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
MAIN RELAY1
(FI-MAIN) (Internal connection)
No.
No.43 (7.5A)A)
1 (10 MICU (P/W RLY)
No. 39 (15 A) FUSE/RELAY BOX
UNDER-DASH (Internal connection) *1: With trailer lighting connector
No. 27 LT GRN 4MICU A/C
(+B compressor
BACK clutch relay
IGNITION SWITCH (30 A) BLU *2: Without
ECM/PCM trailerUP)
(MRLY) lighting connector
WHT *3: LHD model
F
[ ]: LHD model
No. 10OFF
(7.5 A) MICU [ ]: LHD model
No. 47 (30 A) LT GRN LT GRN ECM/PCM (IGP)
FUSE G No. 37 (ABS FSR) (30 A) (With ultrasonic)
(UNDER-DASH RED 5 A/C condenser fan relay
WHT ABS modulator-control unit (FSR +B)
FUSE/RELAY PNK YEL/BLK YEL CKP sensor
ACCBOX) No.MICU
35 (15 A) Alarm control siren
No. 11 (7.5 A) LT BLU Front passenger's door lock actuator
No. 43 (7.5 A) 6 YEL/BLK Ultrasonic
sensorsensor
CMPmodulator-control
No. 20 (15 A) No. 10
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD RELAY (7.5 A) BOX PUR ABS unit (IG1)
FUSE BAT IG2 FUSE No. 58 (ABS MTR) (30 A) BRN No. 1 injector
(UNDER-DASH ORN
No. 45 (Not
(UNDER-DASH used) [PUR] Cargo 6area light
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD
LT
REDBLU Left
Windshield/rear
[Right]
ABS rear door window
modulator-control lock actuator
washer motor
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
IG1
No. 21 (15 A)
FUSE/RELAY BOX) PGM-FI DRIVE
LT
PURBLU No.
EPS 2control
injectorRELAY BOX unit (MTR +B)
unit (IG1)
BRN IGNITION Tailgate
No. 3 injector
lock actuator
YELNo. 17 (20 A) MAIN RELAY2
CIRCUIT
COIL RELAY PNK Individual map light
4 [PUR] L A/C COMPRESSOR
(FUELNo.
PUMP) No. 4 injector
36 (15 A) ORN Windshield/rear
Ceiling light master window washer motor
33 (15 A)CLUTCH RELAY
No.DRIVE BRN Power window switch
CIRCUIT PNK Driver's door lock actuator
ST GRY
BRN BLK/YEL ECM/PCM (IMOFPR)
No. 1 ignition coil
No. BRN A/C switch power window motor
No. 12
46 (10
(20 A)
A) 1 2 BRN WHT Front
No.A/Cpassenger's
2 ignition coil clutch
LT GRN Power
(Via sensor
front compressor
mirror switch
passenger's power window switch)
No. 1856
(20(30
A) A) YEL GRN YEL
PNK BLK/YEL MAF
Right
No.[Left]
Windshield rear
3 ignition door
wiper lock
coildefogger
motor actuator
(HI)relay
No. ORN Fuel Rear
pump window
DRIVE I J PNK
PUR Gauge
EVAP
Power
Fuel canister
control
No.lidwindow
4 actuator
ignitionpurge
module
coilvalve
master switch
PNK RED CIRCUIT Audio Rear
Secondary window defogger switch
unit HO2S
No. 10 (7.5 A) FUSE No. 49 (15 A) indicatorwiper
lightmotor (LO)
No. 5 (10(UNDER-DASH
A) BLOWER REAR PURBLU Windshield
Immobilizer-keyless
Alternator
Right rear power control
window unit
motor
FUSE FUSE/RELAY BOX) 4 ELECTRONIC3 HMOTOR WINDOWYEL YEL BRN Front
(Via
ECM/PCM
Datarightpassenger's
link rear
(BKSWNC)
power
connector door lock actuator
window
(DLC) switch)
8 BRN9 No. 19 (20 A)
No. 47 (30 A) (UNDER-DASH
[PUR] THROTTLE RELAY DEFOGGER PNK ECM/PCM (ACC)
(Via brake pedal position switch)
FUSE FUSE/RELAY BOX) J CONTROL SYSTEM RELAY RED Power window master switch
(ETCS) ECM/PCM (MRLY)
REAR WINDOW YEL Left [Right] rear door lock actuator
3 (30 A)*1 (20 A)*
(UNDER-DASH
No. · 2UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH No. 16 (10 A)
FUSE/RELAY BOX) FUSE/RELAY
FUSE K
FUSE/RELAY No. 10 (7.5 A)CONTROL
FUSE
DEFOGGER RELAY
RELAY RED Left rear
Tailgate
Rear lock
windowpower actuator
window
wiper motor motor
(UNDER-DASH A/F SENSOR RELAY PUR
(BATTERY TERMINALBOX*1 BRN
No. 22 (7.5 BOX No.FUSE/RELAY
26 (10 A) BOX)
(Via left rear power window switch)
FUSE 5 A) FUSE
BOX) [PUR]
· STARTER* 2 No. 20 (15 A) A/C CONDENSERused)
No. 15 (Not
No. 50 (15 A) PUR
RED Rear window
ECM/PCM defogger switch
(ETCSRLY)
(UNDER-DASH No. 29 ORN ECM/PCM
Driver's door (SUBRLY)
FUSE/RELAY BOX) (10 A) I FAN RELAY
YEL
RED BLK/RED ECM/PCM (IG1)lock actuator
1 No. 52 (15 A)
DRIVE
7 2 1
CIRCUIT GRN
WHT WHT Back-up(IG1ETCS)
ECM/PCM light (A/T)
RED MICU
No. 59 (20 A) PUR
YEL WHT/BLK A/F A/C
Right sensor
[Left] rear doorfanlock actuator
No. 5 MOTOR
BLOWER (10 A) RED BLU condenser
Immobilizer-keyless motor
control
Trailer lighting connector* 1
unit
No. 31 (Not used) RELAY Fuel lid actuator
LT GRN RED Back-up light (M/T)
WHT (Via back-up light switch)
No. 57 (30 A)
LIGHTING
LT BLU No.RELAY1
23 (10 A) L TURN SIGNAL/ GRY Right front position light
WHT Blower motor
4 HAZARD3
BRN WARNING YEL(Internal connection) Hazard warning switch
No. 30 (30 A) [PUR] PGM-FI BLU Rear
MICUwindow defogger
No. 2DRIVE
(10 A) CIRCUIT GRY Left front position light
FUSE MAIN
(UNDER-DASH CIRCUIT RELAY2No. 32 (10 A)
FUSE/RELAY BOX) K PNK
BLK Right headlight (LO)
No. 5424
No. (Not
(15used)
A) GRY Right taillight
3 No.
RADIATOR
ELD 34 (10 A)
HORN Left taillight
No.
No.22 (7.5A)A)
3 (20 CIRCUITMICU GRN HORN (Low)
FAN RELAY BRN Left
Rightheadlight (LO) light
license plate
No. 40 (Not used) LT GRN 7 HORN ELD (High)* 3
GRY Power
Left license
windowplate
master (With
light security)
switch
LIGHTING G501
1 [2]
IGNITION SWITCH
LT BLU No. 55 (Not2 [1]
RELAY2 used) PNK RED ECM/PCM
Radiator
Security (ELD)
horn fan motor
(ACC) Gauge control module
(Internal connection) Shift lock solenoid
9BLK G No. 4 (Not used) WHT(Internal connection) MICU
No. 41 (Not used) Horn
MICU relay
(IG1 METER)
[PUR]
No. 48 (10 A) Horn warning
(Low) (Via horn light
relay)
GRY Hazard switch
GRYBrake pedal Left headlight (HI) relay)*3
BRN A 4 3 position A/THorn
gear(Hi) (Via
position horn
indicator
IGNITION GRN switch ECM/PCM (FANC)
RED SWITCH [PUR] No. 51 (10 A) panel light (A/T)
(ST) G501
No. 42 (Not used) GRN
WHT LT GRN Right
Rightheadlight
brake (HI)
8 B No. 13 (20 A) GRY Steering wheellight
switch light
No. 6 (10 A) Left brake
Accessory light
power socketswitch light
No. 38 (Not used) PUR Rear window deffoger
PUR HighSRS unitbrake
mount (VB) light
No.14
No. 9 (20
(7.5A)A)
C (Internal connection) ECM/PCM (BKSW)
MICU (ACC)
PNK STARTER CUT
No. 7(ST
RELAY (10CUT)
A) (A/T)
No. 53
No.(Not uesd)
44 (7.5 A) PUR Key inter lock solenoid (A/T)
D BRN PCM (VBSOL)
PNK ORN LT GRN BLU/WHT Audio unit
Transmission range switch (N, P)
GRY Audio unit light
E No. 8 (7.5 A) A/C switch light
PNK HVAC control
WHT SRS unitunit
(VA)light
GRN BLK/WHT Starter
WHT GRN OPDS unit
(With side airbag/
side curtain airbag)
F
(M/T)
Fuse to Components Index - Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Under-dash fuse/relay box

1 10 A Alarm control siren *1 , Audio unit, Cargo area light, Ceiling light, Data link connector (DLC), Gauge control module, Immobilizer-
keyless control unit, Individual map light, MICU (+B BACK UP), Ultrasonic sensor *1
2 10 A Not used
3 20 A Power window master switch
5 10 A Back-up light (via back-up light switch) (M/T), MICU (IG BACK LT) (A/T)
6 10 A SRS unit (VB)
7 10 A PCM (VBSOL)
8 7.5 A SRS unit (VA), OPDS unit *2
9 20 A Not used
10 7.5 A A/C compressor clutch relay *4 , A/C condenser fan relay *4 , A/C switch, Blower motor relay, ECM/PCM (ACC) (via A/C compressor
clutch relay), ECM/PCM (FANC) (via A/C condenser fan relay and radiator fan relay), Optional connector, Power mirror switch,
Radiator fan relay *4 , Rear window defogger relay, Rear window defogger switch indicator light
11 7.5 A ABS modulator-control unit (MTR), EPS control unit
12 10 A MAF sensor, ECM/PCM (BRSWNC) (via brake pedal position switch), EVAP canister purge valve, Secondary HO2S, Alternator
13 20 A Accessory power socket
14 7.5 A Key interlock solenoid (A/T), Audio unit, MICU (ACC)
16 10 A Rear wiper motor
17 20 A Front passenger's power window motor (via front passenger's power window switch), Power window master switch
18 20 A Power window master switch, Right rear power window motor (via right rear power window switch)
19 20 A Left rear power window motor (via left rear power window switch), Power window master switch
20 15 A ECM/PCM (IG1), Fuel pump (via PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)), Immobilizer-keyless control unit
21 15 A MICU (IG1 WASHER)
22 7.5 A A/T gear position indicator panel light (A/T), Electrical load detector (ELD), Gauge control module
23 10 A MICU (+B HAZARD)
24 15 A ECM/PCM *5 , High mount brake light *5 , Horn (High) (LHD model), Horn (Low), Horn relay *3 , Left brake light *5 , Right brake light *5
, MICU (+B HORN) (Without security)
26 10 A A/F sensor (via A/F sensor relay), A/F sensor relay, ECM/PCM (SUBRLY)
27 30 A MICU (+B DOOR LOCK)
[ ]: LHD model
*1: With ultrasonic

*2: With side airbag/side curtain airbag
*3: With security
*4: In the auxiliary under-hood relay box
*5: Via brake pedal position switch

29 10 A A/C switch light, Heater control panel light, A/T gear position indicator panel light, Audio unit, Hazard warning switch light, Left front
position light, Left license plate light, Left taillight, Rear window defogger switch light, MICU (+B SMALL LT), Right license plate light
30 30 A Radiator fan motor (via radiator fan relay)
32 10 A Right headlight (LO)
33 15 A Ignition coil relay, Ignition coils (via ignition coil relay), ECM/PCM (MRLY)
34 10 A Left headlight (LO)
35 15 A Front passenger's door lock actuator, Left [Right] rear door lock actuator, Tailgate lock actuator
36 15 A Driver's door lock actuator, Fuel lid lock actuator, Right [Left] rear door lock actuator
37 30 A ABS modulator-control unit (FSR)
39 15 A CKP sensor, CMP sensor, ECM/PCM (IGP), ECM/PCM (IG1ETCSRLY) (via electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay),
ECM/PCM (IMOFPR) (Via PGM-FI main relay 2(FUEL PUMP)), ECM/PCM (MRLY) (Via PGM-FI main relay 1), Electronic throttle
control system (ETCS) control relay *6 , Injectors, PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN), PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) *6
43 7.5 A A/C compressor clutch (Via A/C compressor clutch relay)
44 7.5 A Starter cut relay (ST CUT) (A/T)
46 20 A Not used
47 30 A A/C condenser fan motor (via A/C condenser fan relay)
48 10 A Left headlight (HI)
49 15 A Front passenger's door lock actuator, Left [Right] rear door lock actuator, Tailgate lock actuator
50 15 A Driver's door lock actuator, Fuel lid lock actuator, Right [Left] rear door lock actuator
51 10 A Right headlight (HI)
52 15 A ECM/PCM (IG1ETCS) (via electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay)
56 30 A MICU (IG1 FR WIPER)
57 30 A Blower motor (via blower motor relay)
58 30 A ABS modulator-control unit (MTR)
59 20 A Rear window defogger (via rear window defogger relay)
60 (IGN)50 A Ignition switch
(AMT)40 A Not used
[ ]: LHD model
*1: With ultrasonic

*2: With side airbag/side curtain airbag
*3: With security
*4: In the auxiliary under-hood relay box
*5: Via brake pedal position switch
*6: Via PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN)
10
56 57 58 59
1 11
2 12 *
20 26 32 38
3 13
* 21 27 33 39
4 14 *
* 22 28 34 40* 44 48 52
5 15 * *
23 29 35 41 45 49 53
6 16 *
24 30 36 42* 46 50 54
7 17 * * *
25 31 37 43 47 51 55
8 18
9* 19
60
*: Not used
Roof Wire Harness, Reminder Wire Harness, and Ultrasonic Sensor Subharness Locations
ULTRASONIC SENSOR SUBHARNESS or

REMINDER WIRE HARNESS
ROOF WIRE HARNESS
RHD model is shown, LHD model is symmetrical.

DTC B1029:
MICU Lost Communication with Ultrasonic Unit
4. Do the ultrasonic sensor input test, and check power supply and ground for ultrasonic sensor.
Do all of the input tests prove OK?
NO - If any input tests indicate a problem, find and correct them, then recheck the system.■
5. Do the alarm control siren input test, and check power supply and ground for alarm control siren.
6. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector C (49P).
7. Connect the alarm control siren 6P connector No. 3 terminal and body ground with a jumper wire.
8. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector C (49P) No. 25 terminal and body ground.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the MICU and the alarm control siren.■
9. Disconnect the jumper wire from the alarm control siren 6P connector.
10. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector C (49P) No. 25 terminal and body ground.
YES - Repair a short to ground in the wire between the MICU and the alarm control siren.■
NO - Faulty alarm control siren, replace it.■
DTC B1030:
Ultrasonic System Malfunction
YES - Faulty alarm control siren, replace it.■
DTC B1031:
Ultrasonic Sensor Malfunction
4. Do the ultrasonic sensor input test, and check power supply and ground for ultrasonic sensor.
NO - If any input tests indicate a problem, find and correct them, then recheck the system■
5. Do the alarm control siren input test, and check power supply and ground for alarm control siren.
YES - Faulty alarm control siren, replace it.■
Brake System Symptom Troubleshooting - Rapid brake pad wear, vehicle vibration (after a long drive), or high, hard
brake pedal
Rapid brake pad wear, vehicle vibration (after a long drive), or high, hard brake pedal
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly.
Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different. If the pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause
vibration, uneven or rapid brake pad wear, and possibly uneven tyre wear. For proper caliper pin location.
1. Drive the vehicle until the brakes drag or until the pedal is high and hard. This can take 20 or more brake pedal
applications during an extended test-drive.
2. With the engine running, raise the vehicle on a lift, and spin all four wheels by hand.
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
NO - Look for other causes of pad wear, high pedal, or vehicle vibration.■
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), press the brake pedal several times to deplete the vacuum in the brake
booster, and then spin the wheels again to check for brake drag.
NO - Replace the brake booster.
RHD model. ■
LHD model. ■
4. Without removing the brake lines, unbolt and separate the master cylinder from the booster, then spin the wheels
to check for brake drag.
NO - Check the brake pedal position switch adjustment and pedal free play. ■
5. Loosen the hydraulic lines at the master cylinder, then spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
NO - Check the master cylinder reservoir for contamination in the brake fluid. If you find contamination, flush
the entire brake system of all contaminated fluid. If the brake fluid is OK, replace the master cylinder.
RHD model. ■
LHD model. ■
6. Loosen the bleed screws at each caliper, then spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
YES - Check the master cylinder reservoir for contamination in the brake fluid. If you find contamination, flush
the entire brake system of all contaminated fluid. If the brake fluid is OK, disassemble and repair the
caliper on the wheel(s) with brake drag.■
NO - Look for and replace any damaged brake lines. If all brake lines are OK, replace the ABS modulator-
control unit. ■
Brake System Inspection and Test
Inspect the brake system components listed. Repair or replace any parts that are leaking or damaged.
Component Inspections:
Component Procedure Also check for
Master Cylinder Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging seal at reservoir cap. This is a sign
of fluid contamination.
Reservoir tank, subreservoir or master
cylinder body.
Lines, reservoir tank hose and grommets,
and their joints.
Between master cylinder and booster.
Brake Hoses Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging, twisted, or bent lines.
Line joints and banjo bolt connections.
Hoses and lines, also inspect for twisting or
damage.
Caliper Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Seized or sticking caliper pins.
Piston seal.
Banjo bolt connections.
Bleed screw.
ABS Modulator-control Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at:
Unit
Line joints.
Modulator-control unit.
Brake System Test

Brake pedal sinks/fades when braking
1. Set the parking brake, and start the engine, then turn off the A/C. Allow the engine to warm up to normal operating
temperature (radiator fan comes on twice).
2. Attach a 50 mm (2 in.) piece of masking tape along the bottom of the steering wheel, and draw a horizontal
reference mark across it.
3. With the transmission in neutral (M/T) or P or N (A/T), press and hold the brake pedal lightly (about the same
pressure needed to keep an A/T-equipped vehicle from creeping), then release the parking brake.
4. While still holding the brake pedal, hook the end of the tape measure behind the brake pedal, then pull the tape up
to the steering wheel. Note the measurement between the brake pedal and the reference mark on the steering
wheel.
5. Apply steady pressure to the brake pedal for 3 minutes.
6. Watch the tape measure.
If the measurement increases 10 mm (0.39 in.) or less, the master cylinder is OK.
If the measurement increases more than 10 mm (0.39 in.), replace the master cylinder.
SRS System Description
SRS Components
Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator/OPDS Operation
SRS Operation
SRS Unit Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (39P)
SRS Unit Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (39P)
SRS Component Location Index
SIDELEFT
AIRBAG CUTOFF
FRONT INDICATOR
IMPACT SENSOR
Replacement,
SRS INDICATOR
RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR

Replacement,
FRONT PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG
Replacement,
RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
Disposal, (FIRST)
Replacement,
LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR

(FIRST)
LEFT SIDE AIRBAG Replacement,
Replacement, UNDER-DASH FUSE/
LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG RELAY BOX
Disposal,
Disposal, Disposal,
CABLE REEL
RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR Replacement,
LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (SECOND)
OPDS SENSOR/ (SECOND) Replacement,
SEAT-BACK Replacement, DRIVER'S AIRBAG
Disposal,
LEFT SIDE SEAT

BELT TENSIONER OPDS UNIT DATA LINK
Replacement, Initialization, CONNECTOR (DLC)
Disposal, Replacement, SRS UNIT

Update,
Replacement,
FRONT PASSENGER'S RIGHT SIDE SEAT BELT TENSIONER
SEAT SITTING SWITCH/ Replacement
SEAT CUSHION PAD Disposal,
Replacement,
RIGHT SIDE AIRBAG
Replacement,
RHD model is shown, LHD model is similar. Disposal,
SRS Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH
BATTERY TAERMINAL FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY FUSE BOX
No. 60 (IGN) (50 A)
*: Wire color may be substitued
for SRS circuits
C *1: With side airbag and
BAT No. 8 (7.5 A) 4 side curtain airbag
*: Wire color may: beCANsubstitued
line
IG1 for SRS circuits: Other communication line
3 *1: With side airbag and
FLOOR : Shielding
IGNITION SWITCH No. 6 (10 A) side curtain airbag
2 WIRE
HARNESS
No. 22 (7.5 A)
P (LHD) (RHD)
Q *1 FRONT FRONT
*1 8 PASSENGER'S DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S DRIVER'S
LT BLU FLOOR AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG
INFLATOR
32P 32
WIRE INFLATOR INFLATOR INFLATOR
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE LEFT
LTSIDE
BLU HARNESS RIGHT SIDE
IMPACT WHT IMPACT
SENSOR 4 1 2 SENSOR
*1 (SECOND) 4P (SECOND)
OPDS
2P 2 JUNCTION 2P 1 UNIT 2
1 CONNECTOR 4P 4P
HARNESS 3 2 2 3
GRY* BLU GRN YEL BLK BLK *1
SIDE FRONT ORN* GRN* LT GRN* PUR*
AIRBAG SEAT BELT SRS
CUTOFF REMINDER INDICATOR 18P 7 1 12 17 LEFT SIDE CABLE CABLE
REEL RIGHT
SIDE
INDICATOR INDICATOR REEL
COMPULSORY CURTAIN CURTAIN LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
TURNING-ON CIRCUIT PUR* WHT* AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG
OPDS UNIT INFLATOR INFLATOR INFLATOR INFLATOR
LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
DRIVE CIRCUIT IMPACT IMPACT
SENSORFAIL-SAFE
(FIRST) CIRCUIT DASHBOAD SENSOR (FIRST) 4P 4P 4P 4P
WIRE 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 3
HARNESS
4P 4P 3
MAIN3 CIRCUIT
2 4 1 2 1 4 2P 2P 2P 2P
OPDS FLOOR 2
LT BLU* 1 DASHBOAD
BRN* 2 1
YEL* ORN* 2 1 2 1
ORN* YEL*
DASHBOAD
BRN* LT BLU*
SENSOR WIRE WIRE WIRE
GRY* PNK* GRN* ORN* LT GRN* BRN* PUR* LT GRN* FLOOR HARNESS HARNESS
F-CAN TRANSCEIVER HARNESS
FLOOR WIRE RED* WHT* BLU* YEL*
WIRE G603 HARNESS
HARNESS 27 26
B 1 3 4 6 5 3 4 4 3
FLOOR 3 4 5 6
32P O FLOOR A A ORN* PUR* LT GRN* PNK*
30 29 WIRE 4P 4P 4P 4P WIRE
HARNESS 2 1 VB VA ODS RA1+ 1 RA1−
2 LA1+ HARNESS
LA1− LA1− LA1+ RA1− RA1+
WHT RED SRS SRS SRS UNIT SRS UNIT
CAN LO CAN HI GND1 GND2 K-LINE WEN LFS− LFS+ RFS− RFS+ FLBC FRBC RLBO RRBO RCBO
FLOOR FLOOR
A WIRE B WIRE 19RED* WHT* BLU* YEL*
16 17 28 29 18 31 36 37 38 39 21 16 18 17
HARNESS HARNESS
FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR BLU*
DASHBOAD DASHBOAD WIRE YEL* WIRE GRN* WIRE RED* WHT*
DASHBOAD
WIRE B 36RED* 37
WHT* BLK* BLK* WIRE BLU* RED* 38 39
WIRE BRN* RED* LT BLU* GRN* HARNESS 10
B
11 24HARNESS
25 6 7 HARNESS
8 9 2P
2
HARNESS HARNESS RIMINDER
HARNESS BLU WIRE
LBS1− LBS1+ RBS1− RBS1+ LCA1− LCA1+ RCA1− RCA1+ LSA− LSA+ RSA− RSA+
2 2 SRS UNIT 2 2 1 HARNESS
SRS UNIT 2 3 2P 2P 2P 2P 2P
LRP− LRP+ RRP− RRP+ SS+
4P 4P
B LEFT ENGINE 2 3
RIGHT ENGINE BLU BLU BLU BLU BLU
12 13 14 15 23
COMPARTMENT COMPARTMENT
FLOOR FLOOR WIRE WIRE REAR REAR REAR
LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE CENTER
WIRE WIRE HARNESS HARNESS SEAT BELT SEAT BELT
HARNESS HARNESS BRN* RED* LT BLU* GRN* SEAT BELT SEAT BELT SEAT BELT
BUCKLE BUCKLE BUCKLE BUCKLE BUCKLE
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
JUNCTION JUNCTION 2 1 2 1 GRN GRN BLK BLK BLK
CONNECTOR
LT GRN*LT BLU* CONNECTOR
LT BLU* 2P 2P
BRN* PNK* 1
LEFT RIGHT 2P 2P 2P 2P 2P
FRONT FRONT 1 1 1 1
IMPACT IMPACT
BLU RED SENSOR
BLK SENSOR BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
2 3 2 3 2 1
JUNCTION
4P 4P 3P
CONNECTOR
FRONT G603 G601 G603 G601 G602
DATA LINK PASSENGER'S
CONNECTOR SEAT SITTING G603
(DLC) SWITCH
LEFT SIDE RIGHT
G504 SIDE
SEAT BELT SEAT BELT (With front seat belt reminder) (With rear seat belt reminder)
(With front seat belt reminder)
TENSIONER TENSIONER
Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement
Removal
2. Remove the front seat assembly.
Without side curtain airbag
With side curtain airbag
4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector (A) from the side impact sensor (first) (B).
5. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the TORX bolt (C), then remove the side impact sensor (first).
Installation
1. Install the side impact sensor (first) with a new TORX bolt (A), then connect the floor wire harness 4P connector (B)
to the side impact sensor (first) (C).
3. After installing the side impact sensor (first) confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch to ON (II); the
SRS indicator should come on for 6 seconds and then go off.
Audio System Error Codes
The audio system displays error codes when a problem is detected with the disc player or the disc.
CD Error Codes
Error Code Possible Cause Solution
Displayed
CD Track/File format not supported. Current track will skipped. The next supported track or
UNSUPPORTED file plays automatically.
Verify that CD file names end in CDA.
Verify that CD-R or CD-RW with compressed
music formats end in MP3 or WMA.
Other file formats like i-Tunes (AAC) or Ogg are
not recognized.
WMA files may have (DRM) copy protection
and cannot be read.
BAD DISC/PLEASE CD label jammed in the mechanism. Eject CD and insert a known-good CD.
CHECK/OWNERS The wrong type disc is inserted. If flashing the PUSH EJECT, press the EJECT
MANUAL/PUSH CD eject mechanism or motor is button and hold it for 5 seconds. If the disc
EJECT inoperative. does not eject, try again. If the disc still won′t
CD spindle motor won′t spin up the eject, replace the unit.
CD.
HEAT ERROR Disc player is hot. This error can happen if Park the vehicle in a cooler place for a while and play
the vehicle is parked out in the hot sun all the disc again. If the error code is still present, try
day. another disc. If the error code is still present, replace
the audio unit.
Audio System Component Location Index
LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER

Test/Replacement,
LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

Test/Replacement,
AUDIO UNIT
Connector Inputs and Outputs,
AM/FM ANTENNA LEAD
AM/FM ANTENNA SUBLEAD
RIGHT FRONT
DOOR SPEAKER
Test/Replacement,
AUDIO REMOTE
SWITCH
Test,
USB ADAPTER UNIT

Connector Inputs
and Outputs,
Replacement,
RIGHT REAR USB ADAPTER

DOOR SPEAKER Holder Replacement,
AM/FM ANTENNA Test/Replacement, USB ADAPTER CABLE
Replacement, (Included with the accessory kit)

Part of items are not equipped for some models.
Audio System Circuit Diagram - Without Audio
Without Audio
BATTE RY TE RMINAL UNDE R-DAS H

FUS E BOX FUS E /RE LAY BOX
IGNITION S W ITCH : This item is not equipped at
the factory shipment
BATTE RY
No. 1 (100 A) No. 60 (IG) (50 A) No. 14 (7.5 A) : S hielding
T-9 T1 BAT S3
W HT W HT RE D
ACC
No. 1 (10 A)
(W ith security
system)
MICU
3
AM/FM
M23 Q2 N1 M18 ANTE NNA
No. 29 (10 A) FUS E BLU 2 1

(In the under-dash
fuse/relay box)
BLU
AM/FM ANTE NNA LE AD
GRY GRN BLU P NK P UR AM/FM ANTE NNA S UBLE AD

DATA LINK
CONNE CTOR
(DLC)
A13 A4 A3 A24 A14 D3 D2 D1
ILL+ S CTY K-LINE +B ACC ANT+B RF S H RF IN
AUDIO UNIT
FR FR FR FR RR RR RR RR
GND ILL− L+ L− R+ R− L+ L− R+ R−
A12 A1 A23 A22 A19 A18 A11 A10 A7 A6
BLK BLK
LT BLU LT GRN BRN RE D GRY BRN BLU ORN
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
LE FT FRONT RIGHT FRONT LE FT RE AR RIGHT RE AR

DOOR S P E AKE R DOOR S P E AKE R DOOR S P E AKE R DOOR S P E AKE R
G503 G502
Audio System Circuit Diagram - With Audio
With Audio
BATTERY TERMINAL UNDER-DASH

FUSE BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH *: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube
BATTERY insulating the outside of the wire. The color of
No. 1 (100 A) T-9 No. 60 (IG) (50 A) T1 BAT S3 No. 14 (7.5 A) the insulating tube, typically black or dark gray,
WHT WHT RED may not match the color of the wire listed on the
ACC schematic.
: Shielding
No. 1 (10 A)
(With security
system)
MICU LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRONT LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR

DOOR SPEAKER DOOR SPEAKER DOOR SPEAKER DOOR SPEAKER
3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
AM/FM
M23 Q2 N1 M18 ANTENNA
ECM/PCM
No. 29 (10 A) FUSE BLU LT BLU LT GRN BRN RED GRY BRN BLU ORN
2 1 VSS OUT
(In the under-dash
fuse/relay box) A30
BLU
AM/FM ANTENNA LEAD
BLU
GRY GRN DATA LINK BLU PNK PUR AM/FM ANTENNA SUBLEAD
CONNECTOR
(DLC)
A13 A4 A3 A24 A14 D3 D2 D1 A15 A23 A22 A19 A18 A11 A10 A7 A6
ILL+ SCTY K-LINE +B ACC ANT+B RF SH RF IN VSS OUT FR FR FR FR RR RR RR RR
L+ L− R+ R− L+ L− R+ R−
AUDIO UNIT AUDIO UNIT

GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET
REMOTE GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO GA-NET SYS GA-NET
GND REMOTE GND BUS SH BUS+ BUS− SH L+ L− R+ R− +B ACC GND
A12 A16 A5 C3 C9 C10 C4 C6 C14 C5 C13 C1 C2 C11
PNK WHT GRY* PNK*
9 10 8 CABLE REEL 7 YEL GRN WHT LT BLU BRN RED ORN BLU BLK
GRY* PNK*
4 3 5 6
A3 A9 A10 A4 A6 A14 A5 A13 A1 A2 A11
BLK GRY BLK GRN RED/BLK GRN/RED BRN GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET SYS GA-NET
BUS SH BUS+ BUS− AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO +B ACC GND
AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH SH L+ L− R+ R−
USB ADAPTER UNIT
USB USB USB USB USB
SH VBUS DATA− DATA+ GND
100 Ω
270 Ω 470 Ω 1.2 kΩ 3.9 kΩ 10 kΩ B5 B1 B2 B3 B4
No. 29 (10 A) FUSE
(In the under-dash
fuse/relay box) VOL VOL
DOWN UP CH CH MODE
( ) ( ) (−) (+)
5 1 2 3 4
USB ADAPTER
USB ADAPTER CABLE
G503 G501
(With remote audio control) (With USB adapter)

DTC 43-11:
No Signal From the Left Side Impact Sensor (first)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
If DTC 43-11 and 45-11 are indicated, faulty left side impact sensor (first); replace the left side
6. Check the connections between SRS unit connector B (39P) and the SRS unit, between the floor wire harness 4P
connector and the left side impact sensor (first), and at floor wire harness 4P connector.
8. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector from the left side impact sensor (first).
9. Measure the resistance between No. 36 and No. 37 terminals of SRS unit connector B (39P). There should be an
open circuit or at least 1 MΩ.
10. Measure the resistance between No. 36 terminal of SRS unit connector B (39P) and body ground, and between the
No. 37 terminal and body ground. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 MΩ.
13. Measure the voltage between No. 36 terminal of SRS unit connector B (39P) and body ground, and between the
15. Measure the resistance between the No. 2 terminal of the floor wire harness 4P connector and the No. 37 terminal
of the SRS unit connector B (39P), and between the No. 3 terminal of the floor wire harness 4P connector and the
No. 36 terminal of the SRS unit connector B (39P). There should be 0−1.0 Ω.
16. Substitute a known-good left side impact sensor (first) and recheck.
20. Read the DTC.
NO - Faulty left side impact sensor (first); replace the left side impact sensor (first). ■
DTC 44-11:
No Signal From the Right Side Impact Sensor (first)
NOTE:
Information.
3. Read the DTC.
If DTC 44-11 and 46-11 are indicated, faulty right side impact sensor (first); replace the right side
6. Check the connections between SRS unit connector B (39P) and the SRS unit, between the floor wire harness 4P
connector and the right side impact sensor (first), and at floor wire harness 4P connector.
8. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector from the right side impact sensor (first).
an open circuit or at least 1 MΩ.
10. Measure the resistance between No. 38 terminal of SRS unit connector B (39P) and body ground, and between the
No. 39 terminal and body ground. There should be an open circuit at least 1 MΩ.
13. Measure the voltage between No. 38 terminal of SRS unit connector B (39P) and body ground, and between the
15. Measure the resistance between the No. 2 terminal of the floor wire harness 4P connector and the No. 39 terminal
of the SRS unit connector B (39P), and between the No. 3 terminal of the floor wire harness 4P connector and the
No. 38 terminal of the SRS unit connector B (39P). There should be 0−1.0 Ω.
16. Substitute a known-good right side impact sensor (first) and recheck.
20. Read the DTC.
NO - Faulty right side impact sensor (first); replace the right side impact sensor (first). ■
Safety Messages
Safety Messages
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help you make informed decisions, we have provided safety
messages, and other safety information throughout this manual. Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you
about all the hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. You must use your own good judgement.
You will find important safety information in a variety of forms including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or
CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
Instructions − how to service this vehicle correctly and safely.

All information contained in this manual is based on the latest product information available at the time of printing. We
reserve the right to make changes at anytime without notice. No part of this publication may be reproduced, or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text, figures, and tables.
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. The purpose of this message is
to help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
All Rights Reserved HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.
Wiring Diagram
Heating/Air
A/T
Headlights,Headlight
Immobilizer
MICUGear
Charging
ECM/PCM
ECM/PCM,
Audio
Data
EPS, Position
Under−dash
GaugesSystem
Battery,
Power
ABS,
SRS VSA
Climate
Seat Conditioning
System,
System,
Heater
Link i−SHIFT
Windows,
Battery
Sunshade
Control, Indicator
Connector,
Wipers/Washers,
Cable Reel Ignition
Fuse/RelayLeveling
Box
Starting
Terminal
Power
RearECM/PCM Panel
Box, Key
System,
System,
Mirrors
Fuse
Window
Steering Light,
Switch,
Auxiliary
Box, FuelCombination
Interior
Door
Pump,
Under−dash
Defogger
Wheel Switches, Lock
Under−hoodLights,
HornsLight
Actuators,
Back
Relay
Fuse/Relay
Hazard WarningSwitch,
BoxupAccessory
Box Lights,
SwitchAutomatic
Brake
Power
Lighting
lights,
Socket,
Front
System,
Cigarette
Position
Turnlighter
Signal
Lights,Lights
Taillights, License Plate lights, Fog lights
A AA B BB
B CC
CC
C
18
16
19
13
14
15
17
21
22
24
20
23
11
10
12987654321 DRIVER'S *1 No.40 (20 A)*2
(M/T o r i− SHIF T system)
No.10 (25 A)*2
IG NIT IO N SW IT CH
L EF T T URN T URN SIG NALMICU

(A/T ) (RHD mo d el)
RIG HT T URN
(W ith cru ise co n tro l)
L EF T T URN T URN SIG NAL

(L HD mo d el)
RIG HT T URN
IG NIT IO N SW IT CH DO O R UNL O CK F RO NT SUPER REAR SUPER No . 1 (10 A) *1 No . 1 (10 A) A) *1 SIG NAL
OFF
INDICAT O R (17− D) SIG NAL L IG HTNo . 24 (15 A) *1
(ACC) F USE No . F23 ( 10A ) *1
USE FUSARD
HAZ E W ARNING No . 5 (10
T URN FUS E SIG NAL L IG HT SIG NAL L IG HT No . 12 (10 A) *1 INDICAT O R SIG NAL L IG HT
(2− B) REL AY L O CKING REL AY L O CKING REL AY F USE(1− B) IT CH (11− D) F USE SW IT CH (14−
(1−B)
SW (2−C)
B) No(14−. 10C) (7.5 A) *2 MICU (10− C) (14− D) F USE (14− C) F USE (10− C) (14− D)
(15− C) (15− C) (15− C) (1− B) (2− C) F USE (17− B) 201
(3− A)
(2− C) No . 1 (10 A) *2ACC (In tern al co n n ectio n ) (2− D) (3− A)
77BAT TUNDER− DASH 163 17 19 84 78 ·IMMO BIL IZ R− KEYL ESS 196 16 MICU90 (+ B BACK UP) (17− A)
ERY No . 10 (7.5 A) *2 161 162 107 33 143 110
(W ith o u t VSA) F USE/REL AY BO X F USE
(W ith VSA)
164 *1 165 166
CO NT RO L UNIT
*2 167 BAT 168 80 169 IG 2 170 171 No . 45172 (20A) *1 No . 10
173 (7.5 A) *2
174 167 168 169 · DRIVER'S 170 SEAT HEAT 171
ER SW IT CH(24− 172B) 173 174
(1− C) No . 60 (IG N)(15− (50A)A) AUXIL IARY COUNDER−
MBINATFHO IO NO LDIG HT SW IT CH
No . 20 (15A) *1 (2−No C) . 1 (10A) *1 G AUG E CO NT RL
MO DUL E BL K 1 ST ART ER (4− B) No . 14 (7.5A)
F USE F USE ·MICU 14 W HT*7 REL AY O RN BO X (1−
USE
B) BRN 78 · F RO NT PASSENG ER'S SEAT HEAT ER SW IT CH
T H: T HERMO ST AT F[O N:25− 35°C(77− 95°F )] F USE
USE
36 44°C(97− 111°F
[O FD)F :36−
(2− )] (1− B) 79 (8− B) (3− A) (1− A) (17− D) L T BL U*5 17 ·· INDIVIDUAL MAP L IG HT (13− A) (24− B)
No .RED
BR: BREAKER 34 (10A) *1[O N:25− 35°C(77− No . 48 95°F (10A))]*1 *2 No . 32 (10A) *1 No . 51 (10A) *1 No . 48 (15A) *1 No . 34 (10A) *1 No . 32 (15A) *1 No . 51 (10A) *1 IG 1
YEL PNK*6 30 CEIL ING L IG HT (13− A)
F USE [O F93 F USEBRN 129°F
F :46− 54°C(114− No . )]13 (20 18 A) F USE *1 139G RY F USE O RN F USE (In tern al F USE YEL BRN PNK 102 L T G RNL T G RN BRN BRN F USE 158 BLF USE
U BL U
BRN BL U G RN BL U W HTG RY W HT W HT W HT YEL(In tern al co W
n n ectio n )
HT BL U BL
79 W HT
U BL U W HT W HT W HT W HT ith SUNSHADE)
(W
No . 2 (60
(1− D) A) (1− D) GPUR (1− D) (1− D) A/C CO MPRESSO R · BL O W ER MO T O R REL AY (1− B)
BL K (1− D) (1− D)
No . 58 (30 A) *2 No . 37 (30 A) *2 No . 11 (7.5 A) *2 DAT A L INK AUG E CO NT RO L 100 · ACCESSO (1−RYD) POco WnER
A) *2 ERn
SO CKET
ectio n ) (30 (1−(15− D) D)
A) *2 (19− A) [PUR] A) *2 CL UT CH REL AY T URN SIG NAL SW IT CH L IG HT A LING INK SW CO IT CH O R (DL C) (5− D) · REAR W INDO W DEF O GMICU F RO NT /REAR F O G L IG HT SW IT CH
MO DUL E (8− W HT B) L T BL U*2 · CIG ARRET No .258L(30 IGEPS HT CO No NT
(15− . 37RO
D) L UNIT No . 11 (7.5ST
18 RAT· E− DAT NNECT G ER REL AY (2− A)
39
PNK F USE 41F USE F USE 38CO NNECT O R
L TD)BL U 42 F USE 48 PNKF USE 44 DIMMING 46 43 F USE G EAR SHIF TPNK YAW · G AUG L AT ERALE CO NT / LRO O NG L ITMO UDINAL
DUL E (8− C)
G AUG E
(17− C)
(1− A) (1− A) (2− C) (5− PNK*3 (1− A)*3 56(1− A)CL IMAT E*4CO NT RO L UNIT (22− B) (2− C) 1 CO NT RO L MO DUL (Climate E ACCEL ERAT IO NBIL SENSO R KEYL ESS CO NT RO L UNIT (15− CO NT RO L
(In tern al co n n ectio n ) (In tern al co n n ectio COnMPUL ) SO RY
PUR
(W ith CL IMAT E CO NT RO L )
ST EERING CIRCUIT ANG NoL. E43SENSO (7.5 A)R*2 27 No . 16 (10 A)2*2 co n tro l) · IMMO BLIZ U ER− MO A) DUL E No .1 (10A) *2 No .22 (7.5A) *2 L IG HT ING REL AY 1
6 4 89 137 138 7 5 MICU (17− B) F USE G RN *289 L TBRN G RN F USE MICU W HT · AUDIO UNIT 111
BRN(23− A/CA,MICU
CO (17− A) R CL UT CH (21−
B) MPRESSO
80 A) 200 F(3−
USE F USE
T URNING − O F F *2 BRN *2 HO RN *2 BL U (2−CAND) H CAN BLLU (17− B) BRN · HANDS F REE
[PUR]CAN LT EL EPHO NE
CAN H CO NT RO L AUXIL
UNIT IARY
(23− B) UNDER− HO O D REL AY BO XW(1−HTB)B) (2− D)
RED No .AUDIO14 (7.5
PNKUNIT A) *2 REAR
CIRCUIT
(23− WC) INDO W L
159 No . 3 (20(In
T G RN F USE
A)
tern al co n n ectio n )
No . 17 (20 A)
F USE MICU HVACREL AY CO NT RO L UNIT
G AUG
No . 19 (20 A)
F (21−
USE
EPUR D)
CO NT RO L MO DUL E (9− B)
(1− B)
G RY 10 V ST ABIL IZ
No . 18 (20 A)
ING
F USE MICU PCM (6− B) G AUG E CO NT RO L MO DUL E (9− A)
No . 10 (7.5 A )
F USE
(9− B) PUR 57 179 180n typ e)) 181 PNK 178 O AREA L IG HT4 (13− B) 177 21 20 99
G1 INDIVIDUAL DEF NoO. G
INDIVIDUAL 3G *1,*3
ER REL AY (1− B) 101CEIL (1−MICU
ING
D) (17− (ACC)C) (17− A) CARG(W (4− ithO C)HVACAREACO NT RO L(1− (Pu D)sh b u2tto 4 3 CIRCUIT 5 1(1− D) (17− C) RED 4
91
3 6 3PNK 9 E11 1 *2 19 CARG 5 *2 3 *2(2− C)
W IPER/W ASHER 217 SW1IT CH MAP L IG HT R18 MAP L IGCHT R7 P R R8 N2 L IG HT D D3 L IG HT 2 N5 DAT
Q 131A L INK M2 M6 (8− D) C13 B34 BRNM20 Q 142 No . A28 22 (7.5 A)C41 No . 1 (10 A) C13 B34 E7 M20 Q6 A28 C41
1 23(L ED) (L ED) W HT (L ED) 53 207 (L ED) 3 UNDER− (L1ED) DASH REAR F USE/REL
125 W INDO (L ED)W AY DEF BO XOCO (3−
G G(LA)
NNECT
ED)
55*4SW
ER
YEL OIT R CH (DL(22−C) C) *5 (i− SHIFGTRN System) 54 (i−[PUR]
SHIFGTRN 200
System)
G AUG E CO NT RO L HVAC129 co n tro l (lever typFe)USE PNK F130 USE 112 ECM/PCM (ACC) (6− A) L T G RN DIMMER140 L T G RN
No . 11 (7.5 A) *2 No . 2 (60 A) *1 ECM/PCM PUR PUR 58 (W ith HVAC CO NTHAZ RO(5− L (L C,D)
ever typ T e))URN146 T URN A PUR MO DUL E (8− B)
BL U (2− BL D)U BL K (1− B) BL U BL U BL K REAR
F USENo .59(20 A) *2,*11 F USE (NEP) 144 +B SW
ST ART ER
145 L SW *11 R SW ST AT ER T URN L BLWOHT W ER 2 LMOT BL
RED
TO UT RURN R 20 AUT O MAT IC L IG HT ING /RAIN T SENSO
URN W (W
LRithith
(14− · sid D)eW
PO airb
ERag
210/
MIRRO R SW IT CH (16− D)211 T URN R FOG
(5− A) REL e AY
airb(1− B)L EF T5 o u t sid e cu rtain airb ag ) L T BL U
(2− C)
(30 A) *2,*10
(1− A) PUR 102 · KEY INT ERL O CK SO L ENO HAZ ARD *7 CUT REL AY IG NIT IO N CUT REL AYBRN *6 (WPG ith
M− sid
F INDENSO ag )R 298
RIG HT 4 (W ith sid 18 e cu rtain airb ag ) MICU81(17− C)· A/C YEL
CH INDICAT O R*13 (21−
G RY 5 2 4 HI(W ith sid e airbPASSING ag an d sid e cu rtain airb ag )
ID*3 (15− B) (ST AT ER 2
A/C CO BRN () O F FSW IT
1· REAR W INDO W DEF O G G ER SW IT CH
C)
(8 W ) No . 1RED (100(8A)W*1) 89 2 No . 1 (100 A) *1 126 No BL . 12URED *2
(10 A)DRIVER'S (8 W ) · BRN AUDIO DRIVER'S UNIT (ACC) 59 (23− A,WREAR C) BL O W ER SW IT CH (ST ART ER [PUR] PNK
PNK PUR
137 138MAIN
F AN REL RELAY AY 2
No . 24 (10 A)*2 BRNO F F
3 BL O W ER
W HT PUR (8 W ) BL U F RO NT (8 W GW )RNHT ORED HT T G W INDO W DEF REL OG AY G ERRED
1) BRN(22− D) BACK− G RNUP (STL) IG L THTBL DRIVER'S
UPNK PUR REL BLAY 1)PUR No . 2 (10BRN
U DRIVER'S A) *2 (F UEL PUMP)31 A/T G EAR
OREDR REL AY W HT
RAIN FBRN AL L F USE(Po w er d o oGrRY lo cks 2 mo tio n ) PNK ECM/PCM (5− B) F USE
(W A/T
ith
BL su KGpEAR loPO
er AIRBAG ckin SIT g )IO N INDICAT AIRBAG R120
DRIVE
BRN AL TCIRCUITERNAT OBAT R (4− ERY RY MO T O R 153F RO NT
A) A) REL AY (3− A)PASSENG ER'S
159 (3−2A) PNK ECM/PCM PO SIT IOFNUSE · REAR F O MO LTIG 170 · INDICAT
171 O R L IG HT *13 (22− C) ( ) L T BL UMICU
(1− A) PASSENG ER'S (2− D) (1− SW IT CH(2− B) AIRBAG AIRBAG 2 RIG PNK HT (2− A)
1PNK
(1.4 W ) RIG 21 G
REL AY HT (13− D) (17− 3 C) REAR L O 3
SENSIT IVIT Y G RY
AIRBAG W ASH F IRST SECO ND W ASH (1− B) AIRBAG th e tran smissioF NonIRST. 47PNK (30 A) *2 LSECO
EF T ND (7− A) 2 L EF T SIDE INDICATHT SIDE O
(3−
R A) F EF
L ROTNTSIDE
L T· LBL
REAR (O F
UBrake
pOenG : RIG
L(IG )HTHTSIDE (13− D) · (O CL p en : E CO( NT ) RO L) AUT
BRAKE
O*14 (22− A,D) LSUPER
EF T L O CKING RIG HT
ADJUSTPNK ER*3 INF L AT OW R HT GBLRN U G RN(O n 75 28 BACK− UP *11 76 RED G RY BACK− 77UP BL K PUR L T BL U MICUBRN
AIRBAG AIRBAG
PANEL L IG HT BL WU HT CURT
SUPER
YEL AIN OAIRBAG
CKING 113(1− edC)alA/C
pCURT pAIN
ressed
CO AIRBAG)
NDENSO R F AN MO · Brake
T OIMAT
RO(21−pRNed
BLalA)Ureleased UNITPEDAL
90 INF L AT O RW ASH O RNINF L AT O R*10 O1RN INF
103 L AT O R(10A) oPUR
h*10 u sin g ) 76No . 12INF F USE L AT O R 104LINF L AT O R 131 L IG HT 68 INF L AT O R INF L AT 109 se:CO NT RO L UNIT *15PO
RED 208BRAKE
L O CK REL AY PNK BRAKE BL K
or 120O2FSW
W ASHER
1 121 4 122 123 BRNW ASH No
RED
4
. 53
(Clo sed :
(10A)
(1− B)
1
IGPURHT
No . No
2 .
(7.5A)3 (20 *5A) *2 (21W ) W HT L TO R BL U L O CK
INF LPNK
ATREL O RAY(Clo se: INF L AT O R
Brake 3 p ed al released DAT ) A L INK (Clo
HVAC
SW
SITD,22−
(21−
IT CH
IO N D) L IG HTYEL L EFSUNSHADE
T F RO NT MO TL OIG R HT/LCOEF T NTFRO ROLNT UNIT
O FTFINT O
L EF N
ERMIT TO ENTN F IT CH MIST BLU RIG HT HI ON O F F L EF T O F F O N (5 W ) 31 F USE
In R p o RIG sitioHT
F USE (21W ) *2 ECM (7− A)No . 14 (7.5 A) RED *2 23 25 AM/FCOM NNECT O R(16− A)Brake RECIRCUL p ed alAT p ressed
IO N CO ) NT RO L MO T O R*15 (21− D) (21 W ) T W EET ER (21
L IG WDO HT
) O ING SPEAKER
REL AY 2
O N IG HTO F1F LT GRN O N3No . 543 (20 A) *2 BLU 4GRN (1− D) n(2−) D) 1 F USE
UNDER− DASH1 MICU
No . 1 (10 G A)RY PO W ER W INDO W MAST ANT ER ENNA SW IT CH LT· RGRN VSA MO DUL AT O R− CO NT RO L
HEADL
PO WDW ERIGEL HT
WL INDOT1IME W MAST IG 1ER SWNT IT CH 3 +B HEADL B−O FF
CAN [4] HEADL [3] IG HT 2 3 20
HEADL IG HT 2 AUXIL IARY 3 (3− · B) UNDER− DASH4 F USE 6 3 F USE (5− D)
BL U DR LWEF HTT SIDEPO W ER MIRRO DR R SW IT CH 2 2
CO NT RO L8L ER*4UNL O CK
GSIL
AUG DRE CO RO
SILL DR MO DUL E OKC
BACK
FF
UP DR *3 WKC HT DR LO SILRED AS YEL SIL RA 59 REAR W INDO W DEF O G G RN G ER SIL D)
(22− RD HO UNDER−
OD DASH 15 F USE/REL PUR
BRNAY (17− SIL
F USE/REL
D)T /G AY (1−
W B)
HT 2 RED3RADIO No . (3− 15 A) (7.5 1A) *2 DR DR
IMPACT 3 L EF T SIDE 1 REM DR REM DR L EF T SIDE UNIT T /G *7(18− B)
L O CK UNL O CK 7 1 51 1 PNK 90 118 [PUR] SW RA SW RD SW AS SW DR UNL O CK IMPACT 2· IMO
SENSO SWBIL R IZ ER− KEYL ESS
CO NT RO L MO DUL EWAUT O LoOr CK UNL O CK UNL O CK 44 UNL O CK 1 3 SW F USE HO L DER
BO X
*8 UNL
BO
10 XO CK 9 132 5 SW 6 4
L T G2RN 1 14 13
*12IMPACT SENSO R (F IRSTL) O CK 15
G AUG E PUR
9 8 HT *516 L/RED
T BL10 U HT /BL U W HT /G 1 17
KEY
13 12 W HT YEL [3] 11 [5] BL U 27 26 9 (3− B) *6
34 (2− C) 30 W HT(2− 202C) RED 18
1
14 1 1 : 53 1021 : 6 1 : 10 W HT 1:8 1 : 9 9 82 2DAYT SENSO 6 1 :RRUNNING
IME 10 2 1 : 8L IG HT S REL 4 AY 1:9 BRN 1:3 1 : 1 (SECO ND) CO NT RO 7 L UNIT (15− A)
BL K INT W HT W RN *2 BL K *3 133 BL O W ER 134 W HT L T G RN 135 213 (13− B) G RN ·
IG NIT IO NGCO AUDIO
AUG IL E CO NTE2 A E9
E BIL IZ ER− KEYLE4 E3 No . 55 AUDIO (10 A) M24 HO RN C46 HIG H/L O KEY W BEAM INF O C45 SET / HID UNITKEY A29 IG · NIT
HIG H/LIOONW
. 27PUR (30BEAM
*9A) *2 IL M (+ C28 ) IL M (− ) PADDLMOnTnEO 2R: M23 C4016 E 2 : 9
PADDL : C26 2:W 10HT C32 2 : 9 RESUME C33 SET E1
2 : 42 1
E8 2MAIN 2G
· ND MICU C22 (17− 1 D)
REL AY DO O REMO T E RO L MO DUL IMMO ESS CO NT RO *2 L UNIT R REMO T E O RN O RNDO O R + BHIDBUNIT RIG HT PO WSW ERDO ITMIRRO
CHING INT RERLG RN/W O CKHT RESET SWST
KEY No ART
IT CHING ER (In tern al co ectio 2n ) 32
2:1 2 RED 11 2 : 11 O RN 2 : 10 2 : (IN)6 ABS MO DUL AT O R− CO NT RO L
IG NIT IO N SW R IT MR+
CH B C F SR+ B DDRIVER'S IG No 1. 37 (30 A) K− L INE DO OCAN H BL K/YEL CAN L MR+ ABS61MO DUL
F SR+ ATB OG R− GCO NT RO OBL
D)LCK
R
UNIT ST R− A ST R− BBL K/W STHT R− D SVCC
SW IT CH SG ND RIG 1 RADIAT CANOHR DOCAN WGNRY L G RN UP 1
(1− A)
1 :(ST 5 ) GLAUG O CKE CO NT 1:L 4 1:1 *21 : 3 2 L O CK G ND W HT*9 3 1 1 : 7 3L: O4CK*10 14 21+2B)
DEF
: 6(19− A)*13
O ERSO (16−LL1ENO
O SO
IDE K/W L ENOHTL OID *3 APP SENSO SW
SO L (4−
IT CH
ENO B)A/B
1 IDE RED CO MPUL SO 2RYAY 24G RN 2 MICUBL K (+1B DO O RAM/F 12L O CK) (17− D) WLHT 2P L T G 2RN L T G RN UNIT L LEFT(18− G RN
T A)
BRN RO
M− FNo
RED
. 6 (10 A) *24 NoG RN
2. M− 8 (7.5 F I A)
PUR W HT
KNO B HI G RN
1 : 8 PUR 103 ST
KNO ART (FGSR
B ER3(4− B) (W ith o u t VSA)
RN
KNO B
W HT F AIL − SAF E 5 : 4 PUR3 2 BEEPERT URNING *4F AN−REL O F F 1 L T G RN
1 2 1 W HT PNK M ANT 1 ENNA EAD 1 BL U L IG HT 3 2 · HEADL
VSA G RY 4IG HT LLTEVEL BRN
1BL UING 2 · EPS
· *55 PUR
1OBRN RN
CO NT RO L UNIT (19− B)
2 :(2− 8 B) MO KNO L OB E (8− B)B2 :PG
DUL I HI PG
USE REL AY 21:L4O4 3
5 1 *3,*4 PNK CIRCUITYEL 6 : 2 YEL PUR GBRNRY L T BL BLU.U12 (10
No G RYA) *2 RED RED BL U G RY RED (0.56W ) O F F CO NTLRO T BL L U UNIT W HT O PEN
9 (55W *2
)
B1
MAIN F USE
REL AY 1) 2 : 3
(60W
FMAIN
(55W )
3 2 2 ): 5 IMMO BIL
(60W 1 IZ ER− 2 : 6 4 : 2 F RO NT PG 2M− : 7F I MAIN BL O W ER HI L EF T RIG HT L T G RN *7 CIRCUIT ECM/PCM F USE BL O W ER *6 *3SW IT(14− CH B) REL AY · SRS UNIT (20− A)
No . 20 (15 A) 8(F[7]I MAIN) (2− C) 9 [6] (2−
(F I C) 7MAIN)[8] 6 [9]G AUG E CO NT RO L 7 [8]ESS O A/C
RN CO PASSENG ER'SCKP 7 AY
62 SENSO L2EF TR PO W ER MIRRO MO T RO R CMP CL SENSO 8 REREAR DIMMING No . 30 (30 B
IMAT A) *2 BL26 REAR 2 [1] 1 [2] (6− D) REAR1 MO T O R *5 · EPS*3REAR CO19NT RO T LBL17UNIT
U1 AUT O SECO
LMATT BLNDARY
ICUAUDIO3 UNIT (23− A, C)
KEY F S−
USE NET 76
138 137 (2− A) L G 86 (2− A) IG KEY SW MO
88 DUL
*5 E S EK−AT L INE CL UT CH ACT
KEYL
UAT O R(T CM) *2 MPRESSO SE RATREL
VSA PUR
MO DUL (i−
DEF AT SHIFO R−T
G G COSystem)
ER NT ROC)
(16− L UNIT G RNCO NT RO L CIRCUIT F USE 3 K L T BL BL UKA G RY
PADO L E
BL SHIF
K T ER PNK
BL BLK U G RN PUR RED *6 BRN (2− D)W
W INDO 114 RADIAT O RBRN/YEL F AN MO3LTTO G R RN (21− A) BRN/YEL BRN/YEL (19− W INDOLW
B) L IG HT
HO ING
2S /
(2− D) ST ART ER IL INAT No .IO 1 N(7.5A) *5 NoIL . 2L UMINAT
(7.5(8− F R IO N HE
A)B)
L CO ATE MPUL
IL(7− CSO RY IO
RL UMINAT
B)
CO
(15−NW NTHT RO L UNIT
IG
A). 10 (7.5CO
GILRNL UMINAT
*2 CLIO UTNCH REL 5 AYHE IL(FLATE
SR (F+UEL
UMINAT
(2−
B) (19−
RA) PUMP)
IO NB) ILAUDIO
L UMINAT UNIT IOEVAPO
N UNIT RAT O R REAR(1− W INDO[1] W
B) (12− B, C)
*2 *3 DEF O G*3G 90ER AM/F
DRIVER'S *3 M YEL ANT *3
*2
ENNA SUB L EAD
L T G RN
FGRO NT*3 PNK*3 *3 *3 DEF*3O G G ER *3 RIG HT RAIN*2 (SENSO
SENSO
*3 GRRRN 2) *3 No . 12 (10 A)
3 5 (W ith oREL u t B)AY2 (In
su n sh tern 7al co
CO n
NT
F n ectio
USE
RO L n& ) M F USE
6 CO NT WRO HTL &
CUT RECIRCUIT T URNING
LAY 5
CO NT −ROO FL F & No A) *3
NT RO (3−
L & B) RECO(W
AYLAY ith
NT 1 RO VSA) LCABL
& 3 E 2 CO (23−
NT C)
RO L 3& T 3
EMPERAT (22−
1 B) URE 2 (35W2 ) No . 29 (10
CABL A) E YEL PO W O ER
RN (In tern al co n n ectio n ) RED REL W HT
AY BL
No U. 10 (7.5 A) RY G RY PNK G RN
REL AY O RN No . 10 (7.5 A)
O RN
(5− C)
92 L IG HT(4− UN− 66adC8 e) L O CKDO W N A2 64(3−DIMMING ST ART ERC7
B) UP MICU 6 UN− G RN F USE F RO
BL U 104 ST ARTMICU ER11 RELUN− (35W 2) (4− B)REEL 2 C5SENSOUN−
9
F R (6− B) C16
10 DEF O G G ER 2G AUG G RN E CO
M/T NT RO L PUR M/T C10
3
2 T AIL
4G AT E
C9
T RANSIST O R 48 A/T G EAR PO WSIT IO NPUT 127 71 L(2− EF T SUPER 2 RIG HT MICUPASSENG 1 F ROER'S NT114 1 5DO DRIVER'S 13 153 F USE REAR15 12MICU 159
PNK (LPURED) L O CK
DIMMING
G RN (3−(AUTB) O CIRCUIT
)ER (RED) RED REL AY CIRCUIT VO
O
(AUT RN LOT)(LOW
AG E (17− REG)DIMMING
BLUL KL AT OO CKCIRCUIT
R DIMMING
BL UNT CIRCUIT
OFF DIMMING
B)L O(HIGH)
CK YEL CIRCUIT L EF T DIMMING CIRCUIT OO
L F CK EVAPO
RIG HT REL RAT AY O10
4R (2− V ST A) ABIL6IZMO ING HO O DE O(8−
5F F 1 REEL 3 L O2CK KNO B
HT O UT 25 SHAF MICU
REARW A)
T HT
(+ B SMAL LBL
F USE
O L L1T ) REAR
CKING (17− C) SUPERPASSENG ER'S L TRED INPUT
G RN SHAF OTR RED (2− A) DRIVER'S
SUPER 1
2 IG 1 F O R PO ABS INTMO +DUL PG AT
BMAIN M−O FR I F(ST
O RCO
− SCAL
ART
137
NTER9ROEVSA
L(AMBER)
REL AY 1)(9−
UNIT 138B) F OD) R DIAL VSA(AMBER)
(2−157C) F O R L CD
PASSENG LER'S
IG (WHT HITO112
(17−
E)
1 *5 FO YEL R L CDi−67 (WSHIF HITREAR BRN2 FBL
TE) O RU YEL L CD /BL
(AMBER)K
E 214 K−
BRN/YEL
VSA TREAR
MO EMPERAT
LDUL
O WAT 1FAS OR URE
CIRCUIT
− CO NT RO L OLW ECT
UNIT
DUL SHIF
ILSENSO 2 TRB) 2 SEAT BRN SHIF T AS CHARG 4 CH DO O RMAP 3 C SENSO INDICAT
R BRAKE O R DRIVE (CO UNT ERSHAF DO O TR) (2−EG C)R DO OEG
UUAT R R VAL VE (17− D)
DO O RCK SECURIT (MAINSHAF Y SWTIT ) CH HIG H BEAM DOLO
(2− C)
ORCKING L T 127 BL U(17− D) L T GIMMO RN BIL IZ ER
PNK 116 REL 117AY 21 NEP DRIVER'S 133 RN MASSEG
SCS L INE UEL OSW
UP (CloUP
IT CH BELDO TCAN W NH SW ING
3CANIT L CIRCUIT (8− A) G RN 115 ACTVAL O R 1PO SITABS IO(5− 2 L O CKING
N SENSO R SW KNO SIDE AIRBAG
DRIVER'S UN−(F . 58 L O CK
A) *2 DO INDICAT
O RED) O R 202 C ACT IVAT IO N134 81 DO P UP O R 135 CO NTRRO L 197 DO WNN INDICAT DO ODR UP128INDICAT S OTR DO WSENSO DO O R R O R(8−
NINDICAT 56 D) PRESSURE sed
139 OREMAINDER DO [PUR]W N 129
RSYST (Clo
EM 130 sed : INDICAT O R SYST EM SPEED SENSO SW RIT 58 MAL
CH YEL F UNCT *6ECM/PCM
138
IOVENSW IT(F
3R81 (Clo4sed
CH137
ANC)
D1: INDICAT202
D) ACT UAT OIT
SENSORCH EPS R INDICAT SPEED O R SENSO (Clo sed SRSR: 3 UN− HIGINDICAT 57H 5L O CK O R L OACT CK UAT
81 O RO 2 F FA23 202 INDICAT O R
DO ORED R W HT 131 No I MAIN) (30 L
(LOED) CK KNO INDICAT
B (L ED) OR ABS (L ED) MO(L DULED)AT L OOCK R−
(L KNO CO NT
ED) B RO L (L UNIT(L ED) L (LO CKED)KNO B
INDICAT R INDICAT OA13 A24 A14 O R G RN/YEL G D3sed
502
(Clo L:T BL UO
INDICAT D2
L T GORN R (Clo sedINDICAT : (L ED)O R Do o rINDICAT p en ) O R
o 155 L O CK T EMPERAT
(L ED) URE SW IT CHCUT 1 A22
(L ED)
L O CK KNO B *2 1L O CK YEL /BL K KEY(L RED3CYL INDERSW IT CH(L
INDICAT
132
ED) RED2
OR
SW IT CH (L ED) AUXIL IARY 64 UNDER− (MR +DASH B) (19− SW A) IT CH ED) 214 SW IT CH
INDICAT
A (L ED) 1
Ho OoRd o p en ) INDICAT O R
1 (L ED) 4
INDICAT T ailg
(L3ED)u n1lo cked ) 2
O Rate (L ED) INDICAT
Do o r oL2pBL enK) *7(MILG) AUG
AMP Do oCO r oNT p en(L ) ED) Do o r o p (Len ED) ) (L ED) INDICAT O R(20 A) *2 INDICAT O R 3
No . 39 (15 A)SEQ
BRN UENT IAL G RN 105 F USE YEL(W ith /BLoKu t VSA) 1 2 1 2 1 165 2215 3(L ED) 4 1 2
ANT +192
3B (L ED)RF BLSH 1951ERF IN3 RO L2 D/ 4 192 195 1 2 3 No . 28 (L ED) BL U
SW BL IT CH K RECT IFEIER SHIF *3T MO DO DE W N BL UP K 3
VMPDR 1412 BL U BLHO K L DER (3− B) 63 ECM/PCM BL K (MRL BL UY) (5−WA)INDSHIEL 2 D 3 BL5 K G RY L T BL U BL W KHT No BRN. 30 (30 A) *2O4 RN IL L +
BL CO
U MPUL SO RY +B REAR W INDO W 166ACC
1 BL 22 K/YEL 191 UMO5 DUL EW(8− INDSHIEL
B) 4
1 191 (L193ED)
2
194 FR
L + O
189
PEN
FR
L 4−
5 [10] 3 K 1 2 5 BL OW (WTER OithR 10 HANDSF REE L TTG EL EPHO
5 :ST 4 NEARTSYST ER 3 EM) SHIF T URNING − O NF UEL W IPER REAR
BL O WWER INDO W YEL
188 185 10 [5]184 CO NT RO SHIF T INDICAT
L*2UNIT L182 OR
TO GYEL
RN /BL K 183 YEL YEL /BL K BL U YEL G RN /BL 187
147 BRN3YEL : 4 /BL K
RED 186148
VSA MO DUL AT O R− CO NT RO
W IPER
L UNIT RESIST
W MOHT
O RN OR O RN
[4] RN
YEL CUT REL AY YEL INDICAT
2 T UP/DO W
L T G RN O R
1N
L T BL YEL U MAIN YEL CIRCUIT BL U YEL L T/REDBL U UNIT AUDIO
GMICU
MO T ORN
RN/WG HT
R
YEL /RED 26 1 GRADIAT RN/W BRNHTO R 3F AN BRN REL AY G (3− PNK B)
RY/YEL
W ASHER
RESIST L EFOTMO YEL
R O RU RED
T/BL RIGBL HTINKING YEL /BLW U HT GAUT RN/YEL O MAT IC BL K BL K
PO W ER G RN/YEL
G RNMR− CIRCUIT F F DO O R 3 [1] SW IT CH PUMP 149 MICUHO RN3 [1] 150 MICU DIMMING INDICAT O R
BLK BL KNo . 44 (7.5 BRNA) (L ED) G RY BLK (L ED) BL U (L ED)K
RED
ORN BL A/TBG EAR POBLK
(L4ED) :2 7MR− (MT RBL+OKB) INDICAT
(19− (LA) ED)O R ORN DRIVE CIRCUIT L T(LBL ED)U BL
6 :(ST
K2 ARTBL ERK DRIVE CIRCUIT BL K 2 T URNOSIG NAL TCIRCUIT URN SIG NAL L IG HT ING / BL K AUDIOWUNIT INDO W G NDDRIVE BL K
ST ARTG ER
PG ND1CUTUP G ND RLL− DO WRN N RL +SVCC PL SA /BL KPLIG SBNITBIO SGNYEL
ND SIT IO N INDICAT
G2ND R DRIVE· INJECT CIRCUIT O RS EPS (5− A)LT GRN BL K BRN (23− A,C)
(17− B) SECO NDARY BLPUR K (17− 2 A,B)
REL AY BRN INDICAT BL K RG
INDICAT ODRIVE
RY
R INDICATCIRCUIT
(17−OA,B) R RAIN SENSO R CIRCUIT PUR G RN BL K MAST BRN BLKG5RY CIRCUIT
BL KRED/W HT
REL BLAY K/RED
RED W HT TGGND PUR
B RR− YEL
W HT
G ND RR+
CO IL RELL7MICU
F
AY
L −/BL
T BL U
G ND KL TB)G RN
(17−
F L + BYEL /BL
BRN O RN YEL /BL K
F R− K G ND FYELR+ 106/BL
YEL K /BL
T RANSMISSIO
K N(W RANGithNDVSA)
G
64 E SW · IT CMP
K−
CHLSENSO INE
(6− A) R RL − G NT
CO
(5− A)O RN
NDRO L RL UNIT
A28 +B
YEL
RR− G ND A9RR+REL B AYF L2)− G ND FL+B F R− G ND HFFTR+ B
A4 HF T *3
A10
W EN
T*3EL EM T EL
*3 EM A35*3 T EL EMHO*3 2S T URN A3 *3SIG NAL*3/ A20
(L ED) BRN/YEL (L ED) A31(14− REMO D) T EBRN/YEL
ER
BRN G A− NET No . 16 (10 A)
(ST
ST ATART ER ERCUT REL AY BRN/YEL
F INDIVIDUAL
MICU *436A/CL T PRESSURE
MICUBL UBRN· *12 CKP SENSO RBL (5−UA) L T BL U MUTO E RN ICO N O4RN BL KPUR SIG
G RN/RED L+T G RN SIG PNK − SIG BLSHRED
K/W
(SENSOHT HAZ W RHT 2)ARD
G NDREL BL UAY BL U/RED YEL *3 W HT /BL YK
A33 RET RACT
K− L INE W HT /REDG ND
EXT END
REMO T E DRIVE SW IT CH
VSS O UT BUS SH MICU
25REL AY 24 5 BL K G14 MAP L15IG 1BLHTK RED 6 L13T W G HT
RN 12 1 G18RN YEL O1 RN LPNKT G RN *118 VBU . BRN 18 )L T BL U6 PUR 19 G RN ECM/PCM SCT ECM/PCM (17− A,B)
REL
(ST ARTAY 1)ER MICUPUR
2) MICU RY (17− D) 2 SW IT(17− CH35 D) 3 BRN/YEL 21 4 NoIG 1 ( 7.5A
14 2 310 *2ST S 23 ST EN 25
No . 5BKAND A) *2
VSSAMT (SO1UNDER) W EN CANH () CANL DIMMING () CIRCUIT
(3−
(4−A) B) (17− D) (17− D) No . 33 (15SW A) *2 IT CH G RN *3 F USE CPU/PO No . W 43ER (7.5SUPPULA) Y CIRCUIT
B11 / B6 161 B10
(10B9 3 B5 (5− C) (In tern al A12co n n ectio n ) (5− A4C) MICU A3 162 CIRCUIT A5 A16 A15 C3
CANH
(Bu ilit in to th e G 603 CPU/POG W ERGSUPPUL Y CIRCUIT (3− A)/ MICU
CO NT RO L L ER AREA G 502 Y CIRCUIT 4 G RN/YEL G RN/YEL
12A/C 1 G 501 2 16A1 su n sh5ad e No sw.itch16 ) 7 NoA/C. 2 G RY GNo
BL K
502A2
. 3 BL K/YEL 10No . 4 8 19 IG NIT
[G
IO NBLCO
601]
U IL S (5− C)
CO 22NT RO LRN L ER
601 BRN/YEL
21
AREA NET W O RK CO NT RO L G
L 301
ER 13 (17−C) 14 PURNET G 602W O RK CPU/PO CO NTWRO ERL SUPPUL
11
L ER
L T G RN / 27 BLA/C K/W CO HT MPRESSO R CL UT CHWREL HT /RED
83
AYMICU (3− B) MICURED/BL
(17−C) (IG 1 BACK U L T ) *8 (17− B) BRN/YEL (8− D) LGT501 G RN
L IG HT ING
G 602
REL AY 1
106 124 [10]
198 [9]199 1 [2] [G 603] [G 302]G 604 CO NT RO L L ER AREA NET W O RK CO NT RO L L ER (17− D) BL K BL K 2 602 [G 604]
G 401 CO NDENSER RADIAT O R G 202 CO MPRESSO
G CHRY REL PUR R G RY
BRN L T[1]BL U G 401BL U G 401 O RN G 301102 PUR ST ART BL
L TG UER 201
G RN CUT REL AY NoG. 602 *2 BL K O RN PUR G 604 G REAR NoW . INDO
20 (15WA)
16 F AN REL17 AY 27 26 2 [G 401] L6
2 T GCLRN UT 5 AY 2 4 2 3 8 7 3 4 O RN 5 6 G 9202 10 10 ( 7.5 A ) 6 7 8 9 10 G 501 11 24 25 G 502 200 G 501 7 B36 8
37 G 6015 GDEF603O
A [G 202]100 G601 F AN REL AY (In tern al co n n ectio n ) G601 MICU HO RN YEL (W ithMICU secu rity(ST o rART
su pER er loREL 200AYg )1)
ckin (W ith su p er lo ckin
MICU g ) YEL /RED N CO(W NTG ithRN/Wsecu HTrity) G 101 36 37 MICU (W ith*3d river's d o o r MICU lo ck G RN/YEL
*3B)sw itch ). 29 (10REL *1AYG G ER
(3−ΩB) G 502(3− B) BRN GG601
502 (W RED
(3− B)
ith su n sh ad e) BL U YEL 9 SW
(17− D) ITUNDER−
CH DASH F USE/REL AY BO X (2− A) (17− B) (3− A)
F USE
(2− C) 124
TBRANSMISSIO
(17− D) G 502 MICU
RO L MO DUL E (T CM)G RY
L T G RN 84 (17− D) *9 (17− MICU BL K 7 (17−
17 NoG603 A) *3
18 (2− A)
(17− A) *7 A)
157CANBL K KL270CAN ΩBL K
RNH PURA13
470
RED Ω
PG VB 1.2 YEL kΩ
14W HT
3.9 GGVA
kΩ
RY
RN158
10
L TkΩ
36 LBL
OW A4
UL T BL RA1+GURY A8159 LA3IGRA1−HTO RNS−(W O Nith o uPNK t HID) A4617
CRUISE
L A1+ A28G RN WL
L T G RNT /SA15
A1−
CRUISE G ND
BL26 K VS1 LBL
66 KFRO
FBRN VS2
NTA16ECM/PCM BL U (IGREAR P) (5−A30 A)
LM−
RED A1− YEL LGA1+ GM+101 G RY A38 RA1− LA10
T 7BL U RA1+ G RY RA2−
RN 6OA35 RNA34 RA2+PNK T /S 15 G(W NDith
A48G VS1RN 34 VS2
HID) A47 C13 M−RED C11 C14 RSA+ M+ B38
L CA1−(W ith oLuCA1+ t au2 to matic RCA1− lig3h NoB2. g55(10
RCA1+
tin system)A ) *2B30 BACK− UP L IG HT SW (W ithIT CH G
B19
101
au to(13− B18B)
matic lig h tinLgYEL system) 4*4 G RN BL U(Bu 7*4197
F USE
lb typ e)(1− B) B34 G RY *4
BLC10 O113 BL U
A9 A14 114 C5 PNKT EMPERAT C6 INDICAT
URE 11118 O R A43C7 CO NT RO LG W401
HT A33 L A2+
C8MAIN
INDSHIEL D/
YEL202 A2− − CAN
F O G LC32 IG HT
T RANSCEIVER PUR
F O G L IGREAR HT
160
C31
23RN
B− CAN T RANSCEIVER
RED A25 SEL 197 ECTA19 /
L T G105
5V No . 47
REDA26
(30 A) *281 A18
PUR A36BLIARY
AUXIL K 202L SA−
UNDER− L SA+
DASH(A/T )RSA− L EF T B4 BL K RIG HT
F USE B36G RN
L4BS− L BS+
C46 BL U202 G RY
L BS1− HT BS1+PNK
WC48 2 57
A1 G NDST RL D C2 NT RO L BL WSDNP C3− GSUPP F USE C1 HO L DER VCC1 S− DN B2 S−EG UP EG RP
O RN *2 L TST BLRL U Y G RN PG M− F ILI L − CANINDICATL O R CAN(L
ST S RE HIL
ED) D
L + ST EN S− INDICAT
NET IG 2
BKAND O[G RVSSAMT
REAR 302]INDICAT
W INDO ACC O R C2
WACS IMO FLPR
C3INDICAT
CAN C1OR CAN VSSO
INDICAT
H UT OWRINDO B1 W T eva T AC
B2 SG
Rr 6DEFRESET INFCAN
B−
SW
ETCO
O
IT CH
ST
−C2
CUT VART REL
ER
BL AY W RED MAP B1SRSSG 1
UNIT SEL ECT / 28 NC A/C CO NDENSER FFRONT AN(2−RRELA) AY (3− F B) NT
RO REAR
VCC2 NM Rr DEF IG 2 SG
25 2 ILBREAK
L + PEDAL
No . 20 (15 IGSRS1A) VO L SRS VOIG LG
*1
P 101
*1MAIN
INJ1REL AY (L
N )2*1
ED) INJ2 INJ3
A )L*1INKNo . 21 ( 15A ) *1
(L ED) INJ4
W ASHER (L ED)MO T O R (L ED) CKP (L ED) W IPERCMP
MICU VCC5
RLalGY501SW ITAPSB CH SG CIRCUIT
5 GRYVCC4
ECM/PCM
APSA SG 4ECT
SEL IL L UMI IL L UMI *1 RESETNo . 24 ( 10A ) *1
SO 2SHT C
PO W ER W INDO P ASW SHIFS E62 NGESHOR'S
T F2S O G L IG· GRY HT KS
HEADL IG HTFLOEVEL G BRN
L IG HT CO NTLRO LG2
IGLHTUNIT ING (W ith HID) (14−
LT BLU RL
L IG HT B) ING
BLU Y PO SIT IO N
F USE ECM/PCM G ND 1DO No WG N. ND
1 ( 210A UP) NoCH . 22 L ( INE
7.5A ) CH NoUEL
ECM/PCM
(F
IG. 14 NIT( IO 7.5A No .AT 56PDAT
( 30A (11− C) W INDO W SHIEL ATDP SS+ W IPER
AT P D3*5
MO TOR (In tern W IPER/W ASHER F SW IT CH (ST ART ER SENSO (+ ) R NoECT. 5(−( ) 10A ) SENSO RO RR85SHIF
REAR ING No . 29 ( 10A MAIN ) *1
(6− A) (− K− W F)EN KEY PUMP)
USE SW IT MO CH DE MET F USE CO NNECT L F S−OFRUSE L F S+ L IG HT S RF S− RF S+ (17− B)D) co n n ectio F LnBC ) (11− A) SEL ECT RBC SEL ECT DRIV REL SELAYECT 1)L IGRL BC SEL RRBC SEL
T ERECT SW
− IT CH SHIFRCBC T PADDL E REL
TSHIFAY L
SHIFT +GTRN
(P/W ) S E AT HE ATE
INDICAT REL AY T · RIG LLRP−
IGHTHTHEADLBLL KRP+
REL
SHIF IGTW AYHT LRRP−
EVEL ING RRP+
REL MOAY T O1SET R (W ith o u t HID) REL AY
(14− 2HT
A) O DS SW IT CH
(2− D) ( ) F USE MICU () *3F USE ) TL
DATACHO (+
A L.MET
INK ER
B) *1SPEEDO RVS
ER(DL F UEL
C) ATGPAUG P D) EAT P R (L EDx3) AT P N (i−AT SHIFP DT System)PNK AT P 2-1 YEL
MO T O R BL (11− UB) FW D (11− *1 (3−DIRECT A) E GR'S
VBSO AUG HT
LSE ECOSATNT RO
SUPPL Y L DAT OMO FAT
P2SW PADDL
USE LRINK E SHIF
ECM/PCM F USE OSG P3SW (UPSHIF SHIF T ER
CH) SHA
SUPPL
(0.84 WY) (13−SHB D) T O (13−
SHCRESUMED) INDO W CANCEL SHD AT LLF IG
TT G RN S FGUSE LT G SW
REDRNIT CH (13− C)
MICUA (1− B) 2 (2− D) G1Y E MICU
No (3− (15−
52A)(10A) 1 (2− D) 1 (2−
2INDICAT OYIL O RL1VLDRIVE CIRCUIT 2Y T F (AT P AL S) *4 T2C AL1. T1L( 10A ) 2
CL
LPG
SW 2 1 RED 1 G RN SG No PUL SE
2 . 5 (10A) T PSB1 HE ATE
O
R(LDUL
N
S2EDx2)
WEITCH (7.5(2−
O
(DOC) WONSHIF TMO SW T IT
O RCH) (3− A) PUL SE T(1−
PUR
SW D) ITDIRECT SOW N ITCH
PUR MO · R L EF (0.56T HEADLW*7) MO IG
TO HT
DEF R LOEVEL G G ER ING (1− MO D)T O R (W ith o u t HID) G RN(1− (14−D)(L A)
EDx3) (1− RN
B)IG PL S3 L(In A3MICU
(17− D) 94EL D 28 (17− D) NEP CO
SL NNECT
S(17−
F USE D)O R (5−*2 D) . 31 (7.5MRL
A) NoDRIV A) .*2 SUBRL
*2 IG 1ET CS 3 ET CSRL MICU Y
AM/F M B AL No G1 SG 3 T PSA F USE No21.452 (15 A) *2,*7
VCC3 MO ET CSNo M+ . 1 CO NNECT
A) ET CS R(DL
M−18C) BKSW BKSW NC CRMT CL S · HEADL IGMICU HT L EVEL SWB21IT CH
ING IG SWPL ITS1 CH (W ith o u t HID) (14− IGMICU
PLA)S2 IGtern
HTG ING
NDal REL AYPL
IG 2 S4
29
16 97 18(DL C) (2− C)31 101 No . 1 (10 96 B23 36B14E R'S No 95 S
3714E(7.5
B15 AT HE
C41
A)B13 BRN
ATE 38R B22 39
10
B17 (17−
ENG
67
INE CL
C)
ANT
O IL
ECM/PCM
IMAT
ENNA124Ω
L EVEL
*8CO(IMO
EB29 NT 6
23
SENSO RO F2PR) B16
L UNIT
R(7−
(6−142
A)
B)43
(A/T
F 1
USE [3]
)
1 A48 19 2 141
B2 (2− C) B11
(8− B)A1 16
B10 B3
(5− C)B8 83
B32 B21 108 B9 17
1 52 2 B11 4 1152
[3] B27 312 (17− B,C) 13153 2 14 3715 B12 (17− B,C)740 B28 41 25 2 co n n ectio n ) (17− 150 B,C)
MICU BL U MICU (5− D) RED A/F SENSO F USE R W HT F USE W HT /BL K *9B47 BL K A29 *2,*8 BL K BRN BL U GYELRYREAR B1 BL KB9 1 116DO O*1 B8ECM/PCM 1(ST B20 RLAY (15−A)B31
D) (7− B30 G12A− NET
203D) NoA24 *1 204 A29 A28 205 A7 A22 177 178 C1 179 A21 B45
G RN ART ER(1− B) RED182 12 IC
B46 C44 184 C43185 C20 C21 C12 188 C4 C3 G RN A42 A41· DRIVER'S R A43UNL O CK REL C) C15 C16
1 1 C17 A/C PRESSURE
(17− . 3AL T ERNAT O (17−
R C)BL K IC 85 IC REL AY (1− B) IC (3− A) IC 200 180 2.6KΩ 159181 *3
T BL U 1 ST IC
183ACC A/C
26IG NITPRESSURE
IC IO NGSW 85IT CH (20186 A)
(ST ) PNKIC 187 YEL 139 URED24*3No . 15
BL U BL UG RN 23213 SUSPENSIO
RED N
29U*3 · F
No . 45 (15A)
UEL L ID L O CK ACT UAT O R (15−17C) 167 G RY 169 BUS SH L 168IG HT
F USE 4 (In tern al co 1 n n ectio n5) . 622 (7.5 A)3*2 222 18 19 BRN AUDIO 20 RED O RN T E SW L T BL U 1 G RN 3 4 2 14W HT29 /G 1RN 15 L T BL LU 3 184 YEL *3 SW (2−IT 1B)CH SEL 3RNECT /RESET 4 BL No . 41 *3 ST RO KE BL F USE
· 3DRIVER'S RNO13 HO RN CRUISE CO NT HORO RNL CO SW IT CH
202 (1− A) No*2 CUS HION BACK REMO
102 IT CH BL U/RED PNK 30B) 18MICU BL K /INF O RMAT IO N SW IT CH 154 *1 W HT SENSO R (1− B)1 (L HO DO R L O CKOACT RNHO UAT RNO
(HIG H) 27
215
R (15− 5C) 159
28 217
(L OINDICAT
W) MBINAT IO N SW IT CH
No . 26 (10 A) F USE (2− D) O RN 68 F UEL PUMP (4− (7.5 A) *1 (10 A) OW) 144 Rr DEF O R128 (HIG H) MICU L T G RN
215 L EF T REAR 159 RIG HT REAR L EF T F RO NT PUR RIG HT F RO NTK DAT D) A LM− INK L EF T REARLOW RIG HT REAR HIGH 1 L EF T 75 F RO NT 2 RIG HT F RO NT DAT A L INK LOW G RN HIGH 1
3 L T BL U REC F RS 98 S− CO M MO DE 4 MO DE 13 MO WDE HT 2/BLMO DE 1 M−
UP DO DEFW N11M− VENT A/FF RO SENSO NT R (5− CO NNECT CO
O RO LM−UP HO T AMD− DO WPN S5V L EF T L T GM18 RN 2 UP HUMDO W N Tr RIG HT MICU 2 F USE T su BL F USE
n U/RED T CO
am2 NNECT O R 1 :BL
MICU 4PU/W HT 29
G 503BL U/BL K G RN/W HT W HT G RN/RED
SW
W HT /G RED/YEL
RN
L IG HT (LGED)
*3 W RN/YEL
HT W HT /BL K G1 W No HT ./BL
*6 O RN *6
L T BL UGBL RYU BLPASSENG ER'S YEL BL U RED REAR O RN G RN BL U PUR BL K YEL REAR BRNBL U (17−PNK D) (2−No C) . 2G(7.5 (1− B) (17−D)D) RED MICU L T BL BLUU *8 DATYEL A L INK tern al G RY YEL ECM/PCM 21U(15 A)
G RYL T G RN BL tern
(In U/BL G al
K
RY
co n n ectio n )
W(InHTtern al
co n n ectio n ) 8 ELG LRY T
ECT9
(In tern al
G RN
RO W
NIC HEEL
co n n ectio n ) [L T G RN]PNKSPEED
(InYELtern al BL U/BL K(InW
SENSO
co n n ectio n )1 R 30
tern
HTal RED/BL K PNK
co n n ectio n ) 29 28 27 10 11 PO
U G RYG RN
ANT W ENNA
ER
BL
L
U/YEL
(5−
EAD D)PNK O RNRED RED
13
BRN
12 5 3 L T
PO G W RN ER W HEEL SPEED PNK SENSO R 24 20 PO W ER G RY
RY (In
19
A)tern al (5−
O RN 22
2(In
No . 6 (10 A)co n n ectio
: 2P
*2 2 al
tern
G RY 1 : 3
(In tern alO RN YEL
(17− C) CO G
NNECTRN O O RRN (In
PNK
co(12−
tern al REMO T E SWGIT
AUDIO
n n ectio
(In
RY CH (InB)
(6− tern al BL U G RY PUR
T L E TH BL U co n n ectio n206
) n) F ROco NTn n117 ectioBL K n )L O 5 CKING RELBL K (15−2B) G 501 C)K1 A)8 n ) co n n ectio 139
6 n) coBLn nK 7ectio n )
T HRO PULTSER 2RED ENG 3 INE O IL OFF OFF GWRN INDO RED W PUR W HT O F F OFF LTW GINDO
RN W OFF
BRN PNK O RN
OFF W INDO W
GBRN
82 35 L T G RN LT G · RN SUPER PUR ECM/PCM (ST S)LAY (7−
T 86GA) RNU (DL
BL BLUD) BL
1 U 1391 (InBL tern U al
CO NT RO L SYST EM O RN 12 SW IT CH(SUBRL Y) (5− A) SW OFFIT CH BL K SW IT L TCH RN151 W HT L T BL U G RN G RY 30 2 : 1PNK · REAR SUPER BRN L O CKINGYEL REL AY : 2 (15− BLC) SRS RED
(5− ]OFF
1
G RY PNK BL K BL K G RN BL U PNKBL RED L T CO BL UNT RO L LBLEVELUPUR SENSO RO RN W HT 2 2 ECM/PCM RED 3 W HT /RED W HT /G2RN W HT /BL U 1 G 202BRN/YEL PUR1 G RN 2 RED/BL K RED G 602 2 3BL UL T1 G RNYEL 3/RED 4 1 YEL BL U L T G RN125 BRNG· 301 BL K PURL O CKING1ACT UAT BL IG
K NITUNIT IO*3N(VB) [W (20−
HT 1A) : 13 1 : 12 1 : 11
PNK*3 L T G RN*3L T BL U*3 G 501 G ND MICU 4No . 39 1(20GA)AUG 2*2 E 3 BL K
RED coLn −
IL n ectio n )
W HT No . 10 (7.5 A) *2 (ET UCS) PNK 1
2 BL U PNK BLLUT GLRN YEL 2 PUR 1 1 DRIVER'S
PASSENG ER'SO
SUPER RN O RED
O RCO (15− BRN C)
OILR REL (15−AY
G 203 F USE No . L23T (10 BL UA) RELG*2RN AY 1 L T G RN G RY W HT YEL 3 PNK1 2 BRN G 402RED *3 A19 PUR 1 RED G RN BL U W HT 1T BL U [G 604] BL U PUR BL
PNK U
BL U 3RD [G· 451] BL SUPER
U L CLL7UT 2 : 1 ACT
CKING
CH UAT C) G RN2 : 6 2 : 5 YEL 2 :4 8 (17− D) W HTCO NT RO L 8
(In tern al co n n ectio n ) G RYA34 A35 *4 ANT
A14 ENNAA7 SUB L EAD [B20] 4 7 8 2 *2
CL UT CH BL K M14 M15 Q 7 2ND *2 · RIG HTBLREAR U 4 BL
SUPER U O CKING
PEDAL BL K 8O RN
ACT UAT
R18 2(1− *3
O RA)(15− C) R5 2No . 1 5No 14 . 2*3 W HT
9 No . MO
3 DUL
ACS *3E No36 .*34 DEF
Rr
(2− C) 140 107 2 MICU (+ 5GB203
C29 M10
No . 10 (7.5 A) M11 M12
SW IT CH(SIL ) 2 M13 Q 5 GNT 401 REARG 502 CL UT CH REAR
No . 7 (10HO A) RN SW IT CH CL UT CH
· L EF T REAR 3 RL YIO N56CO
No . (30 A)
L T BL U L T BL U 3 2 HAZ ARD) (17− 138B) 137 2 5 139 (Clu tch p ed al 5F RO[G T RANSMISSIO N SUPER CL1UT CH LPOO CKING
SIT IO
ACT UAT NACT*3
O UAT 1 B)
87R (7−PCM
O R (15− 8 D) 1 IG NIT IO N CO IL1 IG NIT9*4 IO N CO IL IG NIT (8−IO B)N*3CO IL IG1*4 NIT IL
DRIVER'S
+B PO W 81ER W INDO IG 1W MO T O RL T G RN
ACC 211 L IGT 1G RN W IP F RO NT PASSENG (5−ER'S
F USE
IP F R W IP F RpF ROIP TNT IP F R W IP RIGRR HT302] SIDETRR INDICAT F ROW RIP L EF T SIDE T RANSMISSIO RIG HT SIDE N (12− B) + B HO 2 RN BRN(Bh ilt in SW 2IT CHT RANSMISSIO (VBSO L ) (6− B)
SHIF T IG 1210 RED T O RQ F RUE 145
W 69IP F RECM/PCM
SENSO R146 F R(ET W IP CSRL Y) RR 2W
B)EPS
IP MO T O R F R(2− WC) Wressed FSIDE
R Wse
:Clo O RQ UE SENSO R
SEAT BEL T 6 IG 1 F L UID SEAT EPS MO
1 BEL T
TOR FYEL
L UID P/W 5118 2SHIF to T3th:4e DUL N +B ST O P
BACK UP METNo ER. 22 (7.5 A) *2 L O CK F R W IPERBRNW HTW/BL ASHER BL K LO HI SEATAS SIT1T ING SW IT CH 3 HI&L O INT &L O MIST L
Clu
EF
tch4 W p ed ASH al G
2 ND
1
SEAT W5IP 3
BEL T W ASH (0.98
42 W INT) O
BL VO W 3LER
BUCKL 6+ MO E T O R BACKPRESSURE 5 BUCKL E 2 PRESSURE 5 RL Y 41CO NTSO (O p
RO LLENO
en
1MOpID
3E) 6 SHIF T 1 SHIF T SHIF T
SMAL L L T SW
RIG HT HEADL A13 IG HT L EVEL 2 ING A4 MO T O R F USE A32 A24 RED 2K BLL TKBL SEAT BEL T
:O p en ) (W IPER) BUCKL SW E 25ith secu rity)26SW IT CH Clu tch ed al 1 SO L ENO ID SO 3 LVE ENO ID 2(W SO ith oLVE
uENO ID AT F BL3 K
126 *1 BL
(2− U
*2D) RED BRBL SOU/W
CRUISE
L ENO
HTW CO
IDHT
NT /REDBL
RO L CO K/BLMBINATU W HTN A14
IO *1
W IND U G RNBL
L EF T REAR
D3
U BRN SEL G RY
D2
ECT DAT
6 YEL
/RESET
A L INK
D1/RED
/ RIGNNECT
CO HT O R G RY
15 SW
G RN 79SW16 SWreleased
BUCKL GSW RNE *9
SW 3
87 REL AY SW IT CH 19 L T SW IT CH 11SW IT CH(W
*2 HEAT ER VAL VE A)
p ressed VAL VE B VAL C VAL t 3secu
D rity) 2
T EMPERT URE
3 2
A/C
No . 49 (15A) T EST No . 52 (15 A) *2 No . 3563(15A) SHIEL D W INDO W · TO AIL
*1F FL IG HT · IMMO BIL IZ ER− KEYL ESS SW IT CH BL U G RN YEL
IL L + 13 SCT Y No . 24 (10K− A)G RY RADIATSW
L INE O RIT CH + B GC)
(12− RY
co nACC 12HT T AIL ANTL IG+ HT
70 B RF
INF LSHO RMAT69
(DL
70No SC).IO RF
(5−
50 N (15A)
D) (L
SW
IN IT121 CH(IG 1 ET CS)123 122
+NT B RO4L GUNIT RY (15− ACC SWG RY IT CH No 4*8. 36 (15A) 3 *1 1 *2 HF T HF T 1 L IG HT T EL EM
No . 8 (7.5 150A) COTNT BRN
ELROEM149
L
O F F BRN (Clo sed : 4 2L IG HTBRN S 3 (20− 2 DEF .3H/D BRN SENSO R BRN BL U BRN BL K BL U
No . 22 (7.5 A)
F USE CO T ACHO MET ER1 L T 98
NDENSER
G RN F AN 4 1
(In tern
6 FT alHERMAL
USE
PRO 7
T ECT
n ectio n )
1540Ω OR 2
W (L
8 ED) 3 (12−
9
IG
B)
4
HT
ECM/PCM
2· *5 W × 4) F USE
ECM/PCM
(6− 5A)ED) 10
(5− A)
4
CO
MICU (17− 7 B)
A)2
F USE No1 . 57 (30 A) No MUT
. 7 (10 E 16A) *2 ICO
L T G RN N 14
(0.56 SIG +
T EL EM
7
PANEL BL
SIG USH W HTF UEL Clu tch p ed DRIVER'S
88
al F UEL
BL · K SRS
BL DOK/YELO R (VA)
UNIT BL K/YEL
A) SW ITBRN
CH BL K/YELBL K
AUT OBRNT URN BL K/YEL BRN BL K/YEL
L AUT
IG HT O T URN
(2−
EPS A) F ANCO NNECT O R 3 TOR (2− A)M− 108 (1.96 W HTW BL ) G 1RY SIG − BL K
C, 22−) B) UNL
L EF OGTCK AUG RELE AY (1.96 W × 3) AIRBAG O F F RIG HT O R (20− D) BL K
EL D MO PG FI A/F SENSO
*3 R U MICU
BL RED (+ B HO RN) ABS(17−
M− (2− C) DUL AT O R− CO NT ROG
VENT
MO
A) L RY ST· O EERING
CL
RNIMATG E EARBO
CO S5V NT RO X L UNIT G RN (2− A) PNK AG RN BL U F REE F USEB− CAN BL K K O UT STWSIDEHT
EERING G EARBO 31X BL O W ER MO T OTRANK (21−
2 B, released T AIL L·· IG PASSSENG
HT ER'S TINDICAT
AIL L IG HT UNIT UNITW )
(0.84
1 (1−LA) CO73 NT ROMO L G T402
OR
AUDIO
4 3 UNIT 2 MAIN 71 1(1470Ω ) REL AY2
G 302 1EL ECT RO NIC T HRO · UNIT TTLE (W ith o u t VSA) AL T ERNAT O R · (W ith climate 1co n troBL BL UE 1T ORIG O TG H 301 IG HANDS
1 IN-CAR SCS SSR *4,*6
1 REAR SENDING
O PDS UNIT *4 3(20−
EF T UNIT 1 301]
[G RIG HT 4
CO NT RO L SYST1EM(18− 3 l)(22−
TK B)NT HT T EL EPHO NE (2− C) 2 MICU AIR L EF TER UNIT
1 1:4 (L ED) UNIT D) (L ED) 7 . 531(10 LA) 12 2*2T L EF 17 T 1 RIG HT
DRIVE 2 *3 REL *4AY 1 (1−NBRNA) A)74 RR *3 (4− A) HEADL IG HTAMD− L EVEL LHFEF T
ING T RANSCEIVER 72 TL EMPERAT
UNITnLIGHT URE 1 4T CENT RIG HT 4 L EF T 4 No EF
F RO NT (19− A)1 F RO NT
CIRCUIT F R213
1 L EF T
FR RIG
F R HT (F IFMAIN) R
D
RR (ET CS) (S)RR *4CO NT RO L EPS M− DEF
REL AY
CO NTR+ RO L UNIT RR (19− B) LPST RG CO INDICATOR
ICENSE RO L L ICENSE HEADL
(In tern COal NTco
IG HTRO L
n EVEL
nSENSO ectio RING) D) CO NT RO L BRAKE T5HRO
UNIT FTLTUIDLE 2 EMPERAT URE
PARKING F RO NT
SEAT BEL T BL K F RO NT2 : 2LIGHT REAR INDICATOR L ICENSE SIDE L ICENSE
PO SIT IO N BRNPO SIT IO N 159 L T BL U A) *2R6

Honda Jazz Fit 2007 To 2014 Workshop Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Honda Jazz Fit 2007 To 2014 Workshop Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

General Information

1. Remove the cover (A) from the bumper. Front bumper:

Y (ELD) 3 No. 22 No. 12

Y (ELD) 2 Y (ELD) 1 Q8 B17

WHT RED DRIVER

ALTF ALTL ALTC

B47 B46 B45

5. Remove the alternator.

Bearing driver attachment, 42 x 47 mm

8. Remove the rotor.

10. Remove the rear bearing using the puller as shown.

15. Remove the stator.

Standard (New): 23 mm (0.91 in.)

Rotor Slip Ring Test

32. Pull put the pin.

3. Apply a pressure of 93−123 kPa (0.95−1.25 kgf/cm 2 , 14−18 psi).

9. Disconnect the lower radiator hose (A).

12. Remove the upper radiator hose.

18. Install the lower radiator hose (A).

27. Install the right side splash shield.

8. Remove the coolant reservoir (A).

10. Disassemble the fan shrouds.

11. Install the right side splash shield.

4. Install the harness holder (A).

5. Install the coolant reservoir.

6. Install the water outlet.

7. Remove the water pump (A) by removing the five bolts.

AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD

A/C CONDENSER FAN ASSEMBLY ENGINE COOLANT RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY

RHD model: A22 RHD model: A33 RHD model: A36

LT BLU RHD model: BRN RED

RED GRN BLU

ECT1 SG2 SG6 ECT2

RED/WHT GRN/YEL YEL LT GRN

ENGINE COOLANT ENGINE COOLANT

4. Check for continuity between the terminals in according to the table.

11. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders.

4. Remove the cylinder head cover.

4. Remove the cylinder head plug.

7. Install the new cylinder head plug.

8. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) pulse plate.

Crankshaft pulley holder, 50 offset 65

3. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt. Do not use an impact wrench.

Bearing driver attachment, 52 x 55 mm

Valve spring compressor

Valve guide reamer, 5.525 mm

Valve Guide Installed Height:

Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

Valve Seat Width

Intake Valve Stem Installed Height

Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height

2. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid connector (A).

4. Remove the torque rod. M/T model

5. Remove the torque rod bracket. M/T model

8. A/T model: Install the shift cable cover.

16. Install the A/C line bracket mounting bolt.

8. Remove the transmission mount. M/T model

8. Remove the dipstick, then remove the dipstick tube.

5. Install the oil pan.

Connecting Rod End Play

Crankshaft End Play

Bearing driver attachment, 28 x 30 mm